CONTENTS OF VOL. I.

[FIFTH SERIES. ]}

NUMBER I.

I. Observations upon Prof. Ernst Haeckel’s Group of the “ Physe-

maria,” andon the Affinity ofthe Sponges. By W. SavitLE Kent,

SCOR LALLS NS et OS OMENE I % SA eG ng a ae a are a

II. Notices of British Fungi. By the Rev. M. J. Berxetry,

M.A., F.L.S., and C. E. Brooms, Esq., F.L.S. (Plates III. & IV.)

III. Notes on Sessile-eyed Crustaceans, with Description of a

new Species. By the Rev. THomas R. R. STEBBING. (Plate V.).

TV. On the Young of Pityriasis gymnocephala. By Dy. F. Brie-

ReMi SM eee te cl aletes asters arene alah cnclaye(utp> sisioie ais «dec ee cles

V. Characters of new Genera and of some undescribed Species of

Phytophagous Beetles. By Josepnu 8. Baty, F.LS. ............

VI. On the Minute Structure of the Corals of the Genera Helio-

phyllum and Crepidophyllum. By H. ALLEYNE NicHoxson, M.D.,

D.Sc., F.L.S., Professor of Natural History in the University of St.

MRE MIN oat PN AN 5 t's SRR vy oats std bn'sh "9 Sin aatnly fe EAE 6 ehh Cae A ATT AO 8

VII. On Two New and remarkable Species of Cliona. By W. J.

SUmEase MAG, eC. Cblates T,-a& TE)... 53 «pels dante cae oes’

VIII. Description of a new Species of Spatangide. By Epear

A. Suita, F.Z.8., Zoological Department, British Museum ........

IX. On Wagnerella,a new Genus of Sponge nearly allied to the

Physemaria of Ernst Hickel. By C. MErEscuKowsky. (Plate VI.)

X. Descriptions of new Species of Heterocera from Japan.—

Part II. Noctuites. By ArtHur G. Butier, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e...

XI. Description of an apparently new Species of Hornbill from

Cochin China, of the Genus Anthracoceros. By D. G. Exxtor,

TES 8 i oA Re ere eee acer cach rrr

XII. On the Solitaire (Didus solitarius, Gm.; Pezophaps solitaria,

Strkl.). By Prof. R. Owen, C.B., F.R.S., &e. (Plates VII. & VIII.)

Page

iv CONTENTS.

. Page

XIII. Description of a new Species of Water-bird from Cochin

China belonging to the Genus Porphyrio. By D. G. Ex.iot,

TAME OG CGS cs sc Mas 4 abe fi within a ¥'n ight olen is os « 6/a2 eee 98

New Book :—The American Paleozoic Fossils, &e., by 8S. A. MILLER 99

Preliminary Notice of a Species of Phasmide apparently possessing

all the Structural Arrangements needed both for Aerial and

Aquatic Respiration, by J. Wood-Mason, F.G.S.; Auriferous

Sand in the Neighbourhood of the Seychelle Islands, by H. J.

Carter, F.R.S. &c; On a new Marsupial from Australia, by

Prof. R. Owen, F.R.S. &c.; Metamorphosis of the Cantharis

(Cantharis (Lytta) vesicatoria), by M. Lichtenstein ..... 101—103

NUMBER II.

XIV. Notes on British Spiders, with Descriptions of some new

Species. By the Rey. O. P. Campriner, M.A., C.MLZS., &e.

(Lats ade). 5 sae sacs ose elapse tay a ot ele Wels sbetetee te eee 105

XV. Mr. James Thomson’s Fossil Sponges from the Carboniferous

System of the South-west of Scotland. By H. J. Carrer, F.R.S.

je, (Babes 1 & Key ice ein ns ate nals oe oreo leMeim peepee eee 128

XVI. Notes on new and little-known Mantide. By Prof. J.

Woop-Mason, Deputy Superintendent, Indian Museum, Calcutta... 143

XVII. Revision of the Plagusiine. By Epwarp J. Mrsrs,

F.L.S., F.Z.S., Assistant in the Zoological Department, British

AVVRCRD ERTS sce, ch rscovevs tare cyatesa/ate ia cis aos, 6 ihioers a's e+ se oe ee 147

XVIII. Entomological Notes bearing on evolution, By RapHaEL

Mintel OC, LUGE UG: ore iss loae wears (a> cre sveree ma sels Eiae ee 2)

XIX. Descriptions of new Species of Heterocera from Japan.—

Part II. Noctuites. By Artuur G. Buruer, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e... 161

XX. Position of the Sponge-spicule in the Spongida; and Post-

script on the Identity of Sguamulina scopula with the Sponges. By

Ry ake (Ate TERE ES 5,, GOGs Wi sya bia ¥ersle ps aisles a eee aia vie 170

XXI. Description of a new Scops Owl from Ceylon. By Capt. W.

i aumGgen, Ras MBO. a ie. ia's toes 6 oinlt ci ww wba eee 174

New Book :—White’s Natural History of Selborne, edited by Thomas

Belly HBAs ovata =f < sgiite witase ass os inoles woale RR Ue eg ea 176

Thomas Vernon Wollaston; On the Orthonectida, a new Class of

Animals Parasitic on Echinodermata and Turbellaria, by M. A.

Giard ; A new Species of Chimera found in American Waters,

by Theodore Gill; Note on the Habits of young Limulus, by

Alexander Agassiz ; New Species of Ceratodus from the Jurassic,

by O. C. Marsh ; Sexual Dimorphism in Butterflies, by S. H.

Seuddatis, 2 yh. gee ai-srodhie che PAE tit oS auala RNe eeee 178—184

CONTENTS. ¥:

NUMBER III.

XXII. On the Geographical Distribution of the Common Oyster.

ya VV ENTERS cetaie macpinecren creado sy or cok a ava eee ot 5 coke 185

XXIII. Note on Selaginopsis (= Polyserias Hincksti, Mereschkow-

sky), and on the Circumpolar Distribution of certain Hydrozoa. By

Bre Tey. Mg MAIN OMMEAIN, MBN oS)... 5 Puiitia dela tide sidmercuididcsle’ »1. 189

XXIV. Descriptions of new Species of Heterocera from Japan.—

Part Il. Noctuites. By Artuur G. Butusn, F.LS., F.Z.S8., &e... 192

XXV. Further Notes on the Structure of Peripatus nove-zealandie.

By F. W. Hurron, Professor of Zoology in the University of Otago. 204

XXVI. On the Genus Paleacis, and the Species occurring in British

Carboniferous Rocks. By R. Eraeriper, jun., F.G.S., and H.

AutEyNE Nicuoxson, M.D., D.Sc., &e. (Plate XII.) .......... 206

XXVIII. Descriptions of new Species of Lepidoptera collected

by the late Dr. I. Stoliczka during the Indian-Government Mission

io Neelond inne ia.) By. Moone, HeZ8. ioe «dare aneeaccn t 227

XXVIU. Description of a new Species of Land-Planarian from

the Hothouses at Kew Gardens. By H. N. Mosetey, F.R.S. .... 287

XXIX. Studies on the Hydroida. By OC. Muruscuxowsxy.

Sr ints Made MEY, BS SEV its Ch etmek aiiies decades see 239

Proceedings of the Geological Society......... init ae etek 256, 257

On the Migrations and Metamorphoses of the Tapeworms of the

Shrews, by M. A. Villot; On some Monstrosities of -Asteracan-

thion rubens, by M. A. Giard ; On the Feeding of Dinameba, by

Prof. Leidy ; On the Structure of Amphioxus lanceolatus, by

PRC SC MOLG SDSS sete: ei 5) cease Waa toda alates oie wrayle Sak fs Fields os 258—262

NUMBER IV.

XXX. On the Genus Haliphysema, with Description of several

Forms apparently allied to it. By the Rev. A. M. Norman, M.A.

POM aIAD LRU ALS ) 8) Ss, wugiahe: Bysighe- i semretsioged Walia Ms akeeayhg pS! s\eic MARIO s OSS 265

XXXI. On the Architectural Achievements of little Masons,

Annelidan (?) and Rhizopodan, in the Abyss of the Atlantic. By

hie eee ME, NORMAN, MA i a.sinss sale jelcts ols wo bicieliieie sivas Hy da 284

XXXII. Descriptions of new Species of Heterocera from Japan.—

Part II. Noctuites. By ArnrHuR G, ButueEr, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &c... 287

XXXII. On Races of Herring observed in the Sound. By G.

ER sce revo owns coon ve edn ke MM ones s melee et Rhee

vi CONTENTS.

~ Page

XXXIV. On new Species of Hydrdctinide, Recent and Fossil,

and on the Identity in Structure of Millepora alcicornis with Stroma-

topora. By H. J. Canter, F.R.S. &c. (Plate XVII.) .......... 298

XXXV. Descriptions of a new Genus and of new Species of Halti-

cing. Ty JOSHPES, DALY, PS. os ecto es lem ed o> epee 312

XXXVI. Studies on the Hydroida. By C. Mermscuxowsxky ., 322

XXXVI. Descriptions of twenty new Species of Hesperide from

hisjown Collection. By W:, Ca Hmwitson.cg ocick esis ett eee 340

XXXVIII. Note on Artamus monachus. By Dr. F. BrieeE-

BAIN o.0c sshas’s © a's seiSiay ahaa: poe he wae was Gasahat asl he ab deat kale nS ha ea ae 348

XXXIX. Description of an apparently new Species of Pigeon of

the Genus Ptilopus. By D. G. Huuiot, F.R.S.E. &...... 100.065 349

On Dinichthys, Newberry; On an Ostracode Crustacean of a new

Genus (Acanthopus), met with in the deep waters of the Lake

of Genova, by MELE. Wemneb 0 5 cs ais. cae wie ee atiabelae 500, 352

NUMBER V.

XL. Notes on the Genus Retepora, with Descriptions of new

Species. By the Rey. Tuomas Hincxs, B.A., F.R.S. (Plates

MIRON CG NOL cl) ccve! fe s Wega, Stes Me its San ge Shonehere. pein eo eager ee 353

XLI. Descriptions of new Species of Heteropterous Hemiptera

collected in the Hawaiian Islands by the Rey. T. Blackburn.—No. I.

By BucHanan Warr, MD) OES. oni.» alee mith ae 365

XLII. Descriptions of new Species of Birds from the Island of

Lifu, New Caledonia. By E. L. Layarp, C.B., H.B.M. Consul,

Noumea, New Caledomia 0. siie/ acs aussie oiboe i opposites etetoe eos a 374

XLII. Emendatory Description of Purisiphonia Clarkei, Bk., a

Hexactinellid Fossil Sponge from N.W. Australia. By H. J.

Came AO a ecbe, : rs cnes pine © om tater ec ne cater oe Ct eee 376

XLIV. Noteson the Internal and External Structure of Paleozoic

Crinoids, .By Crsmias WACHSMUTE. i¢).46% sips ns vaemanme mies 379

XLV. Descriptions of new Species of Heterocera from Japan.—

Part III. Geometrites. By Arruur G. BuTiEr, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e. 392

XLVI. On the Number of Cervical Vertebree in Dinornis. By F.

W. Hutton, Professor of Zoology in the University of Otago .... 407

XLVII. Two new Crustacea from the Coast of Aberdeen. By C.

Sreamcn ATE, EIS, isc,sc 15400 sere, aetegeeee 6; 540i se) ee eee 409

CONTENTS. Vil

Page

XLVIII. On Calcareous Hexactinellid Structure in the Devonian :

Limestone; large Fossil Hydrozoic Coralla from the Chalk; and

further Observations on the Replacement of Silex by Calcite. By

iced CART REE Ecce ns a. tis 8 eae dan ot WA SiN Sore Swabian so 3 412

On the Young Stages of some Osseous Fishes—Development of the

Tail, by Mr. Al. Agassiz ; On Selaginopsis, Polyserias, and Peri;

cladium, by M. C. Mereschkowsky; on a new Gorilla from

Congo, by MM. Allix and Bouvier ; On the Rhizopoda of the

Salt Lake of Szamosfalva, by Dr. Geta Entz; Note on the

Locality and Synonyms of Sternotomis cornutor, Faby. (Coleo-

ptera, Lamiid), by Charles O. Waterhouse; On the Genus

faliphysema, by the Rev. A. M. Norman, M.A...,....... 419—424

NUMBER VI.

XLIX. On the Reticularian and Radiolarian Rhizopoda (Forami-

nifera and Polycystina) of the North-Polar Expedition of 1875-76.

By Henry B. Brapy, F.R.S. (Plates XX. & XXI,) .........46. 425

L. Descriptions of new Species of Heterocera from Japan.—

Part II. Geometrites. By Artuur G. Burirr, F.L.S., F.ZS., &e. 440

LI. Notes on the Internal and External Structure of Paleozoic

Crmnoids. By Cranins, WACHSMUTE « os) yisic exit cya: baa hs 453

LI. Description of a remarkable new Form of Ophiuride from

@oeyion) By Bn@ami al SMire, BAS oe. tag ceva pag hints sale’s 468

LILI. Remarks on some new Alphei, with a Synopsis of the

North-American Species. By W.N. LocKINGTON.............. 465

LIV. Description of two Butterflies collected by Dr. Turner at

Port Moresby, New Guinea. By Artuur G. ButiEr, F.LS. &e. . 480

LY. On the Nauplius Stage of Prawns. By Dr. Frirz Mitre 481

LVI. Notes ona Collection of Japanese Sea-Fishes. By Dr. A.

EU EEPIRER RES easly at cho! a) g) scaiierts hss sstalate eabete Peal acre tected eae wat Gee eG 485

New Book :—Thesaurus Devonico-Carboniferus: Flora and Fauna

of the Devonian and Carboniferous Periods. By J. J. Braspy,

RU Ec OCGe Garcia, duc s athe ghey ciskarain pale ccsie means) «ae Mea ss Moca 487

On the Origin and Distribution of the Turbellaria of the deep Fauna

of the Lake of Geneva, by M. Duplessis; Characters of a new

Species of Dryops from Formosa (Coleoptera, Parnide), by

Charles 0. Waterhouse; On the Organ called “ Dorsal Chord”

in Amphioxus lanceolatus, by MM. J. Renaut and G. Duchamp ;

On the Zoological Affinities of the Genus Mesites, by M. A.

PASC ROALOR FM oeio hc ais soos bbe FBLC hee 35 ah PM eee ae 490—493

PLATES IN VOL. I.

Puate I,

Il.

Ill. x

IV. |

V. Caprella fretensis—Stimpsonia chelifera.

VI. Wagnerella borealis.

New Species of Cliona.

ew British Fungi.

a ezophaps solitaria.

= Fossil Sponges from the Carboniferous System.

XI. New British Spiders.

XII. Species of Palzacis from British Carboniferous Rocks.

XIV.

XV.

| Haliphysema confertum—Technitella legumen—Technitella

co melo—Marsipella elongata.

XVII. New Hydractiniide.

AQ RE New Species of Retepora.

XIX.

XX. | North-Polar Rhizopoda.

XXL |

New Hydroida.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES. ]

Neen reavacenreanate per litora spargite muscum,

Naiades, et circum vitreos considite fontes:

Pollice virgineo teneros hic carpite flores :

Floribus et pictum, dive, replete canistrum.

At yos, o Nymphe Craterides, ite sub undas ;

Ite, recurvato variata corallia trunco

Vellite muscosis e rupibus, et mihi conchas

Ferte, Dez pelagi, et pingui conchylia succo.”

N. Parthentt Giannettasti Ecl. 1.

No. 1. JANUARY 1878.

I.— Observations upon Professor Ernst Haeckel’s Group of the

“ Physemarta,”’ and on the Affinity of the Sponges. By W.

SAVILLE Kent, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e.

Iv was scarcely to be expected that Mr. Carter would quietly

surrender into Prof. Ernst Haeckel’s hands, for the further

exposition of his celebrated ‘“Gastreea” theory, that imterest-

ing organism, Sguamulina scopula, which he (Mr. Carter) a

few years since pronounced, and still holds, to be a Forami-

nifer. The brusque and, it must be admitted, somewhat dis-

courteous manner in which the learned professor disposes of

Mr. Carter’s arguments in support of the view which he

adopts has also naturally led to the protest that appears in

the last October number of the ‘ Annals.’ In this protest,

however, Mr. Carter does not appear to have made the most

of his own position, nor, indeed, to have clearly defined the

one maintained by Prof. Haeckel.

Though unable at the present moment to refer to the article

which has so greatly perturbed Mr. Carter’s equanimity, I

was fortunate enough to obtain in May of this present year,

and still have by me, a copy of Prof. Haeckel’s ‘ Biologischen

Studien,’ zweites Heft, 1877, containing a chapter entirely

devoted to the consideration of the so-called Squamulina

scopula and its supposed allies. It is upon these forms col-

lectively that the author bestows the title of the Physemaria ;

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 1

2 Mr. W. Saville Kent on Prof. E. Haeckel’s

and it is further evident from the quotations given by Mr.

Carter that we have here word for word a reprint of the

original article published in the ‘ Jenaische Zeitschrift.’ This

possession, last spring, of the volume in question enabled me

to discuss at some length, in a communication to the meeting

of the Linnean Society held on the 21st of June of the pre-

sent year*, the views expounded by Prof. Haeckel concerning

the nature and affinities of his newly created group. My

communication here referred to, and of which the briefest

possible notice only has so far appeared, embraces the results

of investigations prosecuted during the last six years relative

to that remarkable group of ‘ collar-bearing”’ flagellate Pro-

tozoa whose existence was first discovered in America by the

late Prof. H. James-Clark, and announced by him in the

‘Memoirs of the Boston Society of Natural History,’ vol. i.,

for the year 18667. Four species only, representing two genera

(Codosiga and Salpingeca), were here described by Prot.

Clark. Later on, in the autumn of the year 1871, three out of

these four types, with the addition of two new varieties, were

discovered by me in the neighbourhood of London, and were

duly announced at the meeting of the Royal Microscopical

Society held Nov. 1 of the same yearft. With this excep-

tion these Flagellate Protozoa, as a special and independent

group, do not appear, knowingly, to have fallen beneath the

observation of any other investigator.

The importance that attaches itself to Prof. Clark’s dis-

coveries, however, is not associated so much with his intro-

duction to scientific notice of a new structural type, as his

simultaneous declaration that sponges were essentially com-

posed of sociable colonies of similar collar-bearing flagellate

monads. This he at the time demonstrated through an

exposition of the minute anatomy of the calcareous sponge-

form Leucosolenia botryoides, Bowerbank, and subsequently

in association with a siliceous American freshwater species,

Spongilla arachnoidea, Clark§. This last important discovery

ot Prof. Clark’s has since been fully confirmed by the observa-

tions of Mr. Carter||, and also by myself, as shown in my com-

munication to the Linnean Society just quoted, in which

* « A Monograph of the Gymnozoidal Diseostomatous Flagellata, with

a proposed new Scheme of Classification of the Protozoa, &c.”

+ Reprinted in the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural History,’ 4th ser.

vol. i. 1868.

} Abstract published in the ‘Monthly Microscopical Journal,’ vol. vii.

p- 261, 1871.

§ ‘Silliman’s American Journal,’ December 1871; reprinted in the

Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. for January 1872.

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. vol. x. July 1871.

Group of the “ Physemaria.” 3

I am enabled, through my extended researches into the struc-

ture and developmental history of the independent collar-

bearing forms, to follow out the subject to a more decisive issue

than has yet been attempted.

Prof. Haeckel, as it is well known, while driven to admit

the existence in sponge-structures of these collar-bearing cells

or monads, has altogether refused so far to recognize in each

such collar-bearing monad a distinct and individual vitality,

choosing rather to regard the same as the contiguous cellular

constituents of one out of two multicellular layers or tissues of

which he considers all sponge-forms are composed. This view

held by Haeckel would, if correct, approximate the sponges

more closely to the simplest tissue-forming Coelenterata ; and

it is exactly such a position for them that he has been endea-

vouring for some years past to bring into general recognition.

Taking upon trust, indeed, and dazzled by the garish lustre

of the learned professor’s brilliant “Gastrea”’ theory, of which

the “Ceelenteric”” or “ Diploblastic ” interpretation of the

sponge question must be regarded as the chief corner-stone,

that recognition has already been very extensively accorded,

leaving, indeed, as a very slender minority the adherents of the

Protozoic or Monoblastic interpretation of the organisms in

dispute. An irreparable gap has further been occasioned here

through the recent deplorable death, in the midst of his valu-

able investigations, of Prof. H. James-Clark. The time at

length, however, seems to have arrived when accumulated

facts of so substantial a nature can be set in array in proof of

the thorough agreement of the sponges in every essential

detail with the representatives of the ordinary Protozoa, that

the acceptors, upon trust, of the Diploblastic interpretation of

the question will be well advised to reexamine and work it

out for their own satisfaction. If upon so doing the results

realized should accord with and confirm those obtained by the

writer, the ‘“ Diploblastic ” or ‘ Gastrea”’ theory, so far, at

least, as the sponges are concerned, will be held henceforth in

but scant estimation.

The grounds upon which the above, at first sight somewhat

presumptuous, anticipation is hazarded, together with the

bearings upon the question of Prof. Haeckel’s newly created

group of the Physemaria (embracing,inhis opinion, Mr. Carter’s

Foraminiferal (?) type Squamulina scopula), may now be

examined. Before arriving at this more complex aspect of

the problem, however, it is desirable to devote a brief space to

an acquaintance with the initial integers of it, viz. the inde-

pendent collar-bearing flagellate monads in their simplicity, as

first made known to us by Prof. Clark. On reference to my

4 Mr. W. Saville Kent on Prof. E. Haeckel’s

communication, already quoted, it will be found that the record

of nearly forty well-marked species, in place of the original

four, has been the reward of my several years’ study of this

interesting group; and concerning the general structure, func-

tions, and developmental history of these I am enabled to

supply perfectly original and important data. To those

acquainted with the writings of Prof. Clark, the general aspect

of these typical “ collar-bearing’’ monads will no doubt be

familiar ; but for the advantage of those who are not, they may

be described as ovate, pyriform, or flask-shaped animalcules,

stalked, sessile, or floating freely in the water, naked or en-

closed within a transparent lorica, and either solitary or

forming extensive colonies—the chief and common character-

istic of all these being that each individual is adorned ante-

riorly with an exquisitely delicate funnel-shaped sarcodic

expansion, the “ collar,” from the centre of the area en-

closed by the base of which a single long flagellum takes its

origin. All the species as yet discovered are of so minute

a size, the body of the largest not exceeding the 1200th part

of an English inch in total length, and usually being much

smaller, that a magnifying-power of at least 500 diameters is

requisite for their satisfactory investigation. This last cir-

cumstance, no doubt, readily accounts for the immunity from

attention that they have hitherto enjoyed, they, on the other

hand, being so abundantly distributed in both salt and fresh

water that scarcely a fragment of weed can be examined from

either of these two sources, by those once familiar with their ap-

pearances, and employing a sufficiently high magnifying-

power, without the encounter of some one or even several

types.

Among the most important results of my investigations of

this interesting and, as is now shown, exceedingly extensive

group is the satisfactory elucidation of the true nature and

position of the oral aperture or mouth, and of the structure

and function of the hyaline funnel-shaped “ collar.” Prof.

Clark left both these points in a very unsatisfactory state, he,

in the first place, being altogether unable to determine the

exact aspect and position of the oral aperture, but hazarding

the opinion that it lay somewhere within the collar and near

the base of the flagellum. Concerning the nature and uses

of the funnel-shaped “ collar” itself he makes no suggestion

and furnishes us with no clue. By prolonged and repeated

observation, however, I have been able most conclusively to

demonstrate that food is ingested at any point within the area

embraced by the base of the hyaline collar, the whole of |

which area must therefore necessarily be characterized as the

Group of the “‘ Physemaria.”’ 5

oral or inceptive one. Digested and other effete particles

are likewise, I have ascertained, usually passed off from the

same circumscribed surface. The function and properties of

the hyaline “ collar’? I have found to be almost inconceiv-

ably remarkable. By the employment of an amplifying

power of from 800 to 1000 diameters it was revealed to me

that this collar consisted of an exquisitely delicate film of sar-

code, capable of expansion and retraction at the will of the

animalcule—to such an extent, indeed, that it might be quite

withdrawn into the substance of the body. In this structure

a circulating stream was constantly in motion, ascending

on the outside and descending on the inside, and identical in all

ways with those circulating sarcode-streams characteristic of the

extended pseudopodia of certain Radiolaria. Placing commi-

nuted carmine in the water, this collar with its circulating

current, assisted by the active movements of the flagellum,

was found to constitute a wonderful and most admirably con-

structed trap for the purpose of drawing towards it and arrest-

ing passing particles of food. ‘lhe phenomenon presented by

this trap in active action was as follows :—The rapid rotatory

action of the flagellum impelling swift currents of water to

flow from behind in a forward direction, caused all floating

particles carried with it to impinge upon some point of the sur-

face of the expanded collar. Adhering here, these particles

were now carried on by the motion of the substance of the

collar, and after ascending the outer surface, surmounting the

rim, and descending upon the interior surface of the structure,

became engulfed in the soft sarcode of the animalcule’s body

embraced by the collar’s base. The accompanying woodcut

(p: 6) illustrates clearly and in a diagrammatic manner the

remarkable phenomena that accompany the feeding-process.

In relation to the life-history and reproductive phenomena

of this interesting collar-bearing group, I have satisfactorily

ascertained that while that simple fissiparous method of

multiplication common to all ordinary Protozoic organisms

extensively prevails, a process of encystment and resolution

of the entire body into granular germs or spores also plays

an important part. The withdrawal by the adult individual

of the characteristic hyaline collar, and its extension of pseudo-

podie processes, have likewise been frequently observed, these

phenomena being intimately associated with the function of

reproduction. ‘The larval or initial condition of the collar-

bearing Flagellata derived from the reproductive process is

more simple in structure than the parent from which it sprung,

it in some instances taking the form of an Ameeba and in others

that of a simple flagellate monad. ‘Taken as a whole, my

6 Mr. W. Saville Kent on Prof. E. Haeckel’s

investigation of the life-history of this collar-bearing group

has yielded data abounding with evidence confirmatory of and

parallel with that obtained by Messrs. Dallinger and Drys-

dale relative to the life-history of the more simple Cercomo-

nads, published at length in the ‘Monthly Microscopical

Journal’ for the years 1873-74, some of the same having

Monosiga gracilis, 8. Kent.

A solitary Gymnozoidal Disco-

stomatous Protozoon feeding on

comminuted carmine: c¢, collar ;

n, nucleus; jt, flagellum; cv,

contractile vesicles; fig, food

globules. The arrows indicate

the direction of the current

caused by the rotatory motion

of the flagellum, and the course

taken by the food-particles on

striking against and adhering to

the collar. The dotted line on

each side of the flagellum marks

the are described by its rotation.

x 2000 diameters.

been accumulated by me prior, and some subsequent, to

the appearance of their very valuable contributions to our

knowledge of these lowly organized types.

My prolonged investigation of these hitherto little-known

collar-bearing flagellate monads, together with a careful study

of all other forms most closely approaching these in structure,

Group of the “* Physemaria.”’ 7

has in the end forced upon me not only the unavoidable neces-

sity of coining for this particular group a special classificatory

title ; it has at the same time been suggestive of an entirely

new and simple scheme of reclassification, or redivision into

primary sections, of the entire Protozoic subkingdom. This

latter object I have proposed to attain by taking as a basis

for diagnosis the nature and extent of the oral or inceptive

area. ‘[hus, for instance, among an exceedingly extensive

group of the Protozoa, embracing practically all the represen-

tatives of the Rhizopoda and certain Flagellata, it will be found

that there is no especial mouth-aperture, food-particles being

engulfed indiscriminately by the soft, yielding sarcode at any

point on the surface of the periphery. ‘These organisms are,

in fact, in all parts and everywhere mouth, and represent the

simplest or most degraded types of the whole subkingdom.

In reference to this dispersed character of the inceptive

surface I have proposed for this section the title of the

‘“* HoLtosroMaTA*”. Advancing a little further we find a

group in which, although the oral or inceptive areas have

become distinct and specialized, they are at the same time

multifarious and distributed over a considerable extent, if not

over the whole, of the surface of the body. This elass or

section is represented by the Acinetina or Suctoria, a group

in which the modification into tubular sucking-mouths of

the pseudopodia of the preceding Holostomatous type is at once

apparent. Tor these many-mouthed forms I have proposed

the title of the PotystomaTa. With the next step forward we

are brought face to face with that assemblage of collar-bearing

flagellate forms that constitute the chief subject matter of

this communication. Here, as already shown, there is a con-

siderable advance upon the two preceding types; for the in-

ceptive area, although not yet attaining to the importance of a

distinct and definite mouth, is no longer scattered over the

general surface of the body, but is concentrated and confined

to the anterior extremity. In reference to the discoidal form

of this anterior inceptive area, bounded, as already shown,

by the base of the funnel-shaped collar, I have proposed the

title of the Discosromara. ‘The fourth and most specialized

group of the Protozoa includes the typical Ciliate and Flagel-

late Stomatode Infusoria, which may be collectively distin-

guished by the title of the MonosromaTa or EusroMata.

A brief space may now be devoted to an examination of

the claim of the members of the sponge tribe for admission

into the ranks of one or other of the four Protozoic classes or

subdivisions above enumerated. As mentioned ina preceding

* [Already used in Mollusca, and hardly bearing the signification here

given to it.—HDs. |

8 Mr. W. Saville Kent on Prof. HE. Haeckel’s

page, Prof. H. James-Clark was the first authority to point

out the resemblance between the essential flagellate units of

the sponge-body and the independant collar-bearmg monads,

of which he was the discoverer, these results, so far as relates

to the possession by the sponge-monads or Spongozoons of

similar membranous collars, being confirmed by the observa-

tions of Mr. Carter. It was clear, however, that it could only

be through a much more extended and accurate acquaint-

ance with the independent Discostomatous or collar-bearing

forms that this question of the natural affinities of the sponges

could be definitely and satisfactorily set at rest. It was en-

tirely actuated by the ambition to become possessed of such

accurate and extended information that the writer has de-

voted the last six years to the study of this particular group ;

and it is only fortified with the substantial fruits of this pro-

longed investigation that he now approaches the obscure ques-

tion of the nature and affinities of the sponges. Full details

in reference to these investigations will appear in due course ;

but it may be briefly stated here that a careful examination

of members of each of the leading sponge-orders, Calcareous, ©

Siliceous, and Keratose, has pointed to one and the same

general conclusion—namely, that sponges can no longer be

regarded logically in any other light than as typical Disco-

sTOMATOUS Protozoa. Not only in all structural points and

in the remarkable form and function of the hyaline collar is

the correspondence complete, but the phenomena of repro-

duction and development are likewise essentially identical

with what has already been observed of the simple and inde-

pendent collar-bearing types. ‘The only essential distinction

between the sponges and these last-named forms is, in fact, that

while the latter, whether fixed or floating, solitary or aggregated

in social clusters on a simple or branching pedicel, are invari-

ably naked and fully exposed to view, the collar-bearing

flagellate monads of the sponge-colony are as invariably con-

cealed by and immersed within a sarcodie and usually spi-

culum-secreting matrix. Practically, the distinction between

the two groups is essentially parallel with what obtains be-

tween the solitary or social “naked” Tunicata, Ascidiadce

and Clavellinide, and those compound colony forms, the

Botryllide, which are immersed and concealed within a

gelatinous and not unfrequently spiculiferous matrix. And

yet no one in his right senses would think of calling in ques-

tion the propriety of uniting these two as members of the

same primary class of the Molluscoida. In a similar manner

it is requisite to unite as members of the same Protozoan class

of the Discostomata the naked and independent collar-bearing

Group of the “ Physemaria.” 9

monads, Codosiga and Salpingeca, and those socially im-

mersed, the sponges, in a sarcodic matrix. For convenience’

sake I have proposed to distinguish these two respective sec-

tions or subclasses as the Discostomata Gymnozoida and

Discostomata Sarcocrypta.

While at first sight a sponge-body, or Sarcocryptal Disco-

stomatous colony, appears to present an almost incomprehen-

sibly complex type of organization, it will be found on close

investigation, assisted by an intimate acquaintance with the

Gymnozoidal Discostomatous group, to be reducible to three,

or even less, very simple elements. The first and most

essential of these is necessarily .represented by the collar-

bearing monads, the second by the simple Ameba-like cell-

elements or cytoblasts, and the third by the general investing

sarcode or syncytium. ‘These three elements intelligently

recognized, or even the first and last only, all remaining

structural details are most easily comprehended. Regarding,

in fact, the collar-bearing monads as the one essential element

of the sponge to which all the other structures are subsidiary,

the investing sarcode or syncytium may be described as fur-

‘ nishing, in the first place, a gelatinous fulcrum or basis for

the reception and support of the essential monads, and, in the

second, a suitable nidus or matrix for the nurture and deve-

lopment of their offspring or reproductive products. To this

last-named category, indeed, may be referred the Ameba-like

cytoblasts and all the remaining larger or lesser granular

contents of the syncytium. This explanation of the sponge-

structure is offered not as a crude theory, but as the result

of direct personal investigation, in the course of which the

development of what at first sight appeared as mere granular

specks, first into Ameba-like bodies, and then onwards into

the characteristic adult collar-bearmg monads, was actually

witnessed by me, as also the reassumption by these adult

monads of an amoeboid state, their coalescence or fusion with

neighbouring individuals, and final breaking up into innume-

rable germs or spores similar to those from which they origi-

nally sprang. The whole life-cycle is in fact perfectly

identical with what obtains among the gymnozoidal section —

of the class and all other simple monad forms, with the single

difference that the reproductive germs, instead of being dis-

persed into the surrounding water, are retained by, and grow

up within, the substance of the syncytium.

Although the method of increase above recounted represents

the normal process of development among the sponges, there

are certain departures from this simple formula which require

a special explanation. The most important of these, and one,

10 Mr. W. Saville Kent on Prof: LE. Haeckel’s

indeed, that has considerably exercised the mind of every

authority who has devoted his energies to the solution of the

“ sponge-question,”’ is associated with the so-called ciliated

germs or larve of certain sponge-forms. This “ ciliated

larva,” which may in fact be regarded as the veritable “ pons

astnorum””’ of the whole sponge-problem, has been seized upon

and trotted round the lists by Prof. Haeckel and all the sup-

porters of the Diploblastic or Ccelenteric theory of sponges as

the perfect embodiment of the typical sac-shaped bilaminate

Gastrea, or the hypothetical stock-form of all animal life from

the Coelenterata upwards, and as conclusively proving in its

own personality the necessity of regarding sponges as members

of the Ccelenterate subkingdom. Put crucially to the test,

however, it will be found that these ciliated sponge-germs are

altogether innocent of the blushing honours that have been so

forcibly thrust upon them.

As already shown by Metschnikoff*, these somewhat re-

markable bodies by no means conform, in either external

characteristics or in the fashion of their development, to

that arbitrary formula which has been insisted upon by

Prof. Haeckel, and which was necessary for the vindication

of his position. It may be further demonstrated now, how-

ever, that there is no structural or functional aspect asso-

ciated with these bodies that does not find its parallel among

the more simple and typical Protozoa, or that cannot be readily

explained by reference to the phenomena manifested by the

various members of that group. ‘The only clue to a thorough

comprehension of the nature of these ciliated bodies is, as

might be expected, afforded by the study of their development.

This has been followed out by me in association with Grantia

compressa, Sycon ciliatum, and other sponges prominent for

their plentiful production of these disputed structures, the

evidence adduced in all cases, as detailed and illustrated else-

where, overwhelmingly indicating that they cannot be regarded

otherwise than as the results of a specially modified process of

multiple fission, and that their correct title would be “ com-

pound gemmules.” Among the ordinary Holostomatous Pro-

tozoa such a mode of multiple fission following the coalescence

or fusion of two or more individuals is of frequent occurrence,

the only point of departure between the two cases being that,

whereas in the sponges the individual resultants of such mul-

tiple fission remain in intimate connexion with one another,

in the more simple and independent forms, as remarked of

their germs, they become separated and dispersed through the

* ‘Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie, Bd. xxiv. 1874; and

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., July 1875.

Group of the * Physemaria.” | 11

surrounding water. Taken in its most highly characteristic

phase, this compound gemmule, or wrongly called “ ciliated

larva” of the sponge, represents a spherical or ovate agere-

gation of typical collar-bearing monads or spongozoa, con-

nected laterally and by their bases with one another, and

with their anterior flagellate and collar-bearing extremity

directed outwards. In this condition they, in fact, present a

wonderful resemblance to a social colony of one of the simpler

Gymnozoidal types, and might be directly compared to a

detached capitulum of the pedicelled genus Codosiga, Jas.-Clk.,

or to a spherical colony of the free-floating genus Astrosiga,

S. Kent. It is only when certain of these sponge-monads

withdraw their characteristic collars and commence to throw

off and secrete around them the spiculiferous syncytium as a

nidus for the further development of the colony that their true

sponge nature becomes apparent. This brief chapter of their

developmental history brings out in high relief the potential

importance of the collar-bearing monads compared with the

remaining elements of the sponge community, showing, indeed,

as already intimated, that these latter are entirely subordinate

to and derived from these essential sponge-units.

The compound ciliated gemmules, whose true nature has

just been discussed, are most abundantly encountered in asso-

ciation with the calcareous division of the sponge tribe. With

certain of these forms, but more especially among the siliceous

group, other compound ciliated bodies occur, concerning which,

although it has not been hitherto attempted, a very similar

interpretation may be rendered. Reference is here made to

those spherical ciliated chambers that first received from Mr.

Carter the title of “ampullaceous sacs.” By Prof. Clark

they have been denominated the “ monad-chambers ;”’ and in

those sponge-types where they are present they seem, so far as

has been observed, to embrace the whole and entire system of

the collar-bearimg monads, each such chamber in its normal

and fully developed state being completely lined, except at its

point of communication with the general aquiferous system,

with these essential spongozoa. The, examination by me of

a species of Desmacidon revealed the presence of these ciliated

chambers in great profusion and in every phase of their deve-

lopment. It was further elicited, by a careful study of the

earlier stages of the same, that they take their origin by a

process of multiple fission in all ways identical with what has

been followed by the detached compound gemmules. Both

present in their initial stage a morula-like aspect, the subse-

quent and essential point of departure being that, while in the

latter case the free-swimming ciliated gemmule has the collar-

12 Mr. W. Saville Kent on Prof. E. Haeckel’s

bearing and flagellate extremity of the individual monads

directed exteriorly, in the ampullaceous sacs or monad-chambers

they are directed towards the interior of a central cavity.

Full details, with illustrations, of the examples that have led

to this interpretation of the “ ampullaceous sac ” accompany

my recent communication to the Linnean Society.

The bearing upon the whole question of Prof. Haeckel’s

newly created group of the Physemaria may now be ap-

proached. In Haeckel’s own words (/.c. pp. 172 and 178),

the several types to which this title of the Physemaria is col-

lectively applied are characterized as being neither true sponges

nor true polypes, but as “eine kleine Gruppe von niedersten

Pflanzenthieren, die der hypothetischen Stammform aller

Metazoen, der Gastraea, niher stehen, als alle anderen bis

jetzt bekannten Thiere.” Or, as elsewhere intimated, he re-

cognizes in this group the almost perfect embodiment of the

hypothetical “ Gastreea,”’ upon which the whole superstructure

of his celebrated Gastreea theory is founded! Altogether Prof.

Haeckel relegates to his newly founded group two generic and

seven specific types, the aspect and structural characteristics

of which, as described and illustrated by him, may now be

examined. The first of the two genera (Haliphysema) is already

familiar, the name having been conferred by Dr. Bowerbank, in

his ‘ Monograph of the British Spongiade,’ ontwominute forms

which he regarded as the smallest and simplest of known

sponge-types; the second genus (Gastrophysema, Haeckel)

exhibits a slight advance in complexity of structure upon the

preceding genus. Represented in their simplest condition

(Haliphysema primordiale et echinotdes, Haeckel), and neces-

sarily closest approximation to Prof. Haeckel’s hypothetical

“Gastreea,”’ these Physemaria may be described as minute sphe-

rical orovate bodies elevated ona pedicel and bristling externally

with adhering fragments of sponge-spicules, grains of sand,

and other extraneously derived particles. Interiorly there is

found a single hollow chamber opening anteriorly by a simple

constricted terminal aperture. ‘The most interesting and im-

portant feature of these organisms is now arrived at. By Prof.

Haeckel’s own description and drawings it is shown that the

entire lining surface of the simple interior cavity is represented

by a single and continuous layer of collar-bearing cells identical

with those that constitute the essential living units of ordinary

sponge-structures, or of the independent Gymnozoidal Dis-

costomatous group already described. The outer wall is

composed of a syncytial element similar to that of typical

sponges, with the exception that, instead of secreting a spicu-

lar or other skeleton of its own, it draws together and appro-

Group of the “ Physemaria.” 13

priates for a similar use such foreign particles close at hand

as may be of a convenient -size and form. Prof. Haeckel

refuses at present, as in the case of ordinary sponge-structures,

to recognize in the collar-bearing-monad lining any thing of

less high organization than a true cellular membrane or tissue,

comparable to ordinary ciliated epithelium, each collar-bearing

flagellate monad being, in his opinion, indeed, a mere cell unit.

That we have here, however, as, judging from their broad

external characters only, Dr. Bowerbank was the first to decide,

a true sponge or sarcocryptal Discostomatous Protozoon, there

cannot be the slightest doubt. It may be further maintained

that Haliphysema not only represents the simplest sponge-

type that has yet been discovered, but one in which is found

epitomized, with but slight modification, the simple monad-

lined “ ciliated chamber ’”’ or ‘‘ ampullaceous sac ”’ of the more

complex groups referred to at length on a preceding page.

The developmental phenomena of the Haliphysemata, as indi-

cated by Haeckel’s figures and description, are entirely in

accord with those of the ordinary sponges—compound ciliated

gemmules, the result of multiple fission, being produced, which

agree in form and structure with those of Sycon, G'rantia, and

other sponge-types. The genus Gastrophysema differs from

Haliphysema only by having several intercommunicating

internal chambers instead of one, the two, in fact, bearing the

same relationship to one another that the many-chambered

foraminiferal genus Nodosaria does to the single-celled Lagena.

The exceedingly slight and artificial grounds upon which the

discrimination between two such closely approximating types

is based, each having necessarily represented the single-cham-

bered type at one period of its growth, totally unprepares one

for the account Prof. Haeckel has to render of Gastrophysema

dithalamium, Haeckel, the simplest and typical representative

of his second genus.

Here verily Haeckel has out-Haeckeled Haeckel, and, carried

away by the ardour of his devotion to the “ Gastrea”’ theory,

lost all command over the reins of his very fertile imagi-

nation! Having observed that the ciliated germs and amceboid

masses (his so-called ova) in the example he examined were,

as might be rationally anticipated, represented most abundantly

in the posterior or older-formed of the two chambers, he at

once takes for granted that the functions of reproduction are

specially relegated to this chamber, and, with characteristic con-

fidence in the strength of this bare assumption, bestows upon

it the title of the “ Bruthéhle oder Uterus.” The upper or

anterior of the two chambers he invests with the functions of a

true stomach (‘ Magenhohle’’), while the terminal aperture of

14 Mr. W. Saville Kent on Prof. E. Haeckel’s

this chamber, as also the single one of Haliphysema, he re-

gards as a true mouth or oral aperture (“ Mundéffnung”’).

Having further observed some peculiar pyriform bodies scat-

tered among the ordinary flagellate cells that line the anterior

chamber, he sees, or rather imagines he recognizes, in_ these,

rudimentary glandular structures, or, to use bis own expres-

sion, ‘ Driisenzellen.” From the figures of these so-called

“ sland cells”? which accompany his description, however, it

is very evident that we have here simply an “ encysted”’

condition of certain of the ordinary collar-bearing monads,

already ascertained by me to occur among the ordinary

sponges, and which in this instance, regarded separately,

harmonizes remarkably with a similar encysted condition of the

solitary Gymnozoidal species Salpingaca fusiformis, S. Kent,

comparisons between which may be instituted in the illustra-

tions that accompany my monograph of this group.

Such being the wonderfully complex organism that Prof.

Haeckel constructs out of this simple little two-chambered

sponge, the mind trembles with awe at the thought of what he

might have conjured out of the three-, four-, or five-chambered

species, G'astrophysema scopula, Hkl., = Squamulina scopula,

Carter, had he had an opportunity of examining that species

in the flesh. As suggested elsewhere, with every additional

chamber he would probably have discovered and associated

some new sensory organ, until in the most complex type a

perfect embodiment of the five primary senses might have

been made manifest. Under existing circumstances, however,

Prof. Haeckel is obliged to content himself with enumerating

its external characters as given by Mr. Carter, and with taking

that authority smartly to task for the interpretation he has

given of the structure. Under any circumstances, the con-

clusions arrived at by Mr. Carter concerning the true nature

of this debatable organism are far more logical than his

own, he (Mr. Carter) having, without doubt, referred the struc-

ture to its right subkingdom, that of the Protozoa. That Mr.

Carter, in witnessing the protrusion of the pseudopodia from

the terminal orifice of the type in question, should have decided

upon its foraminiferal nature is perfectly comprehensible.

Even as a true sponge, agreeing in all structural details with

the simple Haliphysemata here described, we should expect

to find the sarcode or syncytial element protruded in such

a fashion for the seizing of the fragmentary foreign particles

out of which it builds up instead of secreting, as do ordinary

sponges, a protective and supporting framework. If, on a

closer investigation, Mr. Carter finds the internal cavity lined

with the characteristic collar-bearing monads, it may be anti-

Group of the “ Physemaria.” 15

cipated that no one will be more ready than himself to recog-

nize in it a true though wonderfully simple sponge-type. If,

on the other hand, he should find it to consist of homogeneous

sarcode, it is not identical with Prof. Haeckel’s Gastrophy-

sema, and his first inference, that it must be regarded as a true

Foraminifer, or, at all events, a Rhizopod, is correct.

Notwithstanding the remarkable interpretation placed by

Prof. Haeckel upon the interesting and simple little sponge-

forms which have received .from him the title of the Physe-

maria, that authority has undoubtedly greatly advanced our

knowledge of the Protozoa by his record (so far as structural

facts only are concerned) and exquisite illustrations of those

types which have been examined by him. In the faithful

rendering of the minutest histiological detail his pencil cer-

tainly has no equal, every stroke speaking to those familiar

with the object or structure depicted with an amount of elo-

quence that words would fail to inspire.

In conclusion, it may bé predicated that, if Prof. Haeckel

would only recognize in each collar-bearing cell of his exqui-

site drawings that individuality which it is impossible after a

long acquaintance to deny them, we should hear no more of

the “‘Gastrea” theory in association with the sponges. That

the chief if not the only obstacle to his yielding such recog-

nition exists through his unacquaintance with these collar-

bearing cells in their living and active state, forces itself upon

one’s mind in contemplating all his illustrations of these struc-

tures that occur both in his magnificent ‘Monograph of the

Caleareous Sponges’ and the volume containing his descrip-

tion of the Physemaria. In not a single instance out of these

is the characteristic “ collar”? portrayed in that symmetrical

and fully expanded condition which so eminently distinguishes

it in the living state. Nor on any occasion has Prof. Haeckel

indicated the presence of the invariably two or more rhythmi-

cally expanding and contracting vesicles always to be observed

in the living monads, and which in these types, as among all

other Protozoa, represent the rudimentary respiratory system.

His representation of the nucleus of these separate bodies is also

by no means life-like, but presents all the features of a post

mortem aspect. A careful investigation of this special struc-

ture has, in fact, clearly demonstrated that it is by no means

a constant and essential factor of any Protozoan organism, not

being, indeed, the equivalent of the nucleus of ordinary tissue

structure, but merely an accessory to the reproductive act.

The probability of this element being subservient only to this

function of reproduction, and of its not being comparable to

the typical histiological nucleus, has been already suggested

16 On Haeckel’s Group of the “ Physemaria.”

by Prof. Huxley*; while the inconstancy of its occurrence

among even the higher Protozoa at once demonstrates the arti-

ficial character of the group of the Monera, founded by Haeckel

for the reception of those forms in which a nucleus has not yet

been recognized. If, as is here intimated, the collar-bearing

monads of the sponge-colony have only been examined by

Prof. Haeckel in a dead and preserved state, with all the

exquisitely beautiful phenomena of life suspended, it is not to

be wondered at that he has passed them by as the mere indivi-

dual cell elements of an epithelium-like tissue. But should

he make himself acquainted with the same when alive, and

note, as has been done by the writer, the circulating sarcode

stream of the expanded “collar,” the food intercepted by it, and, |

after traversing the outer and inner surface, engulfed within

the substance of the sarcode at its base, then collected into

pellets and regurgitated through the substance of the body in

a manner identical with the food-circulation of the higher

infusorial types, such as Vortecella—witnessing at the same

time the constant pulsating action of the contractile vesicles

and all the phenomena attending the several reproductive pro-

cesses—he will scarcely disallow any longer their title to

individual and independent recognition.

Respecting the position, in reference to the ordinary sponge-

forms, that the single-chambered non-spiculiferous Physe-

maria occupy, it is very evident that they so far differ

from such ordinary types that they cannot be correctly styled,

with their single oscular aperture and no trace of pores, re-

presentatives of the “‘ PortFERA.” The discovery of these

new and interesting forms makes it necessary, indeed, to

effect a slight modification of the usual classificatory system.

Rejecting the old title of the Porifera, the group may be more

conveniently divided now into two primary sections—one

known as the “ PoLyTREMATA,” to include all the ordinary

poriferous sponges, and a second, to be distinguished as the

“* MONOTREMATA ’’}, for the reception of all those simple and

single-apertured types of which the genera Halyphysema and,

Gastrophysema constitute the characteristic representatives.

A little later, not improbably, a third section, equivalent in

value to these two, may have to be instituted, under the title of

the “ ATREMATA.” 'This type would have no internal cavity,

and consequently no aperture or pores, the collar-bearing

monads, with their bodies immersed in a syncytial basis,

opening directly on the water. Such a type seemed to have

* Prof. Huxley “On the Classification of the Animal Kingdom,”

Journal of the Linnean Society, vol. xii. p. 205, 1875.

+ {Already used for an order of Mammalia.—Ebs. ]

Messrs. Berkeley and Broome.on British Fungi. 17

been already furnished by the genus Phalansterium, Cien-

kowski, as reported by Prof. Clark*; but a reference to the

original description and illustration in Schultze’s ‘ Archiv,’

Bd. vi. 8. 4, 1870, has elicited that this colony form is com-

posed of the more simple flagellate Holostomatous monads, and

not of the collar-bearing or Discostomatous varieties. Should

this missing link be discovered, it will, while closely related

to and forming a natural group of the true sponges, occupy the

same relation towards the Gymnozoidal or free and indepen-

dent Discostomatous types as the social and slime-immersed

genus Ophrydium does to Vorticella, Vaginicola, or other

naked and solitary representatives of the higher ciliate order

of the Infusoria.

4 Marine Terrace, St. Helier’s, Jersey,

Oct. 12, 1877.

II.—Notices of British Fungi. By the Rev. M. J. BerKe-

LEY, M.A., F.L.S., and C. E. Broome, Esq., F.L.S.

[Continued from ser. 4. vol. xvii. p. 145.]

[Plates I. & IV.)

1631. Agaricus (Amanita) magnificus, Fr. Hym. Eur.

p- 25; Fl. Dan. t. 2146.

In fir-woods. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson, no. 707.

Our plant differs from the figure quoted above in having a

bulbous base.

Pileus campanulate, even, with scattered mealy patches ;

stem attenuated upwards, transversely scaly. Whole plant

dark liver-red, with the exception of the white adnexed gills.

Allied to A. rubescens, but quite distinct, though variable.

Fl. Dan. tab. 2148. fig. 2, which is referred by Fries to this

species, has, like the agaric before us, a bulbous base. The

wartless variety of A. muscarius occurred last autumn more

than once at Coed Coch, and was very beautiful.

1632. A. (Lepiota) rhacodes, subsp. puellaris, Fr. Hym.

Eur. p. 29.

In woods. Coed Coch. Not uncommon.

1633. A. (Lepiota) biornatus, B. & Br., Journ. Linn. Soc.

x1. p. 502.

In great abundance in a melon-frame, Arthingworth,

* Silliman’s ‘American Journal,’ Feb. 1871; Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.

March 1871.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 2

18 Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fung?.

Northants, July 8, 1876. Exactly agreeing with the Ceylon

specimens, except that the gills are not ventricose.

1634, A. (Lepiota) seminudus, Lasch.; Fr. Hym. Eur.

. 38.

; King’s Lynn, Mr. Plowright. A very delicate little piant.

*A. (Lepiota) gliodermus, Fr. Ic. t. 15. fig. 1

Perthshire, Dr. Buchanan White.

1635. A, (Armillaria) hematites, B. & Br. Pileo hemi-

spheerico jecormo sicco hispidulo ; stipite concolori deorsum

incrassato, solido; annulo spongioso ; lamellis breviter decur-

rentibus.

Amongst fir-leaves. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson.

Pileus about 1 inch across; stem 2 inches high, + inch

thick at the base ; ring scaly beneath.

We cannot point out any species to which it is allied.

Like A. subcavus it is analogous to Lepiote.

1636. A. (Tricholoma) cerinus, Pers. Syn. p. 821; Fr. Ic.

te oigs. 7.

On a lawn. Ballinluig, Rev. J. Stevenson, no. 902.

The yellow gills, contrasted with the brown pileus, make it

a very pretty species. ‘The pileus in our specimens is brown,

which seems to be the more usual colour; but it is sometimes

yellow.

*A. (Tricholoma) tigrinus, Scheeff. t. 89; Fr. Ic. t. 41 inf.

Rev. J. Stevenson, no. 900. On the sea-shore.

Allied to A. gambosus.

It varies a good deal in the scaliness of the pileus. Mr. W.

S. Smith’s plant from Reigate is presumably the same; but

ours can scarcely be called feetid (Cooke, Handb. p. 33).

1637. A. (Clitocybe) socialis, Fr. Ic. t. 49. fig. 2; Hym.

Eur. p. 83. .

Amongst fir-leaves. Downton, Herefordshire. Hereford

Fungus Show, 1876.

1638. A. (Clitocybe) amarella, P.; Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 84.

In woods. Coed Coch, Oct. 19, 1876.

The taste is bitter and disgusting, the smell that of prussic

acid.

1639. A. (Mycena) rubro-marginatus, Fr. Hym. Eur.

. 132.

Var. fusco-purpureus, Lasch.

Amongst dead leaves. Hast Farleigh.

Very distinct from the usual form, having much the appear-

ance of an exotic Marasmius.

1640. A. (Mycena) Zephirus, Fr. Ic. t. 78. fig. 6; Hym.

Kur. p. 133.

On decayed wood. Rev. J. Stevenson. Rose-coloured.

Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi. 19

*A. (Mycena) parabolicus, Fr. Ic. t. 80. fig. 3.

On decayed wood. East Farleigh, Sept. 13, 1876.

*A. (Mycena) atro-cyaneus, Batsch; Fr. Hym. Eur.

p- 141.

On the ground. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson.

1641. A. (Mycena) plicosus, Fr. Ic. t. 81. fig. 4; Hym.

Eur. p. 142.

Killin, Rev. J. Stevenson.

1642. A. (Mycena) amictus, Fr. Ic. t. 82. fig. 3; Hym.

Hur. p. 144.

Amongst leaves. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson.

1643. A. (Omphalia) hydrogrammus, Fr. Ic. tab.71; Hym.

Kur. p. 154.

Coed Coch, Oct. 1876.

1644. A. (Omphalia) umbilicatus, Scheeff.; Fr. Ic. t. 73.

fig. 1; Hym. Eur. p. 155.

Amongst moss. Perth, Dr. Buchanan White.

1645. A. (Omphalia) mawrus, Fr. Ic. tab. 73. fig. 2; Hym.

Eur. p. 156.

On lawns. Coed Coch.

. 1646. A. (Omphalia) sériepileus, Fr. Ic. t. 73. f. 3; Hym.

Eur. p. 157.

Amongt moss and leaves. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson.

1647. A. (Omphalia) pictus, Fr. Ic. t. 77. fig. 4; Hym.

Eur. p. 163.

Killin, Rev. J. Stevenson.

*A. (Pleurotus) mutilus, Fr. Syst. Myc. 1. p. 191; Ic.

tab. 88. f. 4.

Perthshire, Dr. Buchanan White.

1648. A. (Pleurotus) reniformis, Fr. Ic. t. 89. fig. 3; Hym.

Eur. p. 177.

On branches of silver fir. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson.

1649. A. (Leptonia) ethiops, Fr. Ep. p. 152; Ic. t. 97.

fig. 3.

el ibehies, Dr. Buchanan White. Glamis, Rev. J.

Stevenson.

1650. A. (Nolanea) fulvo-strigosus, B. & Br. Pileo conico

griseo ruguloso; stipite tenui furfuraceo-squamuloso, basi

strigis lateritiis hispido ; lamellis adnatis griseis.

On the ground in a wood, near Cortinarius Bulliardi.

Kast Farleigh, Sept. 13, 1876.

Pileus 2 inch across, 4 inch high; stem 2 inches high,

about 1 line thick, clothed at the base with rigid red hairs and

tinted with the same colour above. Spores ‘0005 long, -0003

broad. The peculiar character of the strige separates this

from all other species.

20 Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi.

1651. A. (Kecilia) negrella, Pers. Syn. p. 463.

Perthshire, Dr. Buchanan White.

This appears to be quite distinct from A. atrides ; the stem

: not nigro-punctate above, nor are the gills nigro-denticu-

ate.

1652. A. (Pholiota) Vahlii, Schum., in FI. Dan. t. 1496 ;

Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 214.

On the grassy banks of the railroad. Inver, Dunkeld,

Mr. M‘Intosh.

Fries makes this a variety of A. aureus. Our plant is

exactly that of the ‘ Flora Danica.’

*A,. (Pholiota) terrigenus, Kalkb.

Ballinluig, Rev. J. Stevenson, no. 960.

1653. A. (Inocybe) dulcamarus, Pers. Ic. pict. tab. xv.

fig. 2.

Wn the ground. Pass of Killiecrankie, Rev. J. Stevenson,

no. 950.

We suppose this to be the plant of Persoon, at least that

figured in the ‘ Icones;’ but as the gills are peculiar we think

it better to give a description.

Pileus convex, umbonate, umber, clothed with adpressed -

fibres, the centre breaking up into areolate patches, about

4-4 inch across; stem 1 inch or more high, 1 line thick, of

the same colour as the pileus, scaly below, tomentose above ;

gills clay-coloured, ventricose, margin paler, waved, adnate,

with a strong decurrent tooth; spores even; flesh white;

taste at first pleasant. In one specimen the gills are just as

figured by Persoon. Though he gives in his specific charac-

ter stipite nudo, the stem is represented in the figure as scaly.

In A. furfuraceus we find in the same group specimens with

decurrent and others with adnate gills.

1654. A. (Inocybe) cincinnatus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 228.

Amongst moss. Coed Coch.

Spores granulated or irregular.

This appears to be what Quélet figures under the name of

A. dulcamarus, his A. cincinnatus being rather referable to

that species.

1655. A. (Inocybe) carptus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 230.

On the naked soil. Coed Coch.

Spores even.

In this very difficult subgenus it is of great consequence to

ascertain the nature of the spores, which are sometimes quite

even, at others granulated or irregular in outline, like those of

so many of the Hyporhodit.

1656. A. (Inocybe) Trinti, Wemm. p. 194; Fr. Hym.

Kur. p. 223.

Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi. 21

Ballinluig, Rev. J. Stevenson.

Spores strongly granulated.

*A. (Galera) minutus, Quélet, i. p. 10, tab. 1. f. 5.

In woods amongst moss. Wrotham, Kent, Oct. 1, 1875.

1657. A. (Tubaria) cupularis, Bull. t. 554. f.2; Fr. Hym.

Kur. p. 272.

Ballinluig, Rev. J. Stevenson, no. 919.

*A. (Crepidotus) Rubi, B.; Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 276.

Perthshire, Dr. Buchanan White.

1658. A. (Crepidotus) Phillipsii, B. & Br. Pumilus, um-

brinellus ; pileo obliquo striato glabro ; stipite basi incurvo

solido ; lamellis angustis ventricosis, breviter adnatis.

On grass. Wrekin, W. Phillips, Esq.

_ Pileus about 3 lines across, stem 1-1} line high, spores

"0002 long. <A very distinct species.

1659. A. (Stropharia) thraustus, Kalkb. Fung. Hung.

tab. 15. f.4; Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 286, sub A. sguamoso.

Rannock, Dr. Buchanan White.

1660. A. (Stropharia) scobénaceus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 288.

Glamis, Rev. J. Anderson. ‘Two forms occur, one much

more slender.

1661. A. (Psilocybe) ammophilus, Mont. & Dur. Exp. Sc.

Alg. tab. 31.

On sand. St. Andrews, where it is abundant, Rev. M.

Anderson. There is no doubt that it is a true Psilocybe.

Spores *0005 long, ‘00035 wide.

*A. (Psathyra) Gordoni, B. & Br.; Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 308.

A. aulacinus, Fr. Mon. ii. p. 348.

Abundant on the wood of a cold frame. Coed Coch, Oct.

31, 1876.

1662. A. (Paneolus) sphinctrinus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 311;

Quélet, tab. 8. fig. 5.

_ Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson.

The slender form figured by Quélet.

1663. Cortinarius (Telamonia) quadricolor, Fr. Hym. Eur.

. 378. |

? Coed Coch, Oct. 1876.

1664. C. (Hydrocybe) dilutus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 389.

Coed Coch, Oct. 1876.

1665. C. (Hydrocybe) erythrinus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 396.

In woods. Coed Coch, Oct. 1876.

1666. Paxillus spilomeolus, Fr. Hym. Kur. p. 402; Hoffm.

dentan: 104fie. 1:

Stoke Poges, M. Terry, Esq.

The spotted pileus and dingy spores at once distinguish it

from any Tricholomata with which it might be confounded.

22 Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi.

The stem is sometimes incrassate at the base, sometimes

quite equal.

*P. leptopus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 403.

King’s Lynn, Mr. Plowright. Perthshire, Dr. Buchanan

White.

1667. Hygrophorus pulverulentus, B. & Br. Parvus; pileo

viscoso pulvinato candido ; margine involuto tomentoso ; sti-

pite subeequali farcto, ima basi attenuato, toto roseo-pulveru-

lento-punctato; lamellis crassis decurrentibus acie obtusis

albidis.

Amongst pine-leaves. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson, no. 840.

Pileus about + inch across, stem ? inch high, 1-2 lines

thick. Allied to H. eburneus; but the rose-coloured meal with

which the stem is covered separates it from all other species.

1668. H. nemoreus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 413 (not of Persoon).

Stoke Poges, M. Terry, Dec. 1876. .

Spores white.

1669. H. cinereus, Fr. Atl. Svamp. t. 30, in part.

Rannoch, Dr. Buchanan White.

1670. H. subradiatus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 416.

Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson, no. 574. In pastures.

* H, turundus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 418.

On peat soil. Farragon, Perthshire, at 1700 feet, Rev. J.

Stevenson.

The typical form, which is brilliantly coloured. Fries

makes our no. 1279 a variety under the name of H. mollis.

This also occurs in Scotland.

1671. H. glauco-nitens, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 421.

Pass of Killiecrankie, Rev. J. Stevenson. Marston Trus-

sell.

Distinct from HZ. nitratus. Batsch’s plant is probably A.

scaber. It is certainly no Hygrophorus.

1672. Lactarius vietus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 432.

In woods. Stoke Poges, M. Terry. Abundantly.

1673. L. Terrei, B. & Br. Ceespitosus; pileo corrugato

depresso badio ; stipite basi incrassato pileo concolori auran-

tiaco-tomentoso cavo; lamellis decurrentibus pallidis; odore

eglycino.

Stoke Poges, M. Terry, Nov. 6, 1876.

Pileus $ inch across; stem 3-1 inch high, 2 lines thick.

Allied to L. subdulcis.

1674. Russula semicrema, Fr. Ep. p. 350.

Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson. :

1675. R. xerampelina, Scheff.; Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 445.

Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson.

One of the most distinct species of a very difficult genus.

Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi. 23

1676. R. consobrina, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 447.

Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson.

1677. Marasmius scorteus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 468.

Perthshire, Aug. 1577, Dr. Buchanan White.

A more delicate and smaller species than M. oreades. Dr.

White’s plant approaches closely Batsch’s tig. 109.

1678. M. torquescens, Quélet, tab. 23. f.3; Fr. Hym. Kur.

p- 471.

Amongst oak-leaves. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson.

The gills are finely serrulated. In the very young plant,

when the pileus is conical, there is a slight indication of a veil.

1679. M. languidus, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 473. Agaricus

grossulus, Pers. Myc. Eur. t. 26. fig. 6.

On dead leaves. Hast Farleigh, Sept. 13, 1876.

Just intermediate between the normal form and the short-

stemmed variety figured by Persoon.

Stems pallid; gills strongly decurrent.

1680. Panus patellaris, Fr. Kp. p. 400.

On cherry. Forres, the Rev. J. Keith.

1681. Merulius leticolor, B. & Br. Totus effusus adnatus

lete aurantiacus ; margine tomentoso albo; hymenio e levi

plicato-rugoso ; plicis distantibus.

On sawdust and leaves. King’s Lynn, Mr. Plowright.

We had at first referred this plant to M. aureus; but an

authentic specimen of that species shows that our fungus is

very different and brighter in colour than any other species.

1682. Polyporus leucomelas, Fr. Syst. Myc.i. p. 346.

Aviemore, Rev. J. Keith.

_A curious esculent species, which attains a considerable

size.

Pileus and stem here and there changing to black ; flesh

soft, marbled, pinkish when exposed to the air; pores white,

but soon changing colour, unequal, slightly smuated, shortly

decurrent. Taste pleasant, but slightly astringent. There

are two distinct forms figured by Micheli—the one with a short

obtuse stem, the other with the stem more equal.

We have authentic specimens of both—of the former from

Herr Trog, of the latter from Fries. Mr. Keith’s plant

belongs to the former state. The fungus was eaten by some

small animal, possibly a squirrel.

* Porothelium Friesii, Mont. in Ann. d. Se. Nat. 1836; Fr.

Hym. Eur. p. 595.

Wothorpe, Oct. 7, 1840.

In studying the genus we find three distinct species which

we confounded with P. Fréesi’, from which they differ greatly.

1683. P. Stevensoni, B. & Br. Contextu crassiusculo

24 Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi.

gelatinoso ; margine substuppeo deglubente ; hymenii ver-

rucis distinctis, interstitiis glaberrimis ; globulo apicali dia-

phano limpido luteo.

Glamis, May 1877, Rev. J. Stevenson.

1684. P. Keithii, B. & Br. Arcte adnatum umbrinellum ;

ambitu tenuissimo primum subgelatinoso; verrucis brevibus

demum collapsis, centro gelatinosis.

Forres, Rev. J. Keith.

1685. P. confusum, B. & Br. Arcte adnatum pallidum ;

margine tenuissimo arachnoideo ; contextu primum floccoso-

pulverulento ; verrucis minoribus.

Glen Tanner, Aberdeenshire. Leigh Wood, C. E. Broome.

1686. Hydnum (Resupinatum) Limonicolor, B. & Br. Ad-

natum lete citrinum; aculeis confertis acutis brevibus; mycelio

candido parco |. obsoleto.

On stone buried amongst pine-leaves. Glamis.

The mycelium when present is distributed amongst the

decayed pine-leaves.

1687. H. (Resupinatum) multiforme, B. & Br. Ochro-

leucum primitus lve corticuforme, demum hic illic fertile ;

aculeis congestis acutissimis, deinde pallidis fimbriatis ; con-

textu floccoso-farinaceo.

Glamis, Menmuir.

Very variable, sometimes almost towy, with the margin

inflexed.

1688. H. sordidum, Weinm. p. 370; Fr. Hym. Eur.

. 614,

" Stoke Poges, M. Terry, Nov. 1876.

1689. H. nodulosum, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 616.

On fir-stumps. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson.

1690. Grandinia crustosa, Fr., var. lignorum, Hym. Eur.

O27.

r On fir. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson.

1691. G. mucida, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 626.

Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson, no. 867.

1692. Cladoderris minima, B. & Br. Alba; e basi stipi-

tiformi vel obsoleta oriunda, resupinata; pileo tomentoso ;

hymenio e costis ramosis radiato.

On birch. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson, no. 849.

Flabelliform, from two to three lines across. Though small,

it has exactly the structure of the exotic species.

* Thelephora tuberosa, Grev. t. 178.

Amongst grass and moss. Perthshire, Dr. Buchanan

White, Aug. 1877.

We were delighted to receive this interesting species,

which does not seem to have occurred since the figure of

Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungt. 25

Greville was published. The specimens are not quite so

tuberous, nor, in general, the branches quite so much flattened

as he represents them; but, from the analogy of allied North-

American species, there is no doubt about the identity.

1693. T. crassa, Lév. Ann. d. Sc. Nat. 1844, ii. p. 209;

Bonite, tab. 139. fig. 1.

Berkshire, Sawyer.

Having no type, it is impossible to say positively that it

is Léveillé’s plant, though the description and figure agree.

Widely diffused over soil partially covered with moss, and

forming irregular, thick, rounded, umber-brown masses of a

velvety aspect but not setulose.

1694. Corticium cinnamomeum, Fr. Ep. p. 561.

On birch. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson.

1695. C. citrinum, Pers. Myc. Eur. p. 136.

On thorn. Perthshire, Dr. Buchanan White.

1696. C. violaceo-lividum, Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 655.

On dead wood. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson.

1697. C. limitatum, Mont. Ann. d. Sc. Nat. 1836 ; Py.

Ep. p. 565.

On Cytisus. Perth, Dr. Buchanan White.

We have no type; but though the extreme ciliated margin

is im most places white, the dark zones and dull nodular

hymenium are characteristic.

*C. serum, Pers.; Fr. Hym. Eur. p. 659.

Some specimens come very close to some states of Knedffia

setigera, F'r., to which it is alled.. See Hym. Eur. p. 629.

1698. C, ryphella stuppea, B. & Br. Hrumpens, sessilis,

pezizeeformis, externe stuppea, ex brunneolo albescens ; hyme-

nio fusco.

Bursting through the tender cuticle of broom. Rev. M.

Anderson, "March 1873. *

* Olavaria fusiformis, Sow. t. 234.

Ballinluig, at 2000 feet. Rev. J. Stevenson.

1699. Typhula gracillima, White. Alba, stipite gracillimo

curvo glabro ; clavula elongata.

On various herbaceous plants. Perthshire, Dr. Buchanan

White.

1700. Dacrymyces vermiformis, B. & Br. Minuta grisea

vermiformis ; sporophoris globosis; sporis globosis pallide

fuscis.

On rotten wood. Bathford plantations, C. E. Broome,

April 1, 1877, also April 28, 1876.

Sporophores *0005 inch in diameter ; spores ‘0002.

Puate III. fig. 1. a, plant im situ, magnified ; b, sporophores with

spores, highly magnified.

26 Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi.

* Tilmadoche mutabilis, Rtfki. Physarum nutans, Pers.

This is very properly ‘separated by Rostafinski from Phy-

sarum, in which genus it was always a “‘ vexata queestio.”’

1701. Ostracoderma pulvinatum, Fr. Syst. Mye. ii. p. 214.

Sibbertoft, 1873. On an old sack which had been lying on

a dunghill.

Looks at first sight like a white Diderma (Chondrioderma,

Rtfki.), but not gelatinous in a young state.

Spores 0003 inch long.

1702. Gleosporium Hendersoni, B. & Br. Hypophyllum,

sparsum; gelatina placentiformi ; sporis oblongis; nucleo

colorato.

On orange-leaves in a conservatory. Milton, Mr. J. Hen-

derson.

Spores ‘0005-0006 inch long.

1703. G. viole, B. & Br. Maculis pallidis demum albis ;

pustulis paucissimis vel solitariis, sporis attrantiacis in matri-

cem effusis.

On leaves of violet. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson, no. 893.

The effused spores, especially when developed on large white

spots, make it a very striking species.

1704. Béctridium acutum, B. & White. Candidum, para-

siticum ; floccis deorsum attenuatis, apice acutis 1-3-septatis ;

articulo penultimo tumido. Sc. Nat. iv. p. 162, tab. 2.

fig. 4.

“On hymenium of Peziza cochleata. Perthshire, Dr. Bucha-

nan White.

Distinguished from Bactridium helvelle by its constantly

very acute apex and attenuated base. A specimen from the

same locality sent by Mr. Stevenson had not the same

parasite.

PuatTe III. fig. 2. Threads, magnified.

1705. Cylindrosporium longipes, Preuss, in Sturm, FI. iii.

29, tab. 35.

On the shell of a walnut. Perthshire, Dr. Buchanan

White.

The base of the stem, as in Preuss’s figure, is dark, the upper

part hyaline and breaking up into cylindrical spores, abso-

lutely truncate at either extremity. This is probably Chalara

fusidioides, Sace. Corda’s plant seems different, being white

throughout,

1706. Trichobasis Lynchit, B. in Gard. Chron, Aug. 25,

1877. Maculis parvis pallidis; sporis sparsis raro confluenti-

bus; pseudosporis flavis obovatis pulcherrime echinulatis ;

stipite brevi.

Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi. 27

On a Spiranthes from Trinidad. Kew, Mr. R. Irwyn

Lynch.

Generically distinct from Uredo confluens, var. orchidis,

and different in habit. U. gynandrearum, Cada. iil. tab. 1.

fig. 9, agrees in habit; but the spores are dark, and the pus-

tules bullate.

1707. Ustilago Kuehniana, Wolff; Fisch. de Wald. Ust.

p- 29; Gard. Chron. July 1876.

On Rumex acetosella from permanent meadow-land in Mr.

Lawes’s Park at Rothhamstead, Dr. Gilbert.

Spores ‘00045 inch long.

1708. Protomyces Comari, B. & White. Pustulis fuscis ;

sporis in cellulis tumidis matricis ternis vel solitariis.

On Comarum palustre. Aug. 1877, Loch of Kinordy,

Forfarshire, Rev. M. Anderson.

Resembling at first sight Lsothea pustula, but a true Pro-

tomyces.

The pustules are far more prominent than in P. menyanthis.

Spores °001--0012 inch long, broadly obovate.

Miues1A, White, nov. gen. Peridium incarceratum reticu-

latum, basi inter cellulas matricis radicans ; spore obovate

echinulatze per ostiolum minutuin demum emissz.

1709. M. polygoni, B. & White. Sc. Nat. 1. c. tab. 2.

erie.

On the underside of leaves of Polygonum viviparum. Glen

Tilt, Dr. Buchanan White.

Evidently allied to Endophyllum, but distinguished by its

reticulated thoroughly incarcerated peridium, which does not

burst irregularly, but discharges its spores by a minute pore.

The spores closely resemble those of Uredo pteridum, White,

0012-0017 inch long. Sc. Nat. 7. c. tab. 2. f. 6. .

PuaTe III. fig. 3. a, pseudoperidium with its hyphe; 6, ditto,

crushed ; c, single spore. All more or less magnified.

1710. Isarta sphingum, Schwein. Car. no. 1298; Fr.

Syst. Mye. ili. p. 275.

On pupe of Diptera. Kincardineshire, Mr. Taylor.

Mycelium much branched.

1711. L. tomentella, Fr. Syst. l.c. p. 276.

On beech-leaves and mast. Creeping over the leaves, and

at length sending up clavate fertile heads.

Colour just that of Arcyria nutans.

1712. Stysanus putredinis, Cda, iii. tab. 2. fig. 36.

On decayed leaves. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson, no. 873.

Spores ‘00025-00035 inch long.

1713. Stilbum Stevenson’, B. & Br. Sparsum ; stipite

28 Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi.

brevissimo nigro; capitulo niveo globoso ; sporis minutissimis

globosis.

Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson. Scattered on dead wood, on

which it looks like a very minute Didymium. '

Spores too small to admit of measurement.

1714. 8S. orbiculare, B. & Br. Album; plantulis sparsis

gregariis e macula alba pulverulenta oriundis ; stipite cylin-

drico tomentoso apice quandoque velo lacerato ornato; capitulo

loboso ; sporis oblongis minutis.

On Lindbladia effusa. Aviemore, Rev. J. Keith. Forming

patches an inch or more in diameter ; springing from a white,

thin, pulverulent stratum, which is at length stained by the

Lindbladia. .

Spores 0002 inch long.

At first sight it looks like a parasitic Hydnum.

Puate III. fig. 4. a, plant, nat. size; b, a portion, magnified ; c, spores

of Lindbladia ; d, spores of Stilbum, magnified.

* Aigerita candida, P. Syn. p. 684.

A fawn-coloured form was found at New Pitsligo by the

Rev. J. Fergusson and at Killin by the Rev. M. Anderson.

A form also occurred at Glamis on herbaceous stems, Steven-

son, no. 156. Crocysportum torulosum, Bonorden, tab. iv.

fig. 90, is evidently the same thing.

* Peronospora violacea, B. Outl. p. 349.

On petals of Knautia arvensis. As some doubt has been

expressed about this species, which was found June 30, 1859,

it has been thought advisable to give a figure.

PuaTeE IT. fig. 5. Flocci with spores in situ, magnified. -

*P. calotheca, De B. Ann. d. Sc. Nat. 1863, p. 111.

On Asperula odorata. Rev. J. Fergusson.

1715. P. affinis, Rossman, in Rab. Herb. Mye. ii. no. 489.

On Fumaria. King’s Cliff. Distorting the plant.

1716. Dactylium cervinum, B. & Br. Effusum, pallide

cervinum ; floccis ramosis articulatis; sporis obovatis unisep-

tatis deorsum apiculatis.

On Cytisus laburnum. Ballinluig, Rev. J. Stevenson,

no. 989. Lambley, Notts.

1717. D. spirale, White. Candidum e macula tosta oriun-

dum, floccis spiralibus simplicibus ; sporis magnis uniseptatis

medio constrictis, utrinque obtusissimis. Sc. Nat./. c. p. 161,

tab. 2. f. 3.

On the underside of leaves of Polygonum viviparum. Glen

Tilt, Dr. Buchanan White. Forming little white patches

Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi. 29

consisting of scattered simple spiral flocci 004 inch high. Se.

Nat, fc. p. 162, tabod. £2:

Spores ‘0009-0012 inch long, half as wide.

Pxate IV. fig. 6. a, plant on leaf, slightly magnified; 6, threads;

¢, spores, young and mature, highly magnified.

1718. D. modestum, White. Candidum e macula tosta

ortundum ; floccis simplicibus subrectis vel leviter flexuosis ;

sporis magnis uniseptatis elongatis medio constrictis.

On leaves of Alchemilla alpina. Glen Tilt, Dr. Buchanan

White.

Closely allied to D. spirale, but distinguished not only

by the flexuous threads, but the very different spores, which

are ‘001 inch long, one fourth as much wide.

PuatE IV. fig. 7. a, threads; 6, spores, highly magnified.

1719. Mucor stolonifer, Khrb. Sylv. Myc. Rhizopus nigrt-

cans, Mycetog. tab. x1. 1-7. .

On melon. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson, no. 712.

1720. Desmazierella acicola, Lib. Ann. d. Sc. Nat. 1829,

xvil. p. 83, tab. 6. f. 1,3. Phillips, exsiccata.

Near Shrewsbury, W. Phillips, Esq.

1721. Helvella atra, Kon.; Fr. Syst. Myc. ii. p. 19.

Loch Laggan, Dr. Buchanan White.

*Peziza (Geopyxis) Percevali, B. & Cooke, Mye. fig. 192.

P. ciborium major, Fr. no. 1479.

*P. (Geopyxis) ammophila, Dur. & Lév.; Cooke, Myc.

fig. 100. P. arenaria, no. 1619.

Dr. Cooke has very properly pointed out that the St.-An-

drew’s plant is identical with that from Algeria.

1722. P. (Sarcoscyphe) coprinaria, Cooke, Myce. fig. 149.

On cow-dung. Batheaston, March 1877.

1723. P. (Hymenoscyphe) Candolleana, Lév. Ann. d. Se.

Nat. 1843, xx. p. 232, tab. 7. fig. 4.

Batheaston, C. EK. Broome, raised under bell glass from

Sclerotium pustula.

1724. P. (Calycine) albida, Roberge; Desm. Exs. no.

2004.

On ash-petioles. East Farleigh, Sept. 13, 1876.

1725. Diatrype coramblycola, B. & Br. Pustulis elongatis

bullatis ; ostiolis prominulis asperatis ; sporidiis fusiformibus

3—4-nucleatis.

On cabbage-stalks. Forres, Rev. J. Keith, Apr. 17,

1875.

Sporidia :00035 long. Probably not an uncommon species.

30 = Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungt.

1726. Eutypa aspera, Fr. sub S. eutypa, b, Syst. Mye.

i. p. 478..,

On wood. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson, no. 880.

1727. Spheria maculans, Desm. Exs. no. 1784.

On stalks of dead Brassice. Perth, Dr. Buchanan White.

Sporidia yellow, ‘0014-002 long, multiseptate.

1728. S. Stevensont, B. & Br. Perithecus sparsis hice ilic

congestis ovatis sursum attenuatis; ascis gracilibus; sporidiis

uniseriatis, anguste ellipticis, 2-3-nucleatis.

On dead wood. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson, no. 869.

Sporidia :0002 inch long.

* Chatospheria innumera, Tul. Sel. Fung. Carp. i. p. 253,

tab. xxxill. SS. innumera, B. & Br. Out. p. 395.

On dead wood. Rey. J. Stevenson. Glamis, no. 870.

Sporidia -0003—-00035 inch long.

1729. Cephalotheca sulfurea, Fuckel, Fung. Rhen. no. 2313.

Peritheciis sparsis gregariis, globosis, villo sulfureo tectis,

demum vertice glabris atrisque, denique totis glabris et mox

diffractis ; sporidiis ovatis, hyphis ascigeris multiguttulatis.

On a rotten board in Mr. Spencer Perceval’s grape-house,

Clifton, April 1876.

PuatE IV. fig. 8. a, plant im setw, magnified; b, dark rigid hairs and

various threads ; c, structure of the perithecium ; d, sporangia ; e, sporidia;

Ff, young perithecium produced within the old oue.

The specific character given above is copied from Fuckel.

The sporangia produced within the perithecia on the hypha are

something quite different from anything which occurs in Sphe-

riacet; and perhaps it is better to consider them as asci, though

even then their mode of development is abnormal. Not less

curious is the product of a new perithecium within the old one.

The structure, too, of the perithecium is very singular.

* Dothidea betulina, Fr. Syst. u. p. 554.

Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson, July 6, 1874.

’ Stylospores uniseptate, ‘001 inch long.

* Phacidium Vaccinit, Fr. Syst. 1. p. 575.

Stylosporous state forming little crowded dark specks,

containing Bacteria-like bodies, ‘00016 inch long.

1730. Ascochyta metulespora, B. & Br. Maculis orbiculari-

bus fuscis, peritheciis minutis pallidis, sporis metuleeformibus.

On leaves of ash. Ballinluig, Rev. J. Stevenson, no. 908.

The shape of the spores is singular, like that of the pieces of

wood with which boys play called tipeats (bdtonnets Gall.).

Rey. T. R. R. Stebbing on Sesstle-eyed Crustaceans. 31

III.—Notes on Sessile-eyed Crustaceans, with Description of a

new Species. By the Rey. Toomas R. R. Sressrne.

[Plate V.]

Caprella fretensis, n. sp. (Pl. V. fig. 1.)

The head of this species has a small rostrum, acute in ap-

pearance when viewed laterally, but obtuse when seen from

above. ‘The eyes are small, ovate, slightly protuberant within

the narrow bounds of the head, which is distinguished from

the first pereion-segment only by a minute groove above, the

sides being continuous and converging backwards to the

junction of the first with the second segment; the latter is

long and narrow, widest near its termination, where it receives

the insertion of the second gnathopods. The third, fourth,

and fifth segments are considerably shorter than the second ;

in one specimen they are also decidedly shorter than the

combined head and first segment, but in another specimen

they are nearly equal to them; the third and fourth seg-

ments are widest at the branchial vesicles, the fifth at the end

where the legs are attached ; the sixth segment is the widest

of all, but only about half the length of the fifth; the

seventh is no longer than the sixth, and much narrower.

The pleon is half concealed by the hinder margin of the last

pereion-segment ; it occupies about a third of the width of

that margin, beyond which can be seen a pair of minute

style-like processes or one-jointed pleopoda, and between

these a more conspicuous pair with short convergent pedun-

cles and divergent oval rami.

The upper antenne have the first jomt longer than the

head, and stout by comparison with that somewhat insignifi-

cant organ. ‘The second joint is much longer, the third some-

what shorter than the first; the second is a little, and the

third a good deal furred on the under margin, chiefly towards

the distal end. The flagellum, of fourteen articulations pretty

uniform in length, tapers gradually to a point; almost all

the articulations carry two “olfactory” filaments. The

lower antennee do not reach to the end of the second joint of

the peduncle of the upper. The first portion that projects

distinctly from the head is a very short joint; to this suc-

ceeds oné twice its length, but still short. The next is nearly

double these two combined, more slender, curved, and orna-

mented with two rows of cilia beneath. The next portion is

still longer and has longer fringes. The piece that succeeds

to this is of equal length but diminished breadth and shorter

fringes. Lastly follows a short, narrow, unfringed piece,

32 Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing on Sesstle-eyed Crustaceans.

tipped with two or three short, hooked, compound sete. - The

cilia of the fringes just mentioned appear to be finely plumose.

The first gnathopods are inserted just below the eyes; so that

the dorsal groove-line, which marks the termination of the

head, is well to the rear of them. Of these limbs the basos

is narrow, scarcely so long as the hand; the two following

joints are short and insignificant ; the wrist is also short, but

broad and cup-shaped. The hand is well developed, longer

than broad, swollen out, except at its junction with the finger ;

here and along both edges it has a good crop of bristles. Its

ventral surface also shows some very short stiff-looking down,

and near the base two stout divergent spines, between which

the finger closes down. The finger itself is broad, as long as

the hand; its outer edge curved, its inner edge nearly straight,

serrated with blunt serrations. The whole gnathopod is very

small. Not so the second pair, although in these the thigh is

scarcely longer than the breadth of the second segment. ‘The

wrist also is a small rectangular piece, almost square ; but the

hand is of great size, nearly as long as the segment to which

the limb is attached. The narrowest part of this elongate

hand is at the base; the anterior margin is nearly straight.

The hinder margin is broken a little beyond the middle by a

triangular process surmounted by a small spine; beyond this

process the margin runs on with some slight sinuosity to its

angular termination, where it turns to meet the finger-joint.

The massive finger is set on at right angles to the anterior

margin; and when it is closed the great swelling curve

of its outer edge is brought round into the recess formed

by the process above mentioned; while, under the same

circumstances, the convex portion of its inner curve is over-

lapped by the distal angle of the hand. The portion of the

hand between the distal angle and the triangular process is

furred with long hairs. The branchial vesicles are narrowly

ovate. The fifth, sixth, and seventh pairs of legs scarcely

differ in any respect except size, the sixth being larger than

the fifth, and the seventh than the sixth. In the seventh the

thigh is nearly as long as the segment to which it is attached;

the following joint is quite small; the triangular metacarpus

is about the same size as the thigh, and carries a small group

of setee on the distal exterior angle; the wrist is shorter,

somewhat squared in shape, but broadest distally; it has

pairs. of short sete or spines along the inner edge: the hand

is twice the length of the wrist; it has a concave palm com-

mencing at a third of its length from the wrist, with two

broad, blunt, serrated spines: at its origin, and four poe of

spines along its edge, which, when highly magnified, seem

Rey. T. R. R. Stebbing on Sessile-eyed Crustaceans. 33

to be more or less finely pectinate, with whip-like ends.

The back of the hand carries three or four groups of sete.

ae finger is strong and curved, and matches the palm in

ength.

This species bears a strong general resemblance to Caprella

equilibra, as described by Messrs. Bate and Westwood ; but,

whereas in that species “the head is round and unarmed,”

here the head has a smallrostrum; in that the second pereion-

segment ‘is armed inferiorly, in the ventral median line,

with a long straight tooth,” of which there is no trace in the

present species. In Caprella equilibra the hands of the

second gnathopods have the palms two thirds of their length,

instead of less than half, and are figured with the greatest

width near the base, while in our species the hands, contrary

to what is usual among the Caprellide, widen distally. The

third, fourth, and fifth segments are not unusually short as

in C. cequilibra,

The two specimens which have supplied the above details

were dredged at Salcombe in August 1875, in the estuary,

whence the specific name.

The pair of spines at the palm of the hinder legs seem to

be correlated in an interesting manner with the generic

distinctions which have been established by various authors

in the family of the Caprellide. Thus, in both the known

forms of Proto they are placed at the origin of the palm, are

rather slender, with the inner margin very finely pectinate,

and terminate in a strong, though slightly curved, double

hook. In Protella of Dana and Spence Bate, = Agina of

Kréyer and A. Boeck, the species P. phasma has them at the

base of the palm as in Proto, but short and simple, except for

one minute notch not far from the apex. In Caprella acan-

thifera of Bate and Westwood, the dginella spinosa of A.

Boeck, they are long and slender, situated more than halfway

down the inner margin of the hand, and have the distal por-

tion of their own inner margin finely serrate. They are

both preceded and followed by other pairs of finely pectinate

spines with whip-like ends. In the accepted species of

Caprella, as far as I have had an opportunity of examining

them, namely in the forms known as C. linearis, C. lobata,

C. tuberculata, C. acutifrons, as well as in the new species

just described, the pair of spines nnder discussion agree in

position at the origin of the palm, and are alike in being more

or less boldly serrate on the inner margin, while they exhi-

bit slight specific differences in regard to comparative length,

breadth, and bluntness. F inally Caprella typica of Spence

Bate, = Podalirius typicus of Kroyer and of A. Boeck,

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. 1. 5)

34 Rev. T.R. R. Stebbing on Sesstle-eyed Crustaceans.

described as having the joints of the hinder legs slender,

naked, and destitute of spines. A specimen in my possession,

of C. lobata, has on one side of one of its hands an extra

spine, illustrating the possibility of variation in an animal not

under domestication.

Stimpsonia chelifera, Spence Bate. (Pl. V. figs. 2 & 3.)

This species has been already figured and pretty fully

described by Mr. Spence Bate in his Museum Catalogue, and

by Messrs. Bate and Westwood in their well-known work.

Nevertheless the examination of several specimens taken on

the shores of Torbay has brought to light some peculiarities

that seem well worthy of notice.

The secondary flagellum of the upper antennee is not uniar-

ticulate, but two-jointed, the second articulation being rather

the longer, and the two together slightly exceeding in length

the first articulation of the principal flageilum. In the lower

antenne there is a character which appears to develop itself

only in the adult male. The long penultimate joint of the

peduncle is at the base as deep as the thick deep joint which

precedes it; this dilatation is slight on the upper margin,

where it affects the whole thickness of the joint, but is consi-

derable on the lower margin, where it takes the form of a

large flattened lobe. The preceding joint has its distal margin

more or less deeply indented in all specimens, as if prepared

to give a suitable holdfast to its dilated successor; but from

the variety of the dilatations themselves it may be inferred that

they are only acquired in very advanced age.

In the first gnathopods the long infero-distal process of the

wrist varies greatly in length, sometimes not reaching nearly

to the extremity of the hand. In the space between this

process and the hand, but nearer to the latter than the former,

there is a small tooth, with long sete springing from both

sides of it. Three or four transverse rows of sete line the

lower margin of the wrist. The inner margin of the hand

does not follow the uniform curve of the outer margin, but,

beginning with a concavity, bulges centrally; it has three

rows of sete. There are three other groups on the inner face

of the hand, and two groups on the outer margin, one centrally,

the other distally placed. The coxe of these gnathopods

have the infero-anterior angle produced under part of the

lower margin of the head,

The second gnathopods have a small process at the anterior

distal angle of the.basos. The almost rectangular metacar-

pus has its distal margin fringed with sete of various lengths,

without regularity in the line of insertion; along its lower

Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing on Sessile-eyed Crustaceans. 35

margin the elongated wrist is adorned with several transverse

rows of adpressed sete. ‘There is one row away from the

margin near to the junction of hand and wrist. The lower

margin of the hand exhibits similar rows of sete ; the waved

palm is set with cilia on both sides. In respect of this second

pair of hands the Torbay specimens, with more or less varia-

tion among themselves, differ all of them from that described

by Mr. Spence Bate from Salcombe. The thumb-like pro-

cess curves in towards the finger instead of out and away from

it; its mmner edge is perfectly simple, without any of the

semispiral grooving figured by the author just mentioned ;

it has a quite blunt or truncate extremity, within which is

inserted a strong, bent (or in some cases straight), movable

spine. The length of the thumb seems to depend on the age

of the animal, that specimen in which it is longest having

other marks of advanced life upon it: thus, the wrist-process

of the first gnathopods is very long, the finger-points of the

second gnathopods are worn, and the penultimate joint of the

lower antennz has the large dilatations before described. A

specimen in my collection, unobservantly assigned to Aora

gracilis till its true character was detected by the Rev. A. M.

Norman, has an interesting peculiarity in this second pair of

gnathopods. One is of the usual form; but the other has the

palm nearly straight, not waved, without any thumb or ter-

minal hinged spine. This is an approach to the character of

the female. The gnathopods of the female differ very con-

siderably from those of the male. The two pairs are very

similar in general construction ; but the first are much the

larger. In both, the hands are subequal to the wrists or a

little larger. The hands and wrists are fringed on the lower

margin asin the male. Both these joints are broad, and about

twice as long as they are broad. ‘T'here js no process to the

wrist, or thumb to the hand, but at the lower extremity of the

palm a movable spine in both pairs of gnathopods. The finger

1s internally serrate in each ; and that of the first gnathopods

considerably overlaps the palm.

There is on the whole a close resemblance between the

female of this species, the female of Aora gracilis, and the

female of Microdeuteropus anomalus as figured and described

by Messrs. Bate and Westwood.

The pereiopoda are alike in both sexes. The first two

pairs have the metacarpus and wrist much broader than the

hand; the hand narrows distally. In the three following

pairs, of which the last is considerably the longest, the wrist

is shorter than either -metacarpus or hand. At the extremity

of the hand there is a long bunch of cilia. The telson, seen

36 Rey. T. R. R. Stebbing on Sessile-eyed Crustaceans.

from above, has the hinder margin rounded in the middle,

but produced to an angle on each side of the convexity, neither

of these divisions being produced beyond the other. On each

of the angular portions there is an upright hair. The pedun-

cles of the last uropods are short and thick, with three little

close-set spines distally ; they extend but a little way beyond

the telson. Each peduncle carries a pair of equal branches

scarcely longer than itself.

Cyclura venosa.

I take this opportunity of noticing that Cyclura venosa from

Australia, described in the Linnean Society’s Journal, Zoology,

vol. xii. p. 146, pl. vi., should be called Cycloidura venosa,

the original name having been given in ignorance of its pre-

vious appropriation in another domain of zoology.

Arcturus linearis.

This species has been figured and described in the ‘ Trans-

actions of the Devonshire Association’ for 1874, but there

wrongly named Arcturus gracilis, whereas it is a perfectly

distinct new species. ‘The specific name now chosen refers to

the close resemblance between this product of the Devonshire

waters and the Arcturus lineatus from Algoa Bay, South

Africa, described in this Magazine, August 1873.

Callimerus acudigitata.

This species was described in this Magazine ,in December

1876, both genus and species being new. It has been suggested

tome that the generic characters ought to be separately stated ;

they are as follows:—Antenne subequal ; superior antennz

without secondary appendage ; first pair of gnathopods simple ;

second pair having the carpus infero-anteriorly produced, the

coxe of the second pair covering those of the first. Penulti-

mate pleopoda shorter than either of the other pairs. Telson

simple.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE V.

Fig. 1. Caprella fretensis, n. sp. la. Natural size in linear measure-

ment. 16. Side view of head. le. Pleon, seen from above.

ld. Last segment of the pereion with the pleon, seen from

below. le. Ventral view of the pleon, more highly magnified.

1f. Terminal portion of upper antenna. 14g. Lower antenna.

1A, Terminal portion, more highly magnified. 12. Maxilliped,

seen from below. 1). First gnathopod. 14. Inner face of the

same, more enlarged. 1/. Second gnathopod. 1m. Fifth leg.

ln. Seventh leg. 10. Portion of palm of ditto, showing the

Dr. F. Briiggemann on Pityriasis gymnocephala. 37

pair of serrate spines. 1p. One of the serrate spines, highly

magnified.

Fig. 2. Stimpsonia chelifera, Spence Bate. 2a. Portion of upper antenna,

showing secondary flagellum. 206. Mandible. 2c. Maxilla.

2d. Maxilliped. 2e. Second gnathopod.

Fig. 3. Tail-piece of Stimpsonia chelifera (another specimen), seen from

above. 3a. One ofthe first gnathopods. 36. One of the second

gnathopods. 3c. The other of the second gnathopods.

IV.—On the Young of Pityriasis gymnocephala.

By Dr. F. BrtGGEMANN.

THE sexes of this remarkable Bornean bird are known to

differ in the colour of their plumage, the female showing some

red spots on the abdomen. A young female, sent by Dr.

George Fischer from Moeara Teweh, interior of S.. Borneo,

shows several peculiarities, which I think worth drawing

attention to. Comparing it with the adult male, a specimen of

which was also procured in the same locality by Dr. Fischer,

the signs of its immaturity are found in the smaller terminal

hook of the upper mandible, in the absence of horny tips to

the feathers of the hind neck, in the lower stage of develop-

ment of the rigid feathers on the fore neck, in the pale horn-

colour of the feet and nails (the adult having the former yel-

lowish and the latter blackish), and in the sooty-black (not

deep-glossy-black) plumage. The narrow velvety edgings of

the black feathers are also less pronounced ; and the red colour

in the plumage is a shade lighter than in the adult, rather

scarlet than crimson.

All this is, of course, nothing curious; but the following

characters were scarcely to be expected :—The crown of the head

is entirely bare, without any trace of the papille with which it

is crowdedly covered in the adult; of the large tuft of rigid

brownish grey feathers in the auricular region there is no indi-

cation, the feathers on this spot being of normal structure and

red, like the rest of the head-feathers; breast, belly, and

flanks are scarlet-red, somewhat mixed, in an irregular way,

with black, the basal part of the feathers, or the whole feather,

excepting a broad border, being generally blackish ; it may be

observed that the red edgings, which are much decomposed,

are gradually worn off. The red colour decreases in extent

on the abdomen, where it is confined to the tips of the feathers.

There are also traces of red edgings on the scapularies and

wing-coverts. The thigh-feathers (which are of a uniform

red in the adult) are black, mixed only in the upper part of

the thigh with some red ones.

38 Mr. J. S. Baly on new Genera

Thus the young bird exhibits a far greater amount of vivid

red colour than the adult, and, besides, a different mode of

distribution: it has the under surface of the body for the

greater part red and the thighs black, whereas in the mature

bird the under surface is black and the thighs red. This is,

at all events, anoteworthy fact; yet it is not quite exceptional

among’ birds.

In the young of Tanygnathus luzonensis the head is green

like the greater part of the plumage, and the rump is light

blue; in the adult the upper part of the head is light blwe and

the rump green (Briiggemann, Abh. Ver. Brem. v. p. 38).

The immature Lorius histrio has the whole crown of the

head blue and the fore back crimson; the old bird has the

head almost entirely crimson and the back blue (Briigg. J. ¢.

. 41).

i In Nectarinia flavostriata the wings and tail of the young

bird (the general plumage of which is olive-coloured) are red ;

those of the adult are blackish brown, and the remainder of

its plumage is red (Briigg. /. c. p. 74).

To add an example of a common indigenous bird, we find

that in the young bird of the spotted woodpecker (Picus

major) the crown of the head is crimson, and the upper sur-

face of the body partly marked with white, where the adult

is of a uniform black.

These extraordinary instances of the young birds showing

ornamental colours in parts of the body which are plain-

coloured in the adults can only be explained by the sugges-

tion that the immature plumage gives a recapitulation of

the colours possessed by the ancestors of the species. Thus

the young Picus major shows a stronger resemblance to the

other European species (P. leuconotus, P. Lilfordii, P. medius)

than the adult does; or, in other words, it has kept more

strictly the colours of the common parent of the group.

I am of opinion that many more instances of such conser-

vative ornamental plumages in the young birds can be found

if they are searched for.

V.—Characters of new Genera and of some undescribed Species

of Phytophagous Beetles. By Joseru 8. Baty, F.L.S.

[Continued from ser. 4. vol. xx. p. 386.]

Fam. Chrysomelide.

Chrysomela Jacobyt.

C. oblongo-ovata, convexa, nigra, nitida, capite thoraceque minute

and Species of Phytophagous Beetles. 39

punctatis, hujus lateribus incrassatis, intus sulco foveolato mar-

ginatis ; elytris sat fortiter substriatim punctatis, limbo exteriore

late rufo.

Long. 33—4 lin.

Hab. China, Province of Shantung.

Antenne half the length of the body. Thorax twice as

broad as long; sides nearly straight and parallel from the base

to the middle, thence rounded and converging to the apex,

anterior angles acute; upper surface transversely convex,

minutely punctured, rather more coarsely punctured along the

basal margin; lateral margin thickened, impressed with a

few deep punctures ; the margin is hounded within by a deep,

very coarsely and irregularly punctured groove, the middle

portion of which is less deeply excavated than the rest of its

surface. lytra rather broader than the thorax, broadly

oblong, rather strongly punctured, the punctures arranged in

irregular longitudinal rows ; on each elyton are several smooth

impunctate vitte.

Phyllocharis eximia.

P. elongata, modice convexa, nitida, subtus rufo-testacea, pectoris

medio, pleuris, abdominis basi pedibusque lete cyaneis; supra

lete cyanea, verticis macula thoracisque lateribus latis rufo-

testaceis ; elytris tenuiter punctatis, punctis prope suturam

striatim dispositis, apicem versus fere deletis, singulatim macula

humerali, fascia transversa prope medium, intus abbreviata,

margine exteriore inter maculam et fasciam, vittisque duabus,

una curvata, a basi ad elytri tertiam partem extensa, alteraque

recta, apicali rufo-testaceis.

Long. 5-53 lin.

Hab. Australia, Rockhampton.

Antenne robust, second joint moniliform, third one half

larger than the second, fourth and the following two equal,

each rather longer than the second. Thorax twice as broad as

long; sides straight and parallel, obsoletely sinuate behind

the middle, rounded and converging at the apex; disk smooth,

impunctate, impressed on either side with a distinct fovea; basal

margin distinctly punctured. Llytra oblong, sides parallel,

converging near the apex, the latter acutely rounded.

Phyllocharis Jansont.

P. elongata, modice convexa, rufo-testacea, nitida, pleuris, abdominis

basi, pedibus antennisque obscure metallice ceruleis, his extror-

sum nigris; capitis macula thoracisque maculis duabus, his trans-

versim positis, fuscis ; elytris oblongis, tenuiter substriatim punc-

tatis, punctis apicem versus fere deletis, singulatim macula sub-

40 Mr. J. S. Baly on new Genera

ovata infra callum humerale, plaga magna cuneiformi communi,

a basi ad longe pone medium producta, alteraque oblonga, obliqua,

pone medium posita, intus ad suturam adfixa cyaneis; scutello

nigro.

Long. 33 lin.

Hab. Australia, Rockhampton.

Antenne moderately robust, more than half the length of

the body; second joint short, third and fourth equal, ovate,

each one half longer than the second. Thorax twice as broad

as long; sides straight and parallel, rounded and converging

at the apex, anterior angles obtuse; upper surface excavated

on either side at the base, the excavations deeply punctured ;

disk smooth, impunctate. Elytra broader than the thorax,

oblong, less acutely rounded at the apex than in the preceding

species.

Fam. Gallerucide.

Subfam. HALTICIN2.

Genus NIPHRAA.

Corpus subelongatum, modice convexum. Caput modice exsertum ;

antennis filiformibus, 11-articulatis ; oculis prominulis, integris ;

encarpis contiguis; carina oblonga. Thorax transversus, basi

transversim truncatus, disco ante basin sulco transverso, utrinque |

ad marginem lateralem extenso, impressus. Hlytra thorace multo

latiora, oblonga, punctato-striata, pube sericea sat dense vestita.

Pedes simplices ; femoribus posticis incrassatis ; tibeis apice spina

tieuta armatis ; tarsis posticis ad tibie apicem insertis ; ungui-

culis appendiculatis. Prosternum angustatum ; aéetabulis anticis

apertis.

Type Niphrea hirtipennis.

Closely allied to T’richaltica, but separated from that genus

by the transverse groove of the thorax, which in the present

case extends entirely across the base of the thorax.

Niphrea hirtipennis.

N. subelongata, modice convexa, fulva, nitida, antennis extrorsum

nigro-piceis, pectore, abdomine (apice excepto) elytrisque nigris ;

his pube griseo-argentea sat dense vestitis, granuloso-rugulosis,

subopacis, fortiter punctato-striatis, limbo exteriore, apice am-

pliato, fulvo.

Long. 2-23 lin.

Hab, Lake Nyassa.

Vertex smooth, impunctate ; encarpz subpyriform, contigu-

ous ; antenne nearly half the length of the body, third joint

and Species of Phytophagous Beetles. — 41

equal in length to the second, fourth twice as long as the third.

Thorax one half as broad again as long; sides diverging from

the base to beyond the middle, thence rounded and converging

to the apex ; disk finely but distinctly punctured.

Fam. Hispide.

Cephaloleia gracilis.

Filiformis, subdepressa, nigro-picea, subnitida, minute granulosa,

antennis basi, pedibus, thoracis lateribus elytrorumque plaga

basali rufo-brunneis ; thorace subquadrato, foveolato-punctato ;

elytris elongatis, apicem versus attenuatis, apice late truncatis,

sat fortiter punctato-striatis, interspatiis basi et ad latera con-

vexiusculis, singulatim vitta alba, basi et apice abbreviata, ornatis.

Long. 2 lin.

Hab. Amazons.

Face and front concave, coarsely punctured ; five lower

joints of antennee obscure rufo-piceous, the rest black. Thorax

scarcely broader than long ; sides straight and parallel, slightly

converging towards the apex; anterior angles very obtusely

rounded, the hinder angles acute; basal margin subangulate-

emarginate on either side; median lobe only slightly produced,

obtusely rounded; upper surface transversely convex, im-

pressed with large round punctures, a longitudinal space on

the middle disk impunctate; extreme lateral margin rufo-

brunneous. Scutellum obscure piceous. Elytra elongate,

slightly wider at the base than the thorax; basal margin

oblique, the humeral angle distinct ; sides straight and paral-

lel, slightly converging towards the apex, the latter broadly

truncate.

Cephaloleia subdepressa.

Elongato-ovata, subdepressa, castanea, subnitida, pedibus obscure

fulvis, antennis (articulis basalibus tribus exceptis) nigris; thorace

sat fortiter punctato, piceo, lateribus castaneis; elytris ovatis,

distincte punctato-striatis, interspatiis minute granulosis, ad latera

convexiusculis, pone scutellum leviter transversim rugulosis.

Mas abdominis segmento anali concayo-emarginato.

Fem. abdominis segmento anali rotundato, integro.

Var. A. elytris plus minusve piceo tinctis.

Long. 13 lin.

Hab. Banks of the Amazon.

Face distinctly but not strongly punctured. Thorax about

a third broader than long at the base; sides straight and

nearly parallel in the ¢, less parallel in the ?, rounded at

the apex in both sexes; basal margin deeply concave-emargi-

42 Mr. J. 8. Baly on new Genera

nate on either side, median lobe distinctly produced, obtusely

truncate; upper surface covered with round punctures, middle

disk less closely punctured.

Gonophora tibialis.

Subelongata, subdepressa, pallide rufo-fulva, nitida, elytrorum

dimidio postico antennisque nigris, harum articulo basali intus

ultimisque duobus totis obscure rufis ; thorace medio longitudi-

naliter canaliculato, basi ante scutellum transversim sulcato,

utringue ante medium vitta elevata instructo, rude et crebre

foveolato, interspatiis elevatis, inter se reticulatis ; elytris anguste

oblongis, fere parallelis, apice obtuse truncatis, angulis posticis

distinctis, obtusis, singulatim profunde 8-seriatim foveolatis, tricos-

tatis, costis duabus internis valde elevatis, costa externa medio

interrupta ; tibiis anticis compressis, valde dilatatis.

Long. 3 lin.

Hab. Sulu Islands, New Guinea.

Head smooth, impunctate; anterior margin of clypeus

deeply concave; antenne half the length of the body, first

and second joints short, equal, third nearly twice the length of

the second. Thorax transverse; sides straight and nearly

parallel, abruptly constricted at the apex; surface closely

covered with oblong foves, the interspaces between which

are thickened and .anastomose irregularly with each other; at

the base just in front of the scutellum is a short deep trans-

verse groove, from either extremity of which an oblique

depression extends upwards on the disk. Elytra broader than

the thorax, each with three raised longitudinal coste; the two

inner ones entire, strongly elevated, the outer one interrupted

for the greatest portion of its length ; interspaces between the

coste each with a double row of large deep fovez, interstices

between the fovee transversely thickened ; interspace between

the first and second costa impressed at the base with a triple

row of punctures; extreme apical margin edged. near the

suture with rufo-fulvous.

Gonophora lineata.

Elongata, flavo-fulva, nitida, tarsis nigro-piceis, genibus, tibiis

anticis fere totis, tibiisque intermediis apice piceo tinctis ; anten-

nis nigris, articulo ultimo apice obscure rufo ; thorace convexo,

basi ante scutellum transversim sulcato, utrinque ante suleum

oblique depresso, foveis numerosis magnis impresso, linea media

discoque antico fere impunctatis: elytris thorace latioribus, paral-

lelis, apice rotundatis, minute serratis, dorso subdepressis, singula-

tim tricostatis, costis duabus internis validis, costa externa minus

elevata, medio obsoleta, interspatiis profunde biseriatim foveolatis,

transversim costulatis ; nigro-piceis, costa prima a basi fere ad

and Species of Phytophagous Beetles. 43

apicem, costa secunda ante medium (his costis basi convexis) mar-

gineque exteriore flavis.

Long. 24 lin.

Hab. Sulu Islands, New Guinea.

Antenne slender, more than half the length of the body ;

second joint slightly longer than the first, the third one half

longer than the second, fourth and fifth each equal in length

tothe third. Thorax rather broader than long; sides straight

and slightly diverging from the base to beyond the middle,

thence converging and deeply sinuate to the apex; hinder

angles produced laterally into a short stout tooth ; above con-

vex, cylindrical at the apex, flattened towards the base.

Scutellum piceous, its apex broadly truncate. Apex of ante-

rior tibia curved inwards and produced into an acute tooth.

Gonophora Horsfieldi.

Filiformis, nigra, nitida, tarsis piceis; thorace basi et apice rufo-

piceo, subcylindrico, ad latera foveolato-punctato, apice punctorum

serie unica impresso, disco levi, basi transversim sulcato et utrin-

que ante suleum excavato; elytris subparallelis, apice obtuse

rotundatis, minute serratulis, fulvis, apice nigris, singulatim bicos-

tatis, costis valde elevatis, integris, interspatiis profunde biseria-

tim foveolatis, interstitiis apicem versus transversim costulatis ;

pedibus robustis.

Long. 2 lin.

Hab. Java.

Antenne rather slender, more than half the length of the

body, black, the two lower joints obscure piceous ; first and

second joints short, equal, the third rather longer. Thorax

rather broader than long; sides rounded, constricted at base

and apex, hinder angles produced laterally into a short obtuse

tooth.

Gonophora crassipes.

Elongata, angustata, flava, nitida, tarsis antennisque piceis, his

extrorsum nigris; elytrorum macula apicali nigro-picea ; thorace

transverso, parce foveolato-punctato, basi transversim sulcato et

utringue ante sulcum oblique impresso, apice cylindrico, serie

unica punctorum impresso; elytris parallelis, apice rotundatis,

integris, singulatim bicostatis, costis valde elevatis, integris, inter-

spatiis foveis magnis biseriatim dispositis profunde impressis,

interstitiis apicem versus transversim costulatis ; tibiis crassis.

Long. 14 lin.

Hab. Kai Island.

Antenne half the length of the body, seven lower joints

obscure piceous, the rest black ; first and following three joints

44 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on the Minute Structure

equal in length. Thorax with its sides obliquely diverging

from the base to beyond the middle, thence rounded and con-

verging to the apex, the latter abruptly constricted.

Cephalodonta Haroldi.

Cuneiformis, subdepressa, nitida, subtus nigra, thoracis lateribus,

femoribus tibiisque rufo-fulvis ; supra lete rufo-fulva, antennis

nigris, articulis rufo variegatis ; thorace subquadrato, lateribus

obsolete angulatis, angulis anticis antrorsum productis; disco

transversim convexo, ante basin transversim depresso, profunde

foveolato-punctato; elytris a basi apicem versus leviter ampliatis,

apice obtusis, leviter serratulis, angulo postico distincto, profunde

foveolato-punctatis, punctis striatim dispositis, hic illic confusis,

interspatiis ad latera et ad apicem elevato-vittatis, hic illic irregu-

lariter verrucosis.

Long. 33-33 lin.

Hab. Columbia, river Magdalena.

Nearly allied to C. tarsata, at once known by the coarser

punctuation and by the irregular surface of the elytra.

VI.—On the Minute Structure of the Corals of the Genera

Heliophyllum and Crepidophyllum. By H. ALLEYNE

Nicuotson, M.D., D.Sc., F.L.8., Professor of Natural

History in the University of St. Andrews.

Genus HELIOPHYLLUM*.

Heliophyllum, Hall, in Dana’s ‘ Zoophytes,’ Explor. Exped. vol. viii.

p. 356, fig. 3, 1846.

Gen. char. Corallum simple or compound, usually turbi-

nate, cono-cylindrical or cylindrical, rarely massive. Increase,

in the simple forms, by simple calicular gemmation. Epitheca

complete, thin, with encircling striz and annulations of growth.

Tabule not complete, but confined to a more or less exten-

sively developed central area. Septa well developed, of two

orders, a greater or less number of the primary septa almost

always passing inwards to the centre of the visceral chamber,

where they become flexuous and unite with one another in

an irregular network. In cross section the septa are invari-

ably crossed by conspicuous cross bars or denticulations.

* Descriptions of the characters of Heliophyllum and Crepidophyllum

formed part of a paper, by Mr. James Thomson and myself, which was

laid before the Royal Society of Edinburgh in the session 1875-76, and

an abstract of which was published in the ‘ Proceedings,’ vol. ix. No. 95,

p. 149.

of Heliophyllum and Crepidophyllum. 45

An external vesicular area feebly developed and often almost

absent. Dissepiments of two orders :—those of the first order

very strongly marked, and forming a series of strong ascend-

ing ridges, which run inwards and upwards in an arching

manner, forming the cross bars on the septa as seen in trans-

verse sections, and appearing on the free edges of the septa in

the calice as so many spines or teeth; those of the second

order being more delicate, and running in an arched manner

inwards and downwards, often producing a greater or less

amount of vesicular tissue in the exterior zone. No true

columella is present ; but those of the primary septa which

reach the centre are often elevated to form a small eminence in

the bottom of the cup.

In the typical species of Heliophyllum the corallum is

essentially simple, and is usually more or less turbinate and

conical in form, as in H. Halli, Edw. & H.; H. canadense,

Bill.; H. colbornense, Nich.; and LH. elegantulum, Nich. &

Thoms. These primarily simple forms, however, very com-

monly produce buds by simple calicular gemmation (see a

paper by the writer, Trans. Royal Soc. Edinb. vol. xxvii.

p. 238), or by what Lindstrém has termed “ uniserial gem-

mation.” In these cases the polype, originally and essentially

simple, sends up from its oral disk a single bud. The primi-

tive calice may or may not be obliterated by the gradual

growth and extension of the epitheca over it; and the secon-

dary calice may or may not produce a tertiary bud in the

same manner as that in which it was itself produced. Some-

times the process stops with the production of one or two

buds ; at other times it goes on by fits and starts, by periodic

restrictions of growth and efforts at reproduction, till the

corallum assumes the form of a series of short turbinate cups

or inverted cones, superimposed upon one another in the same

longitudinal axis, the younger upon the older. There are

also not wanting instances, within the limits of the genus

Heliophyllum, in which the old corallite throws out two, three,

or more buds from its oral disk ; though this process is never

carried so far as to produce large compound masses. Finally,

in one form at present referred to Heliophyllum (viz. H. colli-

gatum, Bill.) the corallum is truly and essentially compound,

forming large fasciculate masses of cylindrical and closely

approximated corallites.

The epitheca is complete, usually thin, and marked with

numerous delicate encircling lines, generally along with well-

marked accretion-ridges.

The form of the calice varies. It is rarely of any great

depth, as compared with the proportional bulk of the coral-

46 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on the Minute Structure

lum ; and its floor may be flat, or may exhibit a small rounded

eminence formed by the primary septa. The principal feature

of importance presented by the calice is, that the free edges

of the septa are invariably furnished with prominent spines,

formed by the terminations of the ascending dissepiments.

A, cross section of Heliophyllum Halli, E. & H., of the natural size,

showing the manner in which the septa are continued to the centre,

and showing the arched ascending dissepiments, but having the other

dissepiments omitted. B, vertical section of H. Halli, showing the

central tabulate area, and both the ascending and descending series of

dissepiments. OC, cross section of Crepidophylhun subcespitosum, the

descending series of dissepiments being, as before, omitted: twice the

natural size. D and E, cross sections of the same species, of the

natural size. (D shows the central tabulate area completely closed

in by the central tube; and E exhibits the cut edges of some of the

delicate descending series of dissepiments.) IF, vertical section of a

fragment of the same species, twice the natural size, showing the

central tabulate area, with its enveloping wall, and the ascending and

descending sets of dissepiments. J is slightly generalized, and

some details have been omitted. All the specimens are from the

Hamilton group of the State of New York and of Ontario.

The internal structure of the corallum in Heliophyllum is

somewhat complex, but is rendered readily intelligible by

means of transverse and longitudinal sections. The tabule

of Heliophyllum and Crepidophyllum. 47

are seen in longitudinal sections (fig. B) occupying a central

area of variable width. As a rule the tabulate area is of com-

paratively small extent, and the tabule are somewhat remote

and irregular ; but sometimes these structures occupy a con-

siderable space, and are arranged with considerable regularity

and close together.

The septa (fig. A) are always very well developed; and

both primary and secondary septa are invariably present, so

far as I have observed. All the primary septa extend to

the immediate vicinity of the centre of the visceral chamber ;

but a large number of them, sometimes all of them, stop short

of the actual centre. They all, however, become more or less

flexuous as they approach the centre ; and, as a general rule,

a certain proportion of them continue inwards till they become

connected in a loose and irregular network, though they in no

case form a central cellular mass. Nor is there, under any

circumstances, any true columella. The secondary septa,

again, are very well developed, and usually extend to at least

half, or even two thirds, of the length of the primary septa.

Lastly, both the primary and secondary septa exhibit in cross

sections a variable number of conspicuous cross bars (fig. A),

which give to them an exceedingly characteristic appearance,

though this cannot be regarded as peculiar to the genus,

These cross bars are confined to the exterior portions of the

septa, and are wanting centrally. They are formed by the

transverse section of the ascending dissepiments ; and as they

run directly across the septa, it is evident that the dissepiments

are placed at corresponding points on the two sides of each

septum. Inno case, however, do the cross bars formed in

this way extend from one septum to those directly conti-

guous to it, but they are always confined to their proper sep-

tum ; and they do not correspond in position in neighbouring

septa.

"The most characteristic features in the structure of Helio-

phyllum are due to the very remarkable form and arrange-

ment of the dissepiments—an arrangement which has been

(but erroneously) supposed to be peculiar to this genus. There

are two groups or orders of dissepiments (fig. B), which inter-

sect one another nearly at right angles, those of the one series

having an ascending direction as regards the corallum, whilst

those of the other are descending. The dissepiments of the

ascending series form a group of strong curved ridges, directed

in an arched manner upwards and inwards from the wall

towards the centre, with the convexities of the arches up-

wards. When seen in longitudinal sections, they are never con-

tinuous from the wall to the free edges of the septa, but they

48 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on the Minute Structure

appear as successive rows of discontinuous ridges. Nor do

they ever extend so far from any one septum as actually to

reach the septa immediately contiguous to it. On the contrary,

they occur in reality as so many strong ridges which are

developed on the sides of each septum, and always in precisely

corresponding positions on the two sides of any given septum.

Hence it is that they appear in the calice as so many spines

on the free edges of the septa, and in cross sections as so

many cross bars intersecting the septa. Hence, also, in

silicified specimens, in which the interior is exposed, they

appear as curved striz or ridges on the otherwise plain sides

of the septa; and this appearance is not due to any disappear-

ance or destruction of the dissepiments subsequent to the

death of the polype, but is really due to the inherent form of

these structures.

The dissepiments of the second order are exceedingly deli-

cate, and are much less marked than those of the preceding

series, which they intersect approximately at right angles.

They are directed inwards and downwards, from the wall to

the centre of the visceral chamber, and they are continuous

between contiguous septa. ‘They form a series of lenticular

vesicles, which are seen in longitudinal sections (fig. B) to be

arranged in oblique rows, directed inwards and downwards,

with their convexities upwards. The extent to which they

are developed, however, varies greatly in different cases ; and —

though they are always preeminently developed in the outer

portions of the corallum, they are never present in such num-

bers as to give rise to the conspicuous exterior zone of vesi-

cular tissue which forms such a marked feature in corals such

as the typical Cyathophylla.

The genus Heliophyllum owes its name to the eminent

American paleontologist, Prof. James Hall; but its first pub-

lication was in Dana’s great work on the corals (op. jam cit.).

It was originally regarded as nothing more than a subgenus

of Cyathophyllum; and no higher rank is assigned to it by

Dana than this. In reality, however, it cannot be placed

even in the immediate vicinity of Cyathophyllum proper, with

which it has hardly any characters in common. ‘Though this

constitutes the first published description of the genus, it had

been figured previously to this date, as the Strombodes helian-

thoides of Phillips (‘ Paleozoic Fossils,’ pl. v. fig. 13, 1841)

appears to be undoubtedly a species of Heliophyllum.

The first description giving any thing like a really accurate

conception of the structure of the corallum in the genus Helio-

phyllum is that published by Milne-Edwards and Haime (Pol.

Foss. des Terr. Pal. p. 408). They define the genus as

of Heliophyllum and Crepidophyllum. 49

follows :—‘ Corallum simple, subturbinate. Septa well deve-

loped, and giving origin laterally to lamellar prolongations,

which are directed from the wall towards the centre, in an

ascending and arched direction, so as to constitute irregular

tabule in the central area. These lamellar prolongations are

united circumferentially by vertical plates.” This defini-

tion, however, is not only deficient in its details, but it is

erroneous in the important point that the tabule of the central

area are considered as formed by prolongations from the

ascending dissepiments, whereas these structures, in reality,

are wholly independent of one another.

By Mr. Billings (Can. Journ. new ser. vol. iv. p. 124) the

genus Heliophyllum is defined as follows :—‘‘ Corallum simple

or aggregate; radiating septa well developed, obliquely

striated on their sides by thin elevated ridges, which extend

from the outer wall towards the centre. ‘These ridges are

connected by numerous thin lamine which divide the spaces

between the septa into small “sublenticular cells. The trans-

verse diaphragms are thin, flexuous, and confined to the

central portion of the coral.” This definition likewise omits

many characters of importance; and the distinguished Cana-

dian paleontologist is certainly in error in concluding that

“the only difference between this genus and Cyathophyllum is

the absence of the curved striae from the septa of the latter.”

By Dybowski (Mon. der Zoanth. scler. rug. aus der Silur-

formation &c. p. 83) the genus Heliophyllum is placed in a

special family, Craspedophyllide, along with the two new

genera Acanthophyllum and Craspedophyllum, the only

characters assigned to the family being that there is no acces-

sory wall, that the septa are complete, and that the sides of

the septa are furnished with lateral outgrowths. As all these

characters, however, might be predicated of other genera, it

will hardly be possible to retain this family as it is at present

constituted. Finally, a description of the generic characters

of Heliophyllum, drawn chiefly from the beautiful silicified

specimens of the Corniferous Limestone of North America,

was published by the present writer (‘ Rep. on the Paleon-

tology of Ontario,’ part i. p. 24, 1874).

As regards the affinities of the genus Heliophyllum, it is

_ certainly related to Cyathophyllum ; but the differences between

these two genera are so many and so great that it cannot be

said that the relationship is by any means a very close one.

If we confine our attention to the simple and more typical

members of the genus Cyathophyllum, the chief points of

relationship with Heliophyllum are to be found in the pre-

sence of an external vesicular area in both groups, in the

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. 1.

50 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on the Minute Structure

restriction of the tabule to a comparatively limited central

zone, and to the fact that a certain number of the septa pass

inwards to the centre, where they become more or less twisted

together. ven in these points, however, the agreement is far

from complete. In Cyathophyllum the exterior zone of vesi-

cular tissue is invariably present, is largely developed, and is

composed of very numerous minute cells; in Heliophyllum

this zone is never largely developed, is sometimes altogether

wanting, and is always composed of comparatively large cells,

so as never to constitute a really conspicuous feature. Again,

in the typical Cyathophylla the primary septa extend

inwards to the centre, where they are twisted together so as

to form a sort of spurious columella; in Heliophyllum, on the

other hand, it is never more than a comparatively limited

number of the primary septa which are continued inwards to

the centre of the visceral chamber, and these, instead of be-

coming twisted together, unite with one another to form a loose

and irregular network. When, however, we come to examine

the differences between these two genera, they are found to

materially outweigh the points of similarity. The species of

Heliophyllum are, more particularly, fundamentally distin-

guished from those of Cyathophyllum by the presence of the

peculiar arched lamelle which are directed inwards and up-

wards along the sides of the septa, appearing on the free edges

of the septa within the calice as so many teeth or spines, and

constituting the characteristic cross bars by which the septa

are seen in transverse sections to be intersected at regular in-

tervals. No structure in any way capable of confusion with

this has ever been detected in any Cyathophyllum.

Lindstrém has suggested that Paleocyclus, E. & H., will

probably be found to be allied to Heliophyllum; but I am

unable to confirm this suggestion. The free edges of the

septa in Palwocyclus ave denticulated in a manner super-

ficially similar to what is seen in Heliophyllum ; but vertical

and transverse sections show that this denticulation is pro-

duced in a different way. At the same time the form of the

corallum in Paleocyclus is quite unlike that of Heliophyllum,

and the discoid forms are wholly destitute of tabule.

The nearest ally to Heliophyllum is undoubtedly the genus

Crepidophyllum. In this genus we find the central tabulate

area of Heliophyllum and the same scantily developed external

vesicular area ; whilst the free edges of the septa are rendered

denticulate, and their transverse section is cross-barred by the

same series of strong lateral arched lamelle. In many re-

spects, therefore, we find a complete resemblance between

Heliophyllum and Crepidophyllum. At the same time the

of Heliophyllum and Crepidophyllum: 51

latter is distinguished fundamentally by the fact that the cen-

tral portion of the tabulate area is enclosed by a distinct and

separate wall, with which the primary septa become directly

connected, the central space thus enclosed usually opening at

one point to form a wide fossette bounded by two primary

septa and containing two or three short septa.

There is also a close relationship between Heliophyllum and

Phillipsastrea, E. & H. The edges of the septa are occa-

sionally denticulated in the latter genus in a manner appa-

rently similar to that which obtains in Heliophyllum ; and there

is also asmall central tabulate area. How far this resemblance

is really founded upon identity of structure, I am not at this

moment in a position to determine. At any rate, the genus

Phillipsastrea is readily distinguished from Heliophyllum by

the fact that the corallites of the former are wholly destitute

of a proper wall, and become united by the confluence of

septo-costal radii.

It may be mentioned, finally, that there are some species at

present referred to Acervularta (such as A. profunda, Hall,

and A. Davidsoni, EK. & H., both from the Devonian forma-

tion) in which the edges of the septa are denticulated, and

their transverse section cross-banded, as in the genus Helio-

phyllum. The more intimate structure of these forms, however,

still awaits elucidation.

So far as at present known, the genus Heliophyllum is ex-

clusively restricted im its range to the Devonian formation,

being known to occur in both the New and the Old World at

this horizon.

CrEPIDOPHYLLUM, Nich. & Thomson.

Crepidophyllum, Nicholson and Thompson, Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinb.

vol. ix, no, 95, p. 149.

Corallum simple or compound—in the former case cylindrical

or cono-cylindrical, in the latter case forming large fasciculate

masses. Increase by lateral gemmation in the compound

species. Epitheca complete, thin, with encircling strice and

conspicuous annulations of growth. ‘T'abule not complete, but

confined to a more or less extensively developed central area,

the median portion of which is enveloped in a distinct accessory

wall, and thus shut off from the rest. The median tabulate

tube (fig. C) thus formed may be completely enclosed ; but

more commonly it is open at one point, and the two extremi-

ties of the horseshoe thus formed become directly continuous

with two of the primary septa, which in this way include a

wide septal fossula, within which are contained two or three

short septa. The remainder of the primary ae are well

52 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on the Minute Structure

developed, and extend from the epitheca to the accessory wall

surrounding the central tube, with which they become directly

connected. The primary septa never, however, extend into

the interior of the central tube ; and they alternate with well-

developed secondary septa of more than half their own length.

The calice is moderately deep, and exhibits at its bottom a

small flat space formed by the upper end of the central

tabulate tube. The free edges of the septa within the calice

are denticulated ; and the cross section of the septa shows them

to be intersected by conspicuous cross bars, these appearances

being produced by a series of strong arched lamellar dissepi-

ments, which are developed at corresponding points on the

two sides of each septum, and are directed upwards and in-

wards towards the centre. There is also a second series of

more delicate dissepiments, which connect the septa with one

another, are directed downwards and inwards, and give rise in

longitudinal sections to a larger or smaller amount of exterior

vesicular tissue.

It will be seen from the above description, that in many

respects there is a very close relationship between Crepzdo-

phyllum and Heliophyllum. This is especially seen in the

structure of the endothecal dissepiments, which are precisely

the same in the two genera. In both we have a double series

of dissepiments (figs. B & F), which intersect one another at

high angles, those of the first series running upwards and in-

wards, and those of the second series running downwards and

inwards. In both, the dissepiments of the first series are so

far peculiar that they do not actually connect contiguous septa,

but have the form of strong curved or arched ridges, which are

developed on the sides of the septa and at precisely corre-

sponding points on the opposite sides of each individual sep-

tum. Hence in both genera the dissepiments of this series give

rise to three very characteristic and peculiar appearances :

(1) the free edges of the septa in the calice are marked with

blunt spines or teeth; (2) the sides of the septa, as seen in

longitudinally fractured specimens, exhibit a series of pro-

nounced striz or ridges, directed upwards and inwards in an

arched manner, with their convexities upwards; and (3) the

cross section of the septa, both primary and secondary,

shows them to be intersected by conspicuous cross bars. In

both Crepidophyllum and Heliophyllum, again, we find a

second series of dissepiments, which are much more delicate

in structure, and are directed approximately inwards and

downwards, and which actually connect contiguous septa with

one another. ‘These dissepiments are seen, in longitudinal

sections, to form a series of comparatively large-sized vesicles,

of Heliophyllum and Crepidophyllum. oD

which are strongly arched and have their convexities directed

upwards. Though most largely developed in the external

parts of the coral, the vesicles formed by the dissepiments of

this series are variable in amount, and can hardly be said to

constitute a distinct exterior vesicular zone, such as is so

characteristic of the true Cyathophylla.

With these remarkable points of agreement we find the

following equally remarkable points of divergence, by which

Crepidophyllum is distinguished not only from Heliophyllum,

but from all other known genera of the Rugose Corals :—(1)

The central tabulate area, in most respects, closely resembles

that of Heliophyllum, the tabule being remote, often more or

less arched, and sometimes uniting with one another. ‘The

central portion of this area, however, is. shut off from the rest

of the visceral chamber by a secondary investment or accessory

wall, so that there is constituted a kind of central pipe or

tube (fig. F), which is crossed by the tabula, and runs

down the centre of the corallum. (2) The central tabulate

tube thus constituted, however, is only rarely quite complete :

usually it is open on one side, and its investment or wall

becomes continuous at this opening with two of the primary

septa, which run to the margin of the corallum. (3) By means

of these two primary septa and the secondary wall there is

thus enclosed a large, somewhat horseshoe-shaped septal fos-

sula (fig. C), within which are contained two or, more com-

monly, three short septa. (4) The remaining primary septa

are continued inwards till they meet the wall of the central

tube, with which they become coalescent. They do not, how-

ever, extend into the interior of the tube; and there is there-

fore no similarity between their arrangement and that which

obtains in Heliophyllum, where a certain number of the pri-

mary septa pass inwards to the centre of the visceral chamber,

and become loosely connected with one another there. Indeed

I am not acquainted with any genus in which any close

approximation to the peculiar structure of the central portion

of the corallum in Crepidophyllum can be found. ‘There is no

other recorded genus in which the median portion of the

central tabulate area is partitioned off by a distinct wall, with

which all the primary septa are connected directly, and in

which they terminate.

The genus Orepidophyllum contains two species of corals

from the Hamilton formation (Devonian) of North America.

One of these corresponds with a portion of the group of forms

which I formerly described under the name of Heliophyllum

subcespitosum (Geol. Mag. new ser. dec. u. vol. 1. p. 58,

pl. iv. fig. 9) ; and as it comprises the most typical members

54 Mr. W. J. Sollas on two new and

of this group, it must now be known under the name of

Crepidophyllum subceespitosum. The remaining forms origi-

nally included under the title of H. subcespitosum are really

referable to Heliophyllum, of which they constitute a separate

species (H. elegantulum, Nich. & Thomson). The other form of

Crepidophyllum is the large compound coral which was origi-

nally described by Mr. Billings under the name of Diphyphyl-

lum Archiact, but which turns out on microscopic examination

to be unquestionably a species of Crepidophyllum.

VII.—On Two New and remarkable Species of Cliona.

By W. J. Souuas, M.A., F.G.S., &e. .

[Plates I. & II.]

1. Cliona mucronata (mihi).

(Examined in the dried state.)

Sponge occupying a number of chambers excavated in the

solid calcareous base of a species of Isis.

Chambers of various forms, oval, spherical, or irregular,

joined together in a single series or in more complex groups

by constricted apertures or by narrow stolon-like tubes, each

of which is usually furnished with a spicular diaphragm.

Spicules of three kinds :—1, a straight acuate (PI. IL. figs.

1-3), having a cylindrical shaft, which terminates at one end

in a more or less spherical head and at the other is rounded

off bluntly and then produced axially into a short sharp spine

or mucrone ; average length 0-004 inch, breadth across the

head and rounded end 0°0006, and across the neck 0-0004,

mucrone about 0°0002 inch long. 2, a slender pin-like acuate

(Pl. Il. figs. 6,7), straight or curved, with a more or less

spherical head and a sharp point; length 0°0073 inch, breadth

across the head 0:0004, across the shaft 0°0002. 3, a minute

or flesh-spicule (Pl. II. fig. 9), body spirali-sinuously curved

once or oftener, or straight, irregularly spined ; length 0-0006

inch.

Diaphragms irregularly disciform (Pl. I. figs. 2, 3, 6), coni-"

cal (figs. 5, 9), or tubular (figs. 4, 10) and open at both ends ;

when conical, perforated by the truncation of the apex (fig. 5)

or imperforate (fig. 9); circumferential edge of disk-like forms

or the base in the case of the other two forms, attached to the

walls of the containing tube or constricted aperture, across

which the diaphragm extends transversely. Composed chiefly

remarkable Species of Cliona. ae)

of the goad-like or first kind of spicules, which are packed

closely together side by side, normal to the walls they form

(fig. 14)—their globular heads forming the exterior (fig. 15),

and their mucronate ends the interior surface of the dia-

phragms. The interstices between the spicules filled with

a tough brownish-coloured kerataceous cement, A number of

both the goad-like and the slender pin-like spicules lie on the

outer surface of the diaphragms, some taking a circumferential

and others a longitudinal direction; in the case of the disk-

like and imperforate conical forms, these radiating superficial

spicules form a wisp-like cap (fig. 9) over the apex or the

centre as the case may be, over which also their points meet

and cross one another, while their heads are turned towards

the circumferential edge. A few of the minute flesh-spicules

occur along with the others; and thus the spiculation of the

diaphragms is as complete as that of the sponge.

The diaphragms have a constant thickness, viz, that of the

leneth of the goad-like spicules; but they vary in diameter

according to the size of the aperture they fill,

Habitat. In the calcareous skeleton of Jsis, sp, (Deciduous

specimen.)

Locality. (?)

Remarks, In examining the débris from a specimen of Js?s,

sp-, which I had broken to pieces for another purpose, I came

across one of the singular mucronate spicules which form the

staple spicule of this sponge ; and taking it to belong to some

unknown member of the Suberitide, I set to work to discover

the organism from which it had been derived. I then found

certain curious patelliform bodies (the diaphragms already

described), which on examination proved to be mainly com-

posed of this kind of spicule; but since these bodies were

wholly unlike any sort of sponge with which I was acquainted,

I concluded that they were wanting in some of their parts,

and continued my search in the hope of discovering one more

perfect than the rest; then I met with them, 7m sctw, in the

chambers of our Cliona, to which they evidently belonged.

Now arose a question as to their real relations to this sponge.

And here only two alternatives presented themselves to my

mind: either they were in some way connected with its pro-

pagation, embryos or “ seed bodies ;” or else they performed

the office of septa or diaphragms. But the only known

method of propagation amongst the Clionide is by means of

ova, which they produce plentifully, giving rise to ellipsoidal

gastrule provided with all the forms of spicule proper to the

adult sponge. Thus the possession of a full complement of

spicules is a character common to the bodies under considera-

56 Mr. W. J. Sollas on two new and

tion and to the embryos of the Clona. On the other ‘hand,

however, in the embryos of Cliona no wisp-like cap has been

observed; and no known embryo of Cliona or of any other

sponge exhibits the regular and close arrangement of spicules

which is to be seen in the walls of our structures; the spicu-

lation of the young Cliona is in the highest degree confused,

presenting no trace of order or arrangement. ‘These facts are

sufficiently important; but when in addition we find the dia-

phragms, as we may as well call them at once to avoid peri-

phrasis, exhibiting such a great diversity of form and size, and

this always in exact correspondence to the size and shape of

the orifices or tubes they occupy, and when, moreover, we

find them invariably attached to the sides of these tubes or

orifices by one circumferential edge, we must, I think, exclude

from the question all notion of attributing an embryonic nature

to them.

There then remains, so far as I can see, only the other

alternative ; and the facts which tell most strongly against the

previous supposition are just such as lend most support to this,

the complete justification of which is to be found im the con-

stancy with which the diaphragms occur just at the apertures

of communication between adjoming chambers and no where

else. This is an adaptation which Mr. Carter tells me is not

to be found in the case of the embryos of Cliona; but there

can be no doubt about its existence here. By an observer

examining the chambers of our Cliona for the first time, it

might perhaps be for a moment called in question, since on

looking into one of these chambers one may sometimes see, as

if simply adhering to its walls, some four or five diaphragms

looking just like so many limpets seated on the walls of a hole

in a rock, and giving one no hint as to the existence of aper-

tures concealed beneath them; if now, however, we remove

these little bodies one by one with a fine needle, we shall

disclose beneath each a corresponding opening leading directly

into an adjoining chamber. This experiment I have per-

formed several times, and always with the same result. That

these organs are peculiar to the constricted apertures can

therefore admit of no reascnable doubt; and their dia-

phragmatic nature seems to follow as a matter of course.

Why such diaphragms should exist, what is their precise

function in the economy of the sponge, is another question,

and one to which, in the absence of accessible evidence, I do

not feel much inclined to hazard an answer ; though if one

must conjecture, one might suggest that they may act like the

fixed ventilating partitions in a mine, shutting off communi-

cation in some directions, leaving it open in others, and so

remarkable Species of Cliona. 57

determining the path taken by the currents of water coursing

through the canal-system of the organism—or, again, that they

may perhaps serve to differentiate the sponge into separate

individuals. In some instances, however, every aperture in a

chamber seems to be provided with an imperforate form ot

these diaphragms, so as to be completely sealed up from all

means of communication with its neighbours. I say ‘‘seems,”

since it is difficult to make this out with certainty, and I have

some doubt on the matter. Admitting, however, that I have

determined this point correctly, then the whole arrangement

suggests that of the seed of the freshwater Spongilla; for in

such a chamber we have a particle of the sponge more or less

spherical in shape, completely surrounded on all sides by an

enclosure, which, while chiefly consisting of the calcareous

walls of the chamber, yet does, when these are incomplete,

possess also a wall of spicules set at right angles to its surface,

and thus very much resembles the arrangement of the amphi-

disks about the seed-like body of Spongilla. We might have

here, then, a case of physiological adaptation, the existence of

the calcareous chamber-walls making possible an economy of

spicules, and dispensing with the necessity of a complete spi-

cular enclosure. Thus, when the sponge went into winter

quarters, all that would be necessary would be the plugging

up. of the apertures in its burrows; and on the return of more

genial conditions the growth of these plugs into perforated

cones and open tubes would provide for the egress of the

reviving sponge.

Plausible as this may appear at first sight, it will not, I

think, bear a close investigation. In the first place Cl/ona has

not yet been proved to produce “‘seed-like bodies;”’ and though

this evidence is merely negative, it is yet of great weight, if

we consider that in no marine sponge whatever have these

structures been discovered, and that in Spongilla they are pro-

bably due to the influence of extreme changes in climatal con-

ditions, to which the marine sponges are not exposed. Again,

had the diaphragms of a single chamber formed collectively

parts of a single enclosure, one would expect to find the heads

of their spicules all turned in one and the same way—that is

to say, either outwards or inwards relatively to the chamber.

This, however, is by no means the case; no rule is to be

discovered in this respect. ake for instance Pl. I. fig. 3,

where two of the diaphragms, a and 4, will be seen to have

their surface of spicular heads turned towards the interior

their respective chambers A and B, while a third, c, has it

turned just the other way, or outwards towards the exterior.

It may be said, however, that this diaphragm belongs more

58 Mr. W. J. Sollas on two new and

especially to chamber C than to B, and that, accordingly, we

must rather consider the fact that its spicular heads point

towards the interior of C, than that they point away from the

interior of B. An inspection of fig. 6 will at once furnish us

with an answer to this argument, so far as it can be called

argument; for there we find two diaphragms, the relation of

which to their respective chambers is clear enough, a evidently

belonging to chamber A, and 6 to B, while, at the same

time, the position of the surface of spicular heads is reversed

in each case, in a the points and in 6 the heads of the spicules

being turned towards the interior of the respective chambers.

In some cases, moreover, I have seen a diaphragm placed

obliquely across an aperture where two chambers open into a

third, and evidently so arranged as to determine a passage into

one rather than into the other.

It seems then, to my mind, that whatever the ultimate

function of these bodies may be, their immediate morphologi-

cal relation to the sponge is that of open or closed partitions

between adjoining chambers; and the term “ diaphragm’? is

therefore the most appropriate to them.

The composition of the diaphragms may be best determined

by placing one on a glass slide, adding a few drops of nitric

acid, and boiling over a spirit-lamp till the acid has nearly all

evaporated ; a few more drops must then be added, and the

operation repeated as many times as may be necessary for the

solution of the kerataceous cement which binds the spicules

together. When this has been accomplished, the acid must be

driven off completely by continued heating, and the spicules

mounted on the same slide as has served for their preparation:

no attempt must be made to wash them with distilled water,

or to transfer them to another slide; either of these operations

is sure to result in the loss of some or all of the small flesh-

spicules with which the diaphragms are but sparingly sup-

lied.

By examining the edge of one of the diaphragms as an

opaque object, under an objective magnifying about 100

diameters, the arrangement of its spicules can readily be made

out ; and no arrangement could be simpler (Pl. I. fig. 14). The

more or less cylindrical spicules lie side by side, their mucro-

nate extremities forming the inner and their globular heads

the outer face of the diaphragm, so that the latter looks like a

pavement of glass marbles (PI. I. fig. 15), all of the same size,

and packed as closely as possible, and in consequence exhi-

biting a quincuncial pattern; the inner face has very much

the same appearance, with the single difference that from each

marble of its pavement a small spike stands out erect. Across

remarkable Species of Cliona. 59

the open end of those diaphragms that are perforated, a thin

film of dried protoplasm or structureless membrane extends

(Pl. I. fig. 10, 7), with a small central or excentric lumen

(fig. 10, 2). In the membranous film a few spicules are

usually present.

There can be no doubt as to the attachment of the dia-

phragms ; for on removing one from its chamber it often leaves

behind it a row of adherent spicules.

On examining the interior of the chambers of the Cliona

one finds its body-spicules lying full length against the walls,

without any tendency to a regular arrangement; one also

finds fragments of structureless membrane adhering loosely to

the walls, or lying freely in the interior of the chambers, and

in these each of the different spicules of the species are con-

tained. Small rounded granular bodies (Pl. I. fig. 12, c, and

fig. 18) also occur rather plentifully in these bits of mem-

brane; and since they sometimes contain vacuoles (fig. 18, d),

we may regard them as desiccated cells.

The walls themselves are pitted all over with hemispherical

excavations (fig. 8) having rounded edges, and usually about

0-001 inch in diameter. These, which are usual, I suppose

to be the first results of the solution by which the Cliona

excavates its abode.

Little circular openings (PI. I. fig. 16) are also visible on

the sides of the chambers, and become much more clearly

exposed after washing the chambers with a little dilute acid ;

they lead into tubular processes of variable length, generally

simple, sometimes bifurcating, and apparently terminating

blindly. /

On the outside of the Jsts containing the Cliona may be

seen a number of rounded holes (PI. I. fig. 17), by which the

chambers with which they communicate freely open to the

exterior. ‘These holes are not very abundant; indeed I have

been surprised not to find more of them. ‘They occur in

groups, and appear to be of two kinds—one larger (fig. 17, 0),

serving probably for the oscules of the sponge, and the other

smaller, for its pores (fig. 17, p). Generally in the Clionide

they present a crown of pin-like spicules pointed outwardly.

On dissolving a fragment of the infested Js7s in acid we

liberate the spicules it “contains, and then find not only the

forms we have already described, but a number of others of

quite a different character, particularly the abundant sword-

like forms, of which instances are exhibited in Pl. IL. figs.

10,11. At first I thought these were proper to our species

C. mucronata ; and since ‘they appeared to be more numerous

- in its chambers than the mucronate forms, I set them down as

60 Mr. W. J. Sollas on two new and

its body-spicule, and regarded the mucronate spicules as more

or less peculiar to the diaphragms; but after meeting with

sponges of other genera, such as Sfe//etta, in the chambers of

our Cliona, I began to suspect that the sword-like spicules .

mightbelong to a different species—a supposition which became

confirmed on finding diaphragms in which the sword-like

spicules were the chief constituents, to the entire exclusion of

mucronate ones. ‘This led me to examine each chamber of the

Cliona-burrows separately by reflected light ; and I then found

that those chambers which were provided with diaphragms of

mucronate spicules exhibited the same spicules scattered over

their walls, and, similarly, that chambers in which ensiform

spicules were present were closed by dianhragms into the

composition of which ensiform spicules chiefly entered. The

spiculation of each chamber was pure; those that contained

mucronate spicules never contained ensiform ones, and vice

versd. To make quite sure of this, I then proceeded as fol-

lows :—Under a magnification of about 50 diameters I picked

out a cell, the openings to which were guarded by diaphragms

of one kind or the other, say of mucronate spicules ; the edge

of this cell was then marked by a fine-pointed pencil for the

purpose of identification. Next I drew out two pieces of

glass tubing to very fine capillary terminations, and filled one

with water and the other with dilute hydrochloric acid ;

working now under a watchmaker’s glass, I inserted the capil-

lary end of the tube containing acid into the marked chamber,

and expelled a drop of the acid into it. By the resulting

solution of its walls its spicules were detached and set free, so

that it only remained to introduce the capillary end of the

other tube into the chamber, and by forcing out the water in

a fine jet to wash its contents into an excavated glass slide,

where they could be examined by transmitted light. This

operation I performed many times, and so convinced myself

of the complete correspondence between the spicules com-

posing the diaphragms and those lying on the walls of the

same chamber. Similarly the fragments of dried sarcode

present in some of the chambers always contain the same

kinds of spicule as the associated diaphragms.

Finally, having made sure that I had present in my speci-

men of J/si’s two species of Cliona, the chambers of which

appeared to be inextricably entangled with each other, I was

able by a little careful searching to trace out the distribution

of each; and I then found that the chambers of one species

never opened into the chambers of the other, but that com-

municating chambers were always occupied by one and the

same species. This is indicated in Pl. I. fig. 1, where the

remarkable Species of Cliona. 61

cells left unclosed are those of C. mucronata, while the ones

shaded with dark lines belong to the next species, C. ensifera.

Here and there apparently isolated chambers of one or the

other species occur, as those of C. ensifera at a; these, how-

ever, are not really isolated, but communicate with chambers

of the same kind either above or below the plane of the

drawing. We have now thus brought to light what appears

to me a very remarkable fact, and one that might easily lead

to great confusion in species; for no one examining the bur-

rows in my specimen of Jsis would have supposed them to

contain two different kinds of sponges. In the outline and

arrangement of the chambers themselves no difference is to

be detected ; and but for a little care the different kinds of spi-

cules within them would certainly have been described as

belonging to. one and the same species. The necessity for

' great caution in deciding what spicules to eliminate and what

to retain in determining the true complement of spicules

proper to a sponge has already been illustrated by the re-

searches of Carter, who has had frequently to disentangle the

spicules of commingled species one by one as it were, and so,

by immense care, has arrived at correct results where failure

would otherwise have been certain.

2. Cliona ensifera (mihi).

Sponge burrowing in chambers of the same kind as in the

preceding species. Spicules of three kinds:—1, an acuate

spicule (Pl. IT. figs. 10, 11), having a straight or curved shaft,

which is cylindrical in form for a certain distance from the

globular pin-like head, and then expanding becomes fusiform

for the rest of its length, and finally terminates in a more or

less abrupt point: length 0°0095 inch; breadth across the

head and broadest part of the shaft 0-0006, and across the

neck (:0002 inch. 2, a slender acuate (PI. II. figs. 12, 13),

straight or curved; inflated head variable in shape, spherical

and ellipsoidal; dimensions variable, averaging 0-0075 inch

in length and 0°0004 in breadth. 38, a minute or flesh-spi-

cule (Pl. II. fig. 15), with a straight or curved shaft produced

into a number of unequal conical spines ; length 0-0006 inch.

Diaphragms in shape and position very similar to those of

C. mucronata, though slightly more irregular in outline, com-

posed of ensiform spicules which lie side by side normal to

the walls. Owing to the fact, however, that these spicules are

as often curved as straight, they frequently depart from a nor-

mal position and are arranged obliquely, forming curved radii

about the axis or centre of the diaphragm. The heads of the

spicules form the outer surface of the diaphragm as in C.

62 Mr. W. J. Sollas on two new and

mucronata ; but sometimes they project for greater or less

distances from the surface, so as to render it irregular.

Besides the single layer of spicules, which forms a wall as

thick as they are long, there are sometimes present additional

ensiform spicules, which, lying in the same direction as the

others, are stuck into the diaphragm like pins into a pin-

cushion, and so increase its thickness to once and a half

the length of a single spicule. The additional spicules are

only held together by the insertion of their points; no kera-

taceous cement is present between the projecting ends of their

shafts, which consequently form a white layer—in striking

contrast to the yellow colour of the rest of the diaphragm, in

which kerataceous matter occurs (Pl. I. fig. 11).

On the surface of the diaphragms all the kinds of spicules

which characterize the sponge are scattered irregularly. The

combination of two diaphragms to form a single one is of fre-

quent occurrence in this species ; and from it results the form

shown with two centres in Pl. I. fig. 13, where about each

centre the smooth shafts of the spicules form the curved radii

of a circular area distinguished by the absence of spicular

heads, which, however, are abundant enough outside the cir-

cumference of the circular area.

Remarks. The spicules represented by PI. II. figs. 1, 6, 9-

are sufficient to define the species C. mucronata, in which they

occur; and similarly C. ensifera is quite sufficiently defmed

by the spicules of figs. 10, 12, and 15. But to possess a

complete knowledge of a species it is necessary to know more

about it than its mere distinctive characters ; one must know

also the variations to which it is subject: a knowledge of the

extreme as well as of the average characters of a species is of

the highest importance if we would seek to construct accurate

tables of phylogeny. Hence it has seemed to me well to add

here figures and descriptions of the unusual forms of spicules

which both the foregoing species exhibit—not that all of these

will be available for immediate use, but that they may become

so eventually, while some, on the other hand, will possess a

present and special significance forus. The forms represented

by Pl. II. figs. 18-21 are somewhat common variations

amongst pin-head spicules: fig. 18 shows a form of doubly

inflated head in which the second inflation is of a different

size to the first; in fig. 21 the two inflatiors have become

more nearly equal in size, but still remain in immediate con-

tact with each other; in fig. 19 a still further change has

taken place in the separation of the heads by an intervening

portion of the cylindrical shaft. In fig. 20 the second infla-

tion is merely lateral and confined to one side of the shaft.

remarkable Species of Cliona. 63

In fig. 24 a short conical spine ‘projects from the fusiform

part of the shaft—a bud-like process, which, if prolonged, would

give our uniaxial spicule a decidedly biaxial appearance,

This budding of the spicules is one of the commonest of phe-

nomena amongst the Spongide. In Geodia arabica 1 have

seen a variety “of one of the large anchoring spicules which,

had developed a fourth fluke, and so become four- instead of

three-pronged ; and, similarly, i in a Stelletta | once observed a

variety of the trifid bifurcate anchoring spicule in which an

additional bifurcate arm had put in an appearance, so that

the spicule had become quadrifid: thus, then, our uniaxial

spicules may become biaxial, and, likewise, quadriradiate may

become quinqueradiate spicules. ‘The excessive variation to

which sponge-spicules are subject makes it easy to conceive

how the existing types of multiradiate spicules might have all

originated from a primitive uniaxial cell. Let such uniaxial

spicule-cells bud to a variable extent, some producing one, and

others two, three, four buds and so on, and we should possess

just the sort of material which, when submitted to the influ-

ence of natural selection, would furnish us with the spicules

of all our existing types,—to me apparently a much more

natural way of jooking at things than that followed by Dr.

W. Marshall. ‘This speculative observer considers that,

in the case of the Hexactinellide, a sarcodic meshwork

was first produced, which afterwards became silicified, and

then broke down into separate sexradiate spicules. We have,

however, every reason to believe that sexradiate spicules ori-

ginate, like all others, in spicule-cells ; and Carter has actually

seen the separate sexradiates of Aphrocallistes in various

stages of cementation up.to their complete enclosure in a

continuous siliceous network. Marshall’s view *, therefore,

seems to me to reverse the case with a vengeance.

In fig. 23 we appear to have two spicules joined together

by their heads, though whether by ankylosis or as a result of

budding, one cannot, in the absence of a visible axial canal,

definitely say. In fig. 16 we have two shafts diverging at an

angle of 60° from the same head; and as but one head is seen

here, the case is probably one of mere budding.

In fig. 24 the shaft of an ensiform spicule has lost its point

and acquired a rounded termination like that of the mucronate

spicules of C. mucronata, only without the mucrone ; at the

* In reference to Marshall’s conception of the structure of Sclerotham-

nus, I may here point cut that, when spicules grow together by ankylosis,

their axial canals do not become continuous by opening into one another;

on the contrary, while two or more spicules may become one, their canals

always remain separate and distinct.

64 Mr. W. J. Sollas on two new and

same time it has become shorter ; and in fig. 25 the diminution

in length has gone a step further, while the shaft has become

straight and cylindrical, so that, but for the absence of a ter-

minal mucrone, it would almost exactly resemble the typical

spicule of C. mucronata. In the last-mentioned species we

shave the spicule of fig. 4 showing a very considerable shorten-

ing in the long direction ; in fig. 5 the spicule tapers from its

wide neck, instead of enlarging from a constricted neck

towards its rounded extremity. Fig. 2 appears to be inter-

mediate between figs. 1 and 5.

These mucronate spicules are quite distinct from any form

of spicule yet figured or described ; and it is therefore exceed-

ingly interesting to find varieties of them in which the mucrone

is changing its character, and, by enlargement, tending towards

the fusiform outline of C. ens’fera. The instances in which

this change is well marked were not discovered till after the

plates were drawn; and soa sin- |

gle example is represented in Fig. 1.

the woodcut (fig. 1). Here,then,

while C. ensifera shows spicules (ron earning

tending towards C. mucronata,

C. mucronata ee the other hand Variety of mucronate spicule of

presents us with a variety of © mucronata. x 435.

its staple spicule which almost

passes into the staple spicule of C. ensifera.

But the difference between the other spicules of these two

species, viz. the slender acuates (figs. 6, 12) and the flesh-

spicules (figs. 9, 15), is so slight that no one would think of

founding species on them alone. ‘The main difference be-

tween C. mucronata and C. ensifera exists only in the form

and size of the staple spicules (fig. 2, 11) ; and this distinction,

as we have already indicated, is half or more than half bridged

over by varietal modifications. It hence appears to me that

in these two forms of Cliona we may actually witness, so to

say, the transformation of species ; for of the claims of each of

the species we have described to distinction no one can for a

moment doubt, while, at the same time, the forms by which

one might pass into the other are also sufficiently obvious.

The flesh-spicules of both species are very interesting, as

they appear to exist in all stages of growth. Their first appear-

ance, so far as I can make out, is in the form of a simple

straight rod about 0:0004 inch in length; this soon becomes

sinuous and spined at each end with three or four conical

spines; additional spines then appear along its sides, while

by unequal lateral growth and by the unequal development

of lateral spines the multicurved forms (figs. 15, 18) are

remarkable Species of Cliona. 65

brought about. Fig. 19 represents a very unusual form, in

which the spines of the spicule have become bifurcate at their

ends.

Oliona subulata.

Associated with the Js?s which furnished the preceding spi-

cules, is a patch of Melobesia, in which also Cliona-burrows

occur; but these, curiously enough, are occupied by a third

species, the spicules of which are represented in PI. II. figs.

26-28, and appear to belong to a new species, for which

I propose the name of C. subulata. I should state that bur-

rows of the two preceding species occur in the Melobesia along

with this.

Note.—While writing this paper I had occasion to refer

to a specimen of Cliona occupying burrows excavated in a

solid piece of limestone rock, which I had brought away with

me from Dawlish. I had always taken my specimen to be

C.. celata, and referred to it in order to determine whether it

possessed diaphragms of any kind like those of (. mucronata.

As to this my results were negative ; but an examination of its

spicules showed that it differed from C. celata in the form of

its flesh-spicules, while its skeleton-spicules are essentially the

Fig. 2.

Spicules of C. hnearis: a, skeleton-spicule; 6, variety of a, with rounded

end and produced spine ; ¢ and d, varieties of a, with rounded ends

(a-d x 140); e, flesh-spicules (x 435).

same as those of C. celaia, Raphyrus Griffithsit, and Hali-

chondria ficus. The flesh-spicule, instead of remaining rela-

tively short and becoming spined, attains, as if by the sacri-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 5

66 On new and remarkable Species of Cliona.

fice of its spines, a great length (0-0033 inch) relative to its

breadth, which is too small for measurement, and remains

smooth.

This must be regarded as a variety of C. celata ; and I pro-

pose for it the name of C. linearis.

Cliona linearis, var. of C. celata.

Skeleton-spicule as in C. celata (fig. 2,a). Flesh-spicule a

long filiform acerate (fig. 2, e), straight or tricurved; length

0:0033 inch, breadth so narrow as scarcely to exhibit a double

outline under a magnification of 500 diameters.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PraTtE I.

Fig. 1. A fragment of Ists, sp., with Cliona-burrows : m,m, chambers of

C. mucronata; e, e', of C. ensifera (natural size).

Figs. 2-7. Outlines of chambers (A, B, C) of C. mucronata, showing

various forms of diaphragms (a, }, c, d,d,, d,, d,): d', diaphragm

seen in plan, concealing an aperture beneath it; w, walls of a

chamber. x 30.

Fig. 8. Hemispherical pittings on the walls of the Clhona-burrows.

x 60

Fig. 9. Imperforate conical form of diaphragm (C mucronata), seen from

its convex or exterior surface. X 30.

Fig. 10. Tubular diaphragms (C mucronata): f, film of dried sarcode

containing spicules; 7, lumen. x 380.

Figs. 11-13, Diaphragms of C. ensifera: f, film of attached membrane;

ce, cells contained in the membrane. xX 30.

Fig. 14. View of the edge of a diaphragm of C. mucronata. x 140.

Fig. 15, Superficial view of the inner surface of a diaphragm of C. mucro-

nata mounted in Canada balsam. x 140.

Fig. 16. Openings in the walls of chambers of Cliona leading into tubular

processes. X 50.

Fig. 17. Openings on the exterior of the Cliona-containing Isis, leading

into the chambers of C. mucronata within: p, openings for pores;

o, for oscules? xX 30.

Fig. 18. Cells from the membranous films found in the chambers of C.

ensifera: b, vacuole. X 4365.

Puate II.

[All the figures on this Plate are magnified 435 diameters. ]

Figs. 1-9. ‘Cliona mucronata.

Figs, 1-3, mucronate spicules; figs. 4 and 5, varieties of the preceding ;

figs. 6 and 7, slender acuate spicules; fig. 8, variety of figs. 6

and 7, having two shafts, a short cylindrical one with rounded

ends and a slender pointed one, both proceeding from the same

head; fig. 9, various forms of flesh-spicules.

Figs. 10-25. Chona ensifera.

. Figs. 10, 11, and 22, normal ensiform spicules exhibiting different degrees

of curvature.

On a new Species of Spatangide. 67

Figs. 12, snd 13, slender acuate spicules; fig. 14, a variety of figs. 12

and 13.

Fig. 15, flesh-spicules in various stages of growth, a, 6, c, d, and e.

Figs. 16-25. Varieties of the ensiform spicule.

Fig. 16. Variety with two shafts diverging at an angle of about 60°, and

proceeding from a common head.

Fig. 17, Variety in which the shaft has become straight and cylindrical

and rounded at the end, so as to resemble mucronate forms of

C. mucronata.

Figs. 18-21. Various forms of inflated terminations of the ensiform spi-

cules. @

Fig. 22. Extremely curved variety of ensiform spicule.

Fig. 23. Two ensiform spicules joined together, with an angle of diver-

gence of about 150°.

Fig. 24. Variety with a conical spine.

Fig. 25. Variety similar to fig. 17.

Figs. 26-28. Chiona subulata.

Figs. 26 and 27. Skeleton-spicules of Chona subulata.

Fig. 28. Flesh-spicule of same.

VIII.—Description of a new Species of Spatangide. By

Epear A. Smits, F.Z.8., Zoological Department, British

Museum.

THE record of the existence of another species of the genus

Linthia is very interesting, since up to the present time it

comprised but a single recent form. Unfortunately I cannot give

the locality whence the specimen was obtained with any degree

of certainty ; however, there is some evidence which tends to

show that it was brought either from the Pacific Islands or

from the west coast of South America, since it was found in a

collection of shells which consisted almost exclusively of

species which are well-known inhabitants of those regions.

Linthia rostrata.

Test, seen from above, cordiform, narrowed posteriorly,

viewed laterally much beaked behind through the prominence

of the hinder interambulacral region above the anus, and a deep

well-marked excavation beneath the beak; lower surface a

little convex; viewed endways the sides appear rather flat,

converge to an obtuse apex, and gradually round off below,

joining the somewhat convex base. Genital openings four,

central, very small, equal, subequidistant ; posterior pair

scarcely wider apart than the anterior ones. Ambulacra very

unequal, anterior lateral pair almost double as long as the

posterior ones, moderately deeply sunken, inclined consider-

ably towards the anterior end, yet arcuated in the opposite

68 Mr. E. A. Smith on a new Species of Spatangide.

direction ; posterior petals equally deep as the anterior, a

little narrower, very short, sinuous, diverging at their extre-

mities; pores rather larger than in the recent type of the

genus (L. australis), connected by a shallow groove; the nar-

row ridges separating them bear a few minute tubercles on

their outer half. Peripetalous fasciole narrow, very angular

and sinuous; in the posterior lateral interambulacrum it

passes close to and almost parallel with the hinder furrows

for about eight ninths of their length, then descends suddenly,

forming an acute angle, and running close to the anterior

lateral furrow, with two slight bends in its course, passes

round the termination of the furrow in an abrupt curve, and

rises in a straight line somewhat obliquely towards the ante-

rior ambulacrum, where it suddenly descends at a right angle

and parallel with the furrow, and then, after a short distance,

a little above the ambitus, crosses in a curve the shallow

groove. The lateral follows a similar course to that of aus-

tralis, Anterior ambulacral groove almost as deep as the

others, becoming gradually shallower towards the ambitus,

with a series on each side of remote and very minute double

pores, alternating with one another on each side, those just

above the fasciole being about two millimetres apart. Tuber-

culation very like that of LZ. australis. Plastron narrowly

cordate, convex, not much narrowed towards the mouth, and

not reentering at the aboral end. Mouth broad, narrow.

Anal opening ovate, acuminate above and below. The colour

is that of cork, mottled with a darker hue in the middle of the

plates.

Length nearly 1} inch, width at ambitus 13, height 1.

Hab. Pacific Islands (probably).

This species, of which I have only seen a single spineless

specimen, has much of the general character of L. australis of

Gray. Still there are so many differences, which, although

perhaps small individually, in the aggregate become of much

importance, that I certainly think they point out the specific

distinctness of the form above described, and show that it

passes the limits of an individual variation.

The position of the apex and genital pores is very different ;

the form is totally distinct, resembling very considerably that

of the fossil Wicraster cor-anguinum, var. rostratus ; the pro-

portion and inclination of the ambulacra and the course

of the fasciole also show considerable variation. Besides

these differences there are others—namely, the greater depth

of the anterior ambulacrum and the remoteness and minute-

ness of the pores on each side of it ; and in specimens of equal

size of the old species the pores of the other ambulacra are

Mr. E. A. Smith on a new Species of Spatangide. 69

decidedly smaller and much more numerous, whilst the geni-

tal pores are larger. On the lower surface there are differ-

ences also: the plastron is conspicuously narrower and the

oral aperture is considerably broader transversely.

The course of the peripetalous and lateral fascioles in Z.

australis is subject both to variation in different specimens

and also to irregularity in the same individual. In normal

specimens the first forms but a single angle some distance

within in each interambulacral space; but in others, as is the

case in the variety figured by Gray (Cat. Recent Echinida,

1855, pl. vi. fig. 2 a), it becomes biangular at its highest part

both in the anterior and lateral interambulacra.

Linthia rostrata.

a, actinal view ; 0, abactinal ; c, lateral; d, anterior.

The lateral fasciole in the same specimen is also irregular.

On one side its position is normal; but on the other, from the

point of contact with the peripetalous fasciole, it rises obliquely

for the distance of nearly three quarters of an inch within the

posterior lateral interambulacrum, then forming a sudden bend

descends at right angles for half an inch, and, again bending

less acutely, pursues the ordinary course, passing under the

70 M.C. Mereschkowsky on a new Genus of Sponge.

anus in a broad curve. Exactly the same irregularity exists

n another specimen ; only in this instance it occurs on the

opvosite side of the test.

In other characters L. australis does not seem to be a

species subject to much variation, judging from the specimens

(fourteen in number) which I have seen. The form, direction,

and length of the ambulacra and position of the vertex differ but

very slightly in any of them; and this constancy of characters

strengthens the supposition that the present, which offers such

marked differences, is decidedly specifically distinct.

IX.—On Wagnerella, a new Genus of Sponge nearly allied

to the Physemaria of Ernst Héckel. By C. MERESCH-

KOWSKY*.

[Plate VI.]

I HAVE just received the October number of the ‘ Annals and

Magazine of Natural History,’ which contains an article by

Mr. Carter, entitled ‘‘ Remarks on Professor E. Hickel’s Ob-

servations on Wyvillethomsonia Wallichiti and Squamulina

scopula.”

M. Hiickel, in his monograph on the Physemaria, has been

very hard upon Mr. Carter, and reproaches him with having

imperfectly observed the facts of which he speaks. Mr.

Carter, in the article above mentioned, complains bitterly of

the want of delicacy on the part of M. Hickel, and brings

against him the same charges as to the want of exactitude

which his works display, and their bad illustrations, which he

regards as “more fitted for a caravan at a fair than for

scientific purposes.”

It is clear that impartial logic has taken leave of both

writers in this matter, and that feeling interferes in the deci-

sion of the scientific question. In such cases it becomes more

than ever necessary to stand exclusively upon facts, and to

allow nothing but reason to say a word. Hence every new

fact that may serve to throw light upon the question becomes

very desirable.

My opinion is, that we must neither “laugh” nor “be angry,”

and that, instead, both sides must repeat their observations,

criticise them better, and, taking into consideration all the facts

acquired, bow to the power of truth, remembering that he alone

never deceives himself who never thinks.

* This paper must be considered as a preliminary note of a memoir

on White-Sea Sponges.

M. C. Mereschkowsky on a new Genus of Sponge. Ti

It is with the purpose of adding some new facts which may

serve to elucidate the nature of the creatures in question that

I have set myself at once to describe my observations made at

the White Sea upon a new organism very nearly allied to the

Physemaria of Hiickel, and especially to Haliphysema echi-

noides = Tisiphonia agariciformis, but which, at the same

time, must undoubtedly be placed among the sponges. I

shall therefore pass at once to the description of this inter-

esting creature.

In my first journey to the White Sea in 1876, I found in

two localities*, upon the stems of Sertularie, a singular

organism, which I met with again in 1877, in my last visit

to this sea, so, fertile in unknown and often very remark-

able animals. This time I found it seated upon a branch

ot a Bryozoon, quite close to the islands of Solowetzky, at a

depth of 2 fathoms.

At first, considering its small size (the sponge measures

only about 0°5 millim.), I thought I had to do with some Rhizo-

pod, such as the graceful Clathrulina elegans of Cienkowski

for example, and the more as the form of this sponge, which

consists of a spherical head placed upon a long and thin pedun-

cle, very much resembles that of the above-mentioned fresh-

water organism. But closer acquaintance convinced me that

the object in question was nothing but a very small sponge.

The entire sponge is composed of two very distinct parts—

namely, a very long and very fine peduncle, and a round ball

placed at one extremity of the peduncle, the other end serving

to attach it to Hydroids or to Bryozoa. The peduncle itself

is composed of two parts, one of which is a very long and fine

cylinder, sometimes a little enlarged at its upper extremity

where the ball is attached (Pl. VI. fig. 1). The approximateT

width of this cylinder is 0°02 millim. ; at its lower extremity it

passes into the second part of the peduncle, which is nothing

but a conical enlargement by means of the base of which the

sponge is attached to foreign objects. This basal cone, as

well as the cylinder, which is simply a prolongation of it, is

composed of a very thin layer of organic material, probably

consisting of syncytium, and of a great quantity of very small,

rather stout spicules, which are placed horizontally in this

organic layer, the whole forming together a fine although

tolerably firm and elastic membrane, which serves as a wall

* Once between the islands of Solowetzky and the town of Kem,

at 35° 25' longitude, at a depth of 12 fathoms, on a stony bottom; a

second time in the Bay of Onega, not far from Belogousicha, at a depth

of 16 fathoms on stony ground.

+ I shall give more exact measurements further on.

72 M.C. Mereschkowsky on a new Genus of Sponge.

to the internal cavity of the sponge. This cavity passes

without interruption through the whole body, from the basal

cone all along the cylinder, to join the cavity of the globe, in

such a manner that the whole organism presents us with a

combination of a hollow cone with a hollow cylinder and a

hollow globe. This great cavity, no doubt, corresponds to the

gastral cavity of the other sponges, which would thus differ

from Wagnerella (as I propose to name this sponge) only by

their much thicker walls. ‘The average length of the peduncle

is 0°4 millim.; in most cases it is completely straight or

very slightly curved: by force it may be bent at a right

angle without breaking; but the moment the pressure

ceases it returns again to its original rectilinear position.

The head or globe is about 0:1 millim. im diameter, making

only one fifth of the whole length of the animal. As I

have already stated, the head is nothing but the direct con-

tinuation of the general cavity which passes through the

peduncle, covered like it by a fine membrane. In fact, this

head, as is shown by young individuals (Pl. VI. fig. 2),

may be regarded as a dilatation of the peduncle at its

extremity, which would render it analogous to the conical

dilatation situated at the other extremity of the peduncle.

he most striking character of the head is the presence

of long and excessively fine spicules (Pl. VI. fig. 5, a-d),

which stand out all over the surface of the ball in a

radiating manner, and give it a spiny aspect, like that of

a sea-urchin. It is owing to these spicules that it is im-

possible to see distinctly the surface of the globe, and to

determine whether there are or are not pores establishing a

communication between the general cavity and the external

water. The walls of the head are also furnished with small,

short, and comparatively stout spicules (Pl. VI. fig. 6, a-c),

only differing by their greater length from those which are

implanted in the peduncle. Here, as in the peduncle, these

fusiform spicules are implanted in the thin organic layer,

so that their extremities do not project ; but their position is

not regular in the head, the spicules being arranged in all

possible directions, although always in a position parallel to

the surface.

As in all the Calcispongia, the spicules are composed of

calcareous salts which dissolve in hydrochloric acid. Glycerine

may also serve as a good reagent for determining the nature

of the spicules without the necessity of destroying the speci-

men. On putting the animal, or merely a fragment of it, into

glycerine, it is easy to see whether the contours of the spicules

become more distinct than when seen in water or in alcohol.

M. C. Mereschkowsky on a new Genus of Sponge. 73

If this is the case, we may be sure that we have to do with a

calcareous body ; on the contrary, when the contours gradually

disappear and the spicules can hardly be perceived, we may

conclude that they are siliceous.

The following are the comparative measurements of this

sponge :—

millim

Potal length of the sponge). < oxic. sok. oe als 0°5-0°8

Diameter of the head in an adult individual .. 0-1012

ae Me a young individual .. 0:05885

Average thickness of the peduncle .......... 0-018

Length of the large spicules of the head ...... 0-01175-0:05875

Thickness (sometimes not measurable)........ 0-00047-0:00117

Length of the small spictles... 0.0... 2.05 0-00964—0:01605*

It remains for me to explain the reasons which have led

me to regard this animal as a sponge. It will be noticed

that I have said nothing about pores, and this because I have

found it impossible to find any. In spite of all my endeavours

I have been unable to discover, either in the individual which I

selected to study in the living state, or in those preserved in

alcohol, any trace of pores; but it must not be forgotten that

even if they existed, which is more than probable, it would be

perfectly impossible to see them through the forest of innume-

rable spicules which cover the whole surface of the head and

conceal its surface from the eyes of the observer. It must also

be taken into consideration that the pores are not constant, and

that the least irritation, especially the action of spirits of wine,

is sufficient to close them, which would perfectly explain their

absence. ‘The same spicules coupled with the slight transpa-

rency of the head generally have also rendered it impossible

for me to ascertain the existence of a buccal orifice at the

extremity of the body, although I suppose such an orifice must

exist from the analogy of what we see in the Physemaria.

But even if we admit that the existence of pores in Wagne-

rella is a fact unproved and even improbable, their absence

cannot in any way lead us to doubt its spongiarian nature.

In fact we are acquainted with several sponges the spicules

of which have been described, but of which the pores, for

different reasons, have not been discovered (see, for example,

Bowerbank’s monograph) ; and nevertheless we no not hesi-

tate to admit that these are true sponges. Moreover we are

acquainted with a marvellous sponge described by G. O.

Sars in his interesting book ‘On some remarkable Forms of

Animal Life from the Great Deeps off the Norwegian Coast’

*« The latter number refers to the head.

7A = M.C. Mereschkowsky on a new Genus of Sponge.

(1872). I refer to the Cladorhiza abyssicola of M. Sars.

This sponge, which lives only at great depths, and which

resembles rather a Hydroid or a Bryozoon than a sponge, has

‘as a characteristic feature that the whole of it is entirely

massive, absolutely without even traces of canals or of any

cavity, and consequently without either buccal orifice or

Cladorhiza abyssicola, M. Sars*.

pores ; and yet every one who reads M. Sars’s description will

be convinced that he has to do with a true sponge. In the

White Sea also I have met with an Hsperza (?) with long, ©

filiform processes, like roots, which anastomose and form a

network covering seaweeds and other bodies. Throughout

their length, however, these are destitute not only of pores,

but in general of canals or cavities, and are entirely composed

of “syncytium ” with spicules.

It is with the support of these facts that I cannot be of the

* Sars, ‘On some Remarkable Forms of Animal Life, &c.,’ pl. vi.

fig. 17.

M. C. Mereschkowsky on a new Genus of Sponge. 75

opinion of M. Hiickel that in order to be a sponge an organism

must have not only spicules but also pores.

With respect to the spicules of Wagnerella, we have seen

(and I hope it is unnecessary to dwell upon this fact) that these

spicules cannot by any means be regarded as foreign to the

organism and borrowed from some other sponge (besides,

the White Sea has no sponges furnished with spicules re-

sembling those of Wagnerella), but that, on the contrary,

we are led to the opinion that these spicules are produced by

the sponge itself.

It is therefore evident that Wagnerella belongs to the

Calcareous Sponges, and notably to the family Ascones. As

regards the genus, I find that the system of M. Hiackel, which

is founded exclusively upon the spicules, is sometimes too

artificial, and will become still more so in course of time. This

system is founded principally upon the fact that the form of

the sponge is a character too variable and inconstant to enable

a system to be based upon it. Although in general terms this

may be true, we nevertheless know, among the sponges, plenty

of exceptions in which the form acquires so great a constancy

that it may be employed not merely to characterize a species,

but may even lead to the formation of distinct genera, as, for

example, in the case of Cladorhiza. It is the same with our

Wagnerella, of which the extreme smallness, the globular

head supported by a long peduncle dilated into a cone at its

base, are all constant characters, and consequently sufficient

to bear one out in establishing a distinct genus. The few

species of the genus Ascyssa, to which the animal might

otherwise belong, are so little like Wagnerella that one

would not hesitate in ordinary circumstances to form a sepa-

rate genus for this organism.

M. Hiickel, who has founded his genera upon different com-

binations of three kinds of spicules, has by this means re-

stricted for ever the number of genera; for all the possible

combinations have been employed by him ; but it may be

foreseen that Calcispongiz will probably be found so different

from the known forms, that it will be perfectly artificial to

range them in one of M. Hickel’s genera, and that, conse-

quently, sooner or later it will be necessary to break through

the boundaries laid down by him, and to found genera not

only upon the combinations of the spicules, but also on their

forms, the form of the body, and other characters.

I propose to name this genus, which has the habit of Tis7-

phonia agariciformis, and is furnished only with simple

spicules, Wagnerella. ‘The diagnosis of the genus and that

of the species will be as follows :—

76 M.C. Mereschkowsky on a new Genus of Sponge.

WAGNERELLA, gen. nov.

Sponges furnished with simple, long, calcareous spicules.

Their body consists of a head or upper part, which is more or

less globular, and of a long and slender peduncle which sup-

ports the former part, and at the opposite extremity is fur-

nished with an enlargement of conical form, by means of which

it adheres to foreign objects. Habit resembling that of the

Physemaria (fHaliphysema).

I give this sponge its generic name in honour of Professor

Nicolas Wagner of St. Petersburg.

Wagnerella borealis, sp. nov.

Head regularly rounded into the form of a ball, placed on a

very long and slender peduncle, the whole never exceeding

1 millim. in length (often 0°5 millim.). The cone of the

peduncle as broad as high; the peduncle of uniform thickness

throughout its whole length (sometimes a little wider above),

nearly five times as long as the diameter of the head. All

these parts (head, peduncle, and cone) have an interior cavity

communicating freely throughout. ‘The walls of the body are

composed of a fine organic membrane, with spicules. The

spicules are of two kinds: some long and excessively fine,

tapering towards the two ends, adorning the head, in the sur-

face of which they are implanted in a radiating fashion only

by one end; the others shorter and stouter, fusiform, placed

both in the head and the peduncle, entirely implanted in the

organic layer without projecting from it at all, and all, without

exception, arranged horizontally in the foot. No grains of

sand or any other foreign objects adhering to the surface of

the sponge. Length (average) of the long spicules 0°035

millim., of the shorter ones 0°01 millim.

Locality. White Sea, neighbourhood of the islands of Solo-

wetzky, near the monastery (at a depth of 2 fathoms) and near

Kem (at a depth of 7 fathoms).

Lastly, with regard to the two doubtful Physemaria, namely

Haliphysema echinoides and Gastrophysema scopula, C., my

opinion is as follows :—

Haliphysema echinoides—When this is compared with

Wyvillethomsonia Wallichii, Wright *, we see that we have

to do with one organism, or, at any rate, with two varieties of

a single organism, which, indeed, is admitted by M. Hickel

himself. But if this be the case, it is perfectly evident that

* Quart. Journ. Microsc. Sc. 1870, vol. x. pl. ii.

On new Species of Heterocera from Japan. 17

we have nothing more than one sponge bearing the three

names Wyvillethomsonia Wallichii, Wright,=Dorvillia aga-

riciformis, Kent,= Tiphisonia agariciformis, Wyv. Thoms.

Its spongiose nature may be further confirmed by comparing

it with my Wagnerella borealis, to which it bears much

resemblance and which is a true sponge.

With respect to Gastrophysema scopula, it is impossible to

decide definitively whether it is a Physemarion or a Rhizopod.

On the one hand, the presence of pseudopodia, which Mr. Carter

has himself observed, leads us to believe in its Foraminiferous

nature; on the other, its great resemblance to the other species

of Gastrophysema observed by Hickel would make us think

that both organisms belong to the Physemaria. In any case

fresh observations upon Sguamulina scopula can alone finally

decide the question.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE. VI.

[All the figures enlarged and drawn by the camera lucida. ]

Fig. 1. An adult individual of average size of Wagnerella borealis. The

eduncle is a little wider above, the head regularly rounded.

here are more spicules than are here represented.

Fig. 2. A young individual with the head not yet round, and differing

but little from the peduncle.

Fig. 5. Part of the peduncle, more highly magnified, with the small kind

of spicules.

Fig. 4. Form sometimes presented by the basal cone of the peduncle,

which, however, usually has the form shown in fig. 1.

Fig. 5. Different forms of the long spicules which adorn the head:

a, immeasurably fine; 6, stouter, but straight; ¢, long and

curved ; d, shorter and curved ; e, zigzae.

Fig. 6. Different forms of spicules of the second category, fusiform,

shorter and stouter: a, typical; b, curved; ¢, typical, with a

bubble of air (?).

X.—Descriptions of new Species of Heterocera from Japan.

—Part II. Noctuites. By Artuur G. Butter, F.L.S.,

F.Z.8., &e.

Cymatophoridez.

59. Gonophora derasoides, n. sp.

Nearly allied to G. derasa, but of a greyer tint; the mark-

ings (particularly on the white costal streak of primaries) less

defined; the reniform and other discoidal spots narrower and

more transverse ; the area between the oblique white stripe

and the zigzag lines pale stramineous, with darker and lunated

78 My. A. G. Butler on new Species

spots upon it, the zigzag lines wider apart, only three in num-

ber ; the outer border white, the intersected semicircular mar-

ginal spots pale buff instead of ferruginous, the outer border

of secondaries white, not yellowish. Expanse 1 inch 8 lines.

Hakodaté (Whiteley).

60. Cymatophora ampliata, n. sp.

Allied to C. or, but considerably larger, the primaries of a

silvery grey instead of whity-brownish tint, the inner band

darker, straighter, with more dentated limiting lines, the outer

band with an additional angle towards the costa, and with the

outer line more regularly undulated, blackish, and parallel to

the inner line; fringe darker; secondaries darker; thorax

greyer; head, collar, and antenne testaceous. Expanse 2

inches.

Yokohama (Jonas).

61. Cymatophora octogesima, N. Sp.

Allied to C. ocularis, but much larger, of a dark silvery

grey tint, with the transverse lines and margins of the 80-like

reniform and orbicular spots deep black, the lines near the

base more dentated, the central band wider and its external

limiting line irregularly zigzag ; fringe of secondaries paler.

Expanse 1 inch 11 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Bombycoide.

62. Acronycta leucocuspis, n. sp.

Closely allied to A. cuspis, but the primaries of a darker

grey tint, and the secondaries white instead of greyish brown,

the discal line and external border darkest on the veins;

thorax much darker; abdomen irrorated with black to the

base. Expanse 1 inch 9 lines.

Var. Differing from the dark form of A. cuspis in the

shining slaty grey tint of primaries, the spots upon which are

only indicated by black annular markings, and in the paler

greyish white colouring of the secondaries, on which the

transverse discal line and outer border are easily distinguish-

able. Expanse 2 inches.

Yokohama (Jonas).

63. Acronycta increta, n.sp.

3. Closely allied to A. tridens, but noticeably larger, the

primaries much darker and shining, the fringe shorter, less

of Heterocera from Japan. 79

distinctly black-spotted ; secondaries similar. Expanse 1

inch 10 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Leucaniide.

64. Mythimna placida, n. sp.

Nearly allied to the North-American M. pseudargyria, but

with the primaries and thorax pale sandy greyish, the orbicu-

lar and reniform spots less distinct, and the double discal

series of black dots less complete; secondaries deep grey,

blackish externally, with whitish fringe: primaries below

blackish, with the costal and external borders whitish, crossed

near the apex by a black dash; a marginal series of black

dots ; secondaries whitish, irrorated with black, a dot at the

end of the cell, a discal series and a marginal series black ;

body below whitish. Hxpanse 1 inch 10 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas, Pryer).

65. Mythimna rufipennis, n. sp.

Allied to WM. turca, but with barely an indication of the

transverse lines on primaries, and with the secondaries and

abdomen shining whity brown with rosy margin; below much

paler than M. turca. Expanse 1 inch 6 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

66. Mythimna grandis, n. sp.

Allied to M. turca, but considerably larger; the male

greyish, with the two transverse dusky stripes indistinct. In

this species the inner stripe runs parallel to the outer as far as

the middle of the discoidal cell, and then diverges abruptly

inwards to the costal margin, the outer stripe is regularly den-

ticulated: the under surface is whity brown, with a pink

tinge; a dot at the end of each cell and a discal transverse

stripe grey; a marginal row of black dots. Expanse ¢ 2

inches 1 line, ¢ 2 inches 4 lines.

3 2, Hakodaté (Whitely) ; 2, Yokohama (Jonas).

67. Mythimna divergens, n. sp.

Allied to the preceding, but darker, the reniform spot of

primaries larger; the male brownish sericeous, or like the

temale ; the female with a large central ochraceous nebula on

the primaries, and an ill-defined red-brown patch immediately

beyond the reniform spot ; the mner transverse stripe of pri-

maries slightly irregular, but diverging throughout from the

80 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

outer stripe ; the reddish fringes of a deeper tint: the under

surface deep dull reddish, the transverse line on the disk of

the wings more slender, more continuous, and darker; the

primaries with a dusky nebula just beyond the cell. Expanse,

& 2 inches 2 lines, 2 2 inches 3 lines.

3 2, Hakodaté (Whitely).

68. Leucania salebrosa, n. sp.

Nearly allied to the North-American Z. ¢nsueta, but smaller,

the body more uniformly whitish, the collar with two trans-

verse grey lines, the tegule longitudinally streaked with red-

dish and speckled with black; the white spot at the end of

the cell in primaries more elongated: primaries below with

the discoidal area greyish ; secondaries below white, with a

black dot at the end of the cell. Expanse 1 inch 3-4 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Belongs to the L. putrescens group, but has grey dusky-

bordered secondaries.

69. Leucania singularis, n. sp.

Primaries above sandy whitish, with two connected grey

patches, one apical, the other filling the basal half of the

median interspaces and emitting a streak along the median

vein (somewhat as in the L. putrescens group), a silvery white

spot at the inferior angle of the cell, and a black dot just

inside the angle; two deeply crinkled divergent transverse

grey lines dotted externally with black; a submarginal series

of brown lunules, and a marginal series of black dots; fringe

sericeous grey, tipped with white, and intersected by an indis-

tinct dusky line; secondaries grey, with brown marginal

spots; costal area and fringe whitish; body above sandy

whitish: under surface white, primaries with a wide-spreading

central greyish nebula, two whitish spots at the end of the

cell, a dusky discal line and a series of black marginal dots ;

secondaries with a dot at the end of the cell, a discal series

and a marginal series black. Hxpanse 1 inch 4—6 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Unlike any species known to me.

70. Leucania erata, n. sp.

Primaries above brassy brownish, a longitudinal streak

along the median vein, and a subapical dash dark brown; a

spot in the cell, a discal angulated series and a marginal

series black; reniform spot pale yellowish; fringe greyish

externally ; secondaries white, with faint indications of a

of Heterocera from Japan. 81

discal series of dots and a submarginal streak dusky ; a mavr-

ginal series of black dots; thorax reddish brown, abdomen

sordid whitish: wings below shining cream-colour ; a black

dot at the end of the cell, and a marginal series, largest and

most continuous on primaries; the apical discoidal and disco-

median areas of primaries and a streak near the external angle

greyish ; body whity brown, becoming darker towards the

head; palpi and anterior coxe smoky brown. LExpanse 1

inch 7 lines,

Hakodaté ( Whitely).

Nearest to L. aureola.

MICARDIA, nov. gen.

Allied to Leucania, but altogether less robust, the abdomen

much more slender, the thorax less elevated, the palpi com-

paratively longer and more slender, the primaries broader, the

style of coloration quite dissimilar. Type M. argentata.

71. Micardia argentata, n. sp.

Primaries sericeous whity brown with a tinge of olivaceous;

a large silvery-white cuneitorm patch, filling the greater part

of the discoidal cell and extending a little below it; central

area olivaceous, varied with rose-colour, bounded by an oblique

white line, also an olivaceous streak from the latter to the

apex ; a submarginal whitish line and a marginal series of

black dots; secondaries pale greyish brown, with dusky mar-

ginal dots and whitish fringe; body corresponding in colour

with the wings, thorax crossed by a white belt: primaries

below silky greyish, costal border sandy whitish, outer and

inner borders silky creamy white ; secondaries silky white ;

body below greyish. Expanse 1 mch 2-3 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

72. Micardia pulchra, n. sp.

Primaries whity brown, the whole central area and ‘a discal

streak (bounded internally by a white-bordered lilac streak,

and externally by a submarginal white line) more or less

tawny ; a large subquadrate blackish patth bounded by the

orbicular and reniform spots, which are lilac and white-edged;

a large white-bordered elliptical spot of ochreous on the costa

near apex ; an interrupted black marginal line ; fringe tipped

with grey ; secondaries silvery greyish, with an interrupted

dusky marginal line and whitish fringe ; body corresponding

in general tint with the opposite wings: under surface shining

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. | 6

82 Mr. A. G. Butler OR new Species

creamy white, primaries greyish in the centre. LExpanse 1

inch 2-3 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Mr. Moore has described a third species as Leucania pul-

cherrima.

73. Alysia grisea, n. sp.

3d. Above greyish brown, with a shining cupreous tinge ;

primaries with the external two fifths rather darker than the

rest of the wing, the orbicular and reniform spots also rather

darker, indications of an annular spot on a darker nebula near

the base of the cell; costa spotted with darker colour; three

white costal dots towards the apex; a patch of pale colour

at the apex bounded on the costa by an elongated white spot ;

indications of a discal series of dusky-bordered semicircular

pale spots; a series of black marginal lunules; fringe pale;

secondaries much paler than primaries, with the exception of

a broad external border; thorax darker than the abdomen 5

head and antenne pale: under surface pale and shining, an

irregular greyish disco-submarginal fascia; body below whity-

brown, the pectus dusky in front. LExpanse 2 inches 1 line.

Yokohama (Jonas).

This species somewhat resembles Ochropleura flammatra ;

but it is evidently a Leucaniid allied to the genus Nonagria,

and apparently belonging to Guénée’s genus Alysia, with

which it agrees in the structure of the antenne and palpi,

neuration, and the width of the primaries.

Glottulide.

74. Dandaca senex, n. sp.

g. Primaries above pale bluish grey, becoming greenish at

base and on costal area, basal area crossed by an ill-defined

sprinkling of raised white scales ; a spot in the cell, the mar-

gins of the reniform spot (which is indicated by a black litura),

a sigmoidal discal stripe, a subapical spot and zigzag submar-

ginal line, all of raised white scales ; a black irregular line

across the basal area; two central slender black lines, the

outer one deeply dentated, a >-shaped black marking and

two spots near the external angle; costa black-spotted; fringe

white, spotted with brownish; secondaries sericeous greyish

brown, with a broad pale-edged blackish outer border, fringe

pale, margin black-dotted ; thorax greenish grey, abdomen

sericeous whitish: wings below whity brown, with a broad

black-edged irregular discal band; outer border broadly

blackish ; body below whitish. Expanse 1 inch 8 lines.

of Heterocera from Japan. 83

¢. Larger, darker; abdomen brown. Expanse 1 inch

10 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Apamiida.

75. Ochria fortis, n. sp.

?. Nearly allied to O. flavago, the primaries with the yel-

low areas considerably paler, the line interrupted by the reni-

form spot forming a semicircular arch; the orbicular and reni-

form spots much larger, the transverse subbasal brown belt

greatly constricted below the median vein and darker; sub-

marginal band, excepting at apex, suffused with brown and

consequently indistinct; secondaries greyish brown, sordid

whitish in the middle and at the base; thorax and head

brown, collar stramineous, abdomen sordid whitish: wings

below pale shining sandy brownish ; the fringe and discocel-

lulars of primaries, and two transverse streaks (the outer one

of primaries diffused) dusky. Expanse 1 inch 10 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

In some respects more nearly allied to O. cataphracta of

Grote.

76. Gortyna acuminata, n. sp.

Structure of G. netela from North America. Above brown,

shot with a faint lilacine gloss and clouded with grey; pri-

maries with the costal margin and two diverging straight

internally whitish-bordered transverse lines golden brown; .

basal area pale, bounded externally by a whitish line; outer

border pale, with irregularly zigzag inner edge; orbicular and

reniform spots greyish, bordered internally with whitish and

golden brown ; a marginal series of blackish lunules; fringe

grey ; secondaries with a broad triangular greyish patch from

the middle of the cell to the abdominal margin, an ill-defined

discal band of the same colour; costal area testaceous; palpi

and antenne burnt sienna; abdomen with the segmental mar-

gins, sides, and anus ochraceous: under surface reddish ochra-

ceous, shining; primaries with an ill-defined darker discal

streak. Hxpanse 1 inch 9-10 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

The primaries are acuminate and subfalcate.

Xylophasiide.

. 77. Xylophasia sodalis, n. sp.

Intermediate between X. rurea and X. hepatica, with the

84 On new Species of Heterocera from Japan.

pattern of the former, but the deeper coloration of the latter ;

it is, however, darker and more glossy than either, and the

dark marginal spots of the primaries have a dull lilacine gloss;

on the under surface the wings are not suffused with rose-

colour as in X. hepatica, and the fringes are grey (dark in

primaries), spotted with ochraceous nearly as in X. rurea.

Expanse 1 inch 9 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

This species is also closely allied to X. flavistigma of

Moore. The Mamestra dubitans of Walker, which I believe

to be the dark form of Xylophasia lignicolor, bears a close

resemblance to the X. combusta type of the above species ;

we have this variety both trom Yokohama and Hakodaté.

Mamestra opposita is the dark form of a Ceylonese species.

78. Apamea conciliata, n. sp.

Intermediate in colouring and pattern between A. connexa

and A. gemina, with the form and general coloration of the

latter, but with the irregular transverse band identical in shape

with that of A. connexa, although much further from the outer

margin and less oblique, the lower half of the band limited

externally by an oblique white line, and followed by a whitish

diffusion ; apical area as in A. gemina, but without the pale

spot at apex; secondaries as in A. connexa: wings below as

in A. gemina, but darker, and with the dusky stripe across the

secondaries nearer to the middle of the wing broadly convex

(not 3-shaped) ; no dark spot at the end of the cell. Hxpanse

1 inch 6 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

The Xylophasia indocilis of Walker is the paler form of

A. gemina; X. libera is identical with Apamea finitima, a

species near A, connexa.

79. Miana vulnerata, n. sp.

Primaries greyish black, with the discal area brown;

crossed by two very irregular black lines, widest apart on the

costa and nearest just below the cell; two black >-shaped

markings at the base; orbicular and reniform spots pale

brown, enclosing an oval grey annulus and margined with

black ; an N-shaped band, testaceous, speckled with carmine,

on the disk just outside the external black line ; indications of a

submarginal grey streak; a marginal series of black lituree ;

fringe grey, intersected by a testaceous line; secondaries pale

brown, with a marginal black line ; fringe whitish, with a cen-

tral grey line; body above greyish brown, abdomen whitish

On an apparently new Species of Hornbill. 85

at the sides: primaries below shining grey, the borders spotted

with whitish ; secondaries shining whitish; margin and a

spot at the end of the cell black; two discal grey lines;

fringe as above; body whitish. LExpanse 1 inch.

Yokohama (Jonas).

80. Miana segregata, n. sp.

Primaries brown, crossed before the middle by a broad

pale-edged darker band, its inner margin angulated and undu-

lated, its outer margin nearly straight, but with a shallow sinus

below the first median branch; a subquadrate costal sepia-

brown white-edged spot near the apex, continued as an indi-

stinct irregular band to the middle of the disk and enclosing a

longitudinal black dash ; a marginal series of black dots; an

indistinct sigmoidal pale line near the base; fringe greyish,

dusky below the middle ; secondaries paler, with white costal

margin, fringe partially white-tipped; body brown, whitish

at the base of abdomen: primaries below greyish sericeous,

internal area whitish, costal and external areas whity brown,

speckled with darker brown; costa beyond the cell flecked

with creamy-white ; two indistinct parallel discal lines, the

inner one angulated near the costa ; secondaries whity brown,

darker towards the apex, a dusky spot on discocellulars and

an angulated discal line; body brown, pectus clothed with

whitish hair. Expanse 1 inch 2 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

[To be continued.]

XI.—Description of an apparently new Species of Hornbill

from Cochin China, of the Genus Anthracoceros. By D. G.

EwiorT, F.R.S.E. &e.

Anthracoceros fraterculus.

Male. Bill light yellow, with a black spot at base of man-

dible. A casque rises from base of culmen, extends back-

wards over the centre of the head, then curves forwards and

returns to the culmen, at almost a right angle, at about one

third its length from the tip of the maxilla. This is com-

pressed laterally both at its anterior and posterior termina-

tions, swelling outwards in the centre, but inclining to a keel-

shape on top along its whole length. "This casque is yellow

like the bill, black on its anterior face, and with a broad black

patch occupying nearly half the anterior portion, but which

86 On an apparently new Species of Hornbill.

does not reach to the maxilla. Naked skin around the eye

and on sides of the throat flesh-colour. Head, neck, throat,

upper part of breast, back, wing, and central tail-feathers

black, with dark green reflections. Entire underparts, thighs,

and tips of the secondaries and primaries pure white. Lateral

tail-feathers have their apical third pure white, rest black,

with green reflections. Tarsi and feet black. ‘Total length

from base of maxilla to end of central rectrices 234 inches ;

wing 103 inches; tail 11} inches; bill along gape 53 inches;

casque on top 4% inches, height at base of maxilla 13 inch;

height of bill and casque at base 23 inches ; tarsus 13 inch.

Hab. Cochin China.

The present bird bears the same relationship to A. mala-

baricus as A. convexus does to A. coronatus, and appa-

rently represents the A. malabaricus in Cochin China. It is

much smaller than A. malabaricus in all its dimensions, has the

casque much more compressed at the ends; and the black

mark on the anterior portion does not reach the maxilla, but is

confined to the casque as is seen in A. coronatus ; whereas in A.

convexus and malabaricus the black mark always extends on-

to the maxilla. The lateral rectrices; however, being only

white for their apical third, indicates that the relationship of

this species is with A. malabaricus and not with the others

named. In order that the difference in size between the two

species may be more clearly perceived, I add the measure-

ments of A. fraterculus, as given above, and those of a fine

adult male specimen, in the Paris Museum, of A. malabaricus

for comparison :—

Anthracoceros fraterculus. Anthracoceros malabaricus.

From base of maxilla to end of From base of maxilla to end of

rectrices 233 inches. rectrices 26 inches.

Wing 103. Wing 13.

Tail 11}. Tail 13.

Bill along gape 54. Bill along gape 6}.

Casque on top 4%. Casque on top 74.

Height of casque at base of max- Height of casque at base of max-

illa 14. illa 2.

Height of bill and casque at base Height of bill and casque at base

23. 33.

Tarsus 14. Tarsus 2.

The type was brought from Cochin China, and is now in

the Paris Museum ; and for the opportunity of describing it I

am indebted to Prof. A. Milne-Edwards, who in the most

liberal manner does every thing in his power to facilitate in-

vestigations in the magnificent collections under his charge.

It would appear, therefore, that there are four species of

Hornbills belonging to the genus Anthracoceros, differing from

Prof. R. Owen on the Solitaire. 87

each other both in the shape and markings of their casques,

and also in the distribution of the colours of the plumage.

They can be distinguished as follows :—

Key to the Species.

A. Median pair of rectrices black, with’ green reflec-

tions.

a’. Lateral rectrices pure white.

a'', Size large ; black mark on casque never

reaching the maxilla’ iP. viscid S005 0 1. A. coronatus.

6". Size small; black mark on casque extend-

ing onto the maxilla, .. 6. .igacsgeee 2. A. converus.

6'. Lateral rectrices with their apical third white.

a", Size large ; black mark on casque reach-

ing onto the maxilla:............... 3. A. malabaricus.

b". Size small; black mark on casque not

reaching; the maxilla... 6s en+ es een 4. A. fraterculus.

XII-—On the Solitaire (Didus solitarius, @m.; Pezophaps soli-

taria, Strkl.). By Prof. R. Owen, C.B., F.R.S., &e.

(Plates VIL & VIII.]

Bones of this extinct bird collected in the island of Rodriguez

during the “ Transit-of-Venus”’ expedition, and now in the

British Museum, have supplied materials for the articulation

of the entire skeleton, and the subjects of the following notes.

In the skeleton of both male (PI. VII. fig. 1) and female

Pezophaps, the number of cervical vertebre is 12, that of the

dorsal 6, a 7th free-rib-bearing vertebra being made “ sacral”’

by ankylosis with the rest of that coalesced group of bones.

So much of the vertebral formula thus accords with that of

Didunculus *. As in that dove, also, the three middle dorsal

vertebrée (third, fourth, and fifth) have coalesced, and their

square truncate spines form a strong bony crest. Four pairs

ot ribs are connected, by ossified hemapophyses, with the

sternum; and this bone deviates mainly from the columba-

ceous type by the minor development of the keel, in relation

to the atrophy of the chief muscles of flight.

Sixteen coalesced vertebree constitute the sacrum of Pezo-

phaps as of Didus; and seven free vertebre beyond the pelvis

support the tail-feathers. Thus the vertebral formula of

Pezophaps is:

C. 12, D. 6, 8. 16, Cd. 7,=41.

* See the figure of the skeleton of the didiform species of the Samoan

Islesin my ‘Memoir on the Dodo,’ 4to, 1866, pl. ii. fig. 2.

88 Prof. R. Owen on the Solitaire.

There is one free-rib-bearing vertebra less, and one sternal

rib less, than in Didus ; and this difference accords with the

roportional larger trunk of the heavier Ground-Dove of the

Tauritian Island.

In the atlas and third vertebra the interzygapophysial bar,

with the foramen it defines, is present*. The neural spine

subsides to a pair of tuberosities in the fifth cervical; and this

bifid condition is traceable to the ninth, where each division

degenerates to the beginning of a ridge leading to the hypera-

pophysis. ‘This process +, conspicuous and large on the axis

and third vertebra, subsides in the following, but rises from

its rudimental state in the ninth and following cervicals.

The protuberance from the under part of the par-pleur-

apophysis of the fifth and sixth cervicals shows as the “ cat-

apophysis” of Mivart in the seventh; and, each converging

towards its fellow, the pair of inferior processes become distinct

in the ninth, approximate in the eleventh, and blend into the

single median hypapophysis in the twelfth cervical vertebra.

This process‘increases in vertical and fore-and-aft extent to the

middle of the three coalesced dorsals, and almost disappears in

the hindmost (fifth dorsal) ; it is similarly represented as a

low median ridge in the last free dorsal (sixth).

The sternum of Pezophaps, as of Didus, accords with the

didunculine modification of the Dove’s breast-bone, in the

breadth, for example, of the ectolateral processes and the

absence of entolateral ones. The median hinder end of the

sternum is narrower, more ‘ xiphoid”’ in character, than in

Didunculus. The four articular ridges and depressions in

each costal border are close-set, especially the third and

fourth.

The costal process is both broad and thick, presenting a

trihedral subconcave facet towards the ribs. The thin ecto-

lateral plate overlaps the two hinder hemapophyses joining

the sternum.. The median pneumatic fossa at the anterior

part of the sternal concavity communicates by a canal with

the convex or outer surface. ‘The convex contour of the ster-

nal keel is due to the suppression of the anterior subangular

extension which is present in the volant Dodlet.

The first and obvious character in which the great extinct

Ground-Doves differ from the smaller existing volant kinds is

in the small proportion of the brain-case to the rest of the

skull. Ifthe length of the cranium be taken from the back

of the occiput to the front of the frontal bone, it is, in Pezo-

* “On Dinornis.—Pt. XXI.,” Trans. Zool. Soc. vol. x. p. 152, fig. 11, , s,

third cervical of D. maximus.

t Ihid. p. 151, fig. 4, hp.

Prof. R. Owen on the Solitaire. 89

phaps, rather more than half that of the skull; in Didus it is

little more than one third.

The difference is not due to the small relative size of the

orbits, but to the great relative length of the beak, especially

of the narial part, in Didus. This part, which includes the

lateral bony external nostrils, is relatively shorter m Pezo-

phaps than in Didus.

The interorbital septum is entire in both genera.

In both Didus and Pezophaps the upper grooved border of

the foramen magnum extends further back than the condyle.

The occiput, in Pezophaps (Pl. VII. fig. 2), is vertical, feebly

convex vertically and transversely, divided by a pair of

arched insertional depressions from the rugose, somewhat

overhanging hind tract of the parietal region (ib. 7). The

temporal fossa is larger, relatively and absolutely, in Pezo-

phaps than in Didus; it resembles that of Treron. The

elevation of the frontal region is due, in Pezophaps, as in

Didus and Treron, to excess of bony cellular diploé, and

takes place in advance of the orbits in all Columbide. The

interorbital tract of the cranium (Pl. VIII. fig. 1, 1) rises

from the premaxillo-nasal platform (ib. 15, 22) more abruptly

in Pezophaps than in Didus; but it sooner subsides, and the

fronto-parietal tract, or vertex, is flatter. This tract is smooth,

but surrounded by a broad rugose elevated border, continued

from the superorbital ridge backward over the temporal fossa,

then across the postparietal region (ib. 7) to meet the ridge

on the opposite side. The superorbital tracts converge for-

ward to form the frontal convexity. This, however, is

mesially cleft, exposing a deeper-seated smooth tract, over

which a bony fringe projects on each side. This structure

exists in a minor degree in the female. The superorbital

tract is more rugose in the male than in the female Pezo-.

haps.

The chief difference between Didus and Pezophaps in cra-

nial structure is the degree in which the cancellous tissue is

developed between the outer and inner “ tables,”’ the minor

quantity of that tissue in Pezophaps causing less elevation

and convexity of the frontals above the orbits as compared

with that part of the cranium in Dedus.

The lacrymal, coalesced with the prefrontal part of the

frontal, curves down and back in front of the orbit; it is

impressed by a deep, wide, smooth longitudinal channel exter-

nally, conducting the duct to the naso-lacrymal orifice ante-

rior to the orbit.

To view the neurapophyses of the nasal vertebra, the nasals,

premaxillary, and coalesced part of the frontals must be

90 Prof. R. Owen on the Solitaire.

removed; and then the homologue of the “os en ceinture”’ of

batrachotomy and of the “ethmoid” of anthropotomy is

brought into view, with part of the confluent olfactory capsules.

The essential elements of the anterior terminal segment

have undergone extreme modification and travelled far from

the almost typical condition which they present in most

fishes*.

In the bird strong processes answering to diapophyses are

extended outwards from the neurapophysial or essential

parts of the prefrontals ; and to these the name “ prefrontal ”

is restricted by some who retain the term “ zthmoid”’ for the

plates transmitting the olfactory nerves from the rhinencepha-

lon. In Macropus and most other marsupials the corre-

sponding extension is grooved longitudinally, as in Didus and

Pezophaps; but the fissure transmitting to the nose the lacry-

mal duct, anterior to the grooved lacrymal bone, in the bird,

is reduced to a fossa with one or two foramina in the impla-

cental mammal.

The maxillary sends up a strong nasal process confluent

with the outer branch(s') of that bone, which articulates with

the swollen fore part of the frontal, outside the base of the

inner division (15) of the nasal bone. The common coalesced

bases of the nasals and nasal process of the premaxillary rise

as a transverse bar (Pl. VIII. fig. 1, x), with a convex ante-

rior border, above the rostral divisions of those bones ; in this

character Pezophaps resembles Treron and Didunculus; while

in Didus the premaxillary and nasal portions of the elevated

basal tract are indicated by grooves therein. In both genera,

as in recent doves, 1 and 22! are confluent with 1. Beyond

the confluence the divisions of the nasal pair are separated by

the nasal process of the premaxillary (22'). The imner divi-

sion or normal part of the nasal is 1 inch 8 lines in length ;

it extends forward for half that length along the outside of

the premaxillary, then inclines mesiad beneath that bone,

coming into contact with its fellow for six lines extent of their

terminal pointed end; they underprop the nasal process of

the premaxillary ; and thus we have, in the extreme variation

of an extreme segment of the vertebral axis, the heemal spine

closing the tubular series by overlapping the neural spine of

its own segment. The under surface of the nasal process of

the premaxillary is impressed by the shallow channel re-

ceiving the underpropping fore part of the midnasals.

The basi-presphenoid (Pl. VIII. fig. 2, 5,9) is 2 inches

long in the male; it has no pterapophyses.

* See, e. y., the prefrontals of Xiphias in my ‘ Archetype of the Ver-

tebrate Skeleton,’ pl. i. fig. 5, 14.

pat R. Owen on the Solitaire. 91

There is, as is well-known, no “ maxillo-palatine or pre-

vomerine bone” in the bird’s skull distinct from the proper

maxillary or proper palatine. The latter bone (ib. ib. 20)

speedily coalesces with the premaxillary (22) in front, and

the maxillary (21!) above, as does this with the premaxil-

lary in front and with the malar bone behind. ‘Their respec-

tive limits are definable by their unconfluent condition in the

immature bird.

In Pezophaps the persistent linear suture between the pala-

tal part of the maxillary and the palatine commences 1 inch

10 lines from the tip of the beak ; it defines a linear tract of

the maxillary of 1 inch 3 lines extent. External to this

suture is the palatine tract, coalesced with the maxillary, in

breadth 2 lines, in length 10 lines; when the palatine be-

comes free, it is twisted on itself, forms a vertical plate of 3 to

4 lines depth, and sends off from the median side, of a hinder

extent of 7 lines, the horizontal plate, which bends mesiad.

Between these right and left median plates of the palatines is

an interval of 24 lines. The interpalatine vacuity in advance

of the horizontal plates is 43 lines across. The upper parts of

the hinder five lines of the palatines are applied to the convex

sides of the presphenoids. The pterygoids (21) abut against

the basisphenoid immediately behind the palatines, each

pterygoid diverging and expanding to abut against the tym-

panic. ‘The maxillo-palatal cleft is long and of moderate and

uniform width ; the interpalatal cleft is wider until the inner

plates are developed.

The beak of the bird serves as both hand and mouth; the

apex of the wedge, in these functions, is driven against re-

sisting bodies sometimes of considerable hardness. In all

birds the opening and closing of the bill are acts of prehen-

sion. In many birds these latter movements are not limited

to the lower jaw, but a mechanism exists for raising the upper

jaw as well. ‘The joint between the base of the bill and the

cranium is made flexible by diverse modifications. The tym-

panic is fashioned in relation therewith. It is connected by

two beams or columns of bone on each side of the skull with

the fore part of the upper jaw. The outer beam, commencing

forward at the side of the maxillary, is continued by the malo-

squamosal style to the outer side of the transversely expanded

lower part of the tympanic. The inner beam, commencing

by the palatal process of the premaxillary, is continued back-

ward by the palatine and pterygoid bones to the inner side of

the lower end of the tympanic. Any swinging to and fro of

this bone upon its single or double upper ball-and-socket joint

is transferred to the “core”’ by the four beams converging

92 Prof. R. Owen on the Solitaire.

thereto. The action of the outer beam upon the maxillary is

conjoined with that of the lower beam upon the premaxillary

by the overlapping broad palatal plate of the maxillary,

which is more or less confluent with the palatine and pre-

maxillary bones beneath.

The movements of the mandibular part of the bill are

transferred by the long bar-like rami of the lower jaw to the

lower end of the tympanic, with which those rami are movably

articulated by a combined double ball-and-socket and also

trochlear articulation.

When the tympanics are swung forward they communicate

that motion by their six converging bony bars to the upper

and lower cores, raising the former, depressing the latter—in

short, opening the mouth. When the tympanics swing back-

ward, opposite movements are transferred forward by the con-

necting bars, and the beak is shut.

But when in this state it is used (as by the Woodpecker) as

a pick or wedge, the strength of the blow transferred back-

wards by the three divergent pairs of bars is met, not by a

rigid basis, which might have involved fracture of those bars

or of some of them, but by a yielding one, as in the butts with

elastic buffers terminating a railway line, for arresting and

receiving the shock of a train.

The beak as a whole, and especially its outward and visible

portions, have suggested to ornithologists characters of groups

with good and accepted descriptive terms ; the modifications

of a part of the mechanism, a single beam, seem inadequate to

sustain a new nomenclature.

The basisphenoid (PI. VIII. fig. 2, 5) in advance of the

ridge or process which underhangs the bony outlets of the

Eustachian tubes loses breadth and seems narrowest where

impressed by the abutting ends of the pterygoids (21).

The postarticular end of the mandible of Dedus differs from

that in most Columbide in not being abruptly truncated, but

produced in the form of a short right, or rather open, angle

with the apex obtuse*. That of Pezophaps (Pl. VII. fig. 1) is

more columbaceous; it is produced a short way behind the

articulation, and is vertically truncate, without loss of depth.

It agrees in this respect with Didunculus.

There is nothing extraordinary in the conformation of the

pelvis of Pezophaps. The acetabulum is situated in the ante-

rior half, as in Didus. The ischium (Pl. VII. 63) coalesces

with the ilium (2) at two points, circumscribing a moderate

* ‘Dodo and its Kindred,’ pl. viii.; ‘Memoir on the Dodo,’ pl. i.

Prof. R. Owen on the Solitaire. 93

‘ subelliptic “foramen ischiadicum”’ (h) as in Didus. The

pubis (61) does not send upward a process to meet the down-

ward one from the ischium, and so define the “ tendinal ”’ (o0')

from the “ obturator ”’ (0) interspace.

The pelvis in the male skeleton shows the whole extent of

the entire lower border of the ischium; and its slender hinder

termination is produced into contact with the pubis (64), from

which bone a rough low tuberosity rises to form the syndes-

mosis with the ischium (63). On the left. side the extremity

of the ischium is broken off; but the syndesmotic process of

the pubis testifies to an original union like that on the nght

side.

Here, therefore, we have an acceptable proof of an osteo-

logical correspondence with existing doves, which the imper-

fect examples of the pelvis previously acquired did not exhibit.

The scapula of Pezophaps repeats, in a minor degree,

the angular beginning of the hinder thin border above

the elongate neck of the bone, but projects less as a pro-

cess than in Didus * ; the distal or free end expands as in

Didus. 'The straightness of the bone is* more marked than

in Didus.

The metacarpus of the male (PI. VII. fig. 1, 11.) repeats the

tuberous process figured by Prof. Newton in pl. xix. figs. 87-

90 of his richly illustrated memoir, and testifies, as he

shows, to the value of Leguat’s record, and to the accuracy of

that original observer of the living bird.

If a single specimen of a metacarpal bone of some unknown

animal, such as is figured in Pl. VII. fig. 1, 11., had previously

come to the hands of a paleontologist, he would have con-

cluded the bony tumour to have been of morbid nature and

origin, and set it down as an exceptional pathological pheno-

menon. Any other opinion (above all, one holding such

tumour to be a constant structure, functional in the healthy

individual, and of moment in guiding to a knowledge of the

species or sex) would have hazarded the estimate of such

palzonlogist’s standing in his science.

In the rich collection of bones of Pezophaps, the subject of

Prof. Newton’s instructive paper (tom. cit.), there were not fewer

than thirty-two specimens of the metacarpus. ‘ That it

would be very short was a safe inference from what we know

of it in other flightless birds; but it could hardly have been

expected to obtain from it such a singular confirmation of

Leguat’s statement regarding a remarkable peculiarity in the

* ‘Memoir on the Dodo,’ wt supra, pl. viii. figs. 6, 9, 51.

+ Phil. Trans. 1869.

94 Prof. R. Owen on the Solitaire.

‘ Solitaire’ as observed by him, nor that it should furnish an

explanation of the curious bony growth on the distal end of the

ulna and radius already mentioned as presented by the speci-

mens of supposed males. All the perfect specimens of the meta-

carpal have on the radial side a more or less spherical bony

knob or callus-like mass developed immediately beyond the

proximal end and the pollex. . . . The appearance of the knob

is much that of diseased bone; it has probably been covered

by a cartilaginous integument ” (ib. p. 342). The author then

repeats the quotation given by Strickland in his excellent

work :— L’os de Vaileron grossit & l’extrémité, & forme sous

la plume une petite masse ronde comme une balle de mousquet :

cela & le bec sont la principale défense de cet oiseau””*.

The specimens of metacarpus of the larger, combative

sex of Pezophaps in the British Museum show the same

structure, which may be seen in the articulated skeleton of

the, probably, male Solitaire now there exhibited (Pl. VIL.

iris, Wl.)

“This hard, irregular, prominent mass, which holds the place

of the spine in the Spur-winged Goose, may be compared to a

“knuckle-duster ;” with it the combative sex delivered his

blows, in the hard and well-contested fights to which Leguat

testifies :—‘‘Tls ne volent point, leurs ailes sont trop petites pour

soutenir le poids de leurs corps. Ils ne s’en servent que pour

se battre, & pour faire le moulinet, quand ils veulent s’appeller

Yun Vautre.”

I here infer the writer to mean that one function of their

stunted wing was to do battle with each other ; and the pecu-

liar development in question I take to have been the com-

bative weapon. ‘The entire wings were in action in executing

the amorous pirouettes :—“ Ils font avec vitesse vingt ou trente

pirouéttes tout de suite, du méme cété, pendant l’espace de

quatre ou cing minutes.”

Of the bones of the hind limbs, the greater relative length

of both femur, tibia, and metatarsus, as compared with the

skull and sternum, is first notable in Pezophaps in contrast

with Didus.

The columbine characters of the metatarsus are manifested

in both species. These characters in Pezophaps are recorded

in Trans. Zool. Soc. vol. vii. pl. lxvi., and are repeated in that

bone of the subject of Plate VII.

The following are admeasurements of the skeleton of the

two extinct species of Ground-Doves :—

* Strickland, ‘The Dodo and its Kindred,’ 4to, 1848, quoting the

‘Voyage et Avantures de Francois Leguat,’ 2 vols. 12mo, 2nd ed. 1720,

vol. 1, p. 98.

Prof. R. Owen on the Solitaire. 95

Pezophaps Didus

solitaria. ineptus.

ft. in. lin. ft. in. lin.

Length of vertebral axis, from tip of

’ beak to end of coccyx, following the

CEEVOS 25: « 5's Sac sroeetetare Mita sicleia, 6 510° Mas. 211 0 3.2 0

Length of vertebral axis, from tip of

beak to end of coccyx, following the

GUEV DS, Ye cee. eet ental aha fem, 2 i |

Height in easy standing position ...... Mas, 2 ae U zee .O

Height in easy standing position ...... Fem. 2°20

Length of leg, from proximal end of

FDP RO EDS: « oa dal Shar enefiades Geavakd oa) 2 Mas. 1 4 6 1g 3, 0

Length of leg, from proximal end of

PERT ATU IMEC s 3.c es cfderne eee tren se oo + Fem. 1 1 0

The Solitaires were found living in great numbers by the

colony of Huguenots who settled in the island of Rodriguez,

under their leader M. Francois Leguat, in 1691.

Pezophaps, according to the testimony of Leguat, laid but

one egg at the breeding-season ; and the same was probably

the case with Didus, as it is with the existing species of fruit-

eating doves (Carpophaga) and the passenger pigeons (Ecto-

astes) .

. The Moas appear to have been similarly restricted, as their

living representatives, the Kivis, also are, in the number of

the eggs of each brood.

The condition of the existence of Pezophaps, and probably

that of its flightless structure, was the absence of any extirpa-

ting enemy in the island to which the species was restricted.

Feeding on the date, the plantain, and other tropical products

of arich vegetation encumbering the soil when ripe and fallen,

their flesh was sapid as well as nutritious ; and the early Hugue-

not colonists commenced the work of extirpation, which their

successors and the quadrupeds (cats and pigs) which they

introduced completed.

In assigning the origin of the species Pezophaps solitarta

to the operation of a primary law, by way of direct

creation of a primitive pair, the osseous tumour on the

wrist of the male, and the fore pair of limbs in both sexes,

framed on a pattern fitting them to exercise the faculty of flight

and for no other kind of locomotion on land, but of too small

a size for that end, are among the incidents of this ‘ thauma-

togeny,” or inconceivable mode of genesis.

The other alternative is a reference of the species to the

operation of a secondary law, by no means implying disbelief

in, or involving denial of, the Lawgiver. In speculating on

the mode of operation of such law, the following facts pre-

sent themselves :—

96 Prof. R. Owen on the Solitaire.

Pezophaps solitaria was the largest kind of land bird ob-

served by the first settlers in the island of Rodriguez.

It differed in no other respect from the class-characters of

the other birds of that island save in the inability to fly by the

action of its wings.

There were no enemies native to the island able to take

advantage of that disablement.

“Tl ne s’y trouve aucune animal 4 quatre pieds, que des

rats, des lézards, & des tortues de terre, desquelles y a trois

différents espéces,’”’ writes Leguat in his interesting little

book *.

The Solitaires had no call for practising or endeavouring

to effect that hardest and most strenuous mode of locomotion

to obtain sustenance or fulfil any of the conditions of preser-

vation of the individual or of the species; they were never

scared into such violent exercise.

Upon these facts I found a conclusion as to how the specific

character of wings, useless as such, came to be; and this con-

clusion as to Fezophaps solitaria is the same which I have set

forth more at length in relation to Didus ineptus +, and which

I deem to be applicable to the still larger terrestrial birds

discovered, as in the case of Mpyornis, Dinornis, Aptornis,

Notornis, Cnemiornis, in similar geographical and associated

zoological conditions—these birds, like the Dodo and Soli-

taire, having become extirpated through alterations of the

latter conditions, 7. e. by introduction of species new to their

island-homes, and with dispositions and powers destructive of

such flightless birds. Thus is illustrated the origin of species

by a condition of the way of work of a secondary law sug-

gested by Lamarck.

Two alternative hypotheses have been propounded. One

by Mr. Darwin, is discussed and conjecturally exemplified by

the authors of the paper ‘‘ On the Osteology of the Solitaire ”

(loc. cit. pp. 49-51). The other hypothesis assumes that the

Iguanodon, Megalosaurus, Scelidosaurus, and other Dinosau-

rian reptiles walked on the hind pair of legs, like birds, and

initiated that class by becoming transmuted into the warm-

blooded, feathered, but wingless species. No suggestion has

* Voyage et Avantures de Francois Leguat, & de ses Compagnons,

en deux isles désertes des Indes Orientales. Avec la relation des choses —

les plus remarquables qu’ils ont observées dans l’Isle Maurice, a Batavia,

au Cap de Bonne-Espérance, dans I’Isle St.-Héléne, & en d’autres en-

droits de leur Route. Le tout enriché de Cartes & de Figures. Tome Pre-

mier & Tome Second (12mo). A Londres, chez David Mortier, Marchand

Libraire. 1708.

+ ‘Memoir on the Dodo,’ 4to, 1866, pp. 49-51.

Prof. R. Owen on the Solitaire. 97

been made by the author or acceptors of this hypothesis as to

the way of operation or conditions of the transmutation.

In most of the instances of wingless birds affinity to more

favoured or normal members of the feathered class has been

traced.

The Penguins (Jmpennes) cannot be dissociated from the

smaller Urinatores, which retain the volant function of the

wings.

Alca impennis is not generically separable, in judicious taxo-

nomy, from the swiftly flying Alca torda.

The genera Aptornis and Notornis, with keelless breast-

bones, cannot be divorced from the family of Coots.

Cnemiornis, although also with a “ ratite’’ or uncarinate

sternum, must stand, besides Cereopsis, in the Anserine group

of Anatide.

The Didines are but generic modifications of a great natural

division of Rasores, the existing members of which, of smaller

size, retain their faculty of flight.

Dinornis shows the consequence of disuse of wings in a

greater degree than does Apteryx. But, although the winged

forms from which the Kiwi, the Cassowary, the Emu, the Rhea,

the Ostrich, and the Mpyornis have severally degenerated

remain to be determined, they each have structural character-

istics encouraging the quest, and testifying against the artifi-

cial group (Megistanes, Vieillot; Procerz, Llliger; Ratite,

Merrem ; Struthionide, Vigors) based upon modifications of

the breast-bone and scapular arch, the consequences of disuse

and degeneration of the muscles of flight, and with which a

loose character of plumage is more or less associated.

The results of the researches which have determined the

real affinities of extinct birds with keelless breast-bones and

low-angled scapulo-coracoids, devoid of acromial and clavi-

cular processes, supports a reasonable expectation that the

existing wingless genera, which have been shown to differ

from one another considerably in important anatomical struc-

tures, in correlation with their distinct and remote habitats,

will be ultimately referred to as many distinct natural groups

which now are, or which formerly have been, represented by

volant and typical members of the feathered class.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

Prate VII.

Fig. 1. Reduced side view of the skeleton of the male Solitaire.

Fig. 2. Occipital surface of cranium, natural size.

Fig. 3. Copy of a figure of the living Solitaire, from the frontispiece to

Leguat’s work, above cited.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. é

98 Mr. D.G. Elliot on a new Species of Water-bird.

Puate VIII.

Fig. 1. Top view of the skull of the male Solitaire.

Fig. 2. Under view of the skull of the female Solitaire.

Both figures are of the natural size.

XIII.—Description of a new Species of Water-bird from

Cochin China belonging to the Genus Porphyrio. By D.G.

Extior, F.R.S.E. &e.

Porphyrio Edwardst.

Adult, Far-coverts, lores, and round the eyes greyish

white. Back of head brown, darkest in the centre, where it

is almost a brownish black with a purple tinge, shading off to

a greyish white towards the frontal plate and the sides of the

head. Cheeks bluish white. Chin and throat brownish,

with a bluish shade. Back and sides of neck, lower part of

breast, and flanks dark violet-blue. Front of neck and upper

part of breast, shoulders, and under wing-coverts deep tur-

quoise-blue. Back, rump, wings, secondaries, primaries, and

tail uniform greenish black. Middle of abdomen and crissum

brownish black. Under tail-coverts pure white. Baill, frontal

plate, legs, and feet apparently bright red. Total length 164

inches, wing 102, tail 43, bill along gape 14, width of frontal

plate at posterior margin 4, tarsus 33, middle toe 33, claw 2.

Young. Top and back of head covered with downy black

feathers; sides of head grey; chin and throat white ; breast

dark turqoise-blue, flanks and abdomen violet-blue. Crissum

and thighs brownish black, streaked in certain places with

white. Wings and back greenish black. Rump brownish

black. Bull’ red, with the culmen and lengthened spots on the

mandibles near the commissure black. Frontal plate small,

apparently red. Legs and feet paie red. Total length 103

inches, tarsus 22, bill at gape 1.

Hab. Cochin China; Saigon (Germain) ; Bangkok (Bo-

court).

Four specimens of this fine species are in the collection of

the Paris Museum, three adults and one young bird, obtained

in different localities in Cochin China. It has probably been

confounded with the P. poliocephalus, Lath., of India, which

it resembles in certain portions of its plumage. ‘The present

species differs in being darker on the back of the head, in

having the blue of the breast of a darker shade, and especially

in having the upper parts, including the entire wings, greenish

black, instead of the purple back and rump and pale greenish

blue wings of P. polocephalus. 'This colouring of the upper

Bibliographical Notice. 99

parts is so conspicuously different in the two species, that

either one can be recognized at a glance. ‘Two of the adult

specimens are precisely alike; the third is a little paler upon

the sides of the head; but all possess the uniform greenish

black back and wings.

It gives me great pleasure to bestow upon so handsome a

bird the name of my friend Professor Alphonse Milne-

Edwards, so well and favourably known for his many and

highly important contributions to natural science, and who,

in the kindest manner, has placed at my disposal all the speci-

mens of this genus contained in the collection of the museum

to assist me in my investigation of the group.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE.

The American Paleozoic Fossils, fc. By S.A. Mitter. Large 8vo.

Pp. 253. Published by the Author : Cincinnati, U.8., 1877.

Tus work consists of a catalogue of the genera and species of

Paleozoic Fossils found in North America, giving the names of

authors, dates, places of publication, groups of rocks in which the

fossils occur, and the etymology and signification of the words,

together with a preliminary discourse, by Prof. E. W. Claypole, on

the construction of systematic names in paleontology, and an Intro-

duction by the author, on the stratigraphical geology of the Ame-

rican Paleozoic rocks.

This, we believe, is the latest of many useful catalogues of fossils

prepared by geologists of different countries, and devoted to the

consideration of either particular groups or the world-wide distri-

bution of organic remains. In this case the fossils treated of are

limited to those of the Paleozoic Rocks of North America, and form

an extensive list of at least 1000 genera and 8000 species, besides

very many names (upwards of 2000) which are either synonyms or

not well determined:

The organic remains here enumerated are grouped according

to their Orders, the Families of which are mentioned for each

division.

A special feature in this work is a most praiseworthy attempt to

produce the names with correct etymology and derivation. But

besides those errors mentioned in the lists of corrigenda at pages

64 and 246, there are many that have escaped the author’s notice;

and some of them go to prove how true his observation is that the

mistake of the original name of a species is perpetuated in succes-

sive transcripts ; whilst others show, as usual, the difficulty found

by any one in trying to express himself in a language unknown to

him.

Prof. Claypole, both in his excellent essay on nomenclature and

in revising a great portion of the Catalogue, has evidently worked

100 Buibliographical Notice.

hard to improve the orthography of the paleontologists; and he

well observes that the unfamiliarity of many with Latin and Greek,

the carelessness of some who know better, and the misprints in press

have been, and still are, powerful agents in making and keeping

errors in scientific nomenclature. In some of the classes of fossils

Mr. Miller found 25 per cent. of the names defective. False con-

cord between the generic and specific words is the most frequent

source of error, on account of the worker’s ignorance of Latin ; and,

even if the original name be correctly rendered, a subsequent writer

often alters the genus and does not adapt the trivial name to the

gender of the new generic word. As Mr. Claypole had not the

opportunity of seeing all the sheets of the catalogue whilst going

through the press, he has carefully formed an accurate Index of the

Paleozoic genera (pp. 247-253) as to their genders—a great boon to

many non-classical writers. Phlegethontia, however, is set as masc.

instead of fem., probably by misprint; and we think that the

Latinized form Macrocheilus might pass as masc., although the Greek

Macrocheilos would be neuter, and should be used instead of the

former if the latter gender be desirable. So also Temnochetlus.

The use of diphthongs is attended to more carefully in this than in

some other paleontological works ; but Leptena (at page 7), pygmea

(p. 59), hemisphericus (pp. 44, 1387, and 244), meandrina (p. 56),

and Phillipastrea (p. 251) are wrong, for want of the diphthong.

This is dropped by some French writers, who then make the single

letter strong with an accent in their own language, and unfortu-

nately ignore the diphthong in the Latin.

Both French and German titles are badly quoted at pages 48, 56,

95, 193, 219, and at pp. 166, 209, 215, 220, &. Hence a wider

knowledge of these modern tongues is evidently desirable.

There are many slips in the etymology of names, which may be

advantageously corrected in the next issue of the “ Catalogue.”

Thus Aristides is surely historical, and not “mythological” (p. 166).

It must be wmbel-bearing and not “umbrella-bearing” that is

intended at page 60; amphi (p. 209) means “around” or ‘on

both sides,” and not “doubtful.” ‘“Lithofactor” and “petrifactor ”

are meant for makers of and not ‘made of” stone (p. 212); and

Favosites has less to do with any “ proper name” (p. 244) than

with favus, a honeycomb. Some etymologies are stretched, as

“insignificant,” instead of ‘ useless,” for inutilis (p. 130); secwris,

‘‘axe-shaped,” instead of “axe”; sigillate, not ‘sealed,’ but

‘adorned with figures” (p. 212); and why should regularis mean

“‘formed in bars” ?

These slips and misprints constitute, however, but very slight

drawbacks in the profitable use of this excellent, well-considered

book by those wishing to refer to it as a trustworthy epitome of

Paleozoic fossils; and the student will here find very much to help

him in recognizing the value and estimating the right form and

status of their scientific names. The hard pedantry, however

(adopted by others besides the author of this work), of denying

initial capitals to all specific names, whether nouns, proper names,

or adjectives of the latter, takes away many a good and useful sign

Miscellaneous. 101

from the non-classical student, whereby he might have been guided

among apparently similar words of bewildering construction, and

have seen at a glance, not only the grammatical value of the trivial

name, but often the history of the determination of a species, now

obscured in the featureless dog-Latin of ill-recognized nouns, and

personal or geographical adjectives of doubtful aspect.

In the use of proper names it wotld be well if nomenclaturists

would always apply the genitive in the case of the species being

named after its discoverer ; and the adjective form when some other

relationship is in view, such as when a species is named in honour

of some one connected with the study of the group or of the locality.

Mr. Miller’s Introduction on the Stratigraphy of the North-American

Paleozoic rocks is full of information on the nature of the strata

and their characteristic fossils, as elucidated by the many excellent

geologists of the United States, Canada, Nova Scotia, &c. The

maximum thickness of the stratal groups constituting these old

rocks, as here shown, 1s :—

feet.

WP DOMILChOWUS SEEAUR® fa ciale ace oe. S.eya, 4.4 siete « 24,100

“Dey TT ee a Pee 15,235

BY ei ATU ooo cre mia aye sive oN oKd cn 3% ses 8,000

Peer UPN scs: 5 ae cia lere is sic win oie oy hoa 48,745

Terre et AE eee ey Ces ra os din Fuca et eked oi chord yet oes 20,000

PAaren nate ee ee NS Eee ay 32,750

148,830

Even if the thickness of some of these groups be overestimated,

and should portions of them be contemporaneous, yet, as some strata

may have been omitted and others undervalued, the author thinks

that the hypothetically vertical thickness of the whole is not likely

to be less than 28 miles, and may be more, and that all but the

lowest three miles are fossiliferous. He draws strong inferences as

to the upspring and progress of the organic world by “ processes of

evolution and the survival of the fittest,’ and insists on the enor-

mous lapse of time necessary for the accumulation of the strata

under notice.

We are sure that this careful and well-printed Catalogue will be

welcomed by all paleontologists ; and it will be especially useful in

the comparative study of Silurian fossils as treated in Dr. Bigsby’s

‘Thesaurus Siluricus’ (see Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iii.

pp. 314-317), and those of the Devonian and Carboniferous forma-

tions, amassed and annotated in his forthcoming elaborate volume

devoted to those fossils.

MISCELLANEOUS.

Preliminary Notice of a Species of Phasmide apparently possessing

all the Structural Arrangements needed both for Aerial and Aquatic

Respiration. By J. Woov-Mason, F.G.S.

My attention has just been drawn by my friend Mr. Charles 0. Water-

house, of the British Museum, to a Phasmidan insect which, of the

102 Miscellaneous.

many remarkable forms of animal life that the great island of Borneo

has yielded, is certainly not the least remarkable. The insect in ques-

tion is closely related to the Prisopi*, but is even more profoundly

modified for an aquatic life ; for it breathes not only in the ordinary

fashion amongst insects by means of trachez opening by stigmata

on the exterior of the body, but also by the structures known as

tracheal gills. From each side'of its body, in fact, along the lower

margins of the sides of the metathorax, there stand straight out five

equal small but conspicuous ciliated oval plates, which, when the

insect is submerged and its stigmata are closed, doubtless serve to

bring the air that is thus shut up within the body into such intimate

relation either with the oxygen dissolved in, or with the air in

mechanical mixture with, the water as to render diffusion and con-

sequently respiration possible.

The only other insect known to me in which during adult life

ordinary aerial respiration and respiration by tracheal gills coexist

is Pteronarcys regalis, one of the Orthoptera Amphibiotica.

For this remarkable form I beg to propose the name Cotylosoma

dipneusticum.

The insect, which is a female with rudimentary organs of flight, is

between three and four inches in length.

Auriferous Sand in the Neighbourhood of the Seychelle Islands.

By H. J. Carrer, F.R.S. &e.

Belonging to the late Dr. Bowerbank was a little pill-box partly

filled with sponge-spicules, and labelled ‘“‘ Dust from the Base of

Dr. Farre’s Euplectella, 26th Feb. 1857.” This sponge, designated

by Prof. Owen ‘ Euplectella cucumer,” was stated by Dr. A. Farre

(in whose possession it is or was) to have been “ given with other

presents, by the king of the Seychelle Islands, to Captain Etheridge,

R.N., in acknowledgment of some friendly services, with an intima-

tion that it was one of the rarest products of these regions” (Trans.

Linn. Soe. vol. xxii. p. 122); and inferring, from actual experience

(‘ Annals,’ 1873, vol. xii. p. 463), thatthe “‘ dust ” would be found

to contain a variety of spicule forms, indicative of so many of the

sponges that must now live, or have lived, in this locality, it was |

boiled during stv minutes in strong nitric acid to rid it from all cal-

careous and soft substances previously to mounting in Canada

balsam for more deliberate observation with the microscope. Six

slides were thus made, bearing material of different degrees of fine-

ness, from the most subtle that could be preserved to the coarsest in

the box, when it was found to contain, as might have been expected,

a quantity of sand (for the “dust” came from a mass of sea-

bottom still held together in the root-spicules or beard of the

Euplectelia).

But what was most striking, when this sand (about, perhaps, a

grain in weight) came to be examined, was the presence of minute

* For an account of the habits of these animals see Andrew Murray in

Ann. & Mag. Nat, Hist. 1866, 3rd ser. vol. xviii. p. 265.

Miscellaneous. 103

fragments of gold and blue sapphire, to the amount apparently of

one fiftieth part—the former often united with quartz, and more

or less covered by an opaque uncrystalline substance of a yellow-

red colour, like that about the “ gold-quartz” of California.

This is the first time out of the many “ sea-bottoms ” examined

from different parts of the world that I have found gold present; and

as the Seychelle Islands are composed of granite, it seems to me

desirable, when the opportunity offers, that they should be pro-

spected for “‘ auriferous quartz.”

To the different forms of sponge-spicules, which prove to me that

the “dust” came from this Huplectella, I shall advert on a future

occasion.

On a new Marsupial from Australia.

By Prof. R. Owen, F.RS. &e.

The Australian marsupial, the subject of my note in the ‘ Annals

and Magazine of Natural History’ for December 1877. I have since

found described in the ‘ Proceedings of the Linnean Society of

New South Wales,’ Sydney, 1876, p. 33, under the name of Hypsi-

prymnodon moschatus, by the accomplished Curator of the Australian

Museum, Sydney, E. Pierson Ramsey, F.L.S., C.M.Z.S.

Metamorphosis of the Cantharis (Cantharis (Lytta) vesicatoria).

By M. Licurensrer.

For a long time the entomologists of all countries have sought to

discover the transformations of the Cantharis. In 1837 M. Mul-

sant, of Lyons, said, in his ‘ Histoire des Vesicants,’ ‘‘The study

of the metamorphoses of the Cantharides will furnish the subject of

a curious chapter to the naturalist who shall succeed in tracing their

development.”

Since this period I have investigated this question; and now, at

length, I believe I can give the entire history from the egg to the

upa.

On the 27th of June I took numerous Cantharides from the ash,

selecting fecundated females having the abdomen distended with

eggs. ‘Two or three days afterwards they set to work to dig into

the earth in the vessel in which I kept them, and, in the little

cylindrical holes they formed, deposited masses of from fifty to sixty

egos and more, agglomerated together, and of a hyaline whiteness.

About seven days after the oviposition there issued from these eggs

larvee, called by Léon Dufour Zriungulini, and figured by Réaumur,

Ratzeburg, and Mulsant. They are 1 millim. in length, and of a

dark brown colour, with the two segments of the meso- and meta-

thorax and the first segment of the abdomen whitish. The abdo-

men is terminated by two long filaments. This was previously

known.

After a thousand fruitless trials, I succeeded in getting these

larvee to accept an artificial nourishment, consisting of the stomachs

of bees which had just sucked the juices of flowers. These larvee

104 Miscellaneous.

increased in size; and five or six days afterwards their skin split.

There then appeared a perfectly different larva, of a milk-white

colour, without caudal appendages, and having only very soft inte-

guments in place of the coriaceous envelope which it had just

thrown off. Here, again, I was obliged to feel my way to find an

acceptable food ; and supposing that in nature the larve live on the

concreted honey of the subterranean bees of the genera Halictus,

Andrena, and their allies, I offered them honey of Osmia, and espe-

cially of Ceratina, the only one I had at hand in my apiaries.

Although considerably objecting to this nutriment, which evi-

dently is not that intended for them by nature, my larve, finding

nothing else in the glass tubes which served as their prison, ate the

honey of Ceratina, grew, and moulted three times. Gradually the

jaws, at first smooth and much pointed, acquire first one, and then

two teeth on the inner side; the antenne change in form ; the eyes,

at first very visible, disappear by degrees; and finally, in about

thirty days, a larva, arrived at its full development (about 2 centims.

in length), moved uneasily in its tube, indicating sufficiently that it

wanted a condition indispensable to its transformation, namely the

earth.

I was willing enough to furnish it with this, but wished at the

same time to be able to continue to observe it. I therefore took a

glass tube about 2 centims. in diameter, stopped at its extremity by

a piece of sponge, and 3 inches long; this I buried in the moist

earth of a vessel; then, after filling it with garden mould, I put my

larva into it. The latter soon set to work with ardour; by the aid

of its strong legs and horny mandibles, it quickly buried itself and

concealed itself from my view. This was on the 7th of September ;

after waiting eight days I carefully drew out the glass tube, and, to

my great joy, saw against its walls a small rounded cell in which

the larva reposed. But the next day (16th September), and there-

fore nine days after it had buried itself, the skin of this last larva

split in its turn and left me in presence of the pseudonymph, which

is common, I believe, to all the Vesicantia; that is to say, there is a

true chrysalis with a coriaceous envelope surrounding the actual

nymph, which will be afterwards marked out.

I ought, perhaps, to have waited for the exclusion before making

the present communication to the Academy ; but as the last trans-

formation will not take place till towards the spring, I thought

that it would be of interest to make known the Cantharis in its

different forms from the egg to the pseudonymph. ‘The latter is

slightly arched, of a light brown colour, with the head and feet

showing themselves in the form of obtuse mamille. The skin of

the larva is completely thrown off, whilst in Meloé it half envelops

the pseudonymph, and in Sitaris covers it entirely *— Comptes

Rendus, October 1, 1877, p. 628.

* This summary will be completed in a memoir that I am preparing

with M. Valéry Mayet, who is at present busy making the drawings of

the different states of the insect. This paper will appear in the ‘ Annales

de la Société entomologique de France.’

THE ANNALS

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES.]

No. 2. FEBRUARY 1878.

XIV.—Notes on British Spiders, with Descriptions of some

new Species. By the Rev. O. P. CamsBringe, M.A.,

C.M.Z.8., &e.

[Plate XI]

My last communication on British spiders was made two years

ago (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1875, xvi. pp. 237-260, pl.

viil.). Since that time numerous other avocations have pre-

vented any very extended researches in British arachnology.

The results, however, of my own observations, and of the kind

help of some other naturalists, are subjoined. From these

results I have now to record five species supposed to be new

to science, and five others previously described, but only dis-

covered in Great Britain during the last two years. Ten species

are thus added to our list of indigenous spiders, which now

reaches a total of 484 species. Details of all these additions

will be found below, as well as some rectifications of syno-

nymy, with observations on habits and other points conceived

to be of interest to araneologists, both in respect to the new

additions and to some other species also.

In the communication mentioned above, I remarked upon

the very scanty materials extant for any list or history of Irish

spiders; and an appeal was made to Ivish naturalists to collect

and send me spiders from Ireland. I have had one kind

response to this from Mr. T. Workman of Belfast, who has

sent me a good many spiders during the last year, all of them,

however, belonging to species already known, and one only

being of any rarity —Drepanodus albipunctatus, Cambr. (vide

Ann, & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5, Vol. i. 8

106 Rev. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders.

infra, p. 115). I now await further collections, kindly pro-

mised to me by Mr. Workman; and I venture again to ask

other Irish naturalists to collect and send me spiders from

their several localities, so that after a while I may have a fair

amount of material for a ‘ List of the Spiders of Ireland.”

Collectors need not be at the trouble of separating their cap-

tures; all I desire is some of every kind ;, and these can be

safely sent to me by post in strong half-ounce or one-ounce

phials.

Order ARANEIDEA.

Fam. Theraphosides.

Genus Atyrpus, Latr.

Atypus piceus.

Atypus piceus, Sulzer, Cambr. Ann. & Mag. N. H. 1875, xvi. p. 288,

pl. vii. fig. 2.

Atypon Sulzeri, Blackw. Spid. Great Brit. & Ireland, p. 14, pl. i.

g. 1.

Since the publication of my last notice of this species (J. ce.

supra) no further materials have come before me for the more

satisfactory determination of the synonymic position of this

and our other species of the genus Atypus. I have, however,

lately found a. strong colony of this spider under the over-

hanging ledges of a heathy bank on Bloxworth Heath ; and

examples of both sexes in the adult state have been kindly

sent to me not long since from Hampstead by Mr. F. Enock of

London. The remarks made (t. c. p. 240) upon the nests of

A, Sulzeri, have been fully confirmed by the observations made

since upon the nests dug out here, and upon those received

from Mr. Enock. On one point, however, I am still in doubt;

and that is, in regard to the branch occasionally found leading

into, or out of, the main tube. Out of ten tubes dug out on

Bloxworth Heath, four were furnished with a branch ; but no

two of them exactly resemble each other, either in the size or

in the position of the branch. In one instance the branch

issued from the tube at about 23 inches from its lower extre-

mity, and, running upwards at an acute angle, protruded from

the surface among the heather-stems, exactly like the main

tube and at about 3 inches from it, the branch, however,

being about half the size of the tube, which measured 84 inches

in length. In another instance the branch issued from the

tube at about the same distance from its lower extremity, but,

instead of running upwards, it ran downwards, at an acute

angle, toa depth of about 2 inches, being, however, as large as,

Rey. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders. 107

if not rather larger than, the tube itself. In another instance

(one of Mr. Enock’s Hampstead examples) the branch issues

close to the surface of the ground, and appears to form merely

a short supernumerary entrance to the tube: in this case the

branch is no more than an inch long. I am unable to conjec-

ture what the significance of these branched tubes may be.

In regard tothe trapdoor spiders of South Europe, the researches

of the late Mr. Moggridge appear to prove that the presence

or absence of branches to the main tubes indicate specific dis-

tinctions in the spiders by which they are formed; in the

present instance, however, this is certainly not so. A some-

what similar branching has been found to exist occasionally

in the tubes of a New-Zealand species of Nemesia (N.

Gilliesi?, Cambr.); but in this instance I have conjectured that,

the main tube having become choked (as has been the case)

with débris of insects and other extraneous matters, the for-

mation of a fresh portion of tube became necessary. In

the branched tubes of Atypus piceus the branches have not

been in any way choked. The enlargements met with in all the

larger tubes are probably intended for the reception of the egg-

cocoon, and subsequently for the accommodation of the infant

brood until such time as they leave the home nest and form

separate tubes for themselves. In all cases that have come

before me the upper (and projecting) extremity of the nest has

been devoid of any perceptible orifice. It struck me at first

that there might be an elasticity in that portion of the tube,

which, while permitting the spider to effect its exit and return,

would cause the orifice again to close. J am now inclined to

think that the spider gnaws its way out, and after its return

closes the orifice by fresh threads with its spinners, an opera-

tion which it would perform without difficulty in a very few

minutes.

Before separating and spinning tubes for themselves, the

young brood appear to leave the home nest and take up their

residence in an irregular web spun among the surrounding

herbage. This, at least, is the conclusion I come to from

Mr. Enock’s finding a considerable number of young in a web

on a broom-bush close to the colony in April 1876. These

young were much smaller than 129 others found, in the No-

vember following, within a tube. One of the tubes dug out

on Bloxworth Heath in September 1877 contained, in the

enlargement near its lower extremity, about 100 very small

young ones.

The three adult males found by Mr. Enock were all in

tubes.

108 Rey. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders.

Fam. Dictynides.

Genus LretuiA, Menge.

Lethia patula, sp. n.

Lethia patula, Sim. (in literis).

Adult female, length 2 lines.

Cephalothorax oblong-oval, moderately convex above ; caput

rather long; lateral margins at its junction with the thoracic

segments strongly constricted, fore part rather broad and trun-

cated ; occipital region rounded, and forming the highest part

of the cephalothorax ; hinder slope gradual; height of the

clypeus greater than the diameter of one of the fore central

eyes, but less than half the height of the facial space; the

normal grooves and indentations are visible, but not strongly

marked. The colour of the cephalothorax is yellow-brown,

darkest on the caput, glossy, and with a few coarse hairs on

the upper part, chiefly towards the fore part of the caput, and

on the clypeus.

The eyes are of moderate dimensions, and not very unequal

in size; they are disposed in four pairs, forming two nearly

straight lines not far removed from each other. Those of the

anterior row are separated from each other by equal intervals

of about an eye’s diameter. The interval between those of

the hind central pair is rather less than that between each and

the lateral eye of the same row on its side; those of each

lateral pair are seated obliquely on a tubercle, but are dis-

tinctly separated from each other, though by a rather less in-

terval than that which separates the fore and hind central

pairs.

The legs are short and not very strong, and their relative

length is 4,1, 2,3. They are of a brownish-yellow colour

with a very faint trace of darker annulations, which may

perhaps be more marked in some examples than in others ;

they are furnished with numerous coarse bristly hairs ; and the

posterior side of the metatarsi of the fourth pair have a cala-

mistrum which runs throughout almost the whole length of

the joint.

The palpi are of moderate length, and are similar in colour

and armature to the legs.

The fulces are strong, of moderate length, prominent at

their base in front, straight, and perpendicular; they are of a

dark yellow-brown colour, furnished with bristly hairs, and

armed at their extremities on the inner side with several small

teeth of different sizes.

Rev. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders. 109

The mawxille are rather large, of an elongate-oblong form,

obliquely truncated on the outer sides at their extremity, and

inclined towards the labium; they are of a yellow-brown

colour, tipped with a paler hue, and furnished with coarse hairs,

some of which (of a papilliform nature) from a kind of tuft

at their extremities.

The labiwm is of an oblong form, rounded at its apex, and

about two thirds as long as the maxiile, to which it is similar

in colour. .

The sternum is heart-shaped, furnished with coarse hairs,

and similar in colour to the cephalothorax.

The abdomen is oval, and of considerable convexity on the

upperside ; its colour is yellow-brown with various indistinct

markings of a paler hue, many of them, however, being fur-

nished with coarse whitish hairs ; it has thence a more distinctly

mottled appearance. ‘Two pale longitudinal, rather broken,

curved and opposed lines occupy the fore part of the upperside,

and are followed (to the spinners) by several transverse

angular lines or chevrons, formed of small pale spots, the

terminal spot on each side being a small patch or blotch; the

pale spots and markings on the sides assume a rather obliquely

linear form. In front of the ordinary spinners, which are

short and of a yellow-brown colour, is the supernumerary

mamillary organ common to the genus. ‘The genital aperture

presents the appearance of two roundish reddish-brown open-

ings rather widely separated in a transverse line, and nearly

concealed by coarse, dark, bristly hairs.

Although very nearly allied to Lethia puta (Cambr.), and

resembling it closely in general colours and appearance, this

spider is easily distinguished by its much larger size and a

different form of the genital aperture.

The specimen from which I have made the above descrip-

tion was kindly given to me by Mons. Eugene Simon, by

whom it was found in the summer of 1870, at Newhaven, in

Sussex. I have retained for this species the nom de cabinet

under which it was sent to me by M. Simon.

Lethia albispiraculis, sp.n. (Pl. XE. fig. 1.)

Adult female, length 1+ line.

This spider is nearly allied to Z. patula, resembling it

closely in its general form, hue, and appearance; it is, how-

ever, smaller; and the three examples examined are all of a

darker hue and of a more closely freckled look upon the abdo-

men, upon which also the spots of white hairs are very dis-

tinct, though liable to be rubbed off, and so to leave only the

brownish-yellow hue of the markings. A very tangible dis-

110 Rev. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders.

tinction is furnished by the spiracular plates beneath the

fore extremity of the abdomen: these are of a bright white

colour, and in some examples are shining and very con-

spicuous.

Three examples, all females, were found under stones on

the Chesil beach, close to the Isle of Portland, in June 1875.

This spider is also nearly allied to Z. puta, Cambr.; but it is

rather larger, darker-coloured, and of a shorter, stouter form ;

it is also easily distinguished from that species by the white

spiracular plates.

Fam. Drassides.

Genus GNAPHOSA, Latr.

Gnaphosa anglica.

Gnaphosa anglica, Cambr. Linn. Trans. xxvii. p. 410, pl. 54, fig. 10.

Adult and immature examples of both sexes of this rare and

local species were found in parts of Bloxworth Heath from

the 7th to the 16th of June, 1877. This spider secretes itself

under stones, but chiefly under the dry crust formed by the

desiccation of the small muddy puddles which abound wher-

ever the turf has been previously pared off for fuel. In these

situations there is generally, until after midsummer, the

amount of dampness so essential to the life of many spiders.

Genus Drassus, Walck.

Drassus delinquens.

Drassus delinquens, Cambr. Ann. & Mag. N. H. 1875, xvi. p. 246,

pl. viii. fig. 4.

An adult male and two adult females were found in similar

situations to those in which the last species was found, on the

7th of June, 1877.

The male differs very little in size, colour, or markings

from the female (though both sexes vary considerably in re-

spect to size) ; as, however, the male has not yet been described,

it will be well to make one or two observations upon it. With

regard to size, the length of the male found is 22 lines, that of

one of the females very nearly 3 lines, the other female being

just 2 lines.

The palpi of the male are moderately long and tolerably

strong, of a dull yellow colour, the radial and digital joints

being tinged with dull orange-brown; the radial and cubital

joints are short; the former is rather the shortest, and has its

fore extremity on the outer side produced into a strong tapering

Rey. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders. 111

apophysis as long as the joint itself, and rather dilated at its

extremity, very nearly resembling in this respect that of

Drassus troglodytes, C. Koch. The digital joint is large, of

an oval form, and longer than the radial and cubital joints

together. The palpal organs are well developed, of a tumid-

oval form behind, marked with two parallel fine brown circum-

ferent lines; and there are some rather prominent processes

towards their fore extremity.

This spider is nearly allied to Drassus minusculus, LL. Koch

(which appears to be rather common in France) ; but, I think,

on a careful comparison of the two species, it is quite dis-

tinct. The differential characters are slight ; but among them

may be mentioned the closer proximity to each other of the eyes

of the hind central pair, and a slight difference in the form of

the genital aperture of the female. The only examples I have

seen of D. minusculus, L. K., are also considerably smaller

than those of D. delinquens.

Drassus pubescens.

Drassus pubescens, Thor. Recensio Critica Aran. Suec. p. 100, and Syn.

Europ. Spid. p. 208; L. Koch, Die Arachn.-Fam. der Drassid.

p. 128, tab. v. figs. 77-79; O, P. Cambridge, Trans. Linn. Soc.

XXVill. p. 439.

A adult male of this rare and distinct spider was found, under

the dry crust formed in small hollows on Bloxworth Heath,

by the drying up of the muddy water contained in them, on

the 16th of June, 1877. This is only the second example of

the species yet found in England; and it enables me to fix the

time of its occurrence, which I was unable to do in regard to

the former example recorded in Linn. Trans. (. c. supra).

Drassus bulbifer.

sie bulbifer, Cambr. Proc. Zool. Soc. June 1874, p. 386, pl. li.

g. 18.

An adult male of this spider was found at Lulworth, in

Dorsetshire, in June 1877, and kindly sent to me by Mr. C.

W. Dale, of Glanviile’s Wootton. The type of the species,

described J. c. supra, was received among a number of spiders

of many kinds collected by the late Mr. Richard Beck, of

Cornhill, London. Being, at the time when these were sent

to me, under the impression that some of them were obtained

on the continent of Europe, I concluded that the example of

D. bulbifer was a continental one. I have since had occasion

to doubt this, and I feel convinced now that they were all

English specimens. Some were, I know, found near London

and others at Hastings; it is probable that the example

112 Rey. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders.

referred to of the present spider was from this latter locality ;

at any rate the example found by Mr. Dale settles the ques-

tion of its being a British spider. So far as I am aware, it is

not yet known on the continent. It cannot be mistaken for

any, as yet known, British species of Drassus ; its black abdo-

men marked with six pale spots clothed with white hairs on

the upperside, and its yellow legs, the femora of the first two

pairs being black, render it a very striking and distinct-

looking spider. Between the four anterior white spots on the

abdomen is a large, oblong-oval, shining, deep-brown-black

patch.

Genus CLuBIONA, Latr.

Clubiona cerulescens.

Clubiona cerulescens, L. Koch, Die Arachn.-Fam. der Drassid. p. 331,

pl. xiii. figs. 213-215. '

Clubiona voluta, Cambr. Journ, Linn. Soc. xi, p. 583, pl. xiv. fig. 3.

When this spider was described under the last-mentioned

name I had not had an opportunity of examining the female

of C. cerulescens, L. K.; [have now no doubt of the identity

of these two spiders. A second British example of the female

was found at Bloxworth several years ago, and overlooked for

the time among a number of others of the same genus.

Genus CHEIRACANTHIUM, C. Koch.

Chetracanthium nutri.

Cheiracanthium nutrix, Westy. Avan. Suec. p. 878 ; Cambr. Trans. Linn.

Soc. xxviii. p. 531, pl. xlvi. fig. 4.

The only British examples of this spider yet recorded were

found in Lancashire and in Scotland; lately, in September

1877, one was found on Bloxworth Heath, by my son Robert

Jocelyn.

Genus AGRG@CA.

Agraca brunnea.

Agelena brunnea, Bl. Spid. Great Brit. & Irel. p. 159, pl. x. fig. 102.

This is the spider to which is attributed the little white

pear-shaped egg-cocoons attached to grass-stems, rushes, and

other portions of low herbage, and frequently found in nume-

rous localities. It is probable, however, that (in the south of

England, at all events) the greater number of these are formed

by an-allied species, A. proaima, Cambr., this last species

being an abundant one, while A. drunneais very rare. During

many years I have never found more than three or four ex-

Rev. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders. 113

amples of A. brunnea, A. proxima being for a long time

mistaken for it. In spite of the frequent occurrence of the

little egg-cocoons referred to, as well as of the last-mentioned

spider, I have never yet been able satisfactorily to connect

them together. ‘T’he cocoons are covered over, very soon after

they are made and the eggs deposited in them, with a coating

of clay, which effectually destroys all their form and beauty.

This coating of clay answers probably two ends: —first, the con-

cealment of the cocoon and its protection from insect enemies ;

and, secondly, the protection of the eggs from the too powerful

rays of the sun, dry clay being (as is well known) one of the

best non-conductors of heat.

An adult female of A. brunnea was found at Bloxworth,

Dorset, on the 2nd of June, 1876, and an adult male was

received, in November 1877, from Mr. C. W. Dale, by whom

it was found a short time previously at Glanville’s Wootton,

Dorset.

A. W. M. Van Hasselt, in a long paper upon the little

pear-shaped cocoons referred to (Tijdschr. Ent. xix. pp. 28-42,

pl. i. 1876), comes to the conclusion that there are certainly two,

if not more, species of Agraca by which they are con-

structed ; the cocoons differing perhaps in size, and the external

coating of clay being possibly of specific importance.

Genus Le1ocranum, L. Koch.

Leiocranum prelongipes.

Drassus prelongipes, Cambr. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. June 1861.

Leiocranum prelongipes, Cambr. Trans. Linn. Soc. xxviii. p. 489,

pl. xxxiil. fig. 4.

On the 22nd of June, 1877, I met with this hitherto very

rare spider in abundance among the coarse star-grass on the

sand-hills close to the sea at Studland, Dorsetshire. Both

sexes were present; but none had quite attained maturity.

Fam. Agelenides.

Genus 'T'EGENARIA, Latr.

Tegenaria campestris.

Tegenaria campestris, Walck. Ins. Apt. tom. ii. p. 9; C. Koch, Die

Arachn. viii. p. 34, pl. 263. figs. 615, 616; Cambr. Zool. for 1861,

p. 7559, and Trans. Linn, Soc. xxviii. p. 443,

Adults of both sexes were found under old casks and among

logs of wood in a fuel-house at Bloxworth in December 1876.

Up to that time I had met with this spider but rarely, and

always out of doors. I have more lately received it from Mr.

114 Rev. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders.

C. W. Dale, by whom adult females were found at Glanville’s

Wootton, Dorset.

Fam. Pholcides.

Pholcus phalangioides, Fuessl.

An opportunity occurring not long since of observing the

mode in which this spider secured its prey, the following

notes upon it will perhaps be worth recording.

A fly of tolerable size became entangled among the outer

lines of the snare ; the spider immediately approached, but no

nearer than just to reach the fly with the legs of the hinder

(or fourth) pair; it then drew silken lines from its spinners,

and secured them to the fly with the same legs; this was

immediately followed by a rapid alternate winding action upon

the fly, effected also by the hinder pair of legs, occasionally

assisted by one of those of the third pair; the fly was thus

quickly and completely wound up, and then at once carried

off to the recesses of the snare in the claws of the fourth pair

of legs. No bite was inflicted upon the fly, which possibly

may have been thus kept a living captive for days to come in

the spider’s larder. A very similar mode of securing their

prey is also adopted by some species of Epeirides.

Fam. Theridiides.

Genus Puotcomma, Thor.

Pholecomma gibbum, Westr.

Theridion projectum, Cambr. Zoologist, 1862, p. 7962.

An adult male and female of this curious little spider were

found in the sheltered angle of a verandah at Bloxworth on

the 19th of February, 1877, and another male in the same

situation on the 10th of April following. These examples

had probably lived through the winter in the adult state;

those captured in former years were generally found adult from

the beginning to the end of summer, and at the roots of

heather.

Genus THERIDION, Walck.

Theridion familiare.

Theridion famiare, Cambr. Trans. Linn. Soc. xxvii. p. 418, pl. 55.

fig. 15.

Adults of both sexes were found in the angles of the wood-

work of doors of outbuildings at Bloxworth Rectory on the

12th of July, 1877. I have not met with this spider in any

Rev. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders. 115

other locality ; nor has it yet been noted upon the continent of

Europe.

Theridion tepidartorum.

Theridion tepidariorum, C. Koch, Die Arachn.; O. P. Cambridge,

Entomologist, July 1877, vol. x. p. 175.

On the 12th July, 1877, I met with an adult male of this

species in the porch of Bloxworth Rectory. This example is

very much smaller than those usually found in greenhouses

and hothouses, and it is only the second example I have

ever found in any other than these situations (conf. ‘ Entomo-

logist,’ x. p. 175, where an adult male is recorded as found

in a carrot-bed in the kitchen garden at Bloxworth; this spe-

cimen is still smaller than the one found in the porch). It is

probably a spider of great delicacy of constitution, and there-

fore of great rarity, except in such favourable situations as a

greenhouse or hothouse, where it would naturally thrive well

and grow to a comparatively large size.

Genus ERIGONE, Savigny.

Evrigone (Neriene, Bl.) longipalpis.

Neriene longipalpis, Sund. ; Cambr. Linn. Trans, xxviii. p. 447, pl. 34.

figs, 23, 24,

Adults of both sexes of this spider were found, under débris

&c., on the sands near the seashore at Studland, on the 22nd

of June, 1877. I have hitherto found this species very rarely

in the south of England, the more abundant (though very

closely allied) forms being Hrigone dentipalpis, Westr., and

E. atra, Bl., both of which also occurred at Studland and in

a similar situation.

Erigone (Nertene) Clarkii.

Neriene Clarki, Cambr. Linn. Trans. xxvii. p. 441, pl. 56. fig. 20, and

Ann. & Mag. Nat, Hist., Oct. 1875, p. 246.

An adult male of this rare spider was found under a piece

of old board in the garden at Bloxworth, on the 24th of May,

1877.

Erigone (Drepanodus, Menge) albipunctata.

Neriene albipunctata, Cambr. Linn. Trans, xxviii. p. 451, pl. 34. fig. 15,

and p. 541.

An adult male and female were found among the coarse

star-grass and other herbage on the sand-hills near the sea at

Studland in June 1877. These are the first females I have

met with; and they differ from the male only in the absence

116 Rey. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders.

of the great development of the falces so conspicuously cha-

racteristic of that sex. I have lately received an adult male

of this spider from Mr. T. Workman, by whom it was found

and kindly sent to me from the neighbourhood of Belfast.

Erigone (Walckenaéra, Bl.) erythropus.

Watckenaéra borealis, Cambr. Zoologist for 1862, p. 7967.

W. erythropus, Menge, Cambr. Linn. Trans. xxviil. p. 453. ,

An adult male of this rare species was found among star-

grass on the Studland sand-hills in June 1877.

Erigone (Walckenaéra, Bl.) affinitata.

Walckenaéra affinitata, Cambr. Zoologist, 1863, p. 8591; éd. Linn.

Trans. xxvill. p. 454.

In company with the last spider I also found a single

example of the adult male of this very rare and distinct

species.

Erigone (Walckenaéra) atro-tibialis, sp. n. (Pl. XI. fig. 3.)

Adult female, length 1 line.

The cephalothorax is oval; the lateral constrictions on the

margins of the caput are not very strong; but when looked at

in profile there is a deep curved notch or indentation, caused

by the slight elevation of the upper part of the caput and the

rather unusual elevation of the thoracic junction. The colour

of the cephalothorax is yellow; the caput and normal

indentations strongly suffused with black.

The eyes are on black spots and in two transverse and

almost equally curved rows, forming an oval figure; the fore-

most row is the shortest. The interval between those of the

hind central pair is slightly less than that between each and

the hind lateral eye next to it. The eyes of the fore central

pair are nearly but not quite contiguous to each other, and

appear to be rather the largest of the eight, the rest being

very nearly of equal size. ‘The fore laterals are very near to

(though distinctly separated from) the fore centrals; those of

each lateral pair are contiguous to each other and are placed

obliquely on a slight tubercle. The height of the clypeus is

equal to half that of the facial space.

The legs are moderately long, slender, not greatly differ-

ing in length; their relative length appears to be 4, 1, 2, 3;

they are furnished with coarse hairs and a few erect slender

bristles, and are of a yellow colour, the tibiz of all four pairs

‘being black.

The palpi are moderate in length and strength ; the radial

Rev. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders. 117

joint is nearly equal in length to the digital, and enlarges

gradually from its hinder to its fore extremity, where its size

is the same as that of the base of the digital joint. Their

colour and armature are like those of the legs.

The falces are moderately strong, rather long, perpendicular,

and a little divergent at their extremities, and their colour is

yellowish suffused with sooty brown.

The mawxille, labtum, and sternum are similar in colour to

the falees. The mazille are rather strong, short, inclined to

the labium, but straight.

The abdomen is oval, thinly clothed with hairs, and of a

sooty-black colour, strongly tinged with dull yellowish on the

sides and underneath. The form of the genital aperture

(fig. 38, c) is characteristic and conspicuous.

A single adult female of this species was found, on the 14th

of June 1876, among dead leaves in a wood at Bloxworth.

It differs rather from the typical Walckenaére in the form of

the maxille, but in no other respects sufficiently to justify its

removal from that group.

Genus Linypuia, Latr.

Linyphia? incerta, sp.n. (Pl. XI. fig. 2.)

Adult female, length 1 line.

This spider is very nearly allied to LZ. oblonga, Cambr.

(Trans. Linn. Soc. xxvii. p. 433). It is, however, larger and

darker-coloured, though resembling that species very closely

in general form and appearance. It may be distinguished

readily by the larger size of the eyes, which, instead of being,

as in L. oblonga, all of a pearly-white colour, have those of

the fore central pair of a dark hue. The relative position of

the eyes is the same in both species. The height of the

clypeus exceeds half that of the facial space.

The legs are long, slender, their relative length being

4,1, 2,3. They are furnished with bristly hairs and long,

fine, prominent spines ; the length of the spine near the poste-

rior extremity of the tibiee of the fourth pair is equal to (if it

does not exceed) three times the diameter of the joint.

The palpi are rather long, slender, and furnished with hairs

and spine-like bristles.

The falces are long, strong, prominent at their base in

front, and strongly directed backwards towards the mawille.

These, as well as the labéwm and sternum, are similar to those

of L. oblonga.

The abdomen is of an oblong-oval form, rather flattened,

and projects considerably over the base of the cephalothorax.

118 Rev. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders.

It is of a dull brownish-yellow colour, with a somewhat

darker tapering stripe along the middle of the fore half of the

upperside. It is fairly clothed with coarse hairs of a darker

colour than the abdomen itself. The genital aperture is large

and conspicuous ; its form is that of a circle with a portion

(less than half) cut off; and it is suffused with red-brown and

placed at the hinder part of a circular shining prominence.

The spinners are partially concealed by the projecting around

them of the somewhat folded integument of the hinder extre-

mity of the abdomen, which shows very strongly several suc-

cessive transverse folds of the skin, indicating doubtless the

once segmented condition of the abdomen in the primeval

spider.

A single example of this species was found by myself on

the wall of the village school at Bloxworth, on the 5th of June,

1877.

I have included this spider doubtfully in the genus Liny-

phia, to which L. oblonga was referred by Dr. L. Koch on

account of the spines on the legs. I have still, however, the

same doubts as to the generic position of the present spider

which I expressed in the description of L. oblonga (l.c.

supra).

Linyphia furtiva.

Linyphia furtiva, Cambr. Linn. Trans. xxvii. p. 425, pl. 55. fig. 20.

An adult male and two females were found among star-

grass on the Studland sand-hills in June 1877. I had only

met with it previously (and that very rarely) on Bloxworth

Heath.

Linyphia parvula, Westr.

Linyphia longipes, Cambr. Linn. Trans. xxvii. p. 430, pl. 55. fig. 24.

Two adult males were found among low herbage in a plan-

tation on Muston Down, near Bloxworth, on the 11th of

June, 1877. It had previously only been found (as British)

in Lancashire. It is nearly allied to LZ. aéria, Cambr. (vide

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1875, vol. xvi. p. 252).

Linyphia linguata.

Linyphia linguata, Camby. Linn. Trans. xxviii. p. 537, pl. 46. fig. 8.

During the summer of 1877 I received an adult female of

this spider from Mr. C. W. Dale, by whom it was found at

Glanville’s Wootton ; the only previous occurrence of it was

near Berwick-on-Tweed, in the spring of 1872 (/. c. supra).

Rey. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders. 119

Fam. Epeirides.

Genus ZILLA, Koch.

Zilla acalypha, var. (Pl. XI. fig. 4.)

aa ian Walck. Ins. Apt. ii. p. 50; Thorell, Syn. Eur. Spid.

Pp. .

Female adult, length 2 lines.

The cephalothorax is rather strongly constricted on the

lateral margins at the junction of the thorax and caput; this

latter is rather produced, and the thoracic portion rounded,

with the normal grooves and indentations well-marked ; the

highest point of the thorax is (when looked at in profile)

rather higher than the upper part of the caput, the interval

being depressed. The height of the clypeus is about equal to

half that of the facial space. The colour of the cephalothorax

is yellow. The margins, as well as a strong central longitu-

dinal tapering bar reaching from just behind the eyes to the

thoracic junction, black.

The eyes are in four pairs, seated on black tubercles: those

of the two central pairs form a rectangle whose length is

greater than its width, the hind centrals being larger than the

fore centrals; those of each lateral pair are rather further from

the hind laterals than these are from each other; when looked

at sideways the lateral pairs range more nearly in a straight

line with the hind than with the fore centrals, these latter

being placed on a rather strong prominence.

The legs are moderate in length and strength ; their relative

length (as well as strength) is 1, 2,4, 3; they are similar in

colour to the cephalothorax, and are armed with not very

strong spines; the femora are longitudinally but obscurely

marked on the outer side with two almost confluent or diffused

sooty lines ; and the rest of the joints, particularly the tibie, are

spotted and blotched with black.

The palp? are rather slender, moderate in length, and similar

in colour and markings to the legs.

The falces are short and moderately strong, conical, directed

backwards, and strongly suffused with brown.

The maxille and labium are of normal form, of a dark

black-brown colour, tipped with yellowish.

The sternum is also of a similar colour.

The abdomen is large, of an oval form, rather pointed in

front, where it projects greatly over the base of the cephalo-

thorax ; the upperside is of a yellowish-white or cream-colour,

marked with a very distinctly defined, black marking, oblong

behind, and continued almost to the fore extremity in the form

120 Rey. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders.

of a stripe, whose fore part runs off to a point and has a pro-

minently projecting point on each side, making it of a some-

what flewr-de-lys form ; on each side near the fore extremity

is also another curved black marking ; the oblong black area

has four white spots near the middle in two pairs, forming an

oblong figure; the foremost pair are much the largest. The

sides are dark brown, marked obscurely, but somewhat ob-

liquely, with two black stripes towards the hinder part; the

underside forms a black area bounded on each side with a

broken longitudinal stripe formed by some yellowish-white

blotches.

The example above described was found and kindly for-

warded to me by Mr. C. W. Dale from the Isle of Portland,

in September 1877. It appears to me to be only a variety of

Zilla acalypha, Walck. ; but its markings are so very distinctly

and strongly defined that I have been induced to figure it and

to describe it at length: out of many hundred examples of

the species that have come under my notice (both British and

continental European) no such variety has ever been before

observed.

N.B. The legs of the first two pairs in the figure (fig. 4,

Pl. XI.) are rather too short.

Epewra Westringti.

Epeira Westringii, Thorell, Recensio Critica Aranearum, p. 106; zd.

Syn. Eur. Spid. pp. 22, 548.

This spider is closely allied to H. cucurbitina, Clk., resem-

bling it remarkably in general appearance, structure, and

colour; it may, however, be distinguished without difficulty

(in the male sex at least) by the absence of the two dark longi-

tudinal bands on the cephalothorax, and by the smaller size

of the digital joints of the palpi (including the palpal organs) ;

these latter are also a little different in their structure. I

cannot at present lay hold of any such tangible distinctions

between the females of H. Westringit and E. cucurbitina. Dr.

Thorell remarks (Syn. Eur. Spid. p. 549) upon the difficulty

of distinguishing these, and the more especially as there is

another species (not yet found in England), £. alpica, L.

Koch, equally closely allied to both those other spiders.

An adult male and, I believe, a female also were received

at the end of June 1877 from Mr. C. W. Dale, by whom

they were found at Glanyille’s Wootton. This is its first

record as British.

Epetra adianta, C. Koch.

Males and females of this beautiful spider (all, however, im-

Rey. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders. 121

mature) were found, in their orbicular snares, at Lulworth, in

June 1877. Ihave met with it also in various other localities ;

and probably it would be found sparingly in most of the wild

heathy districts of the south of England.

Epetra diademata, Clerck.

It would be interesting to ascertain exactly at what period

the young of this common spider begin to construct the

orbicular snare characteristic of the family to which it be-

longs. On the 18th of May I found a brood of young

which had effected their first change of integument; but they

were still living in a certain sort of community, and spinning

only irregular lines fixed in various directions to the sur-

rounding plants.

Genus CyrToPpHora, Sim.

Cyrtophora conica.

Sd i Walck., Blackw. Spid. Great Brit. & Irel. p. 362, pl. xxvii.

On the 30th of May 1876 I discovered a very beautiful and

perfect web of this spider, spun between the leaves of a pear-

tree, the adult female occupying,as usual, the centre of the snare.

Observing an unusual appearance in the web near her, I

found on a close examination that a space above an inch in

length, both above and below the centre of the snare, and en-

closed between two adjoining radii, was warped across andacross

and wound about with white flocculus of an adhesive nature,

very similar to that found on the linesof the snareof Amaurobius

ferox, C. Koch. Ona very slight movement of the web the

spider raised itself upon the extremities of its tarsi, and by

means of a strong muscular movement, aided no doubt by its

own weight, imparted to itself a rapid vibratory motion for

half a minute or more, repeating it on each disturbance of the

web. I have noticed similar vibrations in some other Epeirids

and also in Pholcus phalangioides. The vibration is proba-~

bly intended to shake any insect entangled slightly in the

outskirts of the snare still further into it; and the adhesive

flocculus is doubtless to aid in the entanglement when the final

struggle comes.

Genus Xysticus, C. Koch.

Xysticus versutus.

Thomisus versutus, Blackw. Spid. Gr. Brit. & Irel. p. 88, pl. 1v. fig. 49.

Thomisus pallidus, Bl. 1. c. p. 82, pl. iv. fig. 48.

Xysticus horticola, C. Koch, Die Arachn. iv. p. 74, tab. 129. figs. 296-

298. ;

After a very careful examination of the types of this spider

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 9

122 Rey. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders.

and a comparison with the type of Yysticus pallidus, Bl., and

examples of X. horticola, C. Koch (the latter received from

Dr. L. Koch), I feel no doubt whatever that these three

species are identical. The form of the projections at the outer

extremity of the radial joint of the male palpus is very stri-

king, and presents a curiously differing appearance from every

fresh point of view. This has, no doubt, in great measure, led

to the mistaking of the different individuals for different species.

X. pallidus is simply the pale (and only slightly spotted)

variety. Dr. L. Koch agrees with me in considering the

three spiders mentioned above to be of one species; but Dr.

Thorell still doubts the identity of 7. versutus, Bl., and X.

horticola, C. Koch.

Xysticus sanctuarius.

oe sanctuarius, Cambr. Trans. Linn. Soc. xxvii. p. 405, pl. 54.

g. 8.

Several examples of the adult male of this spider were

received in September 1877 from Mr. C. W. Dale, by whom

they were found at Lulworth, Dorset. It had previously only

been found at Bloxworth. It appears to have been also found

recently in several localities in France. (See Oxyptila sane-

twarta, K. Simon, ‘ Arachnides de France,’ vol. ii. p. 217.)

Genus THOMISUS.

Thomisus onustus, Walck.

Thomisus abbreviatus, Bl. Brit. & Ir. Spid. p. 90, pl. iv. fig. 54; Walck.

Ins. Apt. tom. i. p. 516.

An immature female and male of this rare and pretty spider

were received, in September 1877, from Mr. C. W. Dale, by

whom they were found near Wareham, Dorset.

Genus PutLopromus, Walck.

Philodromus lineatipes, sp.n. (Pl. XI. fig. 5.)

Female immature, length 1 line.

In its general form and structure this spider resembles P.

aureolus, Clk. The cephalothorax is of a dull brownish-

yellow colour, marked on the sides (and on the upper part

of the caput, between the eyes) with rather reddish brown,

chiefly following the direction of the normal indentations ; the

ocular region has a few strong bristly hairs upon it.

The eyes are placed on slight tubercles, in the form of

a crescent; they are small and differ very little in size.

The interval between those of the hind central pair is greater

Rev. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders. 123

than that between each and the hind lateral eye on its side;

and a similar relative distance (though not to so great an

extent) obtains in regard to the eyes of the front row. The

four central eyes form a quadrangular figure, whose foremost

side is the shortest, and its posterior side the longest.

The legs are short and moderately strong; those of the

hinder pair were wanting; but those of the first are rather

shorter those of the second and third, while these last two

appear to differ very little in length; their colour is pale

yellowish tinged with brown, the femora, genua, and tibie

being pretty distinctly marked with one or two longitudinal

reddish-brown stripes, and they are furnished with hairs and

bristles.

The palp? are similar in colour and armature to the legs.

The falces, maxille, labtum, and sternum are similar in

colour to the legs.

The abdomen is of a short oval form, broader towards the

hinder part than in front ; it is of a dull yellowish red-brown

hue marked with some whitish markings onthe upperside: those

on the fore part leave a longitudinal tapering central stripe ;

and those on the hinder part form several ill-defined transverse

curved lines.

A single example was contained among the spiders for-

warded to me several years ago, from Scotland, by Mr. J. W.

H. Traill. I have hesitated hitherto to describe it as a new

species, owing to the immaturity of the specimen. It is evi-

dently allied to P. aureolus, Clk., and to P. cespiticolis,

Walck. ; but the striped legs appearing to me to distinguish

it satisfactorily from these species, I now describe it, in the

confident expectation that, when adults have been found, my

view of its specific distinctness will be fully confirmed.

Genus THANATUS, C. Koch.

Thanatus hirsutus.

Philodromus hirsutus, Camby. Zoologist, 1863, p. 8565; zed. Trans.

Linn. Soe. xxviii. p. 438.

An adult male and several adult females were found on the

22nd of June, 1877, at the roots of star-grass and other

herbage on the Studland sand-hills. The male being new to

science, I add here a few notes upon it.

Adult male, length rather over 14 line.

The pattern on both the cephalothorax and abdomen is simi-

lar to that of the female (fully described /. c. supra); upon

the abdomen, however, it is much obscured by the paler parts

being ofa slightly sooty-grey hue, caused in some measure by

9 e

124 Rey. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders.

grey hairs; and the whole spider is of a rather darker hue ;

the legs also are longer. The palpi are short; the radial and

cubital joints are very short ; the former is a little shorter than

the latter, and has not, so far as I can make out, any promi-

nence or apophysis at the outer extremity ; the digital joint is

of a narrow oval form, and exceeds in length the radial

and cubital joints together; the palpal organs are simple, con-

sisting of a largish rather prominent oval lobe, with a small

prominent corneous process near their fore extremity.

M. Simon writes (‘ Arachnides de France,’ 11. 1875, p. 330),

“This species is common on the sand-hills ‘de la baie de

Somme ;’ it takes up its abode on the sand at the base of

large grassy tufts. ‘The male is unknown.”

Fam. Lycosides.

Genus Pirata, Sund.

Pirata Knorrit, Scop.

Pirata Knorru, Cambr. Entomologist, 1877, p. 204.

Dr. L. Koch, of Nuremberg, has kindly sent me an example

of this species, received by him from the Isle of Arran. It

is nearly allied to, but quite distinct from, P. piraticus, Clk. &

Blackw. Dr. Thorell (Syn. Europ. Spid. pp. 343, 344) gives

the distinctions between P. Knorrdi and P. piraticus at full

length, as well as the difference of the former from P. hygro-

philus, Thor.,=Lycosa piscatoria, Bl.

This spider will probably be found dispersed over the

marshy districts of the Scotch Highlands.

Genus TARENTULA, Sund.

Tarentula aculeata, Clerck.

Tarentula aculeata, Cambr. Entomologist, 1877, p. 205.

This spider has hitherto been confused with 7. pulverulenta,

Clk. =Lycosa rapax, Blackw.; it is, however, a much larger

spider, though resembling it very nearly in colours and mark-

ings; the legs are also proportionally longer. The differ-

ences in this latter respect are given in full detail by Dr.

Thorell (vide Syn. Europ. Spid. p. 327).

It is only lately (J. c. supra) that ZT. aculeata has been

recorded as a British species, from examples found at Braemar,

and kindly given to me by Mr. J. W. H. Traill, of the Uni-

versity of Aberdeen; it will probably be some day found

generally dispersed over the Highlands of Scotland. Dr. L.

Koch, of Nuremberg, has received it from the Isle of Arran.

Rev. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders. 125

Tarentula trabalis, Clerck.

Lycosa trabalis, Clk., Simon, Arachn. de France, iii. p. 257.

An immature female of this distinct species was received in

January 1877 from Mr. Edward Parfitt, of Exeter, by whom

it was found near that city, and kindly sent to me for determi-

nation.

Mons. Eugéne Simon, to whom it was subsequently sub-

mitted, is also of opinion that it is the same as L. trabalis,

Clk., found by himself abundantly in France (vide l. c. supra).

It has not before been recorded in Great Britain.

The only known British species to which it bears any near

resemblance in the general character of its markings is Taren-

tula pulverulenta, Clk. (=Lycosa rapazx, Bl.).

It may, however, be easily distinguished from that species, in

all its stages, by the yellow hue of the whole spider, and espe-

cially by the clearly defined, broad, dark, yellow-brown, lateral

longitudinal bands on the cephalothorax. The legs are yellow,

the femora being annulated with brown. In the adult state

its much larger size will distinguish it without difficulty from

L. rapax, Bi.

Genus Lycosa, Latr. (Cambr.).

Lycosa proxima. (Pl. XI. fig. 6.)

shatpces proxima, C. Koch, Die Arachn. xv. p. 58, pl. 517. figs. 1453,

This spider is nearly allied to Z. obscura, Bl., L. riparia,

C. Koch, and Z. prativaga, L. Koch; and a close comparison

of its palpi and palpal organs is necessary in order to distin-

guish it satisfactorily. It is, however, quite distinct from all

these ; and among other marks of distinction may be noted

the longer and more slender palpi of the male and the legs

only annulated on the femoral joints. In the figure given of

the palpal organs (fig. 6, ) the peculiar structure of those parts,

which differs distinctly from that of the other species men-

tioned, may be seen.

This spider occurs not uncommonly in my kitchen-garden

at Bloxworth, in the months of April and May; and I met

with both sexes in abundance among low herbage on damp

flats near the sea at Studland on the 22nd June, 1877.

It is now recorded for the first time as a British species.

Lycosa monticola, Clerck.

Lycosa monticola, Clk., Cambr. Linn, Trans. xxvii. p. 398.

Until this year (1877) I have met with this spider only

occasionally in Dorsetshire; but on the 11th of June last

126 Rev. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders.

I found it in abundance, both males and females, in the adult

state, running about actively on the closely fed and extensive

downs between Bloxworth and Blandford; none had yet their

ege-sacs attached to the spinners.

Lycosa herbigrada, Blackw.

On the 15th and 16th of June, 1877, I had opportunities

of observing the egg-sacs of this spider shortly after their

commencement ; these consisted each of a hollow disk of pure

white silk; some were further advanced towards completion

than others; and although the parent spider was with each of

the cocoons, none had been yet attached to the spinners. The

deposition of eggs in the cocoon probably takes but a very short

time, and is most likely effected soon after the sac has at-

tained a hemispherical form. ‘The operation of spinning the

opposite silken hemisphere over the eggs would be quickly

performed ; and the egg-sac is no doubt then at once attached

to the spinners. The sac is of a pure white colour until the

eges are placed in it; it then assumes the greenish-olive tint

usually observed when afterwards the spider bears it about

with her until the young are hatched. The operation of

making the egg-sac, laying the eggs in it, and completing

it takes place usually under a stone, or beneath the dried crust

of previous muddy puddles.

Lycosa herbigrada, although local, is an abundant spider

on some parts of the heaths in the south of England, and is

one of the prettiest and most distinctly marked of all our indi-

_genous species.

It has been found in Sweden and Germany, but does not

appear to have been yet met with in France (vide E. Simon,

Arachn. de France, tome ili. p. 323).

Lycosa annulata.

Lycosa annulata, Thor., Cambr. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1875, xvi.

p- 256, pl. viii. fig. 10.

Pardosa hortensis, Sim. Arachnides de France, iii. p. 343.

When this spider was first recorded as a British species I

was not able to fix any special locality for it. The examples

found in my collection were obtained from Portland and at

Bloxworth, or in the neighbourhood, but were mixed up with

and mistaken for Lycosa amentata, Clk.; I have, however,

during the past season, from the 11th to the end of May, found

both sexes in the adult state, in tolerable abundance, in Bere-

wood, near Bloxworth, at the Yarrells, Lytchett Minster, near

Poole, and in other wooded localities in the neighbourhood.

It will probably be found to be one of the most abundant

Rev. O. P. Cambridge on British Spiders. 127

species of Zycosa in the woods and waste grounds of the south

of England, as it also is, in similar situations, in most parts of

France.

- Fam. Salticides.

Genus HaAsarius, Simon.

Hasarius citus.

Salticus citus, Cambr. Zoologist, 1863, p. 8561.

An adult male of this spider was kindly sent to me ina

living state for determination, in 1873, by Mr. F. Smith

(of the British Museum). This example was found, I

understood, among the botanical collections in the museum,

and hence might be considered to have been imported from

abroad among some dried plants. In October last (1877)

another adult example of the same sex was received from the

Rey. A. E. Eaton; this latter example was captured in an orchid-

house at the Kew Gardens, where it was most probably intro-

duced with exotic plants. This spider must therefore, so far as

our present evidence goes, be considered merely an imported

species. It is very nearly allied to Hasarius Adansonii,

Savigny, but, I think, is distinct from it. This latter species

is found in France, Spain, Syria, Egypt, Palestine, Greece,

Mauritius, and Bombay. I have undoubted examples of H.

eitus from Manilla; and it is possible that it may eventually

turn out to be only an unusually distinctly marked variety of

H, Adansoniti.

Genus Marprssa, C. Koch.

Marpessa pomatia.

Marpessa pomatia, Walck., Simon, Arachn. de France, iii. p. 26.

Salticus Blackwall, Clark, Blackw. Hist. Spid. Great Brit. and Irel.

p- 62, pl. iii. fig. 34.

I have lately received from M. Simon both sexes of MW.

pomatia, Walck. ; and, atter a careful comparison of the two,

I feel no doubt whatever that it is identical with Salticus

Blackwallit, Clark. The single example found at Southport,

Lancashire, and which formed the type of Mr. Hamlet

Clark’s species, still remains the only recorded British speci-

men. It is also a rare spider in France. The palpi and

palpal organs of the male are exceedingly remarkable in their

development.

List of the Spiders noted and described.

Atypus piceus, Sulz., p. 106. Lethia albispiraculis, sp.n., p. 109,

Lethia patula, sp. n., p. 108. Pi. Xl figet.

128

Gnaphosa anglica, Cambr., p. 110.

Drassus delinquens, Cambr., p. 110.

pubescens, Thorell, p. 111.

bulbifer, Cambr., p. 111.

Clubiona cerulescens, L. Koch, p.

112.

Cheiracanthium nutriz, Westr., p.

112.

Agreca brunnea, Blackw., p. 112.

Leiocranum prelengipes, Cambr., p.

113.

Tegenaria campestris, W alck., p. 113.

Pholcus phalangioides, Fuessl., p.114.

Pholcomma gibbum, Westr., p. 114.

Theridion familiare, Cambr., p. 114.

—— tepidariorum, C. Koch, p. 115.

Erigone longipalpis, Sund., p. 115.

Clarku, Cambr., p. 115.

albipunctata, Cambr., p. 115.

erythropus, Cambr., p. 116.

affinitata, Cambr., p. 116.

XI. fig

Linyphia incerta, sp. n., p. 117, Pl.

XI. fig. 2.

atro-tibialis, sp.n., p. 116, Pl.

XI. fig. 3.

Mr. H. J. Carter on Sponges from the

Linyphia furtiva, Cambr., p. 118.

parvula, Westr., p. 118.

linguata, Cambr., p. 118.

Zilla acalypha, Walck., var., p. 119,

Pl. XI. fig. 4.

Epeira Westringut, Thorell, p. 120.

adianta, C. Koch, p. 120.

diademata, Clerck, p. 121.

Cyrtophora conica, Walck, p. 121.

Aysticus versutus, Blackw., p. 121.

sanctuartus, Cambr., p. 122.

Thomisus onustus, Walck., p. 122.

Philodromus lineatipes, sp. n., p. 122,

Pl, Al ag. 5.

Thanatus hirsutus, Cambr., p. 123.

Pirata Knorrti, Scop., p. 124.

Tarentula aculeata, Clk., p. 124.

trabalis, Clk., p. 126.

Lycosa proxima, C. Koch, p. 125,

Pl XP ne 6.

montrcola, Clk., p. 125.

herbigrada, Blackw., p. 126.

annulata, Thorell, p. 126.

Hasarius citus, Cambr., p. 127.

Marpessa pomatia, Walck., p.127.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI.

Fig. 1. Lethia albispiraculis, sp.n., 2, p. 109: a, spider, magnified; 6,

profile of cephalothorax ; c, eyes and part of falces, from in

front; d, tarsus and metatarsus of right leg of fourth pair,

showing calamistrum ; e, natural length of spider.

Fig. 2. Linyphia incerta, sp.n., 9, p.117: a, spider, enlarged ; 6, profile ;

c, eyes and falces, from in front; d, genual and tibial joints of

leg of fourth pair, showing the spines; e, maxille and labium;

Ff, genital aperture ; g, natural length of spider.

Fig. 3. Lrigone atro-tibiahs, sp. nu.. 2, p. 116: a, spider, magnified ;

b, profile ; c, genital aperture ; d, natural length of spider.

Fig. 4. Zilla acalypha, Walck., var. 2, p. 119: a, spider, enlarged ;

b, profile ; c, eyes, from in front; d, natural length of spider.

Fig. 5. Philodromus lineatipes, sp. n., 2, p. 122: a, spider, enlarged;

b, eyes, from behind ; ¢, natural length.

Fig. 6. Lycosa proxima, C. Koch, g, p. 125: a, spider, enlarged; 8,

digital joint and palpal organs, highly magnified; c, genital

aperture of 2; d, natural length of ¢.

XV.—Mr. James Thomson's Fossil Sponges from the Carbo-

niferous System of the South-west of Scotland. By H. J.

CarTER, F.R.S. &e.

[Plates IX. & X.]

Or these fossils I have given a preliminary notice in the

‘Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ for September

Carboniferous of the S.W. of Scotland. 129

fast (vol. xx. p. 176), since which Prof. J. Young and Mr.

J. Young have conjointly published an account of the sarco-

hexactinellid sponge to which I have therein alluded, under the

name of ‘ Hyalonema Smithii” (‘ Annals,’ vol. xx. p. 425,

pls. xiv., xv.). Their right of priority is undisputed; at

the same time my promise to Mr. Thomson, F.G.S., to

describe his fossils must now be fulfilled.

It is not, however, necessary for me to do this at length with

Hyalonema Smithi2, as this has already been done (J. c.) ; hence

what I have to state will be chiefly confirmatory of what has

gone before, having from the commencement, viz. Sept. 1876,

been plentifully supplied with fragmentary remains of its

accompanying spicules by Dr. J. Millar, who obtained them

from Mr. J. Armstrong of Glasgow, in addition to the speci-

mens subsequently sent me by Mr. J. Thomson of the same

city. Mr. Armstrong obtained these fragmentary remains,

which in many instances are nearly perfect spicules, in great

numbers from the rotten detritus with which the crevices of

the limestone where Hyalonema Smithit abounds are filled ;

hence my figures must be regarded as partly restored.

Besides Hyalonema Smithii, Mr. Thomson has sent me

specimens of other fossil sponges from the same system, viz. :—

one for which I propose the name of “ Pulvillus Thomsonti,”

from Arbigland ; and two others, which will be named respec-

tively “ Dysidea antiqua” and “ Rhaphidhistia vermiculata,”

from the same beds as the Hyalonema. These will now be

described and illustrated successively.

Hyalonema Smithii, Y. & Y.

Of this sponge the separate spicules which I possess were

furnished, as before stated, by Dr. Millar; and those which

appear to belong to Hyalonema Smithii have been identified

in situ through specimens supplied by Mr. Thomson; while

there are others which appear to have belonged to other species

of the Sarcohexactinellida, as will be seen hereafter.

Of the cord or stem three fragmentary specimens have been

sent to me by Mr. Thomson, two of which are about the same

size and also close together in the same piece of limestone.

The largest is five inches long and about one inch wide by one

sixth of an inch thick, composed of spicules, once long and

continuous, but now much fractured transversely, indeed com-

minutely in some parts; varying in diameter from one twenty-

fourth of an inch downwards and presenting distinct although

slight undulation (Pl. 1X. fig. 1). Moreover the cord is coin-

pressed so that in the end view from which the proximal or

upper portion has been broken off, and it has thus become ex-

130 Mr. H. J. Carter on Sponges from the

posed by the fracture of the limestone in which it lies im-

bedded, it does not exceed in the thickest part more than one

sixth of an inch, as before stated (fig. 2).

In the smallest of the three specimens, which is not more

than an inch long and in which the spicules are much reduced

in size and spread out, indicative of the free end of such a

cord, is an instance of the terminal or anchoring extremity in

situ, presenting the same inflated, club-like form we shall find

hereafter to be so common among the separate fragments, but

with the shaft at its junction with the anchor-like end only

1-120th inch in diameter (fig. 4, a).

It is not uncommon, as we shall presently see, to find the

cord-spicule grooved longitudinally, in one part singly, or

generally and in great plurality throughout its circumference

(fig. 13, 6, d,e), which has been attributed by the Messrs.

Young to pressure from the “adjacent rods” (J. c. p. 427) ;

but on examining the end of one of Mr. Thomson’s speci-

mens with the microscope, two rather large spicules may be

seen close together with a single groove in each, and the material

between them and the neighbouring spicules entirely composed

of the white granular calcite which fills up the intervals be-

tween these spicules, and thus, in the transverse section,

contrasts strongly with the dark end of the transparent mate-

rial of which the spicule is formed, without the presence of

any small spicules whatever (fig. 13, aa); so that this groov-

ing would appear to be original and not Sout by “ adja-

cent rods.” Besides, where there are small spicules in distinct

contact with larger ones, there is no groove at all observed in

the latter, which therefore may be natural although of casual

occurrence.

The fragments of the surface of the body of a sarcohexac-

tinellid sponge, attributed to Hyalonema Smithii, were also

sent tome by Mr. Thomson, in which the characteristic spicu-

lation of the surface in this species is obvious together with

the lattice-like structure formed by the intercrossing of the

spicules in the Sarcohexactinellida generally. The largest of

these pieces is about half an inch long by a quarter of an inch

broad (fig. 7), in which there is one of the circular fenestral

spaces (now a hole) forming the interstices of the lattice-like

structure, also characteristic of the recent Sarcohexactinellida,

together with remains of others on the circumference (fig.7, bd),

and the peculiar “ nail-like”’ spicules described by Dr. Young

(l.c. p. 426) of all sizes below 1-6th of an inch in diameter

across the head, which is possessed by the few that chiefly

bind down the rest with sloping outspread arms, after the

manner of this kind of spicules generally (fig. 7, a a).

Carboniferous of the S.W. of Scotland. 131

So much for Mr. Thomson’s interesting specimens of

Hyalonema Smithii. Let us now see what the supply of

separate spicules by Dr. J. Millar affords.

1. Fragments of the spicules of the cord.—These vary in

size from half an inch in length downwards, and the largest

of the smooth ones 1-24th of an inch in diameter, while the

largest of those grooved all round the circumference are

1-244th of an inch thick. There is nothing remarkable

in the smooth form; but the longitudinal lineation of the

grooved one may be single or in variable plurality, as

before stated—that is, confined to one part only (fig. 13, 8),

or spread more or less equally round the whole circum-~

ference of the spicule to the number of thirty-two in a

spicule possessing a diameter of the thirty-second part of an

inch (fig. 13, d, e), or may not exceed four at unequal distances

from each other in a circumference double this size (fig. 13, c).

Although I have seen the single groove chiefly in the

smaller spicules, I have only seen the entire circumference

grooved in the larger ones, with the intervals convex like the

Jascis of a Roman lictor, not fluted or concave like an Ionic

column. Whether, however, this grooving, in its extreme

degree, belongs to the spicules of Hyalonema Smithii or

not, the more simple one does, as Mr. Thomson’s specimen

demonstrates in s¢tu ; and reasons have already been assigned

for its seeming to be original, and not produced by the pres-

sure of surrounding smaller spicules, whose absence is evi-

dent where the groove is equally present. Again, although

the largest spicules I have seen were grooved throughout the

circumference, it does not follow that the grooved spicules

are always the largest, as has already been shown.

2. Fragments with four-armed anchor-like ends.—These

are of two kinds, viz. :—the larger, with inflated or rounded

extremity and moderately recurved thick short arms (fig. 5) ;

and the smaller, with pointed extremity and much recurved,

longer, and less stout arms (fig. 6). Both kinds have four

arms opposite. In the former the shaft is slightly reduced

in size to the point where it expands into the arms (fig. 3),

or it may be constricted just before this termination, while the

arms, which in the normal or more regularly formed ones are

thick conical spines of nearly equal length, and nearly crucial

or opposite in position, are somewhat recurved (fig. 3, a, 6) ;

but they may vary in length and obtuseness, in the angle at

which they separate, and in their degree of recurvation, still

always parting from an obtuse or rounded club-like extremity.

This is the character of the anchor end zn situ (fig. 4, a), to

which I have before alluded; so that we may fairly assign it

132 Mr. H. J. Carter on Sponges from the

to Hyalonema Smithii. How far the other form, which, in its

largest examples, is not much smaller than the club-shaped

end, belonged also to H. Smithiz, I am not prepared to state ;

but although some of its largest examples may surpass in size

the smallest club-shaped ones, the smallest of the former that

has come under my observation does not exceed the 1-360th

part of an inch in diameter, and is therefore microscopic, while

the largest club-shaped anchoring end reaches 1-16th of an

inch, and the smallest that I have seen is still visible to the

unassisted eye. Where the shaft is constricted close to the

end, the arms are also constricted respectively, so that there

is no club-like or rounded extremity, so far as my observation

extends, but in its place a crucial depression ; hence this is

either a variety of the club-shaped anchor end or the anchoring

end of a spicule which belonged to another hexactinellid

sponge.

3. Fragments of the “ nail-like” spicule—One of these,

viz. the “ nail-like”’ spicule of (?) Hyalonema Smithit,is smooth

throughout and consists normally of a shaft with four arms,

more or less opposite each other, surmounted by a round head

(figs. 8,9). In size the largest measure about 4-12ths inch

across the arms, each arm, which is sharp-pointed, being about

2-12ths inch long, with a thickness at the base of about 1-48th

inch; the shaft is about the same, or perhaps a little less, and

the round or globular head, which represents a continuation of

the shaft, about 1-36th inch in diameter. But all these mea-

surements, as well as the spicules themselves, are subject to

great variety, inasmuch as the arms, individually or collectively,

may be more or less inclined towards the shaft, and thus not

all at the same angle; or they may depart from the shaft at

different angles laterally and thus be not opposite; while, in

form, one or more may vary from an obtuse point to a short

round knob like the head, or be constricted where they join

the shaft (fig. 9) ; while the shaft, which is in a line with the

head, varies very little in shape (like the globular head), being

for the most part straight and pointed, although sometimes

both head and shaft, individually or collectively, like the arms,

may be more or less constricted at the base. ‘The position of

these spicules in the sponge is illustrated by Mr. Thomson’s

fragment (fig. 7,aa), where the shaft is directed inwards, the

head or knob externally, and the arms spreading out laterally

slope inwardly, so as in the largest forms to bind down the

rest of the structure as in the Sarcohexactinellida generally, all

of which, even to the minutest spicule observable on the

surface, present the same characteristic head and figure as

that above described with its modifications.

Carboniferous of the S.W. of Scotland. 133

Besides the “nail-like”’ spicule of Hyalonema Smithit,

small sexradiates with straight, simple, smooth arms, more or

less varying from a right angle in their departure from the

centre, are observed; but as yet I have not seen any zn situ

(fig. 12).

Add to this spicules with stelliform heads of two kinds, viz.

smooth (fig. 10, a) and tubercled (fig. 10, 5), the former of

which are much the smallest of the two. All appear to me to

have had from six to eight arms or rays spread umbrella-like

over a central shaft, while seven seems to be the most constant

number. ‘The ray of the smooth stelliform spicule in its largest

forms that I have seen does not exceed 1-12th inch in length,

thus giving 1-6th of an inch for the whole diameter of the

head ; while that of the tubercled stelliform spicule is double

that length, with a diameter at the base of 1-48th of an inch,

thus giving a total diameter for the head of 1-3rd of an inch

in the largest forms, which is that of the largest “ nail-like”

spicules of Hyalonema Smithit; while each ray is covered with

a number of minute tubercles on its convex or outer side

(fig. 10, 6), which, increasing in size from near the point

inwardly, become more prominent as they pass into the con-

tinuous area formed by the union of the rays with each other

towards the centre (Dr. Young’s nos. 19, 27, 29). The rays,

which are not straight like those of the “ nail-lrke”’ spicule,

but, as before stated, are incurved like the ribs of an umbrella

when open, often vary in length in the same spicule, and

depart from the centre at different angles in both the smooth

and tubercled forms, so that, instead of all being of the same

length and equidistant, as in the normal or more regularly

formed spicule, some rays are often shorter than others, and

more closely approximated, while the shaft is always straight,

smooth, and pointed.

Lastly, another form has been pointed out to me by Dr.

Millar, like a double star back to back (fig. 11, a, 6). This con-

sists of a shaft with five smooth, straight arms or rays sur-

mounted by a short, pointed continuation of the shaft in front,

which may be minutely tubercled, and five still shorter ones

surrounding it, one or more of which may be bifid or trifid

(fig. 11, c,c). Both sets of rays are inclined towards the shaft

or central axis, but in opposite directions, the latter, upper and

shorter ones (outer ¢n situ probably), most so. Here also the

arms appear to be subject to the same variety as those of the

foregoing spicules, and the spicules themselves to vary equally

in size, the largest seen possessing a straight shaft about

3-48ths inch long with a thickness of 1-48th inch at the

base.

134 Mr. H. J. Carter on Sponges from the

Thus the largest of all these three kinds of “ nail-like”

spicules appear to have been about the same size, and the

three different forms to have belonged to three different sarco-

hexactinellids respectively, while the first only has been seen

in situ; so that each of these three kinds may have been the

nail-like body-spicule of a particular species. At the same

time it should be remembered that, although the “ nail-like”

spicule first described has been found zn sztw in the body-

structure of the sarcohexactinellid to which it belonged, this

body-structure has not as yet been found in direct connexion

with the cord, and therefore has only been assumed to have

been part of Hyalonema Smithii from its association with the

fossil cords; while the only instance of an anchoring termi-

nation like that assigned to H. Smithiz that has been found in

direct connexion with the fragment of a cord is that above

mentioned. Again, according to the Messrs. Young’s state-

ment (/. c. p. 428), the cords are so abundant that it may be

fairly inferred that they did not ad/ belong to the same species

of hexactinellid.

The double sagittate form of anchor end, also above men-

tioned (Pl. IX. fig. 6), may have belonged to one of the species

in particular; while the four arms opposite with their varieties,

in the cord as well as in the nail-like body-spicule, seem

to indicate an alliance with the genus ossella rather than

with Hyalonema (‘ Ann.’ 1872, vol. ix. pl. xxi.). At the

same time the Messrs. Young’s statement that “the rods

are of unknown length, the largest fragments at Trearne being

12 inches, and of various thicknesses, from 1-40th inch to

nearly a line in diameter,” shows that they far exceed in

dimensions those of the largest specimens of any Hyalonema

that I have seen, and dwarfs to almost insignificance the

longest of Rossella, which are only 6 inches with a corre-

sponding thinness (‘ Ann.’ 1875, vol. xv. p. 19, pl. x.), while

the anchoring ends of the cord-spicules in the largest recent

Hyalonemata can hardly be seen with the unassisted eye, being

not more than 1-140th inch in diameter.

Replacement of siliceous by calcareous material during

fosstlization.

Connected with the fossilized spicules of Hyalonema Smithit

is the fact that many of the fragmentary spicules sent to

Dr. Millar by Mr. Armstrong, and obtained, as before stated,

from the ‘rotten material”? or decomposed limestone, re-

spectively present all degrees of transition from the sili-

ceous material of which they were originally composed

to calespar (fig. 14, a, 6, c); and this may be seen by

Carboniferous of the S.W. of Scotland. 135

the rhombohedral excavations, which may appear singly in

some, increased to a plurality in others, which not only has

caused them to lose their original outline, but to become

fretted into shapes which are chiefly characterized by the

angular cavities caused by the encroachment of the calespar

upon the siliceous material (fig. 14, ¢), so that a little more

and the whole of the siliceous spicule would have given place

to calcareous material. The calespar has become redissolved ;

and the rhombohedral cavities which it occupied are thus left to

prove the interesting fact first pointed out by Mr. W. J. Sollas,

viz. that calcareous material, 7. e. phosphate of lime, might

replace siliceous material in the ‘ vitreo-hexactinellid sponge

Eubrochus clausus during fossilization’’ (‘Geol. Mag.,’ Sept.

1876). This, which is one of the most important discoveries

in modern paleontology, on account of the few organisms

which possess siliceous skeletons, and the consequent rarity

of the occurrence, while the reverse is so commonly the case

with calcareous organisms that are replaced by silex, was

subsequently put forth by Mr. Sollas in a more extended form

in his paper on “ Pharetrospongia Strahani,’ read at the

Geological Society on the 20th Dec. 1876, and published

in May 1877 (‘ Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc.’ p. 242), which is

supplemented by a “ Note,” dated “26th April,” in which

(p. 254) Mr. Sollas, on account of the objections made to

his view in the discussion of -his paper, states :—I need

here only remark that while Siphonia exhibits the structure

of a Lithistid (siliceous) sponge, Stawronema of a Hexacti-

nellid (siliceous) sponge, and Pharetrospongia of a 'Thalyosian

(siliceous) sponge, yet the fossil skeletons of all three fre-

quently occur now in a calcareous state.”

About the same time (remarkable facts are frequently noticed

simultaneously by different observers independent of, and at a

distance from, each other) Prof. K. A. Zittel of Munich must

have come to a similar conclusion, as we learn from the

“Note” to his paper on the Hexactinellida, entitled “Studien

iiber fossile Spongien,” dated 15th Feb. 1877, wherein it is

stated that at the general meeting of the German Geological

Society, held at Jena in August 1876, he discussed the

conversion of the originally siliceous skeleton [of the Hex-

actinellida] into calespar, at which time, in the course of

conversation, many objections were made to this chemical

substitution (transl. ‘Ann.’ 1877, vol. xx. p. 516). The

report of this meeting was subsequently published in the

Zeitschr. d. deutschen geolog. Ges. xxvili. p. 6315; after

which the paper above mentioned was read on the 13th Jan.

1877, in the Mathem.-Physical Class, and finally published in

136 Mr. H. J. Carter on Sponges from the

the Abhandlungen, der k.-bayer. Akademie der Wiss., II. Cl.,

xiii. Bd. 1877, wherein (transl. /. c. pp. 264-6) Prof. Zittel

goes into the question at considerable length, noticing in one

part (‘Ann.’ /.c. p. 264) the occurrence of a Hexactinellid

sponge from the White Jura of Streitberg, “half calcified,

half siliceous.”

The objections met with by Prof. Zittel at Jena were not

less encountered by Mr. Sollas at the Geological Society of

London, where it appears, from the discussion that followed

the reading of his paper, that the President ‘ thought it was

more probable that the sponge described was one of the Calci-

spongie”’ (/. c. p. 255).

But putting aside the fact that a siliceous spiculemay become

converted during fossilization into a calcareous one, there can

be no harm in showing how improbable it is that Pharetro-

spongia should have been a calcareous sponge, even if the latter

ever become fossilized.

In the first place, as regards size, the Calcispongie of the

present day are not only all very small, but for the most part

absolutely diminutive. Secondly, with the exception of half

a dozen species (all that appear to be known), none are with-

out the tri- or quadriradiate spicule ; while the acerate spicule in

all is straight, although sometimes undulating in its course, and

more or less spined—never, to my knowledge, simply curved

in the form of an arc, as in the siliceous spicules of the Reni-

erida, of which Pharetrospongia was one. ‘Thirdly, the Calci-

spongiz are so perishable that, although growing exuberantly

when alive for the most part on the rocks of the sea-shore,

where they are incessantly exposed to the action of the waves,

they here become as diffluent as Infusoria immediately after

death—that is, at once become disintegrated, from the want

of that horny fibre and siliceous element which makes the

other sponges so lasting, Fourthly, and lastly, their spicules,

whether mounted in balsam or drawn in among the foreign

bodies forming the core of the horny fibre in the Psammone-

mata, break up rapidly, and in a very short time, passing

into aqueous globules, leave not “a trace behind.” Hence

I now never mount a specimen of a calcareous sponge for

preservation in any thing but a dry and simple cell.

Thus size of sponge, form of spicule, perishable nature both

of entire sponge and individual spicule make it almost impos-

sible that Pharetrospongia and the like could ever have been

Calcispongiz, even if we had not the proofs above stated that

a siliceous spicule may during fossilization become a calcare-

ous one.

I have premised a short account of the discovery of this

Carboniferous of the S.W. of Scotland. 137

fact, as the following description of a fossil sponge from the

Lower Limestone of the Carboniferous system of S.W. Scot-

land, sent to me by Mr. Thomson, affords another instance

of a Renierid sponge, in form of spicule somewhat like

Pharetrospongia Strahani, having passed from the siliceous

into the calcareous state.

Pulvillus Thomsonii, n. sp. (Pl. X. figs. 1-6.)

Calcareous fossil. Pulvinate, circular, depressed towards the

centre on both sides, contracted towards the circumference,

which is round or angular, elevated between (Pl. X. fig. 1).

Surface uniformly granular, interrupted by a central circular

excavation on each side, one of which is much larger than

the other (fig. 1,a), and the smallest filled with a stem-like

fragment (fig. 3,a,6). Internal structure granular through-

out (fig. 2); granules subround, variable in size, below 1-8th

inch in diameter, composed of crystalline calcite, which in the

thin vertical section is semitransparent, of a light brown colour

and sometimes white (fig. 2, dd) ; imbedded in dark material

composed of a heterogeneous mixture of minute particles of

sand and organic fragments, often giving place to white semi-

crystalline calcite (fig. 2, e,e, e) ; the whole, in a vertical or

horizontal section, presenting the appearance of a granular,

minutely veined conglomeration, wherein the veins, especially

towards the large excavation (fig.2,a), are much wider than the

rest, into which they afterwards appear to become subdivided.

Granules largest on the side which is most excavated (fig. 2, a),

and surrounded generally by a thin proper layer, which may

be of a dark lead- or ochraceous yellow colour, according to

the specimen; presenting, in a vertical section, bundles of

smooth, slightly curved, acerate, white, opaque or clear trans-

parent spicules, cut across more or less longitudinally into

variable lengths by the plane of the section (fig. 4, a, 6), which,

when passing through the granules horizontally, fails, except

here and there, to show more than the crystalline calcite.

Broken ends of the spicules abundant in, and projecting from,

the surface of the large excavation, where, from their trans-

parent, crystalline nature, they appear, for the most part,

in the form of dark, circular, transverse sections of various

sizes, in the midst of each of which is a punctum representing

the axial canal (fig. 6,a,4). Spicule smooth, acerate, fusi-

form, curved, and gradually attenuated to a point at each end;

variable in size, about 1-25th by 1-600th inch in its largest

dimensions, the only perfect one seen being smaller, viz.

1-45th by 1-900th inch in its largest dimensions (fig. 5).

Size of largest specimen of entire fossil about 5 inches in

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5, Vol. i. 10

138 Mr. H. J. Carter on Sponges from the

horizontal diameter, and 2 inches in vertical diameter between

the circumference and the centre, where it is thickest (fig. 1).

Hab. Marine, associated probably, according to Mr. Thom-

son, with “ reef-building corals.”’

Loc. Arbigland, 14 miles south of Dumfries, on the Solway

Firth, Scotland, 8.W. In dark grey shale interstratified with

thin bands of limestone characterizing the upper part of the

Lower Limestone series of the Carboniferous system.

Obs. On account of the presence of the spicules above de-

scribed, presenting themselves throughout the fossil s¢dewise

in the vertical section and endwise in the large excavation,

which would be tantamount to a horizontal section, there can

be no doubt that this is a fossil sponge, and, on account of the

spicules being of one form only and of different sizes, as above

mentioned, that the sponge belonged to my order Holorhaphi-

dota and family Renierida, where it would, according to its

spiculation, come in well with the first group, viz. Amorphina,

and the species Halichondria panicea, whose spicules in the

deep-sea form &c. (‘Ann.’ 1876, vol. xvi. p. 470), where

they are larger than in the shore one so common on our

coasts, are almost identical. It may also be inferred from

the spicules appearing abundantly and longitudinally in the

vertical, while they are seldom seen in the horizontal section,

together with the broken ends themselves in the large excava-

tion, that the direction of the spiculation was more or less ver-

tical. ‘This would have been more satisfactorily confirmed

could the transverse section of the bundles have been seen in

the horizontal section, as they thus appear in Pharetrospongia

Strahant, Soll.; but the opaque crystallization of the calea-

reous material in the “ granules ” seems to obscure this, since

the transverse sections of the scattered spicules in the large

excavation, where the crystallization is transparent, are plain

enough, with acommon lens of two inches focus: and under a

magnifying-power of 100 diameters, their axial canal respec-

tively is distinctly seen, which does not exist in the spicules

of the Calcispongiz, except in Hiickel’s fertile imagination.

For the deep-sea variety of Halichondria panicea I have

proposed the specific name of ‘ cancellosa”’ (/. c.), from its

areolar structure; and it may be that the “granules” of Pul-

villus Thomsonii represent such spaces (fig. 2).

Of course the pores of this sponge have disappeared, from

their minuteness and situation in the dermal sarcode; while

the excretory canal-system seems to be indicated by the vena-

tion between the granules, which in its widest and most dilated

parts may, in the section, be observed to be filled with hetero-

geneous material composed of sand and the remains of organic

Carboniferous of the S.W. of Scotland. 139

bodies such as fragments of shells &c. (fig. 2, eee), while

the remote parts, as above mentioned, are occupied by opaque

white crystalline calcite alone. The widest parts, too, being

on the side of the large central excavation, and particularly

leading into the excavation itself (fig. 2, @), would seem to show

that this was the excretory side, and that the principal outlet

was at this excavation; while the smaller venation being on

the opposite side of the fossil, seems to point out that this was

more particularly the “ pore-surface,” which, if the sponge

grew from the roof of a submarine rocky cavern pendent from

the stem-like portion in the smaller excavation (fig. 2, 0, c),

would indicate its upper part, and vice versé if it grew from

the upper surface of the rock or material on which it was

originally fixed; for it has every appearance of having once

been pedunculated.

The specimens (of which there are three) are not all exactly

alike in their general shape: two, growing from a flat circular

base, have risen into a depressed truncated conical form ;

another has a smooth unequal or undulating subconical side,

with three large holes almost equidistant from each other and

from the circumference, which, together with the central excava-

tion, look very much like the remains of large vents.

The former (fig. 1) appears to be the prevailing form; but

independently of an original difference in this respect, some-

thing must be allowed for subsequent alteration during the

time the sponge was loose on the sea-bottom before fossiliza-

tion, and something afterwards ; hence it would be absurd to

expect that all the specimens should be alike in general form

any more than those of recent sponges.

All the spicules with the rest of the fossil are calcareous ;

at the same time it is worthy of remark that when dilute

nitric acid is applied to the surface of a polished vertical sec-

tion where the spicules may be observed to le horizontally,

and the part then subjected to gentle edulcoration with water,

more or less of the spicules is left in relief on the surface,

which, although in a friable state, as in Pharetrospongia

Strahani when treated in a similar manner, seems to indicate

a lingering remnant of their original siliceous composition.

Dysidea antiqua, n. sp. (Pl. X. figs. 7-9.)

Siliceous fossil. Small, massive, globular, sessile, reticulate

(fig. 7). Surface uniformly reticulate (fig. 7, a), being a con-

tinuation of the internal structure, which is composed of mas-

sive reticulation (fig. 8). Fibre of reticulation about 1-96th

inch in diameter ; interstices about 3-48ths inch wide ; com-

140 Mr. H. J. Carter on Sponges from the

posed of a heterogeneous assemblage of sand and fragments

of various sponge-spicules, together with what appears to be

the siliceous globules of a Geodia and the branches of a lithistid

sponge-spicule (figs. 8, d, and 9, 6) ; but as the former is some-

times evidently botryoidal chalcedony, and the latter, from its

frequency, may be a fibrous form of the same mineral, it is not

safe to assume that these two forms were ever organic. Size

of largest and best-formed specimen about half an inch in

diameter (fig. 7).

Hab. Marine, in company with Hyalonema Smithit.

Loc. Upper thin beds of Lower Carboniferous Limestone,

Cunningham Baidland, Dalry, Ayrshire, S.W. Scotland.

Obs. From the structure and composition of the reticulated

fibre of which this fossil is composed, it may fairly be inferred

to have been a sponge belonging to my order Psammonemata,

probably of the family Hircinida and 16th group, viz. Arenosa ;

even now, from its appearance, it might almost be mistaken for

a living Dysidea it on the rocks where the latter grows.

There are several specimens, of which the largest and most

perfect is that above described. Having directed a stream

of water over it for some time, the material thus washed off

was mounted in balsam, which presents, on microscopic exa-

mination, fragments of a variety of spicules, together with

grains of quartzose sand, from which a few of the former have

been figured ¢o scale for illustration (fig. 9, a).

Rhaphidhistia vermiculata, n. sp. (Pl. LX. figs. 15-19.)

Siliceous fossil. Laminiform, parasitic on a species of

(?) Hydractinia (fig. 15). Composed of acerate, vermicular

spicules lying confusedly together on the surtace of the fossil

Hydractinia (fig. 16, a), which consists of a convex, subcir-

cular, depressed mass of more or less erect, conical, columnar

processes, sometimes unequally bifurcate at the apex, rising

from a reticulate structure of the like nature (fig. 16), based

on a continuous membranous attachment now lapidified

(fic. 16, cc), about half an inch in horizontal diameter, which

is the size of the superincumbent mass. Processes about

1-12th inch high by about 3-48ths inch wide at the base, com-

posed of chalcedony with a saccharine crystallization on the

surface (fig. 17) and a central axial hollow closed at the

summit (fig. 16, e, b), covered in some instances with the layer

of vermiculate spicules above mentioned, one end alone of each

of which is visible on account of the other being hidden beneath

its neighbours (fig. 18). Spicule smooth, apparently acerate,

fusiform, vermiform, and abruptly pointed at each end

(fig. 19); about 1-900th inch in diameter and about 1-90th

Carboniferous of the S.W. of Scotland. 141

inch long, which is that of the longest exposed portion.

Thickness of the layer inappreciable, extent depending on the

quantity of the Hydractinia covered by it.

Hab, Marine, in company with Hyalonema Smithit.

Loc. Upper thin beds of Lower Carboniferous Limestone,

Cunningham Baidland, Dalry, Ayrshire, 8.W. Scotland.

Obs. From the general form and reticulate structure of this

fossil (fig. 16) it appears to be more like a species of Hydrac-

tenia than any thing else, subsequently overgrown by the

layer of vermitorm spicules mentioned. If the whole belonged

to the sponge, then it was wholly one, and not parasitically

overgrown by the layer of sponge-spicules, which now form,

on the columns covered by them, a continuation of the sub-

jacent material (chalcedony). But, out of several specimens,

as there are as many without as with this covering, while

the columns are hollow and not solid, it seems very likely

that Lhaphidhistia vermiculata was a parasitic laminiform

sponge very much hke Hymeraphia vermiculata, Bk.; but the

large erect pin-like spicules of the latter do not appear to be

present. There are many minute recent sponges, however,

that are laminiform without the large erect pin-like spicule

which characterizes Dr. Bowerbank’s suborder Hymeraphia,

some of which I may hereafter have to describe under the

generic name Lihaphidhistia.

If this was a Hydractinia parasitically covered by the sponge,

then it was probably a calcareous one which subsequently

became chalcedonized and finally encroached upon by calcite ;

for many of the conical processes are as much eroded by rhom-

bohedral excavation as the spicules of Hyualonema Smithit

already mentioned ; while this is also the case with many of the

minute chalcedonized shells which Dr. Millar sent me from the

disintegrated or “rotten” limestone, wherein there can be no

doubt that the shell was calcareous in the first instance. Hence

there is yet much in palexontology that requires elucidation

by the chemist.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PLateE IX.

Fig. 1. Hyalonema Smithii, Y. & Y. Fragment of cord imbedded in

Encrinital Limestone, natural size. “a, upper; 6, lower end.

Fig. 2. The same. Transverse section of the upper end, nat. size.

Fig. 3. The same. Fragment of anchoring end of cord-spicule ; lateral

view. 4d, view of free end; 0b, view of shaft side. x 2.

Fig. 4. The same. Magnified, in situ. a, fragment of anchoring end.

Fug.5. The same. More magnified lateral view, to contrast with the

following form.

Fig. 6. ? The same. Anchoring end of cord-spicule, with four arms

opposite and much recurved ; double sagittate.

142 On Carboniferous Sponges from S8.W. Scotland.

Fig. 7. The same. Fragment of surface of body, showing, a a, “nail-

like” spicules 2 situ, and, 6 6, fenestral openings. xX 2. [N.B.

In this figure the arms, which appear to have been broken off or

absent, have sunk beneath the surface. |

Fig. 8. The same. “Nail-like” spicule of the most regular form. xX 3.

Fig. 9. The same. Lateral view of nail-like spicule, showing the con-

striction at the fixed ends of the arms respectively. X 3.

Fig. 10. ? The same. Stelliform nail-like spicule with smooth and tuber-

cled arms respectively. a, smooth or small form; 4, large,

matured, or tubercled form. x 3.

Fig. 11. ? Thesame. Double stelliform nail-like spicule. a, small form ;

b, large or matured form; cc, stelliform head in a@ and 6 respec-

tively ; dd, arms respectively: x 3. e, more magnified view of

head, showing trifurcation of a lateral spine of stelliform head

and tubercles over central one.

Fig. 12. ? The same. Simple sexradiate spicule.

Fig. 18. The same, to show grooving. Magnified view of a few of the

cord-spicules in situ. Transverse section. a a, two single- grooved

spicules together, the largest about 3-48ths inch in diameter;

6, more magnified view of a transverse section of a single-

erooved cord-spicule ; c, the same of a four-grooved spicule ; d,

the same of a thirty-two-grooved spicule ; e, lateral view of a

fragment of the latter. All x 16.

Fig. 14. The same. Fragments of the siliceous spicule encroached upon

by calcite subsequently redissolved and leaving excavations.

a, lateral view of a fragment of a cord-spicule presenting a few

excavations ; b, end view of a fragment presenting many exca-

vations, extending to the centre; c, lateral view of a fragment

rendered shapeless by being fretted out by general excavation.

Fig. 15. Rhaphidhistia vermiculata, n. sp. ? On a species of Hydractina.

Upper view. xX 2.

Fig. 16. The same. Fragment of the Hydractinia, much magnified, to

show :—a, layer of Rhaphidhistia on, 66, conoid columns and

reticulate structure of Hydractinia, based on, cc, membranous

expansion, now lapiditied ; d, truncated fibre of Hydractinia ; e,

truncated column, showing axial cavity; fff, interstices of

fibre.

Fig. 17. The same. Conoid column incipiently bifurcated, much magni-

fied, to show the absence of the layer of spicules.

Fig. 18. The same. Conoid column, much magnified, to show presence

of the layer of spicules.

Fig. 19, The same. Probable form of entire spicule.

N.B. The above are all siliceous fossils.

PLATE X.

Fig. 1. Pulvillus Thomsonit, n. sp. (Calcareous.) Upper view. a, central

excavation, presenting the broken ends or transverse sections

respectively of the spicules (fig. 6). Half the natural size.

Fig. 2, The same. Verticalsection through the centre, showing :—a, upper

or large excavation; b, lower or smaller excavation ; c, ? stem

or pedicle in smaller excavation ; dd, granules of whitish-brown

calcite, of which the fossil is chiefly composed, presenting more

or less longitudinal sections of the bundles of spicules, all tend-

ing to a vertical direction ; eee, heterogeneous sandy material,

vein-like between the granules in the upper, replaced by white

On new and little-known Mantide. 143

ealcite in the lower part, widening towards the upper part,

indicative of their having formed portions of the excretory canal-

system. Half the natural size.

Fig. 3. The same. Portion of the lower surface, including the smaller

excavation and stem-like process. a, excavation ; 6, stem-like

process. Half the natural size.

Fig. 4. The same. Separate granule of calcite, much magnified, to show

more or less longitudinal sections of spicules in it. Diagram.

Spicules on the scale of 1-48th to 1-1800th inch. 4, calcite ; b,

spicules, variable in length and transverse diameter.

Fig. 5. The same. Example of the staple form of a perfect spicule found

in the heterogeneous sandy material filling the interstices be-

tween the “granules” near the surface. Scale 1-48th to

1-1800th inch.

Fig. 6. The same. Portion of the surface of the larger excavation, show-

ing the broken ends or transverse sections of the spicules (fig. 1, a).

a, ends on a level with the surface ; 6, ends protruding. Scale

of spicules 1-48th to 1-1800th inch.

Fig. 7. Dysidea antiqua, n. sp. (Siliceous.) Showing general form of

most perfect specimen, and portion of reticulated surface. X 2.

a, portion of reticulated surface.

Fig. 8. The same. Portion of the reticulated structure, much magni-

fied, showing :-—a a, the fibre composed of heterogeneous mate-

rial; 6b, the interstices; c, fragments of cylindrical spicules

in the fibre ; d, fragments of lithistid-like fibre. Diagram.

Fiy. 9. Thesame. A few of the fragmentary spicules washed off the fibre

and mounted in balsam, to show that the fibre is heterogeneously

composed. a, smallest four-armed anchoring-spicule seen;

b, (?) branch of lithistid sponge-spicule. Scale 1-96th to

1-6100th inch.

Budleigh-Salterton,

28th November, 1877.

XVI.—Notes on new and little-known Mantide. By Prof.

J. Woop-Mason, Deputy Superintendent, Indian Museum,

Calcutta.

1. Huchomena thoracica.

Mantis (Thespis) thoracica, De Haan, Orthopt. Orient. p. 94, 2.

Phasmomantis? thoracica, Saussure, Mélanges Orthopt. 1. 8° fase. p. 192

(44) ; ibid. p. 403 (279).

Fischeria thoracica, Saussure, op. cit. ii. 4° fase. p. 58.

Euchomena? macrops, Saussure, op. cit. i. 3° fasc. p. 196 (48), 3d.

“ Femina, Alis abbreviatis, hypothoracem non superantibus, imma-

culatis ; prothorace longissimo, integro ; femoribus anticis intus

pallidis, fasciis tribus fuscis; pedibus posticis nigro marmoratis ;

cercis analibus cylindricis. Long. proth. 2; abdom. 15’”;

ely. 6°... Hab.?”

Hab. A specimen of the female was captured several years

ago by my native collector in Johore, Malay peninsula ; and

144 Prof. J. Wood-Mason on new

another, which has been independently identified by Prof.

Westwood as the J. thoracica of De Haan, exists in the

Hopeian collection at Oxford.

The following are the measurements of the specimen (dried)

from Johore :—

Total length of body 106 millims.; height of head 5,

breadth of head 8; length of prothorax 58, of which the neck

is 8°33, breadth of prothorax at narrowest part, just behind

dilatation, 2°25; length of meso- and metanotum together 13,

of tegmina 12, of abdomen 31; of fore coxa 22°5, of femur

26, of its unarmed part 14°5; of intermediate femur 25, of

tibia 23; of posterior femur 31, of tibia 32.

The fore tibie have 7 teeth on the outer edge, the base of

which is unarmed, and 14 on the inner; the abdomen is de-

pressed and rather broadly fusiform, with its posterior seg-

ments graduated*so as to have a serrated appearance in this

part ; and the supraanal plate is short, broader than long, and

rounded off at the extremity.

This species cannot be the female of Fischeria gigas as sug-

gested by De Saussure, but is, in all probability, that of

Euch.? macrops, Sauss., from Cochin China,

Euchomena heteroptera, Euch.? macrops g, and Euch. tho-

racica ¢ all have the inner face of the fore femora triply

banded with fuscous, and all belong to the same fauna.

A fuller description with figures will be published here-

after.

2. Fischeria laticeps.

Fischeria laticeps, Wood-Mason, A. & M. N. H. 1876, 4th ser. vol. xviii.

p. 337, do.

@. Ocelli small, seated on a slightly elevated area, not on

the ends of the rays of a triradiate elevation as in the male;

the lower one circular, the two upper ones oval.

Pronotum with a very faint raised median line, on either

side of which are a few small polished granules; its mar-

gins throughout minutely denticulate, the denticles blunt and

polished ; the sides of the disk of its posterior lobe bent down

at an obtuse angle to the median portion.

Organs of flight abbreviated, in repose barely reaching so

far as to the end of the basal third of the first abdominal seg-

ment. 'Tegmina opaque, semicoriaceous: the lower surface

richly coloured, the marginal field dull luteous, the basal por-

tion of the discoidal and the axillary field stone-coloured, with

a faint tinge of red-violet, the rest of the former occupied by a

great oval blotch of dark brown with amethystine reflections,

in the centre of which is a large transversely oval cream-

coloured ocellus, with minutely jagged edges: the upper sur-

and little-known Mantide. 145

face is of the same sober colour as the body, with a patch of

lighter coloration coinciding with the anteapical cream-

coloured ocellus on the under surface; the anal area very

salient, black, with green reflections (dark brown by trans-

mitted light). Wings small, forming a quadrant of a circle

all but unbroken by anal emargination; the anterior field

opaque, dull luteous, with a large anteapical blotch of brown,

ocellate or broadly banded with yellow; the posterior field

black, with green reflections (dark brown by transmitted light),

lined with hyaline along the transverse veinlets.

Colour of the body luteous grey, finely mottled with pale

impure olive-green.

Length of body 102 millims. ; height of head 4°75, breadth

of head 9°8 ; length of prothorax 34, of which the neck is 9°6,

breadth of prothorax at supracoxal dilatation 4°6; length of

abdomen 51, of cerci 12°75, of tegmina 16; width of mar-

ginal area of tegmina 1; length of anterior femur 22°6, of inter-

mediate femur 25, of posterior femur 33; of antenne 16, or

about half as long as the prothorax, or as long as the teg-

mina.

Another specimen obtained at the same time measures only

93 millims. in length.

Described from fresh alcoholic specimens.

Hab. 2 2 . Bangalore District, Mysore, obtained by Private

Reedy; , Sheargaon, Kolapur state, India.

There can be no doubt that the four insects, two nymphs

and two adults, recently received by me from South India,

are all females of this species, though so much smaller than

the male specimen described loc. supra cit. In the form of

the head and eyes, of the cerc: and supraanal plate, of the

legs, &e. they all agree perfectly with the male, differing

from it in those points only in which the two sexes of other

species (e. g. J. ocellata) of the same genus have been shown

to depart from one another. These differences are the slightly

stouter build, the soberer desert-form-like livery, the much-

abbreviated organs of flight, these barely reaching the end of

the basal third of the first abdominal segment, &c.

Specimens of both sexes of the larger race are in the

Hopeian collection at Oxford ; but the species is unrepresented

either in the National collection or apparently in the conti-

nental collections.

3. Hierodula notata.

Mantis notata, Stoll, Spectres, Mantes, &c. fig. 49, 2 (1789).

Hierodula notata, Saussure, Mélanges Orthopt. ii. 3° fase. p. 280,

pl. v. fig. 31,

9. Total length 67 millims.; length of prothorax 23,

146 On new and little-known Mantide.

breadth of prothorax at dilatation 6:3; length of meso- and

metanotum taken together 17, of abdomen 21°5, of tegmina

48 ; breadth of tegmina 16, of marginal area 4°75.

Alcoholic specimen.

Hab. Ceylon (fF. M. Mackwood).

4, HMierodula birivia.

Mantis birivia, Stoll, Spectres, Mantes, &c. pl. ix. fig. 31 (1787).

anna sage birtvia, Saussure, Mém. Orth. Mexique, &c. tom. ii. p. 89,

4, fig. -

Hierosita bivivia, Saussure, Mél. Orthopt. 11. 4° fase. p. 41.

@ ¢. Total length 80-87 millims.; height of head 8:5-9°5,

breadth of head 11°33-12; length of prothorax 29-32, breadth

of prothorax at dilatation 8°6-9-2 ; length of abdomen 30-33,

breadth of abdomen 18; length of mesonotum and metanotum

taken together 18°5-20, of tegmina 49-53, from base to

stigma 18-20, of stigma 2; breadth of tegmina 19-20°5, of

marginal area 5°6-6.

Alcoholic specimens.

In the larger specimen (from Madras) the discoidal vein

emits three branches in the right wing and five in the left ;

in the smaller (from Bangalore) three in the right and two in

the left; while in M. de Saussure’s specimen it is three-

branched in both wings.

5. Mierodula taprobane, n. sp.

2. Allied to the preceding, but differing :—in its stouter pro-

thorax, the lamellar lateral margins of which are broader and

extend, narrowing gradually as they go, from the supracoxal

dilatation to the base of the segment ; in its broader and more

coriaceous tegmina, the anal area of which alone is mem-

branous; in the form of its facial shield, which is higher

(longer) than broad, instead of broader than high, the upper

margin of which is obtuse-angled instead of arcuate, and the

surface of which is marked by two obtuse vertical ridges on

its upper half; and in the armature of the anterior angle of

the fore femora, which is furnished, as in H. notata, with six

or seven large, stout, and blunt conical spines only. The

apical third of the tegmina, which in H. birivia are uniform

green, is stained brownish yellow. ‘The discoidal nervure of

the wings is three-branched. The fore tibie have 14-15

teeth on the inner edge, and 11 on the outer.

Total length of body 83 millims.; height of head 9°6,

breadth of head 11:6; length of prothorax 30°6, breadth of

prothorax at dilatation 11; length of meso- and metanotum

taken together 20°5, of abdomen 31; greatest breadth of

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Plagusiine. 147

abdomen 20; length of tegmina 56, breadth of tegmina 23, of

their marginal area 8; length of stigma 3°75; of fore coxa

21:5, femur 24°3; of intermediate femur 21, tibia 18; of pos-

terior femur 25, tibia 25.

Dried specimen.

Hab. Ceylon. Communicated by Mr. F. M. Mackwood, of

Colombo.

6. Mierodula trimacula.

Hierodula trimacula, Saussure, Mélanges Orthopt. i. 3° fase. p. 82,

pl. v. fig. 29, 9.

Hab. Oman, Arabia, obtained by Colonel Miles, the British

Resident at that place. The species was described from a

specimen in the Paris Museum, marked ‘‘ China ?”’

XVI.— Revision of the Plagusiine. By Epwarp J. Miers,

F.L.S., F.Z.S., Assistant in the Zoological Department,

British Museum.

TuHE following is a synonymic list, with brief diagnoses and

remarks, of the species of this small and well-defined group,

which belongs to the subtribe Catometopa, or Grapsoid Bra-

chyura, and is peculiar on account of the remarkably flattened

carapace and of the position of the antennules, which are

exposed in deep longitudinal clefts or sinuses of the front

and are visible in a dorsal view. It contains but two genera,

Plagusia and Leiolophus*.

In determining and naming the species in the collection of

the British Museum, I found that several of those recorded

had apparently been established on insufficient grounds, and

that of others the commonly received designations could not

be retained ; and I think it will be useful to place these obser-

vations on record, and at the same time indicate those cha-

racters which I have found most constant and reliable for

distinguishing the species.

* The curious genus Crossotonotus, recently established by M. A.

Milne-Edwards (Nouv. Archiv. Mus. Hist. Nat. ix. p. 282, 1873) for a

species (C. compressipes) from the Samoa Islands and New Caledonia,

presents many affinities with the Plagusiinee, but cannot be referred to

this group, on account of the absence of the frontal sinuses. The genus

Plagusetes, based on a species from Chili (P. elatus), described by Heller in

the preliminary synopsis of the Crustacea of the ‘ Novara’ Voyage (Verh.

zool.-bot. Gesell. Wien, xii. p. 522, 1862), is not mentioned in his final

report, but seems to have been based on specimens subsequently referred

to Acanthocyclus Gayi, a genus belonging to the Cancroidea, but possessing

some affinities with the Plagusiine.

148 ' Mr. E. J. Miers on the Plagusiinz.

The crustaceans of this group are found in nearly all the

tropical and warmer temperate seas of the globe.

PLAGUSIA.

Plagusia, Latr. (part), Gen. Crust. et Ins. i. p. 83 (1806); M.-Edw.

(part), Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 90 (1837); Ann. Sci. Nat. (sér. 3)

ool, xx. p. 178 (1853), &e.

Philyra (subgen.), De Haan, Faun. Japon. Crust. decas ii. p. 31

(1835).

Outer maxillipeds with the third or merus joint well deve-

loped, as broad as the preceding joint. (Male genital appen-

dages of the first pair without a terminal claw.)

§ 1. Merus joint of the ambulatory legs with a terminal and

subterminal spine on its upper margin.

Plagusia tuberculata.

Plagusta squamosa, Lamarck, Hist. An. sans Vert. p. 246 (1818) ;

M.-Edw. Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 94 (1837), nec Herbst.

Plagusia tuberculata, Lamarck, /. ec. p. 247 (1818); Latr. Encyel. Méth.

x. p. 146 (1825), Atlas, Crust. pl. ecev. fig. 1 (1818); M.-Edw.

Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 94 (1837).

Plagusta orientalis, Stimpson, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. p. 103 (1858) ;

Ann. Lyc. Nat. Hist. New York, vii. p. 231 (1860).

The carapace is covered with numerous small, often de-

pressed tubercles, each of which is bordered by a fringe of

short stiff hairs. The lobe above the bases of the second and

third ambulatory legs is prominent, subacute, and not den-

tated. The terminal segment of the male postabdomen is

broadly semioval and rounded at its distal extremity.

This species is probably common and widely distributed

throughout the whole Indo-Pacific region.

Specimens are in the British-Museum collection from

the Mauritius (Leach’s coll.), Red Sea (Lurton), Australia

(Gould).

It has been recorded by Milne-Edwards from the Indian

Ocean ; and by Stimpson (under the name of P. orientalis)

from Hong Kong, the Hawaiian Islands, and Cape St. Lucas

in California. Probably also the specimens recorded by Heller

(Voy. Novara) from the Red Sea, Nicobars, Madras, and

Sydney belong here.

This species was first distinctly characterized by Stimpson

under the name of P. orientalis; but it would appear that

Lamarck’s earlier name of P. tuberculata must be adopted for

it. His specimen was from the Mauritius, and is referred by

Milne-Edwards to his Plagusia squamosa.

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Plagusiine. 149

Plagusia depressa.

PCancer depressus, Fabr. Syst. unt. p. 406 (1775) ; Ent. Syst. Suppl.

p. 343 (1798).

PCancer squamosus, Herbst, Naturg. Krabben u. Krebse, i. p. 260,

pl. xx. fig. 113 (1790).

Plagusia depressa, Say, Journ. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. i. p. 100 (1815).

Plagusia Sayi, DeKay, Zool. N.Y. Fauna, vi. Crust. p. 16 (1844) ;

M.-Edw. Ann. Sci. Nat. (sér. 3) Zool. xx. p. 179 (1853) ; Stimpson,

Ann. Lyc. Nat. Hist. New York, vii. p. 64 (1859).

Plagusia squamosa, Latr. Encycl. Méth. x. p. 145 (1825); Dana, USS.

Expl. Exp. xiii. Crust. 1. p. 868 (1852),

Plagusia gracilis, Saussure, Mém. Soc. Phys. et Hist. Nat. Genave, xiv.

p- 449 (1858).

This species very closely resembles the preceding, but is

distinguished, as Mr. Stimpson, in his “ Notes on the North-

American Crustacea,” has pointed out, by the following

characters. There is a series of about six prominent acute

tubercles arranged in the form of an arc across the front of

the gastric region; and the lobe above the bases of the second

and third ambulatory legs is broader and regularly dentated.

The terminal segment of the postabdomen in the male is, I

may add, narrower, with the sides more distinctly convergent

to the distal extremity.

Hab. This species inhabits what may be denominated, in

contradistinction to the Indo-Pacific, the Atlantic region.

Specimens are in the British Museum from the Tortugas,

Garden Key (Smithson. Inst.), Jamaica (Gosse), Madeira (Rev.

Rh. T. Lowe, Dr. Halley, Blewitt), Brava Island (Rev. R. T.

Lowe), St. Helena (Melliss).

It is recorded from Charleston Harbour, South Carolina

(Gibbes), and Brazil (Lichtenstein, fide Latreille).

In one adult specimen from Madeira in the Museum collec-

tion the teeth of the superior lobes of the ambulatory legs

are nearly obsolete ; but even in this instance, in their broader

and more truncated apices, they differ from the same lobes in

the preceding species.

On account of the habitat (“in mare Mediterraneo, Amert-

cano’’), the Cancer depressus of Fabricius, Syst. Ent. p. 406

(1775), and Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 343 (1798), probably be-

longs to this species; and I adopt his name for it the more

readily as Say, in 1815, employed it for specimens from the

coast of the United States. The figure of Herbst’s Cancer

squamosus distinctly represents the lobe at base of the ambu-

latory legs as dentated, and hence is to be referred to this

species ; but as the habitat is given as “ Ost-Indien,” there

can be little doubt that Herbst, like most later authors,

failed to appreciate its distinctive characteristics, and united

under one name the Atlantic and Indo-Pacific forms,

150 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Plagusiine.

Von Martens remarks (Arch. f. Naturg. xxxviii. p. 112,

1872) that he found it impossible to find constant characters

to separate specimens (referred by him to Plagusia squamosa)

from Cuba, Brazil, Madeira, and the Red Sea. As, however,

he had seen only a male and a female from the last-mentioned

locality, and had seen no specimens of the Plagusia orientalis

of Stimpson, it is probable that he may have overlooked the

characters derived from the superior lobes of the ambulatory

legs and terminal postabdominal segment in the male (vide also

‘Preuss. Exped. nach Ostasien,’ zoolog. Theil, i. p. 22,

1876).

Plagusia immaculata.

Plagusia immaculata, Lam, Hist. An. sans Vert. v. p. 247 (1818).

Plagusia depressa, Latr. Encycl. Méth. x. p. 145 (1825); M.-Edw.

Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 98 (1837) ; Ann. Sci. Nat. (sér. 3) Zool. xx.

p. 179 (1853) ; Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp. xiii. Crust. 1. p. 869 (1852);

Stimpson, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. p. 108 (1858); nec Cancer

depressus, Fabricius.

In this species the carapace is more convex than in either

of the preceding, the tubercles much depressed, quite naked,

often almost obsolete upon the gastric and cardiac regions.

The lobe above the bases of the second and third pairs of am-

bulatory legs is small and not dentated.

The series in the British-Museum collection includes speci-

mens from Ceylon (Holdsworth), Torres Straits (Jukes), Philip-

pine Islands (Adams), Timor Island (Rayner), Louisiade

archipelago (Macgillivray), Sandwich Islands, Honolulu

(Lieut. Strickland).

According to Stimpson, specimens found on the west coast

of Central America by Capt. Dow belong to this species. It

inhabits the seas of China, New Guinea, and the Indian

Ocean (I/.-Hdw.) ; the islands of Loochoo and New Ire-

land (Stimpson); the Straits of Sunda (Dana), Nicobars,

Shanghai, and Punipet (//edler).

Milne-Edwards has pointed out the unsuitability of the

name of P. depressa for this species, which is the most convex

of any of the Plagusiine ; and as it is not the Cancer depressus

of Fabricius, nor (probably) of Herbst, it appears necessary

to adopt Lamarck’s name of P. ¢mmaculata, which is quoted

as a synonym of the species by Milne-Hdwards (Hist. Nat.

des Crustacés).

I transcribe the following MS. note of the colours (when

fresh) of a specimen found on the ship’s bottom, off Redscar

Point, in the Louisiade archipelago, and now in the British-

Museum collection :—

“Colour pale green, mottled with reddish brown. Tarsi

Mr. E. J. Miers on the Plagusiine. 151

above dark purplish brown, with small markings of very pale

bluish green. Carapace mottled and washed with pale dirty

green, dark reddish brown, and straw-colour, with a few

orange dots.” This specimen, in its dried state, is of a nearly

uniform dull chestnut-brown.

M. Brocchi (Ann. Sci. Nat. sér. 6, Zool. 11. p. 80, pl. xix.

figs. 168-170, 1875) figures the male genital appendages of

specimens both of this species and of P. Say? from Guade-

loupe. In the specimens referred by this author to P. depressa

the first pair of genital appendages are of peculiar shape,

constricted in their subterminal half, and with the distal

extremity of an oval form (fig. 170) ; whereas in male indivi-

duals I have examined this pair of appendages scarcely differ

in form from those of P. squamosa ; that is to say, they are, as

in the Atlantic species, strongly contorted and truncated at

the extremity.

Plagusia speciosa.

Plagusia speciosa, Dana, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. v. p. 252 (1851);

U.S. Expl. Exp. xiii, Crust. i. p. 869, pl. xxiii. fig. 9 (1852); M.-Edw.

Ann. Sci. Nat. (sér, 3) Zool. xx. p. 179 (1853).

This species is distinguished from all its congeners by having

only three teeth upon the antero-lateral margins of the cara-

pace, including the outer orbital tooth.

fab. Paumotu archipelago, Waterland Island (Dana).

Only a carapace of this species is known. The disposition

of the tubercles on the dorsal surface, as described by Dana,

differs somewhat from that usual in P. sguamosa.

Plagusia glabra.

Plagusia glabra, Dana, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sei. Phil. p. 252 (1851); U.S.

Expl. Exp. xii. Crust. i. p. 371, pl. xxiii. fig. 10 (1852); M.-Edw.

Ann, Sci. Nat. (sér. 3) Zool. xx. p. 179 (1853).

Is described by Dana as having the carapace smooth and

glabrous, antero-lateral margin quadridentate, front above ob-

liquely subcristate, not spinigerous. Anterior legs of male

very short, part of hand preceding fingers shorter than its

height, granulate above, smooth externally and not costate ;

wrist nearly smooth. Third joint of eight posterior legs

smooth. Third joint of outer maxillipeds quadrate, slightly

oblong.

Hab. New South Wales (Dana), Australia (coll. Brit.

Mus.).

The male specimen described by Dana measured about 9

lines. The specimen in the British-Museum collection is a

female of much larger size (1 inch 7 lines), and is closely

152 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Plagusiine.

speckled with red. There is an irregular granulated ridge on

the upper surface of the wrist, and an abrupt prominence

behind the upper orbital margin, which is beaded. The buccal

organs are wanting. This species is at once distinguished by

the smooth and naked carapace, less deeply incised frontal

sinuses, and the form of the hands, and appears to establish

the transition from the Plagusiine to the Grapsine, through

Cyrtograpsus.

§ 2. Merus joint of the ambulatory legs with a series of spines on us

upper margin (carapace almost entirely destitute of tubercles).

Plagusia chabrus.

Cancer chabrus, Linn. Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 438 (1764); Syst. Nat. p. 1044

(1766).

Plagusia tomentosa, M.-Edw. Hist. Nat. Crust. ii. p. 92 (1837) ; Ann.

Sci. Nat. (sér. 3) Zool. xx. p. 178 (1853).

Plagusia capensis, De Haan, Faun. Japon. Crust. p. 58 (1835).

Plagusia chabrus, White, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. xvii. p. 497 (1846).

Carapace covered with a very short close pubescence, and

without tubercles. Front armed above with two small spines,

and with a series of small tubercles on its anterior margin.

Anterior legs tuberculated. Lobes above the bases of the

second and third ambulatory legs terminating in a short

spine.

Si iiond of this species are in the British Museum from

the Cape of Good Hope (Sir A. Smith, Capt. Carmichael,

Dr. P. Hahn), New Zealand (Dr. Sinclair), and Tasmania,

near George Town (f. Gunn).

It has been recorded from New South Wales (Dana), Chili

(M.-Edwards).

It is probable that the species briefly characterized by Milne-

Edwards (Ann. Sci. Nat. sér. 3, Zool. xx. p. 178, 1853) under

the name of P. Gaimardi, from Tongatabu, is only a variety

of the above.

The first pair of genital appendages in the male are not

twisted as in P. squamosa, and their inferior margins are thin

and sharp-edged ; they are sometimes very slightly constricted

towards the distal extremity, which is obtuse and subtrun-

cated.

Plagusia dentipes.

Grapsus (Plagusia) dentipes, De Haan, Faun. Japon. Crust. decas 2,

p. 58, pl. viii. fig. 1 (1835).

Plagusia dentipes, M.-Edw. Ann. Sci. Nat. (sér. 3) Zool. xx. p. 178

(1853) ; Stimpson, Proc. Ac, Nat. Sci. Phil. p. 103 (1858),

This species is distinguished from the preceding by having

Mr. KE. J. Miers on the Plagusiinz. 153

a group of tubercles on the hepatic region of the carapace,

near the base of the outer orbital tooth; and the spines upon

the upper margins of the merus joints of the ambulatory legs

are much stronger.

Hab. Japan (De Haan), Simoda (Stimpson).

I have seen no specimens.

LEIOLOPHUS.

Acanthopus, De Haan, Faun. Japon. Crust. p. 29 (1835); M.-Edw.

Ann. Sci. Nat. (sér, 3) Zool. xx. p. 180 (1853); nom. preoccu-

patum.

Leiolophus, Miers, Cat. New-Zeal. Crust. p. 46 (1876).

Outer maxillipeds with the merus joint very small and much

narrower than the preceding jot. (Carapace with smooth

naked ridges on its upper surface, but without numerous tuber-

cles. Merus joints of the ambulatory legs with a series of

spines on their upper margins. Male genital appendages of

the first pair not twisted, with a terminal claw.)

Leiolophus planissimus.

Cancer planissimus, Herbst, Naturg. Krabben und Krebse, iii. pl. lix.

fig. 3 (1804).

Plagusia serripes, Lam. Hist. An. sans Vert. p. 247 (1818).

Plagusia clavimana, Desm. Consid. Crust. p. 127, pl. xiv. fig. 2 (1825) ;

M.-Edw. Hist. Nat. Crust. ii, p. 92 (1837); Atlas in Cuvier, R. A.

pl. xxiii. fig. 3.

Acanthopus planissimus, De Haan, Faun. Japon. Crust. p, 30 (1835) ;

Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp. xiii. Crust. p. 372 (1852); M.-Edw. Ann.

Sci. Nat. (sér. 3) Zool. xx. p. 180 (1853).

Acanthopus Gibbesi, M.-Edw. Ann. Sci. Nat. ¢. c. p. 180 (1853).

Levolophus planissimus, Miers, Cat. New-Zeal, Crust. p. 46 (1876).

Hands in the male strong; the palms compressed and con-

siderably dilated, much broader than the wrist, not sulcated

on their upper margins. Greatest width of the abdomen of

the male exceeding its length to the base of the last segment.

Specimens are in the British Museum from Mauritius (Lady

F. Cole), Torres Straits (Jukes), Keeling or Cocos Island (Lieut.

Burnaby), Pacific Ocean (Smithsonian Inst.), Madeira (Rev.

L. T. Lowe), Jamaica (purchased).

It is abundant in the Polynesian archipelago, having been

recorded from islands in the Paumotu, Society, Samoan, and

Hawaiian groups (Dana), also from Cape St. Lucas and the

coast of Florida, Key Biscayne (Stimpson).

In male specimens of large size from Madeira, the genital

appendages of the first pair differ slightly from those of Z.

abbreviatus and Brocchi’s figure (/. ¢. fig. 171), in being

slender, more curved, and narrower in the middle than at

either extremity.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 11

154 Mr. E. J. Miers on the Plagusiine.

Unfortunately, in the British-Museum copy of Herbst’s

work, the concluding part, containing the description and figure

of his C. planissimus, is wanting ; I have therefore not been

able to verify the reference, which is quoted from Milne-

Edwards.

Leiolophus abbreviatus.

Acanthopus abbreviatus, Dana, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. p. 252 (1851) ;

U.S. Expl. Exp. xiii. Crust. i. p. 378, pl. xxiii. fig. 11 (1852) ;

M.-Edw. Ann. Sci. Nat. (sér. 3) Zool. xx. p. 181 (1853).

Hands in the male small, the palm not dilated, and longi-

tudinally suleated on the upper margin in both sexes. Abdo-

men of the male rather narrow, its greatest width not quite

equalling its length to the base of the last segment.

There are specimens in the British Museum from the Mau-

ritius, Moluccas, Gilolo (Adams), Philippines, Guimaras

(Cuming), Fiji Islands (H.M0.8. ‘ Herald’).

Most of the specimens in the collection are females. In one

male adult example, whose genital appendages J have ex-

amined, these organs are exactly of the form figured by

Brocchi (/. c. fig. 171) in specimens referred by him to L.

planissimus.

Letolophus pilimanus.

Acanthopus pilimanus, A. M.-Edw. Nouv. Archiv. Mus, Hist. Nat. 1x.

p. 300, pl. xiv. fig. 5 (1878).

This species, in the dilated hands of the male, resembles

L. planissimus, but is distinguished from it and from all its

congeners by the existence of a large patch of thick hair upon

the inner surface of the palms. There is a row of small spines

upon the inner margins of the antennulary cavities. The

abdomen is also said to be narrower than in L. planissimus.

Hab. New Caledonia (M. Balansa).

The male only is known of this large species. I have seen

no specimens.

The characters assigned by M. Milne-Edwards to his

Acanthopus afinis (Ann. Sci. Nat. sér. 3, Zool. xx. p. 180,

1853) from the Sandwich Islands, and A. tenuifrons (U1. c.)

from the Marquesas, do not appear to me to be of specific

importance.

The Letolophus spinosus (Plagusta spinosa of M‘Leay, in

Smith’s Zool. 8. Africa, Annulosa, p. 66, 1838) would seem

to be a distinct species, if the character ‘‘ clyped lateribus biden-

tatis’’ be correct. It is stated by its author to be nearly

allied tothe LZ. planissimus (P. clavimana of Desmarest), with

which it is united by Krauss (Siidafrik. Crust. p. 42, 1843).

Mr. R. Meldola on Evolution. 155

XVIII.—Entomological Notes bearing on Evolution.

By RapHarEL MELDOLA, Sec. Ent. Soc.

In 1871, when working at the subjects of “‘ mimicry” and

protective resemblance,’ Mr. Darwin was so good as to send

me for perusal a letter which he had received from Fritz

Miller, then in St. Catharina, Brazil. As this letter contains

many entomological observations of interest, I have thought it

advisable to take steps to secure their being placed upon

record in a permanent form; and, with the permission of Mr.

Darwin, I have selected extracts which I beg to make known

in the present paper, together with other observations from

various sources which tend to throw light on subjects con-

nected with the descent theory.

Sounds made by Butterflies.

Mr. Darwin has already recorded * the sound produced by

the South-American butterfly, Ageronia feronia, which is

stated to make “a noise like that produced by a toothed

wheel passing under a spring catch, and which could be heard

at the distance of several yards.’’ With reference to the

object of this sound Mr. Darwin states J, “‘ At Rio de Janeiro

this sound was noticed by me only when two were chasing

each other in an irregular course, so that it is probably made

during the courtship of the sexes.” With regard to this

insect Fritz Miiller writes, ‘I told you some time ago that I

had not yet seen it here; but lately I have caught two speci-

mens belonging to two species, and I have seen in the collec-

tion of a friend of mine a third specimen of a third species.

One of these specimens had been observed for many days by

my children flying around some orange-trees near my house ;

it frequently alighted on the putrefying fruit on the ground,

on the juice of which it seemed to feed. My children never

heard any noise produced by it, neither did I; and this seems

to confirm your view that the noise is made only during the

courtship of the sexes.”’

I may add that our common Vanessa Jo is stated to make

a faint hissing sound{; but the precise conditions under which

this noise is produced require further observation.

* Journal of Researches, 1845, p. 33. On the sound-producing appa-

ratus see E. Doubleday in Proc. Ent. Soc., March 3, 1845. See also a

pe by Mr. A. H. Swinton, “On an Organ of Hearing in Lepidoptera,”

nt. Mo. Mag., Nov. 1877.

+ Descent of Man, 2nd ed. p. 307.

t Rey. J. Greene, Trans. Ent. Soc. new series, vol. ii. p. xeviii, and

Mr. Hewitson, ibid. vol. iv. p. ii, The sound-producing structure has

been figured by Mr. Swinton, Ent. Mo. Mag., Jan. 1877.

14%

156 Mr. R. Meldola on Evolution.

Display of Colour by Lepidoptera.

With reference to the display of colour by butterflies and

moths, Mr. Darwin has already * recorded the case of a

species of Castnéa which possesses ornamented hind wings

and displays them, while other species with plain hind wings

do not display them +. Fritz Miiller adds the followmg in-

teresting case :—‘‘ I observed a curious little fact with our

Hesperide. Most of them are of a dull brownish colour ; but

there are some in which the wings have a more or less vivid

blue tint either on the upper or on the lower surface. Now the

former when alighting on a flower always hold their wings

expanded in a horizontal plane, while those of the latter are

folded vertically, so that in either case the blue surface is

exposed to view.”” Without further observation it cannot be

assumed in this case that the colour is displayed as a sexual

attraction, since it is well known that colour is displayed for

other purposes, such as for protection, when the colour is a

signal of distastefulness (as with brightly coloured larve, and

those species which serve as models for mimicry), or for

giving resemblance to some coloured objects, such as flowers.

Insects distinguishing Colours.

The distinguishing of colours by insects has been proved in

the case of bees and wasps by Sir John Lubbock’s experi-

ments. This faculty is of paramount importance to the theory

of sexual selection}. Fntz Miiller states, ‘ Butterflies not

only discover flowers by colour, but certain species even give

an unmistakable preference to certain colours. Thus Calli-

dryas Philea and some other species of that genus almost

exclusively visit brilliant red flowers (Canna, Salvia). Ared

Hedychium in my garden was constantly surrounded by a

multitude of Callidryas Philea (and of Papilio Thoas) ; and so

are at present some other plants with red flowers, while they

never alight on plants of the same and other genera with yellow,

white, or blue flowers.”

Mimicry.

It has hitherto been considered a general rule that a

mimicked species is commoner than the species which mimics

* Descent of Man, 2nd ed. p. 314.

+ Ibid. 2nd ed. p. 315. Mr. Darwin has called my attention to Fritz

Miiller’s “ Beobachtungen an brasilianischen Schmetterlingen,” a paper

which contains some further remarks bearing on the subject of display, in

the October number of ‘ Kosmos.’

{ ‘Descent of Man,’ 2nd ed. p. 317. On the attraction of Macroglossa

stellatarum by colour, see a letter in ‘Nature,’ vol. xvii. p. 11, Nov. 1,

1877.

Mr. R. Meldola on Evolution. 15%

it. Fritz Miiller records the following exceptions :—“ There

are here some exceptions to the rule that the imitating species

are comparatively rare, while the imitated swarm in large

numbers. Thus Mechanitis Lysimnia is hardly more common

than the imitating Leptalis; and the beautiful Papilio nepha-

lion, Godt., is here so rare that I have seen only two or three’

specimens last summer, whilst the imitating Huterpe tereas is:

by far more common. But in other parts of Brazil the nume-

rical relations of these species may be different.”

I would add, with reference to this observation, that it is

quite conceivable that in certain districts external conditions

may so change that a species dominant in other regions may

become rare or altogether extinct, while the species which

mimics it may remain unaffected. Thus Diadema misip-

pus, the female of which mimics Danais chrystippus, is

found in South America, while the model Danavs is not *.

Mr. Trimen also remarks ¢ :—‘‘ The magnificent Papilio Anti-

machus, Drury, of which but one specimen is known to

science, is very Acreiform in habit, and is possibly an instance

of special modification in imitation of some gigantic Acrea as

yet unknown or perhaps extinct.” Papilio Zalmoxis also, as

I am informed by Mr. A. G. Butler, probably mimics some

unknown or extinct gigantic Acrea. Many cases are known

in which a butterfly 1s obviously a mimic, but its exact model

is unknown}. I am disposed to believe that such instances

show us the precess of mimetic resemblance in actual progress.

For example, many species of H/ymnias resemble species of

Euplea ; but it is impossible to name the precise species of the

last genus which in each case serves as a model. In these

cases it is more reasonable to suppose that the mimicry of the

Elymnias is in course of perfection, than to assume that the

species which they imitate have become extinct. It is also

* This species (D, musippus) is stated to occur in Guiana on the autho-

rity of Boisduval. My friend Mr. A. G. Butler has just informed me

that a large male from Formosa, in which the Danaiform characters

are partially visible, has been lately added to the national collection.

Here we have an interesting case in which mimetic characters originally

acquired by a female butterfly are probably in course of transmission to

the male.

+ Trans. Linn. Soc. vol. xxvi. p. 503. I learn that probably two other

specimens have been obtained since the above was written.

_ { For numerous instances of imperfect mimicry see papers by A. G.

Butler :—“ A Monograph of the Lepidoptera hitherto included in the

Genus Elymnias,” Proc. Zool. Soc. June 6, 1871; also on Protogonius,

ibid. Dec. 2, 1873, and Jan. 19, 1875, Mr. Neville Goodman points out

(Proc. Camb. Philos. Soe., Feb. 12, 1877) that ¢vmperfect resemblances are

arguments in favour of the production of the phenomenon through the

action of natural selection.

158 Mr. R. Meldola on Evolution.

conceivable that a general resemblance to a protected group

might in some districts be quite as efficacious as a resem-

blance to particular species of such a group.

As another instance bearing on the present subject I may

cite Argynnis niphe, the female of which is a very fair mimic

of Danais chrysippus. The former species (var. ¢nconstans)

ranges into Australia, while the Danazs does not occur in that

region ; and what makes this case so particularly interesting is,

that in Australia, where there is no model, both sexes of the

Argynnis are alike, and resemble the male cf the Indian form.

The degree of exactness with which mimics sometimes

resemble their models has been noticed by all observers; but

there are only a few recorded cases where the insects them-

selves have been known to be deceived. Mr. Trimen states *

that the male Danais chrysippus has been deceived by the

female Diadema bolina. Fritz Miller writes :—“ One of the

most interesting of our mimicking butterflies is Leptalis melite.

The female alone of this species imitates one of our common

white Preride, which she eopies so well that even her own

male is often deceived; for I have repeatedly seen the male

pursuing the mimicked species, till, after closely approaching

and becoming aware of his error, he suddenly returned.”

Correlation of Habit with Protective Resemblance.

Mr. Bates has already recorded the resemblance of a cater-

pillar (supposed to be a species of Notodontide) to a venomous

snake ¢; and Dr. Weismann has likewise shown} that the

eye-like markings on Chewrocampa-larve actually frightened

away birds. Fritz Miiller states that he “found the cater-

pillar of a Papilio which strikingly resembled the head of a

venomous snake.”

By referring to Mr. Bates’s description it will be seen

that the mimicry extended even to attitude. All observers

have noticed how in some instances a mimicking insect

copies the flight of its model; and such cases of correspon-

dence between habit and resemblance are of great theoretical

interest to the evolutionist. Thus Mr. Wallace has shown,

in the case of the well-known “leaf-butterflies ” (Kallima),

how the insects settle on the bushes in an attitude which

perfects their resemblance to dead leaves. The same ob-

server also mentions, with respect to the stick-like Phasmide,

* Trans. Linn. Soe. vol. xxvi. p. 518.

t Ibid. vol. xxiii. p. 509.

t ‘Studien zur Descendenz-Theorie,’ part 1i. pp. 100 et seg. This ob-

servation has been confirmed in the case of C. elpenor by Lady Verney

(see a paper in ‘Good Words,’ Dec. 1877, p. 838).

Mr. R. Meldola on Evolution. 159

that “ they hang loosely about shrubs in the forest, and have

the extraordinary habit of stretching out their legs unsymme-

trically so as to render the deception more complete.” Fritz

Miiller supplies the following analogous instances :—“ The

caterpillars of some Papiliones resemble fresh excrements of a

bird; these caterpillars always rest on the upper surfaces of the

leaves on which they feed, while those of some other Papiliones

(Nephalion, Polydamas), which are not protected by some such

resemblance, always hide themselves on the dower surfaces of

the leaves.”’

Even among our own insects hundreds of such cases might

be noted. Thus the weevils, which resemble pellets of earth,

tuck in their legs and feign death when alarmed, and the

stick-like geometer larve erect themselves stiffly from the

twigs on which they rest. Cucullia chamomille and Galeria

cerella both resemble broken splinters of wood when at rest;

and I have seen these moths at the extreme ends of pointed

palings, where they had erected themselves at an angle to the

wood, making the resemblance to a broken-off splinter remark-

ably deceptive. Calocampa vetusta is very like a piece of

broken stick when its wings are closed; and this moth has

been seen hanging to a twig by one leg. fasteropacha quer-

cifolia, which, when at rest, resembles a withered leaf, has been

seen in a similar attitude. Ctlix spinula is well known to

resemble a piece of bird-excrement; and I have often seen

- this moth at rest by day, fully exposed to view, on the upper

surfaces of leaves.

It is interesting to observe how, in many cases, natural

selection has probably taken advantage of characters originally

acquired for some other purpose. Thus the common Antho-

charts cardamines of this country has been shown by Mr. T,

W. Wood to rest at night on the heads of umbelliferous

plants, where the green marblings on the underside of the hind

wings of the butterfly cause the latter to bear a very exact

resemblance to the flower-head. Now, as this style of mar-

bling is common to many butterflies of the genus in various

parts of the world, it cannot be assumed that this character

has been specially acquired to adapt the insects to umbel-

liferous flower-heads. It is quite as probable, in the case of

A. cardamines, that the habit of the butterfly has been adapted

to its particular mode of coloration, natural selection after-

wards perfecting the resemblance. A similar instance is

offered by Lithosta caniola, the larva of which feeds on Tri-

folium repens, and is stated to occur on stony ground which

abounds with a species of small shell, probably a Helix?

When alarmed the larva rolls itself into a ring and falls off

160 Mr. R. Meldola on Evolution.

its food-plant, in which attitude it ‘has almost exactly the

appearance, in form, colour, and size,” of one of these shells,

“which greatly increases the difficulty of finding them when

thus feigning death”*. ‘The habit of rolling up into a ring

when alarmed is common with many caterpillars which are

found in situations where mimicry of shells cannot possibly be

adduced as a reason for the habit. Hence in the case of L.

caniola I am inclined to believe that natural selection has

taken advantage of and improved upon a habit originally

acquired for a distinct purpose.

The most remarkable case referable to the present class

that has recently been published is that of Gongylus gongy-

lodes, Limm., an Indian Mantis which simulates a flowery.

When exhibiting some of these insects at a meeting of the

Asiatic Society of Bengal, Dr. Anderson remarked that when

seen from above “ they did not exhibit any very striking fea-

tures beyond the leaf-like expansion of the prothorax and the

foliaceous appendages to the limbs, both of which, like the

upper surface of the insect, are coloured green ; but on turning

to the under surface the aspect is entirely different. The leaf-

like expansion of the prothorax, instead of being green, is a

clear pale lavender-violet, with a faint pink bloom along the

edges of the leaf; so that this portion of the insect has the

exact appearance of the corolla of a plant—a floral simulation

which is perfected by the presence of a dark blackish-brown

spot in its centre, over the prothorax, and which mimics the

opening to the tube of a corolla. A favourite position of this

insect is to hang head downwards among a mass of green

foliage; and when it does so it generally remains almost

motionless, but, at intervals, evinces a swaying movement as

of a flower touched by a gentle breeze ; and while in this atti-

tude, with its fore limbs banded violet and black and drawn up

in front of the centre of the corolla, the simulation of a papilio-

naceous flower is complete. ‘The object of the bright colouring

of the under surface of the prothoracic expansion is evident,

its purpose being to act as a decoy to insects, which, mistaking

* Newman’s ‘British Moths,’ p. 473.

t Proc. As. Soc, Beng., Aug. 1877. For an analogous case see a paper

by Mr. Wallace in Macmillan’s Mag. for Sept. 1877. The Mantis re-

ferred to resembles a pink orchid, and is stated to be attractive to butter-

flies. Prof. J. Wood-Mason informs me that the floral resemblance of

the above and other species of Gongylus has been known to him for years;

but its object had remained unexplained till 1875, when he received from

Assam some larvee of Hymenopus bicornis, Serville, in which species the

resemblance to a flower is, according to Prof. Wood-Mason, even more

erfect than is the case with the Gongylus. See also Proc. Ent. Soe.,

Noy. 7th, 1877, p. xxix.

On new Species of Heterocera from Japan. 161

it for a corolla, fly directly into the expectant, serrated, sabre-

like raptorial arms of the simulator.”

A case like that of Gongylus is of the highest interest—can,

in fact, be only completely appreciated by the believer in

natural selection. The green foliaceous expansion of the

limbs and prothorax is common with many species of this

group of insects, and serves unquestionably as a protection by

causing the insects to resemble leaves. Such, in all proba-

bility, was the object of the leaf-like expansions acquired by

the ancestor of the present Gongylus. Later in the history of

the species the acquisition of food became of equal or greater

importance than the mere evasion of foes ; then we must believe

that natural selection took advantage of the underside of the

foliaceous expansions and coloured them by minute grada-

tions till they acquired their present floral tints and markings;

hand in hand with this modification of colour, habits tending

to complete the deception were gradually acquired, till the

marvellous codrdination which we now behold was perfected.

XIX.—Descriptions of new Species of Heterocera from Japan.

—Part II. Noctwites. By Artruur G. Butter, F.L.S.,

F.Z.8., Ke.

[Continued from p. 85. }

Caradrinide.

RADINACRA, n. gen.

Closely allied to Caradrina, from which it may at once be

distinguished by the great length of the apical joint of the

palpi, and the great development of the anal tuft and appen-

dices of the male. Type &. palpalis. .

81. Radinacra palpalis, n. sp.

6. Colour and general pattern of Caradrina respersa, but

the transverse lines rather more parallel ; the reniform spot

irrorated along its outer edge with whitish; the ground-colour

of the primaries tinted with reddish ; the secondaries paler,

whitish, with diffused brownish outer border; the tarsi above

blackish, banded with white: wings below browner, discal

line on both wings better defined, nearer to the margin; a

series of distinct black marginal dots. Expanse 1 inch

5 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

162 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

82. Amyna stellata, n. sp.

Smaller than .A. selenampha, the primaries shorter, shin-

ing greyish brown; the two transverse lines well-defined,

the inner one irregular and speckled with white scales ;

a depressed silvery and biack spot near the base of the

cell; outer line denticulated, edged externally with white

scales ; a white spot at the end of the cell; a transverse sub-

apical white dash ; external border slightly paler, its inner

margin broadly trisinuated ; costa white-spotted ; a marginal

series of black and white dots; secondaries paler, fringe

whitish, intersected by a brown line; head and collar slightly

reddish: underside much like that of A. selenampha. Ex-

panse 1 inch 1 line.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Size and form of A. undulifera from Natal; the primaries

above like those of Perigea punctosa in marking.

83. Agrotis illoba, n. sp.

Nearly allied to A. agricola, but altogether of a duller and

greyer tint; the markings better-defined; a well-defined

waved dentate-sinuate discal dusky line; submarginal area

bounded internally by a very regular zigzag pale line;

secondaries whiter than in A. agricola; thorax pearly greyish;

anal tuft testaceous : secondaries below with dusky costal and

apical areas; a well-defined blackish discocellular spot. Ex-

anse 1 inch 10 lines.

Hakodaté ( Whitely).

84. Agrotis ingrata, n. sp.

Allied to A. segetum, but readily distinguishable by the

pale greyish or whitish outer border of primaries, the sordid-

brownish secondaries, and the pale greyish thorax. Hxpanse

1 inch 8-10 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

85. Agrotis odiosa, n. sp.

Colour and general character of the reddish form of A,

saucia, but smaller, the orbicular and reniform spots ill-

defined and red; the secondaries shining whity brown, with

no distinct outer border and without the blackish dots on the

veins below. Expanse 1 inch 8 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

86. Agrotis ustulata, n. sp.

Somewhat allied to A. annexa: primaries above pale

of Heterocera from Japan. 163

brown, clouded and transversely striated with blackish; a

patch at the base of the cell (bordered below by a black line),

the reniform and orbicular spots, apex and inner margin of

the external border pale silvery brown; secondaries sordid

white, the apex and veins brown; a dark brown marginal

line; body greyish brown, anal segments of abdomen laterally

tufted with fawn-colour; wings below without markings ;

body below reddish; tarsi above alternately banded with

black and white, below reddish banded with black. LExpanse

1 inch 8 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

TRIPHENOPSIS, n. gen.

Allied to Triphena, but readily distinguished by the form

of the primaries, which is that of Catocala; palpi with longer

terminal joint ; first median branch of primaries emitted nearer

to the second but not running so parallel to it, lower radial

emitted further from the third median; outer margin undu-

lated; thorax with four central projecting scale-patches.

Type 7. lucilla.

87. Triphenopsis lucilla, n. sp.

Size and form of Catocala diversa. Primaries above

greenish grey, clouded with brown ; costa spotted with brown

to the end of the cell and with white beyond it; the black

lines limiting the central band not distinct above the median

vein, undulated, the inner one double; reniform spot white,

with a lunate internal brown line ; a cuneiform brown-spotted

white spot from the outer line to near the external angle ;

outer border grey, blackish in the centre and at external angle,

and bounded internally by a subconfluent irregular series of

conical testaceous spots; a black undulated marginal line;

frmge with a slender ochraceous basal line, blackish tipped

with pale brown; secondaries brown, the fringe, outer mar-

gin, and a large central semicircular spot ochreous; a broad

marginal border and two or three spots on. the fringe black ;

thorax with the general coloration of the primaries, but with

the scale-patches reddish ; abdomen greyish with black dorsal

tufts, anus reddish at the sides: primaries below blackish, the

apical costa spotted with white, frmge spotted with ochra-

ceous ; secondaries ochraceous, costal area irrorated with

brown ; a discocellular lunule and the border as above black ;

pectus white ; legs black, banded with white above, yellowish

below; venter testaceous, anus reddish. Expanse 1 inch

9 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

164 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

Triphena nectens, from India, is a second species of this

genus.

88. Hermonassa cecilia, n. sp.

Upper surface chocolate-brown ; primaries darker than the

secondaries, costal margin ferrugimous; “ orbicular”’ spot

cordiform, the apex pointing outwards, it and the reniform

and a fusiform spot below the median vein and nearer to the

base blackish, with slender ochreous margin, partly black-

bordered; costal and basal areas spotted with black, the inter-

val between each two spots grey ; an oblique short ochreous

line across the cell near the base; two straight grey lines

across the basal area; two parallel arched series of greyish

partly black-edged crescents ; a submarginal series of black

dots; fringe greyish; secondaries slightly sericeous, fringe

pale grey, traversed by a dusky stripe; thorax tufted with

testaceous, prothorax with a blackish margin and a whitish-

tipped fringe, collar testaceous behind ; tegule blackish, with

grey border; abdomen fuliginous: under surface paler, greyer;

primaries shining, with fulvous costa, crossed near apex by

two divergent blackish liture, margin alternately testaceous

and black ; secondaries with blackish-speckled costal area ;

legs banded with testaceous. Expanse 1 inch 7-8 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Somewhat the aspect of Graphiphora, but the primaries

narrower, palpi with projecting scales.

89. Spelotis nitens, n. sp.

Allied to 8. pyrophila, but smaller, greyer, the wings more

shining, the reniform and orbicular spots smaller and paler,

the discocellular spots and discal line below diffused and

scarcely distinguishable, the secondaries and the borders of

the primaries greyer, and the marginal liture blacker. Ex-

panse 1 inch 5 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

The primaries of this species shine almost like those of a

Plusia.

90. Graphiphora exusta, n. sp.

Allied to G‘. rhomboidea, but redder, the inner edge of the

external border of primaries less deeply sinuated, the double

discal line of about half the width, quite straight to near the

costa, and then abruptly angulated ; lines below the cell obso-

lete; secondaries and abdomen much greyer; discal line below

less distinct and nearer to the outer margin. LExpanse 1 inch

9 lines.

Yokohama (Jones), Hakodaté (Whitely).

of Heterocera from Japan. 165

91. Graphiphora canescens, n. sp.

Allied to G. brunnea, but much greyer, the markings less

distinct, the bright tawny tints on the primaries and thorax

obsolete, the orbicular and reniform spots greyish, not black-

edged, the head in front hoary. Expanse 1 inch 7-10 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas), Hakodaté (Whitely).

Nearly the whole of the darker bands and spots on the pri-

maries of this species are suffused with lilacine grey, so that

it is amuch duller-looking species than G. brunnea ; the fringe

of secondaries varies from rose-colour to white. In general

appearance it resembles G. baja.

92. Graphiphora caliginea, n. sp.

Allied to G. sigma, but with narrower and longer wings,

the primaries sepia-brown, with the costal area slightly greyer

or redder, but not sharply defined as in G. sigma, the dis-

coidal markings less strongly defined, the angular discal stripe

less lunated in its divisions and more uniform in width ;

secondaries sordid shining white instead of brown; the thorax

scarcely darker than the abdomen, the head and collar whitish

instead of reddish: under surface shining whitish; the pri-

maries with a discal transverse line, twice as far from the

margin as in G. stgma; secondaries with the discocellular

spot barely indicated, and the discal line only visible on the

costal area. Expanse 1 inch 11 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely).

93. Graphiphora? pacifica, n. sp.

Primaries grey, with the usual irregular outer border limited

by a ferruginous whitish-edged stripe, a series of marginal

conical ferruginous spots, between which (at the end of the

nervures) are white dots; fringe grey, traversed by darker

lines, and white-tipped ; two diverging central irregular lines

enclosing the orbicular and reniform spots, which are whitish,

and a blackish spot below the median vein; costa white-

spotted ; secondaries sordid white, with a broad external

sericeous greyish-brown nebula ; body grey ; head, margins of

tegule, and abdomen whitish: wings below sordid white,

with a well-defined grey discal line and discocellular spot,

and reddish apex to each wing; primaries with greyish dis-

coidal area; fringe grey, edged with white and black lines;

body below grey, with a feeble pink tint. Expanse 1 inch

10 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Allied to G. elimata from Georgia; it is possible that it

166 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

may be the species intended by Motschulsky’s description of

Caradrina variolosa ; but (as in other cases) this can only be

decided by an examination of his type. It has the general

aspect of Zeentocampa opima.

94. Ochropleura stupenda, n. sp.

Primaries above shining black, the markings bordered with

deep “velvet-black, basal two thirds of costal area sandy

whitish, with two black basal streaks; an oblique basal litura,

a >-like line below the cell, and the front of the discoidal

spots testaceous varied with dark red scales; a discal series

of small lunate testaceous spots, and a submarginal series of

similar brown spots broadly bordered by a velvet-black stripe;

a zigzag black marginal line; fringe brown; secondaries

sandy whitish, the external half smoky brown, fringe grey-

spotted ; head and thorax black; collar sandy whitish, with a

transverse red posterior line ; abdomen grey, whitish at base,

with testaceous anal tuft: wings below altogether paler than

above, basal area whitish, external area greyish brown, with

two brown discal streaks, fringe nearly as above; secondaries

with a small black discocellular lunule ; body below grey, legs

and palpi mottled with testaceous. LExpanse 2 inches 2 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Orthosiide.

95. Semiophora pallescens, n. sp.

Allied to S. gothica, but with the basal area, the basal half

of the costal area, and the orbicular spot whitish, the remainder

of the wing paler and more sericeous, the two basal spots

united into a black line ; the line across the cell blackish (not

white-edged) ; the discal line regularly dentate-sinuate and

nearer to the outer border; the margin of the external border

not white but pale; secondaries much paler, greyish, seri-

ceous, with more or less distinct darker discal lme; body

considerably paler: wings below with the discal line nearer

to outer margin less distinct, and the discocellular spot on

each wing less distinct. Expanse 1 inch 8 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

96. Teeniocampa tabida, n. sp.

Allied to 7. instabilis ; but the disk of primaries is crossed

by two tolerably distinct parallel blackish discal sinuated lines ;

the outer border is not bounded within by ferruginous spots,

but terminates on the costa in a trifid black spot, also narrower

and brownish ; fringe greyish brown, rose-coloured at the base ;

of Heterocera from Japan. 167

secondaries broader, darker, with rose-tinted fringe ; head and

collar dull white, the latter with a dark reddish marginal line ;

abdomen whitish. at the base: wings below shining sandy

whitish, costal areas rose-tinted ; two indistinct parallel grey

lines across the disk ; primaries with the central area broadly

grey; pectus rosy, venter sandy whitish, anus testaceous.

Expanse 1 inch 10 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

97. Toeniocampa carnipennis, n. sp.

Primaries pinky brown, the orbicular and reniform spots

outlined in ferruginous; two irregular lunated discal lines, a

black dot on the inner line beyond the end of the cell, two

black spots near the base, the lower one large and triangular ;

a black mi-shaped marking on the interno-median interspace ;

secondaries sordid pearly whitish; thorax coloured like the

primaries, abdomen testaceous: under surface pale flesh-

colour ; costal area irrorated with grey scales; a wavy abbre-

viated discal transverse line on each wing; primaries with

discoidal area brownish; internal area glistening silvery

white; secondaries with a black spot at the end of the cell ;

body below greyish, reddish in front. Expanse 1 inch 10

lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

98. Teniocampa ella, n. sp.

Allied to T. gracilis, but rather larger, the markings darker,

the discal line of primaries bordered internally by a blackish

streak; secondaries broader, whiter; under surface whiter,

with well-defined discocellular spots. Expanse 1 inch 9 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

The dusky-bordered white secondaries distinguish this

species readily from 7. gracilis; in the latter they are wholly

or largely clouded with greyish.

99. Orthosia lizetta, n. sp.

Nearest to O. levis, but larger and paler; no trace of the

angular line across the centre of primaries ; the inner trans-

verse dentated line absent ; the discal series of black dots more

oblique and less arched (sometimes absent) ; limitation of

external border not sinuated, straight to near the costa, then

abruptly angulated and bounded internally by a squamose

black spot, the pale line also bounded on either side by black

scales, which form a spot a little below the apex ; submargi-

nal spots well marked ; secondaries greyish brown, shining,

168 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

darker in some examples than in others, and occasionally

crossed by a discal series of dusky spots ; fringe broader than

in O. levis, whitish: under surtace paler than in O. levis,

with well-marked discocellular spots and discal series blackish.

Expanse 1 inch 6 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

In some respects this species resembles Tventocampa gracilis.

100. Dasycampa fornax, n. sp.

Nearly allied to D. rudbiginea, but slightly larger, altogether

redder ; the lines and dots on primaries less sharply defined,

egreyer; the secondaries paler greyish, with distinctly rosy

borders ; abdomen whitish at base, otherwise rosy ; primaries

below redder, without the black discocellular spots or greyish

nebula in primaries, the other markings ill-defined ; secondaries

redder, the discal line more irregular and less defined: body

below altogether redder, especially in front. Expanse 1 inch

6 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

D. fornax may possibly be the insect intended in Mot-

schulsky’s vague description of ‘‘ Oporina ? castaneo-fasciata ;”

but it is extremely doubtful.

101. Hoporina sericea, n. sp.

Coloration of /7. croceago, but the primaries more elongated

(the form of Xanthia gilvago); the grey markings on the

primaries less distinct than in H. croceago, excepting the three

angulated transverse lines ; primaries below rather redder, the

markings better-defined, secondaries with the markings less

defined. Expanse 1 inch 8 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

But for the entirely different form of the primaries, this

might have been considered a variety of 4. croceago ; it, how-

ever, differs in its more sericeous wings, the secondaries having

quite a pearly appearance by the side of the typical species.

102. Eupsilia tripunctata, n. sp.

Allied to 2. satellitia, but the primaries silvery grey, with

slightly dusky central area and outer border; the transverse

lines wider apart, the outer one less irregular; the limit of the

external border indicated by a brown instead of a pale lunu-

lated line; the three white spots considerably larger, and

arranged in a triangular figure, the largest one D-shaped

rather than lunate, the lower of the two others much larger

than the upper one, and about one fourth the size of the D-

shaped spot; secondaries and body also greyer: wings below

of Heterocera from Japan. 169

much paler, the primaries showing the spots of the upper

surface, the transverse lines indistinct, secondaries without

markings. Expanse 1 inch 7 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

A well-marked species, far more pleasing than the European

one.

BRACHYXANTHIA, n. gen.

Allied to Xanthia and Xestia, but differing in the short

costal margin of the primaries, the consequently much more

convex outer margin of the same wings, the shorter and

rounder secondaries, and the longer and more porrect palpi.

Type B. peculiaris.

103. Brachyxanthia peculiaris, n. sp.

Primaries bright stramineous, crossed by brown lines as in

XAestia ochreago; an additional dark brown oblique line from

apex to inner margin, from which a second line is given

off from below the reniform spot and runs to the basal

third of the costal margin (the two lines together forming a

large Y on the right-hand wing); the disk immediately be-

yond the oblique line purplish brown in the male ; secondaries

sericeous brown, the costal area, fringe, and outer margin in

the female creamy whitish; body coloured like the wings:

wings below pale creamy yellow, with a brown discal line

which in the male primaries is expanded into a broad band or

patch; veins of outer margin, marginal lunules, and a costal

dash in primaries brown. Expanse 1 inch 2-3 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely), Yokohama (Jonas).

104. Mesogona contracta, n. sp.

Allied to M. acetoselle, but with narrower wings ; primaries

darker, the outer stripe angulated towards the costa; no black

discal dots, but a third pale irregular line limiting the greyish

external border ; secondaries greyer than in MV. acetoselle, with

black marginal spots; body altogether greyer, the abdomen

grey, bordered and tufted with reddish: wings below sordid

whitish, tinted with pink ; a black discocellular lunate spot, a

blackish discal stripe, and marginal black dots on each wing ;

primaries with the medio-discoidal area greyish; body greyish

brown. Expanse 1 inch 11 lines to 2 inches.

Yokohama (Jonas).

It is just possible that this may be Motschulsky’s “Agrotis

cinnamomea ;” but the description is not good enough for

identification.

[To be continued. |

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 12

170 Mr. H. J. Carter on the Position of the

XX.—Position of the Sponge-spicule in the Spongida 3 and

Postscript on the Identity of Squamulina scopula with the

Sponges. By H. J. Carter, F.R.S. &e.

In the ‘Annals’ for 1870 (vol. vi. pp. 222, 223, pl. xv. figs.

1-7) Mr. Saville Kent has described and figured, under the

name of Lhaphidotheca Marshall-Hallii, a remarkable little

sponge which he found growing on Lophohelia prolifera, in

590 fathoms, on the coast off Cezimbra, Portugal,in 1870. A

section of the sponge, which was half an inch in diameter,

is given in fig. 2 (/.¢.), where a cell of the Lophohelia may

be observed to form the centre. On account of the character

of the greater part of the spiculation, Mr. Kent rightly calls

this little hemispherical sponge an Hsperia; but the remark-

able part is, that it is faced by a layer of pin-like spicules,

whose heads, being outwards and in contact with each other,

form a kind of tessellated armature on the surface, while their

points mingle with the points of the skeleton-spicules of the

Esperia within. In the footnote at p. 253 (cb.) Mr. Kent

very naturally, therefore, questions my statement respecting

the spicular elements of Sguamulina scopula, viz. that their

“ slobular heads” being outwards should have satisfied any

one that this organism was not a sponge, or words to this

effect (‘Annals,’ 1870, vol. v. p. 312), citing Rhaphidotheca

Marshall-Hallit, the little sponge to which I have just alluded,

as affording an instance to the contrary.

It was not, however, until the latter part of 1877 that I

had an opportunity of examining a portion of this interesting

little sponge, which, together with two mounted slides of it,

was lent to me by my friend Dr. J. Millar, to whom it had

been given by Mr. Kent. At first sight I was inclined to

agree with Mr. Kent, and said, ‘ Verily (although a pin-like

spicule of this form among the Esperiade is a great anomaly)

here is a sponge with the heads of its spicules outwards, con-

trary to my assertion that the proper spicules (that is, the

spicules made by the sponge itself) never have their large ends

outwards.” Still this, as will presently be seen, was only a

prima facie opinion ; for when | came to examine microscopi-

cally what Dr. Millar had lent me, much was found to modify

these views, since, in addition to the spiculation of the Hs-

perta (viz.:—1, a sub-pinlike, staple skeleton-spicule, radiating

from the centre in branched bundles; 2, a smaller acerate one,

curved and binding together the points of the latter towards

the surface ; 3, an inequianchorate, single and in rosette-like

groups; 4, a bihamate (fibula); and 5, the sheaf-shaped bundles

of minute acerates, looking like sawdust by reflected light),

Sponge-spicule in the Spongida. 171

there were present the spiro-sinuous flesh-spicules of Cliona

abyssorum, which I had described and figured from a specimen

found in Lophohelia prolifera, dredged up at the mouth of the

English Channel (‘ Annals,’ 1874, vol. xiv. p. 249, pl. xiv.

fig. 33, and pl. xv. fig. 45, a, 6, c), to such an extent that it

appears in great plurality even in the minute fragments of

both slides mounted by Dr. Millar, also in the dust of the

pill-box containing the specimen of Rhaphidotheca, and in

crevices of the pieces of Lophohelia which accompanied it.

Thus a very different aspect of this little sponge became

manifest, and I could not help inferring that the Esperia, as

is often the case with sponges not content with their own spi-

cules, or having no means of obtaining silex for forming a

sufficient number of them, had not only appropriated the

sinuous flesh-spicules of Cliona abyssorum, which infests

Lophohelia prolifera, but the pin-like skeletal ones also; and

and that, after all, the presence of the pin-like spicules with

their heads outwards did not, in this instance, invalidate the

view mentioned, viz. that the proper spicules of a sponge are

never found in that sponge with their large ends outwards.

Still, the pin-like spicule in this little sponge is not iden-

tical in form with that of Cliona abyssorum, as may be seen

by comparing Mr. Kent’s with my figures of it (/. c.); and the

only conclusion I can come to, in consequence, is, that Mr.

Kent’s will be found to characterize a variety of Cliona abys-

sorum in the Lophohelia prolifera, bearing the pin-like spicule

of this misleading little sponge, or the latter has been modi-

fied in form by the Esperia itself ; which, it is very desirable to

determine.

When viewed in a perpendicular section laterally, the real

surface of the Esperia can be seen to be marked, as usual, by

the horizontal layer of acerates binding together the points of

the sub-pinlike skeleton-spicules of the Esperia, in which

none of the sub-pinlike or large ends are observed to be out-

wards, while the reverse is the case with all the pin-like spi-

cules that form its crust, which have been inferred to have

come from a Cliona—the former being the case with the

“proper spicules” of a sponge, and the latter that of spicules

derived from another or foreign source. It would be desirable,

then, to ascertain if the Cliona, which in all probability infests

the Lophohelia on which this little sponge has grown, has a

pin-like spicule like that covering the Hsperia.

If, however, Mr. Kent has not been happy in the instance

of Rhaphidotheca Marshall-Hallii, as opposed to my views, he

has caused me to considerably modify them, as well as the

statement made in my “ Notes introductory to the Study of

12%

172 Mr. H. J. Carter on the Identity

the Spongida,” viz. that “ where a spicule which has a point

projects beyond the surface of the sponge to which it belongs,

that point will be always outermost” (‘ Annals,’ 1875, vol.

xvi. p. 16); for this is by no means the case, since where

the spicule is intended for anchoring, or for binding down

the surface-spicules of the body of the sponge, and by thus

intermingling with each other to form a kind of crust, the

branched head is outwards and the pointed end of the shaft

inwards.

Thus in the anchoring spicules of the hexactinellids Rossella

and Huplectella, in Geodra, in Stelletta (especially Wyville-

thomsonia Wallicht’), and in Tethya (type T. cranium), also

in some of the calcareous sponges, the former is the case ;

while the large surface-spicules on the body of Rossella and

many other hexactinellids, together with the large trifid

( zone-”) spicules of Geodia and Stelletta, especially in

Wyvillethomsonia Wallichit, all the Lithistids, and some of

the calcareous sponges (ex. gr. Leuconia Johnstonit, ‘ Annals,’

1871, vol. viii. pl. 1. fig. 6) furnish instances of the latter.

Yet in other cases, where the spicules are not branched, but

linear and pointed at both ends, especially in the Renierida,

the points bristle on the surface ; and that this would be the

case if one end were obtuse, is evidenced by the Suberitida, in

which the pin-like spicule always holds this position. ven

in Placospongia melobesioides and Xenospongia patelliformis,

in which the crusts respectively are composed of a layer of

Geodia-like siliceous balls and Stelletta-like stellates, accom-

panied by a pin-like skeleton-spicule only, the point of the

latter is outwards. ?

Therefore in the “ Notes &c.” to which I have above alluded,

it should have been stated, in the section immediately following

the tabular view of the skeleton-spicules therein given, that

while the spicules of the “ linear group” have their pointed

ends directed outwards, the reverse is the case with the

“‘ramular group.” How this omission occurred I cannot

conceive, as the last spicules mentioned in this table are the

“ anchoring ” ones of the Hexactinellida. Thus it is rather

an error of omission than of commission, of which, I fear,

many more will be found in my “ Notes.”

PostTscRIPT.

On the Identity of Squamulina scopula with the Sponges.

In a paper entitled ‘‘ Observations upon Professor Ernst

Hickel’s Group ‘ Physemaria,’ and on the Affinity of the

Sponges,’ Mr. Saville Kent, in the last number of the

of Squamulina scopula with the Sponges. 173

‘Annals’ (p. 12 e¢ seg.), assumes that Hickel has identified

my Squamulina scopula=Halyphysema Tumanowiczti, Bk.,

with his genus Gastrophysema, and then infers (provisionally,

p- 15) that, as Prof. Hiickel (‘Jenaische Zeitschrift,’ erstes

Heft, Taf. iv.-vi.) represents collared, flagellated, monadic

bodies with it, it is a sponge.

Now Hiickel has not identified my Squamulina scopula

with his Gastrophysema, as proved by his figures of the latter,

wherein the cavity of the body is not prolonged into the poly-

thalamous foot or test; and therefore Mr. Kent’s provisional

inference falls to the ground.

My Squamulina scopula, as may be seen by my figures

(‘ Annals,’ 1870, vol. v. pl. iv.), consists of a subpolythala-

mous discoid test, whose opening on the summit is prolonged

into a tubular scopuliform structure, which is simple in one

and dichotomously branched in the other species or variety ;

so that the latter closely resembles in form the calcareous test

of Carpenteria, whose opening at the summit is also prolonged

into a tubular branched state, which is composed partly of cal-

careous matter supplied by the animal itself, and partly of

foreign material consisting chiefly of more or less fragmentary

sponge-spicules: when the calcareous tube fails, which is

often the case, the tube is wholly composed of the latter, like

that of Squamulina scopula, only that the tubulation of Car-

penteria terminates in fine branches, while those of Sguamulina

scopula and its variety ramosa terminate in round scopuli-

form extremities.

Again, whether there be collared flagellated monadie bodies

in Squamulina scopula or not, the polythalamous character, so

appropriately given by the illustrious Ehrenberg to what we

now call Foraminifera, decides the question with those who

are well acquainted with the structure of the latter as well as

that of the Spongida. No sponge, that I know of, presents

the polythalamous character of Sqguamulina scopula, in its foot

(root) or anywhere else.

That Hiickel did not know what he was talking about is

evident when he attempts to identify the bundle of anchoring

spicules of Wyvellethomsonia Wallichit, formed by the sponge

itself, with the heterogeneous material brought together by

the organism which he represents under the name of /Taliphy-

sema echinoides (op. cit. Tat. 11. fig. 127), and which Schmidt

would provisionally call “ Stelletta echinotdes”’ (Archiv f.

mikroskop. Anat. Bd. xiv. p. 260).

Ido not mean to assert that Hiickel’s figures of Gastro-

physema do not represent his Physemaria; but I mean to

assert most emphatically that they do not represent my Squa-

174 Capt. W. V. Legge on a new Scops Oul.

mulina scopula, any more than his Haliphysema echinoides

represents Wyvillethomsonia Wallichit. So it is evident from

this that, in attempting to generalize,

“ A little knowledge is a dangerous thing.”

Squamulina scopula in its simple and branched forms is

very common on this coast (Budleigh-Salterton, Devon) ; but

if reexamined, as Mereschkowsky suggests a little further on

in the same number of the ‘ Annals’ (p. 77), it is impossible

to do away with the bearing of the polythalamous character

above mentioned, which no sponge that I know of possesses,

independent of the other proofs that Sguamulina scopula is

decidedly a species of Foraminifera.

The embryo of the Spongida grows up into branches from

a root; that of the Foraminifera from a cell into cells or

chambers, successively increasing in size and, for the most part,

arranged spirally. ‘Thus far the two organisms cannot be

confounded.

XXI.—Description of a new Scops Owl from Ceylon.

By Capt. W. V. Lecce, R.A., M.B.O.U., &c.

At Trincomalie, in July 1875, I obtained a young bird

belonging to a small species of Scops Owl unknown to me.

I kept it some little time; and it then died. In May of the

following year, while staying with Mr. Bligh, of Catton

Estate, Haputale, I met with a skin of an adult bird, which

he had caught in the chimney of his bungalow at Kotmalie,

and which I recognized as belonging to the same species as

my young bird. Its small size and dark plumage prevented

my identifying it with any Scops Owl described in Mr.

Sharpe’s Catalogue ; and through the kindness of Mr. Bligh I

was enabled to send it home to the British Museum. It has

now been presented to the national collection by that gentle-

man.

Messrs. Whyte and Co., of Kandy, have just sent home to

Mr. Sharpe, on loan, a second example, killed in one of the

coffee-districts near Kandy. On our comparing the series

thus obtained with the Scops Owls in the national collec-

tion, this species turns out to be new, being distinguished

from other Indian members of the genus by its small

size and dark colour. Messrs. Whyte and Co. state they

have received once before an example of this owl*. I

* T have examined a small rufous owl in the Colombo Museum, which

appears to belong to this species.

Capt. W. V. Legge on a new Scops Owl. 175

propose to describe this interesting little addition to the

avifauna of Ceylon under the name of Scops minutus, it

appearing to be the smallest Scops Owl yet discovered.

Scops minutus, sp. nov.

Description.— 8. Length to front of cere (from skin) 6-0

inches ; culmen 0°55; wing 4°85; tail 2°1; tarsus 0°8; outer

anterior toe 0°7, its claw straight 0-4; height of bill at cere

0:25.

Iris yellow; bill olivaceous brown; cere greenish; feet

fleshy brown.

Above the general hue is dark brown, the feathers of the

head, back, rump, scapulars, tertials, and wing-coverts crossed

at the centre with transverse spots of ochraceous, spotted

finely and closely vermiculated on the rest of their surfaces

with grey and ochraceous grey, surrounding transverse irre-

gular markings of blackish ; the feathers of the hind neck are

crossed with bold wavy markings of whitish, and margined

with rufescent buff. The outer scapulars are white externally,

with blackish terminal spots and oblique central bars of the

same, edged with rufous; the primary and outer secondary

coverts have their dark markings mingled with rufous patches

and set off with white spots near the tips of the outer

webs; primaries and secondaries brownish rufous, mottled

with blackish brown, and the inner webs banded broadly

with the same; the outer webs of the first five primaries

crossed with five white blackish-margined bars, the ti

paler than the rest of the feather and mottled with dark

brown; tail brownish, washed with rufous on some of the

feathers near the base, mottled with blackish brown and

crossed with five or six bars of buff-white with black edges ;

ear-tufts concolorous with the head, and rufous at the base of

the feathers.

Loreal plumes black, with white bases ; facial disk grey,

pencilled with blackish; ruff pale rufous, the feathers

edged and centred with dark brown; chin whitish; fore

neck and under surface, with the flanks, closely stippled with

iron-grey on a white ground, the feathers with broadish

central stripes of blackish, and crossed on their concealed por-

tions with fine, wavy, transverse, black marks; on the lower

parts the stippling is more open, the under tail-coverts being

chiefly white, with the markings confined to the tips; legs

rufescent, with wavy brown transverse marks; under wing-

coverts whitish, shaded with rufescent, and crossed with irre-

gular markings of brown.

176 Bibliographical Notice. -

The example sent home by Messrs. Whyte and Co., of

Kandy, differs in the bolder nature of the transverse white

spottings on the upper surface, and in the blackish markings

taking the form of distinct shaft-lines ; the ruff is more con-

spicuously edged, and is of a deeper buff than in the Museum

specimen ; the under surface is not so closely stippled, and

does not present the same ‘ pepper-and-salt ” appearance, the

markings taking the form of vermiculations and the centre

stripes being very bold.

This little owl comes nearer to Scops malayanus than any

other Indian member of the genus, but differs from it in its

smaller size and in the darker upper parts and closely stippled

under surface.

In its young plumage, it is rufous on the entire upper sur-

face, and the breast is whiter than in the adult.

Habitat. Northern, western, and central provinces of Cey-

lon, probably the whole island.

Type in British Museum.

Locality. _Kotmalie, Central Province.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE.

Whites Natural History of Selborne. Edited by Tuomas Bet,

F.R.S. Two vols. S8vo. Van Voorst: London, 1877.

A prriop of well nigh a century has now elapsed since the first

publication of Gilbert White’s ‘ Natural History and Antiquities of

Selborne,’ in 1789; and since then, as we all know, many reprints

of this popular work have been from time to time issued, enriched

or otherwise, as the case may be, by the notes and commentaries of

various editors. With this, all might be supposed to have been done

that could be done, and that nothing more was left for us to look

forward to than a repetition of the same kind of editorial labour.

It is with pleasure, however, that we find such a surmise dissipated

entirely by the appearance of the two goodly volumes now before

us, which, containing as they do so much new matter regarding our

author, may be fairly enough regarded as constituting the one final

and exhaustive record to which all must refer who would know

something more of White, not only as a naturalist, but in his more

intimate social relations with his family and friends. Hitherto we

have had to be content with the meagre though kindly notice pre-

fixed to the edition of White’s work published after his death by

his friend Dr. Aiken, and consisting of little more than the dates

of his birth and educational career at school and college. Now,

here was plainly a deficiency to be supplied ; and upon whom, we

may well ask, could such a task have better devolved than upon the

Bibliographical Notice. 177

present Editor, Thomas Bell (himself an able naturalist, and occupier,

too, of White’s tenement at Selborne for a period of more than thirty

years)? Within this studious retirement, and with access to

documents and letters such as no one else could command, Bell

has been enabled to write a brief memoir of White, which, un-

eventful as the life of such a student must needs be, will yet be

read with interest by all who cherish every scrap of information

concerning one who gave to an obscure village in Hampshire, where

he lived and died, a name and fame such as but for his labours

it had never possessed. To this memoir succeeds the Natural

History and Antiquities of Selborne, with notes sparingly because

judiciously appended by the Editor from his own and the personal

observation of others. And so ends vol. i., complete, so far as it

goes, in itself.

The contents of the next volume are entirely new ; and to these

we beg more especially to direct the attention of our readers. They

consist, to begin with, of the correspondence of Gilbert White with

his brother John, a clergyman like himself, and bound to him by a

peculiar sympathy, as being himself a lover of natural history, and

engaged for many years in preparing a work on that of Gibraltar

and its neighbourhood—though this, it is to be regretted, was never

published. To these letters follow several others that were ex-

changed between the same brother and Linneus ; and last of all an ex-

tensive correspondence of Gilbert White with his family, and miscel-

laneous letters addressed to many of his most intimate friends. When

we add that the whole correspondence occupies some 303 pages of

vol. ii. we have said enough to indicate the abundance of novel

information that will be there met with, and much which is specially

interesting as having reference to the favourite pursuits of our author.

“On the Sense of Hearing in Fishes,” by Gilbert White, is the title

of the next article in vol. ii., andis now published for the first time.

Out of three of White’s sermons in the possession of Mr. Bell, he

has thought proper to select one as giving us, he says, “ a fair

illustration of the general tone of his parochial instruction, and as

an example of the ordinary character of the best village sermons of

the period.”

Lastly, as affording a curious glimpse into the expenses of living

at that period, we have the account-book kept by White of moneys

spent as well as received during the terms of his proctorship &e. at

Oxford during the years 1752 to 1754. With the quaint entries here

made, and the odd manner in which the figures are disposed, the

student of by-gone data will find much that may furnish food for

reflection as well as amusement at the same time. We conclude

our list of White’s writings with his ‘“‘Garden Kalender” and a

“ Description of Dufour’s Fire-escape,’ which last, though never

perhaps intended for publication, yet shows us that our author

was fully alive to any improvement in the useful arts of life.

A list of the more noteworthy animals and plants observed in Sel-

borne and its neighbourhood is appended by the Editor. William

178 Miscellaneous.

Curtis furnishes us with a brief essay on the geology of Selborne ;

while last, in the form of an Appendix, Lord Selborne gives us an

account of his highly successful investigations into the Romano-

British antiquities found in the bed of Woolmer Pond and other

districts of the parish. A copious index of names and places con-

cludes, we may add, the whole work.

In the above notice we have purposely limited ourselves to telling

the reader what these volumes contain. To have entered into any

criticism upon the subject-matter of a work, the leading portion

of which has so long received the verdict of public approval,

would have been here wholly out of place. Sufficient is it to ob-

serve that all future competition between publishers for the glory

or profit accruing from editions of White’s ‘Selborne’ is now finally

set at rest. To Van Voorst and his able Editor belong the exclusive

merit of being the first to set before the public the full portrait of

Gilbert White and his Selborne—that Selborne which he loved so

wisely and so well.

MISCELLANEOUS.

Tuomas VERNON Wo.LtastTon.

Srnce the issue of our last number we have had to lament the loss

of one of the best and most scientific of our entomological contri-

butors. Mr. T.V. Wollaston died suddenly, on the 4th of January,

at his residence at Teignmouth ; and it is hard to say whether the

feeling of regret caused by this untimely event is more inspired by

appreciation of the good qualities of the man or of the value of his

work. Belonging toa family which numbered Dr. Wollaston among

its members, and could boast of more than one name of respectable

position in literature, Mr. Wollaston certainly well maintained its

credit by his labours in the department of science to which he

specially devoted himself; whilst his extreme amiability, gentle-

ness, and straightforwardness of character endeared him to all those

who had the pleasure of his personal acquaintance.

Born on the 9th March, 1821, Mr. Wollaston was only in his

fifty-seventh year when he died. His love for entomology commenced

while he was completing his studies at Jesus College, Cambridge,

where the example of our late Botanical Editor, Mr. C. Cardale Ba-

bington inoculated him, and two, at least, of his fellow students (the

Reys. J. F. Dawson and Hamlet Clark), with a taste for the study of

British Coleoptera ; and it was upon this subject that he made his first

appearance as an entomological writer, with a short note on Coleo-

ptera observed at Launceston, published in 1843, in the first volume

of the ‘ Zoologist.’ This was followed in 1845 and 1847 by notes

on the entomology of Lundy Island, which appeared in the same

periodical ; and in the intermediate year (1846) he sent his first

contribution to this journal, under the title of ‘ Descriptions of

Miscellaneous. 179

three newly-discovered British Coleoptera.” Other papers, chiefly

on the Coleoptera of various districts of the British Isles, were con-

tributed by him to the ‘ Zoologist’ in 1846 and 1847; but in the

autumn of the latter year his friends were shocked with the news

that he had suffered from a severe attack of blood-spitting, which,

although no serious results were immediately to be apprehended

from it, would necessitate his passing at least the ensuing winter

in a milder climate than that of England. Madeira was the

locality selected by him; and to his compulsory visit to that beauti-

ful island we_are indebted for some of the finest entomological

works of which this country can boast.

From the moment of his landing in Madeira Mr. Wollaston set

himself, with the energy and enthusiasm which had always charac-

terized his proceedings, to form a collection of the insects of the

island; and although his own predilections led him no doubt to pay

special attention to the Coleoptera, he obtained most interesting

series of insects belonging to the other orders. So interested was he

by the results of these researches, that, although no longer compelled

to submit to exile on account of his health, he returned again and

again to Madeira, and on these occasions provided himself with a

small tent, in which he lived high up among the mountains for

weeks together, accompanied only by Portuguese attendants, whose

duty it was to bring up the necessary supplies for the little party.

By these means Wollaston obtained so large a series of insects, and

especially of Coleoptera, that he found himself in a position to give

a very exhaustive account of the beetles of the main island of

Madeira and of those scattered points of rock, the Salvages and

Desertas, which form small groups in its immediate vicinity. After

several years of work his results appeared in 1854 under the title of

‘Insecta Maderensia,’ in a handsome quarto volume, illustrated with

coloured plates of beautiful figures, drawn by Mr. Westwood and

engraved by Mr. Frederick Smith. The qualities displayed in this

great work, the accuracy of research, and the painstaking and

thoroughly philosophical manner in which the subject was treated,

at once placed Wollaston in the first rank of systematic entomologists;

while the curious results of his investigations, revealing as they did,

in the little spot of ground on which they had been carried on, a

most singular mixture of European and Mediterranean types, with

peculiar species, constituting genera and even more extensive groups

of which no examples were known elsewhere, gave the work a

special interest, and led its accomplished author to speculate on the

possibility of the former existence of an Atlantic land, from the

inhabitants of which these peculiar types were descended.

By a very natural process such speculations led to the desire to

investigate the insect-faunas of the other Atlantic islands; and the

entomological portion of the great work of Webb and Berthelot on

the Canaries no doubt furnished some indications that interesting

discoveries might be looked for there. Accordingly, after making

another visit to Madeira in 1855, and preparing a Catalogue of the

180 Miscellaneous.

Coleoptera of that island, which was published in 1857. by the

Trustees of the British Museum, who had purchased his valuable

collections, Wollaston (in 1858 and 1859) went to the Canaries in

the yacht of his friend Mr. John Gray; and the results of his re-

searches, embodying descriptions of many new forms of Coleoptera

and numerous corrections of the statements of previous authors,

appeared in 1864, also under the auspices of the Trustees of the

British Museum*.

In the mean time, however, other observers had been investigating

the Canarian Coleoptera; and in the very next year after the publi-

cation of his Museum Catalogue, Wollaston found himself under

the necessity of bringing out a fresh book, entitled ‘ Coleoptera

Atlantidum,’ in which he not only gave a complete list of the species,

with descriptions of many new ones, but discussed at considerable

length the theoretical ‘conclusions to which he was led by his ex-

amination of them. For the further confirmation of these conclu-

sions he again embarked on board Mr. Gray’s yacht in 1866, for a

cruise among the Cape- Verde Islands ; and the fruits of this journey

appeared in the following year under the title of ‘ Coleoptera Hes-

peridum.’ Later still he undertook the investigation of the beetles

of St. Helena; and his descriptive notice of these, ‘ Coleoptera

Sanctee-Helenze,’ which appeared only last year, showed a con-

siderable advance even upon the results recently published by Mr.

Melliss.

From his investigations of the Coleoptera of all these little

islands scattered so widely over the Atlantic, Wollaston was strongly

confirmed in his belief that they are relics of a great tract of land

or group of large islands, now submerged, except the summits of its

highest mountains, which afford a refuge for the descendants of a

few of its peculiar inhabitants. These points, and many others of

interest with regard to geographical distribution, are discussed

with great acumen in the introductions to the works above cited.

Throughout his career Wollaston maintained the independence of

species, and indeed was, for a long time, an ardent opponent of the

doctrine of evolution. His opinions on this subject took a somewhat

modified form in his later writings, in which he accepted the notion

that some forms which could hardly be regarded otherwise than as

species had a recognizable derivative origin. As early as 1856 he

published a small work on the Variation of Species, which con-

tains many valuable remarks on this subject and also discusses the

nature of genera.

Notwithstanding his special devotion to the study of the Coleo-

ptera, Wollaston found time to attend to some other things during

his visits to the Atlantic islands. In his first sojourn in Madeira

the Rev. R. T. Lowe, then chaplain at Funchal, called his attention

* It is to be hoped that the beautiful collections, both of shells and

insects, upon which Mr. Wollaston was at work until the very close of

his life may be acquired by the national Museum, and placed side by

side with those earlier collections which are already in its cabinets.

Miscellaneous. 181

to the existence of many peculiar forms of land-shells on the island ;

and Wollaston collected these with such zeal, that in a very short

time he had obtained examples of a great many more species than

had fallen to the lot of Mr. Lowe during several years’ residence in

Madeira. A descriptive account of these shells, and of others ob-

tained by him in other Atlantic islands, was his last completed work,

and will, we hope, appear shortly.

This notice has already extended to such a length that it will be im-

possible to refer particularly to any of Wollaston’s scattered papers.

From 1846 until last year he was a frequent contributor to our

pages, in which many of his best papers appear. Others, of equal

value, will be found in the Transactions of the Entomological

Society, in the ‘Journal of Entomology,’ and in the ‘ Entomologist’s

Monthly Magazine.’ Altogether he published about 50 separate

papers, nearly all relating to Coleoptera.

When we consider that for 30 years of his life Wollaston was

always in a most delicate state of health, the amount and the quality

of the work done by him is at first sight surprising. But it may be

that the very weakness of constitution which all his friends de-

plored was really to some extent the cause of his success, by

preventing his going much into society, where his kindness and

geniality must have made him a favourite, and compelling him to

live for the most part in a retirement which afforded him so many

opportunities of devoting himself to the patient and minute research

by which, coupled with the power which he eminently possessed of

taking broad and philosophical views of his results, his reputation

was mainly built up.

On the Orthonectida, a new Class of Animals Parasitic on Echinoder-

mata and Turbellaria. By M. A. Grarp.

The little Ophiuran, Ophiocoma neglecta, sometimes contains a

singular parasite which may serve as the type of a whole group of

animals of very curious organization and hitherto almost unknown.

The following are the circumstances under which this parasite is

met with. Ophiocoma neglecta is an Ophiuran with condensed em-

bryogeny, or viviparous. The incubatory cavity, situated in the

aboral part of the disk, communicates freely with the exterior; for

the most advanced embryos contained in this cavity frequently

present upon their arms a pretty Vorticella, which occurs almost

always upon the arms of the parent animal. On tearing open the

disk in order to extract the embryos from it, we find it, in certain

individuals, filled with a multitude of animals like large ciliated

Infusoria, which traverse the field of the microscope in a straight

line and with the rapidity of an arrow. These animals occur of two

forms, which I shall name provisionally the elongated and the ovoid

form. In both they are simple planule, that is to say, organisms

composed only of two layers of cells—an exoderm or outer layer

of ciliated cells, and an endoderm consisting of larger cells bounding

a linear central cavity with no buccal aperture or anus. Notwith-

182 Miscellaneous.

standing this low organization, the body is metamerized, and the

metameres even present remarkable differentiations. The first ring

terminates anteriorly in a blunt cone and bears a tuft of rigid

sete. It is followed by a cylindrical ring of the same length, the

whole surface of which is roughened with papille, apparently dis-

posed in ten longitudinal rows; this is the only part of the body

which does not present vibratile cilia. The third ring is larger than

the first two taken together ; it widens gently towards its posterior

extremity. The fourth metamere is of the same dimensions as the

papilliferous ring ; it is followed by a terminal ring, furnished with

longer cilia at its posterior extremity, conical and subdivided into

two metameres less distinct than the preceding ones. Such is the

elongated form. The last rings form a sort of club with which the

animal beats the water, independently of the movements of the

cilia, and by sudden blows which one might think due to the action

of muscular elements. The ovoid form differs from the elongated

form only in its less length and greater breadth; but I have ascer-

tained -that it is not the result of a contraction of the animal.

Perhaps it is a sexual form, perhaps also a young state of the

parasite. I give this strange animal the name of Rhapalura ophio-

come.

A parasite of the same group is also met with at Wimereux, in a

Nemertean, Lineus gesserensis, O, F. Miller, which is very common,

as well as its variety L. sanguineus, under the stones of the muddy

places in the neighbourhood of the Tour de Croi. This animal

differs, however, sufficiently from Rhopalura to constitute a dis-

tinct genus ; the papilliferous ring is replaced by two very narrow

ciliated rings; the median portion of the body generally has six

nearly equal metameres ; the terminal club is formed of three rings ;

the anterior part, moreover, bears a tuft of rigid cilia. There are

also an elongated and an ovoid form. M‘Intosh has said a few

words on this parasite in his fine monograph of the British Nemer-

teans* ; I therefore propose to give it the name of Jntoshia liner.

Lastly a species evidently belonging to the same genus has been

figured without description by Keferstein+, who met with it at

St. Malo as a parasite in the digestive tube of a Planarian (Lepto-

plana tremellaris) which is’ also very common at Wimereux. I

give this species, which is very nearly allied to the preceding, the

name of Jntoshia leptoplane.

In the absence of sufficient embryogenical evidence, it is impossible

for me at present to assign these animals to the definitive place which

they must occupy in the classification. By the name OrrHonzctipa

I have desired to recall their progression, which is so characteristic

that it would of itself suffice for their recognition among the para-

sites with which they might be confounded. Provisionally I think

that the Orthonectida should be ranged above the Dicyemida and

near the Gastrotricha; the latter and the degraded Rotifers also

* M‘Intosh, ‘A Monograph of the British Annelids: the Nemerteans,’

1874, p. 129, pl. xviii. figs. 17-19.

+ Keferstein, ‘Beitrage zur Anatomie und Entwickelungsgeschichte

einiger Seeplanarien von St.-Malo,’ Taf. ii. fig. 8.

Miscellaneous. 183

live in general upon animals which inhabit muddy bottoms, such as

Ophiocoma neglecta, the Linei, and Leptoplana tremellaris. Such

are Balatro, parasitic on the Limnicolous annelids, and Saccoddella,

a parasite of Nebalia *. However, the Orthonectida possess neither

the rotatory apparatus nor the mastax of the Rotifera, nor even the

bifurcated tail or the pharynx of the Gastrotricha. The most in-

teresting question to be solved in the history of our parasites is

whether these animals have remained normally at the planula-stage,

or have retrograded to this primitive state, just as the Dicyemida

have returned to the morula-stage, in consequence of parasitism.

The fact of retrogression does not seem to me to be doubtful in the

ease of the Dicyemida, which I regard as degraded Turbellaria (the

Dicyema of the cuttlefish still possesses the bacilli so characteristic

of the skin of the Planarians). The proofs of the degradation of the

Orthonectida are far from being so evident; and these animals

perhaps represent the most interesting step in the complicated

phylum of the Vermest.—Comptes Rendus, October 29, 1877,

p. 812.

A new Species of Chimeera found in American Waters.

By Treopore Gitt.

One of the most unexpected discoveries recently made in Ameri-

can ichthyology is that of a species of the genus Chimera, of which

a specimen has lately been sent to the Smithsonian Institution. It

was caught south-east of the La Have bank, in lat. 42° 40’ N.,

long. 63° 23’ W., at a depth of 350 fathoms, with a bait of halibut.

An attentive comparison of the specimen with individuals of the

European Chimera monstrosa renders it evident that it does not be-

long to that species, but is an entirely distinct specific form. It

may be named Chimera plumbea, and diagnosed as follows :—

Chimera plumbea.

A Chimera with the snout acutely produced; the anteorbital

flexure of the suborbital line extending little above the level of

the inferior margin of the orbit; the dorsals close together ; the

dorsal spine with its anterior surface rounded ; the ventrals trian-

gular and pointed ; the pectorals extending to the outer axil of the

ventrals; and the colour uniformly plumbeous.

By these characters the species is readily separable from the

Chimera monstrosa and other species of the genus.—Bulletin of the

Philosophical Society of Washington.

Note on the Habits of Young Limulus. By AtexanperR AGAssiz.

Mr. C. D. Walcott has called attention to the fact that when col-

lecting fossils he finds large numbers of Trilobites on their back +;

* Claus still places Saccobdella among the Hirudinea; and this error

has unfortunately not been corrected in the French translation of his

treatise on Zoology.

+ The preceding investigations were made at the Laboratory at Wime-

reux, in September and October of the present year (1877).

} Ann. Lye. Nat. Hist. xi. p. 155, 1875 ; Twenty-eighth Report N.Y.

State Museum, Dec. 1876.

184 Miscellaneous.

from this he argues that they died in their natural position, and

that when living they probably swam on their backs. He men-

tions, in support of his view, the well-known fact that very young

Limuli and other Crustacea frequently swim in that position. I

have for several summers kept young horseshoe crabs in my jars,

and have noticed that, besides thus often swimming on their backs,

they will remain in a similar position for hours, perfectly quiet, on

the bottom of the jars where they are kept. When they cast their

skin it invariably keeps the same attitude on the bottom of the jar.

It is not an uncommon thing to find on beaches, where Limulus is

common, hundreds of skins thrown up and left dry by the tide, the

greater part of which are turned on their backs. An additional

point to be brought forward to show that the Trilobites probably

pass the greater part of their life on their back and die in that

attitude, is that the young Zimuli generally feed while turned on

their back; moving at an angle with the bottom, the hind extre-

mity raised, they throw out their feet beyond the anterior edge of

the carapace, browsing, as it were, upon what they find in their

road, and washing away what they do not need by means of a

powerful current produced by their abdominal appendages.—Szll-

man’s Amer. Journ., Jan. 1878.

New Species of Ceratodus from the Jurassic. By O. C. Manrsu.

Among the interesting vertebrate remains recently found in the

Jurassic of Colorado is a tooth of a Ceratodus in good preservation.

The specimen is a left lower dental plate, having the inner side

convex, and the outer divided into five prominent projections, which

are separated by four notches. The front projection is longest and

most pointed. The plate is attached fo a portion of the dentary

bone.

The length of this dental plate is 20 millims., and the transverse

diameter 11 millims. The species is the first Mesozoic Ceratodus

found in this country, and hence of much interest. It may be

named Ceratodus Giinthert, in honour of Dr. A. Gunther of the

British Museum. The geological horizon of this species is in the

Atlantosaurus beds of the Upper Jurassic.—Silliman’s Amer. Jeurn.,

Jan. 1878.

Sexual Dimorphism in Butterflies.

Mr. S. H. Scudder, in an article on sexual dimorphism in butter-

flies (to which special kind of dimorphism he applies the term anti-

geny), states that it isnot the male but the female that departs from

the normal type of colouring of the group to which the species

belongs, while it is the male that shows divergences from the type

in structural characters. These structural divergences in butterflies

appear in the wings and the legs, and sometimes in the antenne.

Mr. Scudder knows of no example in which the male alone diverges

from the general plan of coloration belonging to the group.—Proc.

Amer, Acad. 1877.

THE ANNALS

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES. ]

No. 3. MARCH 1878.

XXIL.—On the Geographical Distribution of the Common

Oyster. By G. WINTHER*.

Apart from the oysters of the Mediterranean, which are here

left out of consideration, the oyster is found along the coasts of

the Bay of Biscay, from Vigo in Spain to Finisterre in France,

and thence along the coasts of the Channel, the Irish,

Scotch, and English seaboards as far as the Shetland Islands.

The species reappears at Heligoland, on the western coast of

Slesvig, in the Limfjord, the Aalbek Bay in the Kattegat

(near Frederikshavn or Fladstrand), and along the eastern

shore of Jutland, as far as the fjord of Horsens, whilst on the

coast of the Scandinavian peninsula oysters are found from a

point south of Gothenborg along the Swedish and Norwegian

coasts towards the bay of Christiania, and again on the south

and west coast of Norway as far as the island of Trinen,

near the polar circle. The Feroes and Iceland possess no

oysters; and it is doubtful whether the American oyster is of

the same species as that of Europe. In spite of its wide

range northwards, the oyster must be regarded as a southern

species, being most fully developed in the Channel and south

of the Channel.

If now we look for peculiarities common to the whole of

this portion of the west coast of Europe which is inhabited

by the oyster, we meet with one phenomenon which exercises

* Abstract of a paper on the culture of oysters in Denmark, in

‘ Nordisk Tidsskrift for Fiskeri’ (Copenhagen, 1876).

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. is

186 M. G. Winther on the Geographical

the greatest influence on Western Europe in point of climate

and fauna, viz. the Gulf-stream, branches of which cross the

northern portion of the Atlantic and touch precisely on the

coasts in question.

According to the most modern researches, a branch of the

Gulf-stream strikes the north-west corner of Spain and sepa-

rates into two minor currents, of which one runs southwards

past Vigo, along the coast of ae and Portugal, whilst the

other follows the shore of the Bay of Biscay to the western

extremity of Brittany. The direction of this current along

the French coast is therefore first northerly and then, along

the S.W. coast of Brittany, north-westerly. After leaving

the western extremity of Brittany the current maintains this

north-westerly direction, following the edge of that submarine

plateau on which both France and England are situated; and

near the coast of Ireland this branch reunites with the main

portion of the Gulf-stream, which, having crossed the Atlantic

flows along the western shores of Ireland, Scotland, and the

Shetland Islands. From this point the stream, following

still the edge of the plateau, strikes across to the coast of

Norway, which it touches first between Bergen and 'Trond-

hjem, spreading thence along the coast as far as the North

Cape. From that branch of the Gulf-stream which, as we

have described, crosses the mouth of the Channel, a minor

branch diverges into the Channel, after passing which it

spreads into the southern division of the North Sea, where its

effects are well marked. After passing along the coast of

Holland it touches Heligoland and the islands west of Slesvig,

and follows the west coast of Jutland as far as the Skaw,

where an ultimate bifurcation takes place, one branch passing

to the Swedish coast, whilst the effects of the other, which runs

southwards along the east coast of the Cimbrian peninsula, can

be traced as far as the Bay of Kiel.

All along these coast-lines, which are touched by the Gulf-

stream, and where consequently the saltness and temperature

of the water are proportionally high and independent of local

circumstances, oysters are found. ‘They constitute its specific

area, according to the terminology of Mr. Forbes. How en-

tirely the oyster depends on the Gulf-stream is beautifully

illustrated in the Kattegat, where it does not reach so far

south on the Swedish coast as on the Danish coast, obviously

because the rather fresh current from the Baltic flows chiefly

along the coast of Sweden, whilst the salt current from the

North Sea follows the shore of Jutland. Oysters occur also

near the island of Anhalt, in a place where a local northern

current has often been observed ; but the locality would not

Distribution of the Common Oyster. 187

appear to be otherwise favourable, as no fishery has been esta-

blished there.

It may therefore be said, with justice, that the oyster

inhabits the shores of Europe so far as these are touched

more or less directly by the Gulf-stream, reaching northwards

as far as the polar cirele—the Channel and the south coast of

England forming the centre of its distribution.

That the oyster does not occur on the shores of Iceland or

the Feeroes, is interesting in so far as it shows that its diffu-

sion is due to the facility with which the spat is carried on by

the current. No current coming from the English or other

Kuropean coasts, and by which spat might be brought, im-

pinges on the shores of Iceland or the Faroe Islands; the

waters of the Gulf-stream by which they are washed come

direct from the channel of the Bahamas.

If it be granted that the oyster has been carried to its pre-

sent stations by the various branches of the Gulf-stream, it

may be concluded that its specific centre is the place where

that stream first reaches the continent of Hurope, viz. the west

coast of Spain, from which it has afterwards spread south-

ward into the Mediterranean, and northwards as far as the

olar circle. This, again, would be a point to be considered

in settling the question as to the physical conditions accom-

panying the deposition of the Crag formation in England

and the strata north of Gothenborg near Uddewalla, in which

oysters occur in a fossil state.

ut though oysters occur along the whole of the line indi-

cated, they are by no means equally plentiful or well-developed

atall points. Oyster-banks occur in many places, even as far

north as Bergen in Norway; but those along the shores of

England and France seem by nature to be the richest. On

these banks, which are situated at varying distances from the

shore, and where the oysters live in the pure water entering

from the Atlantic, having a saltness of 3°5 or 3°6, they grow to

a good size and produce many young; but they do not reach

that fulness and delicacy which is obtained by moving them

from the breeding-places to other localities exhibiting cer-

tain peculiar conditions. The places where oyster-culture

succeeds have this in common, that they are protected by

islands or shoals against the immediate influence of the

open sea, and that the sea-water is diluted by the fresh water

of rivers charged with a quantity of organic matter, which

affords nourishment to the oysters. ‘I'ransferred to such places

the oyster is considerably improved in size and taste; the

liver 1s more particularly increased ; and the shells become

more regular, because the animals are so openly scattered as

13%

188 Geographical Distribution of the Common Oyster.

not to interfere with one another. On account of the water

being less salt (2°9-3°1) the shells are thinner than on the

natural banks, in accordance with what has been observed

also in the case of other testaceous mollusks. Through these

changes the oyster is improved as an article of food and

commerce ; but the improvement is not attained without ano-

ther effect, which accompanies artificial fattening of animals

as commonly as the abnormal increase of the liver does,

and which is of the greatest importance for the whole

question of oyster-culture. All the physiological energy

of the animal being concentrated on the development of the

individual, another side of its life, its capability for continuing

the species, is impaired. Several authors have noticed the

small quantity and limited vital power of the spat produced by

oysters in artificial parks ; but the fact has not as yet received

the attention it deserves; it has not been observed that it is a

regular effect of less salt water and that consequently parks

for fattening oysters cannot be self-supperting in the long run.

A diminution of the saltness of the sea amounting to 0°5,

in connexion with certain other physical circumstances, parti-

cularly an admixture of fresh water, is consequently enough

to exercise a notable influence on the development of the

oyster generally, and especially on its power of propagation.

This check will increase in effectiveness with the admixture

of fresh water; and there is a point where the individual oyster

is still perfectly able to live and thrive, but unable to propa-

gate the species. Experience shows that oysters are able to

live long in water of much less saltness, and even attain a size

and delicacy which could not be reached if any part of its

vital power were to be spent on propagation of the species.

The minimum of saltness compatible with the existence of

oysters has not yet been determined ; and the circumstance that

the animal is very susceptible to cold, if the saltness of the

water decreases, renders experiment on this point very difficult.

Von Baer puts this minimum at 1:7; but propagation is then

out of the question. In several instances different banks in

the same locality have been found to exhibit great differences

with regard to fertility; and it has been suggested that the

reason might be that the products of the generative organs do

not come to maturity in allindividuals at the same'time. But

it is probable that their more or less favourable situation in

regard to the access of salt water is of not less importance in

the matter—particularly as the degree of saltness of the water

would probably show its effects not only in increasing or dimi-

nishing the general fertility, but also in accelerating or delay-

ing the maturity of the secretions in question.

Circumpolar Distribution of certain Hydrozoa. 189

From the preceding it appears that the physiological con-

ditions of the oyster, and especially its power of propagation,

may be changed or checked through modifications of circum-

stances, such as admixture of fresh water or greater tranquility

of the water, in respect of which there may be notable differ-

ences between localities situated at short distances from one

another ; and it is evident that this circumstance must act as a

bar to its diffusion over a wider area, particularly because it

is combined with this other peculiarity, that the brood of

oysters is capable of surviving, freely drifting about, only for

a short time after having left the mother; it must sink to the

bottom after a certain time, and remain where it sinks, whether

the place is favourable for its development or not. A very

gradual modification of the kind indicated occurs in the water

of the Kattegat, where the salt water of the North Sea meets

and is gradually mixed with the fresher water of the Baltic ;

and accordingly the oyster becomes more and more rare

as we proceed southwards. At the entrance to the Sound and

the Belts the species ceases to occur, though the water is not

fresher than it might survive and even thrive in; but it could

not propagate there ; and the nearest place where the physical

conditions of the water permit it to do so, viz. the Bay of

Aalbeek, just south of the Skaw, is so far away that the spat,

drifting with the current, must, as a rule, sink before it arrives

so far. Between these banks and the southern limits of the

oysters in the Kattegat they occur only seated on large stones,

singly or rarely three or four together. These scattered indivi-

duals are often large and fat, but they are barren.

With regard to parks for fattening oysters the main result

of these considerations is, that they may be established in places

where the water is much less salt than on the natural banks,

if otherwise the conditions are favourable, as to temperature,

quality of the bottom, quantity of food, &c.; but they cannot

be made self-supporting. If artificial banks are to be self-

supporting the water must not be much less salt than on the

natural banks from which they are stocked.

XXIII.—Note on Selaginopsis (= Polyserias Hincksii, Mere-

schkowsky), and on the Circumpolar Distribution of certain

Hydrozoa. By the Rev. A. M. Norman, M.A.

THE Polysertas Hincksii of Mereschkowsky, recently figured

in the ‘ Annals’ (ser. 4, vol. xx. pl. vi. figs. 15, 16), from

the White Sea, is, I think, unquestionably identical with

190 Rev. A. M. Norman on the Circumpolar

Diphasia mirabilis, Verrill, described originally from Le

Have and St. George’s Banks, on the New-England coast, and

subsequently figured by Clark from the Alaskan Sea.

The genus Polysertas will also be synonymous with Sela-

ginopsis, lately described by Prof. Allman, with a type (S.

fusca) found in Japan *. The White-Sea species will there-

fore be.Selaginopsis mirabilis (Verrill).

Until quite recently the Hydrozoa have been almost en-

tirely neglected in all seas except our own, though we must

not forget the important investigations of L. and A. Agassiz.

We thus know very little of the geographical distribution of the

species. Selaginopsis mirabilis is the first arctic Hydrozoon

which has been described from the east and west coasts of North

America and subsequently found in the north of Europe.

It is no wonder, therefore, that Mr. Mereschkowsky, having exa-

mined European literature without finding his species, should

have supposed that it was new. The reseazches of Vervill on the

New-England coast are materially extending our knowledge of

the distribution of many classes, including the Hydrozoa, on

the western side of the Atlantic; and Mr. 8. F. Clark’s ad-

mirable report on the Hydrozoa of Alaska has special interest.

In it he figures, and describes when necessary, forty-two

species as inhabiting the district. No less than sixteen of

these are Arctic species which reach the British coast, and

the circumpolar distribution of which has now been estab-

lished. They are :—

Obelia longissima (Pallas). Calycella syringa (Linn.).

Clytia Johnstoni (Alder). Coppinia arcta (Dalyell).

Campanularia integra, Macgil. Halecium muricatum, Johnst.

Gonothyrea hyalina, Hincks. Sertularia filicula, Z. & S.

Lafoéa pocillum ?, Hincks. Sertularella tricuspidata, Alder.

gracillima (Aldcr). rugosa (Linn.).

—— dumosa (Fleming). ——- polyzonias (Linn.).

fruticosa, Sars. Tubularia indivisa, Linn.

Add to these Selaginopsis mirabilis and we have two fifths

of the Alaskan species with a known circumpolar distri-

bution.

Selaginopsis and Pericladium are apparently Arctic genera

which have reached Japan by way of Kamtschatka and the

Kurile Islands—the course of distribution which has caused, I

believe, the striking resemblance in many features between

the British and Japanese marine faunas; and I venture to pre-

dict that many genera which are common to Japan and Kuro-

* Linn. Soc. Journ. vol. xii. (1876) p. 272. Another of Clark’s

Alaskan species, Thuiaria cylindrica, belongs to Aliman’s genus Pert-

cladium, described in the paper just quoted, p. 273.

Distribution of certain Hydrozoa. 191

pean seas will be found to have their relationship based on a

common arctic origin.

Mereschkowsky states that he has “found several other

species of this genus (Polysertas) in the collection of Hydroids

in the St.-Petersburg Museum of the Academy of Sciences,

brought from the sea of Ochotsk and Kamtschatka.” It is

not unlikely that the typical species of Selaginopsis may be

found in the localities referred to; andthe genus Pericladium

is also almost sure to live in seas which are midway between

Alaska and Japan.

Sertularia fusca, Johnston, of the British seas, is a con-

necting link between the ordinary species of Sertularta and

the typical Selaginopsis fusca.

Selaginopsis fusca of Japan is a connecting link between

Sertularia fusca, Johnston, and Polysertas Hincksii, Mere-

schkowsky.

Each of these might be made the type of a separate genus ;

but Allman’s genus as characterized will include all; and it

seems best so to retain it.

Genus SELAGINOPSIS, Allman.

“ Trophosome.—Hydrophyton consisting of a single axile

tube, to which the hydrothece are adnate, and on which they

are disposed in several longitudinal rows.”

‘“ Gonosome.—Not known.” [In the British S. fusca,

Johnston, the gonotheca is pyriform, and borne as in Sertu-

laria}.

1. Selaginopsis fusca (Johnston).

Sertularia fusca, Johnston et auctorum.

In this species the hydrothecz, instead of being placed on

the face of the branch as in Sertularia, are inserted on the

side, the thickness of the branch being much greater in pro-

portion to its breadth than in that genus. On each of the

sides the hydrothece are biserial, so far that they are decidedly

alternate, bending to the right and left, in such a way that

the mouths of one half only of the cells on each flank are seen

when one face of the branch is looked at, and the other half

when the opposite face is examined. It is, in fact, a double

arrangement of a Sertularella, each lateral view exhibiting a

series of hydrothecee corresponding to that of the front aspect

in Sertularella.

Hab. Distribution as known very limited; confined to east

coast of the north of England and Scotland.

192 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

2. Selaginopsis Allmant.

1876. Selaginopsis fusca, Allman, Linn. Soc. Journ, vol. xii. p. 272,

pl. xii. fig. 1, and pl. xix. figs. 1, 2.

This Japanese species has similarly the hydrothece ar-

ranged in double file on each stde (as opposed to the face) of

the branchlets; but they are here distinctly in two lines at

their bases as well as at their apices, the arrangement of cells

being, as it were, that of a double Sertularia (e.g. S. absetina) ;

instead of a double Sertularella as in the last case.

3. Selaginopsis mirabilis (Verrill).

18783. Diphasia mirabilis, Verrill, Amer, Journ. Science, ser. 3, vol. v.

p. 9 (note).

1876, Diphasia mirabilis, 8. F. Clark, in Scientific Results of Explora-

tion of Alaska, vol. i. p. 15, pl. vii. fig. 56.

1877. Polyserias Hincksti, Mereschkowsky, Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4,

vol. xx. p. 228, pl. vi. figs. 15, 16.

Hab. New-England coast (Verrill), Alaska (Clark), White

Sea (Mereschkowsky). ,

Here we find the process of multiplication of cells carried

still further, and what was in the former instances compara~

ble to a double Sertularian, is here equivalent to a triplicate

Sertularian, an extra pair of hydrothece being introduced.

The general aspect of the hydrophyton, as represented in

fig. 15 (‘ Annals’), reminds us strikingly of that of S. fusca,

Johnston, in mode of ramification, in general aspect of the

branchlets, and in their great slenderness at the point of at-

tachment to the main stem.

XXIV.—Descriptions of new Species of Heterocera from

Japan.—Part II. Noctuites. By Artuur G. Burier,

Bla o5 Bre, ce:

[Continued from p. 169.]

Cosmiide.

105. Cosmia distincta, n. sp.

Primaries grey, crossed by two blackish-edged white lines,

much as in OC. affinis; an abbreviated basal white litura ;

central area more or less clouded with ferrugimous, with a

central brown angulated belt ; external area dusky, limited

internally by an irregular whitish streak; a semicircular

whitish-bordered costal brownish spot, much like that of C.

of Heterocera from Japan. 193

pyralina ; secondaries as in C. affinis: under surface inter-

mediate in colouring and marking between C. pyralina and

C. affints. Expanse, ¢ 1 inch 5 lines, ? 1 inch 7 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

C. affints occurs also at Yokohama, but is slightly larger

than European examples.

Hadenide.

106. Raphia fasciata, n. sp.

Silvery greyish, rather darker than R. viminalis, with the

ground-colour of the central band and base of costal area in

primaries dark brown, spotted with black, the interno-basal

area silvery white. LExpanse 1 inch 3-4 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Very close to &. viminalis, but having a very distinct aspect,

owing to the blackish band and the large pale silvery interno-

basal patch.

107. Phlogophora beatriz, n. sp.

Closely allied to P. iris, larger; more stramineous; the

wings broader in proportion ; primaries with the darker mark-

ings more olivaceous; the outer border not reddish; the

margin distinctly dentate-sinuate ; the fringe tawny ; a mar-

ginal series of black lunules, the discal streaks nearest to the

margin slender and dentate-sinuate ; the two inner discal lines

more slender, wider apart, and less angular; the central patch

with convex (not angular) front margin ; the discoidal spots

less oblique, the secondaries clearer, yellower, the lines on the

disk abbreviated and fainter : under surface clear straw-yellow,

with an abbreviated discal line halfway between the cell and

apex; fringe of primaries tipped with blackish. Expanse 2

inches.

Hakodaté (Whitely).

Intermediate in form and marking between P. cris and P.

pertculosa.

APLECTOIDES, n. gen.

Allied to Aplecta of Guénée (Mamestra, Ochs., Grote), but

differing in its shorter and broader primaries, with straighter

costal margin; secondaries with the discocellulars more

strongly angulated, the radial nervure emitted further from

the median branches: body shorter; palpi more erect, the

terminal joint on a level with the top of the head. Type A.

condita of Guénée.

194 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

108. Aplectoides nitida, n. sp.

Allied to A. condita, much larger ; primaries shining silver-

grey, with black lines and white spots ; lines towards the base

nearly straight below the median vein; orbicular spot small,

clouded, distinctly black-bordered ; reniform spot clouded, in-

distinct in front, because immediately followed by a patch of

white, through which the sinuated portion of the discal black

line passes ; the latter followed by a less-distinct parallel line

from the costa to the third median branch; externo-discal

white limitation of the outer border much less defined than in

A. condita, partly black-bordered ; a longitudinal black dash,

just above the third median branch, from the reniform spot to

the outer border; fringe and apical costa brown; secondaries

smoky brown, fringe greyish; thorax white, collar with a

broad blackish band in front; metathorax and tegule crossed

by two black belts; frons black ; palpi black, whitish inside ;

abdomen fuliginous: under surface fuliginous, paler towards

the base of the wings; a dusky transverse discal stripe, angu-

lated in primaries; marginal line black; apical costa and

fringe of primaries tinted with tawny, the rest of the fringe

alternately sordid white and blackish; legs black, femora

and tibiz clothed with greyish hairs, tibiee and tarsi banded

with white. LExpanse 2 inches 1 line.

Yokohama (Jonas).

In most examples the primaries above have the interno-

median area whitish to just beyond the sinuous discal line.

109. Eurots virens, n. sp.

&. Primaries bright sap-green, with the usual spots; in-

ternal border, veins, and fringe brown; costal border irrorated

and spotted with black, the spots arranged in pairs, with paler

green between them; discoidal spots margined with whitish

and black, the reniform spot varied with red, deeply angularly

excised in front, the inner (“orbicular’’) spot quadrate; two

black lunules below the last-mentioned spot and crossing the

interno-median area; an angular discal series of black-edged,

pale green lunules; a submarginal series of black and green

spots ; the area between these two rows of spots olivaceous ;

a marginal series of conical black spots; fringe pinky white

at the base; secondaries grey, becoming smoky brown to-

wards the outer margin, fringe pure white ; head, collar, and

tegule sap-green, black-spotted ; remainder of body greyish,

with testaceous anal tuft : under surface greyish brown ; wings

sericeous with a dark transverse discal stripe; primaries with

of Heterocera from Japan. 195

pale-yellowish costa, internal area silvery grey ; secondaries

with white fringe. Expanse 2 inches 4 lines.

Hakodaté ( Whitely).

Allied to &. herbida, much larger and brighter in colouring,

and with no trace of the white patch beyond the reniform

spot.

PLATAPLECTA, 0. gen.

General aspect of Aplecta nebulosa (Mamestra of Grote),

but with much shorter and broader wings, shorter body, and

longer and less densely clothed palpi. Type P. soluta (Polia

soluta, Walker).

110. Plataplecta subviridis, n. sp.

Primaries silvery grey (or white densely irrorated with

grey), with blackish and white markings, nearly as in Aplecta

nimbosa ; the whole wing, but especially the basal area, indis-

tinctly blotched with pale green; costal margin blackish,

spotted with white near the apex ; reniform spot subquadrate,

black-edged ; two transverse black-edged white stripes across

the base of the interno-median area, a third connecting the

first median branch with the inner margin, and followed by a

large black spot; a very irregular greenish and white sub-

marginal stripe bounded internally by conical black spots ;

apex blackish; a marginal series of black spots; fringe

brown; secondaries pale brown, with darker outer border,

blackish marginal line, and whitish fringe ; body correspond-

ing in colour with the wings: under surface shining pale

brown ; costa of primaries white-spotted near apex; secon-

daries whitish, with the discocellulars and outer border dusky ;

venter whitish. Expanse 1 inch 6-7 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

The male is lighter in colour than the female.

111. Hadena gnoma, n. sp.

Close to H. atriplicis, but much larger and darker, the pri-

maries of a slaty-grey colour, varied with black and brown

and bright green markings, arranged as in 4. atriplicis, the

bifid white spot less pure in colour and rather larger: secon-

daries, abdomen, and under surface altogether darker than in

H, atriplicis. Expanse, f 1 inch 10 lines, ? 2 inches 2 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

112. Hadena lucia, n. sp.

Allied to H. atriplicis, but differing as follows :—prima-

riés above with an abbreviated white band from the costa to

196 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

the middle of the interno-median interspace (instead of the

bifid white spot at base of first median branch) ; greenish

markings paler and clearer ; the apical border white, the black

marginal spots less depressed and less distinct from the brown

spots on the fringe; the other dark markings less sharply

defined ; secondaries more sericeous, with the basal half de-

cidedly whiter ; abdomen paler. Expanse 1 inch 11 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely).

Xylinide.

113. Auchmis intermedia (Cloantha intermedia, Bremer).

Allied to A. perspicillaris and A. stkkimensis, pattern of

the latter, but rather larger and paler, the basicostal and dis-

coidal region of the primaries lilacine greyish, and the internal

area tinted with the same colour: wings below paler, the

costal margin of primaries and the ground-colour of secon-

daries white, the red-streaked areas of a duller tint. Expanse

1 inch 7 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely) ; Yokohama (Jonas).

This is doubtless the Japanese representative of A. perspi-

cillaris, just as A. sikkimensis is the Darjeeling representa-

tive; a fourth species of the same type occurs at Natal.

114. Calocampa fumosa, n. sp.

Closely allied to C. ewoleta, but altogether of a more smoky

tint, the markings less distinct, the discoidal spots of primaries

more quadrate, the two hastate black spots more elongated ;

the secondaries dark grey, the base pale brown, the fringe

pale grey; head and collar whity brown, broadly bordered

with piceous; thorax blackish; shoulders sordid white; abdo-

men whity brown, with confused dorsal and transverse dusky

stripes. Expanse 2 inches 8 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

The primaries are rather more elongated than in the Euro-

pean species.

115. Calocampa formosa, n. sp.

Primaries shining grey, the costal area, outer half of disk,

external border, and fringe suffused with laky brown ; dis-

coidal spots outlined in black, the reniform dark grey, with a

central rounded spot, both edged with reddish and black; two

central transverse undulated black lines, the outer one bor-

dered externally by brown spots, which fill the sinuations ;

inner part of discal area whitish, followed by a sinuous series

of black dots; external area cut off abruptly by an oblique

of Heterocera from Japan. 197

line from the costa near apex, continuous with a broad trans-

verse plum-coloured streak, intersected by a pale line; sub-

marginal area whitish; a series of black marginal spots ;

costal margin (almost to apex) black, white-spotted beyond

the cell: secondaries brown, with dusky outer border; fringe

sordid white, intersected by a dusky line: body nearly as in

the preceding species. Wings below darker than in the other

species of the genus, with well-defined blackish undulated

marginal lines on a narrow pale border; secondaries with a

broad regular dusky discal belt. Expanse 2 inches 2 lines.

Yokohama (Pryer and Jonas).

116. Xylina pruinosa, n. sp.

Primaries above shining silvery grey, with indications of a

paler irregular transverse discal band; the base of the cell,

three blackish-edged discoidal spots, an oval patch near the

base on the interno-median interspace, and a small round spot

(black-edged externally) paler grey; a submarginal row of

black dots, a marginal undulated dark line ; fringe irrorated

with white: secondaries sordid white, the apical area and

outer border broadly grey; fringe testaceous at the base,

tipped with white, grey in the centre: thorax grey, speckled

with testaceous and white; abdomen pale greyish or sordid

white, with a darker dorsal line and a rosy brownish fringe.

Wings below shining silvery whitish, with opaque brown-

speckled costal borders to all the wings and outer border to

primaries ; secondaries with a dusky dot at the end of the

cell ; body rosy brownish. Expanse 1 inch 5 lines.

Yokohama (Pryer and Jonas).

Nearly allied to X. rhizolitha, but greyer, with much paler

secondaries.

In my opinion the genus Aporophylla ought to be placed

either with or close to Xylina; so far as I have been able to

discover, it agrees in structure with X. rh¢zolitha. The main

differences which Stainton gives to distinguish the Apamide

from the Xylinidz are that the imagines of the first family

have the wings ‘‘in repose roof-shaped,” and those of the

second family ‘‘ folded in repose; ” the genera Aporophylla

and Xylina are distinguished by the larve of the first feeding

‘on low plants,” and those of the second ‘ on trees.’ Cha-

racters such as these, which can be ascertained only by the

field-naturalist, should surely not weigh so heavily as to sepa-

rate two insects so similar as Aporophylla australis and

Xylina rhizolitha by 81 pages. I presume that, notwith-

standing the rarity of A. australis, it is known to close its

wings like an Apamea.

198 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

117. Xylina arctipennis, n. sp.

Primaries silvery grey, the base, a central irregular black- «

edged band, a transverse discal stripe, and the outer border

rather paler and greyer than the rest of the wing; a black

dot at the base, a second at the inferior angle of the cell, a

disco-submarginal series, a series of marginal black liture,

and a short oblique black apical line ; fringe intersected by a

slightly darker line: secondaries shining sordid white, with a

broad, pale brown external border; fringe white: thorax

greyish brown, antenne ferruginous ; abdomen paler, whitish

at base, with a black dorsal tuft. Primaries below pale

shining brown, becoming silvery whitish towards the inner

margin; costa beyond the cell dotted with black and whitish :

secondaries silvery white, with a whity brown costal spot and

a discal stripe of the same colour; pectus creamy white,

changing to smoky brown in front; venter testaceous. Ex-

anse 1 inch 7 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

118. Lithophane saga, un. sp.

Primaries grey, with a number of black and brown dashes,

four in the centre of the costa, oblique, two near external angle

also oblique, but slanting upwards, the remainder longitudinal ;

a dusky oblique streak from the outer margin near the apex

to the external third of the inner margin; reniform spot

barely distinguishable; an acutely undulated oblique discal line

arched towards the costa, the external undulations filled in at

the end by black spots: secondaries with the basal half sordid

white, crossed by brown veins, external half occupied by a

very broad smoky brown border, upon which the veins look

black ; fringe sordid white: head grey, with black spots

behind the eyes; collar brown, with a central transverse black-

edged grey belt ; thorax grey, brownish and crested down the

centre; tegule grey, with a brown streak on each side; abdo-

men whity brown, with dark brown dorsal tufts. Primaries

below smoky brown, the basal area and apical border pale;

secondaries white, the costal area and outer margin sordid; a

broad brown external band, a black spot at the end of the

cell, and a discal series of black dots on the veins ; pectus

pale greyish; venter sordid white. Expanse, $2 inches 4 lines,

2? 1 inch 11 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

L. saga is allied to the “ Xylina indicatura”’ of Walker.

119. Cucullia fraterna, un. sp.

Nearly allied to C. dwetfuga, but the primaries duller, with

of Heterocera from Japan. 199

the spot in the cell black, compressed and elongated ; secon-

. daries pure white (with the veins and outer border brown, and

the costal area brownish, as in C. lucifuga). EXxpanse 2 inches

1 line.

-Hakodaté (Whitely).

Heliothide.

120. Heliothis adaucta, n. sp.’

Close to H. dipsacea, but much larger, the primaries and

thorax of a more sandy whitish tint, with the markings rather

darker; the secondaries whiter with blacker markings, the

spot closing the cell broader: body less reddish in tint;

under surface with all the markings much more distinct,

Expanse 1 inch 5-6 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas); Hakodaté (Whitely).

The largest examples of H. dipsacea measure about 1 inch

3 lines in expanse.

Erastride.

121. Hrastria stygia, n. sp.

Allied to #. fuscula: primaries black in the male, brown in

the female, with darker bands and lines as in £. fuscula, the

orbicular and reniform spots more or less strongly outlined in

white ; costa white-spotted, most strongly beyond the middle,

a more or less strongly defined squamose patch of yellowish

scales just beyond the reniform spot; a transverse bracket-

like white line followed by a yellowish streak near the exter-

nal angle; a 3-shaped pale line, bordered outwardly with

deep black, near the base; fringe of all the wings white-

spotted and with basal and central pale lines: secondaries

shining greyish brown. Wings below much as in LZ. fuscula,

but darker. Hxpanse 1 inch 1 line.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Although allied to £. fuscula, this species has more nearly

the aspect of E. africana of Felder: excepting in the form of

the margin of the secondaries, it nearly approaches Eriopus

Latreillit of Duponchel.

Anthophilide.

122. Anthophila paradisea, n. sp.

Allied to A. purpurata: primaries with the basal half pale

lemon-yellow, white at base of inner margin; disk bright

rose-colour, whitish on the costa near apex, and indistinctly

blotched with pale bronzy brown (barely visible without a

200 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

lens) ; outer border bronzy brown, bounded internally by a

series of white dots; fringe bright rose-colour: secondaries

pale brown; fringe white, tipped with rose-colour: head and

thorax lemon-yellow, abdomen white. Primaries below pale

greyish brown, with whitish borders; base of costa and outer

half of fringe rose-colour ; secondaries white, fringe tipped

with pink ; pectus white ; legs and palpi rose-coloured exter-

nally ; venter greyish. Expanse 1 inch 2 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Eriopide.

123. Callopistria obscura, n. sp.

Allied to C. pteridis, but the ground-colour of the primaries

sepia-brown, more or less irrorated with tawny, the transverse

lines wider apart and bordered by sericeous grey (not rosy

lilacine), the veins whiter, the marginal spots narrower and

blackish ; secondaries rather paler than the primaries, with

whitish costal area and outer border ; body altogether duller

and greyer than in C. pteridis: primaries below grey, with

sandy whitish borders; secondaries sericeous whitish, with

greyish subapical patch or spot, discal line, and discocellular

spot ; body below sandy whitish. Expanse 1 inch 5 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely) ; Yokohama (Jonas).

Altogether darker and less red than C. pteridis.

124. Callopistria ethiops, n. sp.

Allied to C. exotica from Java, but the primaries almost

black, crossed by silvery white lines, the oblique white-edged

dash at the end of the cell tapering downwards to a point and

almost uniting with the interno-median band, which is ob-

lique, the band across the cell also well-marked and oblique,

so that the three markings together make ay; the white

apical dash represented by three decreasing oblique white

lines, the lowermost of which joins a S-shaped white figure

(replacing the lanceolate mark of C. exotica) ; outer border

narrow, black, edged with white: secondaries silvery whitish,

the veins, an indistinct abbreviated discal line, and a broad

diffused outer border greyish: body whitish, collar banded

with black ; base of tegule testaceous, anal tuft ochraceous.

Wings below silvery whitish; primaries with the discoidal

area, and two white-bordered discal streaks greyish; secon-

daries with the discocellulars and two apical streaks parallel

to the outer margin greyish brown; body whitish. Hxpanse

1 inch 1 line.

Yokohama (Jonas).

of Heterocera from Japan. 201

Walker confounded two distinct species from Java and 4

third from Canara under C. exotica. C. aethiops is close to

“¢ Plusia duplicilinea”’ from Borneo.

Placodidez.

ScEDOPLA, n. gen.

Nearly allied to Placodes, but differing in its distinctly pec-

tinated antenne, the shorter terminal joint of the palpi, and

the subcostal branches of secondaries emitted from a rather

long footstalk. Type S. regalis.

125. Scedopla regalis, n. sp.

Primaries with the basal two thirds dark brown, shot with

purple, external third of a dead golden or deep sandy yel-

lowish colour; a broad subcentral transverse band indicated

by marginal sinuated limiting lines of black ; a black litura

at the end of the cell; the disk slightly darker than the outer

border, its limit barely visible excepting at costa, sinuated ; a

submarginal series of minute black dots: secondaries stone-

colour ; costa white ; outer margin and fringe sandy whitish ;

a series of dusky marginal lituree: body brown, abdomen

greyish. Under surface sandy yellowish; wings with a grey

discal line; primaries greyish, excepting at the borders. Ex-

panse 1 inch 3 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Plusiide.

126. Plusia typinota, n. sp.

Allied to P. gamma, but the y-mark more elongated, three

other silvery characters, somewhat resembling J, J, K, but

with the J sloping backwards, across the costal and discoidal

areas; the margins of the central band rather silvery than

golden; outer border of secondaries and borders of all the

wings below ill-defined. Expanse 1 inch 9 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

127. Plusia jessica, n. sp.

Allied to P. nz, but the primaries darker and more sericeous;

instead of the central silvery markings a brassy y; the discal

line rather less irregular ; the edge of the outer border rather

more irregular, more uniform in tint ; a marginal series of pale-

edged triangular black spots instead of the marginal lines;

fringe almost rubbed away in the type; secondaries greyer,

without the abruptly darker border; thorax darker: wings

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 14

202 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Spectes

below greyer, without the paler border. Expanse 1 inch 4

lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

128. Plusia purissima, n. sp.

Allied to P. parilis, but larger, greyer, more sharply defined,

more sericeous ; primaries more acuminate ; the lower half of

the external area and a broad oblique streak from the apex

to the end of the cell silvery whitish ; transverse band much

more oblique, the limiting lines sharply defined, black, with

pinkish white external edge; the silvery y replaced by two

silvery spots; the submarginal line straight to the third median

branch and then gently angulated, terminating before the apex;

a marginal piceous and white streak, not reaching the ex-

ternal angle: secondaries pale brown, becoming darker towards

the outer margin; two ill-defined dusky discal lines: head,

collar, and thorax grey, with red-brown posterior transverse

bands; abdomen brownish grey, with a red-brown dorsal tuft

near the base. Under surface sericeous grey, with two parallel

discal darker lines ; secondaries with the basal half whitish.

Expanse 1 inch 5 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

129. Plusia mikadina, n. sp.

Nearly allied to P. concha, but rather paler, the golden e,-

shaped marking of primaries replaced by a larger brassy €3;

the outer or discal line more deeply sinuated, and the golden

patch bounded by it on the inner margin of double the width,

all the golden patches paler; the discoidal spots narrower and

more angular: wings below much paler, the discal streaks

wider apart, the outer one of primaries more strongly angu-

lated. Expanse 1 inch 7 lines.

Hakodaté ( Whitely) ; Yokohama (Jonas).

Calpide.

150. Calpe excavata, n. sp.

Form of C. thalictri, excepting that the inner margin of the

eos is more deeply excavated and more widely lobate.

ore nearly allied to C. rectistria, but the primaries of a richer

reddish brown, the golden patch from the external angle up-

wards is wanting, the double oblique line from the apex

separates more widely and becomes more irregular near the

inner margin, outer margin subangulated below the middle ;

the secondaries differ in their dull sandy-brown colour, with

broad diffused fuliginous external border; head and thorax

of Heterocera from Japan. 203

orange and red-brown, tinted with lilacine, as in C. rectistria;

abdomen fuliginous: primaries below rather redder; secon-

daries yellower, with black discocellular lunate marking, a

dusky discal streak ; discal area from the streak greyish, ex-

cepting at apex. HExpanse 2 inches 1 line.

Yokohama (Jonas).

C. rectistria is erroneously referred by Guénée to his genus

Oresia.

131. Calpe sodalis, n. sp.

Closely allied to C. thalictr’, but differing in its paler

colouring and the colour and shortness of the fringe, which is

uniform with the ground-colour of the wings instead of being

dusky ; primaries below with darker discal streaks, secon-

daries with the discocellular litura and discal streak paler.

Expanse 1 inch 10 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely) ; Yokohama (Jonas).

132. Deva splendida, n. sp.

Aspect of Oresia emarginata, but with the palpi longer,

more slender, and recurved over the head; in coloration more

like O. provocans ; primaries above greyish brown, speckled

here and there with black, streaked with shining lilac; central

area ferruginous, shading into ochraceous, and thus resembling

a bright cupreous lustre, with which the external area is shot;

a bisinuated basal litura,a &-shaped marking abovethe median

vein, a discal streak, the outer margin, the inner edge of the

outer border at apex, and the outer border of external angle

hlacine ; a line from below the cell and irregular discal line

silvery ; a bright silvery marking (somewhat resembling a v

in writing) at the base of the first median branch ; reniform

spot constricted, feebly outlined with lilacine: secondaries

shining brown, with two darker central streaks ; fringe tipped

with whitish: head and collar testaceous, banded with lilac ;

thorax darker, also banded with lilac; abdomen greyish,

whitish at base, with a lilac-tipped black and ochraceous dorsal

tuft. Under surface not unlike that of Oresia emarginata, but

the primaries and the disk of secondaries darker; the latter

wings also with a well-marked arched discal stripe; legs

greyish; tarsi blackish, banded with whitish. Expanse 1 inch

7 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely).

Gonopteride.

133. Gonitis commoda, n. sp.

Most nearly allied to G. fulvida, but larger and darker, the

14*

204 Prof. F. W. Hutton on the Structure

primaries redder, the lines darker and less strongly undulated,

the central line straight, the fringe less deeply white-tipped ;

secondaries with much less white on the fringe: wings below

darker, the lines darker, the discal line of secondaries carried

across the wing, as in G. combinans. Hxpanse 1 inch 10

lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

G. fulvida (Anomis fulvida of Guénée) is a native of Java

and the Andamans; we have also an example labelled

“ North India.” Walker confounded a larger Indian species

with it; but the latter is scarcely distinguishable from his own

Gonitis revocans from Australia.

[To be continued. ]

XXV.—Further Notes on the Structure of Peripatus nove-

zealandie. By F. W. Hurron, Professor of Zoology in

the University of Otago.

Durine the last three months I have dissected several more

specimens of Peripatus nove-zealandie, with the advantage

of Mr. Moseley’s paper before me ; and I hasten to communi-

cate the results, because I wish to correct several errors into

which I have fallen, and to confirm, as soon as possible, Mr.

Moseley’s statement of the existence of male individuals.

Integumentary System.—The last joint of the legs consists

of a short subcylindrical joint, on the upper and outer margin

of which are three large papille, and below two large curved

simple claws. On the fourth and fifth pairs of ambulatory

legs there is a circular opening in the centre of the inner side

of the first, or inner, tarsal rimg—that is, on the fifth ring from

the end. I am, however, doubtful whether the tarsi should

not be considered four-ringed only.

Muscular System.—My supposed “salivary bags’ (see

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1876, xviii. p. 364) are the same as

Mr. Moseley’s “ retractor muscles of the head” (see Phil.

Trans. vol, 164, pl. xxii. fig. 1,7m). Mr. Moseley is right in

ealling them muscles ; my mistake arose from believing the

tracheze on them to be internal instead of external. They are,

however, the flexor or adductor muscles of the teeth. The

pairs of teeth are not moved simultaneously. Generally their

movements are alternate, but often one pair is moved several

times, while the other is stationary ; there is also a movement

by which the two teeth of a pair are separated and approxi-

mated. The two pairs of teeth, when in use, sometimes

touch each other at the tips; but they never cross.

of Peripatus nove-zealandiz.. 205

Segmental Organs ?—These are what I previously called

salivary vessels.” They form a series, on either side, un-

connected with each other, but running into each leg, with

the exception of the first three pairs. ach consists of a

trunk coming out of the leg, which divides into two ; and these

branches, after several foldings, unite together, thus forming a

closed loop. They are filled with colourless granulated cells.

They were regarded by H. Milne-Edwards as nerves passing

into the legs (Ann. des Sci. Nat. 2° sér. xviii. p. 128*) ; but I

have carefully dissected some out, and find that they have no

connexion with the nerve-cord; and I also feel confident that

they do not open into the body-cavity, Consequently I do not

feel sure that they should be considered segmental organs.

Stime-ducts.—These pass from the oral papille along the

back to about the centre of the body ; they then turn forward

and throw off branches ; they then turn backward again, and

reach nearly to the posterior end of the body. They are pro-

bably homologous with the supposed segmental organs.

Respiratory System.—I think Mr. Moseley is right in con-

sidering my “spiral fibres” trachee; but then all resem-

blance to the trachez of insects vanishes. Professor Ray

Lankester is probably right in considering that the tracheal

systems in Pertpatus and in insects have been independently

developed (Quart. Journ. Microse. Sci., Oct. 1877, p. 439).

‘Circulatory System.—I have succeeded in dissecting out

the dorsal vessel; it contains a greenish-yellow fluid. Mr.

Moseley is certainly incorrect in denying the existence of the

lateral canals’ of Grube. It is satisfactory to me to think

that I had demonstrated them before I knew that they had

been previously described. Whether they belong or not to

the circulatory system may perhaps be considered an open

question ; but they contain, especially at the anterior end, a

yellowish-green fluid like that in the dorsal vessel.

Reproductive System.—By selecting small individuals I

have succeeded in finding two males. Mr. Moseley’s descrip-

tion of the male organs is very accurate; but they lié above

the alimentary canal, and not below it. With the exception

of these two specimens, all the rest were what I consider to be

hermaphrodite. They all had the organs described by me as

testes ; but in one individual the testis was absent on one ovi-

duct, but present on the other. In the early spring (September)

these contained no spermatozoa; but in November they were

abundant. During all this time the oviducts were crowded with

* It is astonishing what a very full and accurate knowledge of the

anatomy of this animal M. Milne-Edwards obtained by the dissection of

one badly preserved specimen.

206 Mr, R. Etheridge and Dr. H. A. Nicholson

embryos, which would prevent any spermatozoa finding their

way up from the vulva. ‘This and the fact that the embryos

in an oviduct are always (at least in my experience) in dif-

ferent states of development, convince me that the organs in

question are testes, and not receptacula seminis, which is also

contradicted by their cellular structure. The oviduct proceeds

from the posterior end of the ovary, and not from the anterior

end as shown in Mr. Moseley’s figure. It also lies above the

intestine, and not below it.

My observations of the development of this animal are not

yet sufficiently extended for publication ; but up to the present

I have seen nothing to make me alter my views or accept those

of Mr. Moseley.

Dunedin, Dec. 16, 1877.

XXVI.—On the Genus Paleeacis, and the Species occurring tn

British Carboniferous Rocks. By R. Erueripcs, jun.,

F.G.S., and H. ALLEyNe Nicuorson, M.D., D.Sc., &e.

[Plate XII.]

1. History of the Genus and Species.

In 1836 the late Prof. Phillips, F.R.S., described a peculiar

and anomalous coral, to which he gave the name of Hydno-

pora ? cyclostoma* ; but, beyond the few words which form his

diagnosis, he offered no remarks. It is needless to say that

the coral in question has no affinity with the genus Hydno-

pora, a fact which Phillips himself appears in some degree

to have surmised. Following in the footsteps of Phillips,

M‘Coy, in 1844, described his Astreopora antiqguat, and

pointed out its close relationship with Hydnopora? cyclostoma,

Phill.; indeed he considered the two might be congeneric,

although specifically distinct, and he further indicated that

the name Astrwopora was more appropriate than Hydnopora.

The same author in 1849, in a paper, ‘‘On some new Genera

and Species of Paleozoic Corals and Foraminifera’, gave

Hook Point as the locality of his species.

Messrs. Milne-Edwards and Jules Haime, in their magni-

ficent work ‘ Polypiers Fossiles des Terrains Paléozoiques,’

refer H.? cyclostoma, Phill., and Astraopora antiqua, M‘Coy,

with some doubt, to their genus Propora §, with the remark

* Geol. Yorkshire, ii. p. 202, pl. 2. figs. 9 and 10.

+ Synop. Carb. Foss. Ireland, p. 191, pl. 26. fig. 9.

} ‘Annals,’ 2nd ser. vol. iii. p. 183. § Pp. 224, 225.

on the Genus Paleacis. 207

“ne parait pas en différer”’ (¢. e. the two species). However,

in their ‘Monograph of the British Carboniferous Corals ’*,

all doubt on the subject appears to have left their minds; for

they there consider the two as identical, under the one name

Propora? cyclostoma. So far as we have been able to ascer~

tain, no further effort towards the elucidation of these fossils

was made for some time; but in 1860 Milne-Edwards de-

scribed, in the third volume of the ‘ Histoire Naturelle des

Coralliaires’t, a genus established by Jules Haime shortly

before his death, but never described by him, under the name

of Paleacis, containing a single species, P. cunetformis}, from

the Carboniferous rocks of Spergen Hill, Indiana. The genus

is thus described: —‘ Polypary free but composite, rounded and

very compressed at its base. Calices disposed, one at the

summit, and the others in pairs upon the two lateral margins.

Coenenchyma finely vermicular.”’ It is provisionally assigned

to the Madreporide, subfamily Turbinarine. The chief points

brought out in the specific description are the cuneiform

nature of the corallum, the presence of from two to five calices,

each occupied by thirty or forty fine unequal striz represent-

ing the septa, two of which are both described and figured as

being stronger than the others.

About the same time Messrs. Meek and Worthen had under

observation similar fossils, to which, in a paper entitled “ De-

scriptions of new Carboniferous Fossils from Illinois and other

Western States ’§, they applied the name of Sphenopoterium,

and considered them to be corals allied to Cyathoseris, Kdw.

& H.; they, however, remark that they differ in having the

outer wall perforated, and in the absence of distinct septa, as

well as in the peculiar wedge-like form of the base of the coral-

lum, which is usually, if not always, free instead of being at-

tached. In their generic description of Sphenopotertwm, Meek

and Worthen state that the cells are large and inseparable, and

increase by lateral and interstitial development ; there are no

tabule, columella, or well-developed rays ; but the walls are

merely marked by distinct strie, and pierced by numerous

pores which appear to terminate in the porous substance of

the corallum. ‘They describe four species—S. obtuswm (the

type), S. compressum, S. enorme, and S. cuneatum. It stands

to reason, from their remarks and comparison with Cyatho-

serts, that they considered Sphenopoteriwm to be a member of

the Madreporaria Aporosa, family Fungide.

= 2162, i Bae.

{ Loe. ct. pl. E. 1. f. 2.

§ Proc. Acad. Nat. Sciences Philadelphia for 1860, pp. 447, 448.

208 Mr. R. Etheridge and Dr. H. A. Nicholson

In 1866 the same authors redescribed * their genus Spheno-

potertum, abandoned its Actinozoal affinities, and, upon the

authority of Prof. A. E. Verrill, referred it to the sponges as

remotely allied to some of the Jurassic forms. The obscure

striz seen on the interior of the “cups” of their specimens

are again mentioned ; but their septal character is abandoned.

To the already known species they here added a new variety,

S. enorme, var. depressum }.

We now arrive at a most important point in the history of

Paleacis and Sphenopoterium. In the same year (1866) Von

Seebach of Gottingen published, in the ‘Nachrichten der

kéniglichen Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Gottingen ’

for 1866 }, a paper, ‘‘ Die Zoantharia perforata der paliozo-

ischen Periode,” in which he demonstrated, amongst other

things, the identity of the two genera, and adopted Haime’s

name§. This excellent paper was republished with figures in

the ‘ Zeitschrift der deutschen geologischen Gesellschaft’ for

1866 ||. Von Seebach considered, from his own researches,

that Paleacis (= Sphenopoterium) was a true Zoantharian of

the section Madreporaria Perforata, thus being in accord with

Milne-Edwards, but differing from the first opinion of Meek

and Worthen. Again, he demonstrated the identity of Pale-

acis cunetformis, Kdw. & H., with P. (Sphenopoterium) cunea-

tum, M.& W., and concluded his paper with a diagnosis of alk

the American species, describing two additional ones—P.

eymba, v. Seebach, and P. wmbonata, v. Seebach J. The

latter were figured in the ‘ Zeitschrift’ for 1866 **,

Yet another contribution bearing on this subject appeared

in 1866. Herr Ludwig published a very remarkable paper in

the ‘ Paleontographica tT, entitled “Corallen aus paliolithis-

chen Formationen,” apparently having for its chief object

the complication of synonymy by the introduction of a cloud

of unusually long and unnecessary names. He described as

Ptychochartocyathus laxus t{ a form which Prof. de Koninck,

later on, placed as a synonym of Paleacis cyclostoma, Phill.

The description appears to bear out this view, although the

figure, to-our minds, is less satisfactory. Ludwig, however,

noticed a character very well marked in all our Scotch exam-

ples of Paleacis—the concentrically wrinkled or ridged base ;

and he further noticed the papilla-like form of the so-called

* llinois Geol. Survey Report, vol. ii. p. 145

+ Loe. cit. p. 146, { Pp. 235-243, § P. 240,

|| Vol. xvili. pp. 304-310, t. 4.

4] Nachrichten, pp. 241, 242. ** Pl. 4. figs. 3, 4.

Tt Vol. xiv. 1865-66, pp. 138-244,

tt P. 3381, t. 69. fig. 2, a.

on the Genus Paleeacis. 209

septal strie, a feature which will be entered on more fully

in our own remarks on this genus.

Another excellent paper on Paleacis was that by Dr. Kunth,

“ Korallen des schlesischen Kohlenkalkes ”’*.

Dr. Kunth agreed with Von Seebach as to the identity of

Paleacis and Sphenopoterium ; but he believed the determina-

tion of the systematic position to be a matter of some difficulty,

although he ultimately agrees with Edwards and Von Seebach

as to its being a member of the Madreporide, but differs from

them as to the subfamily to which the genus should be re-

ferred. He very justly observes that, from the figures given

by various authors, there appears to be no proper coenenchyma

in Paleacis, and would place it in the subfamily Eupsammine,

having its nearest ally in Astroides ; indeed, he adds, its re-

semblance to A. calycularts, Pallas, is very great, only the

latter has a columella and more strongly developed septa.

By far the most important point brought forward by Kunth

was the determination of mural pores, visible when the surface

was worn, with an irregular direction and disposition, and

corresponding to canals which traverse in every direction the

substance of the skeleton, giving to it a spongy appearance,

and placing the various cups in connexion with one another f.

Dr. Kunth gave a detailed description and figure of Ptycho-

chartocyathus lacus, Ludw., which he considered to be a

species of Palwacis, from its general structure, external granu-

lated surface, basal attachment, and the cup-like openings with

circular mouths, and separated from one another by shallow

depressions, &c. The determination of species in Paleacis,

Kunth considers to be a difficult matter, from the few striking

characters presented by the specimens. The external form is

so open to modification from age, position, and condition of

life, that little reliance can be placed on this. He confirmed

von Seebach’s union of the two species, P. cunetformis, Kd. &

H., and P. cuneata, M. & W., and further expressed his

opinion that von Seebach’s own species, P. cymba and P.

umbonata, and P. obtusa, M. & W., may, in reality, represent

only one species §, an opinion in which we quite concur.

Prof. L. G. de Koninck has devoted much attention to this

genus; for in his ‘Nouvelles Recherches sur les Animaux

Fossiles du Terrain Carbonifére de la Belgique ’||, a lengthened

description is given, accompanied by copious notes on its

history and structure. The observations of Kunth on the

* Zeit, deutsch. geol. Gesellsch. xxi. pp. 1838-220.

+ Loe. cit. p. 187. { Loe. cit. pp. 185, 186.

§ Op. cit. p. 188.

|| 1** partie, pp. 154-161 (Bruxelles, 1872, 4to).

210 Mr. R. Etheridge and Dr. H. A. Nicholson

structure and position of the pores perforating the substance

of Palceacis are confirmed. A point upon which Dr. Kunth

appears to have had some doubt, the presence or absence of a

columella, is also set at rest by De Koninck, who proved the

entire absence of this structure. Milne-Edwards, in his de-

scription of P. cunetiformis, mentions the presence of two large

septa, which Prof. de Koninck does not appear to have met

with in the specimens he had examined. He also agreed with

Dr. Kunth that, contrary to the opinion of Haime, there is no

independent ccenenchyma in Paleacis; and, in consequence, the

enus was removed to the Hupsammine, after Kunth; but,

unlike the latter, De Koninck would not place it near Astroides,

but probably between Cenopsammia and Stereopsammia, the

latter, like Palwacis, being devoid of a columella.

Including in this genus the two forms mentioned in the

first two paragraphs of this paper (Hydnopora? cyclostoma,

Phill., and <Astreopora antiqua, M‘Coy), Prof. de Koninck

would reduce the number of known species to four, viz. :—

1. Paleacis cunetformis, J. Haime.

= Sphenopoterium cuneatum, M. & W.

2. Paleacis (Sphenopoterium) compressa, M. & W.

3. Paleacis (Sphenopoterium) obtusa, M. & W.

= Paleacis cymba, v. Seebach ; Paleacis umbonata, v. Seebach.

4, Paleacis cyclostoma, Phillips.

= Sphenopoterium enorme, M. & W.; Ptychochartocyathus laxus, Ludw. ;

Astreopora antigua, M‘Coy.

In 1873 one of the present writers (R. E., jun.) published

a few remarks on the occurrence of this genus in Scotch Car-

boniferous beds, in the ‘ Memoirs of the Geol. Survey of

Scotland’ *. It was shown that specimens of Paleacis cyclo-

stoma, Phill., from Mid-Lothian usually possessed from five to

nine cups ; an entire absence of columella was remarked upon,

and some other minor points were noticed fT.

One of the latest notices of Paleacis, of which we have any

knowledge, is a short account of the discovery of the typical

species of the genus in Britain—P. cunetformis, J. Haime

(=P. (Sph.) cuneata, M. & W.)—by Mr. Spencer G. Perce-

* Explanation to sheet 23 (1-inch, Scotland), p. 96.

+ In these remarks I published what I then believed to be a new

variety of Paleacis compressa, M. & W., under the name of trregularis,

I now find I was much mistaken in the affinities of the bodies so called,

ae oe desirous of withdrawing the name from paleontological science.—

on the Genus Paleacis. 211

val*, who obtained examples at Combe Down, near Bristol,

from the Encrinital limestone, forming the upper bed of the

Lower-Limestone shales.

Lastly, Prof. Ferdinand Roemer, in the explanation accom-

panying pl. xxix. of his ‘Lethza Palozoica’ (the text of which

is not yet published), has a few remarks upon this subject.

He expresses the opinion that Paleacis, EK. & H., though

identical with Sphenopotertwm, Meek and Worthen, is not

generically so with the group to which Hydnopora cyclostoma,

Phill., belongs. The only difference that he mentions is that

the corallum of the true Paleacis is regular and free, with a

ointed base, while that of the second group is irregular and

is attached to foreign bodies. As this second group cannot,

of course, be referred to Hydnopora, Dr. Roemer retains for it

the ungainly appellation of Ptychochartocyathus, Ludwig.

We cannot, however, regard the evidence at present brought

forward as sufficient to generically separate the two groups

above referred to ; for, omitting many weighty reasons for our

opinion, to be more fully entered into further on, we would

simply point out that Meek and Worthen were themselves in

doubt whether some, at least, of their forms were free or at-

tached. Dr. Roemer also mentions that a comparison of

authentic specimens of both forms has satisfied him that

Paleacis laxa, Kunth, is the same organism*as Hydnopora

eyclostoma, Phill.

Having given a history of this peculiar genus and its

species as briefly as possible, it may not be out of place to

recapitulate in a few words the order in which the various

points in its structure were made out. Beyond briefly descri-

bing their respective forms, Phillips and M‘Coy can be said to

have contributed little towards the structural details of this

interesting group, although Phillips certainly figured dis-

tinctly the vermicular nature of the external portions of the

skeleton. We find that Milne-Edwards noticed the cuneiform

appearance of the type species (a character which, by-the-

by, is more or less traceable throughout almost all the species),

the presence of what he considered to be numerous septa (of

which two were thought to have been larger and more pro-

nounced thanthe others), the supposed vermicular coenenchyma,

and the free habit. By Edwards Paleacis was referred to the

Madreporaria Perforata. Almost simultaneously Meek and

Worthen published their Sphenopoterium; and, bearing in

mind their comparison of it with Cyathoseris, they must have

concluded it be one of the Madreporaria Aporosa. They were

* Geol. Mag. dec. 2, vol. iii. p. 267.

212 Mr. R. Etheridge and Dr. H. A. Nicholson

the first to notice the important character of the perforated

walls; and they also remarked on the supposed septal system,

with the absence of tabule and a columella. The next step,

the double demonstration by Von Seebach of the identity

of Paleacis and Sphenopotertwm, on the one hand, and of the

species P. cunetformis, J. Haime, with S. cuneatum, M. & W.,

was a most important one. He also confirmed Milne-Kd-

wards’s reference of Palwacis to the Madreporaria Perforata.

Admitting the Ptychochartocyathus laxus, Ludwig, to be a

Paleacis, we find that Ludwig improved our knowledge of

the supposed septal characters, and noted the presence of what

he termed a basal concentric epitheca. Dr. Kunth confirmed

the presence of the mural pores originally noticed by Meek

and Worthen, and further showed that these pores led into a

series of canals traversing the substance of the corallum, and

placing the cups in connexion with one another. He likewise

disputed the presence of any true ccenenchyma as supposed by

Milne-Edwards, and left the matter of a columella an open

question. Lastly, Prof. de Koninck confirmed Kunth’s re-

marks on the mural pores of Paleacis, determined the absence

of a columella, and supported Kunth’s reference to the Eu-

psammide. We also believe De Koninck was the first to refer

Hydnopora? cyclostoma and Astreopora antiqua to the genus

Paleacis. ,

2. Description of, and Observations on, the Genus.

Genus Patmacis (J. Haime), M.-Edw. 1860.

Hydnopora, Phillips, Geol. York. 1836, ii. p. 202.

Astreopora, M‘Coy, Synop. Carb. Foss. Ireland, 1844, p. 191; Morris,

Cat. Brit. Foss, 1854, 2nd ed. p. 47.

Paleacis (J. Haime), M.-Edw. Hist. Nat. Corall. 1860, iii. p. 171.

Sphenopoterium, Meek and Worthen, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad.

(for October 1860), p. 447; iid. Illinois Geol. Surv. Rep. 1866, ii.

p. 145, i :

Paleacis, Von Seebach, Nachr. d. k. Gesell. d. Wissensch. zu Gott. 1866,

p- 240; id. Zeitsch. d. deutschen geol. Gesell. xviii. 1866, p. 308.

? Ptychochartocyathus, Ludwig, Paleeontographica, 1866, xiv. pp. 189,

231

Paleacis, Kunth, Zeitsch. d. deutschen geol. Gesell. 1869, xxi. pp. 186,

187 ; De Koninck, Nouv. Rech. Anim. Foss. Terr. Carb. Belgique,

1872, pt. 1, p. 154.

Gen. char. Skeleton more or less cuneate or irregularly

turbinate in form, depressed, or with age becoming irregular,

adhering, on the one hand, by the whole or part only of a

concentrically wrinkled base, or, on the other, by a small

peduncular extension of the skeleton. Cups variable in num-

ber, one to twelve and perhaps more, cell-like, opening up-

on the Genus Paleeacis. 213

wards or laterally and sometimes obliquely, with circular

or oval crenulate margins, not all on the same plane, sepa-

rated from one another by shallow depressions. Base, in

depressed forms, flat or somewhat concave ; in cuneate or tur-

binate examples it is laterally compressed or prolonged down-

wards in the form of a small peduncle, usually concentrically

ridged. Parts of the skeleton between the cups, and also the

lower surface more or less, are covered with vermicular ridges

or granules, and are often pierced by rounded or elongated

pores of considerable size. Interior of the cups marked with

a variable number of granules arranged in a more or less

radiating manner, and pierced near their upper portions by

similar apertures to those just mentioned. Structure, to the

naked eye, when the skeleton is fractured, spongy. Micro-

structure, consists of a calcareous tissue, pierced, more or less

extensively, by a system of microscopic tubuli, in parts com-

pact, in others more or less vesicular or trabecular.

Obs. With the aid afforded by a particularly fine collection

of what appears to be the commonest British species, P. eyclo-

stoma, Phill., in conjunction with the characters of the other

published species, we have been able to extend the generic

diagnosis of Paleacis. So far as our researches have at

present gone, we are acquainted with at least three well-

defined species of Paleacis in British Carboniferous rocks ; and

it is upon the structure of these that our knowledge of the

genus is based.

The surface in all the species of Paleacis seems to be more

or less granular, or covered with vermicular strie or ridges ;

but the precise appearance varies in different cases. In P.

cuneiformis (Pl. XII. figs. 9-12) the surface is covered with

numerous irregularly-curved, subparallel, sometimes bifur-

cating, vermicular ridges, placed about their own diameter

apart. We have not satisfied ourselves that any large pores

can be detected on the surface of examples of this species ; but

the summits of the ridges above alluded to appear to carry

lines of small pores, now filled with calcite, and the entire

substance of the skeleton has a fine spongy aspect. This ap-

pearance, however, is more noticeable in slightly rubbed spe-

cimens. In P. obtusa the surface-characters are the same as

in P. cunetiformis. In P. cyclostoma the surface is covered

with innumerable granules, small tubercles, and vermicular

ridges, which do not show the same-subparallel arrangement

as in the two preceding species, but are disposed irregularly,

or sometimes with a tendency to form lines. In many cases

the surface of the skeleton between the cups is distinctly per-

forated with large rounded or oval pores, leading into the

214 Mr. R. Etheridge and Dr. H. A. Nicholson

interior; and similar pores are very often found in a very well-

marked form on the lower surface of the colony. Though

abundant on the margins of the cups, the pores seldom extend

into the interior of these depressions; and the bottom of the

cups does not appear to be ever perforated by pores. In

other specimens, again, the surface appears to be destitute of

the large pores just mentioned; but in all alike the general

surface, as examined under the microscope, shows a spongy

and minutely porous aspect, though it is difficult to determine

positively whether this be really due to the presence of ex-

tremely fine pores or not.

In the interior of the cups the tubercles and vermicular

ridges often have a distinctly linear arrangement, radiating

from the centre of the cup, and form the so-called “ septa.”

They certainly present a close resemblance to the septal striz

of many forms of Cystiphyllum, and a less close one to those

of Protarea; and if Paleacis is a true coral, they doubtless

represent the septa. On the other hand they present an

equally close resemblance to the surface-tubercles and vermi-

cular ridges (also often in parts radiate) of various Stromato-

poroids ; so that little weight can be attached to this as de-

ciding their true nature. In his figure of P. cunetformis

(Hist. Nat. des Cor. vol. i. pl. E.1. f. 26) Milne-Edwards

figures a principal pair of septa, placed opposite each other, as

a longitudinal ridge dividing each cup into two halves. In his

description of the species, however, he speaks of these septa

with much doubt and hesitation, stating that the cups “‘parais-

sent avoir été partagés par deux grands cloisons, dont on ne

voit plus que des traces fort obscures dans la direction de l’axe

vertical du polypier.”” Prof. de Koninck appears to have

regarded the pair of principal septa with much suspicion ; and

we can safely assert that they are not present in any example

examined by us. ‘The tubercles or papille forming these so-

called septal strie vary in size in the same individual, and

even in the same line or septum. In all cases those occu-

pying the floor of the cups are irregularly scattered, and do

not appear to be arranged in any definite manner.

Micro-structure.—The intimate structure of Palwacis does

not hitherto appear to have been investigated by means of

thin sections prepared for the microscope. Our researches in

this direction have been confined chiefly to P. cyclostoma

(Pl. XII. figs. 7, 8), of which our material was most abun-

dant, though we have also made a few sections of P. cuned-

formis (Pl. XII. fig. 14). In the former of these two species

the minute structure of the organism, as displayed by this

method of examination, is as follows (Pl. XII. figs. 7, 8) :—

on the Genus Paleacis. 215

Whether the sections are taken across the cups in a direction

perpendicular to their long axes, or corresponding with these,

the appearances presented are the same. In both cases the

calcareous tissue of the skeleton appears to be penetrated by

minute microscopic tubuli, which run at right angles to the

cups, and which are much more largely developed and more

conspicuous in some parts than in others. The layer which

forms the immediate floor and walls of the cups is not lacunar

or trabecular, but is traversed by innumerable minute tubules

(Pl, XII. figs. 7,8, 6), which are directed outwards in a series

of parallel bands, the tubules of each band having a more or

less penniform disposition with regard to a central tubule.

These tubules doubtless open on the floor of the cup ; but their

apertures are too minute to admit of recognition in any of our

specimens. Apart from the layer which lines the cups, the

rest of the skeleton is made up of a more or less open cellular

or trabecular tissue (Pl. XII. figs. 7, 8, c), consisting of irre-

gular lacune of various sizes, separated by calcareous parti-

tions, but doubtless more or less freely communicating with

one another. By the opening of these lacune upon the

general surface are formed the large pores which are so com-

monly seen on the lower aspect of these fossils, and less often

upon the upper surface as well. ‘The calcareous partitions

between these lacune are likewise minutely tubulated, though

this structure is not nearly so well developed or so conspicuous

as in the floor of the calices; and the tubules run directly

across the partitions and thus place contiguous lacune in

communication. Of P. cunetformis our knowledge is not so

complete ; but the structure seems to be essentially the same

(Pl. XII. fig. 14). The calcareous tissue of the skeleton is

traversed by microscopic tubuli; but the general texture is

more compact, and the trabecular tissue is but slightly deve-

loped, such lacune as are present being remote and separated

by a considerable thickness of compact tissue. In some cases,

also, there proceed from the depressions between the surface-

ridges larger canals, which become gradually smaller as they

pass inwards, and which do not appear to actually reach the

interior of the cups.

A ffinities.—Paleacis, as we have mentioned, has been gene-

rally regarded as a “ perforate’? coral; but the microscopic

structure would completely bear out Prof. Verrill’s view that

it cannot be referred to the Actinozoa. It seems, on the con-

trary, to exhibit a minute structure which would place it

somewhere amongst the Protozoa (including the sponges in

this subkingdom), and which certainly cannot be paralleled

among any of the true corals. The general reticulated struc-

216 Mr. R. Etheridge and Dr. H. A. Nicholson

ture of the greater part of the skeleton, and the vermicular

granulation and ridging of the surface, give Paleacis a striking

resemblance to some forms of the Stromatoporoids ; but none

of the latter has as yet been shown to possess a minutely

tubulated skeleton, and the cups of the former are likewise a

unique feature in the genus. On the other hand, the micro-

scopic tubulation of the skeleton reminds one to some extent

of that of some of the Foraminifera.

If we were to take Meek and Worthen’s view, founded

upon that of Prof. Verrill, that Paleacis is a sponge, we

should have to refer the genus to the Calcispongie, since the

original constitution of the skeleton is undoubtedly calcareous.

Its general structure, however, does not resemble that of any

known calcareous sponge, so far as we are aware; and the

tubulation of the skeleton also removes it from the Spongida.

In fact, if we regard Paleacis as referrable to the Calci-

spongix, it must, like the Stromatoporoids, be placed in a

special division, since its skeleton is unquestionably reticulate

and vermiculate, and no traces of sptcules can be detected in

it. Indeed, were it not for the minute tubulation of the ske-

leton and the presence of the cups, it would be difficult to lay

down any decisive characters by which Faleacts could be

separated from the Stromatoporoidea.

Our friend Mr. H. B. Brady, F.R.S., has been kind enough

to examine a few specimens and sections of this interesting

organism ; and in his opinion there is nothing of a Foramini-

feral character to be deduced from them; but, on the contrary,

he appears to regard Paleacis as more probably allied to the

Sponges. For our own part, whatever may be the ultimate

result of a further investigation of this genus, we can simply

state that we do not believe in its coral-affinities, and that

there are many facts which tend to bear out the later view

entertained by Meek and Worthen, suggested to them by Prof.

A. E. Verrill, that Paleacis (= Sphenopoteriwm) is ‘a sponge.

The opinion of Mr. H. B. Brady is so decided that ‘we’ are

forced to abandon any thought of Foraminiferal affinities;

and we can, for our own part, only say that, if not a sponge,

we do not know where it can be placed. So many eminent

authorities have regarded Paleacis as a coral, that we desire to

treat their opinions with all due respect ; but the total absence

of any trace of a columella, or septa (for the so-called “ septal

strie ’’ can in no way be regarded as such), and the woceattag

micro-structure compel us to dissent from this view of the

case. We conceive that our opinion is borne out by the evi-

dent discrepancies which exist in the eal ie and remarks

of previous writers on the subject, and also in the want of

on the Genus Paleacis. 217

unanimity amongst them as to the systematic position of

Paleacis amongst corals. There is, however, one fact we

must not omit to refer to. It was pointed out by Meek and

Worthen that increase took place by interstitial development ;

we find that a kind of fission occurs in some of the cups of

P. cyclostoma (Pl. XII. fig. 16); and we are inclined to

regard this as one of the few characters present indicating any

- alliance with the Actinozoa.

We distinctly wish it to be understood, in closing this part

of our remarks, that we by no means finally assert Palwacis

to be a sponge, although we consider it has a much closer

alliance with the latter than with the Actinozoa, so far as

the researches we have at present undertaken enable us to

judge.

With regard to the name this organism should bear, Von

Seebach, Kunth, and De Koninck have all adopted Paleacis

in preference to Sphenopoterium, on account, as they state, of

the previous publication of the former. The third volume of

the ‘ Hist. Nat. des Coralliaires’ bears date of publication

1860, whilst that portion of the ‘Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. of

Philad.’ containing the description of Sphenopotertum bears at

the foot of certain of the pages the date “October, 1860.” If

this represents the date of publication, as we believe it does,

Meek and Worthen’s name may have as good a claim for

recognition as Haime’s; and if the Protozoal character of the

fossils known by these names come ultimately to be adopted,

it will become a question if we should not rather make use of

Sphenopoterium as the generic term.

Addendum.—The genus Conoptertum, Winchell, is evidently

very closely allied to Palwacis. We are, however, not suffi-

ciently acquainted with it to enter into details on the subject.

Conopterium was described by Prof. A. Winchell, in the Aca-

demy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia (‘ Proceedings,’ 1865,

p- 110), as a coral, and its resemblance to Sphenopoterium,

M. & W., pointed out.

3. Description of the British Species.

Paleacis cuneiformis (J. Haime), M.-Edw.

Paleacis cuneiformis (J. Haime), M.-Edw. Hist. Nat. Corall. 1860, iii.

p- 171, Atlas, pl. E 1. f. 3.

Sphenopoterium cuneatum, Meek and Worthen, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.

Philad. for Oct. 1860, p. 448; id. Illinois Geol. Surv. Rep. 1866, ii.

p. 262, pl. 19. f. 1, a-d. ;

Paleacis cuneiformis, Von Seebach, Nachr. k, Gesellsch. Wissensch. zu

Gott. for 1866, p. 241 ; id. Zeitschr. deutsch. geol.Gesellsch. 1866, xviii.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 15

218 Mr. R. Etheridge and Dr. H. A. Nicholson ~

. 808; De Koninck, Nouv. Rech. Anim, Foss. Terr. Carb. Belgique,

872, 1¢ pt.p. 157 (without description) ; Perceval, Geol. Mag. 1876,

dec. 2, iil. p. 267, (cut) p. 268.

Spec. char. Colony compressed, cuneate, longer than wide

in the adult condition, more nearly pentagonal or hexagonal

in the young state. Base more compressed than any other

portion of the colony, sharp, but with rounded angles. Cups

from two to five, but varying in number according to age,

deep, conical, situated on the lateral margins and apex of the

colony, and directed obliquely outwards and upwards ; those

at the apex are round or oval, those on the lateral margins

are more or less elliptical. The granular ridges on the inte-

rior walls of the cups are slight and numerous. Perforations

of the walls numerous and distinct. Surface marked with a

multitude of fine, flexuous, broken, closely arranged, bifurcating

vermicular ridges, directed obliquely inwards and downwards

from the cup-mouths towards the base, where they become

subparallel, and, from the presence of exceedingly minute and

microscopic granules, assume a crenulate appearance.

Obs. For the discovery of this, the type species of the

genus, in British Carboniferous rocks, we are indebted to Mr.

Spencer G. Perceval, of Henbury, near Bristol. We have

examined examples of this species in which the cups have

been as few as two and as many as five, with intermediate

forms bearing three and four respectively. When in its

youngest state the colony is decidedly of a more or less trian-

gular outline (Pl. XII. figs. 11, 12), gradually assuming a

pentagonal and perhaps hexagonal form; and it is not until

there are at least four cups present that the typical elongated

cuneate form is assumed. Both Milne-Edwards and Messrs. ,

Meek and Worthen mention the presence of two large “septa,”

the former author stating them to occur in addition to the

regular series of between thirty and forty smaller “ septa.”

The examples of this species with which we have worked

have not been in such a state of preservation as to permit us

to distinguish these above the remains of the other granular

ridges. P. cunetformis may be easily distinguished by its

elongate compressed form (Pl. XII. figs. 9, 10), the lateral

position of some of the cups, and its peculiar vermicular crenu-

late surface. From P. cyclostoma it may be at once known

by the entire absence of the very characteristic basal con-

centric ridges of that species; and we are quite in accord

with Von Seebach, Kunth, and De Koninck as to the identity

of the P. cuneiformis of Haime and Edwards with the

Sphenopoterium cuneatum, Meek and Worthen.

Under the observations on the genus we have given some

on the Genus Paleacis. 219

remarks on the minute external and internal structure, which

need not be repeated here.

Locality and Horizon. Combe Hill, Henbury, near Bristol,

in the upper beds of the Lower-Limestone Shales. Coed'y'gof

quarry, near Wenvoe, by Cardiff, S. Wales.

Collector. My. Spencer G. Perceval: his Cabinet. .

Other Localities. Spergen Hill, Indiana, U.S., in the St.-

Louis Group of the Lower Carboniferous (Milne-Edwards,

and Meek and Worthen).

Paleacis obtusa, Meek and Worthen.

Sphenopoterium obtusum, Meek and Worthen, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.

Philad. for October, 1860, p. 448; id. Hlinois Geol. Sury. Rep. 1866,

ii. p. 233, pl. 17. f. 2, a-e.

PSphenopoterium compressum, Meek and Worthen, Proc. Acad. Nat.

Sci. Philad. for October, 1860, p. 448; id. Illinois Geol. Surv. Rep.

1866, ii. p. 254, pl. 17. f. 1, a-c.

Paleacis obtusa, P. cymba, et P. umbonata, Von Seebach, Nachr. k.

Gesell. Wissensch. zu Gott. 1866, pp. 241, 242.

Paleacis obtusa, Von Seebach, Zeitschr. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch. 1866,

xviii. p. 308.

Paleacis cymba, Von Seebach, Zeitschr. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch. 1866,

p- 309, pl. 4. f. 4, a, d.

Paleacis umbonata, Von Seebach, Zeitschr. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch.

1866, p. 309, pl. 4. f. 3, a, b.

Paleacis obtusa, Kunth, Zeitschr. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch. 1869, xxi.

p. 188; De Koninck, 1872, Nouv. Rech. Anim. Foss, Terr. Carb. Bel-

gique, le pt. p. 158.

Spec. char. Colony “short, abruptly cuneate below, wider

than high ; basal edge slightly sinuous in the middle; flat-

tened sides expanding rapidly upwards from the obtuse basal

carina. Cells from four to about nine, comparatively large,

and of moderate depth, conical, and, where not more than four

or five, rounded and separated by thick interstices, but be-

coming angular, with thinner intervening partitions, where

more crowded. Surface-strie fine, irregular, and showing a

tendency to converge towards the middle of the base, anasto-

mosing in such a manner as to form a kind of shagreen-like

style of ornament.”

Obs. This species appears to have been first indicated as a

British one by Prof. de Koninck *; and as we have only seen

immature and indifferent examples, or what we believe to be

such, in Mr. Perceval’s cabinet, we have given Messrs. Meek

and Worthen’s diagnosis in preference to drawing up one of

our own, which, at the best, could not but have been imper-

fect. In placing the P. cymba and P. umbonata of Von

Seebach as synonyms of P. obtusa, we are in perfect accord

* Nouvelles Rech. 1° pt. p. 158,

15%

220 Mr. R. Etheridge and Dr. H. A. Nicholson

with Prof. de Koninck; but we think that one of these names,

P. cymba, may with all propriety be retained as a good varie-

tal designation for the young conditions of the species, one

state of which, we believe, Von Seebach’s figure to repre-

sent*, whilst we shall describe a still more juvenile form imme-

diately. Amongst the specimens forwarded to us by Mr.

Perceval are three examples, two of which have evidently

undergone a good deal of lateral compression; otherwise the

form, of one of them at least, we believe, would have approxi-

mated to the figure of P. cymba, Von Seebach—transversely

elongated in relation to the breadth, sharp below, and bearing

well-marked terminal cells or cups, as in the figure above

quoted. This specimen bears traces of four cups; but the

other two individuals, it is quite clear, only had two, and,

according to our view, represent the youngest state of the

species. One of these little specimens (PI. XII. fig. 15) has

the cuneate form below, the slightly sinuous basal edge, the

flattened sides expanding upwards, and the transversely elon-

gated calices seen in some of the figured examples of P. obtusa,

var. cymba. hat it would be very unlikely to develop into

such a form as P. cunetformis is apparent when compared

with the figures we give of. the young state of that species

(Pl. XII. figs, 11, 12); whilst quite the same remark

applies to the young condition of P. cyclostoma, with its in-

variably expanded base of attachment. Assuming, therefore,

that our figure and Von Seebach’s figs. 4, 4a], represent

various stages in the growth of P. obtusa, it is for such forms

that we would retain the varietal name P. cymba, whilst

Meek and Worthen’s figures t, and Von Seebach’s figures of

his P. umbonata §, will represent the mature colony, so far as

it is at present known to us.

Paleacis obtusa may at once be distinguished from the other

species of the genus :—from P. cunecformis, H. & Edw., by

its wide cuneate form, obtuse. basal carina, with the sides at

first flattened, then gradually expanding upwards, and the

extended upper surface; from P. cyclostoma, Phill. (which

it much more closely resembles in the number of its cups in

the adult state, and the extended upper surface of the colony),

by the presence of the obtuse basal carina, more cuneate

form, and total absence of the broad base of attachment of

Phillips’s species.

In the structure of its surface-ornamentation P, obtusa

approximates to P. cuneiformis.

* Zeitschrift, loc. cit. f. 4, 4a. + Loe. cit.

{ Illinois Geol. Rep. ii. pl. 17. f. 2, a-e.

§ Zeitschrift, loc. cit. f. 3, a-c.

on the Genus Paleeacis. 221

Loe, and Horizon. Combe Hill, Henbury, near Bristol, in

the upper beds of the Lower-Limestone Shales (8. G‘. Perce-

val) ; Hook Point, Wexford, in the Mountain Limestone (De

Koninck).

Other Localities. Nauvoo, [linois, in the Keokuk division

of the Subcarboniferous (Week and Worthen) ; Dallas city, in

Carboniferous Limestone (Von Seebach).

Paleacis cyclostoma, Phillips.

Hydnopora? cyclostoma, Phill. Geol. Yorksh. 1886, ii. p. 202, pl. 2.

aes

Propora? cyclostoma, Edwards and Haime, Polyp. Foss. Terr. Pal.

1851, p. 225; id. Mon. Brit. Carb. Corals, 1852, p. 152.

Sphenopoterium enorme, Meek and Worthen, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.

Philad. for October, 1860, p. 448; id. Illinois Geol. Surv. Rep.

1866, ii. p. 146, pl. 14. f. 1, a, 2.

Sphenopoterium enorme, var. depressum, Meek and Worthen, Illinois

Geol. Surv. Rep. 1866, ii. p. 146, pl. 14. f. 2, a, b.

Ptychochartocyathus lacus, Ludwig, Paleeontographica, 1866, xiv. pp. 189,

231, pl. 47. f. 14, pl. 69. f. 2, a.

Paleacis enormis, Von Seebach, Nachr.k. Gesellsch. Wissensch. zu Gott.

for 1866, p. 243; id. Zeitschr. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch. 1866, xviii.

p- 309.

Paleacis laxa, Kunth, Zeitschr. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch. 1869, xxi.

p. 185, pl. 2. f. 2.

Paleacis compressa, De Koninck, Nouv. Rech. Anim. Foss. Terr. Carb.

Belgique, 1872, 1° pt. p. 158, pl. 15. f. 7 (aon Meek and Worthen).

Paleacis cyclostoma, De Koninck, Nouv. Rech. Anim. Foss. Terr. Carb.

Belgique, 1872, 1* pt. p. 159, pl. 15. f. 8; R. Etheridge, Jun., Mem.

Geol. Surv. Scotl. no, 82. p. 97.

Spec. char. Colony simple or composite, subglobose or

obtusely subturbinate, usually depressed, composed of a large

number of cells (from one to twelve observed), assuming a

bi-, trilobate, quadrangular, or multilobate character, usually

more or less developed on the same plane, but occasionally

becoming superimposed, attached to foreign bodies ; and in one

well-marked variety they become cuneiform and irregular, or

elongate and partly free. Base of attachment large and trun-

eate, flat or variously grooved according to the body to which

the colony is fixed, and raised into well-marked, thick,

concentric wrinkles or ridges. Cups open, contracting but

little, moderately deep, ornamented internally with a large

number of small pseudo-ridges, consisting of closely-set micro-

scopic granules or prickles, which in some cases increase

towards the margin of the calice by bifurcation ; cup-margins

circular or oval, with usually well-developed elevated free

edges, separated from one another by intervening depressions

of variable breadth ; cup-floors broad, covered with numerous

irregularly disposed prickles similar to those forming the so-

called septal ridges. External surface ornamented with finely

223 | Mr. R. Etheridge and Dr. H. A. Nicholson

vermicular anastomosing ridges, devoid of any defined direc-

tion, and equally developed on all parts of the corallum, in-

cluding the concentrically wrinkled base. Calicular fission

well displayed in many instances.

Obs. We have examined upwards of two hundred examples

of the species, all in a fine state of preservation, and therefore

feel ourselves in a position to pass a few remarks upon it with

more than ordinary confidence. First, as to the number of

cups. Prof. de Koninck has figured * a single cup of P.

eyclostoma adhering to a Zaphrentis; but, strange to say, out

of the large number of specimens we have looked over,

we have only found a few examples of this. ‘The simple

double cup or cell is, perhaps, with the triple form (Pl. XII.

figs. 2, 16), the commonest aspect in which this organism is

presented to us. We have also observed numerous indivi-

duals in which the cups are four in number (Pl. XII. fig. 1),

the condition in which P. cyclostoma was figured by Messrs.

Meek and Worthen under the name of Sphenopotertum enor-

met. Five, again, is not an uncommon number amongst the

specimens to which we have had access, corresponding with

the figure given by Dr. Kunth t as Paleacis (Ptychocharto-

cyathus) lava, Ludwig. The type example figured by Phil-

lips § possessed six cells, a number to be found on several

specimens in the Scotch Survey collection. There are, again,

others with seven and nine (Pl. XII. fig. 17), whilst the

largest number we have had an opportunity of observing has

been twelve; but we see no reason why this number should

not be considerably exceeded.

The second point to which we have to draw attention is the

varied form of the colony. In the simplest state but one in

which P. cyclostoma has comeunder our observation it is bilobed;

@. e. there are two cells united, as it were, almost base to base,

their mouths then looking in contrary directions to one

another, and set somewhat obliquely to an imaginary vertical

axis. By the addition of another cup a trilobed appearance

is assumed (Pl. XII. figs. 2 and 16), whilst a further addition

of another gives a more or less quadrangular or sometimes

irregular outline to the colony. It not unfrequently happens

that after a number of cells have been developed (say six or

seven), one, perhaps the first formed, assumes a more or less

central position, and is somewhat elevated above the others,

and round it the latter appear to radiate, more, perhaps,

* Nouvelles Recherches, pl. 15. f. 8.

+ Illinois Report, ii. pl. 14. f. 2 6.

¢ Zeitschr. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch. xxi. pl. 2. f. 2a.

§ Geol. Yorksh, ii. pl. 2. f. 9.

on the Genus Paleacis. 223

from the previously mentioned lobate character than any thing

else, but still with a definite, although rough, kind of radiation.

The frequent occurrence of this feature will therefore render

the figure given* by Herr Ludwig of his Ptychochartocyathus

laxus not quite so hypothetical as Prof. de Koninck ap-

pears to considerft. Another peculiarity which occurs is

the piling or growth of the cells one upon another. This is

not of very frequent occurrence, and probably took place when

the space for the growth of the colony was restricted (Pl. XII.

fig. 17). One of the most characteristic points connected with

P. cyclostoma is the broad base (Pl. XII. fig. 3) and concen-

tric basal swellings, attachment taking place either by a large

or small portion of the former. Usually the colony is fixed

by the whole area of the base to some foreign body large

enough for its entire expansion ; but, on the other hand, when

adhering to an object of lesser dimensions than itself, a groove

or concavity is formed in the base, and the free portion, which

would otherwise, as in the first instance, have been also ad-

hering is covered with concentric folds or swellings. We have

observed P. cyclostoma attached to the following bodies :—

Crinoid stems; various species of Zaphrentis; Huomphalus

carbonarius, Sow.; Bellerophon Urii, Flem.; Dentalium ingens,

De Kon. ; Productus longispinus, Sow. ; Productus punctatus,

Martin ; Chonetes; and fragments of shelly matter in too un-

satisfactory a condition to be determined.

Under certain conditions the colony of P. cyclostoma ap-

pears to have taken upon itself an irregularity of growth

which, had the individuals so distinguished been found by

themselves, would have gone a long way towards the esta-

blishment of a new species (PI.XII. figs. 18-20) ; but between

the typical P. cyclostoma, with its expanded base and more

or less depressed lobate form, on the one hand, and the variety

with elongated and laterally spreading corallites on the other,

there are so many gradations and intermediate forms, that we

cannot see the justice of more than a mere varietal separation.

Our eminent friend and colleague, Prof. L. G. de Koninck,

has described and figured { such a form under the name

of Paleacis compressa, Meek & Worthen ; but with the advan-

tage derived from the examination of a large number of speci-

mens, as previously stated, we feel convinced that the form

figured by our friend is identical with the variety of P. cyclo-

stoma now under discussion. Certainly we have not had an

opportunity of examining the specimen upon which Prof. de

* Paleeontographica, xiv. t. 69. figs. 2, 2a,

+ Nouvelles Recherches, 1° pt. p. 160.

t Ibid. p. 158, pl. 15. £. 7.

224 Mr. R. Etheridge and Dr. H. A. Nicholson

Koninck founded his determination, and would therefore speak

with all due deference of his opinion; but his figure is very

elear and evidently accurately drawn, and on this we decidedly

found our opinion that P. compressa, De Kon., is not P. (Sphe-

nopotertum) compressa, M. & W.: the former does not

possess the characters assigned to the latter by its describers,

but does distmetly exhibit those indicative of the form which

with us, although at. first sight departing from the typical

condition of P. cyclostoma, is nevertheless insensibly united

with it by intermediate forms. We would illustrate our view

of this matter as follows :—Starting with the typical form of

P. cyclostoma, we there see the depressed expanded colony,

composed of three or seven cells, as the case may be, the latter

more or less all on one plane, and the flattened base. The

next step is to an example adhering to a Dentalium, where

we at once notice a want of the same amount of symmetry

possessed by the two former examples, and an extension or

lengthening of the cells, giving to the general appearance a

certain amount of irregularity, but existing at the same time

im conjunction with a similar external ornamentation, basab

swellings, arrangement of the stria, and presence of the

granulated floors to the cells. Advancing a step still further,

we have presented to us an individual possessing all the cha-

racters just described, but with a very much lessened point of

attachment—again exemplified in a more forcible manner by

the next step in the series, where the cells are longer and more

widely separated from one another ; whilst in fig. 20 we have

two perched upon the summit of a peduncular base of attach-

ment, still showing traces of the concentric ridges ; lastly, as

the most complete development of the sporting from the origi-

nal type, we would quote Prof. de Koninck’s figure itself,

where the irregularity of growth and elongation of the cups

is carried to the greatest extent. In concluding this portion

of our remarks we would simply state that we regard this

irregularity of growth not as of specific value where all the

other more important functional characters remam constant,

but as simply a varietal character depending upon disadvan-

tageous conditions of growth and habitat—an opinion founded

not upon the examination of one or two specimens, but on that

of a very large series. We propose to indicate this varietal

state under the name of Paleacis cyclostoma, Phill., var.

Koninckit, Eth. & Nich.

The method of reproduction is particularly well exemplified

in this species. We give an illustration of the calicular

method of gemmation as usually met with (Pl. XII. fig. 16).

on the Genus Paleacis. 225

Both Professors Morris* and De-Koninckt have placed

M‘Coy’s Astreopora antiqua as asynonym of this species. As

M‘Coy’s figure presents only a general and not an intimate re-

semblance to P. cyclostoma we refrain from following these

authors in this, until we have had an opportunity of examin-

ing the original specimen in the “ Griffith Collection ” in the

custody of the Royal Dublin Society. If distinct from P.

cyclostoma, it will constitute a fourth species; the two, how-

ever, are probably identical. A. antigua was found at Hook

Point, Ireland. ‘The internal structure of P. cyclostoma has

already been described.

Localities and Horizon. Cousland and Chalkieside old

quarries, near Dalkeith, in shale above the No. 1 limestone ;

in shale above the limestones displayed at Whitebaulks old

quarry, near Linlithgow, Charlestown and Sunnybank quarries,

near Inverkeithing, Linn, Duloch, Southfod, Blacklaw, and

Cowdens quarries, near Dunfermline, Woodend quarry, near

Fordel, Lathalmond quarry, near Roscobie, Gleniston quarry,

near Lochgelly: all the foregoing localities, except the first

three, arein Fite. East Barns quarry, near Dunbar, Hadding-

tonshire, and Carlops quarry, at Carlops, Peeblesshire, in shale

above the limestones ; very common at most of these localities,

and, as a rule, in a fine state of preservation ; the horizon

throughout is that of the Lower Carboniferous Limestone group.

P. cyclostoma has also been obtained at Carluke, Brockley,

and Auchenskeoch, in the west of Scotland, on a similar

horizon, and in the Upper Limestone group at Gair, Lanark-

shiref.

Other Localities. Northumberland (Phillips), typical lo-

eality; Tournai, Belgium (De Koninck) ; Rothmaltersdorf,

near Glotz, in Silesia (Ludwig), as Ptychochartocyathus laxus ;

Hausdorf (Kunth), as Paleacis lava; Rockford in Indiana,

Clarksville in Missouri, Saltlick Point in Illinois, in the

Goniatite-bed of the Kinderhook group of the Subcarbonife-

rous series (Meek and Worthen), as Sphenopotertum enorme,

and its var. depressum.

4, Summary of the Species of Paleacis.

We believe that in all probability it will be possible to

reduce the species of Paleacis to three only, viz. :—

* Cat. Brit. Foss. 2nd ed. 1854, p. 47.

+ Nouv. Recherches, 1* pt. p. 159.

¢t “Cat. Carb. Foss. W. of Scotland,” Trans. Geol. Soc, Glasgow, iii.

App. p. 16.

226 On the Genus Paleacis.

1. P. cuneiformis, |= Sphenopoterium cuneatum, |Compressed, cuneate, longer

J. Haime. 8 OW. than wide ; base sharp ; cells

2. P. obtusa, M. &|=S. compressum, M. & W.* ;

3. P. eyclostoma,

Phill.

Fig.

P. cymba, v. Seebach ; P.

umbonata, v. Seebach.

=Propora? cyclostoma, Ed.

& H.; Sph. enorme, M. &

W.; Sph. enorme, var. de-

pressum, M. & W.; Ptycho.

laxus, Ludw.; Paleacis

enornus, v. Seeb. ; P. laxa,

Kunth; P. cyclostoma, De

Kon.; P. compressa, De

Kon.; P. cyclostoma, var.

Koninckii, EH. & N.

arranged alternately on each

lateral edge, and directed

obliquely outwards and up-

wards.

Abruptly cuneate below, wider

than high; basal edge

slightly sinuous in the mid-

dle and carina-like, from

which the sides expand ra-

pidly upwards, &c.

Attached to foreign bodies by

a broad base, concentrically

wrinkled. Colony depress-

ed and lobed, of many cups,

or elongated and laterally

prolonged. Cups with a

number of microscopical

granules arranged in verti-

cal rows; floors of the cups

ornamented with granules.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XII.

. A small specimen of Paleacis cyclostoma attached to the stem of

a Crinoid, of the natural size.

. Another specimen of the same, viewed from above, of the natural

size.

. Under surface of a large specimen of the same, in which the

peduncle of attachment has been a narrow one, of the natural

size.

. Portion of the surface between two of the cups in a specimen

devoid of large pores, magnified.

. Portion of the surface between two of the cups in a specimen in

which arge pores are present, magnified.

. Portion of the under surface, showing pores and elongated aper-

tures, magnified,

. Thin section of a colony of P. cyclostoma, attached to the shell of

a Gasteropod, and enlarged eight diameters, showing the dark

matrix filling the cups (a), the trabecular tissue (c), and the

compact tubulated tissue (6) which forms the floors of the

cups.

. A portion of the same, enlarged twenty-five diameters, showing

the matrix filling the cup (a), the compact tubulated tissue in

the floor of the cup (0), and the denser but still tubulated

tissue bounding the lacunze of the deeper vesicular tissue (c).

A specimen of P. cuneiformis, viewed from the front, of the

natural size.

Fig. 10. The same viewed sideways, showing the cups.

* Meek and Worthen appear to have thought it very probable that

this might be only a variety of their S. obtusum.

Mr. F. Moore on new Species of Lepidoptera. 227

Figs. 11 & 12, Different views of a small specimen of the same, in which

only two cups are present, of the natural size.

Fig. 18. Portion of the surface of P. cuneiformis, enlarged.

Fig. 14. A portion of a thin section of P. cuneiformis, magnified, showing

lacunee and tubuli.

Fig. 15, Two views of P. obtusa, showing the arrangement of the cups;

Combe Hill, near Bristol (8. G. Perceval).:

Fig. 16. A specimen of P. cyclostoma, viewed from above, showing the

mode of fission in one of the cups. Fife.

Fig. 17. Another variety of the same, viewed from above, showing the

piling of the cups one upon another. Fife.

Erg. 18, A variety of the same, attached to a Crinoid stem, in which the

cells are assuming a more irregular form. Fife,

Fig. 19. Another condition of P. cyclostoma (var. Koninckii, nobis), in

which the cells are still more elongated and partially free.

Fig. 20. An extreme variety of the same (P. cyclostoma, var. Koninckit,

nobis), in which the colony consists of two cells or cups

mounted upon a peduncular extension of the base of the

colony.

XX VII.—Descriptions of new Species of Lepidoptera collected

by the late Dr. F. Stoliczka during the Indian- Government

Mission to Yarkund in 1873. By F. Moors, F.Z.S8.

Satyrine.

Hipparchia lehana.

Allied to H. baldiva from Upper Kunawur. Upperside

paler in colour, the discal transverse luteous band is broader

on both wings, and its inner border in the male is inwardly

oblique. Both sexes above and beneath are without the small

ocellus on the band above the anal angle. The underside is

also very much paler, and the transverse sinuous lines wider

apart.

Exp. ¢ 2, 9 24 inches.

Hab. Leh, Kharbu (13,000 feet), Ladak.

Nymphaline.

Vanessa ladakensis.

Most nearly allied to V. rizana from Cheeni. Differing in

being somewhat smaller, less angled below the apex of fore

wing and at the middle of the hind wing ; the black markings

on the upperside are much less prominent, the black oblique

bands on the fore wing merging into the red, and appearing

somewhat confluent; the outer transverse discal yellow band

is also broader. Other markings similar. On the underside

228 Mr. F. Moore on new Species of Lepidoptera.

the interspaces between the markings on the fore wing are

very much paler.

Exp. 12 inch.

Hab. Gogra, Changchenmo (15,000 feet), Ladak ; Karatagh

lake, on snow (16,890 ft.), Yarkund.

Pierine.

BALTIA, n. g.

Fore wing very short, costa considerably arched from the

base, apex and posterior angle rounded, exterior margin ob-

lique; costal vein short; subcostal vein arched tc end of the

cell, five-branched, first and second branches arising at equal

distance apart before the end of the cell and terminating on

the costa before the apex; third branch bent near its base

but beyond the discocellulars, at its middle, and immediately

before its termination before the apex; the fourth and fifth

branches, and the radial branch starting respectively below

from each of these angles, the fourth branch being very short,

and in the female the radial starts from end of the cell; cell

broad ; discocellulars of nearly equal length, oblique, slightly

bent inward ; median vein three-branched, at equal distances ;

submedian curved: hind wing long, somewhat oval, slightly

broader than fore wing; apex and exterior margin very convex,

abdominal margin long; costal vein short; subcostal three-

branched; cell broad ; discocellulars oblique, upper shortest ;

median three-branched; submedian nearly straight. Body

small; abdomen short; thorax and front of head clothed with

long lax hairs. Palpi very long, slender, densely hairy be-

neath. Legs short, femora fringed beneath with long lax

hairs ; antenne short, club large and spatulate.

Allied to Mesapia (M. peloria, Hewits. Exot. Butt. i.

Pieride, pl. 2. f. 15).

Baltia Shawiti.

Mesapia Shawii, Bates, in Henderson’s ‘Lahore to Yarkund,’ p. 805

(1873), 9.

Male. Upperside white ; base of both wings densely black-

speckled ; fore wing with the costal edge ochreous and slightly

black-speckled ; a large black triangular oblique spot at end

of the cell; a short transverse subapical black band, and a

marginal row of black decreasing triangular spots: hind wing

sparsely and minutely speckled with dark grey, the speckles

dense across the disk, and there forming a curved sinuous

indistinct band, a slight black streak at end of the cell.. Body

black. Palpi ochreous above, fringed with black beneath. -

Mr. F. Moore on new Species of Lepidoptera. 229

Antenne black, stem white-ringed. Abdomen beneath yel-

low. Legs black above, white beneath. Underside—fore

wing with markings as above; costa and exterior margin

tinged with ochreous: hind wing black-speckled, densely at

base, and also forming a narrow curved discal sinuous band ;

a slight black streak at end of the cell.

Female differs in having the markings above less black, the

subapical band on the fore wing being continued across the

wing on both upper and underside.

Exp. 1,5 inch.

Hab. Aktagh (15,590 feet), Yarkund (Stoliczka) ; Chang-

Lung Pass, 18,000 feet (Shaw).

Colias Stoliczkana.

Male. Upperside pale chrome-yellow, base of costal and

abdominal borders greenish yellow ; base of wings speckled

with blackish brown; both wings with a broad yellowish-

brown marginal band; a slight narrow dusky lunular streak

at end of the cell in the fore wing. Underside—fore wing

pale yellow, costal border and exterior margin greenish yellow ;

a dusky black-speckled lunular spot at end of the cell, and a

discal row of indistinct speckled spots: hind wing greenish yel-

low, with darker green speckles; an ochreous-brown patch at

end of the cell enclosing a white irregular mark and dot; a

discal series of dusky-brown dentate spots. Antenne and

legs reddish.

Exp. 14 inch.

Hab. North of Changla (17,000 feet), Ladak.

Nearest to C. eogene, Felder, Nov. Reise, Lep. pl. 27. f. 7.

Differs in being smaller, and having the median portion and

cilia pale chrome-yellow (instead of orange), the discocellular

mark of fore wing less prominent and lunular (instead of oval) ;

the broad marginal band is yellow-brown (instead of dark

brown), the costa and head being also of the same yellow as

the other part. On the underside the discocellular mark is

also lunular and not pale-centred.

Lycenine.

Polyommatus yarkundensis.

Allied to P. tcarus.

Upperside dark blue, anterior and exterior borders dusky

brown ; fore wing with an indistinct streak at end of the cell ;

hind wing with a marginal row of rather indistinct ochreous-

bordered black spots. Cilia cinereous white. Underside

ochreous grey: fore wing with a white-centred black spot in

230 Mr. F. Moore on new Species of Lepidoptera.

middle of the cell, another below it, one at end of the cell, and

a curved discal series of seven spots; a marginal row of in-

distinct spots bordered above by a dentate line with pale

ochreous interspaces: hind wing with three white-circled

black subbasal spots and acurved discal series of seven spots ;

a marginal row of prominent spots bordered above by dentate

line with ochreous interspaces.

Exp. 12 inch.

Hab. Yarkund (3923 feet).

Polyommatus kashgharensis.

Allied to P. semiargus.

Male. Upperside pale blue, with narrow black exterior

marginal line; costal edge white; cilia white, with dark

inner border. Underside slightly pearly grey; base of the

wings pale metallic green: fore wing with a whitish-bordered

black spot in middle of the cell, and a curved discal series of

five spots; a very indistinct spot at end of the cell, and a less

distinct marginal series of spots: hind wing with three sub-

basal and acurved discal series of six small white-circled black

spots, an indistinct spot at end of the cell, and a marginal row

of spots with slightly ochreous upper dentate line.

Exp. 12 inch.

Hab, Yangihissar (4320 feet), Yarkund.

Polyommatus lehanus.

Allied to P. pheretes.

Male. Upperside violet-blue, somewhat brownish blue at

the margins; cilia white. Underside leaden grey, palest at

the apex and on hind wing; fore wing with a white-bordered

black spot at end of the cell, and a transverse discal oblique

series of five spots: hind wing with a large triangular greyish-

white spot at end of the cell, and a series of eight small round

spots recurving from near base of costa across the disk to anal

augle.

Exp. -%, inch.

Hab. Lich (11,538 feet), Ladak.

Bombycida.

Arctia orientalis.

Similar to A. caja, differing above on the fore wing in the

general form of the bands, these being entire and transversely

continuous (not broken longitudinally as in caja) ; on the hind

wing the spot at the end of the cell is absent ; this wing also

has a yellowish-white narrow marginal line above, and brown

Mr. F. Moore on new Species of Lepidoptera. 231

cilia both above and beneath; the dorsal black band is pre-

sent on each segment, and longer.

Exp. 24 inches.

Hab, Sonamurg, Cashmere (Stoliczka).

Euproctis kargalika.

Male and female. Fore wing creamy white, veins greyish

white ; a large brown-speckled ochreous discocellular spot and

a row of submarginal spots: hind wing white. Thorax

creamy white; abdomen of male golden yellow, of female

grey with slight black rings and large glossy golden-yellow

tuft. Shaft of antennz white, pectinations brown. Underside

glossy white ; costa of fore wing in male broadly suffused with

brown.

. Exp. ¢ 14, 2 1,8, inch.

Hab. Kargalik (4440 feet), Yarkund.

Euproctis lactea.

Uniform cream-white, without markings. Abdominal tuft

pale yellow. Underside paler cream-white, costal border

of fore wing ochreous brown. Palpi ochreous brown. An-

tenne pale ochreous brown, shaft white. Fore fibie with

ochreous-brown tuft.

Exp. 12 inch.

Hab. Kargalik (4440 feet), Yarkund.

Oxicesta marmorea.

Male. Upperside greyish brown: fore wing with a pale

yellowish irregular streak along middle of the cell to costa near

the apex, a small spot beyond the cell, and an indistinct pale

streak below the cell; apical margin of costa and outer mar-

gin pale testaceous, alternated with a short black streak which

extends through the cilia: hind wing uniform pale greyish

brown, slightly yellowish at the base. Body and legs greyish

brown. Antenne brown. Underside uniform greyish brown.

Cilia of fore wing with black streak.

Exp. 1,4 inch.

Hab. Sasstekke, Yarkund.

Differs from O. geographica in being longer in the wings,

of different colour, and without the two transverse zigzag

white bands on the fore wing.

Piilophora kashghara.

Male. Pale grey; fore wing irrorated with brown scales,

crossed by three indistinctly defined narrow zigzag brown

232 Mr. F. Moore on new Species of Lepidoptera.

bands, which ares lightly dentate on the veins; cilia alter-

nate pale grey and brown: hind wing pale grey, sparsely

sprinkled with brown scales. Thorax greyish brown. Ab-

domen brown, three anterior segments with dorsal row of

black tubercular scales, tip also black. Antenne yellowish

testaceous. Underside grey, sparsely brown-speckled, long

pubescence of abdominal border brown and black. Legs pale

brown.

Exp. 1;°5 inch.

Hab. Yangihissar (4320 feet), Kashghar.

Noctuide.

Acronycta kargalika.

Female, Fore wing pale silvery brownish grey; reniform

and orbicular marks whitish, contiguous, brown-bordered; a

longitudinal streak from the base, a contiguous subbasal trans-

verse recurved line, a discal transverse lunular line crossed

near posterior angle by a short streak ; some short costal marks

and a streak on cilia between each vein brown: hind wing

glossy greyish white, outer borders and veins pale greyish

brown, Thorax and abdomen dark grey. Antenne grey.

Underside greyish white: fore wing with greyish-brown costal

streaks and hind margin; hind wing with brown basal costal

streak and discocellular spot. Palpi brown at sides. Legs

grey, femora tipped with black ; tibize longitudinally streaked

and tarsi banded with black.

Exp. 1,%, inch.

Hab, Kargalik (4440 feet), Yarkund.

Most nearly allied to A. tradens, but differs in being darker ;

the markings are somewhat similar; but the basal longitudinal

streak is shorter, thus giving a wider interspace between the

two transverse lines.

Hydrecia tibetana.

Male. Pale reddish testaceous ; fore wing crossed by two

pale brown narrow lines with pale inner border, the first line

subbasal and outwardly oblique, the other discal; a submar-

ginal row of blackish dots, and pale marginal line; orbicular

and reniform spots indistinct, but defined by a brownish

border: hind wing and abdomen paler. Underside palest on

the middle of the wings; discal line on both wings, and a

discocellular spot slightly perceptible on the hind wing. An-

tenne, palpi, and fore legs reddish testaceous.

Exp. 1,3; inch,

Hab, Leh, Ladak.

Mr. F. Moore on new Species of Lepidoptera. 233

Mamestra canescens.

Male. Fore wing brownish grey; orbicular and reniform

marks greyish white, with narrow black border; a short

double black streak below the base of the cell, and a quadrate

mark below the orbicular spot; an indistinct pale submarginal

irregular fascia, and black marginal lunular line with whitish

inner border: hind wing pale greyish brown. Thorax and

abdomen greyish brown; antenne brown. Underside glossy

pale greyish brown, both wings with indistinct short trans-

verse discocellular streak.

Exp. 12 inch.

Hab. Kargalik (4440 feet), Yarkund.

Agrotis tibetana.

Upperside—fore wing greyish brown, with indistinct dusky

transverse subbasal double sinuous line, discal dentate lines,

and pale outer-bordered, wavy, narrow, submarginal band;

speckled orbicular and quadrate reniform mark; cilia with

narrow white marginal line: hind wing brownish white ;

veins and outer margin brown; cilia white. Antenne and

body greyish brown, tip of abdomen yellowish. Underside—

fore wing greyish white, dusky brown basally along the costa

and hind margin, and speckled on outer margin: hind wing

whitish ; an indistinct dusky spot at end of the cell, a spot

mesially on each vein, and narrow lunular marginal line.

Legs greyish brown, femora and tibie streaked and tarsi

banded with black.

Allied to A. ripe.

Exp. 13 inch.

Hab. Leh, Ladak.

Spelotis undulans.

Male and female. Fore wing grey-brown, irrorated with

darker scales; crossed with subbasal, antemedian and post-

median double pale-bordered lunular brown bands, each ending

on the costa in a darker spot; a submarginal pale outer-

bordered brown wavy fascia, and small black marginal

lunules: hind wing glossy greyish white, with brownish

tinged borders, brown veins, and marginal lunular line. An-

tenne and palpi greyish brown. Underside glossy greyish

white ; tibize streaked and tarsi banded with black.

Allied to S. pyrophila.

Exp. 1,8, inch.

Hab. Ak Masjid, S.E. of Chiklik, Yarkund.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 16

234 Mr. F. Moore on new Species of Lepidoptera,

Teniocampa chiklika.

Male. Upperside grey : fore wing densely brown-speckled ;

cilia with a brown-speckled line; orbicular and reniform

spots pale; an indistinct transverse subbasal and discal sinu-

ous pale-bordered line: hind wing minutely brown-speckled,

and with a pale brown cilial line. Underside paler, both

wings uniformly speckled, and with a very indistinct sinuous

discal band. Antenne blackish, shaft grey. Body, palpi, and

legs brown-speckled.

Exp. 12 inch.

Hab. 8... of Chiklik, Yarkund.

Hadena Stoliczkana.

Male. Fore wing pale greyish brown, crossed by three in-

distinct, narrow, brownish, zigzag double lines ; orbicular spot

pale ; reniform mark very indistinct ; two black spots linearly

disposed below the apex ; a double, narrow, marginal, blackish

lunular line; some short streaks on the costa: hind wing with

the veins and a broad marginal band fuliginous brown. Cilia

white. Body pale greyish brown. Antenne brown. Un-

derside greyish white ; both wings crossed by a distinct brown

curved discal band; fore wing with a discocellular brown

lunule, and hind wing with a spot; a marginal lunular dotted

line. Legs grey-brown, banded with black.

Exp. 14 inch.

Hab. Kufelang (14,810 feet), Yarkund.

Heliothis hybleoides.

Upperside—fore wing grey, minutely brown-speckled; a

slightly apparent brown streak at end of the cell, and a pale

submarginal zigzag line: hind wing brownish white, with a

broad greyish-black median transverse band, which is conflu-

ent with a curved discocellular black streak ; a large oval black

spot on middle of outer margin, abdominal border fringed with

brown. Cilia white. Body grey, whitish beneath. Legs

greyish white and brown-speckled. Underside greyish

white: fore wing with a dusky black, broad, transverse apical

band, and an outwardly oblique median band: hind wing with

a dusky black dentate streak at end of the cell; a slight median

band and oval marginal spot.

Exp. 13 inch.

Hab. Chiklik (14,480 feet), Yarkund.

Mr. F. Moore on new Species of Lepidoptera. 235

Pyralide.

Pyrausta cuprealis.

Upperside dark cupreous brown: hind wing with a broad

median discal yellow band. Underside paler, basal two thirds

of both wings yellow, with brown-speckled subbasal patch.

Antennz black. Body beneath cupreous black, speckled with

yellow. Palpi yellow beneath. Legs yellow, with cupreous

speckles.

Exp. 2 inch.

Hab. Gaganghir (near Sonamurg), Cashmere.

Eudorea granitalis.

Upperside—fore wing pale brown, crossed by several irre-

gular wavy grey-bordered black lines; cilia grey alternated

with black: hind wing greyish white, traversed by numerous

short, brown striz, somewhat regularly disposed between the

veins, the wing being suffused with brown along external

margin. Cilia grey, with dusky line. Body grey, speckled

with brown. Palpi brown at apex, greyish at base. . Legs

grey, speckled with black. Underside as above, markings

paler.

Exp. 385 inch.

Hab. 8.1K. of Chiklik, Yarkund.

Eudorea transversalis.

Male. Upperside—fore wing grey, speckled with brown ;

crossed by an oblique subbasal and a recurved discal black-

speckled band; exterior margin black-spotted ; some black

speckles at end of the cell: hind wing pale brown, with darker

marginal border. Cilia grey, with brown border. Body

grey-brown and black-speckled. Palpi speckled with black

and white above. Antenne dark brown. Underside pale

ochreous grey. Legs speckled grey and black, fore and

middle legs with grey bands.

Female paler, the bands across fore wing somewhat broader,

those on the hind wing more distinct.

Exp. 38; inch.

Hab. \ghizyar (5600 feet), Yangihissar (4320 feet), Yar-

kund.

Geometride.

Gnophos Stoliczkaria.

Upperside pale ochreous grey, minutely brown-speckled,

forming more or less numerous short transverse striz; both

wings with an indistinct oval spot at end of the cell; fore wing

with a subbasal and discal, and hind wing with a discal series

236 Mr. F. Moore on new Species of Lepidoptera.

of dentate points, and marginal lunular dotted line. Cilia

white. Underside paler; speckles sparsely apparent; cell-spot

less distinct.

Exp. 12 inch.

Hab, Ak Masjid (8870 feet), Yarkund.

Thera kashghara.

Upperside pale brownish cinereous: fore wing crossed by

three equidistant pale-bordered blackish lines, the basal nearly

straight, the second slightly waved, the outer irregularly un-

dulated, each darkest at the costal end; the interspaces be-

tween the two outer lines darker cinereous brown; a slight

short sinuous spot at apex, an indistinct paler transverse un-

dulating line on outer margin, ana a distinct darker narrow

marginal line. Underside paler, transverse lines very indi-

stinctly visible. Legs dusky above. Antenne brownish.

Exp. 12 inch.

Hab. Chiklik (14,480 feet), Yarkund.

Crambide.

Homeosoma venosella.

Upperside—fore wing pale greyish ochreous, minutely

brown-speckled, sparsely disposed along the veins, and

having a transverse pale discal indented line and an indistinct

space at end of the cell; hind wing cinereous white, with

pale brown marginal line. Cilia white. Body and palpi

above greyish ochreous, paler beneath. Underside whitish

cinereous.

Exp. + inch.

Hab. Ak Masjid (8870 feet), Yarkund.

Myelois griseella.

Upperside cinereous grey; fore wing densely irrorated with

brown, crossed by two median, undulating, very indistinct

speckled lines; an indistinct streak at end of the cell; both

wings with an outer marginal narrow lunular brown line:

hind wing whitish, with a very pale cinereous-brown margi-

nal and an indistinct narrow submarginal band. — Cilia

whitish, with a narrow darker marginal line. Underside

paler cinereous. Head and thorax brownish. Abdomen

cinereous brown.

Exp. 14 inch.

Hab. 8.E. of Chiklik, Yarkund.

Myelots undulosella.

Male and female. Upperside ochreous grey; fore wing

On a new Species of Land-Planarian. 237

speckled with brown, crossed by two pale-bordered, median,

oblique, undulating, blackish lines, both of which are sinuous

at the costal end, and enclosing a dark pale-centred streak at

end of the cell; middle of hind margin and the outer border

grey, the latter with an indistinct pale sinuous line slightly

black-speckled ; cilia whitish, alternated with two dark mar-

ginal lines: hind wing pale brownish cinereous externally ;

cilia white, alternated with one dark marginal line, and a

dark patch at the middle. Body ochreous grey. _ Underside

pale cinereous.

Exp. 12 inch.

Hab. Ak Masjid (8870 feet), Ak Talla (7342 feet), Yarkund.

Tortricide.

Conchylis Stoliczkana.

Upperside—fore wing white, with three transverse, out-

wardly oblique, ochreous-brown bands, two inwardly oblique

discal bands, and a spot at end of the cell; a brown-speckled

marginal band: hind wing cinereous white, with narrow

brown marginal band. Body white, speckled with black,

and with white segmental bands. Legs white. Palpi white,

speckled with brown. Underside cinereous white; outer

bands on fore wing indistinctly visible.

Exp. £ inch.

Hab. 8.E. of Chiklik, Yarkund.

Tineide.

Depressaria stigmella.

Fore wing pale brownish ochreous, greyish along the apical

portion of the costa, interspersed with a few dusky speckles ;

a dusky grey short straight streak at end of the cell; a few

speckles on outer margin: hind wing pale ochreous white.

Underside paler. Legs pale ochreous.

Exp. 7 inch.

Hab. Yangihissar (4320 feet), Kashgar.

Nearest allied to the Kuropean D. subpropinquella.

XXVIII.—Description of a new Species of Land-Planarian

from the Hothouses at Kew Gardens. By H. N. Mosetey,

FROM time to time interesting worms and other invertebrates

are found living in the various hothouses at Kew Gardens.

238 On a new Species of Land-Planarian.

These are, by the direction of Sir Joseph Hooker, carefully

preserved, and are sent to various naturalists for examination.

The gardeners take an interest in the matter, and take care to

bring the specimens in good condition to Mr. Thiselton

Dyer.

‘i received a short time since from Mr. Dyer a specimen of

a living Land-Planarian of the genus Bipalium, which was

thus found in one of the hothouses at Kew. A similar

worm was discovered in the same house a year or two ago,

and one also on a former occasion, and it seems probable that

the species is established and breeds in the house.

The present specimen when it reached me was in a dying

condition, having evidently suffered from exposure to cold.

A sketch of it, however, was made by Mr. Ray Lankester

(who received it from Mr. Dyer) whilst it was in a healthy and

lively condition ; and assisted by this sketch I give here a

description of the species, which appears to be new. It is

remarkable in the genus for its great length, which surpasses,

so far as I know, that of all other species of Bipalium. Un-

fortunately it is quite uncertain from what region it may have

come, since the house in which it was found contains plants

from various parts of the world. It will be remembered that

Mecznikow’s Rhynchodemus (Geodesmus) bilineatus, the ana-

tomy of which was described by that author in the Bull. Acad.

St. Petersburg, 1865, vol. ix. p. 433, was found in a hothouse in

the Botanic Gardens of Giessen, and was probably introduced,

like the present species, with foreign plants. It has not been

met with since. I have given an account of the structure of

Land-Planarians of the genera Bipalium and Rhynchodemus in

a paper ‘‘ On the Anatomy and Histology of the Land-Plana-

rians of Ceylon,” published in the Phil. Trans. for 1874,

p. 105, and some details of the structure of members of other

genera of the family Geoplanide, and a list of all the known

species of Land-Planarians, in a further paper, ‘On the Struc-

ture of several Forms of Land-Planarians, &c.,” published in

the Quart. Journ. Microsc. Sci. vol. xvi. new ser. 1877,

p- 273.

Bipalium kewense, sp. n.

Body slightly rounded above, flat beneath, slightly nar-

rower just behind the head, tapering very gradually poste-

riorly to terminate in a long and slender hinder extremity ;

with a narrow but well-marked ambulacral line. | Lunate

head of moderate size, about twice as broad as the part of the

body immediately behind it.

General colour of the body light ochre-yellow above ;

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida. 239

beneath very pale, almost white. Five dark violet stripes,

a mesial and two pairs of lateral, extending along the entire

length of the dorsal surface. The mesial stripe narrow and

linear, the succeeding pair broad and band-like, and the

outermost pair again linear. The outermost pair placed at a

short distance from the lateral margin of the upper surface,

and the band-like pair at half the distance between these and

the central stripe. Just behind the head the two lateral

bands on either side fuse together, and form a pair of broad

dark patches.

Faint and narrow violet stripes mark the margin of the

ambulacral line on the under surface of the body.

Length of the single specimen 9 inches; extreme breadth

of the body + inch, of the head + inch.

Exeter College, Oxford,

Feb. 18, 1878.

XXIX.—Studies on the Hydroida. By C. Merescukowsky.

[Plates XIII., XIV. & XV.]

I. Morphological Considerations.

THE human mind has not the power of retaining in its

memory the representations of all the concrete objects which

are presented to its five senses ; for the number of these objects

and of facts is too immense for its faculties, which are still so

imperfectly developed. But, at the same time, the mind de-

sires to be in possession of as many facts as possible; hence

the tendency to generalization and the double character of

every science: on the one hand, we have concrete facts

without any bond between them, without any idea, serving

only as raw material; on the other, generalizations, more or

less abstract ideas. Not only every science, but even every

branch of each science, every group of events or facts, may

therefore have its philosophy—that is to say, its generaliza-

tions, its ideas, its laws which govern the facts.

The usefulness of these laws or generalizations, even in the

case of small groups of events, cannot be doubted; in reality

it is often only by taking advantage of them that a thinker can

arrive at generalizations of a higher degree, without the neces-

sity of busying himself in the midst of thousands of little facts

and minute details.

In the following pages I shall speak of a group of

facts which may be observed among the Hydromeduse,

240 M.C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydrotda.

and which may be generalized into a single idea, a. single

law of metamerism (Metamerengesetz) or of articulation. This

law may be formulated as follows:—The Hydroid may be

composed of two or several metameres, simiiar or not ; each

metamere in its turn is composed of several antimeres.

Fig. 1 shows diagrammatically a Hydroid belonging to

what I call the articulate type; it will be seen that it con-

sists of three very distinct metameres, each of which is in

its turn composed of four antimeres*.

This law governs a considerable number of forms among

the Hydromeduse ; we may recognize it in the species be-

longing to various genera—for example, in Stawridium, Coryne,

Fig. 2.

Syncoryne, Millepora, Cladonema, Tubularia, Cordylophora,

Gemmaria, &c. ; but all the cases in which we remark the arti-

culate type among the Hydromeduse belong exclusively to

the order of naked Hydroids (Athecata). There is not a

single Hydroid belonging to the order Thecaphora which

* According to M. E. Hackel we should have to call such a type

T3 *, . . ” 7

‘forma staurastoma diplopola articulata,

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida. 241

has the least normal tendency to the production of meta-

meres*,

The number of metameres is very variable in different genera

and species. We know several Hydroids (as, for example,

Cladonema radiatum) which have only two metameres, usually,

in this case, very distinct and well marked. Up to the pre-

sent time we do not know a single Hydroid which has three

distinct metameres; but we know one with four very -

clearly developed; this is Stawridiuwm productum, which I

have found in the White Sea. After it come the forms

which have more than four metameres ; but in these cases they

are not very distinct, and their number is no longer constant,

but varies with the age and development of the individual.

At the same time, this variation in the number of metameres

takes place within certain limits; for there are species in which

the metameres never attain the great number met with in

other species.

Among the forms which are very rich in metameres I can

cite several, but especially Coryne pusilla and Gemmaria

impleaa, in which we may see a very great quantity of meta-

meres. Itis true that in such cases it is impossible to fix

clearly the boundaries of two metameres, and that it is often

impossible to decide whether two tentacles belong to one or

to two different metameres ; but nevertheless it is easy to see

that we have to do with the same articulate type as in Stau-

ridium and Cladonema ; only here the order of arrangement of

the tentacles, in consequence of their great number, has be-

come very much effaced.

As to the nature (das Wesen) of the law of metamerism, the

cause which has produced the articulate type among the Hy-

droids, I think I am justified in explaining it in the following

manner :—T'he Hydroid, in consequence of a great abundance

of nourishment, or from some other cause unknown, began to

grow in the direction of the primary axis of its body. Growth,

as we know, does not differ generically from the process of

multiplication ; the latter is only a particular case of the

former ; and the two processes depend greatly upon each

other.

The growth of the Hydroid beyond its specific limit causes

* A single anomalous fact is known to me in the Thecaphora, in which

there appears a tendency, although a very feeble one, to take on the arti-

culate form. This is the Clytia poteriwm, Agassiz (fig. 2), in which one

hydrotheca is placed above another, which has produced it, no doubt, by

division. But this case can only be regarded as an anomaly, the nor-

mal individuals never having any trace of metamerism. This anomaly

has been described by Agassiz, ‘Contributions to the Natural History of

the United States,’ iv. p. 303, pl. xxix. fig. 1.

242 M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida.

multiplication by means of incomplete transverse division

(unvollstdindige (Juertheilung)—that is to say, the appearance

of one or several new systems of secondary axes, which

are all, at first, in accordance with the law of heredity, equal

among themselves and to the first axial system from which

they have proceeded. But instead of separating from each

other and entering upon a free and independent life, as we

see in a very analogous process of gemmation in the Scy-

phistoma of the Discophorous Meduse (fig. 3)*, each system

of secondary axes remains connected with a small community

and leads a social life (fig. 4).

In order to demonstrate that this view is correct, and that

the articulate type is nothing more than the product of an

incomplete transverse division, we may consider the singular

anomaly presented by Clytia potertum, Ag. (fig. 2). There

is no doubt that this form is produced by increase of growth,

which for its part produces a a transverse division analogous to

that which takes place in the Scyphistoma, but with the dif-

ference that here the superior articulation does not separate

from the colony, because the division is incomplete. But if

we imagine the Hydroid deprived of its calycle we shall have

fundamentally the same picture that is presented by the digram-

matic figure of an articulate Hydroid in fig. 1.

Let us now consider fig. 5, which represents, after Mr.

Hinckst, the interesting Hydroid Vorticlava proteus. Owing

to its great contractility it can take on different forms; and

one of them (fig. 5), in which the superior metamere is

removed to a great distance from the inferior metamere, and

in which the two articulations are united only by a long and

very thin peduncle, proves very clearly that the metameres

are true articulations produced by incomplete division. Just

the same thing (that is to say, the great individuality of each

metamere, united only by a fine peduncle) occurs also in Cory-

morpha pendula, Agass. +; ; only the individuality of the meta-

meres is unequal, being easy to see in some Hydroids (such

as Vorticlava, Stauridium, and Cladonema), and more or less

effaced in others with many metameres (Zanclea, Coryne,

&c.). But in any case we must regard the articulate type as

a small colony.

The number of individuals in such a community may be

* Each tentacle (each antimere), or rather each pair of antimeres, is

nothing but an axis vertical to the axis of the body ( he ite or primary

axis), which is ordinarily called a secondary axis. The different types of

Hydroids have 1, 2,3, 4n,....secondary axes, 2. e. 2, 2X2, 2x3, 2x4,

2x n tentacles.

+ Mon. Brit. Hydr. vol. ii. pl. xxiii. fig. 2, d.

{ Contrib. Nat. Hist. Un. States, vol. iv. pl. xxvi. figs. 14 and 17.

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida. 243

considerable, as we have already seen, about ten or even

more ; and, in fact, it is most usual for their number to ex-

ceed four or five.

Fig. 4.

In these cases, and especially where we have to do with

about ten metameres, the explanation of the origin of these

articulated forms which I have just given cannot suffice ;

and hence it must be supplemented by a very in-

teresting law, which Prof. N. Wagner of St. Peters-

burg has denominated the law of physiological inertia,

and has so happily applied to the explanation of the

incredible number of metameres (articulations) with

which various worms (Annelida) are furnished.

According to this law, some cause having origi-

nated two or three metameres, the appearance of the

following metameres may be brought about without

the further aid of the primary cause, but solely under

the influence of a tendency that the organism has to repeat

the process of the appearance of metameres (a process at first

induced by some external influence [chogue], such as abun-

dance of food) by cnertia, as it were, until finally resistance,

under different forms, may put a stop to it.

The different qualities and properties of an organism are

often retained, by force of heredity, without interruption and

without modification during a long series of generations,

even when the cause which has induced these qualities has

long disappeared. It is so in the case in question: a certain

244 M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida.

cause has induced in the organism the tendency to grow

constantly in length by incomplete transverse division; and

if it happens that this cause acts for a long time, through a

long series of generations, it is easy to understand that this

tendency may acquire so great a persistency, and may become

so powerful, that it will continue to manifest itself even after

the disappearance of the original cause. Considered from this

point of view, the law of physiological inertia appears simply

to be a particular case of another more general law—the law

of heredity ; and I believe that if we apply this law (without

which the phenomena of the Annelida are perfectly obscure

and incapable of explanation) to the group of Hydroids, and

especially to the articulate type, we shall attain the possi-

bility of explaining and understanding the appearance of such

forms as Coryne pusilla and Gemmaria implexa.

In the articulate type there is a peculiarity which is very

interesting, especially because it can be very clearly explained,

and to which I wish to call attention, namely the form of the

tentacles. One of the most characteristic features which

always accompany the law of metamerism in the Hydroids, is

the capitate form of the tentacles, which in this case, are

always very short (figs. 1, 4). This peculiarity of the articu-

late forms is especially observable in the species with nume-

rous metameres, in which the tentacles are excessively short.

There are very few exceptions to the rule that articulation is

combined with the capitate form of tentacles; and nearly all

these exceptions can be perfectly well explained.

In seeking to explain this fact, and to find the cause of its

occurrence (raison d’étre), we must first of all call attention to

the coexistence of the two facts, articulation and capitate ten-

tacles, and inquire whether this singular and invariable coex-

istence is not due to a causal relation between the two facts.

It is more than probable that this is the case ; and, as we shall

see immediately, it is the articulation that is the cause

of the form of the tentacles.

The articulate type has no doubt originated from the non-

articulate type with 4, or, in general, 2 x x filiform tentacles.

The tentacles of this general type (2x) are:—l, usually

rather long and slender, not capitate, endowed with great con-

tractility ; and, 2, covered over all their surface with a quan-

tity of thread-cells. Such an organization is adapted to sub-

serve two functions at once—namely, (1) seizure of food,

and (2) defence against enemies by means of the veno-

mous thread-cells. When the Hydroids furnished with meta-

meres began to be developed from this type thus constructed

and non-articulate, and, at the same time, the length of the

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydrovda. 245

whole animal increased considerably, so that the long, slender,

original tentacles, which previously extended beyond the apex

of the body (where the mouth is placed), became relatively

shorter, they would no longer reach the buccal orifice, which

would deprive them of all power of acting as organs of nutri-

tion. This must certainly take place, especially with the

lowest tentacles. The part which they performed being thus

diminished, and their significance in the economy of the

animal changed, the tentacles would no doubt undergo, if not

complete atrophy, at least a consi-

derable diminution in their develop- Fig. 6.

ment. This is, in fact,what we ob-

serve. In such articulate forms as

Cladonema radiatum (fig. 6), for ex-

ample, which is furnished with two

very distinct metameres, we remark

that the four lower tentacles, belong-

ing to the inferior metamere, are too

short to reach the mouth, and conse-

quently cannot possibly assist in the

process of nutrition; at the same time

they are much less developed, much

shorter and more delicate than the

other four tentacles belonging to the upper metamere, which

can very easily reach the mouth.

The form with four metameres (Stauridium productum)

shows us the same thing. In this also the four tentacles of

the inferior metamere are, to a very great degree, atrophied*.

The same thing takes place in all the other articulate forms,

even when the number of metameres is very considerable, as,

for example, in Coryne pusilla and Gemmaria implexa. In

all cases the inferior tentacles are less developed, half or one

third of the length of those of the superior metameres, and the

more they approach towards the basal extremity of the body

the shorter they are, so that in the lowest regions the length

of the tentacle often does not exceed its thickness; but the

superior tentacles, as well as the inferior, are comparatively

much shorter in the articulate than in the non-articulate type.

This atrophy of organs evidently depends upon a diminution

* We know no form governed by the law of metamerism having 5

metameres ; but it is easy to see that such a form must once have existed,

and that it, perhaps, still exists in some little-investigated sea. If it be

found some day, we may predict with great probability, from the evidence

of the forms with 2 and 4 metameres, that it will also have 4 tentacles

(or 2X) belonging to the inferior circle more atrophied than the rest.

The genus Triridium, to which this hypothetical Hydroid must belong,

is represented in fig. 1.

246 M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydrovda.

of their utility to the organism ; for in the articulate type the

tentacles, instead of fulfilling two functions at once, only per-

form one, namely that of defence against enemies. At the

same time it has become possible for the organ to adapt itself

better to the single function of defence than before, when it

required also to capture food; it has attained the possibility

of retaining the characters which are only useful for defence

and which are even injurious to prehension. It is precisely

this possibility of adapting themselves to the single function

of defence that is the cause of the tentacles in the articulate

type being very short and capitate at their extremity.

Imagine now a Hydroid reposing after a full meal, with

its tentacles quietly expanded in the water and gently moved

to and fro by the waves. When any enemy approaches it

with hostile intentions and is inclined to attack it, the assailant

must most certainly strike against the ends of the tentacles

before it can touch the body of the Hydroid. Upon the effect

produced by this first contact with the ends of the tentacles

will depend all the subsequent actions of the enemy: if it

receives a very strong charge it will be killed on the spot,

or will make its escape as quickly as possible ; in the contrary

case, when the pain caused by the thread-cells arranged in

the ends of tentacles is too insignificant, the enemy may arrive

at the very body of the Hydroid, which is then menaced with

great danger. We see, therefore, that, for the purpose of

self-preservation, it is very important that the first line of

fortifications, so to speak, should be as strong as possible—in

other words, that the ends of the tentacles should be as for-

midably armed as possible, that there should be as many

thread-cells as possible in these ends; for those which are

placed in the other parts of the body and tentacles are not of

equal importance for the purpose of defence. To fulfil all

these conditions it is clear that the tentacles must be inflated

at their extremities, in order that a great quantity of thread-

cells may be accumulated in the enlargement. When once

these tentacles have ceased to act as organs of prehension, it

is no longer necessary that they should be long, fine, supple,

and movable; this is why in the articulate type, at the same

time that they acquire the capitate form, they also become

much shorter than usual.

It generally happens that in those cases in which the body

becomes very much elongated it acquires great flexibility and

the faculty of twisting about very briskly, and so assists the

proboscis in the capture of food, whilst, on the other hand,

this organ in such cases also becomes strongly developed and

very mobile. This flexibility of the body consequently re-

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida. 247

places the want of tentacles for the function of alimentation,

as is very well shown in fig. 5, p. 64, of the ‘ History of British

Hydroid Zoophytes’ by Mr. Hincks, as well as by thedescription

which accompanies it*. In the Hydroids without metameres, in

which the body is consequently very short and not flexible,

the tentacles are always filiform, long, fine, and very supple ;

their length sometimes even becomes very great, as, for ex-

ample, in Monobrachium parasitum, mihit, which has only a

single tentacle.

This, then, is the explanation that, I think, may be given

of the fact that the articulate type of the Hydroids is asso-

ciated with short and capitate tentacles.

This view is further supported by the fact that the capitate

tentacles are exclusively met with in the order Athecata, or

the Gymnoblastic Hydroids—that is to say, among the naked

Hydroids,—and that, on the contrary, in the order Thecaphora,

in which each hydranth is furnished with a hydrotheca or

ealycle of chitine within which it can entirely withdraw itself,

and which often may even be closed by a small operculum,

we only find filiform tentacles. This is very easily explained,

seeing that these Hydroids, which are very well defended from |

all attacks of their enemies by the hydrothece, within which

they can conceal themselves in case of danger, have no neces-

sity for organs so well designed for defence as are the capitate

tentacles. On the other hand, as the Thecaphora grow in

very numerous colonies, the number of individuals sometimes .

exceeding 1000, it is necessary for them to adapt themselves

to the possibility of procuring food in sufficient quantity for

so great a number of individuals living together. This adap-

tation in the case in question consists in the number of long,

fine, filiform tentacles appropriated to prehension with which

each individual is provided becoming very great, greater than

it usually is in the naked Hydroids. (There are generally

not fewer than 16, most frequently 20, 22, 24, and sometimes

30, 32, or more.) |

Finally, I may mention another fact, which will serve in

* In fact the flexibility of the body of such Hydroids as Cladonema

radiatum, Stauridium productum, and others is excessively developed, and

may very well compensate for the want of filiform tentacles in the func-

tion of prehension of nourishment. But it is especially in Clavatella

prolifera that the length, contractility, and flexibility of the body have

attained their maximum; and it is, I think, by this cause that we may

explain why it also has capitate tentacles, although not belonging to the

articulate type. It furnishes the only example of capitate tentacles in a

non-articulate type.

+ See my paper, “ On a new Genus of Hydroids from the White Sea,”

in this journal for September 1877, ser. 4, vol. xx. p. 220.

248 M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydrotda.

support of the explanation above given of the forms with

capitate tentacles. I refer to the blastostyles of the genus

Hydractinia. tis well known that the gonophores, or sexual

individuals, appear upon the surface of the body of the tropho-

somes, or nutritive individuals, which are furnished with

several filiform tentacles. When these gonophores appear,

the individual upon which they are seated, and which is then

called a “ blastostyle,” becomes much thinner and smaller (the

material of the animal being absorbed by the sexual bodies),

the mouth closes, and the tentacles (which, from this moment

lose their importance as organs subserving the purpose of

nutrition, since the mouthless individual cannot feed) become

shorter and shorter and more and more insignificant. Soon

we can only perceive a few knobs or tubercles furnished with

a great quantity of thread-cells, greatly resembling the dila-

tations with which the capitate tentacles are furnished. At

the same time these tentacles or tubercles only retain the

function of defence from enemies.

But I have said that there are exceptions to the rule that

articulation is associated with capitate tenta-

_ cles, and that these exceptions are not con- Fig. 7.

tradictory to the explanation that I have

given; on the contrary, it is possible to |] \ }

explain these exceptions only by admitting

all that I have said above.

_ There are some forms, evidently belonging

to the articulate type, which do not possess

capitate tentacles, but, on the contrary, have

those organs slender, filiform, and very long. \

For example, Clava*, Cordylophora, &c. \ |

(especially Cordylophora) have tentacles

longer than in any other species. This is h A

to be explained as follows :—In becoming ( /]

developed into the articulate type the Hy- ‘

droid became more and more elongated, NI

whilst the tentaclesremained thesame, which

rendered them relatively shorter; and it is |

precisely this that induced their capitate

form. But if we assume that all the time

the elongation of the tentacles proceeded — (ordylophora

side by side with the elongation of the body, lacustris.

we shall see that their original significance,

as aiding in alimentation at the same time as for defence,

* Especially Clava leptostyla, Ag. (A. Agassiz, Illustr. Cat. Mus. Comp.

Zool. ii. p. 170, fig. 274). In the cases in which the tentacles are not

too long we may admit that these species have only become articulate

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida. 249

must remain intact; for in proportion as the body became

elongated, the tentacles lengthened likewise, so’ that they

could always reach the mouth and convey food to it (fig. 7).

But if the functions of the tentacles did not undergo any

change, we need not expect them to change their form, except

perhaps to become longer. This is what we remark in such

forms as Cordylophora, Clava, &c., in which the lowest ten-

tacles are not in the least shorter or less developed than the

upper ones; on the contrary, they are sometimes a little longer;

and in all cases they are all, without exception, longer than

the body, owing to which they all have the faculty of assisting

in the capture of prey, as has been very well described by

Van Beneden in the case of Cordylophora*.

I must still mention an articulate type, represented by the

genera Tubularia, Acharadria, Corymorpha, Pennaria, &c.,

in which the superior metamere has

the tentacles capitate, but much less Fig. 8.

developed than those of the other me-

tamere. All these forms are derived

from a non-articulate form with tenta-

cles so well developed, so long, and in

such great quantity, that when the

formation of the second metamere was

induced by some cause, the tentacles

belonging to it were perfectly useless

to the organism, which caused them

to become atrophied, and at the same

time capitate—that is to say, adapted

solely to the defence of the organism | '

(fig. 8). As the Medusa may be re- © Acharadria larync.

garded as a hydranth reversed, and in

which the tentacles (radial canals) are united together by a

gelatinous substance (ectoderm or bell), it may be understood

that the Medusz which have tentacles at the extremity of

the manubrium belong to the same articulate type as Tubu-

laria, Acharadria, &c., with two metameres, the inferior of

which is more strongly marked than the upper.

To complete this morphological chapter I propose to explain

in a few words a point of view from which I regard all the

quite recently, and that they are in process of forming capitate tentacles,

or of lengthening them. Thus Mr. Allman remarks, “Some Hydroids

with filiform tentacles show, like Clava squamata, a tendency to the ter-

minal enlargement of the tentacles in certain states of contraction”

(Allman, Mon. Gymnobl. Hydr. p. 245).

* Van Beneden, ‘ Faune littorale de Belgique,’ Polypes.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 17

250 M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida.

forms and in general all the morphological facts presented by

the Hydroids, and which I think may contribute somewhat to

the better comprehension of the idea of the Hydroid, so to

speak, and to concentrate all the differences presented by this

group in a single representation.

Every one at present regards a hydranth, with its tentacles,

as a single individual, furnished with organs radially ar-

ranged. For my part, I believe we must regard such an

organism, not as an individual, but as a colony composed of

two kinds of individuals—the one kind appropriated to the

function of seizing food, with the gastral cavity but slightly

developed, without a mouth, very flexible and thin (tentacles) ;

the other destined exclusively to nourish the whole colony,

furnished with a mouth, and with a large cavity in the body

which is but slightly flexible (the actual body of the hydranth).

We should thus have a polymorphic colony after the fashion

of the Siphonophora; and this polymorphism is explained here

also by adaptation to different functions by the division of

labour. Certainly before this division of labour was effected

the colony only consisted of similar individuals, produced from

the parent individual by gemmation ; and it was then that the

individuality of each individual must have been most strongly

marked ; but in course of time, in proportion as the division of

labour was effected, this individuality was effaced, and the

whole acquired more or less the character of a single individual

furnished with several organs. This is what we see now-a-

days. Therefore, in saying that the hydranth must be re-

garded not as an individual but as a polymorphic colony, I

do not wish by any means to say that each tentacle is a true

individual, but only that it has been so formerly, and that it

has retained [this character] in part even to the present day.

I may, moreover, urge the enormous difference which exists

between the organ tentacle and the organs of other animals

—a foot, for example, and still more the hand of man;

this difference is profound and primordial (principielle), be-

cause a hand (or, in general, any organ) is not homologous

with a tentacle, and is only analogous to it in its physiological

function.

Such a view as this would perfectly explain the origin of

the organ tentacles, which would be merely the result of the

reproduction of a Protohydra, Leuck., or rather an Archhydra,

Hiick., by the process of gemmation. From this point of

view, therefore, I must give the name of individual to each

axis of cylindrical form, composed of ectoderin and endoderm ;

and it is very remarkable that any Hydroid, however com-

plicated it may be, appeared at first precisely in the form of a

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida. 251

cylinder with a single diplopolar axis, in this respect differing

in no way from the first appearance of a tentacle upon a

hydranth, or of a medusa. In fact it is impossible to distin-

guish a tentacle, a medusa, and a hydranth at the first moment

of their appearance (fig. 9) ; each of them

is merely an Archhydra or a Protohydra,

which, if we accept the biogenetie law,

leads us to believe that they are all dif- 2

ferent modifications of a single primitive

organism, and that they are all homolo- (A A

| c 2]

gous.

At any rate, I believe that to regard

a (stauraxonic) hydranth as a colony of a Young hydrotheca.

{monaxonic) Archydre is to look at the ® te Bh eg

affair as it is fundamentally. We Bt Sirah

Let us further remember two interesting Hydroids, namely

Ophiodes mirabilis* and Ophiodes parasiticus, Sars}, which, be-

sides the tentaculiferous individuals (colonies according to me),

have monaxonic individuals, without tentacles, and absolutely

presenting no difference from the tentacles of certain Hydroids.

And this case proves further that the tentacle (an individual),

which cannot serve the colony either by procuring or by

digesting food, only remains useful to it by serving to defend

it, a function which induced the capitate form of the tentacles.

Tn fact, the monaxonic individuals have no mouth, and there-

fore do not aid in nutrition; and, at the same time, they are

often placed so far from the colony-individuals that they can-

not serve for seizing food. ‘The function of defence, therefore,

alone remains for them; and we find that they have acquired

the capitate form, which we have seen to be appropriated to

defence.

Fig. 9.

II. Remarks on the Reproduction of Obelia

flabellata, Hincks.

Among about forty species of Hydroids that I have ob-

served and collected in the White Sea, Obelia flabellata,

Hincks, is very frequently met with. At the end of the

month of June I found it with a great quantity of gonothece,

all filled with young Medusz in various stages of development.

Although in all other respects the Obelia flabellata of the

* Hincks, Mon: Brit. Hydr. Zooph. pl. xlv. fig. 2, p: 231,

t+ G. Sars, “Bidr. til Kundsk. om Norges. Hydroider,” Forh. i Vidensk,

Selsk. i Christiania, 1873, p. 109, pl. iv. figs. 5-8.

17#

252 M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydrovda.

White Sea did not differ at all from that described by Hincks*,

the gonotheca was distinguished by the absence of the little

tubular elevation placed upon its flattened summit, of which I

never observed any trace; nevertheless it can only be re-

garded as a feeble arctic variety of the British Obelia flabel-

lata.

The development of the Medusez has been studied princi-

pally by L. Agassizt, who was the first to publish some im-

portant facts, and by F. E. Schultzet, as well as by Mr. All-

man (the last on Corymorpha nutans), who have made some

alterations in the views current before their time. But as most

attention has been paid to the Meduse belonging to the order

Athecata, I have thought that it might not be altogether with-

out interest to have their results confirmed by a Medusa be-

longing to the quite different order Thecaphora.

Plate XIII. fig. 1 shows the first commencement of a Medusa,

which only consists of a protuberance (expulsion) of the walls

of the blastostyle, composed, like the latter, of two layers, the

ectoderm and endoderm, separated from one another by a very

thin layer, which is not so distinctly contoured as in the buds ;

it is, no doubt, the hyaline intermediate layer between the

ectoderm and endoderm which Schultze calls the “ Stiitzla-

melle.” In form, this bud differs in no respect from a young

hydranth developed from a planula; and both have exactly

the same form as Protohydra Leuckartit, Greef, and the same

as must have been possessed by Hackel’s Archhydra§, 7. e. if

we choose to accept Hickel’s biogenetic law. The next

stage is represented in fig. 2 (Pl. XIII.) ; we see that the bud

has considerably widened, and that the ectoderm (which is

here also distinctly separated from the endoderm by the double-

contoured line) has become much thicker at the summit of

the bud than elsewhere. The thick part, which is in the form

of acone, is turned downwards towards the endoderm, in which

the cone buries itself; the inner surface of the endoderm and

also the general cavity of the body retain their original form :

they do not form any expulsion; and their apex is always

hemispherical. But, at the same time, we already remark

that the depression of the outer surface of the endoderm is not

a regular cone, but, on the contrary, that the edges of this

depression are dentate. There are four teeth formed by the

superior layer of the endoderm, and between these teeth four

depressions occupied by the inferior layer of the ectoderm. It

* ‘History of British Hydroid Zoophytes,’ i. p. 157.

t ‘Contributions.’ .

t ‘Ueber den Bau der Syncoryne Sarsit,’ 1873, p. 27.

§ It is his form “ monaxonia diplopola inarticulata.”

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida. 253

is easy to see that the first stage consists in the depression of

the ectoderm (it is the latter that is active here), and that

the first indications of radial canals are not the result of the

expulsion of the endoderm into the ectoderm, but, on the con-

trary, of the ¢mpulsion of the ectoderm into the endoderm.

The latter continues quite passive ; it submits to the action

of the ectoderm, which of itself begins to thicken, and by this

means to bury itself in the endoderm. The following stages

(figs. 3, 4, and 5) are only the more advanced stages of

the process which we have already analyzed: the ectoderm

becomes more and more developed, at the same time that it

buries itself in the interior, leaving in their place only the

four spots, which thus become converted into radial canals.

In fig. 8 the apex of the cavity is already excavated, and there

are faint indications of the four canals (only two are repre-

sented); but speedily this cavity again becomes convex, and

it is from this moment only that the endoderm becomes active;

it thickens in the middle (fig. 4), and begins in its turn to

penetrate the ectoderm in order to form the manubrium. In

fig. 5 we see the same stage with the four canals. It will be

seen that between the two neighbouring canals there is only a

uniform layer of ectoderm in which they are immersed, which

proves that F’, Schultze is right in not admitting any interme-

diate layer between the canals and distinct from the ectoderm,

as was done by Agassiz. After all this, according to F.

Schultze, the ectoderm itself splits into two layers, one of

which produces the muscular sac belonging to the umbrella,

and the other forms the superior layer of the manubrium*.

Unfortunately various circumstances drew me away from

these observations ; so that I have not seen the stage inter-

mediate between fig. 5 and fig. 6, in which the Medusa is

ready to detach itself.

As the Medusa of Obelia flabellata is, so far as I know,

undescribed, I will give a short account ofit. Pl. XIII. fig. 7

represents a mature example, and shows that this Medusa

differs very little from other Meduse of the same genus, as,

for example, that of Obelia dichotoma figured by Hincks fF.

The umbrella is very flat, but slightly campanulate, without

thread-cells, with four radial canals, four oval sporosacs filled

with ova and placed at the extremities of the four canals,

where they unite with the circular canal, and where conse-

* By this the development of the Medusa of Obelia flabellata differs

from that of Corymorpha nutans, in which the division of the ectoderm

takes place sooner, as early as the first indications of the radial canals

(Allman, Monogr. Gymnobl. Hydr. p. 77).

+ Loc. cit. pl. xxviii. fig. 1, ¢, d.

254 M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydrovda.

quently the nutritive material attains its maximum abun-

dance; for here the current of the radial canal unites with the

current of the circular canal. The margin of the Medusa is

furnished with eight lithocysts and a great quantity (more

than thirty) of short tentacles, which are only sixteen in

number at the moment of liberation. The manubrium is

short, changes much in form, and is furnished at its orifice

with four rounded lobes, The size is very variable, but it is

usually about 6 millims. in diameter. It is completely colour-

less, whitish; the sporosacs are slightly yellowish. By

leaving in a marine aquarium a branch of Obelia flabellata

with gonothece, one can always obtain as many Meduse as

one wants. Fig. 7 a shows a Medusa of the natural size.

The ova are large, of irregular form (Pl. XIII. figs. 8, 9, 10),

with avery thin membrane and granular contents. In the

middle, or more frequently near the margin, we always ob-

serve very distinctly a large, clear and non-granular nucleus,

more regular than the ovum itself. In the nucleus we always

observe one or several nucleoli, and in each nucleolus a nu-

cleolulus. All these formations are distinguished from each

other by their behaviour with transmitted light; when the

first of them is lighter, the second is darker, and the third

again lighter. On changing a little the focal distance of the

microscope all is changed ; what was dark becomes lighter,

and vice versd. In the youngest ova we see only one nucleo-

lus and one nucleolulus (fig. 8); the latter is usually very

variable in its form, which is most frequently irregular.

Sometimes it is very large (fig. 11, representing a nucleus

very much enlarged). Further, we see ova in which the

nucleolus has acquired a biscuit-shape, in each half of which

we observe a nucleolulus which has evidently divided into

two (figs. 9,14). A subsequent stage may be seen in fig. 10,

in which the nucleolus is completely divided and each half

contains a nusleolulus, A still more advanced stage shows

(fig. 12) a nucleus with four nucleoli, each containing a

nucleolulus, which is very large and variable in form. The

form changed before my eyes with considerable rapidity, and

the whole moved like a little Ameba. Lastly, the succeeding

stage that I have been able to observe (fig. 13) is furnished

with a nucleus with a great quantity (about twenty) of

nucleoli, almost every one of which contained a very small

nucleolulus, which, however, it was sometimes impossible to

define.

It is evident that all these nucleoli have originated from a

single one by division, and that this division was always

preceded by the division of the nucleolulus into two. Only

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydrotda. 255

once I observed in a perfectly round nucleolus more than one

nucleolulus, or rather a single nucleolulus in the centre sur-

rounded by five or six’ very small granules forming an aureole

round the centre.

As I observed all these stages of development in ova which

had not issued from the sporosac, and, moreover, there was

not a male individual in the neighbourhood, all the processes

described took place in ova not yet fecundated. It would be

interesting to know why there is all this enormous complica-

tion. But as yet the facts are too few to permit us even to

think of an explanation.

Lastly, this hydroid has offered me another interesting fact

which [ will mention. For the purpose of observing the

development of the Meduse I placed a branch of Obelia

flabellata upon a slide, and laid over it a covering-glass ; the

sea water by evaporating became salter and salter, which

(and perhaps also the want of oxygen) appeared to affect the

organism in a singular manner. In a short time I remarked

that the coenosare of the stem detached itself in fragments of

different sizes, especially near the end. First of all there

appeared a constriction in a particular spot; this constriction

became deeper and deeper ; and finally the two parts separated

entirely, so that the end of the stem formed a fragment quite

independent of the colony. ‘The two parts contracted, moved

away from each other, and became rounded at their ends, so

as to leave no trace of their lesion (Pl. XIII. fig. 16); the

ectoderm and the endoderm recurved at the newly formed end

just in the same way as in the end of the stem: the cavity

was very distinct ; and I could even observe the movement of

nutritive granules, which I also saw in perfectly fresh

specimens. Except wanting the mouth and cilia, this little

cylinder much resembled a planula. In fig. 17 is repre-

sented a hydrotheca not yet completely developed, closed at

its future aperture, in which the ccenosare is contracted, not

into a cylinder, but into a perfectly regular globular form,

with a cavity, and surrounded by two layers. At one spot a

very fine and colourless membrane, evidently produced by the

ball, is seen to detach itself; this, no doubt, is a new layer of

perisare formed by the ectoderm ; and I believe that in the

other cases the perisare is also present, but that in them it

adheres very closely, for which reason it cannot be perceived.

What is the signification of these structures? For what

purpose are they formed? Is it not a sort of encysting,

analogous to the process so often met with among the Infu-

soria? Are not these fragments of the Hydroid the result of

its dismemberment, caused by the evaporation of the water ?

256 Geological Society.

and is it not their function to survive these unfavourable con-

ditions and thus serve, not only for the preservation of the

individual, but also for propagation ?

I think we may answer all these questions in the affirma-

tive, and regard these fragments as formations analogous to

what is known to us from Prof. Allman’s* observations on

the spontaneous fission of Schizocladium ramosum and Cory-

morpha nutans, as a means of reproduction by fission. In

Schizocladium ramosum the upper portion of a branch becomes

detached as a little cylinder, just in the same way as in Obelia

flabellata; and then, after having ruptured the perisarc, this

free portion departs from the colony, forms the perisare again,

and becomes transformed into an individual.

[To be continued. ]

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.

GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

April 11th, 1877.—Prof. P. Martin Duncan, M.B., F.RB.S.,

President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

2. “ The Bone-caves of Creswell Crags.’—Third Paper. By the

Rey. J. Magens Mello, M.A., F.G.S.

In this paper the author gave an account of the continued ex-

ploration of these caves, and of the completion of the examination.

of the Robin-Hood Cave, noticed in his previous communications.

Five deposits could be distinguished in the Robin-Hood Cave,

namely, when all present :—

1. Stalagmite, 2 ft.

2. Breccia, with bones and flint implements, 1 ft. 6 in.

3. Cave-earth, with bones and implements, 1 ft. 9 in.

4. Mottled bed, with bones and implements, 2 ft.

5. Red sand, with bones and quartzite implements, 3 ft.

Variations both in thickness and in character occur in different

parts of the cave. The surface-soil yielded traces of Romano-British

occupation, such as enamelled bronze fibule, fragments of pottery,

&c. The most important discoveries were made in the cave-earth ;

and chief among these was a fragment of bone, having on it a well

executed outline of the head and neck of a horse, the first recorded

discovery of any such work of art in this country. The cave-earth

also yielded a canine of Machairodus latidens, hitherto obtained in

England only in Kent’s Hole. Numerous remains of the Pleistocene

Mammalia already recorded were found, together with a great

* Allman, “ Reproduction by Fission in Hydroids,” Brit. Assoc. Report,

1870; and Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. 1871, pl. ii. figs. 2, 3.

Geological Society. 257

number of implements of quartzite and flint, and two of clay-iron-

stone. The quartzite implements were most abundant in the lowest

bed.

In the other cave examined, the Church Hole, which consists

principally of a long fissure in the south side of the crags opposite

Robin Hood's Cave, the succession of beds was nearly the same as

in the latter. In the surface-soil near its mouth a fine bronze

brooch was found. Some of the implements met with in the cave-

earth were of great interest, and several of them were of bone.

Bones of Rhinoceros were found in great abundance; and those of

the Mammoth, Horse, &c. were also plentiful.

As the result of the exploration of these caverns, the author said

it is evident that during the Pleistocene period Derbyshire and the

adjoining counties were inhabited by a very numerous and diversified

fauna, the vast forests and pastures which extended far to the east

and south offering a congenial home to the Mammoth, the Woolly

Rhinoceros, the Hippopotamus, the Irish Elk, the Reindeer, the

Bison, and the Horse, whilst among them the Hyena, the Glutton,

the Bear, the Lion, the Wolf, the Fox, and the great sabre-toothed

Machairodus roamed in search of prey; and that with these and

other animals man lived and waged a more or less precarious

struggle, amidst the vicissitudes of a varying climate, sheltering

himself in the numerous caves of the district, which were already the

haunts of the hyzena and its companions.

3. “ On the Mammal-fauna of the Caves of Creswell Crags.” By

Prof. W. Boyd Dawkins, M.A., F.R.S., F.G.S.

In this paper the author gave an account of the remains found in

the caves explored by the Rev. J. M. Mello. He stated that the

recent explorations had proved that the Robin-Hood Cave was

inhabited by Hyzenas, not only during the deposition of the cave-

earth and breccia, but also during that of the red-sand and clay

underlying it, which had also furnished traces of the existence of man.

An immense number of specimens were collected in this cavern,

including bones of the following animals :—Machairodus latidens,

Cave-Lion, Wild Cat, Leopard, Spotted Hyzna*, Fox *, Wolf, Bear,

Reindeer *, Irish Elk*, Bison*, Horse *, Woolly Rhinoceros *,

Mammoth *, and Hare *—those marked with an * occurring in the

red sand and clay as well as in the cave-earth, although much more

sparingly. The traces of man consisted of more than 1000 imple-

ments; and, as before, those made of quartzite were generally

found in the lower strata. The most important indication of

human handiwork was the outline of the head and fore quarters of

a horse, engraved upon a fragment of the rib of some animal.

Among the animal remains the most interesting discovery was that

of a canine of Machairodus latidens; it consisted of the sabre-

shaped crown only, which appeared to have been purposely broken

away from the root.

The superficial layer of earth in the cave contained remains be-

258 Miscellaneous.

longing to the historic and prehistoric ages, including a Romano-.

British enamelled bronze brooch, of the same pattern as one found

in the Victoria Cave, fragments of pottery, human bones and

teeth, and bones of both wild and domestic animals.

The distribution of the remains found in the Church Hole Cave

agreed generally with that above described ; traces of human occu-

pation and remains of the Hyzna occurred both in the cave-

earth and in the red sand and clay. The bones found indicated the

following animals :—Lion, Polecat, Hyzena, Fox, Wolf, Bear, Rein-

deer, Irish Elk, Bison, Horse, Woolly Rhinoceros, Mammoth, and

Hare—all common to both the cave-deposits, except the Lion,

which was found only in the cave-earth, and the Polecat, of which

a single jaw occurred in the red sand. The latter contained a

larger proportion of the remains than in the Robin-Hood Cave; but,

as in the latter, the quartzite implements were more abundant in

the lower strata of the deposits. Among the articles of human

workmanship was a perfect and well-shaped bone needle. The

superficial soil of the Church Hole Cave also contained articles of

the historic and prehistoric age, including a bronze fibula, frag-

ments of pottery (one medieval), and bones of man and animals.

From the presence of these objects in the surface-soil the author

inferred that the caves of Creswell Crags, like those of Yorkshire

and elsewhere, were used as places of refuge by the Brit-welsh

during the conquest of the country by the English.

After noticing the conditions of the fossil bones found in the

caves, the author proceeded to remark upon the general results of

the explorations with regard to their Pleistocene fauna, and con-

cluded that there is no evidence from these or other caves in this

country to prove that their faunas are either pre- or interglacial,

and that we have no proof of the existence of pre- or interglacial

man in Britain.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On the Migrations and Metamorphoses of the Tapeworms of

the Shrews. By M. A. Vixtor.

Dusarpin discovered and described several species of tapeworms in-

habiting the intestines of the shrews: thus Z’enia scutigera lives in

Sorex tetragonurus ; while the little Sorex araneus harbours three

species, namely 7’, scalaris, tiara, and pistillum. Dujardin was aec-

quainted with the various stages of the development of these species,

except the place and manner of the passage from the proscolex to

the scolex, a gap in our knowledge of their history which M. Villot

has filled up by the discovery that this change takes place in

Glomeris, and that the cystic parasite described by him last year

under the name of Staphylocystis biliarius represents this stage in

the development of aspecies very near to 7’. scutigera and T’. scalaris,

which, moreover, are very closely allied. In these two species,

according to M. Villot, the hooks are of the same form and dimen-

Miscellaneous. 259

sions, measuring from 0-033 to 0-040 millim. ‘Their number is ten

in 7’. scutigera, twelve in 7. scalaris. Staphylocystis biliarius usually

has fourteen hooks, which also attain a length of 0-040 millim.

The difference in number is so small that it may be a question

whether Dujardin did not observe individuals of a single species

which had lost more or less of their hooks. M. Villot unhesita-

tingly refers his Staphylocystis micracanthus to Tenia pistillum. He

sums up his results as follows :—

It is now easy, taking into consideration the habits of their suc-

cessive hosts, to summarize the history of these parasites. The pro-

glottids, adult individuals, loaded with ova and embryos, detach

themselves from the strobile and escape from the intestine of the

shrew along with the excrements; then the embryos pierce the

envelopes, and, having got free, wait patiently in the moist ground

on which they have been deposited for the moment when they can

introduce themselves into the body of the Glomeris. Their migra- .

tion must, in the first place, be purely passive ; for we cannot other-

wise understand the important fact that the Staphylocysts are

always attached to the Malpighian tubes. They probably pass into

the stomachs of their hosts along with the half-decomposed vegeta-

ble débris upon which the latter feed. At the entrance of the

intestines the embryos may get into the biliary vessels. travel

through these for some time, and then traverse their walls, to take

up their abode in the adipose tissue which surrounds those organs.

Arrived at their dwelling-place they lose their hooks, which have

now become useless, pass into the vesicular state, proliferate, and

hecome scoleces. A shrew meeting with an infested Glomeris will

devour it as readily as another, introducing into its own stomach at

once a hundred scoleces, which on arriving in the intestine of the

insectivore will attach themselves, and in their turn bud and form

strobiles. The proglottids of the latter will acquire genital organs.

and give birth to a new generation.— Comptes Rendus, November 19,

1877, p. 971.

On some Monstrosities of Asteracanthion rubens. By M. A. Grarp.

On the beach at Wimereux, where the common starfish (Astera-

canthion rubens) is excessively abundant, especially during the

winter and spring months, we find pretty frequently among these

animals various interesting monstrosities. Thus we may every

year obtain many individuals possessing six rays, instead of five,

the normal number.

As the number of rays varies in the group Asteriade in allied

species, and sometimes even in a particular species, it was natural

to see in these aberrations either a simple case of polymelism, or a

numerical variation in the constitution of the cenobiwm, according

as one gave to each ray of a starfish the value of a member or that

of an individual.

There is no doubt that a good many of the six-rayed Asteracan-

thions are really monstrosities of this kind. In fact we find, from

time to time, specimens in which one ray is bifurcated about the

260 Miscellaneous.

middle, or only in the outer fourth ; and we may explain, by a similar

division taking place at the level of the disk, the numerous cases of

Ahexamelism, in which, except in the number of rays, we find nothing

abnormal in the constitution of the starfish.

But this is not always the case. Ihave long since expressed the

opinion that the radial symmetry of the Echinoderms is only appa-

rent, and that the antimera of those animals are arranged in ac-

cordance with a quincuncial spiral, in such a fashion that an urchin

or a starfish may be compared, from the point of view of general

morphology, not to a regular corolla, but to those flowers which are

symmetrical with respect to a plane, such as those of the Papiliona-

cee or Labiate. In the latter, in fact, there exists a combination

of bilateral symmetry and of the spiral arrangement which we also

meet with in the Echinoderms. Starting from this notion I wished

to see whether the anal glands of Asteracanthion rubens had not the

same morphological value as one of the pairs of hepatic ceca. For

this purpose I opened a certain number of specimens with six arms,

and saw, with surprise, that several of them presented two sand-

canals terminating at a single madreporic plate, which, however,

was formed by the union of two plates. Consequently I had before

me true double monsters. Couch, the excellent author of the

‘ Fauna of Cornwall,’ has described* a specimen of A. rubens (which,

following Fleming, he calls A. glacialis), possessing eight rays.

This individual presented three madreporic plates, forming the three

angles of a triangle inscribed between the bases of four rays; the

four other rays were outside this triangle. This specimen was

therefore a triple monster, evidently of rarer occurrence than the

double monsters of which we have just been speaking, but perfectly

analogous to them.

From the preceding statement it follows that the examples of

Asteracanthion rubens possessing more than five arms may be likened

sometimes to the ccenobia of Botryllus, in which the number of

unities constituting the ccenobium yaries from one cormus to

another, and sometimes in the same cormus ; and sometimes to the

compound coenobia of the genera Amarecium and Polyclinum. In

other words, they are sometimes double monsters, sometimes simple

cases of polymelism. It isremarkable that these two distinct cases,

presented in a teratological form in <Asteracanthion rubens, also

exist in the normal state in the group of Echinoderms. The So-

lasters, for example, have a variable number of arms, but only a

single sand-canal; while some examples of Ophiactis have several

sand-canals, and are even capable of multiplying by a spontaneous

scission of their compound ccenobium into several independent

colonies.— Comptes Rendus, November 19, 1877, p. 973.

On the Feeding of Dinameeba.

Prof. Leidy remarked that bias frequently proved to be an obsta-

cle in the way of research. In his study of the Rhizopods he had

repeatedly watched different kinds of Ameba for long periods with

* Mag. Nat. Hist. 2nd ser. no. 27.

Miscellaneous. 261

the view of ascertaining their usual mode of feeding. Ordinary

experience had prepossessed him to direct his attention to the fore

part of the body (that is to say, the part in advance in the move-

ments of the animal) as the point at which food would be taken.

He had been surprised at the rarity of the occurrence in which he

had seen Amcbe swallow food when the apparent greediness of the

animal was taken into consideration. In the last number of the

‘ Popular Science Review’ there is an interesting article by Dr. P.

M. Dunean, entitled “Studies amongst Amwbe.” From this he

learned, from the observations of Dr. Duncan, that the Amabe

habitually take their food at what may be considered the posterior

part of the body. With this hint he examined specimens of the

curious amoeboid animal described under the name of Dinameba,

of which he had recently obtained a good supply from the ditches

of a cranberry-field at Atco, New Jersey. He had since on several

occasions had the opportunity of seeing the Dinameba take its food,

which was done. as indicated by Dr. Duncan, at the posterior part

of the body. One instance appeared to him to be particularly inter-

esting, and was related as follows :—

Seeing a specimen of Dinameba with its left side in contact with

a filament of the alga Bambusina Brebissonii, he was led to watch

it. On closer examination it proved that the alga entered to the

left of the tail and extended through the body, causing a slight

bulge of the ectosare by its other end to the left of the head. The

Dinameba became slightly elongated, and the alga sunk more in-

wardly from behind. The former moved with an inclination to

the right, causing the alga to assume an oblique position from left

to right. The anterior end of the alga suddenly protruded from

the body of the animal, so that this appeared to be pierced by it.

In this condition the alga entered the Dinameba to the left of the

tail and protruded at the right of the head. . Gradually the alga

was made to assume a transverse position. The right extremity

of the alga now became depressed and the left elevated, so that

the alga assumed nearly its original position, in which it appeared

to perforate the left border of the animal obliquely from the tail

end. It gradually acquired a central position, penetrating the

animal from tail to head. The Dinameba now elongated at both

ends, a third greater than its former length, extending in a fusi-

form manner upon the alga. The animal next doubled upon itself,

so that both ends of the alga approached in front and protruded

side by side from the head. One extremity of the alga then sunk

within the Dinameba, and subsequently the other extremity, so

that the filament, about three times the length of the animal, be-

came coiled up within it.

The observation of swallowing the Bambusina was made in the

afternoon of September 15. In the evening, several hours after

the first observation, on looking at the Dinameba, which had been

preserved in an animalcule-cage, it was observed sitting, as it were,

on a large filament of the alga Didymoprium Grevilit. The pos-

terior end of the animal extended as a cylindrical expansion along

the alga to a greater length than the breadth of the body of the

262 Miscellaneous.

Dinameba, and so closely clasped it as to contract the gelatinous

envelope of the alga to little more than the thickness of the green

cells. After some time the alga suddenly broke, and the two por-

tions were gradually bent backward and made slowly to approach,

so as to become parallel with each other. One of the pieces was

then drawn within the animal a convenient length, broken off, and

completely swallowed, and this was followed by a similar move-

ment of the other piece. Shortly after the first rupture of the

alga, when the two portions projected at an obtuse angle from the

back portion of the Dinamaba, the animal contracted in length,

and discharged from the right side a mass of bodies, which con-

sisted of the separated cells of Bambusina, probably from the fila-

ment it had swallowed in the afternoon.

Prof. Leidy remarked that the two successive observations on

the feeding of Dinameba appeared to be particularly fortunate,

as they apparently explained certain facts in the habits of the

animal. Dinameba had been noticed to be especially fond of the

alga Didymoprium ; for it was found to be present as the principal

element of the food in numerous specimens. Bambusina was less

frequently found among the food contents of the animal. The

alge were equally abundant in the localities of the Dinameba ;

and, from the observations detailed, it would appear that the Drdy-

moprium is preferred as food from the comparative ease with which

its filaments are broken into pieces of convenient size for swal-

lowing.

The observations are, moreover, interesting from their indicating

discrimination and purpose in the movements of one of the simplest

forms of animal life. The movements are to be viewed as reflex

in character, though resembling the voluntary movements by which

the most intelligent animal would prepare morsels of food of con-

venient form to take into the mouth. Im striking contrast were

the movements, noticed on several occasions, by which an Oseilla-

toria obtained entrance into the empty shell of an Arcella, and

there, coiled up, crept round and round incessantly.—Proc. Acad.

Nat. Sci. Philad., Oct. 1877.

On the Structure of Amphioxus lanceolatus. By Prof. ScunnrpEr.

The longitudinal muscles of the body-wall may be divided into

the longus dorsi and rectus abdominis. The rectus reaches from

the third segment to the anus, and lies beneath the chorda and

within the longus dorsi. Its segments are the same as those of the

longus; so that for the above extent each myocomma divides into a

portion belonging to the /ongus and a portion belonging to the rectus.

The laminze of which, as Grenacher demonstrated, the fibrillar sub-

stance of the longitudinal muscles consists, converge in the longus

towards the spinal cord ; in the rectus towards a point situated out-

side the body—to the right for the right side, to the left for the left

side.

The nervous system may be very beautifully isolated by the

method described by Owsianikow, but only partially ; and, indeed,

Owsianikow’s figure by no means shows the whole nervous system,

Miscellaneous. 263

as was formerly supposed, but, besides the spinal cord and brain,

only the upper sensory nerves. The inferior roots are best seen in

transverse sections, as Stieda correctly states. The description of

the nerves given by Stieda would be perfectly correct had he not

started from the supposition that the nerve-roots lie only in the

sheaths of the myocommata (ligaments). According to Stieda the

nerves entering the ligaments would be alternately a sensory and a

motor one. But only the former enters the ligaments ; the motor

nerves are interligamental. Behind each ligament originates an

upper root, which soon enters the ligament and runs towards the

skin. The fibres are very delicate, and united at their issue from

the spinal cord into a round cord. There is no dilatation; small

nuclei lying in the commencement of the cord probably represent

the spinal ganglion. The motor roots behave differently. The en-

velope of connective tissue, which closely embraces the spinal cord,

is furnished along its lower edge, and, indeed, in the entire posterior

half of each myocomma, with apertures through which fibres of the

spinal cord, the motor nerves, issue. The fibres proceeding from the

apertures unite first of all into a flat cord, and then radiate upwards

and downwards over the inner free edges of the fibrillar lamine.

Their direction crosses the edges. For each edge a fibre bends

round in a wide curve, and applies itself thereto under a very acute

angle. These fibres enter into the fissure between the rectus and

the longus dorsi. Large specimens, 4 centims. long, present a re-

markable appearance in the five segments following behind the anus.

Those fibres which go to the upper half of the part of the myo-

comma lying below the spinal cord are converted into transversely

striated muscular fibres from the lamine nearly to the spinal cord.

I use the term “converted” only for the more easy description of

the facts. When the spinal cord is isolated by Owsianikow’s

method, the origins of the motor nerves appear upon it only as slight

conical elevations.

The heart commences at the free end of the cecum, runs along

the upper edge of the latter towards the intestine, and, bending

round, then passes along the ventral surface of the intestine towards

the branchiw. The part lying on the cecum is at first a simple

tube, then a system of from four to five parallel tubes repeatedly

communicating with one another and possessing cecal diverticula

on both sides. The part situated by the intestine is again simple.

Of the branchial rods some, which are rather thicker, are cleft at

the lower end, the others not. Besides this previously known

peculiarity, they are distinguished by the form of the transverse

section and the shape of the canal contained in them. The blood

passes from the branches of the branchial artery first of all into the

canal of the cleft rods, and thence through the vessels running along

(not in the interior of) the transverse rods, into the uncleft rods.

The canals of the branchial rods open above into branchial veins,

which, bending backwards and downwards, open into the aortas.

From the aorta, which is double in the branchial part, although

simple further back, there originates on each side interligamentally

an upper branch to the longitudinal muscles, and ligamentally an

inferior branch, which, running along the ligaments, ramifies upon

264 Miscellaneous.

the surface of the ventral cavity. No breaking-up of these branches

into capillaries, or union of them with veins, was to be detected.

Behind the branchial part, along the intestine, capillaries issue

from the aorta on both sides without the intervention of arteries ;

and these spread out reticularly in the connective layer of the

muscularis mucose, hereafter to be described. Their occurrence was

detected by Langerhans. ‘The intestinal vein is situated upon the

same layer ventrally. It consists posteriorly of about five reticularly

communicating parallel tubes; anteriorly the number is reduced

until there is only one, which gradually narrows, and finally disap-

pears at the commencement of the cecum. From behind, as far as

the region where some three tubes are present, short transverse

branches, into which the capillaries open, are given off on both sides

from the margin of the tubular system. Then follows a space with-

out transverse branches or other openings for the capillaries, until

finally, before the termination, transverse branches again occur ;

these receive no capillaries, but probably open freely into the lym-

phatie space, which has still to be described. The intestinal veins

and their transverse branches are closely covered with transverse

muscular fibres.

Joh. Miller, to whom a portion of these vessels was known, sup-

posed that there was a vascular connexion of the intestinal veins

with the vessel that I have called the heart; but nothing of the kind

can be demonstrated.

The intestinal canal is formed by an inner and an outer layer.

The inner layer consists of the intestinal epithelium and a muscu-

laris composed principally of transverse fibres, which, therefore,

may very well be regarded as a muscularis mucose. In its funda-

mental substance this layer contains the capillaries ; and the intes-

tinal vein is applied to its outer surface. The outer layer consists -

of the peritoneal epithelium and a muscular layer also composed of

transverse fibres. At the spot where the intestine passes into the

branchial region the muscles are particularly thick and partly trans-

versely striated. Between these two layers, which may also be

traced in the branchial part, there is a wide space. Its complicated

structure has been described by Langerhans, and particularly accu-

rately by Rolph. I can confirm his description, and only add to it

that from the portion of this space which surrounds the branchial

artery a branch may be traced along the outer surface of each of

the cleft branchial rods to the section running above along the

branchie. But whatever may be the development of this space, in

adult animals it does not serve, as Rolph supposes, as a body-cavity,

but as a venous or lymphatic space, which cannot well be separated

in Amphioxus. It not only bears a great quantity of materials

which coagulate in chromic acid and alcohol, but it also leads into

the heart. The heart may be traced for some distance forward from

the apex of the cecum, where it then opens into the venous space

running along above the branchie. Besides these largest and long-

est veins, there are shorter veins, which, on each branchial rod along

the cecum, enter the heart. These veins of the heart were seen by

J. Miller, but regarded by him as bands between the cecum and

the branchiee.—Oberhessischen Gesellsch. fiir Natur- und Heilkunde,

Giessen, November 14, 1877.

THE ANNALS

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES. ]

No. 4. APRIL 1878.

XXX.—On the Genus Haliphysema, with Description of seve-

ral Forms apparently allied to it. By the Rev. A. M.

Norman, M.A.

[Plate XVI. ]

IT is now many years since Haliphysema first attracted my

attention ; and well do I remember the extreme interest felt

at finding the type of H. ramulosum, which was dredged off the

Guernsey coast, attachedto a dead Gorgonia verrucosa, which

came up laden with a forest of treasures growing on it.

The genus is now attracting considerable attention; and as

I cannot entirely agree with some of the views either of Mr.

Carter, on the one side, or of Prof. Haeckel on the other, I

propose to give my reasons for dissenting from certain points

which they hold with regard to the systematic position of

these animals, or the relationship which exists between the

known forms.

I feel the more called upon to state my opinion upon the

questions at issue because I have undertaken to edit the fourth

and last, posthumous volume of my late friend Dr. Bower-

bank’s ‘ Monograph of the British Spongiade.’ It will be

necessary, in the first place, briefly to trace the outlines of

what has been written upon Haliphysema before entering upon

an investigation of the views of different authors with respect

to the species of this and allied genera which have fallen under

their observation.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 18

266 Rev. A. M. Norman on the Genus Haliphysema.

I. History of the Genus Haliphysema.

In the year 1862 Dr. Bowerbank first characterized the

genus Haliphysema, in the third part of his memoirs “ On the

Anatomy and Physiology of the Spongiade,”’ published in

the ‘ Philosophical Transactions.’ The characters given were

as follows :—

‘Sponge consisting of a hollow basal mass, from which

emanates a single cloacal fistula. Skeleton: spicula of the

base disposed irregularly ; spicula of the fistula disposed prin-

cipally in lines parallel to the long axis of the sponge, with-

out fasciculation.”

The type species was H. Tumanowiczit, Bow., figured

pl. Ixxii. fig. 8. The author stated that he was unable to

detect either oscula or pores, but held that the general struc-

ture of the organism showed relationship to Alcyoncellum and

Polymastia. In the first volume of the ‘Monograph of the

British Spongiade,’ the above-mentioned figure and descrip-

tion were reproduced ; and there can be no question that up to

the year 1865 Dr. Bowerbank held that the spicules incorpo-

rated in the structure of Haliphysema were the secretion of

the animal, and not the product of other sponges selected by

Haliphysema and built into its walls. It was in this year

that I discovered in Guernsey a second species of the genus, H.

ramulosum, and, sending it to Dr. Bowerbank for examina-

tion, called his attention to the masonic properties of the

animal. In his second volume (1866), in describing H. ra-

mulosum, he fully recognized “‘ the selection and incorporation

of the extraneous material of the skeleton,” and, in his account

of H. Tumanowiczit, described the pedicel and head as having

“an incorporation of fragments of spicula of various sizes

and forms and of minute grains of sand.”

It seems extraordinary that after this, in one of his very

last papers, Bowerbank should have described a sponge as

belonging to this genus, of which he states that there are “ no

adventitious substances incorporated in the skeleton, as in the

other two species, and all its spicula are undoubtedly secreted

by itself ””—a statement which seems fully borne out by his

description and figures, and which renders it impossible that

Haliphysema tubulatum* should be retained in the genus to

which it was assigned by its describer:

* Bowerbank, “ Report on a Collection of Sponges found at Ceylon

by E. W. H. Holdsworth, Esq.,” Proc. Zool. Soc. 1878, p. 29, pl. vii.

figs. 1-6. H. tubulatum appears to be a remarkable sponge, consisting of

an agglomeration of very numerous elongated tubuli without terminal

openings, closely appressed together and forming a mass nearly 3 inches

long by 2 wide. The cylindrical tubuli, when separated from each

Rev. A. M. Norman on the Genus Haliphysema. 267

In 1868 Mr. Parfitt* described with accuracy the structure

of the base or dome-shaped bulb by which the type species

is attached to the seaweed or Hydrozoon on which it lives.

This bulb, when carefully opened, Mr. Parfitt stated, has

“ five, six, or even seven radii, like the spokes of a wheel.”

We now come to the observations of Mr. Carter, who, in

1870, having met with Haliphysema Tumanowiczit at Bud-

leigh-Salterton, accurately described the test with its incorpo-

ration and garnishing of extraneous objects, consisting chiefly

of sand-grains and both siliceous and calcareous spicules

belonging to various species of sponges, which Haliphysema,

by some wonderful collective and selective power, gathers

together, and, clever builder as it is, appropriates and uses

either for the purpose of strengthening its test or as weapons

of defence, inserting them, in the latter case, into the walls of

its dwelling, like pins stuck into a pin-cushion. Next Mr.

Carter entered into a minute description of the chambered

character of the discoidal base, thus confirming Mr. Parfitt’s

observation, of which, however, he does not seem to have been

aware. Mr. Carter expected to find pseudopodia issuing from

the minute rounded orifice which is situated at the distal end

and immersed among the brush of terminal appropriated

spicules; but he did not succeed in detecting them. Arguing,

however, chiefly from the pseudo-septate structure of the

adherent bulb-disk, he gave it as his opinion that Bower-

bank’s so-called sponge was no sponge at all, but a Foramini-

fer, which he assigned to Schultze’s genus Squamulina, and

called Squamulina scopula.

In the next number of the ‘Annals’ Mr. Carter made a

few observations upon Haliphysema ramulosum, a spectmen of

which he had examined in the British Museum}. These

specimens were sent to the Museum by Prof. Oscar Schmidt,

having been collected by Count Pourtales on the coast of

Florida.

Four months later Mr. Carter was fortunate enough to meet

with H. ramulosum (or, as he calls it, a “branched form of

other, are found to have their surface bristling with numerous acuate

spicula, some of which are subflecto-attenuate and incipiently spinous,

while other spicula, used for defence and as skeleton-spicula, are large

flecto-attenuate-acuate and smooth. The latter spicula are of great size

as compared with the diameter of the tubuli. Tubuli apparently devoid

both of oscula and of pores. The sarcode is blood-red. I know of no

genus into which this Ceylon sponge can fall, and will propose for it the

name Avulospongus (aidAds and oméyyos); and the species will become

Aulospongus tubulatus (Bow.).

* Trans. Devon Assoc. Sci. Literat. and Art, p. 14 (separate copy).

+ Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. y. (1870) p. 389.

rS*

268 Rev. A. M. Norman on the Genus Haliphysema.

Squamulina scopula”) at Budleigh-Salterton, and made the

following observations :—“ On cutting off the branched head

with a pair of scissors across the main stem, and placing it in

a watch-glass, the truncated end soon after threw out a bunch

of obliquely branching and anastomosing filaments or pseudo-

podia, to the extent of a sixtieth of an inch long, allround, which

continued retracting and extending themselves and exhibit-

ing the granule-circulation, after the manner of the sarcode

of the Foraminifera, for six hours, when the whole were gradu-

ally withdrawn and did not reappear. Thus the Foramini-

ferous character of Squamulina scopula and its branched

variety is proved. I could not see any filaments projected

from the head in any of the specimens; nor would it be easy

to do so, as these probably entwine themselves about the

spicules which are always raised up from the bottom of the

water; but the truncated end of the stem lay on the watch-

glass, over which it was easy to see the extended filaments

with a one-inch compound power” *.

Mr. Carter has also met with what he regards as another

form of the same genus at Budleigh-Salterton. To this he

has given the name Squamulina varians. It consists of a

little rounded dome, commonly semiglobular, but varying

much in shape, attached by its flat side to the fucus or other

object on which it grows, having a test composed of colourless

grains of quartz and sponge-spicules incorporated in a chiti-

nous substance, with a slight admixture of calcareous parti-

cles. The dome is furnished with an extended margin,

projecting beyond the body of the test, and terminating in a

thin edge, the basis of attachment of the organism being thus

greater than the size of the dome itself. A single rounded

aperture is situated either at the base or summit, or anywhere

between the two, and this aperture is somewhat funnel-shaped,

widening outwards. Size seldom exeeeding 1-30th of an inch

in diameter.

It is this Sguamulina varians which comes nearest in gene-

ral form to Sguamulina levis, Schultze; but, besides other

differences, while the test of Carter’s so-called Squamulina

is arenaceous, that of the type of the genus is calcareous.

Squamulina vartans is in general form very like the base

of H. Tumanowiczit before the development of the column

and clavate head ; but unless it be the immature stage of that

or of an allied species, it cannot take its position with them

in Haliphysema.

But we have to consider the position of the type with refer-

* Ann. & Mag. Nat, Hist. vol. vi. (1870) p. 547.

Rev. A. M. Norman on the Genus Haliphysema. 269

ence to Mr. Carter’s investigations. Even granted, for the sake

of argument, that he has made out a strong case for the Fora-

miniferal, or, at any rate, Rhizopodal character of the animals

constituting Bowerbank’s genus Haliphysema, it appears to

me that they have not the remotest claim to be included in

Schultze’s genus Squamulina. But on what principle has

Mr. Carter changed the specific name and substituted scopula

for the prior appellation given by Bowerbank, Tumanowiczit?

There can be no justification for such a step. No one could

possibly mistake the animal which was first described and

figured ; and the supposition that Dr. Bowerbank had as-

signed the dead tests of an obscure organism, which he had

not observed in a living state, to a wrong class, is no justifi-

able reason for rejecting the specific name he gave. If errors

in first description invalidated the names then assigned, where

should we stop in changes of nomenclature? Confining criti-

cism to the Protozoa, and not even there condescending to

notice mistakes as regards single species or even genera, are

all the Foraminifera to be renamed which were originally

described as Mollusca? or the sponges which were regarded as

plants? If Mr. Carter’s mode of proceeding as_ regards

Haliphysema Tumanowiczti is right, such wholesale altera-

tions in nomenclature as I have hinted at would, on the same

grounds, be allowable.

I was unable to regard the arguments which Mr. Carter

adduced in favour of the Rhizopodal nature of these organ-

isms as conclusive at the time when they were first published.

The partitioned character of the base might perhaps be nothing

more than a means of additional hold upon the body to which

the test is attached, and of giving strength to the dome which

supports the column. It is of importance, moreover, as bear-

ing upon one of the arguments of Mr. Carter in favour of the

foraminiferal nature of Haliphysema, to observe :—first, that

he entirely failed to discover pseudopodial processes naturally

extruded* ; and, secondly, that though, on being cut in two,

the injured parts did elongate themselves after the manner of

pseudopodia, yet we have evidence that pseudopodial move-

ments are quite consistent with sponge-structure. Haeckel,

in speaking of what he calls the ectoderm, or animal germ-

lamella of the young calcisponge, says that if torn mechani-

* Mr. Kent, in the ‘Annals,’ 1878, i. p. 14, speaks of Mr. Carter as

“witnessing the protrusion of pseudopodia from the terminal oryfice of

the types in question.” Iam not aware that Mr. Carter has anywhere

stated that he has witnessed such a protrusion ; he only witnessed the

extension of pseudopodium-like processes from the exuding syncytium

which escaped from the pedicel of HZ. ramulosum when cut in two with a

pair of scissors.

270 ~=Rev. A. M. Norman on the Genus Haliphysema.

cally the fragments will take the form of Ameba and walk

about, and that if the endodermal cells, which so closely re-

semble (if they be not actually) flagellate Infusoria, be libe-

rated artificially they also will assume amceboid shape and

motions. Mr. Kent, again, says that he has frequently

observed ‘‘the- withdrawal by the adult individual collar-

bearing monad of the characteristic hyaline collar and the

extension of pseudopodic processes,’ andis of opinion “ that

in a true sponge, agreeing in all structural details with the

simple Haliphysemata, we should expect to find the sarcode or

syncytial element protruded in such a fashion for the seizing

of the fragmentary foreign particles out of which it builds up

instead of secreting, as do ordinary sponges, a protective and

supporting framework.” Just so. The supposition of such

protrusion is the only possible way of accounting for the

wonderful building-feats of this creature. Where is the hand

to be found to select, to grasp, to convey, and to arrange the

spicula and sand-grains built into the walls, unless it be in

the extension, flexibility, and retraction of extrusive portions

of the sarcode or syncytium ? Is such motion compatible with

sponge-structure ? and have we any thing like it in a univer-

sally acknowledged sponge which can serve as a precedent ?

The genus Dysidea or Spongelia affords an almost exact

parallel, save that in that instance the extraneous material is

taken into the interior of the organic parts instead of being

built into their outer wall; or, in other words, it is used to

form an internal skeleton instead of to furnish a dermal crust.

The grains of sand which occupy the areno-fibrous structure

of Dysidea must have been grasped, and placed in the position

in which they are ultimately enclosed by the investing mate-

rial, by a process similar to that employed in the case of

Haliphysema ; and sarcodic extension 1s the only grasping-

instrument which we can conceive possible in animals pre-

senting the organization of these genera.

I maintain, therefore, that the presence of pseudopodial

action is not inconsistent with the position of Haliphysema

among the sponges; and although such action has not yet

been seen to take place from the body of the uninjured animal,

we may pretty safely predict that it will hereafter be found

to exist.

We now come to Prof. Haeckel’s memoir, in which he has

described and figured the presence of flagellate epithelium

with its flagellate cells (Getsselzellen) as he calls them, or

“collar-bearing monads”’ according to the views of those

who differ from him. Presuming these observations to be

substantiated, the theory that Haliphysema is a Foraminifer

Rev. A. M. Norman on the Genus Haliphysema. 271

of course falls to the ground. MHaeckel’s observations alto-

gether appear to give the strongest confirmation to the

opinion originally entertained by Dr. Bowerbank as to the

position of this animal, though in the arrangement of genera

itis very far removed from Polymastia on the one hand, and

from LHuplectella (= Alcyoncellum, Bow.) on the other, in

juxtaposition with which its describer placed it. Taking Mr.

Carter’s to be the best classification as yet suggested for the

Spongida, I should place the ‘‘ Physemaria”’ of Haeckel as an

order between Carter’s Order IT. Ceratina (=the horny-fibrous-

skeleton sponges), and Order III. Psammonemata (=sponges

having a skeleton composed of fibre in which sand is incorpo-

rated) ; and I would suggest as the name of such an order

Psamihoteichina (reZyos, a wall). The genera and species

adopted by Haeckel will be noticed further on.

Mr. Kent’s ‘‘ Observations upon Prof. Haeckel’s Group of

the ‘ Physemaria,’ and on the Affinity of Sponges,” published

in the ‘ Annals’ for last January, while it makes us anxious to

see the full iliustration of his views in the forthcoming me-

moir in the ‘Linnean Transactions,’ does not throw any

special light upon Haliphysema, which he does not appear to

have ever seen. His observations confirm those of Prof. H.

James-Clark in every particular, carrying investigation fur-

ther into those orders of the sponges in which Clark had

not observed the presence of the “ collar-bearing ’’ monads.

Prof. Clark found himself unable to do more than infer the

position of the mouth, which he regarded as situated at the

base, or close to the base, of the flagellum, to which place he

believed that the particles of food were brought by the rota-

tory action of the flagellum. Mr. Kent assumes that the

whole of the collar, “consisting of an exquisitely delicate

film of sarcode, and exhibiting a circulating stream, ascending

on the outside and descending on the inside,” and “ consti-

tuting a wonderful and most admirably constructed trap for

the purpose of drawing towards it and arresting passing parti-

cles of food,”’ ‘‘ must necessarily be characterized as the oral

or inceptive”’ organ. I would ask him to consider whether

organs designed for the purpose of bringing food-particles

within reach of the mouth are to be regarded as the mouth

itself. The action of the collar performs, it would appear from

his description, an office similar in function to that discharged

by the cilia of the “ wheels” of the Rotifera.

Lastly, we have the paper by Mereschkowsky upon Wag-

nerella, a highly interesting little sponge. But this animal,

though in form assimilating closely to Haliphysema, apparently

widely differs, since the spicules both of the stem and head are

272 Rev. A. M. Norman on the Genus Haliphysema.

the result of its own secretion, and not extraneous matter in-

corporated in the test. Attention may also be called to the

fact that, whereas in Haliphysema the arrangement of the

spicula in the pedicel is always parallel to the axis of the

sponge, in Wagnerella the short acerates are uniformly ar-

ranged transversely to the axis.

II. The Species of Haliphysema and cts Allies.

Order PSPAMMOTEICHINA, Norman.

Genus Hatieuysema, Bow.

= Squamulina, Carter (but not of Schultze).

= Gastrophysema, Haeckel. -

The characters of Schultze’s genus Squamulina are :—Test

like a plano-convex lens, with the flat side attached; calca-

reous ; enclosing a simple undivided cavity (‘eine einfache un-

getheilte Héhlung umschliessend’) ; a large opening on the con-

vex side ; without small pores.”’ Carter, in 1870, apparently

had not Schultze’s ‘ Ueber den Organismus der Polythalamien’

at hand, and only knew that author’s genus through Carpen-

ter’s ‘Introduction.’ It so happened that Carpenter omitted all

reference to the ‘ simple undivided cavity ;” and thus Carter

fell into the mistake of placing in Sguamulina a form the

foraminiferal nature of which he was attempting to establish

on account of the non-simple and pseudo-septate character of

the pedestal or plano-convex foot. Foraminifer or not, the

pseudo-septate-based, arenaceous Haliphysema Tumanowiczit,

with its great (great as compared with the plano-convex base)

obversely conical column and body, has most certainly no near

relation to the little scale-like, calcareous Squamulina, with

its simple, little, dome-shaped undivided chamber. It is pro-

bable that Mr. Carter, with his present knowledge, would not

now attempt to maintain that position ; a much stronger argu-

ment might have been based on comparison with such a

masonic foraminifer as Lituola nautiloidea, Lamk., which,

commencing with a small spiral arrangement of cells, suddenly

altering its growth, develops a straight series of chambers of

great size as compared with those preceding.

Haeckel’s views of nomenclature are peculiar to, and, it is

to be hoped, always will remain peculiar to, himself. He ap-

pears to take pleasure in establishing spurious genera and

subsequently demolishing them*. I am sorry to anticipate

* It is really much to be regretted that Haeckel, using the slightest

modifications, or supposed possible modifications, of character, which no

other naturalist hasever dreamt of regarding as of even varietal importance,

Rev. A. M. Norman on the Genus Haliphysema. 273

him with respect to Gastrophysema, and thus deprive him of

the pleasure he experiences in the art of “happy despatch.”

I thoroughly indorse Mr. Kent’s argument. I have several

two-celled, and some three-celled, examples of true Lagene in

my collection ; are new genera to be created for them? A

Greenland Nodosarian (Dentalina pauperata, Parker and

Jones) has much more commonly one chamber only than two

should manufacture, and often immediately afterwards proceed to destroy,

innumerable genera and species. -We already, without this sort of thing,

have only too much useless synonymy. As an example of Haeckel’s

treatment of the calcareous sponges take our poor little friend Grantia

compressa, a species which, until the advent of the Professor of Zoology

at Jena, we all thought we knew. Behold the atlas which Haeckel has

laid upon this miserable little creature’s shoulders to bear—1l. Sycariwm

compressum, 2. Artynas compressus, 3, Sycidium compressum, 4. Artynium

compressum, 5. Sycocystis compressa, 6. Artynella compressa, 7. Syco-

phyllum compressum, 8. Artynophyllum compressum, 9. Sycometra com-

pressa, 10. Sycum lingua, 11. Sycarium rhopalodes, 12. Artynas rhopa-

lodes, 13. Artynella rhopalodes, 14. Dyssycum clavigerum, 15. Sycophyllum

lobatum, 16. Sycurus compressus, 17. Syconella compressa, 18. Sycothamnus

compressus, 19. Sycinula compressa, 20. Sycodendron compressum, 21.

Sycandra foliacea, 22. Sycandra pennigera, 23. Sycandra clavigera, 24.

Sycandra rhopalodes, 25, Sycandra lobata, 26. Sycandra polymorpha, 27.

Sycortis compressa! The first fifteen of these names were established in

the ‘Prodromus eines Systems der Kalkschwimme;’ but in his ‘ Die

Kalkschwiimme’ he knocked upon the head eleven out of the fifteen

generic names just before coined, but immediately proceeded to construct

twelve more names to take their place. This done, he again bowls his

nine-pins over, and leaves us with a twenty-eight-synonymed Sycandra

compressa, which he would have us accept asthe mother of all his still-

born children. I am sorry that we cannot even oblige him in that.

Grantia compressa is the name under which our old lady was baptized ;

and that name has been, is, and will be the honoured name she loves to

own; but if she changes her name at all, it must be to that of Artynes, of

Gray, of which she is the type. But the Professor has not even yet

done. At page 381 he favours us with “Zweite Abtheilung. Kiinstliches

System der Kalkschwamme.” “ Kiinstliches” indeed! Here we find I

know not how many subgenera formed for the ‘ generic varieties ;”’ and

the much-enduring Grantia compressa is made to undergo the further

torture of having its disjecta membra thrown, in the form of six “ sub-

species,” into each of the nine following new and euphonious “ sub-

genera” — Sycurandra, Syconellandra, Sycandrarium, Sycocystandra,

Sycothamnella, Sycinulandra, Sycodenandrum, Sycandrophyllum, Sycan-

drometra. The magician waves hiswand: “ Behold! Grantia compressa

might be, can be, 7s divided into fifty-four (6x9) subspecies; and then

do not forget my ‘connexive Varietat,’ which makes fifty-five. It is

done! Veni, vidi, vici!!” We gladly leave with him the victory ;

but surely a man of Prof. Haeckel’s genius might more worthily employ

his time. Had his demonstration been that fifty-five forms which had

been named and placed by other naturalists as so many species in twenty-

seven genera, were nothing more than the unstable modifications of one

type, and, as possessing no constant character, must be brought together in

one so-called species, a benefit would have been conferred upon science.

274 ~=Rev. A. M. Norman on the Genus Haliphysema.

or more ; must a genus be created for this, to separate it from

species which often have twenty and more chambers? Lists

of such comparisons might be multiplied to any extent.

Gastrophysema is simply Haliphysema more fully developed.

Haliphysema Tumanowiczit, Bow.

1862. Halyphysema Tumanowiczii, Bowerbank, Philos. Trans. p. 1105,

pl. Ixxiii. fig. 3; Monog. Brit. Sponges, vol. i. (1864) p. 179, pl.

xxx, fig. 359, vol. ii. p. 76.

1866. Halyphysema Tumanowiczii, O. Schmidt, Zweites Supplem. d.

Spong. d. Adriatischen Meeres, p. 18, plate, fig. 13 (copy from

Bowerbank).

1868. Halyphysema Tumanowiczit, Parfitt, Trans. Devon Assoc. Sci.

Literat. and Art, p. 14 (separate copy).

1870. Squamulina scopula, Carter, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. v.

p- 310, pl. iv. figs. 1-11, and vol. xx. (1877) p. 337.

ue _Haliphysema primordiale, Haeckel, Biologische Studien, p. 180,

. 1X.

1807, Haliphysema Tumanowicxi, Haeckel, 1. c. p. 192.

1877. Gastrophysema dithalamium, Haeckel, /. c. p. 196, pls. xii.—xiv.

1877. Gastrophysema seopula, Haeckel, 1. c. p. 206.

Hab. Hastings (Mr. Tumanowicz), Berwick Bay (Dr.

Johnston), Cullercoats (?) (Alder), Budleigh-Salterton (Car-

ter); Bergen, Norway (Haeckel) ; ‘ H. primordiale,” Mediter-

ranean, Corsica (Haeckel); “ G. dithalamium,” Mediter-

ranean, Smyrna (Haeckel).

Mr. Carter found this species at Budleigh-Salterton, and,

though he renamed it, at the same time identified it with

Bowerbank’s type species of Haliphysema. Haeckel, how-

ever, denies that Carter had ever seen Bowerbank’s species,

Mr. Carter has replied that he has now had the opportunity

of comparing his own specimens side by side with those of Dr.

Bowerbank, and that they are identical. This last statement

I am in a position to entirely indorse. In my collection

are some of Mr. Tumanowicz’s type specimens on Haleciwm

Beanii, which were given to me by Dr. Bowerbank, and also

type specimens of Sguamulina scopula, for which I am in-

debted to Mr. Carter. They are absolutely identical. I have

not seen any specimens with the constrictions so deep and

strongly marked as Carter’s pl. iv. fig. 2; but the largest of

Mr. Tumanowicz’s examples closely resembles his chief

figure (3), while the youngest resemble the typical figures of

Tumanowiczti, and primordiale and those of intermediate

age, dithalamium ; at the same time monothalamous specimens

often exceed in size the dithalamous. They range from 1 to

2 millims. in length.

Haeckel’s characters for his so-called species are :—

H. primordiale. “ Body of person spindle-shaped, attached

Rey. A. M. Norman on the Genus Haliphysema. 275

by a short thick pedicel. Pedicel solid, cylindrical, scarcely

half as long as body. Body-cavity spindle-shaped. Mouth-

opening simple. ‘The extraneous bodies which incrust the

exoderm consisting on the lower (aboral) half chiefly of sand-

grains, on the upper (oral) half by preference of spicules of

different sponges, both siliceous and calcareous, spicules ar-

ranged oralwards.”’

G. dithalamium. “ Body of person, taken as a whole, long

and club-shaped, divided by a median constriction into two

chambers lying one over the other; attached by means of a

short cylindrical pedicel. Pedicel placed upon a disk-shaped

widening base. At the opposite (upper) end a simple, cir-

cular mouth-opening. ‘The uppermost (distal or oral) cham-

ber elliptical or egg-shaped, one third larger each way than

the under round chamber. Pedicel and foot-disk solid. The

cavities of the chambers joined by a narrow neck (sipho).

In the aboral chamber (Bruthéhle) the ova are developed. A

ciliated spiral is found in the oral chamber near the mouth-

opening. Hxtraneous bodies which incrust the exoderm

composed on the under half, for the most part, of sand-grains

and fragments of spicula; on the upper half (in the wall of the

second or largest chamber), of long spicula of different species

of sponges; these stand out on all sides, and have their points

directed forwards.”’

I cannot think that the fact of the pedicel in the forms

described by Haeckel being characterized as solid, while in

those examined by Carter it is hollow, is of any consequence.

Carter’s observations were quite correct as regards dead spe-

cimens ; but he himself, in cutting a living H. ramulosum across

the pedicel, observed the escape of the sarcode or syncytium

with which it was filled; and I take it that all that Haeckel

means, and all that he figures, is that the pedicel is filled with

such syncytium, whereas the chambers have a hollow cavity.

In drying, the syncytium, shrinking up against the pseudo-

skeleton of the surrounding wall, leaves the pedicel, as ob-

served by Carter, hollow; and the cavity of the body will, in

that condition, extend from the mouth-opening to the plano-

convex disk of attachment.

I have given Haeckel’s characters of primordiale and

dithalamium, which will speak for themselves. Without fur-

ther evidence these scarcely appear to be of specific or even

varietal importance.

2. Haliphysema ramulosum, Bow.

1866. Halyphysema ramulosa, Bowerbank, Monog. Brit. Sponges, vol. ii.

p. 79, and vol, iii, (1874) pl. xiii. fig. 1.

276 ~=Rev. A. M. Norman on the Genus Haliphysema.

1870. Halyphysema ramulosa, Carter, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4,

vol. v. p. 389. Sguamulina scopula, var. ramulosa, id. ibid, vol. vi.

p. 345.

1877. Haliphysema ramulosum, Haeckel, Biologische Studien, p. 195.

Hab. Dredged off Guernsey on Gorgonia verrucosa, and in

Birterbuy Bay, Ireland, on Phyllophora rubens (A. M. N.) ;

among sponges and on rocks between tide-marks, Budleigh-

Salterton, Devon (Carter); off the coast of Florida, U. 8.,

dredged by Pourtales, fide Schmidt (Carter).

I regard this as entirely distinct from H. Tumanowicztt ;

indeed the differences are so important that it is probable

they will hereafter be regarded as generic.

In H. Tumanowiczti, with the development of the animal,

a series of incompletely separated chambers is formed by

greater or less transverse constrictions of the test.

In H. ramulosum, with the development of the animal, a

series of completely separated chambers is formed by longitu-

dinal fission and entire partition of the last-formed chamber ;

and this process, continually repeated, issues in the building

up of a colony consisting of a many-branched head sur-

mounting a long pedicel, the branches dichotomously divided

with great regularity, and each terminating in a rather small

rounded chamber.

A single head of either, however, may be distinguished at

a glance, apart from the mode of growth; or they may again

be separated in the early stages when only a single chamber

is developed, since in H. Tumanowiczii that chamber is more

or less elongate-ovate, and has the points of its garnishing

spicula all directed forwards ; but in H. ramulosum it is round

or subrotund, and has its garnishing spicula radiating in every

direction.

In 1874 I procured in Birterbuy Bay a piece of Phyllophora

rubens covered with the young of this species in their early

unbranched condition with only a single head; from their

young state they were very fragile, and the greater num-

ber in drying separated from their bases. But the Phyllo-

phora was sent for Dr. Bowerbank to see; and among his un-

published manuscript I find the following note :—‘‘ Among

the specimens I received from the Rev. A. M. Norman for

examination there was a portion of a thin foliaceous Fucus,

rather exceeding two inches in length and three in width,

both surfaces of which were nearly covered by small patches

of various species of Lepralia, small shells, and other para-

sites ; and amid these, based on the Fucus, there were nume-

rous young specimens of [Halyphysema ramulosa. ‘They con-

sisted of single tubes of the sponge, very rarely exhibiting

Rev. A. M. Norman on the Genus Haliphysema. 277

any rudiment of terminal branches, each springing from a

small circular basal patch. Although in so young a condition,

they were identical in structure with the type specimen repre-

sented in pl. xiii. fig. 1, vol. iii., Mon. Brit. Spongiade.”

I quote this as confirming my own opinion respecting the

unbranched young of H. ramulosum.

On the other hand, the largest specimen I have seen is one

for which I am indebted to Mr. Carter, who found it at Bud-

leigh-Salterton. It is 7 millims. high, of which 5 millims. is

occupied by the slender unbranched stem, nearly another

millim. is taken up by the first fork ; and in the last millim. of

length the branches divide and subdivide, extending themselves

in all directions, and terminating ultimately in sixteen branch-

lets with their terminal heads.

3. Haliphysema echinoides, Haeckel.

sa Haliphysema echinoides, Haeckel, Biologische Studien, p. 186,

pl. X.

“ Body of person round or subspherical, attached by a long

and slender pedicel. Pedicel cylindrical, conically widened

above, solid, 2-3 times as long, but scarcely 3 as wide as the

diameter of the ball. Body-cavity round or subconical. Mouth-

opening widening into a somewhat funnel-shaped form. Ex-

traneous bodies, which incrust the exoderm of the pedicel,

consisting of sand-grains and longitudinally arranged sponge-

spicules ; extraneous material of the ball-shaped body consist-

ing of spicules of various sponges, which stand out on all

sides, chiefly, however, radiating from and covering the mid-

dle of the body ” (Haeckel).

There is but little in the above description to distinguish

this from the last-described species, to the young unbranched

stage of which it bears avery close resemblance. I, however,

keep it apart, because the ball is represented as much larger

in proportion to the pedicel than I have ever seen it to be in

H. ramulosum ; and the character of the spicules employed

seems to show that it is a deep-sea species, whereas H. ramu-

losum lives in shallow water. When Haeckel’s species is

better known, it may prove to be more distinct than it now

appears. Moreover the large size of the ball, as compared

with the axial column, will be seen to present difficulties in

the way of the longitudinal fission of the heads and their con-

version into branches, which I regard as so important a feature

in the evolution of the colony of HZ. ramuloswm.

Hab. Atlantic Ocean (Koren fide Haeckel),

It is surprising that Haeckel should have thought that

there was any relation between the animal he described as

278 Rev. A. M. Norman on the Genus Haliphysema.

above and Wyvilletomsonia Wallichii, P. Wright. . The

apparent resemblance is a mere matter of isomorphism. Any

spongologist looking at Stewart’s beautiful figure illustrating

Wright’s paper will at once see that he has a sponge

before him, that the spicula are in natural position in the

tissues, and the whole spicules are those of Tistphonia

agariciformis, Wyv. Thomson, of which I agree with Mr.

Carter in considering Wright’s little sponge to be the

young stage. ‘The aspect of H. echinoides is wholly dif-

ferent; the spicules are stuck into the tissues as adornments or

objects of defence, and clearly have just as much connexion

with the animal that wears them as the upstanding feathers of

the head-dress of a Red Indian have with the man who puts

them on. It is true that H. echinoides has appropriated, for

the most part, the spicula of Wyvilletomsonia or of some

closely allied corticate sponge; but mixed with these are the

spheroids of a G'eodia, together with some recurvo-ternates,

which, from the robust character of their prongs, also seem

referable to the latter genus.

4, Haliphysema globigerina, Haeckel.

2G Haliphysema globigerina, Haeckel, Biologische Studien, p. 189,

pl. xi.

“‘ Body of person pear-shaped, attached by a very slender

and long pedicel. Pedicel solid, cylindrical, conically widened

above, about 4—6 times as long, but scarcely one tenth as wide

as body. Body-cayity pear-shaped. Mouth-opening simple.

Extraneous bodies, which incrust the exoderm, composed of

the elements of deep-sea mud, consisting in the body-wall

chiefly of Rhizopod shells, in the pedicel chiefly of coccoliths

and coccospheres.”’

Hab. “ North Atlantic Ocean (Randropp)” (Haeckel).

The above species differs entirely from the rest in its selec-

tion of shells of Foraminifera, Polycystina, Coccoliths, and

Coccospheres as the strengthening material of its body-wall,

which exhibits, on the other hand, a total absence of sponge-

spicules.

I am strongly reminded by this species of an approaching

isomorph found in deep water in the Atlantic, and which

Mr. H. B. Brady proposes to describe under the name ‘ Hy-

perammina,” on account of its pestle-like form. There can,

however, I think, be no doubt that Hyperammina is a fora-

minifer. The expanded extremity has no mouth-opening ;

and the colour of the walls, which consist entirely of sand-

grains, is, as in many other arenaceous Foraminifera, ferru-

ginous.

Rev. A. M. Norman on the Genus Haliphysema. 279

5. Haliphysema confertum, n.sp. (Pl. XVI. figs. 1, 2.)

Animal consisting of a bunch of “ persons ” attached toge-

ther by their bases, and forming nearly a complete ball.

Body of person nearly spherical, attached by a long slender

pedicel. Pedicel 3-4 times as long, and not more than one

fourth as broad, as the body. Mouth-opening very large.

E:xtraneous bodies, which incrust the animal, consisting, on

the pedicel, of sand-grains and other very minute bodies ; on

the body, of sand-grains and Foraminifera.

Diameter of a cluster, containing forty or fifty “‘ persons,”

about one millim.; length of a “‘ person”’ about one third of a

millim.

Hab. ‘ Valorous’ Expedition, 1875, Station No. 9, lat. 59°

10' N., iong. 50° 25! W., 1750 fathoms. The position of this

dredging is just within Davis Strait.

Two clusters of the above organism were found; the one

had all the bodies broken off, and consisted of a nearly

globular aggregation of the pedicels ; the other had several of

the bodies still remaining. It is not without doubt that I.

place this organism in the genus Haliphysema, because the

extraneous material is not apparently completely built into

the substance of the body-wall, but appears rather as though

clinging to a viscid substance which holds it. The fact,

however, that in the pedicels the extraneous bodies are all of

very minute size, whereas on the exterior of the round body-

cavity an occasional minute Globigerina is found to have a

place, seems to argue a selection on the part of the animal;

and I know of know other order to which these animals can

be referred.

III. On two new Genera perhaps allied to Haliphysema.

Genus TECHNITELLA, n. g.

(rexvirns, an artificer.)

Test elliptical, cylindrical, or subfusiform, composed of the

broken fragments of sponge-spicula arranged parallel to the

axis and enclosed entirely, or rarely only partially, in the

body-wall. Unattached below and closed. A tubular mouth-

opening formed by a contraction for a short distance of the

body-walls so as to form a short tube.

Technitella legumen, n. sp. (Pl. XVI. figs. 3, 4.)

The form of the test in this animal reminds one somewhat

of the outline of the pod of the edible pea, being cylindrical

throughout the greater part of its length, with the aboral

280 Rev. A. M. Norman on two new Genera

extremity slightly extruded, and that rather out of the central

line, as is the distal point (style) of the pea-pod, while the

mouth-opening is in the form of a contracted tube, repre-

senting about the same proportional length and width to the

cylinder as the basal portion of the pea-pod, where it passes

into the calyx, does to the pod itself.

The body-wall of Technitella is an exquisite specimen of

perfect masonry: it is beautifully built up of the fragments of

minute acerate spicula, laid in regular order side by side, and

cemented with a mortar composed probably of the finest dust

of quartz, so that the whole test is of exquisite snowy white-

ness, corresponding in this respect to that of H. Tumanowiczit.

Length 1°25 millim.

Hab. Found among rich foraminiferous sand dredged by

Dr. Jeffreys’s yacht ‘The Osprey,’ in 112 fathoms, 30 miles

west of Valentia, Ireland, in 1870.

Technitella melo, n.sp. (Pl. XVI. figs. 5, 6.)

Test regularly ovoid, broadly and evenly rounded below

‘(aborally) ; greatest diameter below the middle; above the

middle sloped away to the central anterior (oral) opening.

Oral opening not markedly extruded or tubular as in the last

species, but compressed, so that the opening is in the form of

a slit; this slit in the type is wider at the sides than in its

central portion. The test is formed of minute linear sponge-

spicules, built carefully into the wall, and the interstices filled

with the same sort of snow-white cement as in the last species.

Instead, however, of the whole of the spicula being entirely

built into the body-wall as is the case in Technitella legumen,

in this species the aboral portion is garnished with scattered

acerate projecting spicula, the pointed ends of which are pro-

truded considerably from the body-wall, and are invariably

directed backwards. Length 1:4 millim., breadth 1 millim.

Hab. Found among material dredged about 60 miles south

of Rockal, by the ‘ Porcupine’ Expedition, in 1869. Station

No. 28, lat. 56° 44! N., long. 12° 52! W., 1215 fathoms.

The form of this little animal is just that of such a Lagena

as L. melo, D’Orb.; and its aspect under a high power, with

its imbedded and here and there projecting little spicula,

reminded me forcibly of the appearance of a cocoa-nut when

the outer husk is stripped off.

The type was picked out from the ‘ Porcupine’ material by

Mr. H. B. Brady, and sent to me marked “sponge?” There

is no higher authority among the Foraminifera than Mr.

Brady; and it is important therefore, as bearing upon the posi-

tion which I have provisionally assigned to this genus, that

perhaps allied to Haliphysema. 281

he has rejected it from among the Foraminifera, on the

description of which he was engaged.

Genus MARSIPELLA, n. g.

(udpouros, a purse.)

Test elongated, fusiform, centrally cylindrical, and drawn

out to gradually attenuated extremities, open at both ends,

monothalamous; anterior extremity much produced into a

narrow contracted mouth-opening. Hixtraneous matter of

body-wall consisting for the most part of sand-grains, but atthe

oral extremity composed almost solely of fragments of sponge-

spicula longitudinally arranged.

Marsipella elongata, n.sp. (Pl. XVI. fig. 7.)

ae ami ——, Carpenter, The Microscope, p. 5383, woodcut,

x Poel ©

Test greatly elongated, the diameter equal to one seventh

to one twelfth of length, gradually drawn out to the extremi-

ties, and nearly equally so orally and aborally. Oral extre-

mity in the form of an elongated narrow mouth-opening.

Test built up of coarse sand-grains roughly put together,

interspersed here and there with a sponge-spicule. ‘Tubular

mouth-opening having its wall entirely formed by a faggot of

acerate sponge-spicula longitudinally disposed and cemented

together. Length 4—5 millims.

Hab. ‘ Porcupine’ Expedition, 1869, No. 87, lat. 59° 35!

N., long. 9° 11! W., 767 fathoms.

Dr. Carpenter has referred the foregoing to the genus Pro-

teonina of Williamson ; but that genus appears to have been

founded upon imperfect specimens of Lztuola nautiloidea,

Lamk., and its connexion with the present species cannot be

maintained. ©

I have introduced the descriptions of the genera Techni-

tella and Marsitpella—not that I am at all satisfied that their

organization will ultimately prove such as to cause them to be

left in juxtaposition with Haliphysema, but because they

appear to me to be genera incerte sedis, to which it appears

desirable to call attention in connexion with Haliphysema.

From this genus it will be obvious that they are at once to be

distinguished by their free and unattached character; but there

is much in the form of their body-cavity, as well as in the

structure of their masonic walls and the peculiar way in

which the incorporation of the sponge-spicules takes place,

which suggests possible relationship. The snowy whiteness

of the test of Technitella is, as far as I am aware, without

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 19

282 Rev. A. M. Norman on the Genus Haliphysema.

parallel among the arenaceous Foraminifera, while it is emi-

nently characteristic of Haliphysema. Marszpella is described

as unattached and open on the aboral extremity ; for such is

the condition of the specimens which I have seen; but it is

possible that when living it may be attached hy the base,

since, if this were the case, it is hardly likely that such a little

organism would maintain its attachment atter the rough

treatment of being dredged and drawn up through two miles

of water.

Though these two forms appear to have so much in com-

mon with Haliphysema as regards external features, yet the

deep Atlantic dredgings of the ‘ Porcupine’ and ‘ Valorous’

have brought to light such a remarkable assemblage of arena-

ceous Foraminifera, most of which are still undescribed, that

it appears impossible to say where the line of demarcation is

to be drawn between Technitella and Marsipella and such

genera as Trochammina and Lituola, Future investigation

can alone settle this point. Meanwhile I describe them here

as appearing to me more nearly related to Haliphysema,

though still I leave them as genera incerte sedis.

POSTSCRIPT.

The foregoing paper was sent to the Editors of the ‘Annals’

at the end of January. Mr. Carter’s notes in the February

number call for one or two additional observations.

Mr. Carter makes the following remarkable declaration :—

‘‘ Whether there be collared flagellated monadic bodies in

Squamulina scopula or not, the polythalamous character, so

appropriately given by the illustrious Ehrenberg to what we

now call Foraminifera, decides the question with those who

are well acquainted with the structure of the latter as well as

that of the Spongida. No sponge, that I know of, presents

the polythalamous character of Sguamulina scopula, in its

foot (root) or anywhere else.”

I must decline to acquiesce in such a statement.

First. Because I deny that there is any “ polythalamous ”

character in the base of Haliphysema ; and I believe that this

is the first time that Mr. Carter has made such a statement.

He has before always correctly spoken of this dome-shaped

base of attachment as internally “parteally divided,” “‘pseudo-

septal,” ‘sub-polythalamous.” ‘There really is but a single

chamber, with recesses at the sides formed by the 5-7 radii,

which, originating at the margin, stretch thence “ toward the

centre, which they seldom, if ever, reach.” ‘T'o compare great

things with small, the single-chambered dome of the Reading-

Rev. A. M. Norman on the Genus Haliphysema. 283

Room of the British Museum with its radiating desks (sup-

posing them carried up to the roof) will be analogous to what

we have in the dome-shaped base of Haliphysema, while the

long series of Libraries connected with each other only by

doors represents the typical polythalamous character of the

Foraminifera.

Secondly. Are we really to understand Mr. Carter to mean

that if his own examination of living Haliphysema should

confirm Haeckel’s discovery of the existence of ‘‘ collared, fla-

gellated monadic bodies,” or, as Carter has elsewhere named

them, “ spongozoa,” he will still maintain that the organism

furnished with these spongozoa is a Foraminifer? All I can

say is that I should await with interest the arguments by

which he would maintain such a view.

Further on Mr. Carter states that Schmidt (Archiv f.

mikroskop. Anat. Bd. xiv. p. 260) has referred Haliphysema

echinoides, Haeckel, to the genus Stelletta. I have not seen

this paper of Schmidt. It is hardly conceivable that that

eminent spongologist can have come to such a conclusion

from the examination of Haeckel’s figure and description ; for

if tab. x. represents accurately the type *, it appears to me

as impossible to suppose that the spicules drawn belong to the

sponge and are in natural position, as it is to suppose (as

Haeckel wrongly imagined) that the spicula in Perceval

Wright’s admirable illustration of Wyvilletomsonia are not

in their natural position t. It may be that Schmidt has exa-

mined the type specimen, that the drawing is wrong, and

that on this ground he asserts that Haeckel’s species is a

Stelletta. If that be so, cadat questio.

Lastly, I do not understand what Mr. Carter means when,

in reference to the form of the dome-shaped base of Haliphy-

sema, he contrasts with it the ‘embryo of the Spongida,”

which “ grows up into branches from a 7oot.” Barroist has

represented the early canal-system (pl. xv. fig. 35) in the

young of Halisarca lobularis, Schmidt, just passing from the

* Unfortunately we are never sure when looking at Haeckel’s beautiful

plates whether we have before us what the draftsman actually saw, or

whether the figure is a representation of what he thought he ought to see,

and which his theorizing led him to the conclusion should be seen.

+ Ihave many specimens of Wyvilletomsonia Wallichii, P. Wright

(= Tisiphonia agariciformis, Wyv.-Tom.,= Dorvillia agariciformis, Kent),

as small as that represented in the type, and one specimen not one fourth -

of that size; and it is from the examination of these specimens that I

state positively that Wright and Carter have correctly regarded it as a

corticate sponge. ‘

{ Barrois (C.), “Mémoire sur l’Embryologie de quelques poner de la

Manche,” Annales des Sci. Natur. vit sér. Zoologie, tom. ili. 1876,

19*

284 Rey. A. M. Norman on the Architectural

embryo stage; and the form of that incipient canal-system

is remarkably like the chamber left in the semiseptate dome

at the base of Haliphysema. I may add, when referring to

Barrois, that at pl. xiii. fig. 15 he gives a capital illustration

of pseudopodial action in the young of Grantia compressa—an

additional witness to what I have stated in the earlier part of

this paper, that the protrusion of psendopodial processes in

Haliphysema is no proof whatever that it is not a sponge.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVI.

Fig. 1. Haliphysema confertum, Norman, X 40.

Fig. 2. Haliphysema confertum, Norman, a single individual separated

from the group, X 150. :

Fig. 8. Technitella legumen, Norman, x 40.

Fig. 4. Technitella legumen, Norman, anterior portion, x 40.

Fig. 5. Technitella melo, Norman, x 100.

Fig. 6. Technitella melo, Norman, posterior portion, x 40.

Fig. 7. Marsipella elongata, Norman, X 100.

XXXI.—On the Architectural Achievements of little Masons,

Annelidan (?) and Rhizopodan, in the Abyss of the At-

lantic. By the Rev. A. M. Norman, M.A.

No group of Invertebrata has received more important addi-

tions through the recent dredgings in the North Atlantic than

the Arenaceous Foraminifera. ‘The mode of incorporation of

extraneous material in the tests of these and of other Rhizo-

poda, and also in the tubes of what are presumed to be cases

of minute Annelids, is not only marvellously beautiful, but

appears also to be almost endlessly diversified. The power of

selection evidenced is truly wonderful: from the same ground,

and therefore from the midst of the same material for use, I

have seen as many as seventeen different species, each of which

has a specific individuality of its own in the choice and mode

of appropriation of the particles, whether of mineral or organic

origin, which it selects from the mud—and this wholly apart

from characters which depend on the form of the one or more

chambers which constitute the animal or tube. _ ‘l'o exemplify

my meaning I will throw the classes of diversity into tabular

form, so as to give some slight idea of the varied ways in which

these clever little artificers set about their work and construct

their dwellings.

A. Material chosen by the Artificers.

1. Coarse sand-grains, almost entirely of quartz.

2. Medium-sized quartz-grains.

Achievements of Annelida (?) and Rhizopoda. 285

3. Comminuted dust of quartz.

The above workers, though living together and, so to

speak, getting their material from the same quarry, are

most particular as to the size of the stones they respectively

build with.

4. Various grains of different colours, many black (apparently

manganese), giving the whole test a grey colour*.

5. Sponge-spicules, rarely of any other form than acerates ;

but while one (A) will select only fragments of large

acerates, another (B) will reject every thing save the

smallest spicules.

6. Globigerina-shells used exclusively.

7. Test made of sand-grains of small size, with here and there

a Globigerina stuck in a conspicuous manner on the out-

side, as though for ornament.

8. Tests formed of the minutest particles of ‘‘ Globigerina-

ooze,’ consisting of coccoliths &c.

9. Tests in which flat fragments of the shells of bivalve Mol-

lusca form conspicuous objects; the fragments may be so

built together as to form (A) a produced series of cham-

bers (after the form of Valvulina gramen, D’Orb.), or

(B) a flattened disk, as, for example, Astrorhiza limi-

cola, Sandahl.

So much for the material employed; but there are also

various ways of working up the objects into the structures.

Here are some :—

B. Modes of using the Building-material.

1. A promiscuous mixture of little pebbles of various kinds,

ot larger Globigerine and other Foraminifera. This is,

perhaps, the least-interesting builder (see “ coarse type

of Nodosarine Lituola,” Carpenter, Microscope, p. 531,

fig. 271, e).

2. The selected quartz-grains (whether 1, 2, or 3 of last list)

may be used in various ways—either roughly cemented

together, with their angles projecting, as in a “ rough-

cast’? wall: of this mode of building, Botellina, Rhab-

dammina abyssorum, Sars, Storthosphera albida, Schultze,

and some microscopic (annelid ?) tubes are examples. Or,

3. They may build with most wonderful exactness, each grain

fitted carefully into the interstices of its neighbours, so

that there is hardly any space left to be filled up by the

* This is the species which has just been recorded by Mr. H. B. Brady

under the name Spiroloculinu celata, Costa, in a paper “On the Occwrence

of Chalk in the New-Britain Group,” Geol. Mag. dec. ii. vol. iv, no. 12,

Dec. 1877, p. 7 (separate copy).

286 Architecture of Annelida (?) and Rhizopoda.

cement-mortar, the mode of building reminding us of the

careful dovetailing and fitting of the stones in a Cyclo-

pean wall: of this mode of building, a Dzflugia (?) from

Davis Strait affords a type. Or,

4, The material may be so built as to present a tolerably even

smooth surface, although the faces of the grains are still

exposed, as in the “ Globigerine,” “ Nodosarine,” and

“‘Orbuline Lituola,” figured by Carpenter ‘ Microscope,’

p- 533, fig. 273, a, b,c, g, h. Or,

5. The sand-grains may be entirely plastered over and

covered by the sarcode-cement, so that the surface is

smooth and polished, like the face of a wall built of

rubble imbedded in cement: of this, Cyclammina can-

cellata, H. B. Brady, MS., and some other beautiful

undescribed forms are examples.

6. So with the employment of sponge-spicules. Nothing but

fragments of large spicules may be employed: and these

may be (A) laid longitudinally and cemented into a rough

tube, or (B) they may be used only in one particular

part of the structure, as in Marsipella elongata, Norman.

7. Nothing but the smallest spicules may be used, and these

incorporated with great exactitude in the walls, none of

them projecting to the smallest degree, as in Technitella

legumen, Norman, and an undescribed tube. Or,

8. They may be projected at right angles to the surface, stand-

ing out hedgehog-fashion from the wall, as in Pilulina

Jeffreysti, Carpenter, and in some beautiful tubes in my

collection. Or,

9. A spicule may stand out here and there from a wall which

is mainly built up of very finely comminuted material,

as in Carpenter’s “ moniliform Ltuola” (1. c. fig. 271,f)

and in another species in my collection. Or,

10. A single large spicule may be employed to form an axis,

on the middle of which a little sand ball is wrapped, so

that it has the appearance of being spitted by the spicule,

which projects many times the length of the ball on each

side of it.

11. The Globigerine shells, to the exclusion of every thing

else, are built up into a form closely related to Lituola

scorpturus (Montfort).

C. Colour of Deep-sea Arenaceous Foraminifera.

1. White: Technitella legumen, Norman, T. melo, Norman,

or the Globigerina-building form just referred to.

On new Species of Heterocera from Japan. 287

2. Dirty brown (sand-colour, as we ordinarily term it): As-

trorhiza arenaria, Norman, or ‘‘ Orthocerine Lituola”’ of

Carpenter.

3. Rust-coloured or ferruginous, the tint (a) dark: Cyclam-

mina cancellata, Brady, MS. (8) rich and ruddy: Z’o-

chammina trregularis, the tadpole-shaped form figured,

Carpenter, Introd. Foram. pl. xi. fig. 6; Trochammina

gordialis, P. & J.; and Astrorhiza catenata, Norman.

mentioned under B.

4. Grey: see A, 4.

3. Very dark, almost black, as in an abyssal Foraminifer

which seems to be identical with the fossil Nodosaria

Schlichtii, Reuss.

6. Green: the green sarcode in living specimens is often very

vivid. I have an undescribed scale-like form which has

been dead eleven years; yet on being wetted the green

colouring is most conspicuous.

The above brief notes will give some notion of the wonder-

ful skill displayed by these little architects. I have made no

allusion to the very great variety of form in their dwellings ;

and inasmuch as the greater number of the species from which

these Notes are drawn remain still undescribed, I have only

been able to illustrate my meaning by reference to a few

named species. Brief as the Notes are, I have thought that

they would have interest at the present moment as connected

with structures built by Haliphysema, Technitella, and Mar-

stpella.

XXXII.— Descriptions of new Species of Heterocera from

Japan.—Part II. Noctuites. By Arruur G. BUTLER,

PAauSeg BAS.) &e:

[Continued from p. 204.]

Amphipyride.

134. Amphipyra erebina, n. sp.

Allied to A. perflua, but rather smaller, more sericeous ;

the primaries with the inner zigzag stripe obscured, the outer

stripe less white and not so regularly dentate-sinuate, the ex-

ternal area greyer, with the markings less distinct; a blackish

lunate subapical patch: secondaries dark grey instead of pale

brown; fringe and marginal edge sordid whitish. Wings below

streaked with grey, the discal band darker and more sharply

288 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species -

defined ; the discocellular spot of primaries dark brown, ill-

defined, that of secondaries black; a broad submarginal greyish-

brown band diffused internally on the primaries, Hxpanse

2 inches 1 line.

Yokohama (Jonas).

We have also a dwarfed example from Hakodaté measuring

only 1 inch 9 lines in expanse.

135. Amphipyra tripartita, n. sp.

Intermediate between the A. perflua and A. livida groups.

Primaries above glossy raven-black, crossed by two white

belts, one near the base, the other running from the apical

third of the costa to the external angle, slightly arched and

partly intersected externally by a tapering dull red streak ;

area beyond the band brownish, with an irregular submar-

ginal series of white-speckled black spots: secondaries

shining chocolate-brown ; fringe pale brown, with a broad

central grey belt: thorax raven-black ; abdomen smoky brown,

with a shining greenish lustre. Underside greyish fuliginous,

sericeous 3 the external area broadly darker, crossed by a paler

discal band; secondaries with the costal half dusky, base whitish ;

a black spot at the end of the cell; legs black, banded with

whitish. Expanse 1 inch 11 lines to 2 inches 4 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas),

136. Orthogonia crispina, n. sp.

Primaries above pale greyish whity brown (in some examples

purplish brown and sericeous, with the exception of the in-

ternal border), tinted here and there with green, and striated

with grey ; a triangular dull greenish spot at the base of the

cell, bounded above by a A-shaped black marking and

below by a black y; base brownish, a large black spot near

the base of inner border; a broad central brown band, tinted

with lilacine and green, clouded and striated with black, its

inner edge angular, its outer edge gently bisinuate, both

edges immediately followed by a grey line of the same form ;

costal margin yellow, spotted with blackish from the end of

the cell, a greyish discal streak in which (on the discoidal in-

terspaces) are two black spots; a broad external tapering

greyish patch, bounded internally by a darker line and, oppo-

site to the discal spots, by a black >; a marginal row of black

lunules ; fringe purplish brown, with a yellow undulated basal

line: secondaries greyish brown, with broad diffused purplish

brown outer border; costal area silky opaline whitish; fringe

testaceous, tipped with white : body corresponding in tint with

of Heterocera from Japan. 289

the wings; the thorax greyish whity brown in the centre.

Wings below pale shining brown, a discal line and a diffused

belt beyond it greyish; fringe as above; costa of primaries

yellowish ; a brown discocellular lunule in secondaries. Ex-

panse 2 inches 6 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Allied to O. sera of Felder.

137. Mormo mucivirens, n. sp.

Primaries above dull olive-green, with darker markings, nearly

as in Mormo maura, edged with pale green; the pale brown

diffused areas of M. maura replaced by sericeous grey more

or less mottled with olive-green : secondaries purplish brown,

the external area broadly darker ; fringe testaceous, intersected

by a grey stripe: body corresponding with the wings. Under

surface fuliginous brown; primaries sericeous, especially

towards the inner margin, which is greyish; two dusky

parallel discal stripes ; outer border rather paler than the rest

of the wing; costa spotted with testaceous beyond the cell ;

fringe with a testaceous basal line: secondaries with a large

spot at the end of the cell and a discal stripe blackish brown ;

external area dusky ; fringe as above: legs blackish, speckled

and banded with testaceous. Expanse 2 inches 6-7 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

PERINENIA, n. gen.

Nearly allied to Nenia, agreeing with it in the normal or

three-branched median vein of secondaries*, but differing in its

very broad compressed palpi, the terminal joint of which is at

least twice as broad and abruptly truncated. Type P.

lignosa.

138. Perineenia lignosa, n. sp.

Above shining fuliginous brown; primaries reticulated

with paler brown; a longitudinal black streak through the

cell, interrupted by white dots indicating the position of the

orbicular and reniform spots, and terminating as it reaches

a transverse undulated discal black line, beyond which are

four or five decreasing black longitudinal dashes; a marginal

series of black dots; fringe greyish, with a basal undulated

testaceous line: secondaries with a broad blackish border ;

fringe whitish : abdomen greyish. Wings below whity brown,

with diffused and blurred blackish discal line and black disco-

* It is placed among the “Quadrifide” because this vein ought to have

four branches in all genera of that group.

290 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

cellular spots; discoidal cell of primaries greyish; margin

and marginal dots black. Expanse 1 inch 10 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

139. Neenia muscosa, n. sp.

Primaries sericeous greyish brown, with darker and paler

markings much as in NV. typica, but with the orbicular and

reniform spots, a spot at the base, another near the base on

interno-median area, and one near external angle pale greenish ;

the inner geminate line much more undulated, the submar-

ginal black-bordered whitish line strongly dentate, the centre

forming two S-shaped characters: secondaries sericeous grey,

with darker central line and outer border; fringe as in JN.

typtca: thorax pale testaceous, the collar sordid whitish at

the base on each side, and surrounded by semicircular blackish

lines ; abdomen greyish. Wings below pale sericeous whity

brown, the disk greyish ; two dark grey discal lines; marginal

black liture ; fringe with an interrupted central grey stripe ;

secondaries whitish at the base; a blackish spot at the end of

the cell. Expanse 1 inch 8 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Toxocampide.

140. Toxocampa lilacina, n. sp.

Allied to 7. vicie, but the primaries distinctly shot with

lilac; the spot at the end of the cell subtriangular, excavated

in front, without the upper black dots; the discal belt with its

inner pale margin much more deeply sinuated, and its outer

pale edge rather straighter; this belt and the external area

greyish brown: secondaries greyer, with broader and more

uniform fringe: body greyer, collar and crest of head jet-black.

Under surface greyer, the discal belt more diffused; tarsi of

anterior legs with the terminal joints black. Expanse 1 inch

7-10 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

141. Toxocampa enormis, n. sp.

Primaries grey, with a slightly lilacine tint, crossed by five

lines, the first basicostal, abbreviated, little more than an elon-

gated brown spot, second straight, with a short angle above

the costal vein, third regularly zigzag, bifurcate from the end

of the cell (but interrupted by the reniform spot, which is

black with brown centre and white margin), these three lines

brown, indistinctly bordered with pale grey internally ; fourth

or inner discal line whitish, zigzag, lunulated from the middle

of Heterocera from Japan. 291

downwards; the wing beyond this line and the costal area as

far as the third line suffused with brown; fifth line whitish

and nearly straight to the first median branch, where it is

replaced by a dark grey 3-shaped line; a submarginal series

of short longitudinal whitish lines terminating in black dots ;

fringe dark grey, traversed by a whitish line: secondaries

pale brown, with a broad fuliginous outer border; fringe stra-

mineous: thorax grey, black-speckled, crest of head and

collar jet-black ; abdomen greyish, with the base and edges

of the segments whitish; anal tuft stramineous. Under

surface pale sandy yellow: wings with a broad blackish ex-

terno-discal band, outer border brownish, widest in primaries ;

fringe of these wings dark grey, with basal whitish line, dis-

coidal cell and interno-median area greyish: secondaries with

a grey dot at the end of the cell; front of pectus and legs

above greyish. Expanse 2 inches 6 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Of more than twice the bulk of any known species.

Ommatophoride.

142. Nyctipao letitia, n. sp.

Near to N. crepuscularis, but altogether duller; the white

discal stripe not bordered with lilac; the yellowish outer border

of the arched white stripe and the diffused oblique bars on the

external area replaced by dull pale brown; all the dark areas

fuliginous; the ocellus smaller, its front margin more regu-

larly convex; the white lunules on the disk of all the wings

more slender, and enclosing large blackish spots. Under

surface darker and duller, the white spots of the discal series

rather larger, and the other spots smaller; the inner arched

streak of secondaries further from the discal series of spots.

Expanse 4 inches 5 lines.

Hakodaté (Whztely) ; Yokohama (Jonas).

Hypopyride.

143. Sprrama interlineata, n. sp.

Spiramia (sic) japonica, Walker (nec Guénée), Lep. Het. Suppl. iii.

p. 948 (1865).

3, Yokohama (Jonas); ¢ , Japan (Fortune).

S. interlineata chiefly differs from the S. rectifasciata of

Ménétriés, of which we also possess both sexes, in the creamy

tint of the white belt, which in the primaries is traversed by

two parallel brown lines.

292 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

144, Hypopyra Martha, n. sp.

Nearest to H. dulcina of Felder, but at once distinguishable

by its shorter primaries, its paler and redder coloration above,

the absence of the oblique streak from the apex of primaries,

' the well-defined central belt formed by the central incurved

grey line, and the series of black dots which in H. dulcina

touch the pale undulated discal stripe, the latter placed near

the submarginal line, which is strongly undulated; only two

small black dots at the end of the cell; the transverse stripes

of secondaries straight; body much as in H. dulcina, but the

thorax darker and the collar redder. Under surface quite

different, uniformly red, crossed by three equidistant dusky

discal stripes; veins, base, and a submarginal series of <-like

marks brownish. Expanse 3 inches 1 line.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Ophiuside.

CHRYSORITHRUM, n. gen.

Allied to Ophiusa (O. fulvotenia), but differing in having

the terminal jointof the palpi twice the length, the tegule

greatly developed laterally so as to form a roof-shaped crest

over the back of the thorax, the secondaries without the angle

at the end of the first median branch. Type ‘‘ Catocala amata”’

of Bremer.

145. Chrysorithrum sericeum, n. sp.

Smaller than C. amata; primaries shining slaty grey, all

the markings black, and surrounded by a line of the ground-

colour, followed by a black line; the angular subbasal band of

C. amata replaced by a very irregular band, not reaching the

inner margin, its outer and inferior borders forming three un-

dulations, its inner edge >-shaped: secondaries fuliginous

brown, the disk deepest in colour, a broad tapering ochreous

band, not reaching the anal angle, and widest just beyond the

cell: body dark slaty grey; back of head, collar, and tegule

blackish. Under surtace fuliginous brown, outer border

narrowly grey: primaries with a broad subbasal triangular

patch, sordid ochreous; a slightly curved discal belt, tapering

at each end and crossed by black nervures, pale stramineous :

secondaries with the basal third greyish; a central oblique

squamose stramineous streak; palpi, tarsi, and the upper

surface of the coxe and femora of the anterior legs brown.

Expanse 2 inches 4 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

of Heterocera from Japan. 293

146. Ophiusa dulcis, n. sp.

Allied to O. angularis of Boisduval, but rather smaller,

egreyer, the lilacine belt of primaries with parallel margins,

the brown belt beyond it narrower, feebly and regularly exca-

vated from the middle to the inner margin, but not sinuate

angulated as in O. angularis; apical blackish spots larger and

confluent: secondaries with whitish border. LExpanse 1 inch

4 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

O. angularis is figured in Boisduval’s ‘ Faune de Madagas-

car.’

Euclidiide.

147. Huclidia consors, n. sp.

Primaries above like those of EZ. cuspidea, but paler, and with

the oblique inner band formed like that of EL. glyphica: secon-

daries like those of H. glyphica, but rather darker, the discal

band broad and not interrupted, although narrow towards the

apex; the basal area also complete: body as in L. cuspidea.

Wings below ochreous, more or less irrorated with brown, with

two discal parallel stripes, the outer one of the primaries macu-

lar,interrupted in the centre, the inner one of secondaries (where

both are angular) indistinct; cells terminating with dusky

lunate spots; marginal line blackish, fringe black-tipped :

body somewhat greyish. Expanse 1 inch 5 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Remigiide.

148. Remigia annetta, n. sp.

Upper surface like that of 2. gregalis, excepting that the se-

condaries are greyish brown, under surface altogether paler

and yellower: primaries silky grey, with the costal and outer

borders ochraceous, fringe grey; limitation of outer border

and a parallel line across the disk dark grey: secondaries

ochraceous, irrorated with grey, disk crossed by two parallel

greyish lines: body below sordid testaceous; palpi and coxee

of legs sordid orange. Expanse 1 inch 10 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas) ; Hakodaté (Whitely).

Also allied to R. mutuata.

Thermesiidz.

149, Azazia unduligera, n. sp.

Wings above greyish brown; primaries crossed by two

irregularly zigzag central dusky lines, indicating a broad

294 On new Species of Heterocera from Japan.

central band, through the centre of which runs a straight dif-

fused dusky streak enclosing the reniform spot, which is

barely indicated, excepting by a small whitish spot ; two other

dusky transverse lines near the base, the outer one subparallel

to the inner central line, the inner one abbreviated; outer

border dusky, cut off obliquely at apex by a black litura, which

joins a nearly straight transverse black-edged yellowish line;

a marginal series of black dots: secondaries crossed by a cen-

tral bracket-shaped dusky line; outer border slightly dusky,

crossed by a whitish nearly straight line; a marginal series

of black dots: body greyish brown. Under surface paler ;

wings crossed by two parallel dusky lines, followed by a dif-

fused externo-discal dusky belt; discocellulars dusky; a

whitish line at the base of the fringe; secondaries slightly

paler than primaries; venter pale sandy whitish. Expanse,

& linch 9 lines, ? 1 inch 7 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

This species has somewhat the appearance of Entomogramma

mediocris, Ophiusa bistriaris, and Remigia congressa, but is

clearly allied to Azazia rubricans.

150. Selenis lauta, n. sp.

Allied to 8. costal’s from Natal; wings above pale coppery

brown, a broad white costal border occupying nearly the

anterior half of the primaries and the basal fifth of the secon-

daries ; two parallel dusky white-edged discal lines; a mar-

ginal series of white-edged black dots; fringe grey: secons

daries with white costal area: head and thorax white, collar

dark brown; abdomen pale brown. Under surface sericeous

white: primaries sordid towards the costa, with indications of

two parallel greyish discal lines; costa near apex marked with

three black dots; all the wings with a submarginal series of

black dots and grey fringe: body below creamy whitish.

Expanse 8 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

151. Capnodes cinerea, n. sp.

Blue-black, densely irrorated with white scales, so that it

looks as if slaty grey striated with blackish: primaries with

the basal two thirds of the costal area creamy whitish, inter-

rupted near the base by a blackish spot followed by an oblique

black dash, and opposite to the end of the cell by a large

ferruginous spot followed by a similar black dash; a large

ferruginous spot close to the base ; a small fulvous spot in the

cell; reniform spot fulvous internally, white externally, divi-

On Races of Herring observed in the Sound. 295

ded by a black line; apical border pale tawny ; fringe alter-

nately sordid white and grey: secondaries with the costa pale,

fringe as in primaries: body blackish, collar black, prothorax

and base of abdomen crossed by white belts. Under surface

fuliginous, costa of primaries streaked and spotted with

ochreous; a black oval spot in the cell, and a fusiform spot

closing the cell, both bordered with creamy white ; fringe as

above. Expanse, ¢ 1 inch 1 line, 2 1 inch 4 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

152. Capnodes cremata, n. sp.

Shining slaty grey, becoming brown towards the borders,

crossed by two central parallel sinuous lines of black spots ;

a discal series of white dots parallel to the outer line, and ter-

minating near anal angle of secondaries in a white W-shaped

character; outer margin undulated, black, spotted with white,

and followed on the fringe by a continuous series of black

crescents; fringe also blackish externally, particularly on

primaries; costa of primaries irrorated with testaceous and

crossed by four or five angular spots of the same colour, from

the outermost of which (a >-shaped marking) runs a zigzag

pale greyish, black-edged line across the disk: secondaries

with a discal series of black-edged testaceous spots: body

greyish brown, thorax slaty grey. Under surface fuliginous,

crossed by two central angulated dusky lines; a pale discal

line; outer margin dusky, fringe greyish; discocellulars

blackish; primaries with three decreasing whitish spots on

apical half of costal margin ; tarsi black, banded with whitish.

Expanse, ¢ 1 inch 3 lines, ? 1 inch 5 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

XXXIITI.—On Races of Herring observed in the Sound.

By G. WINTHER*.

THE common herring occurs along the coasts of the Kattegat,

through the Sound, the Belts, and a large portion of the

Baltic, in several varieties, distinguished by the size and rela-

tive proportions of their body, as well as by their habits of

life. In this respect the Sound offers some peculiarities on

account of its constituting a connecting water between the

Baltic and the North Sea, of which the Kattegat is a depen- ~

dency. There are three distinct races of herrings in the

* Extract of a paper in the ‘ Nordisk Tidsskrift for Fiskeri’ (Copen-

hagen, 1876).

296 M. G. Winther on Races of

Sound. One of them spawns in the spring, and corresponds

in its habits so closely with other fish which are known to be

stationary in the Sound, that in all probability it is stationary:

likethem. This variety is the smallest of the three—a circum-

stance which is in good keeping with the supposition that it

does not at any time leave this comparatively narrow and

shallow basin. The other two varieties are migratory, and

visit the Sound during the autumn for the sake of spawning—

one of them coming from the south, the other from the north,

both meeting in that part of the Sound which les between

the islands of Amager and Saltholm and the Swedish coast,

and where a chain of shallows, intersected by winding chan-

nels, stretches right across. The southern kind of herring

agrees with Nilsson’s description of the “ Kiviksill” (in

Skand. Fauna, Fiskar, p. 496) ; this is in all probability

peculiar to the western part of the Baltic, which differs not a

little from the portion beyond Bornholm as to the saltness of

the water &c. Every autumn large quantities of these

herrings travel as far as the Flinterende, a channel, well

known to navigators, between Saltholm and the Swedish

coast, where they spawn, and from which they again return

to the Baltic in the winter. Sometimes, but rarely, easterly

winds and strong currents carry them further north after the

spawning-season ; but until then they do not ordinarily go

beyond the Flinterende.

The second of the two varieties which spawn in the autumn

arrives in the Sound from the Kattegat, and is intermediate

between the Kiviksill and the Kullasill of Nilsson, or ordinary

herring of the Kattegat. On account of its habits, this variety

is called Bundsild or bottom-herring. Generally speaking it

is very regular in its habits, keeping quiet near the bottom of

the sea in the daytime, moving about in the deep from about

an hour before sunset till an hour after sunset, or even as late

as midnight if the moon is high, and then rising to the sur-

face, where it remains until sunrise; but in the spawning-

season these herrings move about irregularly, and may be

caught at any time. On their journeys they follow the

deepest channels, allowing themselves to be carried along by

the current, and in stormy weather regularly seeking the lee

coast. The temperature of the water in the Sound in the

spawning-season is from 50° to 53°6 Fahr. ‘The principal

spawning-ground of this kind is on a submarine plateau north

of the Flinterende. After the spawning they usually take a

turn south into the bay of Kjége, and then return north-

wards to the Kattegat. The most remarkable circumstance

in connexion with them is the periodicity which has been ob-

served in the take of them. Herring-periods are known in

Herring observed in the Sound. 297

many foreign places; but in this case an explanation of the

phenomenon can be given. In the Sound a herring-period

lasts eight years. At the commencement the fish are few and

small; but there is a steady increase in quantity and quality

until the fifth and sixth years, which are the best, and are

followed by two years of decrease in quantity, after which the

large fish suddenly disappear; and in the ninth year only

smaller herrings are taken, and the quantity is likewise defi-

cient. How great the difference between the fish in the bad

and the good years is, may be concluded from the fact that

the length of the meshes of the nets used in 1874, when

the last completed period terminated, was 56 millims.,

whilst in the nets used in 1867, when that period com-

menced, it was only 39°5 millims. In 1875, when a new

period came on, hardly any large fish were taken, but only

small ones; and the question naturally arises, What has

become of the large breed, and where does the small breed

come from? ‘The former evidently have remained in the

Kattegat; and the latter were of the southern or Baltic

variety, which had spread over the excellent spawning-

ground north of the Flinterende, which in ordinary years is

occupied by the northern variety, but in that year was free.

Having thus established themselves in the northern portion

of the Sound, they have gone north into the Kattegat after

the breeding-season, instead of returning to the Baltic, as

this kind usually do. From the Kattegat they will now

return every year to the Sound; and from living in a

larger basin, and perhaps on account of the water being more

salt there, they will increase in size until the Sound becomes

too confined for them ; then the shoals, led as they always are

by the biggest individuals, will seek other spawning-grounds

in the Kattegat, leaving the one north of the Flinterende

untenanted ; this will then be occupied by another instalment

of Baltic herrings, probably in 1883. According to this view

the Bundsild of the Danish fishermen is merely the Baltic

herring, or Kiviksill, improved by emigration to more favour-

able localities, where it remains till the improvement has been

carried still further ; then they cease to return to the sound, but

remain in the more open water of the Kattegat. Something

quite analogous seems to hold good with regard to the herring

in the Great Belt, and perhaps also with regard to other

species of fish in these waters. It has not yet been observed

whether the converse, a degeneration of races penetrating into

the Baltic from the Kattegat, does not take place occasionally.

In any case a similar explanation is very likely to afford the

explanation of similar fishing-periods in other places.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol.i. 20

298 Mr. H. J. Carter on new Species of

XXXIV.—On new Species of Hydractiniide, Recent and

fossil, and on the Identity in Structure of Millepora alcicor-

nis with Stromatopora. By H. J. Carrer, F.R.S. &e.

[Plate XVII. ]

In the ‘ Annals’ for 1873 (vol. xi. p.10) I have inserted a

description of a branched chitinous polypary, to which the late

Dr. J. E. Gray had given the name of Dehitella atrorubens,

under the idea that it was a sponge, but which subsequently

proved to be a species of Hydractinia; and I have now to

present the following description of a chitinous polypary like

that of Hydractinia echinata, but with short branches here

and there similar in form and colour to those of Dehitella

atrorubens, which, on the contrary, grows into a bush-like

polypary from a single, smooth, compressed, root-like stem.

Hydractinia arborescens, nu. sp. (Pl. XVII. figs. 1-4.)

Polypary chitinous. Laminiform, surmounted by spines

and branches indiscriminately scattered over the surface.

Colour dark amber-brown (Pl. XVII. fig. 1). Surface follow-

ing the form of the object over which the polypary may be

growing (in this instance a turreted shell like Phos senti-

cosus, family Buccinide) ; uniformly even, except where in-

terrupted by the presence of spines and branches; presenting

a granulated reticulation of short, broken, raised, serrulated

ridges more or less surrounding minute holes once occupied

by the polypites and other soft parts of the ccenosare (figs. 2,

b, c, and 3, a, 6); traversed throughout by a venation of

anastomosing grooves whose depth and distinctness is in pro-

portion to their size, the largest being 1-180th inch in dia-

meter (fig. 2, a, and fig. 4). Holes of the polypites, which are

very numerous and equally present along the course of the

vein-like grooves, as in the interstices of the granulated reticu-

lation, may be best seen where the ccenosare has been well

washed out, varying in size, according to their office, from 2

to 3-1800ths inch in diameter (fig. 2). Spines conical, vari-

able in size and length, scattered more or less partially over

the surface so as to leave here and there plane intervals of

greater or less extent; often growing into erect branches

variable also in length and thickness (fig. 1, aaa), the

largest, which in this instance forms one of a group at the

anterior extremity of the shell, being 1-12th inch in dia-

meter at the base (fig. 1,6), and the remaining longest portion

of the rest (for they have all been broken off more or less close

to their origin in the laminiform part of the polypary) 1-3rd

Recent and Fossil Hydractiniide. 299

of an inch. In all there were thirty branches or processes, of

which those at the extremities of the shell respectively were

the largest and most subdivided. Spines and branches pre-

senting the same kind of surface as that of the rest of the

polypary, with the exception that the serrulated ridges of the

granulated reticulation being longer, thus give rise to oblong

or more or less elongated interstices; those on the spines

forming a series of grano-serrulated ridges, diminishing in

number upwards, until the last three or four, uniting into a

point at the summit as in Hydractinia echinata, thus close

the cancellated structure of which the spine is otherwise com-

posed, Branches more or less divided and covered with small

spines, which terminate the free ends in an alternate manner

like those of Sertularia. Internal structure cancellous

throughout and in direct continuity with the surface through

the holes of the polypites, so that the ccenosare thus forms a

continuous mass, in which the chitinous, clathrous polypary,

having been developed, becomes its skeleton or organ of sup-

ort, sometimes extending into the calcareous material of

the shell itself, and transforming the whole lip, as in the pre-

sent instance, into polypary (fig. 1, d). Size depending upon

that of the object over which the Hydractinia may be grow-

ing; in the present instance the shell covered by it is 21

inches by # inch broad in its greatest diameters.

Hab. Marine, growing over hard objects; in the present

instance completely covering a shell like Phos senticosus or

Fusus sulcatus.

Loc. ? Polynesia.

Obs. The specimen from which the above description has

been taken now belongs to the British Museum, and was found,

without any label or indication of its locality, among the late

Dr. Bowerbank’s collections. Whether by the waves origi-

nally, or subsequently from other causes, it has been lament-

ably treated ; for at the present time, as above stated, out of

the thirty short branches which it once possessed, not one

now remains entire, the whole having been broken off at

variable distances respectively from their origin in the Jami-

niform portion, and some close to it; while the only branched

one which is left projects laterally from that part of the poly-

pary which once entzrely covered the apex of the shell as well

as all other parts, but which is now broken away at this part,

on the opposite side, so as to expose the apex of the shell

itself, the only part consequently now uncovered (fig. 1, c).

At first sight the specimen looks like a shell with branched

spines ; but on closer inspection this is found to be a mistake,

although the branches in some parts may have been initiated

20*

300 Mr. H. J. Carter on new Species of

by the presence of short spines on the shell itself. At the

same time, as with the lip so with the branches, the whole

spine may have been replaced by the polypary of the Hydrac-

tenia; yet then the shell could not have been either of those

mentioned, especially as the largest and greater number of

branches are to be found at the extremities; but I shall

hereafter show that such branches may arise independently of

the presence of any spine at all on the shell over which a

Hydractinia may have grown. The large branches are so

like in form, structure, and colour, together with their spines,

to the branches of Dehitella atrorubens that no doubt can be

entertained of the latter being identical with the former, except

in specification ; while the grooved, anastomosing venation on

the surface, which does not exist on D. atrorubens and the

other bush-like forms that I have examined, is equally iden-

tical with that of the fossil species Hydractinia pliocena

(‘Annals,’ 1877, vol. xix. pl. viil. fig. 8), which is also pre-

sent, but less markedly seen, in H. echinata.

This grooved venation (fig. 4), which is the bed of the

coenosarcal tubulation in which the whole organism originates

from the commencement, and is the same in structure and

function where it forms the first sarcodic lamina on the shell

(‘ Annals,’ 1877, 2. c. p. 46) as on the surface of the full-

grown polypary, is more or less repeated as a proliferous

membrane on the surface of every layer, although it may not

be so marked in some as in other species ; yet, in the present

instance, it is as striking in the chitinous polypary of the

recent H. arborescens as it is in the assumed calcareous one of

the fossil species Hydractinia pliocena, and will be found

even more developed in the new fossil species I am about to

describe.

Previously, however, it is desirable that I should add a few

words on the recent species.

Hydractinia calcarea, Cart.

Since the description of this was published (‘ Annals,’ 1877,

vol. xix. p. 50), Mr. Thomas Higgin, of Liverpool, has kindly

sent me some more specimens on equally small shells of

Fusus and Nerita respectively, from the same locality, many

of which possess short branches which, in two instances,

growing from a specimen on the smooth surface of a Nerita,

at once point out that they, at all events, do not originate in

the presence of a spine on the shell which may have become

covered or entirely replaced by the polypary of the Hydrac-

tinta, as at first supposed (‘ Annals,’ 1877, /. c. p. 51), but

are distinct branches or processes similar to those of the

Recent and Fossil Hy dractiniide. 301

chitinous species just described. On the smooth species of

Nerita, to which I have alluded, the development of the

branch can be followed throughout from the spine of the

polypary to its ultimate form, which in the largest specimens

is about 1-10th inch in diameter and 1-4th of an inch long,

with a tendency to assume a compressed, palmate, bifurcate

shape at the free extremity. So it should be remembered

that the calcareous polypary of Hydractinia calcarea may

also be branched like the chitinous one of H. arborescens.

Hydractinia Kingti, n. sp.

Fossil. Polypary massive, growing over a turreted shell,

somewhat like that supporting Hydractinia arborescens, com--

pressed, extending here and there irregularly into a short,

thick lobe, process, or branch. Composed of compact, greyish-

white limestone. Surface uniformly even, thickly veined with

anastomosing grooves amongst granular ridges once surround-

ing the holes of the polypites, which are now tilled up and undis-

tinguishable from the rest of the calcareous material; pustu-

liferous—that is, presenting numerous depressed papillary

elevations, which are the representatives of the spines in other

species, and where broken open (as many are) disclosing the

grooved venation on the surface of the subjacent layer. In-

ternal structure concentrically laminated, presenting in a

vertical section rows of chambers (?the hollow bases of the

pustules of each layer), between which are the vertical tubes

of the polypites, now, for the most part, filled with calcareous

matter, but, where still hollow, possessing a diameter of

3-1800ths inch, and at their openings into the roofs of the

chambers respectively a calcareous diaphragm with central

hole, similar in form to that of Hydractinia calcarea (§ Annals,’

1877, vol. xix. p. 51, pl. viii. fig. 4, g g), but apparently

without its repetition which is seen along the vertical tubes in

Hydractinia pliocena—a point, however, that must be de-

cided by a more favourable specimen than the one which I

possess. Size of the fragment from which the above descrip-

tion is taken about an inch square and half an inch thick.

Thickest portion of the polypary from the shell outwards

§-12ths inch ; largest lobo-branch, which is circular in the

section, but whose extremity has been broken off, 4 inch in

diameter, and the same in length.

Hab. Marine, on a turreted shell like Phos senticosus ; or it

may have been a Cerithium, as there is only a fragment of

the apex left in the specimen for this determination.

Loc. ? Subapennine strata.

Obs. At first I thought this was a specimen of Hydractinia

302 Mr. H. J. Carter on

pliocena; but subsequent and more particular examination

shows that it has several specific differences, viz. :—1, the visi-

ble venation is much denser in H. Kingii than in H. pliocena ;

2, there are no spines on the former, which, as before stated,

are represented by pustuliform elevations; 3, the entire mass

is irregular in form and extended into a thick lobo-branch or

process here and there; 4, the vertical tubes present no dia-

phragm or septal divisions, except the one above mentioned.

It has been named after Prof. King, of Galway, who kindly

sent me the specimen, which he thought came from the Sub-

apennines and had already received a name.

Millepora alcicornis.

As this is a well-known species, having been named by

Linneus, stated by Ellis and Solander to be so abundant

in the West Indies as to be ‘used principally for burning

into lime,” and pronounced by Agassiz, in 1859, to be “ very

nearly related to the Hydractiniz,” I shall only describe so

much of it (from a dried fragment which, by accident, has

lately fallen into my hands with fragments of sponges which

indicate that it came from the seas between the two Americas)

as may be necessary for the purpose of showing how closely

allied in structure its corallum or polypary is to that of Stroma-

topora.

Its specific designation well indicates the general form. —

The surface is harsh to the touch from being composed of the

pointed free ends of a meandering reticulation of anastomo-

sing more or less flat fibre, whose interstices form the openings

ot a subjacent structure, which will be more particularly de-

scribed hereafter, rendered uniformly uneven or bossed by

gentle elevations and depressions ; over which, scattered more

or less irregularly, are many apertures that may be divided

into two sets, viz. large and small, the latter most numerous ;

the largest, which more especially have a toothed or sub-

asteroid margin, are about 1-120th inch in diameter and

1-12th inch. apart, while the smaller ones are about 1-225th

inch in diameter and 1-48th inch apart; but both vary

slightly in size and in their distances from each other. Be-

sides this, the surface presents here and there an intricate

tubular venation composed of chitinous canals in relief, more

or less covered with calcareous material, whose minute branches

anastomose freely over the points of the meandering reticu-

lation mentioned, and, in many instances, become lost beneath

it, the largest branches averaging 1-360th inch in diameter. I

note this particularly because we shall find remnants of it

by-and-by (fig. 8, @) on the surface of the fossil called

Millepora and Stromatopora. 303

Millepora Woodwardit). Internal structure :—The surface, as

already intimated, is the outward limit of a subjacent cancellated

structure (fig. 5, b 6), formed by the anastomosis of more or less

flattened reticulated fibre; and this, which is the staple sub-

stance of the corallum, is remarkable for its minuteness and the

tortuous form of both its solid and cavernous parts, the latter

in the fresh state being occupied by the ccenosare, which is

thus brought into direct continuation with the exterior. After

forming a layer of about 1-180th inch in thickness and of

yellowish-white colour, it becomes more compact and presents

a bluish tint, which thus establishes a distinct line of demar-

cation between the two; while, when the superficial layer is

carefully picked off with a sharp point, the horizontal surface

of the subjacent one is seen to be traversed by a deep grooved

venation similar to that of Hydractinia arborescens, &c., with

here and there the remains of a dry sarcodic ccenosarcal tube

in it running along its course, thus indicating that the surface-

layer, which is less compact, of a different colour, and overrun

here and there by a tubular venation, is the external layer of

the growing corallum; and therefore we may fairly infer that

successively the corallum has been formed in this way through-

out, although somewhat modified in density &c. by age and

subsequent development.

Having now described the staple substance of the corallum

from the surface to the axis of the branch (that is, from the

circumference to the centre), we have next to follow the large

apertures in the same way. These, in the vertical section,

may be observed to be the openings of tubular spaces varying

from 1-360th to 1-180th inch in diameter, which descend more

or less vertically and nearly to the central plane that separates

the two lamine of which the elkhorn-like compressed branch

is formed (fig. 5,aa). Further, it may be observed that

these spaces are horizontally but unequally divided into

several compartments by very thin transverse septa or tabule

(fig. 5, c), and that their internal surface is plentifully perfo-

rated by more or less rounded apertures (fig. 5, e) such as may

be seen in Stromatopora, which communicate with the tortu-

ous cavities of the coenosarcal skeleton or cancellated structure

of the corallum, so that the tubular spaces are as much fora-

minated (fig. 5, c,d) as the coenosarcal skeleton is cancellated,

being simply excavated in the midst of the latter, without the

least trace of any distinct parietes after the coenosarc has

been abstracted. Indeed it is very remarkable that all

the cavities of the ccenosarcal skeleton (that is, of the

whole corallum, like that of Parkeria &c.) are formed

upon the ccenosare (identical in this respect with the can-

304 Mr. H. J. Carter oz

cellous structure of bone), so that, in the absence of the latter,

as just stated, none of them presents the least sign of a

wall. The only part which appears solid or different from the

rest in structure is the tabula or transverse septum of the

tubular excavations (fig. 5,c). Indeed, here as elsewhere

in the Hydractiniide, it is the intricate anastomosis of the

minute branches of the ccenosare which leads to the formation

of the peculiar, cancellated, coenosarcal skeleton, which, again,

is as indicative of the structure of the Hydractiniide as it is

opposed to that of the Foraminifera. Not unfrequently the

tabula is surmounted centrally by a kind of style, which, in

some species of Stromatopora, seems to be indicated by the

presence of a white point in the centre of the transparent calc-

spar filling the rest of the calicle.

Finally, if the elkhorn-like branch of Millepora alcicornis

be split in two through the centre parallel with its flat sur-

face, the plane of each part thus exposed will present concen-

tric lines of lamination in the cancellous structure, which, ex-

tending from side to side parallel with the plane, indicate the

progressive formation of the flat branch upwards from the

point at which it commenced to expand. These lines of

lamination, however, are, in accordance with the rest of the

structure, not indicated by distinct laminee, but by the position

of the rows of apertures in the ccenosarcal skeleton or co-

rallum.

Thus we have every thing structural in the corallum of

Millepora alcicornis that is to be found in Stromatopora,

excepting the stedliform systems of venation.

What, then, were those “ stelliform systems’ which, in my

paper on Hydractinia, &c. (‘ Annals,’ 1877, vol. xix. p. 68,

and pl. viii. figs. 19 &c.), I have likened to the superficial

stelliform excretory canal-systems of some sponges, and sug-

gested a like function? J] need hardly answer the question,

after what has been above stated, especially when they are to

be seen on the upper surface of every layer of a Stromatopora

as it is split off from the entire specimen. ‘They were not

water-vascular excretory systems as in sponges, but tubular

venations of the coenosarc on the surface, probably filled with

“‘entodermic cells,” as will appear hereafter, preparing the

way proliferously for the new layer; and, although in no

instance that I know of, yet there may be an existing species

of Millepora in which the grooved venation, instead of mean-

dering generally over the surface in large branches and sending

off smaller ones, which by subdivision become still smaller,

and ultimately intermingle with each other (like the capil-

Millepora and Stromatopora. 305

lary system of blood-vessels in the warm-blooded animals),

proceeds from central points, and thus resembles the stelliform

arrangement characteristic of Stromatopora.

That this stelliform arrangement should not have been

exactly the same even in the different species of Stromatopora

is as certain as that in all it seems to have been connected

with the same function, and that function to have been what

has been above stated. But let us now tur for a few

moments to the able observations of Mr. H. Moseley, who has

studied the Milleporide in their living state (Phil. Trans.

1876, vol. 166, p. 91).

Mr. Moseley states that specimens of Helioporacerulea,

which were obtained at Zamboangan, in Mindanao, one of the

Philippine Islands, and Millepora alcicornis, in “ great profu-

sion” at Bermuda, were found to be as different in their

minute structure as in their general form; for while the

corallum of Heliopora cerulea was observed to consist of

“tubes of circular section, of nearly uniform diameter, closely

packed side by side. . . . with their walls, where touching, fused

together,” and the intervals filled up by a hard tissue, which

appears above the margins of the tubes “in papilliform pro-

minences”” (/.c. p. 99), that of Midllepora alcicornis was

found to be composed of a network of tortuous branches of

hard tissue, in which “the soft tissues appear to occupy a

series of tortuous canals,” “ that lead from the calicles in all

directions, and, anastomosing freely with one another, join the

cavities of the surrounding calicles”’ (/. c. p. 113)—to which,

as before stated, might be added that the tubes of the calicles

are imbedded in this tissue at variable distances from each

other respectively, as further indicated by the distance between

these apertures on the surface.

Mcreover Mr. Moseley describes our ‘ grooved venation ”’

as ‘‘canal-systems,” the tubes of which are “ not only lined

by, but also always more or less filled with entodermic cells.”

They are divided into two systems, viz. a deep or horizontal

and a superficial or more or less vertical system—the former

being that which I have more particularly described in Mille-

pora alcicornis, and whose canals, cut across in the vertical

section of this species, may be seen just below the last-formed

or external layer in the same position as that figured by Mr.

Moseley in Heliopora (l.c. p. 105, pl. viii. fig. 1, V', and

pl. ix. fig. 8). That this is not a water-vascular system is

thus proved beyond a doubt, as clearly as that it is the grooved

venation, in which the original soft tube may be seen, as first

noticed in Hydractinva echinata (‘ Annals,’ 1877, vol. xix.

306 Mr. H. J. Carter on

p- 48, pl. viii. fig. 3), and now in a dried state subsequently

in the venation on the penultimate layer of Millepora alci-

corns.

But these views are opposed to those of Drs. Nicholson and

Murie, in the report of whose paper on the minute “ structure

of Stromatopora,” read before the Linnean Society on the

20th Dec. last, we read that the authors “discard the notion

of its alliance [that of Stromatopora] with the Nullipores, or

belonging to the corals, Hydrozoa, or Foraminifera ;” while,

“under negative evidence,” they would constitute for the

Stromatoporids ‘a new order of calcareous sponges—NStro-

matoporidea.” Herein, I need hardly state, it is impossible

for me to acquiesce.

Millepora Woodwardit, cast. (Pl. XVII. figs. 6-9.)

Lastly I must advert to the fossil from the ‘ Lower Chalk”

of Dover, kindly sent to me by Mr. Woodward of the British

Museum, last year, and described in the ‘ Annals’ (vol. xix.

. 64) under the provisional name of “ Bradya tergestina,”

Stache, MS.”—chiefly for the purpose of giving a figure of

it, which I then had not the opportunity of doing, as my plate

of illustrations had been filled up previous to its arrival.

Having in my private journal, however, accurately sketched

the upper portion of it, together with the section, of the natu-

ral size, it is herewith reproduced (figs. 6, 7), as well as a

magnified view of the fragments of the “ creeping, branched,

tortuous, dendriform fibre in prominent relief,” mentioned at

p- 65 (é.c.), that remains on its surface (fig. 8, a), and a

diagram, to scale, of one of the tubular spaces (fig. 9, a), now

observed to be septate like that of Millepora alcicornis. To

the great resemblance of the stelliform systems of venation

(fig. 6,aa) to, if not identity with, those of Stromatopora I have

already alluded; I have also likened them to the “creeping,

branched, tortuous, dendriform fibre in relief ”’ on the surface of

the chitinous one, Hydractinia echinata ; and now they may be

identified with the calcareous one on the surface of Mdillepora

alcicornis. I have also since seen the base of this fossil, which

presents no stelliform venation, but an irregular surface indi-

cative of that of attachment, while the upper or sectionized

polished part shows that the tubes had septa (tabule) like

those of Stromatopora and Millepora alcicornis ; lastly, I ob-

serve towards the periphery a great number of minute spheri-

cal bodies of different sizes below the 3-1800ths inch in

diameter, which appear to have been ova.

Can D’Orbigny’s Stellispongia variabilis, which extends

from the Trias to the Upper Chalk (Senonien—not “ Sues-

Millepora and Stromatopora. 307

sonien””’ or Eocene as stated by mistake in my paper, ‘ An-

nals,’ Uc. p. 67), be allied to Millepora Woodwardit? At all

events the former brings down the stelliform systems of vena-

tion seen in the Silurian Stromatopora &c. to the Chalk age,

as indicated by the type specimen from the Trias, given by

D’Orbigny (Cours élément. Paléont. et Géologie, vol. i.

p- 411, fig. 407), of which a tracing will be found among the

illustrations (fig. 10).

Through the kindness of Mr. Woodward I have also been

able to examine the little globular fossils generally, in the

British Museum, which have been obtained from the chalk of

Dover, when being washed and prepared for officinal purposes.

These would appear to have been first called by Phillips

Millepora globularis (‘ Geology of Yorkshire,’ 1829, vol. i.

p- 234, tab. 1. fig. 12), and are identical in structure with

Millepora Woodwardii, except that they have no stellate vena-

tion or branched tubulation in relief on the surface. More-

over they are frequently more or less perforated by a cylin-

drical cavity filled with chalk, in which they are identical

with some specimens of Parkeria, wherein the cavity appears,

from its heterogeneous contents, to have been filled with

‘“sea-bottom ”’ (p. 59, 7. c.); while, from the radiated structure

in both Millepora globularis and Parkeria not having been

altered or turned out of its course by the presence of the

cavity, it would appear that the latter had been made by

some organism after the Millepora or Parkeria had completed

their growth respectively. At the same time, in Parkeria, a

nucleus of this heterogeneous material frequently appears,

singly or in plurality, in the midst of the structure, while

some specimens of Millepora globularis present two or more

such cavities of different depths, indicating that, if the exca-

vating organism perished or left its cavity when the latter

was shallow, and the Millepore or Parkeria continued to

grow afterwards, the cavity might appear in the midst of the

structure filled, as we see it in Parkeria, with “ sea-bottom.”’

Sometimes the excavation passes directly through both Jl-

lepora globularis and Parkeria, simulating, as Mr. Woodward

states, the beads of a “ prehistoric race ;” and sometimes, as

just stated, there may be more than one excavation present.

Frequently Millepora globularis, when fixed, assumed a

hemispherical shape ; and also, having frequently grown as if

on a conical body, the base presents a corresponding excava-

tion, which is annulated concentrically with alternate grooves

and elevations, covered with a smooth compact material,

which contrasts strongly with the rough apertured surface of

the hemispherical or free side, arising from the projection of

308 Mr. H. J. Carter on

the free ends of the fibre forming ccenosarcal cancellated struc-

ture between the apertures of the tubular spaces (? Lunulites

urceolata, Phillips, l. ¢c., fig. 11). This form also occurs

with a conical upper surface, when it somewhat resembles

that species of Foraminifera called Orbitolina lenticularis,

but differs from it in the concentric annulation of the ex-

terior being on the convex instead of on the concave side,

to say nothing of the internal structure, as may be seen by my

elucidation of this fossil (‘ Annals,’ 1861, vol. vii. pl. xvii.

figs. 5-9).

Lastly, there is another subglobular free form, with one or

more conical elevations on its upper surface, from which

grooves radiate downwards, and, branching as they descend

over the globular part of the fossil to its base, become shal-

lower, and finally disappear before reaching the centre. This

appears to be only a free form of Millepora Woodwardit. —

In all these fossils we may observe that the remarkable form

of cancellated structure which I have described in Millepora

alcicornis, is excavated by tubular spaces that radiate from the

centre to the circumference, where the same structure projects

in little points above the surface around their apertures, iden-

tically as the horny structure of the same kind projects above

the apertures of the polypites in the polypary of Hydractinia

echinata. ‘This structure is the same in all the branched

species of Hydractinia, whether living or fossil, chitinous or

calcareous; andit is perhaps nowhere seen more beautifully than

in the branched Chitina ericopsis, where there is no cuticle

and no core to the stems, which thus entirely and exclusively

consist of this peculiar cancellated tissue excavated by tubular

spaces. Such cancellated structure is never seen in any of

the Foraminifera, not even in Polytrema, and only in a few

stony corals; so that its presence, as before stated, appears to

be decisive against the Hydractinie being Foraminifera.

Having, on the 1st January last, received, with three other

species of fossils allied to Hydractinia, from Dr. Steinmann of

Munich, two specimens of Millepora globularis (Porosphera,

Steinmann) from the Upper Chalk of Hanover, which he

very properly identifies with Bradya tergestina, the old

generic name of Phillips must take precedence of the latter ;

and therefore I have called the Dover fossil “ Mcllepora

Woodwardit ;” nor will it appear strange after this that Phillips

should have applied the name of “ Millepora”’ to these little

fossils (/. c.), subsequently changed by Etheridge to Cosci-

nopora (ed. 1875).

When, too, we remember that Millepora alcicornis is found

under a ‘variety of forms,” one of which is stated by Ellis

Millepora and Stromatopora. 309

and Solander (p. 142) to be ‘‘ like so many beads of a neck-

lace,” and that the structure is radiated, we probably should

find these “ beads’? not only very much like Millepora globu-

laris, but, in their hemispherical condition, diminutive forms

of Stromatopora, saving the stellate arrangement of the cceno-

sarcal venation. .

Millepora globularis and M. Woodwardii appear to be

closely allied in structure; but as yet I have only been able to

see the septa (tabule) in the tubular spaces of the latter, and

this in only one instance (fig. 9); so it is either uncommon

or difficult to recognize.

There is yet another form in the British Museum, about the

same size as Millepora Woodwardit, which was free. It was

irregularly elliptical (having been now cut in two), com-

pressed, and seems to have been globular at first, subsequently

overlapped by an additional growth, which causes one side to

appear under the form of four triangular segments, crucially

arranged, with their points in the centre, two of the segments

opposite, being the overlapping parts of the last growth.

But the structure otherwise is the same as that of all the

rest, viz. radiating tubular spaces, increased in number by -

branching towards the circumference, where their apertures,

therefore, are of unequal size and at slightly variable dis-

{ances apart, situated in the midst of the peculiar ccenosarcal

skeletal tissue above described. ‘The specimen also presents

four or more cylindrical excavations on its surface of different

depths, one of which reaches nearly to the centre of the

fossil.

Thus the forms of this organism may be still more nume-

rous, and, after all, like those of Millepora alcicornis, only

various growths of the same structure ; hence the necessity

of a review of all the species of D’Orbigny’s Coscinopore and

the like, with which they seem to have been more or less

identified, that they may be respectively relegated to their

proper position in the animal kingdom.

Postscript, Feb. 7, 1878.

Since the above was written I have received from Dr.

Steinmann (on the 4th inst.) a copy of his interesting paper,

entitled ‘“ Ueber fossile Hydrozoen,” published in the ‘ Pa-

leontographica,’ n. F. v. 3 (xxv.), p. 101, in which are

enumerated all the species allied to Hydractinia, both living

and fossil, that have been identified, adding to the latter

three new ones, viz. Spheractinia diceratina, Ellipsactinia

ellipsoidea, and Cylindrohyphasma Milaschewitschi, besides

changing the generic names of Millepora globularis, Phillips,

310 Mr. H. J. Carter on

to Porosphera, and Certopora crispa et favosa, Goldfuss, to

Thalimina respectively.

It is worthy of notice that the specimen of Cylindrohy-

phasma Milaschewitschi, which consists of a cylindrical por-

tion 2 inches long and 9-24ths inch thick, should have its

cavity filled with sea-bottom—that is, a heterogeneous mixture

of sand and minute Foraminifera &c., like that which I have

stated to occur in Parkeria. How does this material, viz.

sea-bottom, get there? In a specimen from the “ Chalk

Marl” just received from Mr. Charles Moore, F.G.S., there

is the same condition, viz. the growth of a Hydrozoic (? cal-

careous) polypary or corallum, somewhat like that of Parkeria,

round a nucleus of “ sea-bottom ’’—that is, quartz-sand and

minute Foraminifera &c. Certainly it was the habit of these

Hydrozoa, as it was that of Stromatopora, preceded by their

soft, sarcodic, proliferous membrane, to run in between and

over every thing with which they came into contact. I possess

a block of Stromatopora from the Devonian Limestone in the

neighbourhood of Ipplepen (near Torbay) and its environs, in

which this is represented upon a large scale, there being frag-

- ments of half a dozen other things besides shells &c. in a

mass of Stromatopora which must have originally been two

or three feet at least in diameter. It was given to me by my

friend Mr. William Vicary, of Exeter, who has perhaps as

fine a collection of Stromatopora as any in existence.

In his concluding remarks Dr. Steinmann places Stromato-

pora under Spheractinia; Loftusia under Ellipsactinia; and

Parkeria with Porosphera.

Porosphera is adopted, as before stated, for Phillips’s Mille-

pora, generically ; and unquestionably the use of Millepora

here is confusing; at the same time it shows how sensible

Phillips was of the real nature of this fossil originally.

Dr. Steinmann’s paper is beautifully illustrated, and an

advance upon the subject which cannot be ignored by those

who wish to keep pace with paleontological knowledge. The

slight discrepancy that exists between my figure of Hydrac-

tinia arborescens and that given by Dr. Steinmann arises from

the latter having been lithographed from a rough sketch and

the former from a finished drawing.

As regards the Stromatoporoid origin of Hozoon, however

(footnote, p. 114), of which a type specimen is now before me,

it might be observed that ‘‘moss-agates”’ from the trap of

Western India frequently present arborescent glauconite as

much like organic remains as the so-called Hozoon is remote

from such resemblance. When, therefore, the figure in the

metamorphic rock is even as like organic remains as that in

Millepora and Stromatopora. 311

the Plutonic one, it will be quite time to speculate as to its

original nature; till then it must remain in the abode of

omne tgnotum pro magnifico, into which science forbids her

votary to enter. (The specimen of Hozoon to which I have

alluded (a slice about 24 x2 inches), was sent by Dr. Car-

penter to Profs. King and Rowney, of the Galway College,

Ireland, who kindly presented it to me.)

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVII.

Fig. 1. Hydractinia arborescens, n. sp. on a turreted shell. Natural

size. Branches of the specimen broken off. aa, branches;

b, largest branch ; c, apex of the shell exposed, from a portion

of the polypary having been broken off; d, lip of shell trans-

formed into polypary, also broken.

Fig. 2. The same. Diagram of portion of surface of the polypary, to

show:—a a, large branch of the grooved venation passing through

the surface ; 66, apertures of the polypites, &c.; ¢c¢, lines indi-

cating the position of the grano-serrulated ridges of the polypary.

Scale about 1-96th to 1-1800th inch.

Fig. 3. The same. Diagram of portion of surface of polypary, more mag-

nified, to show :—a a, apertures of polypites &c. in relation to

bb, grano-serrulated ridges. Scale about 1-48th to 1-1800th

inch.

Fig.4. The same. Diagram of portion of surface of polypary, to show

the grooved venation only. Magnified about 2 diameters.

Fig. 5. Millepora alcicornis. Diagram of portion of corallum including

vertical section of part of a tubular space. Much magnified.

aa, tubular space; 66, ccenosarcal skeleton; ¢, transverse

septa or tabule ; d, apertures of the cancelli in the ccenosarcal

skeleton ; e, the same, opening into the tubular space. Trans-

verse diameter of tubular space about 1-120th inch.

Fig. 6, Millepora Woodwardii. Surface of upper half. Natural size.

a a, systems of stelliform venation. [N.B. For the description of

this fossil see ‘Annals,’ 1877, vol. xix. p. 64, under the provi-

sional name of “ Bradya tergestina, Stache, MS.” }

Fig.7. The same. Horizontal section. Natural size. a, horizontal

section of tubular spaces at the centre ; 6, oblique section of the

tubular spaces at the circumference.

Fig. 8. The same. Diagram of a portion of the surface, much magnified,

to show the fossilized fragments of a superficial tubulation like

that appearing above the outer layer on some parts of Millepora

alcicornis. a, branches of tubulation; 0, subjacent apertures

of calicles or tubular spaces. Scale about 1-48th to 6-1800ths

inch.

Fig.9. The same. Diagram of portion of the corallum, including a ver-

tical section of part of a tubular space bearing septa or tabule.

More magnified. aaa, radiating tubular spaces; 06, cceno-

sarcal skeleton between the radiating tubular spaces ; ¢, trans-

verse septa or tabule; d, apertures of the ccenosarcal skeleton in

the tubular space ; e, surface of corallum.

Fig. 10. Stellispongia variabilis, D’Orb., from the Trias. Traced from his

figure (Cours élément. de Paléontol. et Géologie, vol. i. p. 214,

fig. 388). aa, systems of stelliform venation; 6, portion of

surface, more magnified,

312 Mr. J. 8. Baly on some

XXXV.—Descriptions of a new Genus and of new Species of

Halticine. By Josep S. Baty, F.L.S.

Genus Hypuasis, v. Harold,

Deutsch, ent. Zeit., Dec. 1877, p/ 433.

Corpus rotundato-ovatum, modice convexum. Caput in thoracem

insertum, facie perpendiculari; encarpis distinctis, contiguis :

carina lineariformi, elevata; antennis filiformibus. Thorax

transversus, lateribus reflexo-marginatis. Scutellum trigonatum.

Elytra thorace latiora, reflexo-marginata, modice convexa, con-

fuse punctata ; limbo inflexo concayo, margine externo deorsum

producto. Pedes mediocres, femoribus posticis valde incrassatis ;

tibiis dorso canaliculatis, posticis extus ante apicem emarginatis,

apice spina acuta armatis; t2bizs anticis quatuor apice inermibus;

tarsis posticis articulo basali duobus sequentibus conjunctis lon-

gitudine zequali vellongiore; unguidus posticis inflatis; wnguiculis

appendiculatis. Prosternwm oblongum aut anguste oblongum,

apice obtusum aut truncatum, disco plano aut longitudinaliter

concavo ; acetabulis anticis apertis. Mesosternum obliquum aut

subhorizontale, apice emarginatum.

The short, plane or longitudinally concave prosternum, the

concave ipflexed limb of the elytron, together with the general

form of the body, will, combined, separate this genus from

Homophoeta; the form of the prosternum, together with the

difference in the length of the basal metatarsal joint, will sepa-

rate it from Gdionychis.

Hyphasis coccinelloides.

H., rotundato-ovata, modice convexa, pallide flava, nitida, antennis

(basi excepta) fuscis ; oculis nigris ; thorace levi, obsolete punctu-

lato; elytris subcrebre punctatis, utrinque maculis subrotundatis

quinque nigris ornatis, harum prima communi circa scutellum,

secunda vix infra basin supra callum humerale, rotundato-ovata,

duabus prope medium transversim positis, quintaque ante api-

cem, prope limbum externum sita.

Long. 22 lin.

Hab. Borneo, Sarawak. Collected by Mr. Wallace.

Vertex shining, impunctate ; encarpe transversely quadrate ;

carina elongate, its upper end thickened; antenne with the

four lower joints flavous, stained with piceous, the rest fus-

cous. Thorax more than three times as broad as long;

sides broadly margined, strongly reflexed, rounded and con-

verging from base to apex, parallel at the extreme base, the

anterior angles thickened, armed with a small excurved, acute

tooth ; surface nitidous, faintly impressed here and there with

fine punctures ; lateral margin longitudinally excavated. Apex

new Species of Halticine. 313

of scutellum obtuse. Elytra much broader than the thorax,

the shoulders broadly rounded; above moderately convex ;

sides dilated, reflexed; surface rather strongly punctured.

Basal joint of metatarsus longer than the following two

united.

Hyphasis bipustulata.

H. late ovata, modice convexa, picea, nitida, antennis (basi excepta)

nigris; thorace levi, fere impunctato; elytris nigro-piceis, tenui-

ter sed evidenter punctatis, utrinque pustula magna ovata flava

ornatis.

Long. 12 lin.

Hab. Celebes (collected by Mr. Wallace), also Birmah.

Head and thorax fulvo-piceous ; vertex shining, impunctate ;

encarp transverse, oblong ; anteune nearly three fourths the

length of the body, filiform, the two lower joints piceous, the

rest black. Thorax three times as broad as long; sides rather

broadly margined, reflexed, rounded, converging at the base,

and again from behind the middle to the apex ; anterior angles

thickened, obtuse, slightly excurved; upper surface smooth

and shining, nearly impunctate, a few fine punctures only

being seen under a powerful lens ; lateral margin longitudinally

concave. Scutellum piceous, its extreme apex obtuse. Elytra

much broader than the thorax, rotundate-ovate, the shoulders

broadly rounded ; above moderately convex, the lateral margin

reflexed ; nigro-piceous, obscure rufo-piceous on the middle

disk, finely but distinctly punctured ; each elytron with a large

subovate pale yellow patch, which extends from just before

to some distance below the middle of the disk, and laterally

from within the outer limb to within a short distance of

the suture. Basal joint of hinder tarsus equal in length to the

following two united.

Hyphasis picetpennis.

H., rotundata, modice convexa, fulva, nitida, capite thoraceque rufo-

testaceis, antennis (basi excepta) oculisque nigris, tibiis tarsisque

nigro-piceis ; elytris tenuissime punctatis, piceis.

Long. 2 lin.

Hab. Borneo, Sarawak.

Face elevated between the eyes ; the latter large, prominent ;

encarpe quadrangular, well defined, contiguous; carina linear,

strongly elevated ; antenne nearly three fourths the length of

the body, filiform, two lower joints fulvous, the rest black, the

third joint twice the length of the second, rather shorter than

the fourth. Thorax three times as broad as long; sides

broadly margined, reflexed, obtusely rounded, converging in

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. 1. 21

314 Mr. J. 8. Baly on some

front, the anterior angles armed with a slightly excurved,

obtuse tooth ; upper surface nitidous, very minutely punctured,

the puncturing only visible underalens. Scutellum trigonate,

its apex acute. Elytra much broader than the thorax, the

shoulders broadly rounded ; above moderately convex, flattened

on the disk, minutely punctured, lateral margin narrowly

dilated, impressed on its inner edge with a single row of

distinct punctures. Prosternum twice as broad as long, its

sides parallel, its apex truncate, its surface longitudinally

concave. Apices of the thighs piceous ; tibie and tarsi nigro-

piceous; hinder tibia armed near its apex with a short acute

tooth ; hinder metatarsal joint equal in length to the following

two united.

Hyphasis nigricornis.

H. late ovato-rotundata, modice convexa, dorso paullo deplanata,

flava, nitida, antennis (basi excepta) oculisque nigris, scutello,

pectore tarsisque piceis; thorace minute punctato ; elytris dis-

tincte, subcrebre punctatis.

Long. 23 lin.

Hab. Northern India.

Face elevated between the eyes, the latter smaller and more

widely separated than in H. piceipennis; encarpe transverse-

quadrate, contiguous, separated from the front by a deep

transverse depression; carina strongly raised; vertex and

front nitidous, impressed with a few minute punctures, only

visible under a lens; antenne more than three fourths the

length of the body, slender, filiform, the three lower joints

obscure flavous, the rest black, the third joint one half longer

than the second, distinctly shorter than the fourth. Thorax

more than three times as broad as long; sides broadly mar-

gined, reflexed, nearly straight and parallel behind the middle,

rounded and converging in front, the anterior angles armed

with an obtuse, excurved tooth ; hinder angles distinct, sub-

acute ; upper surface impressed with minute punctures, the

interspaces still more finely punctured. Scutellum scarcely

longer than broad, trigonate, its sides subsinuate, its apex

subacute. Elytra very much broader than the thorax, the

shoulders broadly and somewhat obliquely rounded; upper

surface distinctly and rather closely punctured, the lateral

margin broadly dilated, only slightly reflexed. Prosternum

narrowly oblong, slightly sinuate on the sides, the apex

obtuse; surface only faintly excavated. Hinder tibie un-

armed; hinder metatarsal joint longer than the following two

united.

new Species of Halticine. 315

Hyphasis Wallace.

H, late ovata, convexa, sordide fulva, nitida, antennis nigris, tarsis,

tibiis posticis apice, tibiis anticis totis femoribusque anticis dorso

nigro-piceis ; thorace levi, lateribus late nigris ; elytris subfor-

titer punctatis, utrinque plaga magna humerali, ad marginem ad-

fixa, postice oblique truncata, alteraque pone medium, subovata,

apice acuminata, vix intra marginem posita, ornatis,

Long. 3 lin.

Hab. Malacca (Wallace).

Vertex smooth, impunctate; eyes large, rotundate, promi-

nent, black ; encarpe well defined, obliquely transverse, qua-

drangular ; carina elongate, its upper half thickened; antenne

nearly three fourths the length of the body, black, lower por-

tion of basal joint obscure flavous. Thorax three times as

broad as long; sides broadly margined, strongly reflexed,

rounded, the anterior angle armed with an excurved, subacute

tooth, hinder angle with an obtuse tubercle; upper surface

shining, very remotely impressed with minute punctures ;

lateral margin longitudinally concave. Apex of scutellum

rounded. Elytra broader than the thorax, oblong, convex,

their lateral margin narrowly dilated, reflexed.

Hyphasis Bevani.

H. ovata, convexa, nitida, subtus fulva, metapectore, femoribus pos-

ticis apice tarsisque posticis piceis; supra rufo-fulva, antennis

(basi excepta) nigris ; thorace evidenter, subremote punctato ;

elytris subcrebre punctatis, obscure viridi-gneis, limbo exteriore

anguste rufo.

Long. 17 lin.

Hab. Southern India. Collected by Lieut. Bevan.

Head trigonate ; vertex and front smooth, impunctate ; inner

orbit of eye coarsely punctured ; encarpze well defined, sepa-

rated from the front by a transverse groove, subtrigonate,

contiguous; carina linear, its apex thickened, obtuse; an-

tennee with the two lower joints fulvous, the following two

piceous, the rest black; labrum and apex of jaws piceous.

Thorax nearly three times as broad as long; sides obliquely

rounded and converging from base to apex, the anterior angle

thickened, broadly and obtusely truncate, oblique, produced

laterally into an acute tooth; upper surface transversely con-

vex, distinctly punctured; lateral margin moderately dilated,

reflexed. Scutellum trigonate, its apex obtuse, edged with

black. Elytra oblong, broader than the thorax, convex,

rather strongly and closely punctured ; obscure metallic green,

the outer limb very narrowly edged with rufous; inflexed

7 ie

316 Mr. J. 8S. Baly on some

limb slightly concave, its outer edge scarcely produced.. Pro-

sternum oblong-quadrate, the lateral margins concave, the

apex truncate, the upper surface nearly plain; outer edge of

hinder tibie serrulate near the apex; basal joint of hinder

tarsus longer than the following two united.

This species differs from the typical form of the genus in its

broader prosternum, and in the less strongly produced outer

edge of the inflexed limb of the elytra.

Gdionychis Mouhott.

@. elongate-ovata, modice convexa, sordide flava, nitida, pectore

piceo; vertice scutelloque nigris; thorace ante basin leviter

trausversim impresso, tenuissime, remote punctato, lateribus late

reflexo-explanatis; elytris sat fortiter, crebre punctatis, utrinque

linea suturali maculisque tribus disco exteriore longitudinaliter

positis, prima super callum humerale, basi adfixa, secunda prope

medium tertiaque ante apicem, nigris.

Var. A. pectore sordide flavo, elytrorum linea suturali nigra obso-

leta.

Long. 3 ln.

Hab. Siam, Pachybouri. Collected by the late M. Mouhot.

Vertex minutely punctured, front impressed with large

round foveolate punctures ; encarpe subquadrate, contiguous ;

carina short, wedge-shaped, its acute apex extending upwards

between the encarpe for rather more than a third their length,

its base terminating on a strongly raised transverse ridge,

which extends obliquely on either side entirely across the

clypeus ; antenne filiform, the third and fourth joints equal.

Thorax three times as broad as long; sides broadly dilated,

reflexed, straight and parallel for two thirds their length,

rounded and converging near the apex, the latter anteriorly pro-

duced, armed at its extremity with a slightly excurved, truncate

tooth; basal margin sinuate on either side near the outer

angle, the intermediate space truncate; upper surface im-

pressed before the base with a broad but shallow transverse

groove; minutely and remotely punctured; lateral margin

longitudinally concave. Scutellum trigonate, its apex rounded.

Elytra rather broader than the thorax, convex, the outer

margin moderately dilated, reflexed.

Gdionychis pretiosa.

@. ovata, convexa, nitida, subtus nigro-picea, lateribus flavis ; supra

fulva, vertice, antennis, pedibus posticis scutelloque nigris; thorace

impunctato ; elytris suberebre punctatis, metallico-cyaneis, yio-

new Species of Halticine. 317

laceo micantibus, utrinque macula prope medium limboque inflexo

flavis.

Var. A. elytrorum maculis discoidalibus flavis obsoletis.

Long. 23 lin.

Hab. Brazil, New Friburg.

Vertex strongly but not very closely punctured, shining

black ; lower face, together with the inner orbit of the eye,

obscure fulvous, encarpe and carina piceous; encarpe sepa-

rated from the front by a deep transverse groove ; carina oval ;

antenne with the three lower joints obscure piceous, the rest

black, third joint shorter than the fourth. Thorax with its

sides broadly margined, reflexed, nearly straight and parallel

behind the middle, thence slightly rounded and converging to

the apex, anterior angles produced anteriorly, thickened,

obtuse ; basal margin slightly bisinuate on either side, the

median portion opposite the base of the scutellum also slightly

sinuate ; upper surface shining, nearly impunctate, longitudi-

nally excavated on the reflexed lateral margin, obsoletely

elevated on either side just to within the latter, the middle

portion of both the apical and basal margins narrowly edged

with black. Scutellum subtrigonate, its apex rounded, de-

pressed. Elytra broader than the thorax, broadly ovate,

moderately convex, longitudinally depressed along the base of

the suture, distinctly punctured ; inflexed limb flavous. Basal

joint of hinder tarsus much shorter than the following two

united.

Gidionychis porosa.

@. ovata, convexa, nitida, nigra, facie inferiore fulvo-picea, thorace

flavo; elytris irregulariter foveolatis foveis fundo punctatis,

cyaneis, limbo laterali (apice dilatato) flavo.

Var. A. elytris nigris, limbo laterali trienteque apicali flavis.

Var. B. 3 thorace nigro, lateribus anguste flavis, elytris nigro-

zneis, limbo exteriore anguste flavo.

Long. 33-4 lin.

Hab. Ecuador. Collected by Mr. Buckley.

Front with a deep cruciform depression ; on either side near

the eye are three or four deep round punctures; the upper

surface of the three lower joints of antennez piceo-fulvous.

Thorax with its sides broadly reflexed, parallel at the base,

thence rounded and converging tothe apex, anterior angles pro-

duced into a short obtusely truncate tooth ; upper surface mi-

nutely punctured. Scutellum trigonate, its apexobtuse. Hlytra

moderately convex, their apical margin finely serrulate ; closely

covered with irregular punctured fovese, their interspaces

thickened, irregularly confluent, shining, impunctate.

318 Mr. J. 8. Baly on some

Gdionychis limbata.

@. elongato-ovalis, modice convexa, dorso subdepressa, subtus sor-

dide albido-flava, prosterno, genibus, tibiis tarsisque nigro-piceis;

supra nigra, antennarum articulis basali necnon ultimis quatuor

piceis; facie, thoracis lateribus latis elytrorumque limbo exteriore

lato albido-flavis; prosterno inter coxas longitudinaliter elevato.

Long. 34 lin.

Hab. Ecuador.

Vertex and front smooth, impunctate ; lower portion of front

depressed, separated from the encarpe by a transverse grooved

line ; encarpe large, quadrangular, slightly oblique, contigu-

ous; carina strongly raised, elongate ; antenne filiform, the

third and fourth joints equal; labrum and jaws piceous; eyes

large, prominent. Thorax with its sides very broadly mar-

gined, reflexed, slightly converging at the extreme base,

rounded and converging before the middle to the apex, the

anterior angles thickened, produced anteriorly into a slightly

excurved, obtusely truncate tooth ; basal margin very faintly

sinuate on either side close to the outer angle, the interme-

diate space transversely truncate ; upper surface very faintly

impressed transversely in front of the base, very minutely

punctured ; lateral margin longitudinally excavated. Scutel-

lum trigonate, its apex obtuse ; on the disk near its apex is a

piceous spot. lytra broader than the thorax, oblong, mode-

rately convex, slightly depressed along the suture, the lateral

margin broadly dilated, its outer edge slightly reflexed ;

surface rather closely punctured, interspaces subrugulose.

minutely punctured.

Cdionychis circumcincta, De}.

. late ovata, convexa, flava, nitida, antennis (basi excepta) nigris ;

thorace levi, lateribus late explanatis, subruguloso; scutello

nigro; elytris crebre, fortiter punctatis, interstitiis granulosis,

crebre rugulosis.

Var. A. elytris metallico-viridibus, limbo externo flavo.

Var. B. elytris rufo-testaceis, limbo externo flavo, fascia basali

communi, extrorsum abbreviata, vittaque submarginali, a basi ad

apicem extensa, metallico-viridibus.

Long. 4-6 lin.

Hab. Brazil.

Vertex smooth, impunctate ; front very sparingly impressed

with round punctures, its lower end depressed, separated from

the encarpe by a transverse groove; inner orbit of eye irre-

gularly punctured ; encarpe transverse; contiguous above ;

carina broad, its apex acuminate, separating the lower

portion of the encarpe, its lower end terminating in a strongly

new Species of Halticine. 319

raised transverse ridge which extends entirely across the

clypeus; jaws piceous; antenne filiform, two lower joints

flavous, the third piceous, the rest black; third joint distinctly

shorter than the fourth. ‘Thorax with its sides broadly mar-

gined, reflexed, straight and parallel from the base to beyond

the middle, thence rounded and converging to the apex,

anterior angles thickened, produced into a short excurved

obtuse tooth; basal margin faintly sinuate on either side, its

median portion truncate ; upper surface smooth and shining,

very faintly reticulate-granulose; surface of dilated lateral

margin irregular, subrugulose. Scutellum trigonate, its apex

obtuse. Hlytra broader than the thorax, convex, slightly ex-

cavated on the suture, a short distance below the scutellum ;

coarsely and closely punctured, interspaces irregularly thick-

ened, granulose.

Gdionychis recticollis.

@. elongato-ovata, postice vix ampliata, convexa, subtus picea, ab-

domine sordide fulvo, prothorace lacteo; supra lactea, scutello

pallide piceo, antennis (basi picea excepta) oculisque nigris ;

thorace impunctato, lateribus rectis, a basi ad apicem convergenti-

bus; elytris tenuissime, subremote punctatis, utrinque plagis

duabus erosis, una infra basin transversim ovata, altera inter

medium et apicem transversa, irregulari, nigro-piceis ornatis.

Long. 4 lin.

Hab. Mexico.

Vertex smooth, impunctate; front impressed with coarse

punctures ; encarpz ill-defined, pale piceous, separated from

each other by a deep longitudinal groove; carina broad,

oblong, convex, its apex obtuse, branching off on either side

into a strongly raised oblique ridge; lower edge of clypeus

and mouth nigro-piceous ; eyes narrowly oval, their inner side

sinuate; antennz filiform, two lower joints piceous, the rest

black ; third and fourth joints nearly equal in length. Thorax

twice as broad as long; sides narrowly margined, straight,

converging from base to apex, anterior angle thickened,

strongly produced, its apex subacute; basal margin slightly

sinuate on either side near the outer angle, the intermediate

space transversely truncate ; upper surface smooth, impunctate,

lateral margin narrowly reflexed. Scutellum longer than

broad, trigonate, its apex obtuse. Llytra broader than the

thorax, narrowly oblong, moderately convex, the lateral mar-

gin narrowly dilated.

Gdionychis Clarkia.

. elongato-ovata, modice convexa, pallide flava, nitida ; thorace

320 Mr. J. S. Baly on some

levi, maculis nigro-piceis quinque notato, harum tribus pone

apicem, linea transyersa conjunctis, macula intermedia ad margi-

nem adfixa, duabusque transversis, ad basin utrinque adfixis ;

elytris subcrebre punctatis, punctis leviter impressis, pallide

piceo tinctis; singulis linea suturali angusta, ante apicem abbre-

viata, punctisque tribus, uno super callum humeralem, altero infra

basin prope suturam, tertioque prope medium disci positis, nigro-

piceis.

Long. 4 lin.

Hab. Brazil, Constancia. Collected by the late Rev. H.

Clark.

Face elevated between the eyes, the latter large, prominent ;

vertex and front granulose, impressed with large, irregular

shallow punctures; encarpe large, well defined, quadrate,

contiguous; carina linear, strongly elevated; inner orbit of

eye bounded by a row of irregular punctures; antenne fili-

form, third and fourth joints equal. Thorax with its sides

broadly margined, reflexed, rounded and converging from

base to apex, the anterior angles thickened, produced ante-

riorly, subacute ; the hinder angles produced into a short sub-

acute tooth; basal margin sinuate on either side, the median

portion also sinuate in front of the scutellum ; upper surface

nitidous, very finely strigose, lateral margin longitudinally

concave. Scutellum trigonate, its apex subacute. Elytra

broader than the thorax, narrowly oblong, subacutely rounded

at the apex, the apical margin obsoletely crenulate; above

moderately convex, impressed with round, shallow, pale pice-

ous punctures, paler and less deeply impressed towards the

apex, their interspaces finely granulose, faintly wrinkled ;

each elytron with a narrow sutural line, abbreviated before the

apex, and three small spots, nigro-piceous ; of these the first is

placed on the upper portion of the humeral callus, the second

on the inner disk, halfway between the callus and the suture,

slightly lower than the former one, and the third on the

middle of the elytron, about halfway between the suture and

the lateral margin.

Gidionychis rugiceps.

@. ovata, convexa, nigra, nitida, thorace flavo-albo, linea basali,

utrinque abbreviata, maculisque novem, 2 super marginem apica-

lem, 4 disci vix ante, 2 vix pone medium transversim positis,

necnon una ante basin, nigris ; elytris subopacis, margine exte-

riore, vitta discoidali, apice ad marginem adfixa, fasciaque obliqua

subapicali inter limbum et vittam extensa, nitide flayo-albis.

Long. 3 lin.

Hab. Brazil, Parana.

new Species of Halticine. 321

Head coarsely rugose ; encarpe and carina ill-defined, the

lower end of the latter terminating on a strongly raised trans-

verse ridge; antenne scarcely half the length of the body,

moderately robust, thickened towards the apex, entirely black ;

third and fourth joints nearly equal in length. Thorax nearly

three times as broad as long; sides broadly margined, reflexed,

straight and parallel, rounded and converging before the

middle, anterior angles produced, thickened, obtuse; basal

margin slightly oblique and faintly sinuate on either side near

the outer angle, the latter produced, acute ; intermediate space

obtusely truncate, narrowly edged with black; disk finely

granulose, nitidous, sparingly punctate ; lateral margin con-

cave, the outer edge thickened. Scutellum trigonate, rather

broader than long, its apex obtuse. Hlytra broader than the

thorax, oblong-ovate, moderately convex, finely granulose-

punctate, subopaque; the white marking nitidous, finely

punctured.

Gidionychis nigro-lineata.

@. ovata, modice convexa, nitida, subtus piceo-nigra, prothorace

abdominisque limbo exteriore sordide fulvis; supra sordide fulva,

vertice, scutello antennisque (harum articulis basalibus tribus

piceis exceptis) nigris; thorace levi, tenuiter, remote punctato,

maculis quinque, 2 et 3 dispositis, nigro-piceis notato; elytris evi-

denter, subcrebre punctatis, utrinque linea suturali, vitta sub-

marginali, apice cum linea suturali conjuncta vittaque discoidali,

a basi fere ad apicem extensa, nigris.

Long. 23 lin.

Hab. Brazil, Bahia.

Vertex smooth, nearly impunctate, lower portion of front

coarsely punctured ; encarpe subquadrangular, separated from

the front by a deep longitudinal groove; antennz robust,

second and third joints nearly equal in length; labrum and

jaws obscure piceous. Thorax with its sides broadly mar-

gined, straight and nearly parallel behind the middle, thence

rounded and converging to the apex, anterior angles armed

with a slightly excurved, obtuse tooth ; upper surface nitidous,

remotely and finely punctured, lateral margin reflexed. Scu-

tellum trigonate; its apex obtuse, piceous. Hlytra rather

broader than the thorax, oval, moderately convex, much more

strongly punctured than the thorax; lateral margin narrowly

reflexed ; inflexed limb obscure fulvous, its inner edge nigro-

piceous. Anterior border of prosternum deflexed. Basal

joint of hinder tarsus nearly equal in length to the following

two united.

322 M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida.

Gidionychis Chevrolatit.

G. late ovata, convexa, nitida; subtus, cum capite (encarpis flavis

exceptis), nigra, abdomine piceo, margine externo segmentorumque

marginibus pallidioribus ; supra flava; thorace levi, impunctato ;

scutello trigonato, nigro; elytris sat remote, tenuiter punctatis,

utrinque vitta suturali, altera submarginali, his apice conjunctis,

tertiaque discoidali, paullo ante apicem abbreviata, nigro-cyaneis ;

limbo exteriore angusto piceo.

Long. 3 lin.

Hab. Mexico.

Vertex smooth, impunctate; inner orbit of eye and the

upper surface of the front impressed with large, round punc-

tures; lower portion of front very finely strigate ; encarpz

separated from the front by a distinct transverse groove, sub-

quadrangular, pale fulvous; carina strongly elevated ; second

and third joints of antennz nearly equal in length. Thorax

three times as broad as long; sides nearly straight, very

slightly converging behind the middle, thence converging and

slightly rounded to the apex; anterior angles mucronate ;

basal margin bisinuate on either side, the median portion not

produced, obtusely truncate ; upper surface shining, impunc-

tate; lateral margin broadly reflexed. Scutellum trigonate,

its apex acute. LElytra broader than the thorax, increasing

in breadth from the base towards the apex, the latter broadly

rounded ; above moderately convex, longitudinally excavated

along the base of the suture, the depressed surface rather

strongly and coarsely punctured.

[To be continued. |

XXX VI.—Studies on the Hydrotda.

By C. MrerescHkowsky.

[Continued from p. 256. }

III. Systematic Facts.

As I am now busy preparing a complete description of all

the Hydroids occurring in the Russian seas, which will

shortly appear in my native language, I shall here give simply

a list of the species which I have met with in my two visits.

to the White Sea, and only describe a few of the new species

and the new genera. The deficiency of material in respect of

Hydroids in our zoological museums sometimes renders the

determination of the species very difficult, and in some cases

rather doubtful ; for frequently it is very desirable to compare

two specimens, one of which is already determined. But 1

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida. 323

hope to be able to procure in England specimens of the most

desirable species in exchange for my own, which will enable

me to verify my determinations. At any rate, I shall attach

a note of interrogation to any species that is in the least

degree doubtful. The species are as follows :—

So oO oo NAO Oe ed

. S. tricuspidata, Alder.

. S. rugosa, Linn. ee

. Diphasia, Agass., sp. indet.

. Sertularia pumila, Linn.

. S. filicula, Ellis & Sol.

Suborder ATHECATA.

. Oorhiza borealis, nov. gen. et nov. sp.

. Hydractinia, sp. indet.

. Syncoryne Sarsti: Meduse (Sarsia tubulifera) in great

numbers.

. Stauridium productum.

. Hudendrium arbuscula (?), S. W.

. E. minimum, nov. sp.

. Bougainvillia paradoxa, nov. sp.: the Meduse only in

very large numbers.

. Monobrachium parasitum, mihi (see Ann. & Mag. Nat.

Hist., September 1877).

. Tubularia simplex,

. T. indivisa.

Suborder THECAPHORA.

. Obelia geniculata, Linn.

. O. gelatinosa (?), Pall.

. O. flabellata, Hincks.

. Campanularia volubilis, Linn.

. C. integra (?), Macgillivray.

. C. verticillata, Linn.

. C. neglecta, Alder.

. Leptoscyphus Grigoriewt, nov. sp.

. Lafoéa dumosa, Sars.

. L. pocillum, Hincks.

. Calycella syringa, Linn.

. Cuspidella, sp. indet.

. Salacia abietina, Sars.

. Filellum serpens, Hassall.

. Coppinia arcta, Dalyell.

. Halecium Beanii (?), Johnst.

. Halecium, sp. indet.

. Sertularella gigantea, mihi, = 8. polyzonias, robust variety,

of Sars and Hincks.

—

324 M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida.

34. 8. abietina, Linn.

35. S. argentea, Ellis & Sol.

36. S. albimaris, nov. sp.

37. Hydrallmania falcata, Linn., var. bidens.

38. Thutaria thuja.

39. T. articulata (?).

40. Polyserias mirabilis, Verrill.

41. P. Hinckswi, nov. gen. et nov. sp.

Suborder GYMNOCHROA.

42. Hydra oligactis, in the fresh water of the isle of Solo-

vetzky.

It will be seen that among the forty-two species there are

about eight which are new; the Hydroid fauna of the White

Sea is therefore a rather peculiar one. Besides this we also

see that as regards its fauna the White Sea belongs to regions

which are quite polar, more polar, in fact, than the north of

Norway and even the Mourmansky bereg (north of Lapland).

Thus, while the White Sea has no representative of the family

Plumulariide, which is characteristic of the southern seas,

and, on the other hand, has many representatives of the fami-

lies Lafoéide, Coppiniide, and Sertulariide, the Mourmansky

bereg has furnished magnificent specimens of Antennularia

antennina, of which the Zoological Cabinet of St. Petersburg

is in possession. The Baltic has several species in common

with the White Sea; but all these species are represented in

England, Germany, or Belgium ; they have consequently been

able to arrive there through the Cattegat and Skagerrack,

without its being necessary to explain this fact by the assump-

tion of a union between the two seas; so that, as far as the

Hydroids are concerned, they do not present any’ facts in

support of Lovén’s hypothesis, which, moreover, has been

much shaken by the investigations of Prof. O, Grimm, of

St. Petersburg*. Lastly, on comparing this fauna with that

of the north of the Pacific Ocean, as represented by Mr. Clark,

and also by the collection of the Museum of the Academy of

St. Petersburg, it will be seen that there are relations between

these two faunas. The genus Polyserias is especially charac-

teristic of the north of the Pacific (I am acquainted with three

species of this genus from the sea of Ochotsk) ; and, as we see,

the White Sea possesses two species, one of which is common

(Polyserias mirabilis). Further, the presence of Coppinia

arcta, Lafoéa dumosa, Campanularia integra, Lafoéa pocillum,

* O. Grimm, ‘On the Fauna of the Baltic Sea and its Origin’ (in

Russian), 1877.

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida. 325

Calycella syringa, several Sertularie, Sertularella rugosa and

tricuspidata proves that the fauna of the White Sea is only a

special department of a circumpolar fauna.

From what we now know of the distribution of the Hydroids

it may be seen that, in fact, there exists such a circumpolar

fauna, on the one hand perfectly special, and on the other

represented by species which also occur in Europe, in England,

the Baltic, &c. It is always easy to recognize to which fauna

a species must belong, from a consideration of its size: in its

native place, in the country from which it started, the species

will certainly appear in all its splendour and of its largest size ;

for it is there especially that the conditions of life are most

favourable toit. Thus, among the Hydroids there are certain

species which frequently occur in the north (Iceland, Green-

land, Spitzbergen, &c.), and which are there distinguished

from the same species obtained from England, for example,

by their excessive size. It is clear, therefore, that the polar

regions must be regarded as the native place of these species,

as the starting-point from which they have spread southwards

into warmer seas, which certainly must have had an effect

upon them, rendering them feebler; and it is in this that I

find the answer to the question raised by Hincks*, as to why

this phenomenon is observed. But, on the other hand, it must

not be forgotten that in the family Plumulariide there are

species characteristic of the southern seas of gigantic size, as,

for example, that described by M. Sempert, which proves

that the native place and starting-point of all these Hydroids

must be regarded as in southern regions; and it is very pro-

bable that the further to the north they are met with, the

weaker and poorer they will be.

I will now pass to the descriptions of new Hydroids.

OoRHIZA, nov. gen. (Pl. XV. figs. 7-11.)

Hydrorhiza a continuous layer consisting of a mass of

anastomosing tubes, covering the shells of Gasteropods. From

its surface rise spines and sexual and nutritive individuals.

Trophosome cylindrical, with a single whorl of filiform tenta-

cles. The sporosacs rise directly from the hydrorhiza, with-

out the intervention of blastostyles.

As will be seen from the character of this genus, it must

undoubtedly be placed in the family Hydractiniide, which

appears at once from the habit of this Hydroid. The con-

tinuous layer of the hydrorhiza, the spines, and the long and

* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1874, vol. xiii. p. 147.

+ Zeitschr. fiir wiss. Zool. vol. xiii. p. 560.

326 - M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida. ,

slender hydranths, all unmistakably recall a Hydractinia or a

Podocoryne ; so that from the trophosome alone it is impossible

to distinguish Oorhiza from one of the above-mentioned genera.

But the sexual individuals (gonosomes) present such charac-

teristic peculiarities that it is impossible to place the Hydroid

in question in any of the known genera of Hydractinide.

Podocoryne, as is well known, has the gonosomes consisting of

blastostyles upon which Medusz are produced ; Hydractinia

differs in that the same blastostyles give origin to sporosacs ;

lastly, Oorhiza has no blastostyles at all, but the sporosacs

rise from the hydrorhiza itself.

It is true that in Podocoryne the presence of the blasto-

styles is not a constant character: their absence, indeed, is

constant in Podocoryne areolata; in others, as for example

Podocoryne aculeata, there may or may not be a blasto-

style; and, finally, in Podocoryne carnea the Meduse are

constantly produced upon blastostyles. But this does not

apply to the genus Hydractinia, nm which the presence of

blastostyles is a perfectly constant character and essential to

the genus.

The genealogical relations between the genera and species

of the family Hydractiniide may be expressed by the accom-

panying diagram :—

echinata. polyclina.

Hydractinia Oorhiza borealis. P. areolata. P. carnea.

\ /

s Z

S f

Intermediate form*. ; Podocoryne aculeata.

SS :

* This hypothetical intermediate form must have existed analogically

with Podocoryne aculeata ; it must have possessed indifferently sporosacs

on blastostyles and without blastostyles: on one side Hydractinia was

developed (analogically with Podocoryne carnea); on the other Oorhiza

(analogically with P. areolata). If ever this hypothetical form is

found, it will be necessary to unite the genera Hydractinia and Oorhiza

into a single one, or else to establish a distinct genus for Podocoryne

aculeata, which can by no means be done,

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida. 327

Oorhiza borealis, nov. sp. (Pl. XV. figs. 7-11.)

Trophosome.—The continuous layer of the hydrorhiza is

furnished with fine spines in the form of elongated cones.

The body of the hydranth, of a pale rose- or flesh-colour, has

the form of an elongated cylinder. The number of tentacles

varies from six to ten; their length is not equal, in consequence

of different states of contraction.

Gonosome.—The gonozooids are placed very close together

and in great numbers, and in consequence of their spherical form

give the surface of the hydrorhiza a tuberculose aspect. Hach

gonozooid consists of a short spadix rising directly from the

hydrorhiza, and a single ovum placed at the extremity of the

spadix.

: Locality.—The neighbourhood of the island of Solowetzky,

at a depth not greater than 10 fathoms.

The spadix widens at its upper extremity ; and it is upon

this dilated part that the ovum is placed, as if upon a plate

(fig. 8). A single spadix never bears more than one ovum,

which may be of different sizes, sometimes very considerable,

which proves that the ovum may grow up to a certain point—

after which the absorption of nourishment changes the process

of growth into a process of multiplication; the segmentation

of the ovum commences. In the granular contents of the

ovum a pale nucleus is always observed, and frequently a

nucleolus. It would appear from M. Wagner’s drawings that

the ovum is surrounded by a layer of ectoderm (Pl. XV. fig. 8),

the same ectoderm that covers the spadix, so that the ovum is

placed between the ectoderm and the endoderm. ‘The number

of tentacles is very variable; but the numbers most frequently

met with are those produced from 2, such as 6, 8, and 10,

which leads us to regard 2 as the fundamental number of the

Hydroids (fig. 7).

The tentacles of Oorhiza borealis present facts of ver

great importance. ‘Their surface at the end (Pl. XV. fig. 11)

is not smooth ; it is mamillated, and the mamille give origin

to something like secondary tentacles, or, rather, like pseudo-

podia. ‘They consist of short, but not very fine, colourless,

transparent, structureless cylinders, which spring from the

surface of the mamille usually in groups of three or four

together. These pseudopodia move very slowly; and M. N,

Wagner has seen them issue and disappear just as in the

Amebe. Moreover he has seen issuing from the surface, but

also very slowly, larger and thicker protuberances, which be-

came more and more rounded and inflated, and at the same

time became constricted, so that they remained attached to

328 M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida.

the tentacle only by a very thin peduncle (Pl. XV. fig. 10).

In the interior there was to be seen a yellowish mass, the

nature of which could not be ascertained by M. N. Wagner.

At the same time the surface of this little sphere or protube-

rance gave origin in its turn to cylindrical pseudopodia,

exactly of the same kind as those which were produced by

the surface of the tentacles. These protuberances move

slowly, and are put forth and disappear under the eyes of the

observer. M. N. Wagner has communicated to me the inter-

esting fact that, on making thin sections across the brain of

the frog, previously hardened by freezing, it has keen observed

under the microscope that after the nervous substance was

thawed, it began to move after the fashion of the Am@be, and

thus changed its place, just in the same way as the protube-

rances of Oorhiza which I have just described. M. N.

Wagener thinks that there is an analogy between these two

facts, and supposes that these protuberances may be of a

nervous nature, although certainly but little differentiated.

In one of the ends of tentacles of Oorhiza figured by M.

Wagner, I observe the presence of pigment dispersed in the

form of red granules of different sizes among the trichocysts

(Pl. XV. fig. 9). The presence of these in a spot to which

they could not be conveyed by the current of digestive fluid

(they are placed principally close to the surface of the end of

the tentacle), as also their habit, which greatly reminds us of

the pigments which are met with in the eyes of the Meduse

(e. g. Syncoryne Sarsiz), leads me to believe that we really

have to do here with the first commencement of the organ of

sight, which certainly could hardly choose a better place than

the tips of the tentacles. This explanation of the pigment

in question is placed absolutely beyond doubt and has become

a proven fact for every one who has read the brilliant article,

“ Die Organ-Anfinge: I. Seh-Organ,” by M. G. Jiger,

which appeared in the second part of the new German perio-

dical ‘Cosmos’ *. M. Jiger treats the question of the forms

under which the organs of sight must appear in the animal

kingdom, and proves with marvellous clearness that the first

indications.of these organs must consist in a part of the proto-

plasm becoming pigmented (red, green, &c., and subsequently

black), which retains the light and transforms the molecular

movement produced by it into sensation of light, while the

non-pigmented protoplasm, allowing all the light to pass

through it, cannot feel the sensation of light. Thus not

* Cosmos: Zeitschrift fiir einheitliche Weltanschauung auf Grund der

Entwickelungslehre in Verbindung mit Ch. Darwin und E. Hickel, 1877,

May, p. 94.

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydrotda. 329

only the Medusz, but also the Hydroids, possess organs of

sight.

Oorhiza is always seated upon the shells of Gasteropods,

especially Buccinum undatum and Fusus despectus, in large

colonies, near the island of Solowetzky, most frequently at

a depth of 5-8 fathoms.

Prof. M. Wagner, who first found, examined, and figured

it, has most kindly furnished me with all his facts and draw-

ings, some of which are represented in Pl. XV. It is from

these drawings that I have prepared the description of the

Hydroid.

Leptoscyphus Grigortewt, nov. sp. (Pl. XIV. figs. 1, 2.)

A small branching colony. The branches which bear the

hydrothecee with their pedicels are regularly and slightly

angularly bent and slightly ringed, especially above each angle.

The pedicels which support the hydrothece are short, never

exceeding half the length of the hydrotheca, and are much

more strongly ringed than the branches. They are very

regularly arranged alternately upon the branches, and always

issue from the angle formed by the branch. The hydrothece

are of an elongated form, in the shape of two cones, of which

the inferior is the larger, and the upper, smaller one is divided

into lobes, which form an operculum; this division is not

deep, never exceeding 4 of the length of the whole hydro-

theca.

The gonophores are unknown.

Locality.—The colonies were found seated upon an Ascidian

which is very widely distributed in the White Sea, in the Bay

of Onega, at the mouth of the river Kem, in 34° 55’ of longitude

at a depth of 5 fathoms, on a muddy bottom, July 5, 1875.

The position that I have assigned to this Hydroid, in the

genus Leptoscyphus, is only provisional; it might equally

well be placed in the genus Campanulina, which only differs

from Leptoscyphus in the gonophores, with which I am un-

acquainted here. In regard to its specific distinctness, there

ean be no doubt that the Hydroid in question constitutes a

new species, which I have called Leptoscyphus Grigortew?, in

honour of my travelling companion, the botanist, A. W.

Grigoriew.

This species is distinguished principally by the form of

the hydrothece, which have the segments of the superior

cone not very deep, usually less than one third of the total

length of ithe hydrotheca. ‘This distinguishes it from L. tenuis,

Allman, with which it has many resemblances. The lower

part of the hydrotheca narrows regularly (Pl. XIV. fig. 2, d) ;

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. 1. 22

330 M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida.

but frequently individuals are met with in which this part

diminishes very little, and thus acquires a nearly cylindrical

form (Pl. XIV. fig. 2,a). Another characteristic feature is the

shortness of the pedicels which support the hydrothece, and

which are a little less than half the length of the hydrotheca,

whilst in Z. tenuzs the pedicel is longer than the hydrotheca.

The annulation is pretty well marked, but far from attaining

the development observed in Campanulina repens, which is

further distinguished from Leptoscyphus Grigoriewi by the

mode of ramification and the form of the hydrotheca. In our

species the annulation is clearly marked only in the pedicels,

and on the branches above the points of insertion of the latter.

The colour of the branches is especially distinct at the base of

the colony, where it is a dull brown; it becomes lighter and

lighter towards the middle, and finally disappears at the ex-

tremity. The hydrothece are always colourless.

Length of the hydrothece (average) 0°34 millim., length

of the superior cone 0:1, maximum breadth of the hydrotheca

0091, length of the pedicel 0°15, breadth of the branches

0-065.

Sertularella gigantea, mihi. (Pl. XIV. figs. 6, 7.)

Sertularia polyzonias, Linn., var. robusta, Sars, “ Bidrag til Kundskaben

om Middelhavets Litoral-Fauna,” in Nyt Magazin for Naturvidens-

kaberna, 1857, p. 163.

Sertularia polyzonias, Linn., polyzonias (ex parte), Hincks, Hist. Brit

Hydr. i. p. 235.

Sertularia polyzonias, Linn., var. gigantea, Hincks, “ On Deep-water

Hydroida from Iceland,” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xiii.

(1874), p. 151, pl. vii. figs. 11, 12.

Sertularta polyzonias, Linn., var. gigantea, Hincks, 8. Smith and O.

Hagen, “ Report on the Dredgings in the Region of St. George's

Banks in 1872,” Trans. Conn. Acad. of Arts and Sciences, iii. part i.

(1876), p. 53.

The tolerably flexible stems spring from the branched hydro-

rhiza often without ramifying ; sometimes they divide at their

base into two or three branches, each of which may again

ramify once more; the terminal branches are in all cases very

long and straight. The hydrothece are evidently alternately

arranged upon the angularly bent stem; frequently we ob-

serve three or four undulations (ribs) crossing the hydrotheca ;

its form is much elongated, only a little widened at its base ;

in size it is two or three times the length of the hydrotheca of

S. polyzonias. In adult individuals the margins are always

furnished with several ledges, and an equal number of small

opercula placed one above the other. Below each hydrotheca

the stem 1s slightly ringed.

Gonophores unknown.

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida. 331

Localities.—1. Island of Solowetzky, on a Balanus (depth

unknown) ; 2. Not far from the Orlow promontory, 67° 17’ N.

lat. and 41° 35’ KE. long., at a depth of 35 fathoms ona

gravelly bottom, attached to Flustra (June 28) ; 3. Glacial

sea, Mourmansky bereg, Gaurilowo, Stanowischtjé (from M.

Danilewsky, in the collection of the Museum of the Academy

of Sciences of St. Petersburg).

This species has long been known; but M. Sars and Mr.

Hincks have regarded it as simply a polar variety of Sertularella

polyzonias. Nevertheless, even by its appearance to the

naked eye, by the habit, it is always very easy to distinguish

this species from every other species of the genus Sertularella;

and this distinction is produced principally by the enormous

hydrothece, which are often twice the length of those of S.

polyzonias. And besides all this, it must be taken into con-

sideration that, among all the Hydroids of my collection, I do

not find a single one that presents a form intermediate be-

tween S. polyzonias and S. gigantea, which I possess from

three different localities. Hence this character is very con-

stant, and is characteristic of the northern seas. Neither Mr.

Hincks, nor M. Sars, nor MM. Smith and Hagen say a

single word as to intermediate forms;.so that I am led to

regard the var. gigantea of S. polyzonias as a distinct species,

as constant as any other, and having characters sufficiently

salient to enable it to be recognized with facility. Besides its

size, this species is further characterized by the form of the

hydrothece, which are much elongated and often have three

or four ribs, by the margin, which is always adorned with

several (sometimes eight or even ten) ledges, giving it a

very peculiar aspect, and, lastly, by the mode of ramification.

All this will be better understood from figs. 6 and 7 of

Plate XIV., especially if these drawings be compared with

that of S. polyzonias given by Hincks*.

Usual length of the colony 3-4 centims. Length of the

hydrotheca 1:3 millim., its breadth 0°52; space between two

successive hydrothece along the stem 0°63.

Sertularia albimaris, nov. sp. (Pl. XIV. figs. 3-5.)

Hydrorhiza composed of a continuous layer, produced by

the confluence of an ordinary ramified hydrorhiza in a single

plane; so that the thickness of the layer does not exceed the

diameter of the tubes of the hydrorhiza. The surface of this

* Hincks, Hist. of Brit. Hydr. pl. xlvi. fig. 1. Ihave Sertularella

polyzonias from the Black Sea; so that I have been well able to compare

the two species; and it is strange that Mr. Hincks did not find it possible

to separate these two very different forms. joe

332 M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida.

layer is furnished with small spines. The principal stem is

very wide; it gives origin to slenderer branches, arranged

alternately and regularly in a single plane, so that the whole

acquires the aspect of a feather. The lateral branches may

divide dichotomously at their extremities. The position of

the hydrothece is not exactly opposite ; their form is not very

characteristic ; the summit is a little compressed and notched,

so as to form two points.

Gonophores unknown.

Locality.—The narrow part of the White Sea (Gorlo), be-

tween the river Ponoy and the island of Morjowetz, in 66°

55' N. lat. and 40° 45’ E. long., at a depth of 20 fathoms, on

a gravelly bottom (June 28, 1876)? I am not quite sure

that the ticket attached to this Hydroid is the right cne.

This is undoubtedly one of the most singular and interest-

ing species of the genus Sertularia; and, indeed, if the differ-

ences presented by the hydrorhiza are increased by those of

the gonophores, it will be necessary to form a distinct genus

for it. What most characterizes it is the hydrorhiza, which

is composed ofa rather thin layer, giving origin at its surface

to several colonies in the form of pretty bushes, so that the

whole resembles a little shady thicket. Under the microscope

it is seen that the hydrorhiza is adorned with an irregular

branching pattern, formed by partitions which are nothing

but the lateral walls of the tubes of the hydrorhiza, which has

become a continuous layer by means of these walls (Pl. XIV.

fig. 5). This is the reason why we always notice that the

partitions seen in profile have a line in the middle, which is

caused by these partitions being formed by two lateral walls

belonging to two neighbouring tubes, which are thus united.

Both the upper and lower layers of chitine, between which

the partitions are placed, are nothing but the upper and lower

walls of the original tubes. ‘hus we see that the hydrorhiza

is formed of several ramified tubes, which have become fused

together by their lateral walls; these lateral walls, after

having joined in. growing, form the pattern already men-

tioned (figs. 5, 6), whilst the upper and lower walls constitute

the upper and lower continuous membranes, between which

the pattern is placed. There are spots at the margin of the

hydrorhiza where this process is still continuing; and here it

may all be seen perfectly.

So far as I know, there is not a single species, not only in

the whole family Sertulariide, but generally among the 'The-

caphora, that has a hydrorhiza of this kind, which much re-

sembles the hydrorhiza of Hydractinia or Podocoryne, but with

the difference that in these latter the hydrorhiza is composed

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydrotda. 333

of several layers superposed upon one another, whilst in Sertu-

laria albimaris it only consists of a single layer.

As I have already said, the surface of the hydrorhiza bears

processes of chitine in the form of long, slender cones, empty

1n the middle and without openings at the extremity (fig. 5, a).

The length of these conical spines does not exceed 0°2 millim.

These cones, which remind us of the spines in Hydractinia

and Podocoryne, are not numerous. It is a very mteresting

fact that, in all the cases in which the hydrorhiza assumes the

form of a continuous layer, this peculiarity is always com-

bined with another, namely the existence of spines; and it

would be interesting to ascertain the wherefore of this charac-

teristic comcidence that exists between these two facts.

Another peculiarity presented by this Hydroid is that the

principal stem (fig. 3) is very wide in one direction (it is

compressed) ; and this width is not induced by the size or

breadth of the hydrothecee, but by the central portion which

bears the hydrothecee, which gives the colony a very peculiar

habit. The width of the lateral branches is much less. The

hydrothece are a little compressed at the end, not, however, in

the same direction as the principal stem, but in a direction

perpendicular to this ; and their orifice is notched so as to form

two teeth. In general form they remind us of those of Poly-

serias mirabilis. Sometimes, however, hydrothece occur with

very elongated necks bent to one side. ‘Two or three

pairs of hydrothece (sometimes, especially on the principal

stem, a single pair) form an articulation which may easily

be detached. ‘The position of the hydrothece is more or

less opposite, more alternate on the lateral branches than

on the principal stem; but even then it is easy to group them

in pairs; so that, according to M. Kirchenpauer, it would be

necessary to arrange this species in the genus Dynamena;

but, considering the insignificance and the want of clearness

of this distinction, I prefer to retain the English termi-

nology. aes

Length of the colony 16 millims.; breadth of the principal

stem (measured between the outermost summits of two oppo-

site hydrothece) 0°8, the same breadth in the lateral branches

0°60-0°73 ; length of the hydrothece 0°43, their breadth 0°17 ;

length of the spines 0:2.

POLYSERIAS, nov. gen.

This genus, belonging to the family Sertulariide, forms a

very peculiar type among the Hydroids of the order Theca-

phora, by reason of the arrangement of its hydrothece. Ex-

cept Salacia abietina and Campanularia verticillata, there

334 M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida.

exists no Thecaphorous Hydroid in which the hydrothece are

arranged in more than two rows; but even in the above two

species the apparent arrangement in several rows is, funda-

mentally, the result of the stem being composed of as many

smaller stems amalgamated together as there are rows of

hydrothece ; so that here the number of rows is only apparent.

But in all the Hydroids in which the stems are not complex

the hydrothece are arranged either in two rows, as in Sertu-

laria, Thuiaria, &c., or im a single one, as in Plumularia,

Aglaophenia, Hydrallmania, &e. In Polysertas, on the con-

trary, although in all other respects it differs but little from

Sertularia or Thuiaria, the arrangement of the hydrothece

in several (6, 8, 10) longitudinal rows is a character that

occurs without the stem being composite. This multiserial

arrangement gives a perfectly peculiar aspect to all the species

of Polyserias: the branches become thick, round, and longi-

tudinally striated; the colonies are usnally large, and the

branches long. It is characteristic of the whole genus, that

on the principal stem the arrangement of the hydrothece is, as

usual, biserial.

The gonosomes are not very different from the gonophores of

Sertularia or Thutaria, except that their arrangement may

also be multiserial, like that of the hydrothece.

When I gave a short description of the genus Polyserias in

this journal some months ago*, I knew nothing in literature

upon this type of Hydroids. Since the publication of my de-

scription there has appeared the third part of the ‘ Proceedings

of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia,’ in which

Mr. Clark, in a memoir upon the Hydroids of the Aleutian

Islands, describes two species of Hydroids which undoubtedly

must be placed in my genus Potyserias. Unfortunately the

author has not paid sufficient attention to the significance of

the multiserial arrangement of their hydrothece, and has

ranged one of them in the genus Diphasia, and the other in

Thuiaria. It is evident that this view must give place to

mine, according to which all the forms should be united in a

single genus, Polyserias. It was, moreover, only from this

memoir that I learned that this polyserial form was de-

scribed by Mr. Verrill, under the name of Diphasia mirabilis,

as long ago as 1872, in the ‘ American Journal,’ and subse-

quently in a Connecticut journal; and I do not think I am

mistaken in identifying Diphasia mirabilis, Verrill, with my

Polyserias Hincksivt.

* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., Sept. 1877.

+ For the references to these citations see the synonymy of Polyserias

mirabilis,

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida, 335

Polyserias mirabilis, Verrill. (Pl. XV. figs. 5, 6.)

Diphasia mirabilis, Vervill, Amer. Journ. Sci. vol. v. (Dec. 1872),

p- 9; 8.Smith & O. Hagen, Trans. Conn. Acad. of Arts & Sci. vol. iii.

pt. i. (1877), pp. 219, 225; Clark, Proc. Acad. Phil. 1877, pt. iii.

p- 219, pl. xiii. fig. 36.

Polyserias Hincksti, Mereschkowsky, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. vol. xx.

(1877) p. 228, pl. vi. figs. 15, 16.

Colony rigid, plume-like, attaining a length of 16 and a

breadth of 6 centims. The principal stem is angularly bent,

and only bears two series of hydrothece ; from each angle

issues a long and straight branch which is never ramified ;

the arrangement of the branches is regular, alternate, and in

the same plane; they are of equal length to [near] the ex-

tremity, where they become shorter. Sometimes, especially

in the largest colonies, the stem gives off from its two lower

bends, not, as usual, a single branch, but [twoor more] branches,

which issue simultaneously from the angle formed by the prin-

cipal stem ; and in this very rare case each pair of branches is

not arranged in the same plane as all the other branches.

Each branch is attached by means of a short peduncle, and

forms with the principal stem an angle of about 45°. The

hydrothece upon the branches are always arranged in six dis-

tinct and regular rows, even to the ends of the branches,

which terminate abruptly. The transverse section of the

branch, if it is rather slender, only shows three cells around

the central cavity ; but on making the section a little higher

up, we obtain three other cells, placed, not directly above the

former, but between them in the interstices—which proves

that we have to do with six rows, and that at the same time

two hydrothecee belonging to two rows are not placed side by

side, but sometimes higher, sometimes lower (that is to say,

alternately). This will be better understood by examining

the drawing which I have already given*. ‘The form of the

hydrothece is that of those of the Sertularie in general, fur-

nished with a pretty long neck inclined outwards and slightly

flattened, and with a wider part united with the stem. The

aperture of the hydrotheca is operculate and furnished with

two very distinct teeth placed at the corners of the orifice,

which, in consequence of the compression of the neck, is

elongated. .

The gonophores in their young state have the form of a

reversed cone attached by its apex (Pl. XV. fig. 5); but in the

completely developed state they differ very little from the

gonophores of Sertwlarta or Thuiaria. Their form is elon-

* Ann, & Mag. Nat. Mist. 1877, vol. xx. pl. vi. fig. 16.

336 M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida.

gate oval, narrowed below into a short peduncle, and abruptly

truncate at the extremity above, where they are narrowed into

a sort of wide and very short tube. The arrangement of

the gonophores upon the branches may be in four rows; and

frequently they are in such great numbers and so close toge-

ther that they compress one another and then acquire an

irregular form. When looked at from above they then have

the appearance shown in the accompanying figure (fig. 10).

This species, which I only describe very

briefly now, was at first named by me P. Fig. 10.

Hincksii; but as I have since convinced

myself that it was described several years

ago under the name of Diphasia mirabilis,

the laws of priority compel me to change

the name, and to call it Polyserias mira-

bilis. At the same time I shall change the name of another

Polyserias, which I have briefly described as P. glacéalis, and

I shall give it the name of P. Hincksiz, in honour of the Rev.

Thomas Hincks. The description of this species will follow

immediately.

It must be remarked that Polyserias mirabilis is one of the

most magnificent, and, at the same time, one of the largest

species that have been met within the White Sea. Nor can I

say that it is rare, as I have several specimens of it from several

localities. The largest specimens, which have only retained

their branches in the upper part, measure nearly 16 centims.

Their colour is a rather dark brown, darkest especially on the

principal stem and at the ends of the lateral branches. The

length of the branches is from 1 to 2 centims., and their width

about 1:1 millim. Length of hydrothece 0-55 millim., their

breadth 0°48 ; length of the mature gonothece 1:1 millim.,

their breadth 0-63.

This species, as indeed the whole genus, is purely polar,

and apparently even circumpolar.

Localities.—1. The island of Solowetzky, near the monas-

tery, at a small depth (not more than 15 fathoms) ; 2. Near

the promontory of Orlow (White Sea), 67° 17! N. lat. and

41° 35! EH. long., at a depth of 35 fathoms, on a gravelly

bottom, June 28, 1876 (gonophores present) ; 8. Glacial Ocean,

N.E. of the Swiatoy Nos (the Holy Nose), on the Mourman-

sky bereg, 68° 13’ N. lat. and 40° E. long., at a depth of 60

fathoms, on a bottom of sand and shells, June 30 (the best

specimens, with many gonophores).

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida. 337

Polyserias Hincksti, nov. sp. (Pl. XV. figs. 1-4.)

mere glacialis, Mereschk. Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. vol. xx. (1877)

p. 226,

Colony rather rigid, plumiform, attaining a length of 20

centims. and a breadth of 10 centims. The principal stem is

angularly bent, and only bears two kinds of hydrothece.

From each angle issues a branch, which at first forms with

the main stem an angle of about 45°; but afterwards this

angle enlarges more and more until the position of the branch

becomes vertical to the main stem. ‘The branches are long,

cylindrical, attain a length of 6°5 centims., and become shorter

im proportion as they approach the apex of the colony. They

are attached by means of a short and slender peduncle ; their

arrangementis alternate and in the same plane (Pl. XV. fig. 1).

The hydrothecee upon the branches are always arranged in six

rows, as in the preceding species, and in the same alternate

manner; but here each pair of rows (fig. 2) forms a distinct

system, separated by a small interval not occupied by hydro-

thece. The roundness of the branches is more distinct in this

species, as also the rows of hydrothece. The thickness of

the branches is very considerable, and still greater in the

youngest. The hydrothece are oval, a little wider below,

with a more or less regular oval aperture ; they are immersed

in the stem for their whole extent, and their neck does not

project outwards. In the lower part of the hydrothece

there is a small tube, which constitutes the communication

between the hydrotheca and the central canal which traverses

the whole length of the branch. Colour of the branches pale

yellow, that of the main stem dark brown; the points of the

branches are not of darker colour as is usual in P. mirabilis.

Gonophores in the young state (fig. 4) in the form of a re-

versed cone, just as in P. mirabilis, but generally smaller.

In the adult state (fig. 3) they retain their conical form, but

the cone becomes larger and more elongated; below, it is

attached by a short peduncle; above, it is truncate with the

margins much rounded, and furnished with a tube of very

inconsiderable length, which is scarcely observable, and much

narrower than in the preceding species. The gonothece of

this species are never present in such abundance as in P.

mirabilis.

This species, the largest that I am acquainted with in the

White Sea, is distinguished from the preceding by the greater

breadth of the colony, due to the extreme length of the lateral

branches, by the much lighter colour, and especially by the

stout, cylindrical form of the branches, the surface of which is

338 M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida.

completely smooth, in consequence of the form of the hydro-

thecee, which more approaches that occurring in Thusaria,

being entirely immersed in the chitinous substance, while the

outwardly curved necks of P. mirabilis give a hispid aspect to

its branches.

Width of the branches of the middle of the colony 0°75 and

0°85 millim., of the uppermost branches 1°10 millim. ; length

of the hydrothece 0°52 millim. (at the end 0°57), their breadth

0°34 millim. (at the end 0°45); length of the gonothece 0-9

millim., their breadth 0°5.

This species, which is a still more magnificent one than the

preceding, is not more rare; but it is especially from the

Glacial'‘Ocean (near the Swiatoy Nos) that I have collected

the largest and most luxuriant specimens.

Localities.—1. White Sea, near the promontory of Intzy

(on the Zimnij bereg), in 66° N. lat. and 40° 25’ H. long., at

a depth of 10 fathoms, on a stony bottom, June 23 (without

gonophores) ; 2. Glacial Ocean, N.E. of the Swiatoy Nos,

upon the Mourmansky bereg, in 68° 13!’ N. lat. and 40° KE.

long., at a depth of 60 fathoms (the large specimens), upon

a bottom of sand and shells, June 30, 1876 (with gono-

phores).

PROPOSITIONS.

The following are the fifteen propositions, contained in the

present memoir, which, I think, I can sustain and defend :—

1. Forms like Syncoryne, Coryne, Gemmaria, Stawridium,

Cladonema, Millepora, &c. form a type which I name the

articulate type; all these forms are governed by the law of

metamerism.

2. Articulation is produced by incomplete transverse

division.

3. The very large number of metameres is produced by the

law of physiological inertia of N. Wagner.

4, The articulate form in the Hydroids is almost always

accompanied by capitate tentacles ; tins form is the best adapted

to fulfil the function of defence, the only function that remains

to them when their position has become too distant from the

mouth.

5. The exceptions to this rule may be perfectly well ex-

plained, and by no means contradict proposition 3.

6. The hydranth with its tentacles may be regarded as a

polymorphic colony (tentacles and body) composed of several

Archhydre, Hiick., produced by the process of gemmation.

‘he tentacles are not the homologues of such organs as feet,

hands, &c. ; they are only their analogues.

M. C. Mereschkowsky on the Hydroida. 339

7. The medusa of Obelia flabellata is developed in the

manner ascertained by F. HE. Schultze in the case of Syn-

coryne Sarsit, in the first place by the impulsion of the active

ectoderm into the passive endoderm.

8. The first stages of the development of the ova of the

medusa of Obelia flabellata before fertilization consist in a

repeated division of the nucleolulus, followed by the division

of the nucleolus into several parts, a division which stops at

the nucleus.

9. Obelia flabellata, under certain conditions, appears to be

able to increase by spontaneous fission by a sort of cyst, after

the fashion of Schizocladium ramosum and Corymorpha.

10. There are more than forty species of Hydroids in the

White Sea, about eight of which are new. The fauna is more

polar than that of the north of Norway and the Mourmansky

bereg, and shows some oriental features (7. e. features of the

fauna of the Pacific Ocean). It does not prove Lovén’s

hypothesis of a connexion between the White Sea and the

Baltic.

11. Oorhiza borealis, nov. gen. et sp., is distinguished by

the sporosacs issuing immediately from the hydrorhiza with-

out the intervention of blastostyles.

12. There are Hydroids (Oorhiza borealis) the tentacles of

which are furnished with eyes (or ‘ eye-pigment’’).

13. The northern variety of Sertularella polyzonias must

constitute a distinct species—Sertularella gigantea, mihi.

14. Sertularia albimaris, new species, with a hydrorhiza

in a continuous layer. Description of Leptoscyphus Grigo-

riewt, NOV. sp.

15. The forms of the family Sertulariide, which have their

hydrothece arranged not in two but in several series, must

form a new genus, Polyserias. (Description of two species.)

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Prats XII.

Fig. 1. Young medusa of Obelia flabellata in the form of Archhydra.

Figs. 2, 3. Subsequent stages of development, in which the ectoderm alone

is active and buries itself in the endoderm.

Fig. 4. Optical section of fig. 5.

Fig. 5. The four radial canals, strongly developed ; commencement of the

formation of the manubrium.

Fig. 6. Young medusa still attached to the blastostyle.

Fig. 7. Medusa of Obelia flabellata, completely developed and furnished

with four sporosacs.

Figs. 8, 9. 10. Ova taken from the sporosacs of the medusa of Obelia fla-

bellata, not fecundated, and showing different stages of develop-

ment of the nucleolus and nucleolulus.

Fig. 11. The nucleus, highly magnified, to show the relative size of the

340 Mr. W.C. Hewitson on new Species of Hesperide.

nucleolulus and its irregular, variable form: »', nucleus; 7’,

nucleolus; »'’’, nucleolulus.

Figs. 12, 18. More advanced stages of the development of the ovum, asso-

ciated with an enlargement of the ovum.

Fig. 14. A second observed case of a nucleolus in process of division : 7",

nucleolus.

Fig. 15. A nucleolus (n'’), much magnified, with a nucleolulus (x'") in

the middle and an aureole of five small granules.

Fig. 16. The apex of a stem of Obelia flabellata, in which the ccenosare

has become detached as a cylinder with a cavity. :

Fig. 17. A hydrotheca in which the ccenosare has formed, instead of a

cylinder, a sphere with a cavity, ectoderm, endoderm, and pe-

risarc,

PLATE XIV.

Fig. 1. Leptoscyphus Grigoriewi, nov. sp., magnified, drawn with the

camera lucida.

Fig. 2. Two varieties presented by the hydrothecee of Leptoscyphus Gri-

gortewi, more highly magnified. Drawn with the camera

lucida.

Fig. 8. Sertularia albimaris, nov. sp., principal stem and lateral branches.

Enlarged ; drawn with the camera lucida.

Fig. 4. A colony of Sertularia albimaris, natural size.

Fig. 5, Portion of the hydrorhiza of the same, much enlarged (camera

lucida): a, the spines; 0, the vertical partitions formed by the

lateral walls of the tubes, which are joined in growing.

Fig. 6. Sertularella gigantea, mihi, natural size.

Fig. 7. The same, enlarged.

PLATE XV.

Fig. 1. A very fine colony of Polyserias Hinckswi, nov. gen. et sp.

Fig. 2. Part of a stem of the same Hydroid, enlarged (camera lucida).

Fig. 3. A mature gonotheca of Polyserias Hincksu.

Fig. 4. A young gonotheca of the same.

Fig. 5, Polyserias mirabilis, with immature gonothecee (camera lucida).

Fig. 6. A mature gonotheca of the same Hydroid.

Fig. 7. Part of a colony of Oorhiza borealis, nov. gen. et sp., enlarged,

from a sketch by M. Wagner.

Fig. 8. Sporosacs of Oorhiza borealis, issuing from the hydrorhiza.

Fig. 9. Tip of a tentacle of Oorhiza borealis with pseudopodium-like fila-

ments and red pigment grains (eye-pigment).

Fig. 10. A body on a peduncle, moving like an Ameba, and giving origin

to filaments.

Fig. 11, Another tip of a tentacle, to show the arrangement of the fila-

ments.

XXX VII.—Descriptions of twenty new Species of Hesperide

from his own Collection. By W. C. HEwirtson.

Plesioneura Tola.

Alis utrinque nigro-fuscis: anticis fascia media, regulari, nervis

albis quinquepartita, nivea.

Both sides dark brown. Anterior wing crossed in the

Mr. W. C. Hewitson on new Species of Hesperide. 341

middle from the subcostal nervure to a little below the first

branch of the median nervure, below which it is narrow, by a

broad oval, regular, transparent snow-white band, divided by

the nervures, which are of the same colour.

Exp. 2 inches.

Hab, Tondano (Wallace).

Plesioneura Crona.

Alis utrinque fuscis: anticis fascia media, regulari, nervis fulvis

tripartita, aurantiaca.

Both sides dark brown. Anterior wing crossed in the

middle from the subcostal nervure, where it is narrow, to the

first branch of the median nervure, where it is broadest, by a

semitransparent regular band of orange.

Exp. 133 inch.

Hab. Batchian (Wallace).

Plesioneura Cythna.

Alis utrinque rufo-fuscis: anticis fascia media hyalina alba, nervis

albis tripartita: posticis basi margine costali albo nitido.

Upperside rufous-brown. Anterior wing crossed in the

middle from the subcostal nervure, where it is narrow, to the

first branch of the median nervure, where it is broadest, by a

transparent band of white. Posterior wing with the costal

margin from the base to its middle white and polished.

Underside as above, except that the white band is con-

tinued to the inner margin.

Exp. 1;% inch,

Astictopterus Verones.

Alis utrinque rufo-fuscis : anticis infra macula apicali fulva.

Both sides rufous-brown.

Underside of the anterior wing marked by a subapical

rufous spot.

Exp. 1,3; inch.

Hab. Sumatra (Wallace).

Astictopterus Harmachis.

Alis utrinque fuscis: anticis fascia lata, irregulari, angulata, nervis

nigris quadripartita, hyalina, flava.

Both sides dark rufous-brown. Anterior wing crossed in

the middle from the subcostal nervure to the submedian ner-

vure by a very irregular angular transparent band of yellow,

divided into four parts by the nervures, which are black: the

342 Mr. W.C. Hewitson on new Species of Hesperide.

first part large and oblong within the cell, the second. trian-

gular between the second and third branches of the median

nervure, the third oblong and bounded by the first and second

branches of the median nervure; two small spots, one of

which is very minute, towards the apex.

Underside as above.

Exp. 2 inches.

Hab. Sumatra (Buxton).

This species is also in the collection of Dr. Staudinger,

from Malacca.

Astictopterus Oztas.

Alis utrinque fuscis: anticis supra fascia media sinuata, nervis

flavis quadripartita, hyalina, flava: infra, anticis apice, posticis

fasciis duabus latis cinereis.

Upperside dark rufous-brown. Anterior wing crossed at

the middle, from the subcostal nervure to the submedian ner-

vure, by a broad irregular transparent band of yellow, divided

by the nervures, which are of the same colour, and twice in-

dented on its inner border: the first part within the cell trian-

gular; the second triangular, formed by the median nervure

and its second and third branches ; the third oblong between

the first and second median branches.

Underside. Anterior wing as above, except that the apex

is broadly grey. Posterior wing crossed below the middle by

two broad bands of grey.

Exp. 1, inch.

Hab. Java. .

This species is also in the collection of Dr. Staudinger, from

Java; my specimen is without a locality.

This and Harmachis have the appearance of Lesperia.

Astictopterus Othonias.

Alis utrinque rufo-fuscis: anticis fascia media tripartita maculaque

aurantiacis.

Both sides rufous-brown. Anterior wing crossed at the

middle from the subcostal nervure to near the submédian ner-

vure by an irregular band, broken into three orange spots by

the nervures: the first in the cell; the second oblong, bounded

by the first and second branches of the median nervure; a

fourth spot, outside of these, placed between the second and

third branches of the median nervure.

Exp. 235 inches.

Hab. Borneo.

Mr. W. C, Hewitson on new Species of Hesperide. 348

Astictopterus Vibius.

Alis utrinque fuscis : anticis macula magna media, sub apice sinuata,

aurantiaca.

Both sides dark rufous-brown. Anterior wing witha large

central orange spot, circular, except opposite the apex, where

the brown is obtruded in a quadrate form.

Exp. 133; inch.

Hab. Gaboon.

Ceratrichia flava.

Alis utrinque flavis: anticis margine postico late nigro punctis

duobus minutis sub apice notato: posticis apice nigro. Infra;

anticis maculis apicalibus albo notatis: posticis semicirculo punc-

torum nigrorum.

Upperside bright yellow. Anterior wing with the outer

margin black, marked beyond the end of the cell by a minute

yellow spot, and near the apex by a very minute spot of the

same colour. Posterior wing with the apex black; some

minute black spots on the outer margin.

Underside yellow. Anterior wing as above, except that the

apex is rufous, marked by black spots, each marked by a minute

white spot; the margin black, traversed by a line of yellow;

the fringe black and white alternately. Posterior wing with

two or three subbasal brown spots, followed by a semicircular

series of brown spots, some of which are marked with yellow ;

a submarginal series of minute black spots; the margin also

spotted with black.

Exp. 134 inch.

Hab, Cameroons (Ltutherford).

Ceratrichia Aretina.

Alis rufo-fuscis: anticis maculis sex albis hyalinis maculaque opaca,

posticis maculis tribus: posticis infra flavo minioque tinctis.

Upperside dark rufous-brown. Anterior wing with six

transparent white spots: one near the imner margin, one

intersected by the median nervure, the third beyond this, and

three near the apex. Posterior wing with two transparent

central spots: one before the middle ; the other below it, bifid.

Underside. Anterior wing as above, except that the base of

the costal nervure is white, and that there are some pale spots

near the apex. Posterior wing with the costal half yellow-

white, marked by two or three small brown spots, and on the

costal margin by a carmine-brown spot; anal half, except the

344 Mr. W.C. Hewitson on new Species of Hesperide.

abdominal fold, which is pale yellow, carmine-brown, marked

by the transparent spots as above.

Exp. 175 inch.

Hab. Calabar.

The two species which I have described, together with

C. nothus and C. Cesar, form Mr. Butler’s well-marked genus

Ceratrichia.

Pterygospidea grisea.

Alis utrinque griseis, fasciis tribus macularibus nigris: anticis

punctis octo albis hyalinis.

Upperside dark brown, so thickly irrorated throughout

with white as to give it the appearance of being dark grey.

Both wings crossed by three irregular bands of black spots.

Anterior wing with eight small transparent spots : three from

the middle of the costal margin (two of which are in the cell),

two between the branches of the median nervure, and three

near the apex.

Underside as above, but paler.

Exp. 13, inch.

Hab. Gaboon (Rogers).

Pterygospidea Kehelatha.

Alis utrinque rufo-brunneis: supra fasciis duabus transversalibus

nigris: anticis macula nigra subbasali maculisque septem albis

hyalinis, quatuor in medio positis.

Upperside bright rufous-brown. Both wings crossed be-

yond the middle by a band of brown and by a submarginal

band of the same colour, partly broken into spots. Anterior

wing with a distinct black spot not far from the base of the inner

margin; seven transparent white spots, four of which are in

the middle, one on the costal margin, one in the cell large

and quadrate but sinuated on its inner border, and two below

it between the branches of the median nervure. Posterior

wing with two or three subbasal indistinct brown spots; the

outer margin angular at the middle.

Underside rufous-brown. Anterior wing as above. Pos-

terior wing marked by several black spots: three (one of

which is bifid) m a semicircle before the middle, and seven in

pairs, also forming a semicircle beyond the middle.

Exp. 13 inch.

Hab, Macassar (Wallace).

Pterygospidea Sephara.

Alis utrinque rufo-brunneis: anticis punctis tredecim hyalinis,

Mr. W. C. Hewitson on new Species of Hesperide. B45

fascia, media, fascia subapicali fasciaque anali fuscis : posticis basi

apiceque fuscis, fasciisque duabus pallide brunneis.

Upperside rufous-brown, marked by thirteen transparent

white spots, all of which, with one exception, are very minute:

five near the middle of the costal margin, three of which are

in the cell, where two of them are upon a spot of brown; four

below these between the branches of the median nervure and

the submedian, one of which is square and larger than all the

rest, one very minute, and one linear ; and four near the apex,

all placed upon a transverse brown band; a band of brown

near the apex and also near the anal angle. Posterior wing

with the base and apex dark brown, a brown spot on the

costal margin, and two transverse bands of paler brown.

Underside as above, except that it is without the brown at

the middle of the anterior wing, as well as that at the base of

the posterior wing.

Exp. 1,3; inch.

Hab. Brazil.

This and the last described are most nearly represented by

P. éruncata.

Hesperia Netopha.

Alis fuscis: anticis maculis quinque hyalinis maculaque opaca alba:

posticis macula media bipartita alba. Infra anticis radiis api-

calibus flavis: posticis flavis maculis margineque posteriore nigris.

Upperside dark brown. Anterior wing with six white

spots, five of which are transparent : two in the cell; four in

a longitudinal central band, the first near the inner margin,

opaque, the last towards the apex, very minute. Posterior

wing with a trifid pale yellow central spot.

Underside. Anterior wing as above, except that the outer

margin is ochreous and that there are rays of yellow at the

apex. Posterior wing yellow, marked by several black spots:

two at the base, two before the middle, followed by a trans-

verse curved band of six; the outer margin and some of the

nervures where they touch it dark brown; the fringe yellow.

Exp. 1,4 inch.

Hab. West Africa.

Hesperia Nyasse.

Alis fuscis : anticis maculis quatuor hyalinis maculaque opaca alba:

posticis macula media bipartita flava. Infra anticis apice cine-

raceo, fusco striato: posticis cineraceis, maculis nigris notatis.

Upperside dark brown. Anterior wing with five white ©

spots: one in the cell bifid, four in a central longitudinal

band, the first near the inner margin opaque, the last towards

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. 1. 23

346 Mr. W.C. Hewitson on new Species of Hesperide.

the apex scarcely visible. Posterior wing with a bifid

ochreous central spot.

Underside. Anterior wing as above, except that the costal

margin is rufous, the apex broadly lilac-grey, intersected be-

tween the nervures by lines of dark brown. Posterior wing

lilac-grey, marked by several black spots: two at the base,

three in a transverse band before the middle, and four beyond

the middle.

Exp. 12 inch.

Hab. Nyassa (Thelwall).

This and the last described are very different from any

other species, but singularly like each other in marking,

though upon a totally different ground-colour.

Hesperia vermiculata.

Alis supra fuscis: anticis punctis quinque hyalinis punctoque

opaco flavis, puncto in cellula punctisque in fascia longitudinali

positis: posticis fascia margineque anali flavis. Infra anticis

radiis apicalibus flavis: posticis flavis maculis nigris albisque.

Upperside dark brown. Anterior wing with six spots, five

of which are transparent and slightly tinted with yellow: one

in the cell, oblong; five in a longitudinal central band, the

first of which near the inner margin is opaque, the last,

towards the apex, minute. Posterior wing with an oblique

short central band and the fringe yellow; the anal angle also

broadly yellow. The abdomen dark brown, banded with

yellow.

Underside. Anterior wing as above, except that there are

two lines of yellow from the base of the costal margin, which

are united near its middle; rays of the same colour at the

apex, and a triangular white spot at the end of the cell.

Posterior wing yellow, spotted with black and white; the

base and costal margin dark brown, with the nervures yellow;

two white spots below the middle of the costal margin, a

white spot near the inner margin; a transverse series of black

spots below the middle, followed by a series of white spots,

and again by an apical series of black spots. The white spots

slightly tinted with blue.

Exp. 155 inch.

Hab. Sumatra (Buszton).

A beautiful species, near H. Liburnia and H. Latota.

Syrichthus Cenchreus.

Alis fuscis, fascia submarginali macularum albarum : posticis fascia

media maculari alba: posticis infra albis, fasciis tribus fuscis.

Upperside dark brown. Both wings with a submarginal

Mr. W. C. Hewitson on new Species of Hesperide. 347

series of white spots; the fringe brown, bordered inwardly

with white. Posterior wing with a spot in the cell, and a

central band of oblong white spots.

Underside. Anterior wing as above, except that it is white

near the base. Posterior wing white, crossed by three bands

of dark brown: one before the middle, short; one below the

middle, longer; and one submarginal, broadest and longest

and irrorated with white.

Exp. 144 inch.

Hab. Para (Bates).

Arteurotia Cambyses.

Alis supra nigro-fuscis, fascia submarginali maculari cineracea.

Infra fuscis: anticis margine interiore cinereo: posticis fasciis

duabus indistinctis.

Upperside black. Both wings with a submarginal series

of grey spots, largest at the apex of the anterior wing, scarcely

visible towards its anal angle. Anterior wing with a very

indistinct short band of grey from the middle of the costal

margin. Posterior wing with a similar band in its middle.

Underside. Anterior wing dark brown, the apex paler, the

inner margin grey. Posterior wing red-brown, with the

costal margin and two indistinct transverse bands of darker

brown.

Exp. 155 inch.

Hab. Bolivia (Buckley).

This species is nearly allied to Mycteris cerula of Mabille,

which belongs to this genus.

Arteurotia Castolus.

Alis utrinque fuscis: anticis punctis tribus subapicalibus hyalinis.

Infra anticis puncto cinereo apieali: posticis angulo anali late

cineraceo, fusco undulato.

Upperside dark brown. Both wings indistinctly variegated

by grey. Anterior wing with three minute subapical trans-

parent spots.

Underside as above, except that there is a small grey spot

at the apex of the anterior wing, and that the anal half of the

posterior wing is grey undulated with brown.

Exp. 1,3; inch.

Hab. Brazil. .

Arteurotia Celendris.

Alis utrinque fuscis: anticis punctis duodecim minutis hyalinis :

posticis dimidio inferiore cinereo, fascia submarginali fusca: his

infra fascia media maculari alba maculaque anali magna nigra.

348 Dr. F. Briiggemann om Artamus monachus.

Upperside dark brown. Anterior wing with twelve minute

transparent spots: three at the middle of the costal margin,

two of which are in the cell; six in a central oblique band,

two of which are lunular; and three near the apex; a minute

white spot on the fringe at the apex, and a lunular spot of the

same colour near the analangle. Posterior wing with the outer

half grey, bordered above with white, crossed near the outer

margin by a band of dark brown.

Underside. Anterior wing as above, except that there are

two minute white spots above the lunular spot near the anal

angle. Posterior wing with a band of white spots at the

middle, a series of smaller white spots below these, and a large

black spot at the anal angle bordered above and below with

white.

Exp. 155 inch.

Hab. Amazons (Bates),

Conognathus Platon of Felder is the typical representative

of this genus; but as Mr. Kirby informs me that Conognathus

is preoccupied, I have adopted Artewrotia of Butler and Druce.

Thracides Aristoteles of Westwood also belongs to this genus,

and bears very little resemblance to the species which Hiibner

puts into his genus Thracides.

XXX VIII.—WNote on Artamus monachus.

By Dr. F. BRbGGEMANN.

In 1850 Prince Bonaparte established a new species of Arta-

mus from Celebes (A. monachus), with the following dia-

gnosis :—‘ Capite, alis caudaque nigris” (Consp. Avium, i.

. 843). ;

; In 1877 Dr. Sclater established a new species of Artamus

from New Ireland (A. ¢nsignis), with the following dia-

gnosis :— Diversus ab A. monacho capite alis et cauda nigris”

(Proc. Zool. Soc. 1877, p. 101). |

Going further into the question, it may be mentioned in

advance that A. monachus was first distinguished and named

by Temminck; but as the Dutch ornithologist never gave a

description of it, we have not at all to deal with an A. mona-

chus of Temminck, as quoted by most authors. The next

account of the species was given by the illustrious traveller

Wallace, who described specimens from North Celebes and

the Sula Islands (P. Z. S. 1862, p. 340), as having the head,

wings, and tail ashy grey instead of black. Upon this, Lord

Walden, in his elaborate memoir on the birds of Celebes

(Trans. Zool. Soe. viii. p. 67), where also a good figure of the

Mr. D. G. Elhot on a new Ptilopus. 349

species is given, expressed his doubts about the identity of

Bonaparte’s and Wallace’s birds. Having found again the

characters indicated by Wallace in one of Von Rosenberg’s

specimens, I suggested in a previous paper (Abh. Ver. Brem.

v. p.- 69) that there might be a lapsus calami in Bonaparte’s

statement.

Such being the state of affairs, until a short time ago,

there could not be much objection to naming the Celebean

bird “A. monachus.” Bonaparte’s diagnosis is, indeed, short

enough; and recently one of his appellations, although in

general use, has been rejected on account of its being accom-

panied by a diagnostic phrase consisting of only fowr words.

However, I cannot agree in fixing a certain number of words

as indispensable for the establishment of a species. This

would lead to a most trivial higgling ; for it is extremely diffi-

cult to tell how many words should be considered sufficient.

In some cases, I think, even a single word might do; besides

it can never be demanded that the first description of a

species should be exhaustive in every respect. But Bona-

parte’s diagnosis is erroneous; and, as lately the Oriolus

indicus has been renamed because of a wrong original

description, it might have been regarded as necessary to find

anew name for our bird. But this objection is, in my

belief, not sustainable, as the species could be ascribed to

Wallace, as well as the Oriolus indicus to Jerdon.

However, it has become unavoidable to rename the Celebes

bird; for now a species is known answering fully to Bona-

parte’s diagnosis, viz. A. insignis; and therefore I venture

to propose the name of A. spectabilis for the former. It

now little matters whether Bonaparte’s term “ nigris”’ is

miswritten or not, and whether the type in the Leyden

Museum is really A. cnsignis (and in this case the habitat

would be wrong) or A. spectabilis (and then the description

would be wrong); on the contrary, I consider it best, under

such circumstances, to drup “A. monachus” altogether, and

to use the new names for the two species respectively.

XXXIX.—Description of an apparently new Species of Pigeon

of the Genus Ptilopus. By D. G. Extiot, F.R.S.E. &e.

Prilopus pictiventris.

Adult, Front and crown rosy purple, with a faintly in-

dicated yellow margin. Occiput greenish grey. - Throat

whitish; neck, upper part of mantle, and breast ashy green.

350 Miscellaneous.

Flanks light green. Centre of abdomen rufous, bounded above

by a deep purple line. Crissum and under tail-coverts bright

yellow, the latter orange towards their tips. Back and upper

tail-coverts bright green. Scapulars tipped with lilac. Tail

bright green, with a broad apical yellow band. Bill greenish,

with a yellow tip. Feet probably dark red. Total length

81 inches, wing 53, tail 3, culmen ;% inch.

Hab. Nukahiva (type), Marquesas Islands, Samoa (Whit-

mee); Savage Island, Navigators’ and Friendly Islands

Layard).

This is, I presume, the bird called P. apicalis by Layard in

the ‘ Proceedings of the Zoological Society ’ for 1876, p. 495.

It differs from the P. apicalis, Bon., a very distinct species, by

being of a much lighter colour on the neck and breast, and by

having the rufous of the abdomen bounded above by deep

purple, and the scapulars tipped with lilac. In the type of

P. apicalis there is no purple on the abdomen, the patch being

rufous mixed with yellow, and the scapulars are uniform

green. The locality Vavao, given by Bonaparte, is question-

able, as the type was brought by Hombron and Jacquinot

from the Samoan Islands ; but which one is not stated. The

type of the Prilopus pictiventris is now in the collection of the

Paris Museum, and came from Nukahiva, of the Marquesas

group. I have also seen two specimens in the British Mu-

seum, sent by the Rev. 8. J. Whitmee from Samoa and

Savage Island, which are precisely like the type, and bore

upon their label (written by Mr. Whitmee) the name of

Ptilopus fasciatus, Peale, which is a very different species, in

no way to be confounded with it. As there is considerable

confusion still existing among these small fruit-pigeons of the

South-Sea Islands, I will add that the present new species

differs from the others with a yellow apical band on the tail

especially by the colouring of the abdomen. Its proper posi-

tion in the group will be fully shown in a paper upon these

birds, on which I have been for some time engaged, and have

now nearly ready for publication.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On Dinichthys, Newberry.

Pror. Owen, followed in this by Prof. Huxley, constituted an

order, Protopteri (Dipnoi, Huxley), for the genus Lepidosiren,

which combines with essentially ichthyic characters structural

peculiarities which greatly approximate it to the perennibranchiate

Batrachians. Paul Gervais and others, on the contrary, class the

Miscellaneous. 351

type of this order among the Ganoids; and Dr. Giinther, going

still further, regards the Dipnoi as nothing more than a suborder of

the Ganoids, and thinks that these latter should be united with the

Plagiostomi, to form with them a single order (Paleichthyes) charac-

terized by a heart furnished with a contractile arterial bulb, an

intestine with a spiral valve, and uncrossed optic nerves.

The discovery of Ceratodus Forstert certainly seems to diminish

the value of the order Dipnoi. This fish, which approaches Lepido-

siren in regard to its respiratory apparatus, departs from it, on the

other hand, by the structure of its heart, which is perfectly

ganoidean, consisting only of two cavities with an arterial bulb ;

moreover the intestine is furnished with a spiral valve. The genus

Dinichthys is a new type, which, combining the osteological charac-

ters of the Lepidosirens and those of the Placoderms (cuirassed

Ganoids), furnishes an additional argument in favour of M. Gervais’s

opinion and establishes a fresh transition between the different

groups of Ganoids.

Besides its great size (a cranium measures 3 feet in length and

2 in breadth) the Dinichthys is especially remarkable by its denti-

tion. The lower jaw consists of massive rami, the posterior extre-

mities of which are rounded and flat. The anterior part of each

ramus is bent upwards so as to form a sort of strong, acute, and

prominent tooth ; behind this tooth the jaw is thickened by a bony

projection on the inside, which terminates in front in a triangular

process like a tooth ; beyond this process the margin of the mandi-

ble is compressed for a distance of 5 or 6 inches, and consists of a

very dense bone-like enamel; in one species this margin is entire

but trenchant; in another it is denticulated with conical points

half an inch long.

The upper jaw consists of two triangular premaxillaries, constitu-

ting, as it were, two great incisors, followed by two maxillaries

with trenchant or denticulate margins. This structure much

reminds us of the dentition of Lepidosiren and Coccosteus ; and the

resemblance becomes still more striking when we compare figures

representing these three forms. Unfortunately, the upper part of

the cranium being but imperfectly known, we cannot tell whether

the bones called premaxillaries by Mr. Newberry are or are not

the homologues of the dentigerous nasals of Lepidosiren ; but with

respect to the mandible the resemblance is as complete as could be

desired.

The body of Dinichthys was covered with a buckler composed of

plates exactly similar to those of Coccosteus decipiens, of the same

number, and arranged in an almost identical manner, the only

differences shown by a comparison of the figures being a certain

narrowness of the buckler and the termination in a sort of point of

the outer angle of the posterior plates.

The jaws of Dinichthys present several points of resemblance to

those of Coccosteus ; but this is not the case with the cranium and

the back, the bony armour of which, in the former fish, much more

resembles that of Asterolepis and Heterosteus. Whilst the outer

352 Miscellaneous.

surface of the bony plates of the Placoderms is covered with stellate

tubercles, that of Dinichthys is only marked with fine granulations,

with slightly deeper and very irregular furrows. The fins are only

known from a fragment 6 inches long and 3 or 4 inches broad,

which probably formed part of a median fin with ossified rays as

thick as a man’s litle finger.

Thus, as we pass from the Dipteri of the Devonian to the existing

Ceratodus Forsteri by means of the Carboniferous Otenodus and the

Triassic Ceratodus, so Dinichthys binds together Coccosteus, Pterich-

thys, Astcrolepis, and Lepidosiren, although in both cases we by no

means possess all the intermediate forms.—Azbl. Univ. June 15,

1877, Arch. des Sct. p. 195.

On an Ostracode Crustacean of anew Genus (Acanthopus), met with in

the deep Waters of the Lake of Geneva. By M. H. Vurner.

This entomostracan cannot be referred to any type hitherto ob-

served in fresh water ; it belongs to the marine family Cytheride.

Like the representatives of that family it possesses only a single pair

of maxillee, and, on the other hand, three pairs of feet armed with

strong hooks at their basal articulation (the other freshwater Ostra-

codes having two pairs of maxille and two pairs of legs). The

rudimentary postabdomen is reduced to two rounded lobes, each

bearing two hairs. The antennez also much more resemble the type

of the Cytheride than that of the Cypride.

The reproductive apparatus does not present any thing peculiar ; it

resembles that of the Ostracodes in general. Besides the sexual

tube there is a receptaculum seminis in the female, and a very com-

plicated chitinous copulatory apparatus in the male. The vulve

are placed below the two postabdominal lobes.

With regard to its mode of life, this crustacean is unable to leave

the bottom. It does not swim at all; it sometimes creeps, but

usually buries itself, and thus travels in the mud and organic debris

by the aid of its feet and antenne. The hairs and segments of the

feet are driven into the mud, which serves as a support. Thestrong

hooks of the basal articulation are especially useful, “but give a

somewhat awkward appearance to the mode of progression. The

mechanism of this locomotion may be compared to that of a man

who endeavours to advance upon his knees, aiding himself with his

toes.

The two pairs of antenne act in opposite directions; their action

may be compared to that of the two anterior paws of amole. These

are the members which enable our crustacean to bury itself in the

mud.

With reference to the origin of this organism two suppositions

may be formed: it may be descended from a marine species intro-

duced by some means into our lakes ; or it may have for its ancestor

a freshwater crustacean ; the genus Candona would be that which

it most resembles, though nevertheless very dissimilar. The field

of hypotheses remains open upon this point.—B2b/, Univ. Oct. 15,

1877, Arch. des Set. p. 334.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES.]

No. 5. MAY 1878.

XL.—WNotes on the Genus Retepora, with Descriptions of new

Species. By the Rev. THomas Hincxs, B.A., F.R.S.

[Plates XVIII. & XIX.]

THE singular beauty of the Lace-corals has always attracted the

collector ; but, so far, little has been accomplished towards the

elucidation of their history. Of the many forms which exist,

especially in the Southern Ocean, few have been discriminated.

Even the representatives of the tribe in Northern and British

waters and in the Mediterranean have been only imperfectly

investigated; and much remains to be done amongst them.

The notices of Retepora which we have from the older

writers are valueless for purposes of identification; and the

same remark applies to many of the descriptions of more

modern date.

The following recent species have been described :—

From Australia :

Retepora phcenicea, Busk.

R. monilifera, Macgilivray.

R. porcellana, ¢d.

R. granulata, id.

R. fissa, ed.

I believe that the foregoing are all distinct from the forms

described as new in this paper; but in so difficult a genus it

is essential that the diagnosis should be much fuller and more

minute than authors have usually made it, and identification

is not always sure.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. pi

304 Rey. T. Hincks on the Genus Retepora.

From the South Seas :

R. versipalma, De Blainville (Man. d’Act. p. 419).

Of this species the diagnosis is hopelessly defective.

From India:

R. indica, D’ Orbigny.

Nothing is to be learnt of this species from the brief

notice of it in the ‘ Paléontologie Francaise’ (vol. v. p. 364);

but it is identified by D’Orbigny with a form figured by

Rumphius (Amboin. pl. 87. fig. 5); and as Busk quotes the

latter as a synonym of his 2. phenicea, it is possible that

this species and &. indica may be identical.

From Florida :

R. marsupiata, Smitt* (also from Teneriffe).

R. reticulata, Pourtales +. Ranked by Smittas a variety of R. Beanwna,

but probably a distinct species. Dredged from a depth of 270

fathoms.

R. reticulata of Johnston § Couch cannot be identified from their

descriptions.

From the Arctic seas:

R. Wallichiana, Busk § Hincks { (associated with R. Beaniana,

King, and R. cellulosa, Smitt).

From the North Sea:

R. Edwardsii, Van Beneden § (probably identical with R. cellulosa,

Smitt). ;

From the British seas:

R. Beaniana, Avng ||.

From the Mediterranean :

R. cellulosa, auctt.

There has been much confusion amongst authors as to the

application of this name. The northern form, with which

Smitt has connected it, ranges to the Mediterranean ; but it

has probably been applhed to other Mediterranean forms by

the earlier writers.

I do not give this as an exhaustive list, though I believe

that it will be found to include most of the described species

* Floridan Bryozoa, pt. ii. p. 67, pl. xiii. figs. 245-254.

+ Ibid. p. 69, pl. xiil. figs. 242-244,

¢ Hincks on Polyzoa from Greenland (wrongly “Iceland” in the

text) and Labrador, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. for January 1877, p. 107,

pl. xi. figs. 9-15.

§ “Sur les Polypes Bryozoaires de la Mer du Nord,” Bull, Acad.

Roy. d. Belg. vol. xv. no. 2 (1849), pl. x. figs. 9-13,

|| Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1846, xviii. p. 257.

Rev. T. Hincks on the Genus Retepora. 355.

(if not all) which are recognizable. If so, the number of known

forms is remarkably small compared with the probable extent

of the genus.

The Retepores have a wide distribution in space, ranging

from the Arctic seas to New Zealand and Australia, where

they are represented by many species, and occurring in the

Indian seas (Straits of Malacca &c.), at the Canary Isles,

off Cape Horn, and on the southern coasts of North America.

They have also a wide bathymetrical range, and have been

taken at great depths as well as in comparatively shallow

water.

The new species which I am about to describe are in part

Australian ; one of them is common to our own shores and

to the Mediterranean; and one or two besides are inhabi-

tants of the latter or of the Red Sea.

The most important specific characters in this group are

the structure of the oral aperture, the shape and size of the

fenestre, and the form and position of the avicularian appen-

dages. Some of the species are distinguished by a slit or

fissure in the lower margin of the mouth, terminating below

in a loop-like foramen; in others thisis wanting. ‘The genus

may be conveniently divided into two groups, characterized

by the presence or absence of the oral fissure.

Class POLYZOA, J. V. Thompson.

Subclass HoLopraNcHIA, HE. Ray Lankester.

Group a. Ecrorrocra, Nitsche.

Order GYMNOLZEMATA, Allman.

Suborder Cheilestomata, Busk.

Genus Rerepora, Lamarck.

a. With an oral fissure.

1. Retepora Couchti, n. sp. (Pl. XVIII. figs. 1-6.)

Retepora Beaniana, Wincks, Devon and Cornw. Cat., Ann. & Mag. Nat.

Hist. ser. 3, ix. 306 (50, sep.).

Retepora e:llulosa, var. Beaniana, Manzoni, Bryoz. Foss. Ital. quarta

contrib. 19, pl. v. fig. 26 (Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. d. Wiss. Bd. lxi, 1 Abth.

Marz-Heft, 1870).

Zoarium irregularly cup-shaped, undulated and contorted,

with asinuated margin, hispid. Menestre small, oval; stem

short. Zooecia subcylindrical, depressed, except at the upper

extremity, surface smooth ; orifice semielliptical, the front —

356 Rev. T. Hincks on the Genus Retepora.

margin produced into a tall mucronate process, broad below

and narrowing towards the apex, bent outwards, and bearing

on its summit a minute avicularium, with rounded mandible ;

peristome elevated on one side of the mucro into a broad,

wing-like process, produced at its upper and outer angle into

a pointed spine; a slit-like fissure between the mucro and

the lateral process, closed above, but forming a looped foramen

below; elongate, linguiform avicularia, with a very delicate

mandible, distributed over the zoarium, frequently one on the

front of the cell towards the side. Dorsal surface vibicate,

with many small subcircular and linguiform avicularia, irre-

gularly placed. Ooecia elliptical, smooth, with a narrow

longitudinal fissure.

Height (of the largest specimen examined) a little more

than 4 inch, breadth about ? inch.

Hab, On stones &c., deep water. :

Localities. Off the Land’s End (2. @. Couch) ; south-west

of Polperro, on stone, 40 fathoms (7. 17.) ; Guernsey (Rev. A.

M. Norman).

Distribution. Mediterranean, 390 fathoms (‘ Porcupine’

expedition, teste Busk).

fiange in time. Italian Pliocene beds (Manzon‘).

The very much produced and recurved rostrum, with its

minute terminal avicularium and the wing-like elevation of

the peristome on one side of it, are the most salient and

striking features of this species. But it is also distinguished

from its allies 2. Beaniana and RK. cellulosa by differences in

the avicularia and fenestre, From the former it is also sepa-

rated by the presence of an oral fissure.

This is probably the form which Borlase records from

Scilly, and which Couch includes in his ‘Cornish Fauna’ under

the name of AR. reticulata, though it is quite impossible to

identify it by their descriptions. I infer that it is the

same species, because no other south-western Retepore has

been brought to light by recent dredgings.

2. letepora pretenuis,n. sp. (Pl. XIX. figs. 6-8.)

Zoarium forming a simple, reticulated frond, more or less

curved and contorted. Fenestre usually of large size, elongate,

and narrowed towards both extremities; the branches very

slender, commonly composed of only two rows of cells.

Zooecia ovate, very slightly convex, smooth; orifice sub-

orbicular, peristome not elevated, a small fissure on the lower

margin, and beside it usually a minute avicularium with

rounded mandible; on the front of the cell, a little below the

mouth, frequently a raised elongate avicularium ; mandible

Rev. T. Hincks on the Genus Retepora. 357

bruad at the base, slender and somewhat curved above,

directed downwards. Ooecia small, suberect, semielliptical,

closely adnate to the cell above, somewhat flattened in front,

produced below into a truncate process, which reaches down

some way within the aperture; a short and narrow fissure in

the front wall. Dorsal surface very slightly vibicate, with

many scattered elongate avicularia.

Height (of fine specimens) about ? inch.

Locality. For my specimens of this very beautiful species

Tam indebted to R. 8. Newall, Esq., F.R.S. It was included

amongst a number of Polyzoa which were said to have been

taken from a telegraph cable in the Red Sea. On examining

the collection, however, I find it to contain so many Mediter-

ranean forms that I suspect there has been some mistake about

the locality. Probably both Mediterranean and Red-Sea forms

may be mixed in it. Mr. Newall is unable to clear up the

point ; and I can therefore only refer the present species doubt-

fully to the Red Sea.

A large proportion of the specimens in the collection afford

unmistakable evidence as to their habitat, the base from which

they rise having been moulded on the cable and forming a

cast of it.

fi. pretenuis is one of the most beautiful of its tribe.

Whether it ever assumes the caliculate form I am unable to

say; but all the specimens which have come into my hands

(about a dozen in number) consist of a simple reticulated ex-

pansion. The fenestre are usually much elongated, and the

inosculating branches which compose the network remark-

ably slender, giving an air of great lightness and delicacy to

the whole structure, which is very slightly put together and

extremely fragile. The oral fissure is very small, almost

rudimentary, and is associated with a minute, rounded avicu-

larium, rising from the lower margin beside it. The peristome

is very slightly developed; and the structure of the oral aper-

ture is essentially simple. ‘The elongate and pointed avicu-

laria are not present on every cell; but on every specimen a

considerable number may always be met with, and they form

a good distinctive character. They are raised on a mound-

like elevation ; and the slender acuminate mandible points, as

a rule, straight downwards. ‘The ovicell presents some very

marked peculiarities. It is small and decidedly suberect ; the

front wall is flattened, and is prolonged below into a kind of

lamina, subtruncate at its lower extremity, which extends

some way into the aperture. The fissure is very short and

narrow, and is not open below.

858 Rev. T. Hincks on the Genus Retepora

b. Without an oral fissure.

3. Retepora plana, n. sp. (Pl. XVIII. figs. 7, 8.)

Zoartum thin, flat, and compressed. Fenestre rather large,

usually pointed above and below, separated by wide inter-

spaces (three or four rows of cells) ; habit of growth unknown.

Zooecia ovate, very slightly convex, surrounded by a raised

line, surface smooth ; orifice arched above, with a straight lower

margin; peristome not raised, thin, entire, unarmed; fre-

quently a small avicularium, with rounded mandible, imme-

diately below the mouth, usually supported on an umbo.

Dorsal surface smooth, vibicate, destitute of avicularia.

Oocecia ?

Locality. Red Sea (probably). The specimens form part

of the collection to which I have previously referred. 3

This very distinct species is characterized by the flatness

and evenness of its surface, by its great simplicity of structure,

and the slight development of the accessory appendages,

which are usually so abundant amongst the Retepores. The

cell resembles that of an ordinary Lepralia (auct.). The

orifice is well arched above and straight below, the height

somewhat exceeding the breadth, and is surrounded by a per-

fectly simple peristome, which is not raised above the level of

the surface.

The small rounded avicularium, which is often present

below the mouth, usually mounted on an umbonate rising, is

the only appendage which occurs in my specimens.

4, Retepora tessellata, n. sp. (Pl. XTX. figs. 9-12.)

Fenestre elongate, narrow, not so wide as the interspaces,

which are broad and rather massive; habit of growth un-

known. Zooecia short-ovate, smooth, flattish, bordered by

a raised line ; orifice arched above, lower margin straight, with

a small central sinus, the front wall (in the adult state) carried

up on each side of it and terminating above in a somewhat

pointed extremity, hollowed out below it ; a spine immediatel

above each lateral prolongation of the front wall; usually on

the front of the cell a slender elongated avicularium with pointed

mandible, frequently placed transversely, but sometimes

directed downwards ; many stout processes distributed over

the zoarium, standing out at right angles to its surface, and

bearing a large pointed avicularium on one side. Oowcéa im-

mersed, subglobose, smooth, hollowed out in front. Dorsal

surface divided into numerous distinct areas, bounded by raised

lines, each bearing one or more of the elongate avicularia.

Rey. T. Hincks on the Genus Retepora. 359

Locality. South Australia*.

In this species the characters of the mouth are very distinc-

tive. The shape and the minute marginal slit and the way

in which the cell-wall in the adult is carried up on each side

of it and hollowed out in front are all very characteristic

points. The aviculariwm on the front of the cell is a very

constant feature; it is sometimes depressed and sometimes

slightly elevated above the surface.

Perhaps, however, the most marked peculiarity is to be

found in the tessellated condition of the dorsal surface. It is

mapped out into distinct areas, each bounded by a raised line,

and is covered with great numbers of the pointed avicularia,

similar to those which are so abundant on the front of the

zoarlum,

5. Retepora robusta, n. sp. (Pl. XVIII. fig. 9, 10.)

Zoartum thick and massive. Jenestre elongate-oval, large,

separated by very wide and solid interspaces; habit of growth

unknown. Zoowcia regularly rhomboidal, surrounded by raised

lines, which terminate above on a level with the inferior mar-

gin of the orifice; surface smooth, uneven, often depressed in

thecentre. Orifice arched above; lower margin almost straight;

no sinus ; occasionally a small oval avicularium placed trans-

versely immediately under the lower lip, or upon it; on the

front of most of the cells a somewhat tongue-shaped avicu-

larium, pointing straight downwards, or sometimes placed

obliquely, often occupying its central depression. Oowcia

Dorsal surface vibicate, with scattered small avicu-

laria,

Locality. South Australia.

This species is distinguished from all the preceding by its

massive zoarium and large reticulations. The meshes are

much elongated and the inosculating branches of remarkable

width and solidity.

There are points of agreement between it and Macgilli-

vray’s R. porcellana. But as he has not given us a detailed

account of its minute structure, or a figure, it is impossible

to decide whether such agreement implies specific identity.

His description of the avicularium which occurs towards the

middle of the cell in R. porcellana, as having a “short man-

dible,” is sufficiently vague; but, so far as it goes, it does not

apply to that of the present form, which is elongate and

tongue-shaped.,

* T am indebted for most of my Australian specimens to my friend

H, R. W. Lemann, Esq., of Bath.

360 Rey. T. Hincks on the Genus Retepora.

The very regular rhomboidal shape of the cell in R. robusta,

and the way in which its bounding lines extend only to the

inferior margin of the orifice and do not embrace the mouth

itself, are distinctive points. Its most striking characteristic,

however, is the stoutness of its habit, by which it can be at

once distinguished from all the other southern species with

which I am acquainted.

The species which follow have already been described ; but

I venture to supply a fuller account of them than we have

from the authors who have previously noticed them. In

studying this very difficult family I have vividly realized the

necessity of thorough and minute diagnosis, if we are to

escape the very serious evils of doubtful identification and a

burthensome synonymy.

1. Retepora monilifera, Macgillivray*. (Pl. XIX. figs. 1-5.)

Zoarium regularly cup-shaped, or much convoluted, and

forming a number of irregularly shaped cavities, the smuous

and anastomosing walls of which give a very intricate appear-

ance to the surface; surface minutely granulated. enestre

very small, narrow-oval ; interspaces broad. Zoowcia sub-

cylindrical, distinct, flattish ; orifice (primary) arched above,

slightly curved outwards below, broader below than above,

with a minute sinus on the inferior margin ; secondary orifice

(formed by the elevation of the cell-wall) orbicular, with a

deep looped sinus in front, on each side of which is an as-

cending process, one of the two bearing on its inner side a

small avicularium, the mandible directed upwards ; a tall and

stout jointed spine on one side just above the avicularium.

Small oval avicularia distributed over the zoarium. Tall

and stout aviculiferous processes, expanding downwards,

often present in great numbers; the avicularium placed on

the front with a pointed mandible. Oowcia large, prominent,

subpyramidal, with a granulated rim above the upper edge of

the aperture, from the centre of which a somewhat clavate

band, also granulated or beaded, extends upwards, almost to

the top of the ovicell. Dorsal surface dense, minutely granu-

lar, slightly vibicate, with scattered small oval avicularia.

Locality. South Australia.

On the young marginal cells the primary orifice with its

minute sinus is met with; in the older portions of the colony

#* “Notes on the Cheilostomatous Polyzoa of Victoria and other parts

of Australia,” by P, H. Macgillivray, A.M., M.R.C.S. (Trans, Phil. Inst.

of Victoria, vol. iv. 1860, p. 168, pl. iii. figs. 6-9),

Rev. T. Hincks on the Genus Retepora. 361

it 1s almost entirely concealed by the secondary orifice. In

this we find the characteristic orbicular shape, the large loop-

like sinus, and the marginal processes and avicularium. The

remarkable spine (Pl. XIX. fig. 3) which rises on one side

of the orifice seems to have escaped observation. Its struc-

ture is peculiar. At the base it is articulated by a corneous

joint to a small tubular process on the margin, and is com-

posed of a number of segments or pieces, each of which is

contracted below and expands upward, and seems to fit into

the one beneath it; so that the spine presents an uneven out-

line and has the appearance of being jointed at pretty regular

intervals. The large aviculiferous processes are often present

in profusion and give a very marked character to the zoarium ;

occasionally, however, they are scantily developed. The

variety of the avicularian appendages in this species is re-

markable. In addition to those which have been described,

there is occasionally a gigantic avicularium, exceeding the

zoocecium in length, which occupies an elevated space at the

top of the fenestre, with a much elongated subspatulate man-

dible directed obliquely downwards. ‘ihis is sometimes re-

placed by a very curious form, which I have not met with

elsewhere. It is narrow-elliptical in shape, usually large,

with a very solid semielliptical mandible, of a dark horn-

colour (Pl. XIX. fig. 5). This form, I believe, is really an

aborted condition of the gigantic avicularium just described,

and consists essentially of the basal portion of the latter minus

the long mandible. 1 was at one time induced to think that

the form with the gigantic avicularia should be accounted

distinct; but in its minute characters it agrees with the

present species. It is perhaps worthy of being distinguished

as 2. monilifera, var. munita.

lt should be noted that the aspect of the cell, and especially

of its oral aperture, is subject to great variations, corre-

sponding with the stages of growth and development. After

the formation of the secondary orifice has been commenced,

its sinus appears as a very small slit almost closed above,

and the avicularium lies transversely on the margin beside it,

without being elevated, as it is subsequently, on a mucronate

process.

The peculiar structure of the ovicell, which has suggested

the specific name, seems to be due to the filling-in of the fissure,

which exists in the usual condition on the younger cells, with

a granulated calcareous plate. ‘The oocecia are commonly

developed in such quantities as almost to conceal the surface

of the zoarium ; and this profusion may perhaps be accounted

a specific character.

362 Rev. T. Hincks on the Genus Retepora.

R. monilifera affords a very striking illustration of the

diversities in the habit of growth which are so characteristic

of the present family. So utterly different in aspect are its

simply caliculate and its convoluted and chambered variety,

that it is difficult to believe that they are reterable to one

and the same species. I was at first so completely deceived

by the very distinctive habit of the latter, combined with

some other trifling peculiarities, that I had marked it as a

new species, under the name of Lf. contortuplicata.

2. Retepora phenicea, Busk *.

Zoartum of a rich red colour, irregularly cup-shaped,

variously contorted, the edges of the lamina sometimes uniting

so as to form cylindrical cavities. Jenestre small, oval, the

inosculating branches broad and rather massive. Zooacia

rhomboidal or irregularly ovate, commonly enlarged aboye,

narrowed downwards, and truncate at the bottom, flat, with

a conspicuous line and a few very large punctures round

the edge; surface smooth and polished; orifice orbicu-

lar ; peristome raised and somewhat thickened, subtubular,

slightly bent forwards, the margin often serrulate; some-

times a minute circular orifice in the centre, immediately

below it; a depression on the front of the cell below the

mouth, from which a pointed avicularium extends upwards to

the lower margin. Dorsal surface solid, smooth or minutely

warty, strongly vibicate, and generally destitute of avicularia.

Ooecia globose, subimmersed ; surface entire, smooth and

shining, hollowed out in front, the fissure being filled in by

a thick opercular plate, which is prolonged below within the

orifice.

Locality. South Australia, Adelaide and Glenelg.

Mr. Busk has characterized R. phenicea with his accus-

tomed accuracy ; but as his description is very concise, in har-

mony with the plan of his work, it may not be superfluous to

furnish a further account of it.

To the elements of beauty which are common to the tribe,

the charm of rich colouring is superadded in the present

species; and its fine red tint is well preserved in fresh un-

bleached specimens. The cell exhibits strongly marked cha-

racters, but is subject to a certain amount of variation. The

subtubular peristome is sometimes wanting, and the orbicular

orifice, with its slightly thickened rim, is on a level with the

surface. The edge is often entire and shows no trace of ser-

rulation. ‘The minute central foramen below the mouth I have

* Cat. Marine Pol. part ii. p. 94, pl. exxi. figs. 1, 2,

Rev. T. Hincks on the Genus Retepora. 363

not always been able to detect, even when it is not concealed

by the apex of the suboral avicularium. The latter is not

always present ; but it must be accounted a characteristic fea-

ture of the species. It is immersed, extending from a depres-

sion situated about halfway down the cell, or less, to the lower

margin of the mouth, on which its pointed extremity rests.

It is rounded below and is furnished with a short mandible,

very broad at the base, and tapering to a fine point. Very

characteristic also is the flat, smooth, polished and tinted

surface of the cell, bordered by a distinct raised white line,

and sparsely punctured round the edge. The punctures or

foramina are of very considerable size; two are generally

placed side by side at the bottom of the cell.

I have examined many fragments of this fine species; but

the only perfect specimen which I possess is of a compressed

cup-shape, with the lamina gracefully curved and the margin

sinuated. The cup is much flattened at one side; and on the

other side, which is greatly produced, it widens out and then

terminates in a pointed spout-like projection. The height 1s

half an inch, andthe width aninch. ‘Lhe formis a singularly

elegant one, even for a Retepore; but in this genus the habit

of growth is so variable that it cannot be relied on as a

specific character.

3. ? Retepora granulata, Macgillivray. (Pl. XIX. figs. 13-15.)

Zoarium cup-shaped, thick. Fenestre very small, oval or

subrotund, much narrower than the very broad interspaces.

Zooecia rhomboid, flat, lined round, the surface covered with

granules, which often form a border or edging round the upper

margin of the mouth; orifice suborbicular, somewhat ex-

tended transversely ; peristome not raised; frequently one or

two small oval or subcircular avicularia placed transversely

immediately below the inferior margin ; many such avicularia

scattered over the surface of the cells; numerous blunt and

low mamillz distributed over the zoarium, bearing on the

upper side an avicularium with broad triangular mandible.

Ooecta large, prominent, subglobose, surface granular, no

fissure. Dorsal surface indistinctly vibicate, with scattered

circular avicularia, sometimes absent.

Locality. South Australia.

This is probably the R. granulata of Macgillivray—though,

in the absence of a sufficiently minute diagnosis of the latter,

I hardly venture to identify the two with certainty. Amongst

my specimens there is much difference in the degree in which the

surface is granulated. In some cases the cells are almost

smooth; in others the surface is thickly studded with small

364 Rey. T. Hincks on the Genus Retepora.

glossy granules. Round the upper part of the orifice they

are frequently of larger size, and are ranged in line and placed

close together, so as to have much the appearance of rudi-

mentary spines.

The oocecium in R&. granulata is described as ‘“ immersed

and granular ;” in my specimens it is closely united to the

cells about it, and the base may be slightly immersed, but

its striking characteristics are its massiveness and prominence.

It stands out boldly from the surface of the cell, sometimes

smooth, sometimes much roughened and bearing several of the

small avicularia. ‘The minute characters of the zoocecium and

its orifice are not included in Macgillivray’s diagnosis. In most

of the cells of the form which I have in view an oval avicula-

rium, set transversely, occurs immediately under the lower mar-

gin of the orifice, placed towards one side. Sometimes a second

is present. Great numbers of similar avicularia are distributed

over the cells, whilst the aviculiferous mamille, very dif-

ferent from the tall acuminate processes which occur on other

species, thickly stud the surface of the zoarium. The inoscu-

lating branches are very thick and massive, and the meshes

small and often suborbicular in shape.

Macgillivray describes the zoarium of his 2. granulata as

“expanded, foliaceous, convoluted.”” The habit of growth,

as I have already remarked, has no specific significance in

this tribe; but the fragments of the present species which

I have examined show it to be caliculate and occasionally

to form subcylindrical cavities.

4, Retepora cellulosa, Smitt *.

This species has a wide range. It occurs in the Arctic seas

and in the Mediterranean, but has not been obtained, so far

as I know, on our own coasts. Darwin took it off Cape

Horn Macgillivray, a slender variety of it, in Australia ;

Hutton records it from New Zealand. I have a characteristic

specimen from South Australia.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PLATE XVIII.

Fig. 1. Retepora Couchii, Hincks: natural size.

Fig. 2. The same.

Fig. 3. A portion of the zoarium, front surface, magnified.

Fig. 4. A portion of the zoarium, dorsal surface, magnified.

Fig. 5. A single zoocecium, magnified.

Fig. 6. One of the larger avicularia.

* Kritisk Forteckn. ofver Skandinaviens Hafs-Bryozoer, ivy. (1868)

pp. 34, 203, pl. xxviii, figs, 222-225.

On new Species of Heteropterous Hemiptera. 365

Fig. 7. Retepora plana, Hincks: portion of the front surface, magnified.

4g. 8. The same: portion of the dorsal surface, magnified.

Fig. 9. Retepora robusta, Hincks: a fragment of the zoarium, natural

size.

Fig. 10, The same: portion of the front surface, magnified.

PruatE XIX.

Fig. 1. Retepora monilifera, Macgillivray : zoocecia, magnified.

Fig. 2. The same: a zoocecium in an earlier stage.

Fig. 3. One of the oral spines, magnified.

Fig. 4. One of the gigantic avicularia, magnified.

Fig. 5. Large elliptical avicularium, magnified.

Fig. 6. Retepora pretenuis, Hincks: portion of the front surface, magni-

fied.

Fig. 7. The same: portion of the zoarium, magnified, showing the rela-

tive width of the fenestree and the interspaces.

Fig. 8. Fragment of the zoarium, nat. size.

Fig. 9. Retepora tessellata, Hincks: front surface.

Fig. 10. The same: dorsal surface.

Fig. 11. The oocecium.

Fiy. 12. Fragment of the zoarium, nat. size.

Fig. 13. ?Retepora granulata, Macgillivray : front surface.

Fig. 14. The oocecium.

Fig. 15. Two fenestree magnified, showing the width of the interspace.

XLI.—Descriptions of new Species of Heteropterous Hemiptera

collected in the Hawaiian Islands by the Rev. T. Blackburn.

—No.2. By F. Bucwanan Wuire, M.D., F.L.S.

HAVING received from Mr. Blackburn information as to the

habits, localities, &c. (as well as more examples of some) of

the species noticed in my former paper (vol. xx. p. 110), it

will perhaps be as well to give notes on these species before

describing certain new ones since received.

In my last paper I omitted to number the species, which I

will now do.

1. Geotomus subtristis, Buchanan White.

2. Geotomus jucundus, Buchanan White.

Both widely distributed and pretty common, living under

stones and about the roots of herbage, and not confined to the

mountains.

3. Triphleps persequens, Buchanan White.

Three specimens only found.

4, Cardiastethus mundulus, Buchanan White.

Not rare about the outside of roofs of houses.

366 Dr. F. B. White on new Species

5. Nabis innotatus, Buchanan White.

The specimen from which the description was made appears

to be a pale form; in others the dark markings of the pro-

notum are more distinct, and the centre of the scutellum, as

well as the two spots near the apex of the first vein of the

corium, which are so frequently present in species of the

genus Nabis, are more or less fuscous. On the whole, how-

ever, the name “ ¢nnotatus”’ is not amiss.

Taken commonly by sweeping, but chiefly on the higher

ground.

6. Nabis subrufus, Buchanan White.

Rare. Three specimens taken singly under bark on the

; aoe 8

higher mountains.

7. Nabis? lusciosus, Buchanan White,

Appears to vary in the intensity of the markings.

Not very common. Taken by sweeping, and also under

and about bark on the higher mountains. The bark-fre-

quenting propensity of this and the preceding species is, |

think, very unusual in the genus. .

8. Luteva insolida, Buchanan White.

Common everywhere, on the lower ground, in December.

9. Merragata hebroides, Buchanan White.

On small stagnant pools formed by the temporary overflow

of streams on the higher mountains. When the pools dry up,

the insect frequents the holes where the water has been.

10. Corixa Blackburnt, Buchanan White.

Very common in salt-water pools on the sea-shore. These

pools are formed artificially for the manufacture of salt. As

the liquid becomes more dense by evaporation, the Cortxe

migrate to pools more recently filled. Some would appear,

however, to remain too long, as, in the last stage of evapora-

tion, the pools generally contain a few dead Corize. Mr.

Blackburn has hitherto failed to find any freshwater species

of this genus.

Asopide.

11. @chalia patruelis, Stal. Fe

Arma patruelis, Stal, Freg. Eug. Resa, ins. 930.3.

This species, which has not been found elsewhere, is com-

mon on forest trees at no great elevation.

of Heteropterous Hemiptera. 367

12. @ehalia pacifica, Stal.

Arma pacifica, Stal, 1. c, 221. 4.

Like the last this is also peculiar to the Hawaiian Islands.

Though widely distributed it is not common, and frequents

trees on the mountains.

Lygeide.

13. Nysius Dallast, n. sp.

N. oblongus, testaceo-flavescens, pallido-sericans ; capite vitta

laterali utrinque intra oculos et marginibus angustissimis vitte

pallide centralis, rostri apice, pronoto intra marginem anticum

et macula utrinque prope angulos posticos, scutelli basi, tarsorum

articulo primo, tertio apice unguiculisque, sterno maculis nonnul-

lis, ventre vitta laterali utrinque marginem haud attingente et

testaceo-maculata nigricantibus; antennarum articulo primo ad

apicem exteriore, secundo apice et tertio basi, margine antico

angustissimo corii, femoribus anticis maculis parvis, et tibiis apice,

fusco-brunneis; membrana albido-hyalina. Capite cum oculis

quam pronoti apex latiore ; antennis gracilibus ; rostro metaster-

num attingente, articulo primo bucculis paullo longiore; bucculis

dimidio capitis fere equilongis, retrorsum sensim humilioribus et

eyanescentibus ; pronoto apice quam basi breviore, longitudine

quam latitudine paullo minore, sat rude punctato, lateribus, im-

pressione lineari antica et vitta media levigatis, utrinque intra

angulos posticos elevatos oblique sulcato; scutello punctato sat

fortiter triradiatim rugoso; elytris basi parallelis, dein ampliatis et

rotundatis; pedibus gracilibus, tibiis apice paullo incrassatis, tarsis

posticis longis articulo primo articulis duobus ultimis ad unum

multo longiore; ventris segmentis 3 apicalibus foemine angulariter

emarginatis.

§. Long. 5, lat. 13 m.m.

Not being closely allied to any of the species in Stél’s

‘Enumeratio,’ its place is between that author’s sections

a. and aa."

This species (which I have much pleasure in dedicating

to Mr. W. 8. Dallas, the founder of the genus Nysius, and

whose ‘ List of Hemiptera in the British Museum’ is so

useful to all students of this order of insects) occurs rarely

amongst mixed herbage near the summit of a mountain-pass

known as the “ Pali,” near Honolulu.

14. Nysius delectus, n. sp.

‘NV. suboblongus, dilute flavescenti-testaceus ; antennarum articulo

primo vitta externa et articulis 3 ultimis, rostri articulis 3 ulti-

mis, capite (vitta centrali angustissima et tuberculis antenniferis

exceptis), pronoto intra marginem anticum, punctis in disco,

macula triangulari utrinque prope angulos posticos necnon margine

368 Dr. F. B. White on new Species

postico ante scutellum, scutello (lateribus apiceque exceptis),

corii margine antico angustissimo, lineis interruptis ad venas,

maculis nonnullis in disco, et margine apicali plus minus inter-

rupto, clavyi sutura commissuraque, femorum maculis seepe con-

fluentibus presertim superne, tibiarum basi apice et linea angus-

tissima ad marginem anticum, tarsorum articulo primo apice et

articulo tertio unguiculisque, sterno (incisuris exceptis), abdo-

minis ‘marginibus posticis segmentorum 3 ultimorum saltem in

medio, genitalibusque nigris vel piceo-nigris ; antennarum articulo

secundo apice imo pallido et articulo tertio apice dilutiore ; ooulis

rufo-brunneis; membrana albido-hyalina. Capite cum oculis

apice pronoti latiore, dense pallido-sericante; antennis sat graci-

libus, articulo secundo tertio longiore, tertio quartoque zquilongis;

rostro metasternum attingente, articulo primo bucculas superante ;

bucculis fere dimidio capitis equilongis, retrorsum sensim humi-

lioribus et evanescentibus ; pronoto pallido-sericante rude punc-

tato, vitta media, impressione lineari antica, lateribus, et enemies

posticis leevigatis, sat brevi, margine antico quam margo posticus 2 a

breviore, longitudine quam latitudo postica disdincte minore, mar-

gine postivo utrinque intra angulos posticos elevatos sulea obliqua

instructo ; scutello pallido-sericante et rude punctato, ruga sat

elevata levigata; elytris parce sericantibus, basi parallelis, dein

ampliato-dilatatis et sensim rotundatis; tibiis apice clavatis,

tarsorum articulis primo tertioque apice incrassatis; margine

exteriore calloso orificiorum auriculato-prominulo; ventris seg-

mentis 3 ultimis foemine angulariter emarginatis; sterno ventre-

que dense pallido-sericantibus.

det. Long. 5-6, lat. 2-2} m.m.

Somewhat allied to the preceding species, which, however,

differs in its more slender form, longer and more graceful

antenne and legs, as well as in the coloration.

Widely distributed (but not very common) on the moun-

tains, and generally taken by beating.

15. Nysius arboricola, n. sp.

NV. oblongus, testaceus, nitidus, glaber; capite, rostri apice, vitta

laterali utrinque, corpore subtus, scutelli basi lateribusque nigris ;

antennis totis dilute et articuli primi maculis obscurioribus, rostro

apicem yersus, oculis, callis transversis intra marginem anticum

pronoti et angulis posticis, scutelli ruga callosa (apice imo ex-

cepto), corii venis, maculis 2 magnis triangularibus ad marginem

apicalem et apice, femorum maculis nonnullis, tibiis apice imo, et

tarsorum articulis apice plus minus brunneis vel fusco-brunneis ;

orificiis et maculis connexivi rufo-flayidis; membrana albido-

hyalina. Capite ruguloso, cum oculis pronoti apice paullo latiore ;

antennis sat brevibus rostro brevioribus, articulo secundo tertio

longiore ; rostro metasternum attingente, articulo primo bucculis

subeequilongo; bucculis basin capitis fere attingentibus, pone

of Heteropterous Hemiptera. 369

medium retrorsum sensim humilioribus; pronoto rude punctato,

callo transverso antico et angulis posticis subelevatis levigatis, mar-

gine antico quam margo posticus paullo breviore, longitudine quam

latitudo postica + minore ; scutello fortiter triradiatim calloso-

rugoso, ad latera punctato ; elytris fere a basi sensim rotundatis

et subampliatis, sutura clayi distincte biseriatim punctata; pedi-

, bus subcrassis, tibiis apice et tarsorum articulis subclavatis.

Q. Long. 4, lat. 14 m.m.

Apparently allied in some respects to N. helveticus, H.-S.

As yet rare, only two specimens having been taken. These

were beaten from trees (one in May, the other in July), some

miles apart, high up in the mountainous district.

16. Nystus caenosulus, Stal.

Nysius coenosulus, Stil, 1. c. 243, 59.

The specimens which I refer to this species do not alto-

gether agree with Stal’s description, as the scutellum is only

black in part, the apex of the second joint of the antenne

and the inner vein of the corium are not markedly dark, the

mesosternum is sulcate, and the whole animal is more hairy.

Still I think that they are properly referred here. N. cano-

sulus is peculiar to the Hawaiian Islands.

Rather common on and about a small plant that grows in

sandy places on the sea-shore.

17. Pamera nigriceps, Dall.

Rhyparochromus nigriceps, Dall. List, ii. 577. 47.

A common species on low plants and under stones &c., but

not occurring below about 1000 feet above sea-level. This

species is reported also from the Philippine Islands, Taiti,

and New Zealand. The last-mentioned locality is on the

authority of Dr. Mayr (‘ Novara’ Hemiptera, p. 128) ; and I

think it is just possible that a mistake may have occurred,

though Dr. Mayr is so good a hemipterologist that I have

much hesitation in suggesting this. ‘The reasons I have for

thinking there may be a mistake are these :—Dr. Mayr records

nigriceps from New Zealand under the name Plociomerus

nigriceps, with the remark that it seems to unite the charac-

ters of both Paromius and Plociomerus. Paromius, it may

be mentioned, is synonymic with Pamera in part. Now there

is a New-Zealand Plociomerus (which I have described under

the name P. Douglas’) which very much resembles Pamera

nigriceps, and which, if Dr. Mayr had only Mr. Dallas’s

description of the latter species (written when it alone was

known) before him, it is not difficult to imagine that a mis-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 25

370 Dr. F. B. White on new Species

take may have occurred. Nigriceps, however, distinctly he-

longs to Pamera, and Douglasi to Plociomerus. Plociomerus

Douglasi is, moreover, a smaller and a darker-coloured insect.

18. Clerada apicicornis, Sign.

Clerada apicicornis, Sign. in Maillard, Notes sur Vile de la Réunion,

Ins. 28, pl. 20. 8.

Taken by beating dead branches of a species of palm in

mountain forests. This insect is rather widely distributed,

occurring in Réunion, Bengal, Celebes, Cuba, and Venezuela.

It is now recorded for the first time as a native of the

Hawaiian Islands. In Walker’s catalogue it is described

from Celebes under the name Grastrodes terminalis ; or, at

least, the species so named is not separable by the description

from Clerada apicicornis.

RECLADA, gen. nov.

Corpus anguste ovatum, depressum. Caput porrectum, thoraci fere

eequilongum, ad oculos haud immersum, parte postoculari cylin-

drica, utrinque pone oculos ocellos ferente. Buccule elevate.

Rostrum pedes anticos attingens, articulis primo et secundo ad

unum parti anteoculari capitis subequilongis, articulo secundo

primo breviore. Antennz articulo primo capite breviore, hujus

apicem tamen superante. Pronotum transversum, trapezoideum,

antrorsum angustatum, marginibus lateralibus acutis reflexis,

medio levissime sinuatis, margine basali recto. Scutellum trian-

gulare subsquilaterum, commissura clavi fere duplo longius.

Hemelytra completa, margine costali leviter rotundato, margine

apicali in medio sinuato deinde sensim sed distincte ad apicem

commissure rotundato. Membrane vene haud bene discrete.

Pedes mediocres, femoribus inermibus, anticis vix incrassatis,

tarsis posticis articulo primo apicalibus duobus simul sumptis

longitudine fere equali.

Genus Clerade Sign. maxime affine, structura rostri et

hemelytrorum distinctum.

19. Reclada mesta, n. sp.

. obscure ferruginea, supra subtusque distincte et dense punctata ;

rostro, tarsis, membranaque pallidioribus ; corii maculis in disco

et ad marginem apicalem indistincte fuscis.

3. Long. 3}, lat. 13 m.m.

Rare. Circumstances of capture unfortunately not noted.

METRARGA, gen. nov.

Corpus ovato-oblongum, supra planum, subtus convexum. Caput

subquadrilaterum, fere ad oculos immersum, antice compressum,

of Heteropterous Hemiptera. 371

vertice valde convexo-elevato. Oculi parvi, retrorsum curvati.

Ocelli prope basin capitis siti. Rostrum pedes posticos attingens,

articulo primo capiti equilongo. Antenne dimidio corporis equi-

longee; plus dimidio articuli primi apicem Capitis superans ;

tubercula antennifera extus valde spinosa. Pronotum trans-

versum, angulis anticis prominulis, marginibus lateralibus cari-

natis subacutis in medio sinuatis, angulis posticis calloso-promi-

nulis, basi fere recta. Scutellum paullo longius quam latius,

leviter elevato-marginatum. Hemelytra completa, margine an-

tico rotundato, explanato et subreflexo, margine apicali angulum

interiorem versus fortiter sinuato, angulo exteriore producto,

Pedes mediocres, coxis posticis haud remotis, femoribus iner-

mibus vix incrassatis, tarsis posticis articulo primo duobus ulti-

mis simul sumptis fere equilongo. Ventris segmentorum omnium

margines postici recti et latera attingentes, spiraculis tribus

ultimis in ventre sitis, ceteris obscuris.

Type M. nuda, n.sp. Affinity doubtful.

20. Metrarga nuda, n. sp.

M. fusco-brunnea, capillis brevissimis depressis parce vestita ; pro-

noti linea centrali subelevata et angulis posticis, scutelli apice

imo, pedibusque albido-testaceis, his piceo-nigro annulatis ; an-

tennis rostroque pallide rufo-brunneis, illis articulo primo basi

apiceque et articulo secundo apice dilutioribus, hoc apice nigro ;

oculis rufo-brunneis ; corii margine antico vitta latissima inde-

terminata irregulariter albido-testaceo maculata, margine imo

hinc illine piceo-notato ; membrana fusca maculis plurimis parvis

pallidis notata. Capite pronotoque dense et sat rude punctatis ;

tuberculis antenniferis extrorsum dente acuto instructis ; antenna-

rum gracilium articulo primo sat crasso leviter curvato, articulo

tertio secundo paullo breviore, quarto fusiformi; pronoti linea

media subelevata, impressione lineari antica et angulis posticis

levigatis, angulis anticis dentato-prominulis, lobo antico ad

latera subdepresso, marginibus lateralibus in medio sinuato-

emarginatis, margine antico quam basis paullo breviore ; scutello

fortiter punctato, apice levigato, basi depresso, ruga longitudinali

subelevata instructo ; elytris apicem abdominis paullo superanti-

bus dense sed subtiliter punctatis, membrana venis 5 instructis,

vena quarta furcata; pedibus sat brevibus haud gracilibus; sterno

rude punctato.

do. Long. 8, lat. pone medium 43 m.m.

Only two specimens found, and the circumstances of capture

not noted.

21. Metrarga villosa, n. sp.

M. obovata, testaceo-brunnea, villis brevibus depressis dilutioribus

densissime vestita ; capite nigro, clypeo et tuberculis antenniferis

pallidis ; antennarum articulo secundo rufo-brunneo basi apice-

25*

372 Dr. F. B, White on new Species

que dilutioribus, tertio quartoque fusco-brunneis; rostro apice

nigro; elytris irregulariter fusco-brunneo notatis, margine antico

distinctius maculato ; membrana fusca; pedibus albido-testaceis

fusco-nigro annulatis, tarsis fusco-brunneis. Capite subtiliter

punctato, tuberculis antenniferis extrorsum dente subobtuso ar-

matis; antennarum articulo primo sat crasso, secundo tertioque

- subequilongis, quarto fusiformi; pronoto subtiliter punctato,

impressione lineari antica et angulis posticis levigatis, margini-

bus lateralibus sinuatis antice elevatis, margine antico in medio

calloso-tuberculato ad latera depresso, disco utrinque callo lon-

gitudinali instructo, basi apiceque fere eequilatis ; scutello rude

punctato, basi media depresso, ruga longitudinali elevata in-

structo; membrana parva apicem abdominis haud superante, pone

apicem corii parum extensa, venis haud bene discretis; sterno

punctato.

3. Long. 5-53, lat. pone medium 23-3 m. m.

Apart from its villosity and smaller size, the different struc-

ture of the pronotum and of the membrane at once distin-

guishes this from the preceding species.

Not rare among rotten leaves &c. at the foot of a precipice

on the mountains five or six miles from Honolulu.

Capside.

22. Capsus pellucidus, Stil.

Capsus pellucidus, Stal, 1. c. 255. 92.

A common species, but peculiar to the Hawaiian Islands.

Anthocoride.

23. Cardiastethus sodalis, n. sp.

C. rufo-brunneus, capillis pallidis vestitus ; oculis et lobo postico

pronoti nigro-piceis ; antennis, pedibus elytrisque luteo-brunneis ;

clavi apice cuneoque presertim ad apicem brunneo-fuscis; anten-

narum articulis secundo apice, tertio quartoque, capite inter

oculos, membranaque fuscis,

Long. circa 23 m. m.

Rather closely allied to C. rufescens, Costa (=testaceus,

Perris), which, however, is larger and differently coloured ;

much more closely related to C. bicolor, Buchanan White,

from St. Helena. C. bicolor, however, is a shade larger,

more evidently punctate and more thickly clothed with hair,

and differs besides in the colour of the anterior lobe of the

pronotum and scutellum and in the markings of the elytra.

Not very common, about the outside of the roofs of houses

in company with C. mundulus.

of Heteropterous Hemiptera. 373

Acanthiide.

24. Acanthia lectularia, L.

An introduced species, and far too common.

Saldide.

25. Salda exulans, n. sp.

S. nigra, subnitida, brevissime nigro-griseo pubescens ; maculis 2

parvis anticis capitis, rostro, antennarum articulo basali (apice

excepto), pronoti marginibus angustis lateralibus (margine imo et

angulis posticis exceptis), marginibus acetabulorum pedibusque

(coxis basi, femoribus tibiis tarsisque apice exceptis), clavi

macula pone medium, corii margine antico lato, maculis 2 et

linea longitudinali inter marginem et venam primam, illius

interne linea ad dimidium apicale, maculis 3 et dimidio apicali

marginis interioris, necnon membrane areolis 3 exterioribus plus

minus sordide brunneo-albidis. Capite quam apex pronoti latiore ;

pronoti latitudine postica quam longitudo media triplo majore, mar-

gine postico quam margo anticus plus duplo longiore, callo antico

mediocri in medio foveolato, marginibus lateralibus rectis, margine

postico late et sat profunde sinuato ante scutellum ; scutelli depres-

sione media mediocri; elytrorum margine antico distinctissime

rotundato ; membrana parva, areolis 4 instructa; antennis pedi-

busque gracilibus ; alis brevibus.

3. Long. 4, lat. pone medium 2 m.m.

Belongs to section e of Stal’s ‘Enumeratio,’ and is re-

motely allied to S. coxalis, Stal.

Sparingly in wet moss in one place on the mountains near

the “ Pali.”

Nabida.

26. Nabis Blackburn, n. sp.

N. elongato-oblongus, griseo-testaceus, parce pallido-pubescens ;

capite vitta’ medio latiore, pronoto cicatriculis anticis vittulaque

disci longitudinali, in collo latiore quam in lobo postico et in lobo

antico fere geminata, fusco-nigris ; lobo postico pronoti utrinque

striis 3 subobliquis obsolete fuscescentibus, exterioribus angulum

posticum yersus distinctioribus ; abdominis dorso nigro-fusco ;

capitis lateribus subtus, sterni vitta laterali et maculis in medio,

ventrisque vitta lata laterali aliaque angustiore media nigris ;

antennis pedibusque corpori concoloribus, antennarum articulo

secundo apice nigro, articulis duobus ultimis fusco-brunneis ;

femoribus maculis plurimis et lincolis transversis, tibiis punctis

indistinctis, tarsorum articulis apice fusco-brunneis; elytris

apicem abdominis paullo superantibus griseo-testaceis, costis

dilutioribus irregulariter fusco-cinctis, interstitiis hine inde

374 “Mr. E. L. Layard on new Species

fusco-brunneo maculatis, corii vena exteriore maculis duabus

nigro-fuscis ; membrana griseo-hyalina venis latis permultis fus-

cis, basi extus puncto nigro notata; connexivo pallido stria

interiore longitudinali sanguinea notato. Capite pronoto bre-

viore; antennarum articulo primo capite breviore; femoribus

anticis capite et pronoto simul sumptis brevioribus; pronoto

postice sat fortiter ampliato, basi fere zeque lato ac longa.

3. Long. 73-8 m.m. Abdomen vix duplo longius quam latius.

Allied to N. punctipes, Reuter, but differmg by its larger

size, and in other respects as noted above.

Common amongst long grass in damp hollows on the higher

mountains.

Veliid ee.

27. Microvelia vagans, n. sp.

M. fusco-nigra, pilis brevissimis fusco-brunneis densissime vestita ;

pronoti margine antico macula latera haud attingente, et margine

postico, necnon connexivo (margine imo excepto) luteo-fulvis ;

antennarum articulis duobus primis fusco-brunneis, primo basi

dilutiore et apice obscuriore; pedibus obscure fusco-brunneis,

femoribus dimidio basali fusco-lutescentibus; capite utrinque

ad oculos vitta angusta capillorum argenteorum instructo; elytris

brunneo-fuscis, venis obscurioribus, maculis 5 vel 6 plus minus

albidis notatis ; corpore subtus nigro, pilis argenteis vestito.

3 et 2. Long. 3-33, lat. 1 m.m.

Not uncommon on running water.

XLIT.—Descriptions of new Species of Birds from the Island

of Lifu, New Caledonia. By H. L. Layarp, C.B., H.B.M.

Consul, Noumea, New Caledonia.

Turdus Pritzbuert, Layard, n. sp.

d. Entire head, chin, throat, upper part of cheek very pale

sepia; the whole of the rest of the body, above and below,

very dark sepia, some of the feathers of the abdomen having

paler sepia edges. Bill, feet, and legs pale yellow.

2 like the ¢, but the crown of the head and lower portion

of the chest brownish, and general colour of body not so dark.

Juv. Top of the head brown, spotted with rufous ; under-

parts deep rufous, spotted and wregularly marked with small

broken bars of dark sepia.

3. Length 8", wing 3” 7”, tail 3” 3’”, tarsi 1” 2’”-25,

bill 13”.

Hab. Lifu, New Caledonia.

of Birds from New Caledonia. 375

Pachycephala Littayet, Layard, n. sp.

3. Upper three fourths of head jet-black ; chin and throat

pure white, succeeded by a broad black collar; all the rest of

the lower parts rich gamboge-yellow ; upper plumage yel-

lowish green; wing- and tail-feathers greenish brown, the

former edged externally with yellowish green.

‘Length 7" 6", wing 37 10", tail 3” 2”, tarsi 13’", bill 12°”.

2 unknown.

Hab. Lifu, New Caledonia.

Zosterops minuta, Layard, n. sp.

Upper parts all a bright yellow tinged with green, brightest

on the front of the head; forehead, as far as the eyes, bright

yellow; eyelids white, as usual, but with a narrow black

line under the lower lid; chin, throat, breast, abdomen, and

under tail-coverts bright yellow; flanks and sides of abdo-

men buff; wing- and tail-feathers grey-brown, edged with |

bright greenish yellow.

Length 3” 8”, wing 2” 1", tail 1" 6", tarsi 8!", bill 6”.

Hab. Lifu, New Caledonia.

Zosterops tnornata, Layard, n. sp.

Head dull green; black dark sepia, faintly tinged with

green. No white eyelid visible. Wing- and tail-feathers

same as the back, but edged on the outside with green ;

chin greyish; throat and breast dirty greenish. Sides of

breast sepia-brown ; flanks inclining to buff. Abdomen pale

sepia. Upper mandible dark brown ; lower pale. Bill very

strong and sharp-pointed.

Length 5" 6", wing 3" 1", tail 2" 4", tarsi 11, bill 11/”,

Hab. Lifu, New Caledonia.

Its sombre lining renders this bird difficult of description ;

but on comparison with any other species the differences are

very marked.

Erythrura cyanofrons, Layard, n. sp.

General colour above and below green, rather lighter than

in £. psittacea; rump, upper tail-coverts, tail-feathers dull

scarlet, not nearly so bright as in #. psittacea. ‘Two central

tail-feathers elongated. Forehead and cheeks bright blue, and

a black mark over the lores. Bill black.

Length 5", wing 2" 3!", tail 2" 3!, tarsi 7", bill 6”.

Hab. Lifu, New Caledonia.

376 Mr. H. J. Carter on Purisiphonia Clarkei.

XLI.—Emendatory Description of Purisiphonia Clarkei.

Bk., a Hexactinellid Fossil Sponge from N.W. Australia.

By H. J. Carter, F.R.S. &c.

Iy the month of May 1869 the late Dr. Bowerbank published

a description, with microscopic structure, of a fossil hexacti-

nellid sponge from N.W. Australia, to which he gave the

name of Puristphonia Clarkez, after the Rev. W. B. Clarke,

F.G.S8., who found the specimen at Wollumbilla in Queens-

land (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1869, p. 342, pl. xxv. figs. 6 and 7) ;

and in May 1870, Charles Moore, Esq., F.G.8., gave a figure

of the entire specimen, with Dr. Bowerbank’s description

(‘Australian Mesozoic Geology and Paleontology,” Quart.

Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxvi., May 1870, p. 235, and pp. 240-

242, pl. xvii. fig. 1).

In October 1877, while going over some of the late Dr.

Bowerbank’s collections, I found a specimen of this sponge,

and, not having observed any allusion to it in Prof. Zittel’s

“Studien iiber fossile Spongien” (Hexactinellida), transl.

‘ Annals,’ 1877, vol. xx. p. 257 et seqqg., I mentioned the fact

to him, which he acknowledged to be the case, and suggested

my writing a new description of Purtsiphonia Clarke, for

which he kindly supplied me with the references.

It was not, however, until February 1878, that I obtained

Mr. Moore’s address, when he informed me that the original

specimen had been sent back to Sydney, but that he had two

small portions of it, which, together with a copy of his paper,

he subsequently forwarded to me. Thus with the three frag.

ments, each of which is about two inches square and the

whole thickness of the sponge, viz. about half an inch, I have,

together with Mr. Moore’s figure, every thing that is neces-

sary for description, saving the figure of the sponge entire,

which, if yet found, has never been published.

Purisiphonia Clarket, Bk.

Fossil siliceous. Entire specimen consisting of an irregular

triangular portion about 4 inches square and half an inch

thick, more or less curved, so as to give the idea of having

once formed part of a hollow sponge, which had grown out

here and there into processes, as indicated by three large

holes (one of which is 2 inches in diameter), whose external

edge, respectively, is raised above the common level of the

specimen, indicative not only of the outside of the sponge,

but of its having grown outwards in this direction. What

these processes were like, viz. whether short or long, open or

closed, the specimen does not reveal. Colour ochre-yellow,

Mr. H. J. Carter on Purisiphonia Clarkei. 377

where the structure is still filled with siliceous grit, but whitish

grey where it has been emptied by means of acid of the calcare-

ous material that originally filled this part (Moore, /. c. p. 235).

Surface undulatory on both sides. Pores, which are organs

of the sarcode, of course, in like manner, absent. Oscules

very numerous, averaging }> inch in diameter and about the

same distance apart, more or less regularly disposed over each

surface, expanded at the outlet, and bridged over by reticu-

lated spiculous structure, which divides the subjacent large

aperture into several smaller ones, and in some instances,

from its regularity, presents a septate or stelliform figure ;

followed by their respective canal-systems, which, descending

vertically and branching out towards the opposite sides of the

sponge, end just under the surface in the intervals between

the oscules; thus the excretory canal-systems, connected with

the oscules on one side, terminate on a level with the oscules

on the other side of the sponge, and vice versd@, where proba-

bly, in the living state, the pores of the dermal sarcode opened

into them: sometimes two systems may be seen, side by side,

reversed in this way. Internal structure made up of straight

spiculiferous bundles, averaging half an inch in length, which

cross each other at different angles in all directions, in the midst

of minute vitreous reticulation, the whole cemented together

into a common mass by silicified sarcode, traversed by the

excretory canal-systems above mentioned. Spiculiferous bun-

dles composed of fine, smooth, long, linear spicules, arranged

parallel to each other, and surrounded generally by silicified

sarcode, or united together in smaller bundles, separately, by

the silicified sarcode being disposed in the form of transverse

bars, so as to present a ladder-like appearance. Reticulated

structure consisting of small sexradiates, united arm to arm

and to the spiculiferous bundles by the silicified sarcode,

which is more or less spined throughout, and the spines in

some instances multifid. Spicules, for the most part, re-

placed by an axial cavity in the spiniferous silicified sareode,

which, in many parts of the skeleton, is thus rendered more

or less continuously canaliculate. Rosette globular, radiate ;

rays capitate, about 1-3000th inch in diameter. Smallest

sexradiate seen in the reticulated structure 1-75th inch in

diameter.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. Upper Oolite or Cretaceous system, in boulders with

marine shells, ‘ not uncommon” (Moore, /. c. p. 235). Wol-

lumbilla Creek, Queensland, N.W. Australia.

Obs. As the specimen of Purisiphonia Clarkei above de-

scribed is so imperfect, I prefer the term “hollow” to that of

378 Mr. H. J. Carter on Purisiphonia Clarkei.

“fistulous,” used by Dr. Bowerbank (J. c.), since the latter

implies a form which we are not justified in giving to the

only fragment of this sponge brought before the public, even

if, when entire, it could under the circumstances be called

‘*fistulous.”” That the curved state of the specimen indicates

a concavity, and that the large holes in its surface indicate

growth in these directions respectively, with a wall averaging

half an inch in thickness throughout, is all that can be said

towards a description of the entire form, whatever this here-

after may prove to be; but the forms of the same sponge are

often so varied, that the next specimen may in this respect

be totally different from the present one. In general structure

(which, where the calcareous infiltration has been dissolved out

by acid, is as beautiful and perfect almost as it ever could

have been) Puristphonia Clarket is somewhat like the speci-

men of Dactylocalyx pumiceus, Stutchbury, in the British

Museum—that is, in the general thickness of the wall and the

arrangement of the excretory canal-systems (this specimen is

circular, flat-vase-shaped, 17 inches in diameter, and about

an inch in thickness),—but in the minute structure totally

different, as it is from the structure of all other hexactinellids

with which I am acquainted, inasmuch as the bundles of

linear spicules, cutting each other in all directions at different

angles in the midst of the reticulated structure, are entirely

absent in D. pumiceus; and although somewhat resembling

those of Huplectella aspergillum, and similarly united by

Jadder-like structure, they are comparatively short and ar-

ranged in a totally different manner, never apparently cross-

ing each other at right angles. Itis true that, where the

spiculous structure bridging the oscules is rubbed off, the

surface presents the lattice-like appearance of Huplectella ; but

this is in an unnatural state, while the rest of the struc-

ture of the wall, together with its thickness, resembles that of

D. pumiceus rather than that of Euplectella.

By chance I found, under 41-inch compound power, a

microscopical fragment of the skeleton bearing a rosette, which

I now possess, mounted in balsam; and this, as above stated,

is globular, radiated, like that of Dactylocalyx subglobosus and

also D. pumiceus (‘ Annals,’ 1873, vol. xi. pl. xii. fig. 6). It

is the only instance in which I have found a rosette fossilized ;

and but for the unusually perfect state of the decalcified skeleton,

chance, and the use of a high microscopic power, this, in all

probability, would never have occurred. Still it shows that

the rosette may be preserved, although the combination of

circumstances necessary for its detection may seldom happen.

The presence of this globular radiated form of rosette, how-

Mr. C. Wachsmuth on Paleozote Crinotds. 379

ever, seems to point out that Purisiphonia did not belong to

the Huplectellide, nor to the hexactinellids with scopuliform

spicules, as in all these, so far as my observation extends, the

rays of the rosette are arranged en fleur-de-lis.

Lastly, we learn from Mr. Moore’s paper that specimens of

this sponge are not uncommon in the calcareous boulders

which are found in the ‘brittle marl” of the Creek of Wol-

lumbilla, and among the “ grits and sandstones ”’ of the neigh-

bouring plains, indicating, from the other fossils which they

contain, and their worn state, that such boulders belong to a

drift deposit, and originally came from Upper-Oolitic and Cre-

taceous strata, which have previously existed in Australia in

their entirety, if this be not the case now, in some parts as

yet undiscovered.

XLIV.—WNotes on the Internal and External Structure of

Paleozoic Crinoids. By CHARLES WACHSMUTH*.

THE structure of fossil Crinoids has occupied the attention

of many able writers; and numerous ingenious and plausible

theories have been advanced to demonstrate the physiological

functions of the various parts of their complicated organization.

The results of investigations heretofore made have been by no

means harmonious; and newly discovered evidence renders

many of these theories wholly unsatisfactory. I have been

favoured with unusual facilities for obtaining accurate know-

ledge upon many of the questions involved in these researches,

and therefore hope that I may contribute useful information

on the subject. The collections of eighteen years at Burling-

ton, Iowa, have brought to light material, unrivalled elsewhere,

for this study. I have obtained upwards of four hundred spe-

cies of Crinoids at that locality, many of the specimens in

such a condition that not only the whole calcareous skeleton

of the animal, but even the most delicate internal organs are

preserved almost as perfectly as in those dredged from our pre-

sent seas. Careful observations, extending through many

years, and study of this material in connexion with extensive

collections from other formations, have enabled me to add to

the present knowledge of these forms many interesting and

important facts, and have led me to conclusions which I pre-

sent in the following pages.

1. The Mouth and the Tubular Skeleton below the Vault.

The apparent absence of a mouth has proved to be one of

* From ‘Silliman’s American Journal,’ August 1877.

380 Mr. C. Wachsmuth on the Internal and

the most perplexing points in the investigation of the structure

of Paleozoic Crinoids. In all Radiates (even of the most

inferior groups) this organ is located invariably at one end of

the vertical axis, although that axis or centre is not always

the centre of figure. It occupies in the recent Crinoids the

upper end of this axis; but in many at least of the Paleozoic

Crinoids, the portion of the summit where, from analogy, we

should expect to find the oral aperture is perfectly covered by

solid and immovable plates. The only aperture in connexion

with the visceral cavity is lateral or subcentral, placed out-

side of the radiation and within the interradial area, where,

from analogy, we must expect to find the anus. If, as Mr.

Billings*, Dr. Whitey, and the older writers on Crinoids sup-

posed, this aperture served both as mouth and vent, so that

these Crinoids took in their food through the anus, this stands

as the sole exception to the rule governing the class. It is

-true the Ophiurans, for instance, have no separate anal

opening, and the same aperture performs both oral and anal

functions ; but it is placed within the radial centre, and there-

fore cannot be homologized with the interradial orifice of

Paleozoic Crinoids. In Antedon rosaceus, although the nas-

cent Crinoid develops already within the pseudembryo a

separate mouth and vent, a single orifice serves for some time

both as oral and anal aperture ; yet it is the permanent mouth,

occupying the centre of the ambulacral system}. While we

thus find the mouth performing permanently or temporarily

anal functions, we have on the other hand no evidence, either

from recent nature or from embryology, that an anus ever

becomes developed into, or performs the office of, a mouth.

The Crinoids of our present seas live exclusively on micro-

scopic food; and we must expect to find that the Paleozoic

Crinoids subsisted upon very similar food and had a very

similar mode of alimentation. Whenever in Antedon alimen-

tary particles fall upon the furrows of the arms or pinnule,

they are transmitted downward along these furrows to the

mouth wherein the furrows terminate. Dr. Carpenter remarks

on this subject § :—

“The transmission of alimentary particles along the ambu-

lacral furrows is the result of the action of cilia with which

their surface is clothed. Although I have not myself suc-

* Silliman’s Journ. 1869, vol. xlviii. no. 142, p. 69.

+ Journ. Nat. Hist. Boston, 1862, vol. vii. no. 4, p. 481.

{ Sir Wyville Thomson, Phil. Trans. of the Royal Society.

§ “Researches on the Structure, Physiology, and Development of Ante-

don rosaceus.—Part I.,” by W. B. Carpenter, M.D., F.R.S. (Phil. Trans.

Roy. Soe. vol. clvi. part 2, 1866).

External Structure of Paleozoic Crinoids. 381

ceeded in distinguishing cilia on the surface which forms the

floor of these furrows, yet I have distinctly seen such a rapid

passage of minute particles along their groove as I could not

account for in any other mode, and I am therefore disposed to

believe in their existence. Such a powerful indraught, more-

over, must be produced, about the regions of the mouth, by the

action of the large cilia which fringe various parts of the in-

ternal wall of the alimentary canal, as would materially aid in

the transmission of minute particles along those portions of

the ambulacral furrows which immediately lead toward it; and

itis, I feel satisfied, by the conjoint agency of these two moving

powers that the alimentation of Anéedon is ordinarily effected.”

It appears from these observations that the mouth of Ante-

don has no special functions as such, but is merely a receiving

centre or general passage, into which the food which acci-

dentally falls into contact with the furrows of the arms or pin-

nul enters—a passage which might as well be external,

hidden beneath a vault, as open to the surrounding element,

provided the food could be brought into contact with it. The

large cilia on the inner wall of the alimentary canal, which

Dr. Carpenter describes as being capable of producing such a

powerful indraught to the region of the mouth, afford, it seems

to me, also a very satisfactory explanation of the mode by

which the transmission of food was effected in Paleozoic Cri-

noids. How much more powerful must have been the effects

of these cilia in individuals in-which mouth and furrow were

arched over and in which the current was unobstructed from

without! Considering, further, that probably the covered

parts of the food-channels themselves were fringed with cilia

of similar functions, it could have been of but little moment

how remote from the mouth the food entered. We find another

most striking example in confirmation of this supposition in

Hypomene Sarst, Lovén, a recent Cystidean, indicating, in

analogy with recent nature, that Crinoids had the mouth some-

times internal. Prof. Lovén found in the covered parts of its

channels microscopic Crustacea, larval bivalves, and other re-

mains of the food of the animal, apparently taken through the

open parts of the channels. Applying this observation to

Paleeozoic Crinoids, it seems very probable that their food was

taken up along the open parts of the arms or pinnule, and

conveyed through the closed parts to the concealed mouth.

Dr. Ludwig Schultze, in his excellent ‘ Monograph on the

Echinoderms of the Eifel’ (Vienna, 1867), was, so far as I

know, the first author who suggested the idea that all Cri-

noids which are covered on their ventral side by solid plates,

and have but one orifice, were provided with an internal

382 Mr. C. Wachsmuth on the Internal and

mouth. He further suggested that the food was conveyed by

the open food-groove to the inner cavity through the arm-

openings at the base of the arms, by means of subtegminal

channels along the inner surface of the vault.

Dr. Liitken, fully confirming Dr. Schultze’s observations,

gives a full description of the ducts and subtegminal galleries,

and compares these with the covered food-grooves in Hypo-

mene Sarst, expressing the opinion that the galleries under-

neath the summit, which he considered to be closed at the

bottom and thus transformed into ducts, were food-passages.

Meek and Worthen describe and figure, in the Illinois Geo-

logical Report, vol. v., from my former collection, now in the

Museum of Comparative Zoology at Cambridge, several speci-

mens of well-preserved digestive organs, and also an Actino-

ertnus proboscidialis, in which askeleton of tubular canals pro-

ceeds from a point below the central axis of the vault to the

arms. There are in that specimen five main tubes which bi-

furcate midway toward the arm-bases, each division bifurcating

again, sending a branch to each one of the twenty arms of

that species. ‘The main tubes and branches are constructed

on their lower side of alternating plates, upon which, on either

side, a second row of minute quadrangular interlocking plates

is attached, longitudinally arranged, thus covering the tubes.

The upper rows of plates are not preserved in this specimen ;

but I have found them in two specimens of Sérotocrinus,

which I obtained recently, in which they are well preserved

and in place. The condition of the specimen, as Meek and

Worthen remark, leaves but little doubt that the tubes form

through the arm-openings of the calyx a continuation of

the arm-furrows. In removing parts of the vault, I unfortu-

nately broke the upper part of the fragile skeleton ; but enough

is preserved to prove that the five main tubes did not connect

directly with each other, but communicated at their upper end

(separately, asit seems) with an annular vessel of which traces

are yet preserved. Sucha vessel was found in wonderful pre-

servation in a specimen of Acténocrinus Verneuilianus, Shum.

The radiating canals were here not preserved ; but the little

openings through which they communicated are plainly

visible in the circular organ. There are, at the lower side of the

ring, which is composed of minute interlocking plates, five other

small openings, which, alternating with the former ones, were

apparently in connexion with organs of the interradial

system (communicating perhaps with a circulatory system).

‘Lhe whole upper part of the stomach is here placed within the

ring—differing in this particular from <Actinocrinus probosci-

dialis, in which only a spiral alimentary tube passes out from

External Structure of Paleozote Crinoids. 383

the interior of the convoluted digestive organ. The several

tubes of the skeleton, though closely following the direction of

the vault, but without touching it, are placed here within some

obscure furrows along its inner surface.

Such furrows in the vault can be observed in many Paleo-

zoic Crinoids. They are either elevations of the vault itself

or are formed by ridges or partitions on the inner surface,

which are always deepest toward the anal side. The grooves

are sometimes closed underneath, particularly in very old spe-

cimens, thus forming regular ducts or tunnels. Their ar-

rangement seems to be similar in all these Crinoids, no matter

whether the species has a subcentral proboscis or merely a

lateral opening ; they always diverge from a plane on the inner

wall of the vault, in front of the anus, and branch to the arm-

openings.

For further information on this subject, I will now call atten-

tion to some most excellent natural casts, mostly of Actino-

crinide, which I obtained from cherty layers of the Upper

Burlington Limestone. The outer shell or limestone test was

generally attached when I found them, but so much decayed

that it was removed by the least touch. The substance of

which the casts are formed appears to have been a fine sili-

ceous mud which could penetrate the smallest pores. The in-

ternal organs are of course not preserved ; but their impressions

at the surface of the casts throw much light on the structure

beneath the vault. The centre of radiation appears here a

small pentagonal, rounded, or, in species with strong subcen-

tral proboscis, subtriangular or even heart-shaped space or

plane, enclosed by a deep groove, from which, in some of these

specimens, elevated ridges, alternating with depressions, pass

out toward the arms; but before quite reaching them, there

proceeds, from below the ridges of the casts, to every arm a

smaller ridge which clearly indicates the tubular canal, as de-

scribed in Actinocrinus proboscidialis. ‘The casts are so per-

fect that I can even detect at some places the impressions of

the alternating minute plates of the tubes.

The casts are easily understood, if we remember that the

broader ridges are impressions of the grooves in the vault, and

that the depressions correspond to the partitions which formed

the grooves. The radiating tubes, where they do not appear

in the casts, were evidently placed at some distance from the

vault, and therefore enveloped and obliterated by the ma-

terial forming the casts; but on approaching the arm-bases

they closely underlie the test and their counterparts are pre-

served.

I have already mentioned in the casts a pentagonal space,

384 Mr. C. Wachsmuth on the Internal and

‘

surrounded by a furrow, as being the centre of radiation. It

is located anterior to the proboscis, occupying a central or

nearly central position. The middle of the space is occupied

frequently either by a small opening or by a little cone imdi-

cating an aperture leading toward the inner cavity; but in

these casts the aperture is isolated, and there appears on the

surface no connexion with the annular groove surrounding it.

To understand this structure it becomes necessary to examine

first some other casts from the same locality, mostly of Stroto-

erinus and Actinocrinus, but also several of Batocrinus, though

of different species from those which I have just described.

These casts have no annular groove ; and the radiation, which

is marked by elevated rounded ridges, almost like strings over-

lying the surface, proceeds from a point in the centre where I

noticed the little aperture in the former casts. The strings

diverge toward the arm-bases in the same manner as the tubu-

lar canals ; they are stronger toward the centre, decreasing in

size with each bifurcation. That these ridges are remains of

muscular cords is not probable, from the perishable nature of

such organs ; and they are not their casts, or they should have

left depressions in place of elevations. They can only be casts

of passages which communicated with the central aperture,

and which were evidently yet preserved when the siliceous

mud, forming the casts, penetrated the body; but their cal-

careous parts becoming in the course of time decomposed, a

cast was left only of their inner channel; and this explains

their string-like appearance. The little central aperture, lo-

cated at the upper end of the vertical axis, occupied on the

casts, and hence below the vault of these Crinoids, exactly the

same position that the internal mouth of Antedon occupies at

the peristome ; while the position of the string-like ridges (in

case they represent passages, as I can hardly doubt) is analo-

gous to that of the open food-grooves of recent Crinoids.

The annular groove on the casts is probably an impression

of the annular vessel, of which the calcareous parts have decom-

posed. This organ, in the fossil state, heretofore only ob-

served in the case of Actinocrinus Verneuilianus, existed un-

doubtedly in all Crinoids. That we find no trace of it in

some of the casts is no proof to the contrary ; 1t may have been

sometimes composed of more perishable material and therefore

not preserved, or situated at a greater distance from the vault

and covered by the substance of which the casts were formed.

2. The Ventral Furrow of the Arms.

The arms of Paleozoic Crinoids manifest great diversity in

outer form and structure, but are invariably provided with a

External Structure of Paleozoic Crinotds. 385

ventral furrow, which continues from the arm-bases up to the

tips of the arms and along the pinnule. The pinnule spring

out alternately right and left from the arm-plates, their fur-

rows connecting with that of the arm and forming, in fact, a

continuation of the same.

The furrow appears, in specimens in ordinary preservation,

as a simple groove, which communicates through the arm-

openings with the inner cavity of the body. Only in rare

instances has the furrow been found covered by minute plates,

whose construction, however, has heretofore not been ascer-

tained. ‘The best specimen of this kind that I have seen is

a Cyathocrinus malvaceus, in which the little plates above the

furrow can be studied in all their details with the greatest

precision. ‘The specimen is the property of Frank Springer,

Esq., who had the kindness to leave it with me for investi-

gation and description. ‘The arms of Cyathocrinus are com-

posed of long slender joints with a wide ventral furrow. They

bifurcate frequently, each branch bifurcating at intervals

again. ‘There appears on the arms of Cyathocrinus no scar for

the attachment of pimnule; and as these appendages have never

been observed in the genus, it is probable that the many little

branches performed their functions. In Mr. Springer’s speci-

men the plates above the furrow consist of two rows of minute

pieces on either side, the inner rows of which join in the

middle, interlock with each other, and form an apparently

solid covering. The outer plates which are attached to the

arm-joints are toward the upper end of the arms placed partly

upon the edges of the joint, but nearer the calyx rest wholly

against the edges of the upper part of the ventral furrow.

They are longitudinally arranged, partly hidden from view

by the inner plates. he visible part is quadrangular, with

a narrow tooth-like projection toward the lower end of each

plate, which is directed inward and slightly downward as a

sharp, elongated process, and forms a support for the mner

plates. The inner plates are elongated triangular, resting

with their shorter sides against the inner faces of the outer

series, and, between the tooth-like extensions, overlapping

them with their bevelled lateral edges, in such a manner that

each plate exteriorly fits in and fills the space between each

pair of similar triangular plates on the other side. The two

longer sides interlock with corresponding sides of similar plates

of the opposite row, their sharp angles or apices meeting the

sutures between the opposite quadrangular plates. At each of

these points of junction, just beyond the apex of each triangular

piece, on either side of the furrow, there is a little pore, which

evidently communicates with the inner channel. There are

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. 1. 26

386 Mr. C. Wachsmuth on the Internal and

six sets of plates to each arm-joint, all the plates bemg-imbri-

cated from the lower side upward (that is, the lower ones over-

lap slightly the edges of the upper ones), thus facilitating

the movements of the arms.

In describing the skeleton below the vault, I suggested

that the tubes were a continuation of the arm-furrows. A

transverse section of the arm, examined with the aid of a good

magnifier, shows that the tubes themselves were, at least in

this species, continued along the arms to their tips and rested

within the arm-furrow, with their sides closely attached to the

upper edges of the arm-joint. The tubes do not touch the

floor of the arm-grooves, but leave a good-sized subtriangular

channel underneath. The small plates, above described, form

the upper or outer wall of the tube ; and two sets of small plates

enclose it below. The position of the two upper sets of

quadrangular pieces is nearly erect, leaning inward, the tri-

angular cross pieces lying horizontally, thus forming a regular

tube or tunnel with a nearly round channel.

I was at first of the opinion, after examining Mr. Springer’s

specimen, that the arm-furrows of Palzozoic Crinoids were

permanently covered by solid plates, like the ventral side of

their cup; but upon comparing these arms with those of a spe-

cimen of Cyathocrinus viminalis in my own collection, I be-

came fully convinced that the inner plates could be opened or

shut at will by the animal. The arms of my specimen are

spread out; their ventral furrows are open, the quadrangular

pieces in place ; their tooth-like extensions stand out like the

teeth of a saw, and are so arranged that the indentations face

the salient angles of the opposite side, thus giving to the fur-

row a strongly zigzag appearance.

The tooth-like processes in this species are so prominent

that, from their similar form, and betore I had recognized this

peculiar structure in Mr. Springer’s specimen also, [ at first

took them for the triangular cross pieces; but on closer in-

spection I found no sutures between the projections and the

quadrangular portions of the plates; and as the place of attach-

ment for the triangular pieces is plainly visible, there can be

no doubt that these plates were not preserved in the speci-

men. Furthermore, as the quadrangular pieces are with slight

interruptions found on all the arms of the specimens most

beautifully preserved, it seems almost impossible to understand

how the triangular pieces could have fallen out, if they had

been fastened solidly to the adjoining plates. Supported by

the tooth-like projections, and resting against the edges of the

quadrangular plates, they were evidently better protected than

the outer pieces; and it seems to me their destruction would

External Structure of Paleozoic Crinotds. 387

have involved that of the entire covering. I therefore believe

these plates were not firmly attached in the living animal, but

merely leaned against each other as well as upon the tooth-like

projections, being only attached to the inner edge of the

quadrangular plates by muscular or interarticular substance,

and that they were, inanalogy with similar plates in recent

Crinoids, movable. This seems further confirmed by the

construction of the plates themselves, and especially by the

manner of their attachment. The inner edges of the qua-

drangular plates (between the projections) being slightly con-

vex, they rested in regular sockets, which facilitated their open-

ing in an outward direction. In case these plates, as I can no

longer doubt, could be opened or closed, it seems reasonable

that they were open in my specimen when the animal died ; or

they otherwise would have been preserved.

The position and construction of the inner channel proves

most satisfactorily, and in analogy with recent Crinoids, that it

contained the food-groove which conveyed the food through the

arm-openings beneath the vault to the oral aperture. The

small movable plates are evidently homologous with the

“‘Saumplatten ” of Antedon; and the imbrication of these

plates, as well as of the entire covering, seems to hint at the

conclusion that the furrow was always closed when the arms

were folded up as in Mr. Springer’s specimen, but that, on the

contrary, aS in my specimen, the furrow was open when the

arms were spread, and that in this position the animal took in

its food.

In describing the covering of the furrow, I have ‘already

mentioned the presence of two rows of small pores located at

the angles of the triangular pieces. There is nothing to indi-

cate that these pores were sockets of pinnule ; if they had been

the ‘‘ Saumplatten” could not have opened. From their posi-

tion I infer they were passages for tentacles connecting with

parts of the inner tube. If this is correct, it seems to me

there must have been located within the tube a passage in

connexion with the ambulacral system, since the ‘tentacles

form a part of it. ‘This is evidently the case. In a transverse

section of the arm, with the help of a magnifier, I think I have

detected within the tube traces of two passages—a deep groove

occupying only the median region, and on each side of it a

small canal underlying the pores. ‘The condition of the spe-

cimen does not enable me to say whether the two side passages

connect at the bottom or not; but in either case they un-

doubtedly represent the ambulacral canal, the food-groove

occupying only the median and upper part of the channel.

It is to be regretted that in no instance the upper part of

26*

388 Mr. C. Wachsmuth on the Internal and

the tubular skeleton has been found in perfect preservation.

There has been observed beneath the vault an annular vessel,

constructed of plates similar to those of the radiating tubes,

_ with small openings directed toward the radial sides of the

specimen, with the alimentary canal passing through the inner

space of the ring ; but its connexion with the surrounding parts

was not preserved. ‘The position of the annular organ in the

centre of radiation leaves but little doubt that it is the esopha-

geal ring or centre of the ambulacral system. The great simi-

larity in the construction of its plates, the presence of openings

corresponding to the direction of the tubes, indicate most

strongly that the tubes and the circular organ were connected,

and that the ambulacral canal, which I recognized in the lower

passage of the arms, communicated with the pores. But, as

seen from the casts, there proceeded below the vault, from the

arm-bases to the centre, another series of passages, which,

passing the region of the annular vessel, united in the centre.

I hold these to be a continuation of the food-grooves in the

arms, which evidently, passing over the top of the circular organ,

terminated within the central orifice.

The position of the cesophageal ring seems at first sight to

be not quite in harmony with recent nature ; this organ, which,

in all Echinoderms with an external mouth, is attached to the

inner side of the test, is located in Paleozoic Crinoids at a

distance from the vault. However, considering that the aboral

vault cannot be homologized with the oral skin of recent Cri-

noids, and that only the tubular skeleton corresponds to the

radiating passages connecting with the peristome, the vault

thus forming a mere covering, we shall find the position of the

circular organ perfectly harmonious with that of all other

Echinoderms.

I have mentioned already that there exists in the arm-

groove of Cyathocrinus, beneath the tube and at the bottom

of the furrow, another canal, as large as, or larger than the chan-

nel of the tube, whose functions are unknown. It was, ap-

parently through the bottom of the arm-openings, connected

with the perivisceral cavity of the calyx, and may have served

for several offices, containing perhaps also the cceliac canal.

Dr. Schultze, in his Monograph on the Echinoderms of

the Eifel, p. 17, gives a most excellent description of the arm-

furrow in Cupressocrinus. He found two sets of plates covering

the furrow like a roof, and asserts that the inner pieces could

be turned back in the living animal. I had overlooked this

in making out my descriptions; but it was pleasing and highly

satisfactory to me to find that we both had arrived indepen-

dently at the same conclusion. The construction of the arm-

External Structure of Paleozote Crinoids. 389

furrow of Cupressocrinus is very similar to that of Cyathocrinus.

Ina section of the arm of this genus I readily distinguished, by

transmitted light, the food-groove, which has a narrow and deep

outline, a canal on both sides of it; and I have but little

doubt that the arm-furrows were similarly constructed in all

Paleozoic Crinoids.

3. The Alimentary Canal.

Meek and Worthen publish, in the ‘Geological Report of

Illinois,’ vol. v., most excellent descriptions and figures of an

organ which occupies the greater part of the visceral cavity of

Paleozoic Crinoids ; they call it, from its position, in analogy

with other Echinoderms, “ the digestive organ.” It is a large

convoluted body, resembling in outer form and outline the shell

of a Bulla, with a longer vertical axis, and open at both ends.

The upper end is placed below the centre of the ventral disk,

the lower one directed toward the column, dilated above, con-

tracted below, coinciding with the inner space of the visceral

cavity, to the walls of which it stands nearly parallel. In some

cases it 1s subcylindrical and slightly truncate at both ends.

The organ is constructed of a great number of very minute

pieces or bars with intervening meshes; but its delicate texture

is but seldom observed, owing to the presence of incrustations

of calcareous or siliceous matter, which fill up the meshes and

give to the structure a rather dense appearance*.

The convolutions are directed outward from left to right,

varying in number from two to four in different species.

Judging from external appearance only, the convoluted walls

of the organ appear as mere partitions leading to the inner

chamber of a Bulla-shaped body. This, however, is not the

fact. xamining the so-called walls in some transverse sec-

tions, I find them to be coiled, without touching each other at

any point, and composed of two distinct partitions, placed side

_ by side and closed at the edges, thus proving that the ap-

parent walls are the coiled organ itself. According to this, the

digestive organ consisted of a long flattened canal, rounded at

the outer side, widest in the middle, tapering rapidly at both

ends to a rather heavy flattened tube, the outer end ascending

spirally toward the top of the visceral cavity, making two or

more turns, while the inner one, winding in a spiral way around

its Own axis, passed upward to near the centre of the dome.

* To these incrustations, which are evidently deposits from the water, we

owe, inagreat measure, the preservation of these delicate organs; and as they

are comparatively thicker in adult specimens, they seem to haye accumu-

lated already during the life of the Crinoids, and may have caused, in

many instances, their death,

390 Mr. C. Wachsmuth on the Internal and

In a specimen of Actinocrinus in which the digestive organ

is apparently perfect, though showing the usual rough appear-

ance, I succeeded in removing at one side the two upper convo-

lutions, in such a manner that the detached parts can be re-

placed or lifted up for investigation. J had here an opportu-

nity to examine the inner or, more properly, upper end of the

alimentary canal (as distinguished from the outer end or termi-

nal part). he top is unfortunately hidden below some inor-

ganic matter; but enough can be seen to prove that it pro-

ceeded evidently from a place below the centre of the dome.

The organ, where it comes into view, is an elongated tube, which,

passing downwards, widens first gradually to near the middle

of the visceral cavity, then rapidly until it acquires the width

of at least two thirds of the entire length of the cavity. The

upper end in descending spirally turns from right to left, but

on becoming wider curves sharply in the opposite direction

and the convolutions are now directed from left to right. The

outer end, also tapering rapidly and forming a flattened tube,

ascends the outside spirally from below all the way up to the

top, and, I am inclined to suppose, proceeded tothe proboscis,

being probably analogous to the terminal intestine of the

Kchini, while the upper end communicated with the food-

groove.

Such, with slight modifications, was probably the con-

struction of the alimentary canal of all Actinocrinide, Platy-

crinide, &e., but not that of the genus Ollacrinus*. I found

the alimentary canal partly preserved in Ollacrinus tubercu-

losus, Hall, in which it seems to have been composed of the

same delicate network ; but the organ consists here of a round

canal which descends spirally, and, contracting gradually, takes

at the lower portion of the visceral cavity an upward direction.

The upper part of the organ is unfortunately not preserved in

this specimen.

4. The Anal Aperture and the Proboscis.

The anus of Paleeozoic Crinoids is placed always within one

of the interradial series, which is generally wider than, and

often constructed differently from, the others. The aperture

is situated either in some part of the calyx itself, or at the top

* Figured by Cumberland without generic or specific diagnosis or spe~

cific name, London, 1826, in the Appendix to ‘ Reliquize Conservatee.’

Synon. :—Gilbertocrinus, Phillips, 1836, Geol. Yorkshire, pt. ii. p. 207.

Goniasteroidocrinus, Lyon & Casseday, Suppl. Geol. Rep. Iowa, p. 70.

Trematocrinus, Hall, 1860, Suppl. lowa Geol. Rept. p. 70.

As Cumberland’s figure is perfectly correct and easily identified as Olla-

crinus (Gilbertocrinus) calcaratus, his generic name “ Ollacrinus”’ must be

retained according to the laws of nomenclature.

External Structure of Paleozoic Crinoids. 391

of a long proboscis. It is a most remarkable fact that genera

which evidently belong to the same group, even species ap-

parently of the same genus (for instance, Strotocrinus), differ so

widely in the construction of this organ—some having a long

massive tube, reaching to several inches above the tips of their

arms, while others are provided only with a plain lateral

opening without any superstructure whatever.

I do not speak at present of the inflated or balloon-shaped

proboscis of Zeacrinus, Celiacrinus, Poteriocrinus, Hetero-

ertnus, and similar genera, in which this part is more properly

called “ the ventral sac,” as it evidently formed a large portion

of the visceral cavity. Its great size compared with the lower

cup, the presence of large numbers of small pores, and the

position of the anal aperture near the bottom instead of at the

summit, seems to imply that the anal apparatus occupied in the

internal economy of this sac only a limited space. The in-

flated sac, accordingly, cannot be homologized with the slender,

heavy-plated tube of Actinocrinus. We can only compare its

lateral opening, which is generally placed’ low down near the

arm-bases, with the anal aperture of species in which the anus

is located in the ventral disk.

In addition to its regular functions, the proboscis of Paleo-

zoic Crinoids may have had the office of expelling the water

from the system. ‘This suggestion looks not unreasonable, if

we consider that the solid body of the majority of these Cri-

noids had apparently no other outlet. I found in one instance

the proboscis split open longitudinally, and within its inner

cavity a well-defined narrow tube, filling scarcely one fourth

of the inner space. ‘This tube may have connected with

the terminal intestine which I have described above; and the

office of the surrounding canal may have been to eject the

deoxygenated water from the body. The fact that some

Crinoids were provided with a proboscis reaching beyond the

region of the arms, and others with no proboscis whatever, but

simply a lateral opening, is easily explained; for if the rejected

matter were emptied between the arms, it must have come

constantly again into contact with the arm-currents, which is

obviated by either plan. This accounts also for the fact that the

proboscis of some species of Hretmocrinus is constantly turned

to one side. ‘The proboscis formed a natural support for the

slender arms; for they are found in most specimens leaning

closely against it, while in Dorycrinus, which has no proboscis,

the arms appear always clinging to its long, heavy spines, which

are evidently not weapons of defence, as some authors have

supposed, but merely a support and protection for the arms.

Dr. C. A. White describes, in the ‘Boston Journ. of Nat,

892 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

Hist.’ vol. vii. no. 4, p. 489, several specimens in which the

proboscis diverges at some distance above the ventral disk into

two distinct branches. This may be, in some instances, the re-

sult of accidental development, but is more frequently due to

an obstruction of the anal canal. I found a specimen of Bato-

crinus longirostris in which, close to the vault, the proboscis

branches into two equally heavy tubes; and there appears

immediately above their junction a strong inflation or kind of

abscess. In another specimen a stoppage or disconnexion

must have occurred within the body, for a second proboscis

was formed at the ventral disk, developed here, as in every other

instance, within the anal series or posterior side of the Crinoid.

Tn one remarkable specimen a second proboscis breaks forth

even at the lower end of the calyx, just above the basal plates.

The pressure against these parts must have been enormous ; for

it caused the destruction of an entire ray, the plates of which

are bulging out, forming, together with the anal plates, and in-

termingled with smaller plates such as ordinarily compose the

proboscis of this species, a large elongated cavity with a rather

large aperture. All these instances give evidence of a pressure

from within, and indicate that the outside opening of Paleozoic

Crinoids was solely an ejective organ, and could not have had

oral functions. I have already mentioned that the anus is

separated from the radial series by deep partitions at the inner

surface of the vault, thus excluding any connexion with the

upper end of the digestive organ. Moreover the casts of

Actinocrinus show that the course of the proboscis is directed

toward the posterior side; and the development of the abnormal

proboscis occurs invariably in the anal series. It is therefore

hardly necessary to argue on Dr. White’s supposition, that the

abnormal second proboscis, wherever it occurs, might have

served as buccal orifice, as such a theory is unsupported by

analogy.

[To be continued. |

XLV.—Descriptions of new Species of Heterocera from

Japan.—Part III. Geometrites*, By ARTHUR G. BUTLER,

PLS. feZ.12, eee:

Urapteride.

153. Urapteryx veneris, n. sp.

White; primaries crossed by three brown stripes, which

converge towards the inner margin; a discocellular litura of

* The Geometrites described in ‘ Illustrations of Lepidoptera Hetero-

cera’ are not included in this paper.

of Heterocera from Japan. 393

the same colour; outer border narrowly brown, intersected by

an orange line; the transverse stripes of the female also

orange at their inferior extremities: secondaries with a dot at

the end of the cell and a litura across the internal area brown ;

a fulvous discal belt brownish at the extremities, subangulated

and expanded in the middle ; two black spots above the caudal

angle; fringe orange, tipped with white. Under surface with

the stripes dark brown, broken up into spots ; the secondaries

with two additional brown spots beyond the cell. Hxpanse

1 inch 5-6 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Ennommide.

THIOPSYCHE, n. gen.

Allied to Rumia, but the palpi longer and more slender ;

the primaries more acuminate, the outer margin more oblique,

undulated, slightly excised at external angle, the inner margin

sinuous, the median branches emitted nearer together ; secon-

daries much shorter, with sinuated outer margin, an angle

below the apex, costal margin slightly irregular, costal vein

running close to the subcostal for two fifths of its length ;

discoidal cell shorter. Type 7. Pryert.

154. Thiopsyche Pryert, n. sp.

Shining sulphur-yellow; outer margin of wings black-

brown ; fringe very short, white: primaries sparsely speckled

with ferruginous ; base of costa ferruginous, speckled with

white, with several black dots on the margin, followed by an

irregular abbreviated oblique ferruginous stria; external area

slightly reddish, excepting at the outer angle; two irregular

white-speckled red-brown spots beyond the centre of the

inner margin: secondaries with a discal series of ferruginous

dots on the veins ; a red-brown costal spot; collar and palpi

tinted with ferruginous. Wings below paler, spotted and

speckled with ferruginous rather more than above; the pri-

maries with a broad ferruginous abbreviated band across the

apical area; body whitish. Hxpanse 1 inch 4 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

I have named this pretty little species after Mr. Pryer of

Yokohama, an energetic collector, to whom we are indebted

for several interesting Japanese novelties.

EnpropiA, Guénée.

155. Endropia mactans, n. sp.

Wings above bright burnt-sienna red; the disk almost

394 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

covered by a nebulous plumbaginous belt, limited internally

by the outer line; two parallel oblique lines of blackish,

abruptly angulated in the primaries near the costal margin ;

costal border of primaries spotted with saffron-yellow; a

dusky patch above the end of the cell; a black dot at the

end of the cell: head blackish, with white crest ; thorax whity

brown, with the tegule tawny; abdomen deep red, anus

white. Under surface testaceous, clouded with grey; the

markings as above, allthe wings with prominent black disco-

cellular spots. Expanse 1 inch 5 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

This species somewhat resembles the genus Chilma of

Walker.

DESCOREBA, n. gen.

Allied to Caberodes, with which it agrees in neuration ; it

differs in having its antenne pectinated to the tips, its thorax

more woolly, and the outer margin of the primaries not angu-

lated. Type D. stmplex.

156. Descoreba simplex, n. sp.

Primaries pale stramineous speckled with dark brown

scales and crossed from the apex to the inner margin by a

dark brown oblique line ; a blackish discocellular dot : secon-

daries snow-white, slightly tinted with stramineous on the

outer border : body stramineous, tegule clothed with long

whitish hairs. Under surface creamy white, speckled with

brown; a discal series of black dots on the veins; primaries

with fulvous costa, markings paler than above ; secondaries

with stramineous costa; legs varied with brown. Expanse

2 inches 1 line.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Aspilates niponaria of Felder is a second species of this

genus.

(nochromiide.

NIPHONISSA, n. gen.

Allied to Monoctenia, but altogether more slenderly built,

the palpi longer, the antennz considerably more slender, the

tegule rather shorter, the primaries more sharply angulated.

Type N. arida.

157. Niphonissa arida, n. sp.

g. Primaries above pale sandy brown, speckled with grey ;

an oblique grey discal line; a black-edged whitish discocel-

of Heterocera from Japan. 395

lular dot ; apical half of costal margin ochreous; fringe very

short, olivaceous, tipped with white: secondaries sandy yel-

lowish irrorated with grey; an interrupted grey discal line

and a grey discocellular annulus: body sandy yellowish.

Under surface sandy whitish, irrorated with grey ; markings

nearly as above. Expanse 2 inches 1 line.

9. Larger and brighter in tint than the male, the

discal line of primaries edged with white. Expanse 2 inches

4 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Boarmiide.

Boarmis, Treitschke.

158. Boarmia conferenda, n. sp.

Nearly allied to B. consortaria, but much darker, greyer ;

the discocellular spot of secondaries larger; under surface

whity brown instead of creamy white, but with the same

markings. Expanse 2 inches.

Yokohama (Jonas).

159. Boarmia lunifera, n. sp.

Allied to B. roboraria, but much darker and larger, the

first two blackish lines of the primaries less arched, but rather

more irregular; the third line well separated; the two central

lines of secondaries nearer together; the outer border of all

the wings smoky grey, bounded internally by a series of well-

defined blackish-bordered lunate spots. Wings below grey,

with blackish discal belt and discocellular spots ; primaries

with pale costa on which are two black spots, the first of two

series of grey spots which cross the wings ; apex of primaries

white; body below grey. Expanse 2 inches 7 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

160. Boarmia displicens, n. sp.

Near to B. rhomboidaria, but altogether darker, the pale

spots replaced by white; the three black lines of primaries

placed in the male at about equal distances, the middle one

not being confused with the outermost one; the two central

lines of secondaries much wider apart. Expanse 1 inch

8 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

161. Boarmia leucophea, n. sp.

Also allied to B. rhombotdaria, but considerably darker ; the

primaries with a white spot just beyond the second black line

396 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

and near the apex; the black lines strongly defined ;. the

basal area and one or two ill-defined discal streaks whitish ;

the central lines of secondaries much nearer together and more

strongly defined. Under surface quite different, pale grey, with

discocellular spot and discal belts of slightly darker grey.

Expanse 1 inch 11 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

162. Boarmia angulifera, n. sp.

Allied to B. repandaria, but little more than half the size,

considerably darker, more sooty in tint, the markings of the

primaries more sharply defined ; fringe much longer ; primaries

below much darker, with a pale patch beyond the cell and a

pale apical spot; discocellular spots strongly marked; black

marginal spots better marked; fringe spotted with grey.

Expanse 1 inch 4 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

163. Boarmia agitata, n. sp.

Allied to B. repandaria, but half as large again, the wings

(particularly the primaries) far more silky; the lines grey,

blurred, but the multitudinous little grey striations more dis-

tinct ; primaries with a blackish abbreviated bar across the

discocellulars, followed by a very irregular whitish band from

costal to outer margin ; a second narrower blackish bar beyond

the cell, being the commencement of the outer or discal line ;

apex whitish; several subapical white spots; lines of secon-

daries nearer together, the inner one not being central. Wings

below pale smoky brown, with discal lines and whitish mark-

ings as above. HExpanse 2 inches 4 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

164. Boarmia grisea, n. sp.

Allied to B. momaria, black lines similar to those of B. re-

pandaria ; wings above ashy grey, with the basal and discal

areas clouded with red-brown; margin dotted with black ;

primaries with a black-edged @-shaped brown spot at the end

of the cell. Under surface whitish, with grey discal belt ; the

lines grey, ill defined; primaries with a white apical spot.

Expanse 1 inch 8 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

165. Boarmia senex, n. sp.

Belongs to the B.-consortarva group, but rather whiter and

with broader primaries ; the lines black and similar to those

of Heterocera from Japan. 397

of B. trispinaria, excepting that the outer line is rather nearer

to the external margin and more strongly dentated. Expanse

2 inches.

Yokohama (Jonas); Hakodaté (Whitely).

166. Boarmia insolita, n. sp.

Wings above silvery grey ; a subbasal sandy yellowish belt,

on and immediately beyond which are two interrupted trans-

verse black lines; a black costal oblique dash above the end

of the cell, and a small yellow spot at base of first median

branch ; an interrupted sinuated black line beyond the cell,

followed by a sandy-yellowish discal belt ; outer border broadly

dusky, intersected by a submarginal undulated whitish line ;

two quadrate dusky patches placed angle to angle from above

the second median branch to the outer margin; a series of

black marginal spots: secondaries with discal lines and belts,

and marginal spots as in the primaries. Under surface silvery

white, with dusky discocellular spots; primaries with the

discoidal and apical areas faintly tinted with grey ; an ill-de-

fined grey discal line. Expanse 1 inch 7 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely).

Alhed to B. cinctaria.

TEPHROSIA, Boisduval.

167. Yephrosia charon, n. sp.

&. Silvery grey; the wings crossed by three black lines,

the two outer ones of the primaries converging towards the

inner margin, and all of them bent inwards above the middle ;

outer border slightly darker than the rest of the wings, inter-

sected by a wavy dusky-bordered white line; thorax trans-

versely banded with black: under surface grey; the wings

with a very slightly darker discal belt. Jixpanse 1 inch

11 lines.

2. Much browner in tint; the under surface with well-

defined darker discal belt, very dark on the primaries. Ex-

panse 1 inch 9 lines.

3, Hakodaté (Whitely); ¢ 2, Yokohama (Jonas).

168. Tephrosia ignobilis, n. sp.

Nearly allied te 7. transfixaria from Kast Florida, but the

lines across the wings less oblique, the first one also not

double ; under surface sandy brown instead of whitish. Ex-

panse | inch 4 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

398 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

This is a silvery grey or whitish species crossed by four

irregular blackish lines, the last two of which are doubled ; the

outer border is dusky.

Hyvrocuroma, Guénée.

169. Hypochroma Pryeri, n. sp.

Allied to H. dispensata, but ashy grey ; the two lines across

the wings similar, external area crossed by a zigzag white

line; black discocellular dots; a marginal series of black

dots: wings below white; a broad discal blackish belt with

straight internal edge, produced externally in one or two

places so as to reach the margin; black discocellular spots ;

primaries with greyish basal area. LEixpanse 1 inch 8 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

170. Hypochroma superans, nu. sp.

Testaceous, the wings, excepting at the base, greenish

sericeous crossed by multitudinous short grey lines; black

discocellular lines; an interrupted irregular white lunu-

lated discal stripe, indistinct in secondaries ; a submarginal

series of white dots; a marginal series of black spots; fringe

rather long, ashy grey ; primaries with the costa black-spotted 5

apex of palpi and frons black. Under surface of the wings

white, yellow at the base ; large black discocellular patches ;

a blackish spot in each discoidal cell, and below it a well-

defined grey longitudinal dash; a broad blackish discal belt

crossed by an interrupted white line; a series of black mar-

ginal spots: primaries with the costa black-spotted ; external

area streaked with blackish: body ochraceous, legs above

blackish. Expanse 2 inches 6 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

One of the finest species yet described.

Bywazora, Walker.

171. Bylazora virescens, n. sp.

Primaries above pale dull sericeous sap-green, irrorated

with black scales, most densely towards the base; costal

margin black-dotted ; an oblique abbreviated line across the

cell, the discocellulars and an oblique, slightly concave sub-

apical line blackish ; three or four subapical hastate blackish

spots in a transverse series beyond the line; a zigzag sub-

marginal blackish line, black-dotted externally, and connected

with a series of black marginal spots by blackish longitudinal

internervular lines : secondaries pale greyish brown, nearly

of Heterocera from Japan. 399

white ; discocellulars and an irregular discal line dusky ; disk

beyond the line striated with dusky scales ; a marginal series

of black dots: body corresponding in colour with the wings.

Under surface sericeous white, a series of black marginal dots :

primaries with dusky-speckled testaceous costal margin; a

quadrate discocellular blackish spot; a blackish angular discal

stripe: secondaries with elongated discocellular blackish spot ;

an ill-defined discal stripe. LExpanse 1 inch 9 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely)..

Geometridz.

Jopis, Hiibner.

172. Jodis claripennis, n. sp.

Aspect of J. putataria, but of twice the size; chalky white

with a single snow-white discal line bordered internally by a

pale yellowish line, oblique in primaries and subangulated in

secondaries; costal margin of primaries and antenne pale

ochraceous; frons, palpi, and margin of eyes ferruginous ;

under surface of tibie and tarsi ochraceous; wings below

without discal line. Expanse 1 inch 6 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

THALASSODES, Guénée.

173. Thalassodes marina, n. sp.

Pale bluish green; wings shining, with irregular angulated

discal line; fringe white; primaries with ochreous costal

margin spotted with black; crest of head and base of antenne

white, abdomen whitish ; under surface paler, without mark-

ings: body below white. LExpanse 1 inch 1 line.

Yokohama (Jonas).

THALERA, Hiibner.

174. Thalera crenulata, n. sp.

Pale green ; margin of the wings ferruginous ; fringe white,

spotted with ferruginous at the terminations of the nervures ;

primaries with creamy costal margin ; two transverse, irregu-

lar, parallel, shining white lines ; secondaries with one irre-

gular white discal line; antenne white; frons, palpi, and

part of the anterior legs ferruginous, remainder of legs white ;

wings below paler, without white lines. Hxpanse 11 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

400 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

Ephyride.

ANISODES, Guénée.

175. Antsodes hadassa, n. sp.

Ochraceous, wings irrorated with grey, crossed by three

more or less defined crenulate grey lines bordered with dull

lilacine (in some examples barely distinguishable); well-

marked black discocellular spots; a marginal series of more

or less defined blackish dots; primaries with the costa more

or less plumbaginous and transversely striated with grey ;

collar grey or plumbaginous : under surface paler and clearer ;

primaries always with one well-marked discal grey stripe

(some examples with two in all the wings); grey irrorations

and black discocellular spots as above. Expanse, ¢ 1 inch

2 lines, 9 1 inch 4-5 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Allied to A. ¢mitarda.

Acidaliide.

ASTHENA, Hiibner.

176. Asthena corculina, n. sp.

Snowy white, sericeous; wings crossed by parallel irre-

gular ochreous belts at equal distances, seven on the prima-

ries (the last abbreviated), and three across the disk of

secondaries ; discocellular spots and marginal dots black ; belts

below ill-defined, grey ; spots black, but less defined, the mar-

ginal dots partly or wholly absent. Expanse 9 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

177. Asthena superior, n. sp.

Nearly allied to the preceding, but larger, the wings sparsely

and minutely black-speckled; secondaries with an additional

ochreous belt across the discoidal cell: wings below snow-

white, with a single grey discal line; discoidal area of prima-

ries slightly greyish. H:xpanse 11 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Although larger, this is a more delicate-looking species

than the preceding.

178. Asthena confusa, n. sp.

Shining white, with large black discocellular spots ; prima-

ries crossed by six ochreous irregular belts at unequal dis-

tances, the three outermost crowded together; four marginal

of Heterocera from Japan. 401

black dots towards apex ; fringe slightly ochreous: seconda-

ries crossed by four parallel ochreous belts, the first crossing

the cell, the others discal. Belts below brown, obsolete towards

the base; black spots as above; primaries with brownish

discoidal area. EExpanse 1 inch.

Yokohama (Jonas).

179. Asthena nupta, n. sp.

3. White, minutely black-speckled ; primaries crossed by

five, and secondaries by four parallel irregular yellowish belts,

the outermost belt marginal and ill-defined: under surface

with the belts reduced to grey lines, very indistinct on the

secondaries, the one across the cell of primaries obsolete ;

black discocellular dots ; primaries with yellowish costal mar-

in. Expanse 1 inch 1 line.

?. Slightly yellower than the male, larger, with better-

defined markings. Expanse 1 inch 4 lines.

3, Yokohama (Jonas) ; 2? , Hakodaté (Whitely).

This species is allied to the Huropean “ Aczdalia sylves-

traria” and A. byssinata; but as I find that A. sylvestraria

does not differ in structure from Asthena candidata I shall

place both in Asthena.

ACIDALIA, T’rreitschke.

180. Actdalia hanna, un. sp.

Pale brown, wings crossed by a central oblique dusky belt,

on which the discocellular spot of secondaries is placed ; three

irregular brown discal lines converging towards the costa of

primaries ; these wings with one or two oblique basal lines ;

marginal and discocellular dots black, collar brown: under

surface whiter, the belt and lines ill-defined ; a discal series

of black dots in addition to those of the upper surface. Ex-

panse 10 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

A variety of the female occurs, nearly white, with the

markings ill-defined and the wings expanding 1 inch.

A, hanna is allied to A. inductata.

181. Acidalia jakima, n. sp.

Upper surface whity brown, with rosy lilacine costal and

outer borders : primaries crossed by three slightly wavy ob-

lique rosy lines, the outermost of which bounds the lower half

of the outer border; a black discocellular dot; fringe pale

tawny: secondaries crossed by twd wavy lines, the outer one

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 27

402 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

bounding the outer border ; discocellular dot and fringe as in

primaries : body whity brown; back of head and collar lila-

cine; anal segment slightly lilacine, with testaceous terminal

tuft: under surface sericeous, with two wavy discal dark grey

lines; a slender blackish marginal line; primaries greyish.

Expanse 11 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

MIcR2SCHUS, n. gen.

Allied to Hyria, with which it has been confounded, but

' differing in the more robust character of its body and broader

shorter primaries with angulated outer margin. Type Hyria

elataria.

182. Micreschus aureus, n. sp.

Primaries golden straw-yellow, crossed by two slender

blackish lines, the inner one concave, the outer one angulated,

between them a black discocellular dot ; margin black; fringe

white, spotted with black at apex and below the middle: se-

condaries white, with brownish external area; marginal line

black, fringe sordid white : body straw-colour. Under surface

white, primaries clouded with greyish brown ; discocellulars

and an angulated discal stripe black; costal margin black-

spotted towards apex; fringe as above: secondaries with

black discocellular dot and blackish discal spot. Expanse

8 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Microniide.

EHrosia, Guénée.

183. Hrosia moza, n. sp.

Shining greyish brown, reticulated with slaty grey; fringe

dark brown: primaries crossed near the base by an arched

dark brown line; an oblique abbreviated dark brown line

from the costa beyond the middle; a dark brown quadrate

spot bounded externally by a black F-shaped marking on the

inner margin, and a reddish-brown streak spotted with black

near the outer margin: secondaries crossed near the base by a

black line; a black angulated and sinuated discal line, edged

externally with white, and partly bounded internally by a

tawny belt; a sordid ochraceous sagittate marking through

the cell; a sordid ochraceous streak from the inferior caudal

process to just beyond the end of the cell; a black costal

litura near apex; two white-edged black dots above the in-

of Heterocera from Japan. 403

ferior caudal process; marginal line silvery white, edged inter-

nally with brown. Under surface whity brown, striated with

blackish ; primaries suffused with grey. Expanse 1 inch.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Some examples are rather smaller and much paler than the

type.

184. Erosta rapha, un. sp.

Snow-white ; wings crossed near the base by a semicircular

series of dark brown dots: primaries with a very irregular

red-brown discal band, margined and intersected by blackish

lines and bounded externally by subconfluent large black spots ;

two subapical black dots connected with the apex by a black

line ; a sigmoidal pale-brown marking near the outer margin ;

base of costa blackish: secondaries with the external area

excepting at apex broadly red-brown, interrupted by one or

two small white spots, and internally by an angulated white-

edged brown discal line; margin trom the superior caudal

process downwards dark brown ; a black dot below the inferior

process: body spotted with blackish. Under surface white ;

basal area sordid ; external area, especially of primaries, varied

with smoky brown. Expanse 11 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely).

185. Hrosia azela, n. sp.

Primaries above with the basal two thirds, excepting a

creamy patch at centre of inner margin, chocolate-brown,

crossed by two parallel tawny transverse lines ; external area

silvery white, brown-speckled internally, and interrupted by

a marginal series of triangular brown spots: secondaries with

the basal half cream-coloured, bounded by a brown discal

belt ; external area silvery white ; marginal spots as in pri-

maries, but smaller; fringe spotted with brown: head and

thorax blackish ; shoulders plumbaginous ; abdomen cream-

coloured. Under surface altogether paler, but very similar in

character to the upper surface. Expanse 11 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Caberidz.

CaBERA, Treitschke.

186. Cabera eliela, n. sp.

Whity brown: primaries crossed by nine irregular white

stripes, the fifth and sixth of which are convergent in the

centre, and form the central band, the ninth submarginal and

27%

404 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

zigzag : secondaries crossed by five or six stripes, somewhat

confused at the base, the outermost one being submarginal

and zigzag ; a scarcely perceptible slender blackish marginal

line bordered with white; fringe whitish. Under surface

greyish ; the lines, excepting two across the disk, confused

and indistinct. Expanse 1 inch 6 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Somewhat allied to C. unduliferaria of Motschoulsky.

Corycia, Duponchel.

187. Corycta virgo, nu. sp.

Silvery white; wings with blackish dots at the termina-

tions of the veins; a brown dot at the inferior angle of

each discoidal cell; antenne bright ochreous. Under sur-

face pearly; legs slightly yellowish. Expanse 1 inch 5

lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

188. Corycia sacra, n. sp.

Snow-white, each wing with two well-defined black disco-

cellular spots: primaries crossed by two pale ochraceous

stripes, the inner one angulated, the outer one zigzag ; secon-

daries crossed by one slightly undulated discal stripe: wings

below without stripes. Body creamy; antenne with ochra-

ceous pectinations. Expanse, g 1 inch 2 lines, ? 1 inch

4 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

THYSANOCHILUS, n. gen.

Allied to Corycta, but the antenne broadly pectinate for

three fourths of their length, and then naked to the tip;

wings with long internal and external fringes. Type 7.

purus.

189. Thysanochilus purus, n. sp.

Shining white; wings speckled with dark brown, with

black discocellular dots : primaries crossed by three ochreous

stripes, the innermost and outermost being regularly zigzag,

the central stripe less strongly zigzag; fringe of internal

border ochreous : secondaries crossed by two zigzag ochreous

stripes : antennze with grey pectinations. Wings below with

the brown speckling more distinct, only the discal stripe dis-

cernible. Expanse 1 inch 4 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

of Heterocera from Japan. 405

Macariide.

Macarta, Curtis.

190. Macaria zachera, n. sp.

Sordid white, becoming pure white at outer border, speckled

with black ; two central parallel dark brown lines on a yel-

lowish ground, the outer one abruptly angulated and forked

towards the costa of primaries, the fork filled in with ochra-

ceous; a slender undulated marginal blackish line; fringe

cream-coloured ; black discocellular spots: primaries crossed

by an angulated dark brown line near the base. Body

greyish. Wings below brighter than above, but very similar

in marking. Expanse 1 inch 5 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Near to M. pervolgata.

191. Macaria maligna, nu. sp.

Pattern of the preceding species, but the ground-colour

above slaty grey: below sandy yellow, with broad tawny

external area; markings as above. Expanse 1 inch 38 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Allied to M. vasudeva.

Biruta, Walker.

192. Bithia amasa, n. sp.

Greyish testaceous, covered with brown striations; the

basal area crossed by two ill-defined subangulated darker

stripes; a series of blackish discal dots more or less connected

by a very indistinct undulated line, barely perceptible on the

primaries; a discal pinky-brownish irregular belt, clouded

with blackish in. the primaries; outer border paler brown ;

fringe yellowish: primaries with yellow-dotted black costal

margin, a pale testaceous apical patch, a series of blackish

marginal spots: secondaries with whitish costal area; a

blackish spot near the base; discocellulars blackish. Under

surface bright testaceous, covered with brown striations ;

large black discocellular spots; a nearly central ferruginous

stripe; a broad discal ferruginous belt; outer border clay-

coloured, clouded with ferruginous: primaries with bright

testaceous apical spot: anterior coxe bright ochreous. HEx-

panse 1 inch 8 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Allied to ‘‘ Hemerophila” pretereuns.

406 On new Species of Heterocera from Japan.

Fidoniide.

LozoGRAMMA, Stephens.

193. Lozogramma bela, n. sp.

Primaries pale pinky brown, crossed immediately beyond

the cell by a chocolate-brown line ; secondaries whitish, with

creamy external area, brown-speckled, crossed by a slender

brown discal line; body. cream-coloured ; antenne with

blackish pectinations. Under surface cream-coloured, with

yellowish costal borders; all the wings brown-speckled, with

red-brown discocellular spots and grey-brown discal line.

Expanse 1 inch 5 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

194. Lozogramma Amelia, n. sp.

Shining: primaries golden brown, crossed by three pale-

edged indistinct undulated grey lines, the outermost one

bounded externally by small ovoid plumbaginous spots, which

become whitish towards the costa; a large rounded whitish

spot enclosing a black dot, and margined with brown, at the

end of the cell; external area slightly greyish, crossed by a

zigzag dusky submarginal line bounded outwardly by a series

of pale spots; marginal line of the ground-colour with two

blackish dots on each internervular division ; fringe traversed

by a grey line: secondaries white, with sordid white fringe.

Body testaceous. Under surface whity brown: primaries

slightly greyish; upper discocellular and a subangulated

undulated discal line grey; an oblique apical grey dash ;

marginal dots as above: secondaries with blackish discocellu-

lar dot and two subangulated discal series, the inner series

very indistinctly connected by a pale line; marginal dots as

in primaries. Expanse 1 inch 3 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

SELIDOSEMA, Hiibner.

195. Selidosema sordida, n. sp.

Sordid white: primaries with pale smoky-brown borders ;

three greyish brown costal spots, the third slender and trans-

verse ; outer border irregularly bisinuated internally, with a

greyish patch just above the middle, and a second at external

angle; a marginal series of black spots: secondaries with the

basal area greyish; a broad central dark grey angulated

belt, bounded externally by a series of black spots ; a black

On the Number of Cervical Vertebre in Dinornis. 407

discocellular spot on the belt; several greyish-brown costal

spots, and an imperfect series along the outer margin; a

discal spot beyond the cell and a streak near the anal angle

tawny. Body pale brown; pectinations of antenne blackish.

Under surface whity brown: wings mottled with grey, with

blackish discocellular dots; primaries with a central costal

spot and discal arched streak grey. Expanse 1 inch 3 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely).

The type of this species is somewhat rubbed ; it is possible

that in fresh examples there may be a brownish belt’ across

the primaries.

[To be continued. |

XLVI.—On the Number of Cervical Vertebre in Dinornis.

By F. W. Hurron, Professor of Zoology in the University

of Otago.

THE number of cervical vertebrae in Dinornis was estimated

in 1856, by Prof. Owen, at 15, in D. elephantopus (Trans.

Zool. Soc. iv. p. 161); and this number was also adopted by

Prof. von Haast in his printed schedule of Moa-bones in the

Canterbury Museum. In Prof. Owen’s paper in Trans. Zool.

Soc. vol. x. p. 147, which, much to the regret of all New-

Zealand naturalists, he announces as probably his last on the

Moa, he still adheres to the same number, and suggests that

in the photographed skeleton of D. elephantopus (more pro-

perly I now think D. crassus) in the Otago Museum there

are two cervical vertebree too many*. However, specimens

in the museum of the necks of individual birds show that the

real number is 20 or 21; and I therefore think it necessary

for me to give the evidence for my restoration of the skeleton

referred to.

The museum possesses nine necks, or portions of necks,

from the sand-hills at Shag Point, Otago, belonging to single

birds. These were all found in their proper positions, and

were at once strung, and then numbered so as to prevent the

possibility of any subsequent misplacement. ‘The species to

which they belong cannot yet be accurately determined; but

they are of three different sizes. The smallest (A, B, and G)

belong, I believe, to D. casuarinus ; the middle size (C, D,

* Prof. Owen has been led into a mistake by having a photograph only

to examine. In the skeleton, as restored, there are twenty-one, not

seventeen, cervical vertebra.

408 On the Number of Cervical Vertebre in Dinornis.

and BE) to D. gravis; and the largest (F, H, and I) belong,

I feel pretty sure, to D. crassus.

I follow Prof. Owen in regarding the first dorsal vertebra

as that “ which first retains its pleurapophyses as independent

movable elements.”

A. Five vertebre, commencing with the first. The fifth

has a slight median hypapophysis on the centrum. In

the fourth it is strong.

B. Ten vertebre, commencing with the first. The sixth has

a*very slight preaxial median hypapophysis. In the

fifth it is well marked ; in the seventh it is absent.

C. Eleven vertebre, commencing with the second. The fifth

(no. 4 of the series) has a median hypapophysis ; there

is none on the sixth.

D. Seventeen vertebre, commencing with the first. The

fifth has a median hypapophysis, the sixth none. All

are cervical vertebre ; and in all both the neural spine

and the hypapophyses (catapophyses of Mivart) are

double. The hypapophyses are furthest apart in the

fifteenth.

E. Seventeen vertebrae, commencing with the first. The

fifth has a large median hypapophysis; on the sixth it

is rudimentary, and absent on the seventh. All are

cervical ; and in all both the neural spine and the hypa-

pophyses are double. The hypapophyses are furthest

apart on the sixteenth.

F. Nineteen vertebree, commencing with the first. The fifth

has a slight median hypapophysis ; there is none on

the sixth. All are cervical. The neural spine is double

in all. The hypapophyses are double in all, but they

are nearly confluent in the last. The hypapophyses

are furthest apart in the sixteenth.

G. Nineteen vertebre, commencing with the first. The fifth

has a slight median hypapophysis; there is none on

the sixth. All the vertebra are cervical. The neural

spine is double in all. The hypapophyses of the last

four vertebre are destroyed.

H. Twenty-two vertebre, commencing with the first. The

fifth has a well-marked median hypapophysis; there is.

none on the sixth. The cervical vertebre are twenty-

one in number. The neural spine becomes single on

the twentieth; and the hypapophyses become single

on the nineteenth, but they are almost single on the

eighteenth.

I. Twenty-three vertebra, commencing with the fifth. A

slight median hypapophysis on the fifth (first of the

Mr. C. Spence Bate on two new Crustacea. 409

series) ; none on the sixth. The first sixteen vertebre

of the series are cervical ; and if the four missing verte-

bre be added, it makes twenty cervical vertebre alto-

gether. The last seven are dorsal. The neural spine

becomes single on the nineteenth. The hypapophyses

become single on the eighteenth ; and they are furthest

apart on the fourteenth. I have taken the first of this

series as the fifth; but, judging, from B and E, it may

possibly be the sixth, in which case the rest of the neck-

vertebree would agree with H. This specimen has also

the pelvis and the caudal vertebree, of which latter there

are ten, the last two being ankylosed. The second

caudal vertebra agrees with the one figured by Prof.

Owen as either the first or the second.

From a comparison of these necks with the drawings and

descriptions of Prof. Owen in his last paper I infer that the

vertebra figured by him as the third is really the fourth, that

figured as the fourth is the sixth, that as the sixth is the

eighth, that as the twelfth is the fifteenth, that as the four-

teenth is the seventeenth or eighteenth, and that as the

fifteenth is the twentieth or twenty-first.

XLVII.— Two new Crustacea from the Coast of Aberdeen.

By C. Spence Bats, F.R.S.

Two small Crustacea were sent to me some short time since

by Mr. Sims, of Aberdeen, as having been taken by him on

that coast during last summer. One belongs to the Diasty-

lide, the other to Amphipoda. After carefully noting all the

specimens with which I am acquainted, as well as consulting

the works of Sars and other naturalists, I am induced to be-

lieve that neither of them has been described. I propose

therefore to name them respectively Diastylis bimarginatus

and Lestrigonus spinidorsalis.

Diastylis bimarginatus has the carapace very long and

oval. ‘The infero-lateral margin is anteriorly serrated be-

neath the antennal notch. A second ridge within the

lateral margin repeats it, commencing at the base of the

rostral process, where it is serrated, and continuing until

near the posterior extremity of the carapace, where it

becomes confluent with the infero-lateral margin. The rostral

projections of the carapace are serrated on the upper mar-

gin. Five somites of the pereion are exposed behind the

carapace, each becoming longer, narrower, and less deep as

410 Mr. C. Spence Bate on two new Crustacea.

they succeed each other posteriorly, and the last having the

coxal plate fused with it and produced posteriorly to a strong

point. The somites of the pleon

are dorsally crowned with small

tooth-like points, which become

less conspicuous in succession pos-

teriorly. The posterior and post-

inferior angles of each somite are

produced to sharp spine-like

points. The fifth somite 1s longer

than the four preceding, and the

dorsal surface is serrated in the

median line; the sides are flanked

by a strong ridge; and the inferior

margin is entire, but produced

posteriorly to a sharp point. The

sixth somite is cylindrical, and not

produced posteriorly beyond the

point where it articulates with the

telson. The telson is sharp, styli-

form, and moderately long, being

nearly as long as the two prece-

ding somites. The styliform uro-

poda have the first jomt half as

long again as the telson, and sup-

porting two branches, of which the

inner is as long again as the outer

and slightly fringed with hairs.

The first pair of antenne are

about as long again as the rostral

processes of the carapace. The

second antenne in the male animal

are nearly as long as the animal.

The first joint of the peduncle is

not conspicuous; the second does

not reach as far as the extremity

of the rostral processes; and the

third reaches as far as the extre-

mity of the first pair of antenna ;

it is broad at the base and gradu-

ally tapers to the distal extre-

mity.

Most of the other appendages

are so damaged that it is difficult Dvastylis bimarginatus, n. sp.

to determine any specific characters

in them, except the caudal pair, which have the terminal

Mr. C. Spence Bate on two new Crustacea. 411

rami unequal, the longer being about half the length of the

basal joint.

Length 4 inch.

Lestrigonus spinidorsalis differs from any species of the genus

that I have met within having the last two somites of the pereion

and the first three of the pleon produced in the median line of

_ the dorsal surface posteriorly to a sharp-pointed tooth or spine.

It bears in all other respects some considerable resemblance to

Lestrigonus exulans; and I was much inclined to think that

the dorsal feature might have been the result of some more

Fig. 2.

Lestrigonus spinidorsalis, n. sp. a, second gnathopod.

or less permanent injury; but close inspection, frequently

repeated, has compelled me to believe that the spinous

dorsal formation is characteristic of the animal, and one

by which it may be readily distinguished from all other

species.

The eyes are large, the antenne subequally long and slender,

about one half the length of the animal. The gnathopoda

are short but not feeble; the first two pairs of pereiopoda are

strong and robust; and the three posterior pairs are long and

slender, having the propodos long with the anterior and pos-

terior margins parallel.

Length ? inch.

412 Mr. H. J. Carter on Calcareous Hexactinellid

XLVIU.—On Calcareous Hexactinellid Structure in the De-

vonian Limestone ; large Fossil Hydrozoic Coralla from the

Chalk ; and further Observations on the Replacement of

Stlex by Calcite. By H. J. Carter, F.R.S. &e.

On the shores of Teignmouth and Dawlish, in Devonshire,

just after the New Red Sandstone touches the Devonian Lime-

stone of Torbay, the former contains a number of fragments

from the latter, which, as the Red-Sandstone cliff yields to the

approach of the sea, fall down upon the beach, and, becoming

rounded by the action of the waves and sand, are at length

picked up by the lapidaries, who, selecting those which present

the prettiest structure, cut and polish them for sale.

It was one of these which Mr. Sollas obtained at Dawlish,

that he presented to me, I think, in the summer of 1875, and to

which I have alluded as presenting a structure which, “ dike all

the rest of the Stromatopore, requires to be studied in all its

bearings before a correct opinion can be obtained of its original

nature’ (‘ Annals,’ 1877, vol. xix. pp. 72, 73); but since

the possibility of silex being replaced by calcite during fos-

silization has been established, and I have, through the great

kindness of Prof. Zittel, received many specimens of several

fossil Hexactinellid sponges, and have become better acquainted

with the structure of Stromatopora, I have come to the conclu-

sion that, the polished pebble presents a hexactinellid structure,

which, if not a sponge, was still not a Stromatopora.

Mr. Sollas kindly gave me polished horizontal as well as

vertical sections of the structure; and on looking out among

Prof. Zittel’s specimens for that which is most like it, I find

that, to all appearance, it is identical with Verrucocelia gre-

garia (Quenst. et Zittel; Verrucocelia, Ktallon) (‘ Annals,’

1877, vol. xx. p. 503). The specimen is two inches in dia-

meter, and appears to have been cut from a circular pebble

about an inch in thickness.

Having, however, lately visited my friend Mr. Vicary at

Exeter, whose collection of sections.of Stromatopora (which

were obtained by a gentleman from the locality mentioned,

during a residence of twenty-five years in the neighbourhood

of Teignmouth) consists of between three and four hundred

specimens, I found two among them possessing this hexac- ~

tinellid structure, but slightly modified; that is, the vertical

lines in the vertical section are larger and more evidently

hollow, but with no tabule or transverse septa, while here

and there, on the horizontal section, are intervals tending to

a stellate arrangement resembling the like in Stromatopora.

Still here the resemblance ends ; for the coenosarcal skeleton

Structure in the Devonian Limestone, de. 413

is hexactinellid, not formed of a convoluted fibre like that of

Stromatopora, and there is but one kind of pore on the surface,

viz. that of the vertical lines, not two sizes as in Stromatopora,

while the tubular lines are without tabule as just noticed; at

least this is the type to which I allude.

Here it might be mentioned that there are two distinct features

in Stromatopora which distinguish it from sponges: viz., 1st,

the vertical tubes in Stromatopora, being for the full-grown

polyps, are of the same size throughout, while all the tubes of

a sponge, being parts of the excretory canal system, continue

increasing in size from a mere point to their termination in

the oscule or vent ; and, 2nd, the vertical tubes in Stromato-

pora are interrupted by tabule or transverse septa, which do

not exist in the excretory canals of the sponge. Thus, as I

have before stated, Stromatopora more nearly resembles Tudi-

pora musica, but most of all MWillepora alcicornis ; while the

hexactinellid structure to which I have above alluded is more

like that of the fossil hexactinellid sponges—to wit, Verruco-

celia gregaria, Zitt.

Doubtless in the Devonian Limestone (which may be said

to be one mass of corals, of course including the Stromatopore,

particularly near Newton-Abbot, where Mr. Vicary tells me

there is a quarry in which not a fragment as large as a man’s

fist can be found without containing one or more species dis-

tinctly and beautifully differentiated, and therefore originally

was probably a coral reef) there were also sponges possessing

the hexactinellid structure above mentioned, unless the latter

belonged to something else ; but, be this as it may, thin slices

alone will not decide the question, which can only be deter-

mined by the possession of a whole form for dissection.

Doubtless, too, there are gradationary forms which link the

Actinozoa to the Hydrozoa ; and these may be accompanied by

their respective coralla; so that it must not always be laid

down that because the corallum is like that of an Actinozoon

it must necessarily have been one, or vice versd. To prove

that this hexactinellid structure was a sponge it would be

necessary to show that it possessed spicules, or at least an

excretory canal-system like that of sponges, which can only

be done by sectioning an entire specimen, such as Mr. Vicary

kindly gave me of Stromatopora for comparison with Mille-

pora alcicornis.

Pursuing the subject of extinct Hydrozoa still further, I find

among Dr. Bowerbank’s collections several kinds of fossils

labelled “ Flamborough-Chalk Sponges,” chiefly composed of

chalcedony with a little chalk here and there, viz. :—No. 1.

Subglobular, about the size and shape of a walnut, 1 inch in

414 Mr. H. J. Carter on Calcareous Hexactinellid

diameter. No.2. Pyriform, stipitate, smooth, with circular con-

centric lines of growth, slightly compressed, 3 inches long ; free

or large end convex, 3 x 2 inches in diameter, with a funnel-

shaped excavation in the centre 3 inch wide; the stem broken

off 3 inches from the summit, and 7-8ths x 6-8ths of an inch in

itsdiametersat thefracture. No.3. Much the same, but extended

into a cylindrical form 1 foot long, and the stem broken off as

inno. Z No.4. Much the same, but the cylindrical portion

deeply and irregularly constricted at varying intervals, so as

to present a dozen segments; ending above in being divided

into a few thick conical processes, but too imperfect to state

how many, or whether there was any excavation in the centre

as in nos. 2 and 3; covered throughout with cup-like raised

cells 1-24th inch in diameter, and about 1-8th inch apart, more

or less; uppermost segment 4 x 2 inches; deepest constriction,

which is just where the pyriform passes into the segmented

cylindrical one, 24 inches in diameter ; total length to the end

of the stem, which is broken off, 15 inches, diameter of frac-

tured end of stem 1 inch. No. 5. Agaricoid or tabular; head or

tabular part presenting concentric lines of growth on both

sides, with holes 1-24th inch in diameter, in juxtaposition

on the upper surface, like Favosites ; below, crooked lines of

elongated cells radiating from the stem to the circumference,

where they become more or less vertical to form the margin

of the head; tabular portion 43 inches in horizontal and

4-8ths inch in vertical diameter; stem round, expanding into

the head, 4} inch in diameter at the fracture. No. 6. Vasiform

complete or incomplete, 4 inches across the brim; wall 2 inch

thick ; prolonged conical apertures 1-8th inch in diameter at

the base, and 1-24th inch at the aperture, sparsely scattered

over the inner surface, about + inch apart, more or less, the

same on the outer side, but smaller in every way and more

closely approximated than those on the upper surface ; margin

round and without cells; stem broken off, about + inch in

diameter at the fracture. There are several specimens of

nos. 5 and 6, all of which differ considerably in their general

measurements; that is, some are much larger than others.

Now I am not going into the description of these fossils

further than I have done, as this would entail more time than

I can afford to spare from the study of the Spongida; but I

cannot help thus briefly noticing their characters respectively,

in order to introduce their nature under a more interesting

and satisfactory form, I think, than appears to me to have

yet been accorded to them.

Of their belonging to the genus Scyphia, Schweigger, =

Spongites, Goldfuss, I think there can be no doubt; and I

have at least identified no. 3 with fig. 12, a, b, tab. iti. in

Structure in the Devonian Limestone, &c. 415

Goldfuss’s ‘ Petrefacta.’ De Blainville rightly describes their

structure as being composed of “un tissu entitrement réti-

culé” (Man. d’Actinol. 1834, p. 537); and D’Orbigny, “ que

leur tissu a toujours été calcaire et pierreux’’ (Cours de Géol.

1849, vol. i. p. 208): two higher authorities it would be diffi-

cult to find.

In both these characters I agree; but we must go a little

further and endeavour to find out what the nature of the orga-

nism was that really built them.

We may notice, then, that in all the structure is laminar,

and the base a convoluted fibre like that of Parkeria, which,

when magnified, would, on the unbroken surface, represent

the convolutions of a brain. This was the ccenenchymal

skeleton, while in the midst of its labyrinthic structure was

an equally tortuous canal-work which held the coenenchyma

itself, and which, again, communicated with the exterior

through the sulcate lines between the convolutions. Thus

the sulcate lines in their turn became part of the labyrinthic

tubulation as the organism added layers to the surface of its

corallum, just as in Millepora alcicornis. My. Chas. Moore’s

specimen, to which I have alluded (‘ Annals,’ 1878, vol. i.

p- 310), shows this most satisfactorily ; for, like an uninfiltrated

Parkeria, the tubulation is all empty.

So far nos. 1-3 inclusive resembled Parkeria. But this

structure in no. 4 was accompanied by straight tubes radiating

from the centre at the commencement, increased in number

with the increasing growth and extended circumference of the

cylindrical corallum, terminating on the surface in the little

holes or calicles above mentioned, among which the shallowest,

of course, belong to the last layer, while the deepest belong

to the first; these tubes are about 1-48th of an inch in

diameter, and do not appear to have had any tabule. Much

the same structure appears to have existed with the calicles

in the agaricoid and vasiform varieties; only, of course, the

distance from the surface to the centre in the latter is far less

than that of the cylindrical form last mentioned.

Further, we observe that the ecenenchymal skeleton presents

a layer of finer structure of the same kind on the surface, simi-

lar to that of Millepora alcicornis (just as the circumference

of a tree &c. presents a finer structure on the growing surface

than further in towards the stock) ; while just below this runs

the ‘deep horizontal canal-system”’ of Moseley, to which I

have alluded (‘Annals,’ 1878, vol. i. p. 305), which in some

specimens of nos. 2 and 3, where it has been half rubbed off,

shows the walls of the canal and its interior, now chalce-

donized, as I have described it on the surface of Millepora

Woodwardii (‘ Annals,’ 1877, vol. xix. p. 65), while here

416 Mr. H. J . Carter on Calcareous Hexactinellid

and there, passing obliquely through this fine layer, may be

seen Moseley’s superficial branches of this system.

I omitted to state in my last paper that although this system

is only seen here and there on the surface of Millepora alci-

cornis, it comes into view directly the surface is slightly taken

off with a very sharp knife; but it should be remembered that

it is so thin that, as in Stromatopora, the least abstraction of

the surface may bring it into view or remove it altogether, as

the case may be.

Returning to the surface of these fossils, we find no. 1 possess-

ing a hole laterally about1-8th of an inch in diameter, narrowing

inwards to near the centre, and issuing from it a number of

grooves which spread over half the surface in a branched

venation ; while the other part, which is more or less dimpled

like Parkeria, presents, every here and there, a stellate ar-

rangement of such grooves issuing from the dimple.

Following this up we seem to find its homologue in the

excavation at the ends of nos. 2 and 3, from which also pro-

ceeds the same kind of branched sinuous venation. Of the

nature and function of the soft parts which occupied the hole

and its grooved venation I cannot offer an opinion, further

than that it might have been of the same nature and for the

same purpose as that of the “ horizontal canal-system,” viz.

for the formation of additional layers upon the test or corallum.

The question may also be suggested here, whether the hole seen

in many, perhaps most, specimens of Millepora globularis is

not of the same kind (‘ Annals,’ 1878, vol. 1. p. 307).

Lastly, I must state here again that, as there are so many

forms of the fossils figured by Goldfuss &c. under one head

that belong to totally different organisms, many, indeed, to

real sponges, as shown by Prof. Zittel (‘ Annals,’ 1. ¢.), it is

very desirable, as I have before stated, that they should be all

‘“‘yelegated to their proper position in the animal kingdom”

by the paleontologist. All I can do is to point out, as Prof.

Zittel has done for sponges, the structure of those which have

accidentally come before me that may be termed Hydractinian

or Hydrozoic.

One cannot help seeing here, too, that while the Hydrozoa

(as Stromatopora) played such a great part in the formation of

the Devonian-Limestone reef, they were also very plentiful

under other forms during the Cretaceous period, and that (in

Millepora alcicornis &c) they are doing the same kind of

work in the formation of coral reefs at the present day.

With reference to the replacement of silex by calcite I have

just been examining a large fossil sponge from the Chalk more

or less chalcedonized (in size 7 x 5x 23 inches, shaped like

Structure in the Devonian Limestone, ce. 417

the “cap of liberty,” compressed, conical, a little bent upon

itself and formerly hollow, as indicated by a round plug of

chalk, 14 inch in diameter, in the centre of the large or free

end, the smaller one having been the point of attachment;

surface regularly cancellated, with interstices 1-24th inch in

diameter), and find that by subjecting a portion to the dis-

solving influence of dilute nitric acid, a lithistid structure is

brought out, in which part is chalcedonic and part calcareous,

the latter in many instances having disappeared, while the

former as often remains as a fragment of the original trifid

lithistid spicule—just as in Prof. Zittel’s case (‘ Annals,’

1877, vol. xx. p. 264). Here, then, it is perfectly evident that

the originally siliceous spicule of the lithistid has, to a certain

extent, been replaced by calcareous material.

At the conclusion of my description of Mr. Thomson’s fossil

sponges from the Carboniferous Limestone of §8.W. Scotland

(‘ Annals,’ 1878, vol. i. p. 141) it is stated that, not only the

chalcedonized spicules of Hyalonema Smithit present rhombo-

hedral excavations, but the casts of turreted shells which

are composed of chalcedony present the same phenomenon ;

and it might be added that, on the fretted-out surface of a

large block of Stromatopora from the Devonian Limestone, I

have just found casts of turreted and bivalve shells composed

of calcite, which also present this rhombohedral excavation.

Here, then, we have three states, viz. :—-1, the original sili-

ceous sponge-spicule chalcedonized ; 2, the casts of shells in

chalcedony ; and 3, the casts of shells in calcite, all presenting

the same kind of rhombohedral excavations; and striking as

it appears that the chalcedony and the calcite should respec-

tively present the same kind of rhombohedral excavation, weare

impelled to the conclusion, on the one hand, that the chalcedony

is encroached upon by the calcite; while, on the other hand,

the calcite, as a matter of course, weathers out in the form of

its natural crystallization. I omitted to mention, in connexion

with the former, that the fossilized spicules of Hyalonema

Smithii do not present any of this double composition in

the undecomposed Carboniferous Limestone, where they are

quite smooth until subjected to the dissolving influence of an

acid, when they acquire the same kind of rhombohedral ex-

cavation on the surface that is seen in the spicules of Hyalo-

nema Smithii &c. when found loose in the ‘ rotten” or dis-

integrated rock.

Lately Mr. Charles Moore, F.G.8., sent me some specimens

of fossil sponge-spicules from the Liassic rocks of Brocastle,

found also abundantly on the weathered surfaces of the Liassic

rocks on both sides of the Bristol Channel, as a sample of

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol.i.

418 On Calcareous Hexactinellid Structure, dc.

what have been supposed to be the remains of Calcispongiz,

from their triradiate appearance and calcareous composition

(Grantia antiqua, Moore, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., Dec. 1867,

p. 538, pl. xvi. figs. 33, 34). They are white, and all frag-

ments of quadriradiate forms—that is, spicules composed of

a trifid head and shaft, to me very much like the quadri-

radiates of Pachastrella abyss, Sdt.; but be this as it may,

among them was a head and part of the shaft of a trifur-

cate spicule which must have belonged to a siliceous sponge

(Geodia or Stelletta), im the same condition of fossilization

as the rest—that is, calcareous. I took a fragment of one

from the parent rock, and having placed it in a little dilute

nitric acid, saw it effervesce, and at last break down into

minute particles ; while Mr. Moore informs me that he treated

some with hydrochloric acid, and they all disappeared.

Now it is very natural that trifid forms of sponge-spicule

should be taken for those belonging to the Calcispongie,

especially if they are calcareous ; but it should be remembered

that while there are very few Calcispongiz which possess

triradiates or quadriradiates sufficiently large to pass through

the ordeal of fossilization without disappearing altogether,

there are many Pachastrellida which possess both forms much

larger than the largest of any that are known to exist in the

Calcispongie ; while the possibility of the siliceous spicule

becoming calcareous during fossilization has, as above stated,

been established.

Thus we may find separate sponge-spicules of the siliceous

sponges and whole siliceous sponges themselves calcified; but

it would not be right to call these “‘ Calcispongie:” even

“ Calcificatee ’? would be better than this.

With reference to the chalcedonized Pachastrellida and

their spicules in the Chalk, I have now two beautiful speci-

mens that appear to have been freed from the latter by an

acid, each of which is from 3 to 4 inches in its longest diameter,

one irregularly lobate, and the other vase-shaped, where the

quadriradiate spicules, simple and trifid at the ends of their

arms respectively, are identical with those of Pachastrella

abysst, Sdt., while they are so confusedly thrown together,

and the mass thus rendered so characteristically asperous, that

it is impossible to see in them any thing but a Pachastrella.

Here too, in many parts, the trifid heads are alone visible,

which might be easily taken for those of a Calcisponge—espe-

cially as Pachastrella, like the Calcisponge, being without that

fibrous structure which entails regularity in the distribution

of its spicules, appears to be entirely without arrangement of

the latter; so that in this respect each looks like a bag of pins.

Miscellaneous. 419

Thus we have undoubted evidence of the existence of Pa-

chastrella in the Cretaceous period, but none such of a Calci-

sponge.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On the Young Stages of some Osscous Fishes: Development of the Tail.

By Mr. Au. Agcasstz.

In this valuable memoir the author refers to observations made

in great detail principally upon Pleuronectes. The conclusions at

which he arrives are of great interest in connexion with the succes-

sion of forms among fossil fishes.

The young Plewrvnectes, on escaping from the egg, has the pos-

terior extremity of its dorsal chord straight, and its caudal fin is

rounded. Soon the extremity of the dorsal chord becomes greatly

arched upwards, presenting a concavity towards the ventral surface;

at this moment appears the first trace of separation between the em-

bryonic caudal fin and the permanent caudal, as also the first indica-

tions of the principal and accessory rays of the tail. In the succeeding

period the emargination which exists between the embryonic and

the permanent caudal has become deeper and the chord is more

arched, the rays are well marked, and the permanent caudal extends

backward beyond the embryonic caudal.

In the further course of development the embryonic caudal

acquires the form of a large independent lobe; the permanent fin

extends entirely beneath it, and forms a distinct fin having the ap-

pearance of a second anal. On arriving at this point the caudal

region of a young Pleuronectes presents a striking resemblance to

that of the young Lepidosteus as described and figured by Wilder *.

The arch formed by the caudal extremity of the chord becomes

still more strongly marked ; and the permanent caudal extends at

first as far as the embryonic caudal, and afterwards passes beyond

it. The embryonic caudal is thrown more and more upwards ; and

the rays of the permanent caudal acquire a fan-like arrangement.

While these latter changes are taking place we observe a disap-

pearance of the notochord, which precedes the formation of the

urostyle. The embryonic caudal also disappears more and more,

and finally only presents the form of a slight semitransparent thick-

ening of the dorsal line. On the other hand, the permanent caudal

increases continually ; from being pointed it becomes rounded, and

acquires the form seen in the adult. At the same time the ossifica-

tion of the vertebree takes place, the cartilages which support the

rays appear, &c.

Mr. A. Agassiz has observed these same phases of development of

the caudal fin in a great number of other genera of fishes belonging

* “Notes on the American Ganoids,” Proc. Amer. Assoc, Ady. Sci.

1876 (Detroit Meeting).

420 Miscellaneous.

to several families. In all the tail passes gradually from the condi-

tion of a ventral appendage situated beneath the dorsal column, to

that of a terminal tail placed in continuation of the line of the

vertebre. The distinction between the two fins always occurs, but

in a more or less distinct manner.

The following are the consequences which the author draws from

his observations :—

Huxley and Van Beneden have opposed the theory of Agassiz and

Vogt as to the parallelism existing between the embryonic tails of

the existing osseous fishes and those of the fishes which appeared

before the Jurassic epoch. Huxley appeals to the fact that the

osseous fishes of the present day have tails the structure of which is

really heterocercal. Van Beneden points out that in the Plagio-

stomi the tail commences by being homocercal before becoming hete-

rocercal, while, according to the theory of Agassiz and Vogt, the

young Plagiostomi ought to have a preeminently heterocercal tail.

A. Agassiz admits with Huxley that the form of tail called

homocercal by Agassiz and Vogt is due only to a deceptive external

appearance ; he also recognizes with Van Beneden that the young

Plagiostomi, during the earliest periods of their development, have

a strictly homocercal tail; but he nevertheless holds that neither

of these two anatomists has upset the old theory of Agassiz and

Vogt, and that we must retain this great generalization of the con-

cordance of the embryonic with the paleontological development.

It is only necessary to take another step, and to interpret somewhat

differently from Agassiz and Vogt the arrangement of the tail

which so predominates in the bony fishes of the present epoch.

It must first of all be recongnized that heterocerceity does not

correspond to the first stage, and that neither Von Baer nor Agassiz

and Vogt have asserted that it does so, but that they have merely

indicated this arrangement as characterizing one of the first stages

of development. In point of fact, the fish, on issuing from the egg,

has a nearly symmetrical tail, the notochord extending in a straight

line in the direction of the caudal extremity. This stage, which

represents the first form of the tail of the Teleostei as well as of the

other groups, and which precedes that of the heterocercal tail pro-

perly so called, is what A. Agassiz proposes to call the leptocardial

state.

Thus, from the embryogenic point of view, the tail of the Selachii

is formed perfectly in accordance with the laws of development of

the other fishes; and it only remains to see how far this agrees with

paleontological history.

If we examine the tails of the Devonian fishes we are struck

with the exact parallelism that exists in this respect between these

ancient representatives of the group and the successive stages of

the tail in Pleuronectes. Among Devonian fishes there are some

(e. g. Glyptolemus, Gyroptychius) of which the tail is distinctly

leptocardial ; others (such as Holoptychius and Osteolepis) have

slightly modified tail, presenting a very feeble tendency towards

heterocerceity ; then come Glyptolepis &c., in which the hetero-

Miscellaneous. 421

cerceity is more distinct ; and, finally, in the genus Dipterus the

heterocercal character becomes strongly marked.

The parallelism between the fossil genera and the embryonic

stages of the existing osseous fishes is still more striking if we ex-

amine forms such as Phaneropleuron and Tristichopterus, in which

the tail is lobed, the dorsal column penetrating into the dorsal lobe,

-as in the young Pleuronectes. The genera Acanthodes, Diplacanthus,

Cheirolems, &c. of the Old Red Sandstone represent the stages of

Pleuronectes in which there is a first indication of the separation

between the true caudal and the embryonic caudal.

In the subsequent modifications of the tail in fossil fishes there

is a tendency to the gradual diminution of the embryonic or supe-

rior lobe, and to the predominant development of that which is to

become the caudal lobe proper.

On comparing the most ancient forms with the genera Plutysomus,

Semionotus, Lepidotus, and, lastly, Pachycormus, we recognize, as in

the development of the Teleostei of the present epoch, a gradual

approach to an externally homocercal tail.

To these facts, demonstrating the parallelism that exists between

the embryonic and the paleontological development of the tail, Mr.

Agassiz adds others derived from characters of ancient Ganoids

which recur in the embryos of the Teleostei.

If we wish to formulate the conclusions of Mr. Agassiz in Hiicke-

lian language, we may say that they supply a fresh proof in favour

of the law according to which “ ontogenesis is the abridged and

rapid recapitulation of phylogenesis.”—Proc. Amer. Acad. of Arts

and Sci. vol, xiii. October 1877 ; Bibl. Univ. March 15,1878, Arch.

des Sci. p. 368.

On Selaginopsis, Polyserias, and Pericladium.

By M. C. Mrrzscuxowsxy.

According to Mr. Norman’s “ Note on Selaginopsis (= Polyserias

Hincksit, Mereschk.) and on the Circumpolar Distribution of certain

Hydrozoa,” which appeared in the ‘Annals’ for March 1878, my

genus Polyserias had been previously described by Prof. Allman

under the name of Selagmopsis (Journ. Linn. Soe. vol. xii. 1876);

hence the species that I described in the last number of this Journal

must be named Selaginopsis mirabilis, Verr., and Selaginopsis

Hincksti, mihi. However, I am not yet quite certain of this: and

unfortunately it is impossible for me at present to verify Mr. Nor-

man’s opinion ; for in the whole Russian empire there does not exist

vol. xii. (1876) of the Journal in which Prof. Allman has published

his diagnoses. The Academy of Sciences of St. Petersburg does not

receive this journal at all; and the Public Library only possesses it

down to the year 1875.

It seemse specially doubtful to me whether the genus Pericladium

is really distinct from Selaginopsis; and perhaps it would be better

to retain under the name of Polyserias, proposed by me, a genus

which would combine Allman’s two genera, and more particularly

422 Miscellaneous.

because this name better expresses the characters common to all the

species which would fall under it than either of the other two

names.

On a new Gorilla from Congo. By MM. Atxrx and Bovvrer.

MM. Lucan and Petit have lately sent from Landana (Congo), as"

part of the results of their hunting on the banks of the Kouilo, near

the village of King Mayema, the skeleton and skin of an adult

female gorilla, which possesses peculiar interest, both from its own

nature and because it serves to confirm the recent discovery of this

anthropoid in the above region.

Although Battell, about 200 years ago, noticed the presence of

great apes, apparently gorillas, in Congo, and in 1851 Dr. Ford

maintained that this animal was met with from the Camaroons to

Angola, Geoffroy St.-Hilaire in 1858 regarded their existence as

demonstrated only on the shores of the Gaboon and the banks of

the Moundah or Danger River. Since that date the researches of

Du Chaillu, Marche, and the Marquis of Compiégne have carried

the habitat of this great ape further south, as far as the Fernand-

Vaz. In 1877 Dr. Falkenstein brought to Europe a young living

gorilla, which he had purchased in the region of the Kouilo (4° 35'

S. lat.) ; and one of the authors quite recently received the skin of a

young female from the same locality.

“‘ At that time,” they say, ‘‘ we did not think of separating this

species from the type ; and, indeed, its youth could not allow of its

furnishing satisfactory characters for specific separation. This,

however, is not the case with the adult specimen which forms the

subject of the present communication.

“This female, which is aged, is remarkable as being of smaller

size than the Gorilla gina; and its head is proportionally still

smaller. It also differs in numerous characters, which we purpose

to give in detail in the ‘ Bulletin’ of the Zoological Society of

France, and which consist principally in the depth of the temporal

fossee, the narrowness of the cranium behind the orbital arches, the

narrowness of the interorbital space, and a greater prominence of

the keel which rises in the middle of this space, the length and

flattening of the zygomatic arches, and also a very noticeable dimi-

nution of the height of the spinous apophyses of the first cervical

vertebre.

“‘ Its coat, grey and brown on the body, black on the limbs, with

red parts on the head and pubis, does not differ essentially from

that which several authors have rather vaguely described, except by

a very sharp separation on the flanks between the brown of the

belly and the grey of the back, and by the red tint of the pubic

regions ; but it presents this remarkable peculiarity—that the back

is thickly covered with long hair, contrary to what is seen in the

other gorillas, in which the skin of this region is denuded and

simply covered with short and worn hairs.

Miscellaneous. 423

“From this we may conclude that our animal does not take its

repose like the Gorilla gina (that is to say, supported against its

back), but that, like the chimpanzees, it has much more arboricolar

habits, which is also more in accordance with the reduction of its

size.

“All these differences justify us in regarding our specimen as

belonging to a distinct species, to which we give the name of Gorilla

mayema, from that of the negro chief of the village near which it

was killed.”—Comptes Rendus, January 7, 1878, p. 56.

On the Rhizopoda of the Salt Lake of Szamosfalva.

By Dr. Gera Enrz.

Dr. Entz has described the Rhizopoda obtained by him from a

salt pool at Szamosfalva, near Klausenberg, in Hungary. He pro-

cured in all twelve species, five of which, all shelled species, are

described as new, and two of them as the types of new genera.

These are Plewrophrys helix, Plectrophrys (g.n.) prolifera, Euglypha

pusilla, Microcometes tristrypetus, and Orbulinella (g.n.) smaragdea ;

the other forms noticed are Ciliophrys infusionum, Cienk., Podo-

stoma jiligerum, Clap. & Lachm., and five species of Ameba (quttula,

limax, princeps, diffluens, and radiosa).

A previous examination of the Infusoria of the salt pools of

Torda and Szamosfalva had furnished the author with some belong-

ing to exclusively marine types; but the greater part were such as

occur both in salt and fresh water, and only about one fourth of

the Infusoria observed belonged to forms previously known only

from fresh water.

In the case of the Rhizopods, the majority belong to forms which

are very common in fresh water, but which must probably be re-

ferred to the category of organisms which occur indifferently in both

fresh and salt water; and, so far as this supposition applies to the

Amobe, Dr. Entz furnishes a confirmation of it in a subsequent

short note, in which he states that he found Ameba imax and <A.

radiosa very abundantly in sea-water from Cuxhaven. (He regards

the marine forms A. marina, Duj., A. polypodia, F. KE. Schulze,

and possibly also Protameba polypodia, Hick., as probably identical

with A. radtosa.)

Of the forms peculiar to the Szamosfalva salt pool, two (namely

Euglypha pusillazand Microcometes tristrypetus) find their nearest

relations in freshwater organisms. Plewrophrys helix, on the con-

trary, belongs to a marine type. Of the two new genera, Orbuli-

nella is most nearly related to the marine perforated Foraminifera,

and Plectrophrys is referred to the neighbourhood of Pleurophrys,

Plagiophrys, and Chlamydophrys, and may be either a marine or

a freshwater type. As a negative character bearing on the marine

or freshwater affinities of the Rhizopodal fauna of Szamosfalva, the

author remarks on the total absence of Arcelle and Difflugie, both

of which are so abundant in, and characteristic of, fresh water.—

Hungarian ‘ Naturhistorische Hefte,’ 1877, iii. & iv.

424 Miscellaneous.

Note on the Locality and Synonyms of Sternotomis cornutor, Fabr.

(Coleoptera, Lamiide). By Cuartes O. WATERHOUSE.

The type specimen of Sternotomis cornutor, Fabr., is in the British

Museum, said to have come from America. The species has since

been described by Prof. Westwood under the name S. comes, said (with

doubt) to have come from Madagascar. Two examples ( dand 2 )

have recently been added to the British-Museum collection from the

Island of Johanna, off Madagascar. The two specimens agree

exactly with the type which is figured by Olivier. While recording

this locality I take the opportunity of correcting the synonymy of

the species as given in the ‘ Munich Catalogue.’ In that work the

names are placed thus :—

1. cornutor, Fabr., Oliv., Klug.

maculata, Oliv., Casteln.

2. Norrist, Westw.

comes, Westw.

The following will be found correct :—

1. cornutor, Fabr., Oliv., nze Klug.

comes, Westw.

2. maculata, Oliv., Casteln.

cornutor, Klug.

3. Norrisi, Westw.

The authors of the Catalogue were doubtless misled by Klug, who,

after giving a diagnosis of ‘“‘ cornutor, Fabr.,” wrongly identified,

places maculata, Ol., as a synonym of it. How comes came to be

associated with Norrisi, with which, according to Thomson, it is

scarcely congeneric, it is difficult to imagine.

British Museum,

April 1878.

On the Genus Haliphysema.

To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History.

Srrs,—I regret to find that through inadvertency there is a discre~

pancy between the Plate illustrating my paper in the April ‘Annals’

and its description. To make the Plate intelligible I must ask

your readers to change the figures 3 into 7, and 4, 5, 6, 7 to

3, 4, 5, 6.

Yours faithfully,

April 3, 1878. A. M. Norman.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES. ]

No. 6. JUNE 1878.

XLIX.—On the Reticularian and Radiolarian Rhizopoda

(Foraminifera and Polycystina) of the North-Polar Eape-

dition of 1875-76. By Henry B. Brapy, F.R.S.

[Plates XX. & XXI.]

FORAMINIFERA.

Amonest the collections brought home by Capt. H. W.

Feilden, R.A., the naturalist to the North-Polar Expedition

which sailed in 1875 under the command of Capt. Sir G.

Nares, R.N., were a number of gatherings of material which

had been laid aside from time to time for examination with

respect to Microzoa and Microphyta. There were in all some

fifty or sixty packages; and after the Diatomacee had been

determined, Capt. Feilden was kind enough to place them in

my hands for the investigation of the Foraminifera and Poly-

cystina. The material consisted for the most part of sound-

ings; but there were a few samples of dust and dirt from

discoloured ice, and of mud from beds of glacial deposit of

greater or less age. ‘The soundings were from depths of from

10 to 220 fathoms; and the quantity of each was compara-

tively small. The samples from mud-beds were larger, and

yielded pretty good series of Foraminifera; but as they exhibit

. a fauna which is practically identical with that of the present

sea-bottom at moderate depths in the same latitudes, they

require no separate treatment. The dust from ice-hummocks

and similar positions gave no Rhizopoda worth recording.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 23

426 Mr. H. B. Brady on the Reticularia and

All the material was carefully washed to clear it of impal-

pable inorganic matter. This process seriously reduced

many of the already small samples; and some of them left

scarcely any residue for examination. Nevertheless of the

fifty or sixty gatherings about forty yielded sufficient organic

remains to give a general, though of course not an exhaustive,

idea of the microzoic fauna of their respective localities. In

some instances a number of the soundings were from points

so near together and at depths so similar, that the results from

several could be incorporated with advantage; but after con-

densation on this wise, and the omission of a few of those

which gave obviously incomplete lists, there remains the

groundwork for a fairly representative distribution-table com-

prising twenty-four stations. ‘This must be regarded, under

the circumstances, as very satisfactory. ‘The primary object

of the expedition was geographical rather than biological ;

there was no opportunity for dredging; and the chances of

obtaining material in other ways were beset with difficulties

hardly to be appreciated by those who, like myself, have been

accustomed to collect in temperate regions.

The following is a list of the Stations arranged in order of

latitude, beginning at the most southern point of the series.

The geographical details, thanks to careful labelling, can be

stated with much accuracy. ‘The capital letters A to X refer

to the heading of the columns in the accompanying Table.

The area comprised in the Table may be divided into three

sections. The first sixteen columns (A to P) refer to Jocali-

ties in Baffin’s Bay and Smith Sound. These are separated

by the whole length of Kennedy Channel (nearly two degrees)

from Discovery Bay (Q), the only representative of the

latitude of Hall Basm. Robeson Channel (nearly one degree)

intervenes between this and the nearest of the seven remaining

Stations.

A. Glacial mud, Tyndall Glacier, 27 fathoms, Sept. 12,

1876, situate in Bardin Bay, east side of Baftin’s Bay,

lat. 77° 15’ N.

A little box of reddish clay with worn shell-fragments, _

containing relatively but few organisms; the Foraminifera

belong chiefly to the genera Verneuilina, Cassidulina, Trun-

catulina, and Nonionina.

B. Off Cape Isabella, 220 fathoms, lat. 78° 20! N.

This is the deepest sounding containing Foraminifera ; but -

it is richer in Diatomacee (notably Coscinodiscus radia-

tus) than in Rhizopoda. Of the latter, Cassidulina, Trun-

catulina, and Nonionina are again the most prominent types.

"qo. “eTIe4 Barnooyity, | “eg

* Rie tess ane 6 62 "HO (Z ‘s@euyNs3e —— =)

e) Rl ets a9. oessniag vurnoojenbumy | “eg

* oo. . Cr ee ae aid CH. ‘Srperpsoa

"7 §-g ‘yemenbs varmueqoory, | “[g

Tere" “f § gq “womoa varmae, | Og

. * ae verre sss 010 7 “eLesopou BULIAMAZIgE 6L

teerereeseres ees aig oF ‘eursid — "g)

Teo. ‘suvurnpssu BrynyXay, | +77

"oo" "940,.q “esourunbs warnzr, | 91

“019. “Byeanae ‘e)

‘god nakd varmyng | “Fy

** -votH ‘saplouomure varied ¢ | “ey

"+ munTy “eyernuyyd varpnotmny | zy

"MO. ‘seploraqds wiuarng | “TL

Sete eee OD 7 Bqey OL

* Je § i ‘suvzteysv vuruoroy | “69

+ guury “edstao vyfamoysATog | 99

MO. ‘SeRETMOTS vurqaoasiqT | "19

“qo. “eye[nyound vurnurayng | “99

"7 Hg “eyeuoioa vurpemouy | ‘cg

wee

‘ “gg “esopnSue vutesta y | “FO

terecnce pee vurydromAjog | *e9

weet eseeersess “ay ‘eyeLqstuIes —— | "zg

sete ee ee eee pruanbag BUITOvLd "19

“tp Og ‘emoystp BuaseT | 099

seeee “fjuo “eye "6S

W 8 FT “wnprdero vpreyaystty) | “g¢

bere ug 7 ‘snngy vurpmsreyy | “76

tresses sss Apquoyy SiRauty BUTTNULST A

* é

1 ee HR

5 ii: SiS a

NS ate

asses

* ee

SSS

We lee 0 7 SsraosruteStqo[3 vonqvy “88

oe | @ Ieee theses * anupy ‘suedu Burmooyig |-79

fe * ve ieee ee eee es hyo ‘eBa0[qo 98

“0G a sie alg “etayyqNS vurpeyuecy | “ce

Fg ra FORD OSG ET g ‘gynorpex vITesopo NT ‘Fe

‘AGB, 8 Seuor puv lexIVT “sissoy

Ur payeretunue ‘Keaton pue puxpmedrry

JO8}SvOd OY} WoL Soloeds ONOKW [BUOLIppy |

. Tose ee sn Moe hoe peel we | * * | * * * * * * * | fovea eee e trees ta Qo SeorjorR ——

* «+ | ® * * * on * * * * Cee le * * a * * * * * * ees ae 4S BTTAUIOISATO,

miershets |i)" oa eaPep | els fal |- | >|: | ees

a. oo ¥ * ae * ate * a * * oo * oa a * * * * * * ae) if = ve fe. 7 ater? 1deap ——

| CS a ‘Bsserdep

* on on oa ee ee oe oe on * * oe * 4 ed * * * * on | ee wir “A o. |. ‘bowopg “opnywortqum

on * we oe a * oe on on on on . oo * * * * * .. * * | * v6 * * |). cess eyar 9 yp Seyduos warMOTUO NT

= Fan on oo a8 oe a * * int os fs * oe < * a Mae ay Or a fee “AL ‘uyvsni109 VITA

we a ae os ee ee re. oo oe we . . ve ar oe oe on ‘ oe sg “euRLUTat ou

eee mens exe le | ae | el ak | we we | al we | el we | wl we | we ee || | ae |. aoe Creag esate

on on oa oe oe oe oe ae oe oe oe oe oe oe we ae we ve # oe oe oe ne oe ve bee ere wee "QO MT “BeSNG4O BUIG.LOOSICT

on oe oo oe oo oe a. oo ae oe or .- oe oe oe we o. oa oe oar oa * * on * sees sonar “eydoaqsdyo BUT[LIMAULa A

ae oe on oe eve ae ae, on we * oe . we . oe oe Fy oe re) ei ee we * , CH g ‘stag BLEENAXeT,

on pe |i |Peciget ec. I) Goce iff sol, |e nayill aCe BRAN BREE Verran Jur EMU * . vs race | sce’ Heer aug. “eyeqound vuratpog

ee ete enews ee | ee ) | os | we we we | oe | we fae Ts * | % -| vary Tsraqraryog BuIA,

mn ie Gell cue }) eusse|| orc 6.55) (ccs aN i eee occ 1) cacy || SE ee rae . . Joc: | ++ |.. iieneererste MO. “ussyuudeya

ita * ao) wig we a Oe aa ée * w. ee on * on - * oa oe we o. on on oi oe |e Meee ee wee "HO “BYBAO BUTUTTTUE,

a en ee eee |) co) | cen | ote ae eww i ge | me | we | we | we | og t. Bote cs caeetee “WO. BSSUto

* * * * * * on * * * * *% * * = 0 * * * * * * * * * H |e Been ewes 0 BYOStARy, BarMpiss¢)

* oo ue oe oe oe oa w. on * on ve *” * * * . * . o oe * on * aa eA “QlQ a vewsid votes Q a

oe web ifl ele. |, ol ie * we oo ae ove oe fm ores |e a ce Prt) es nee eae . ut piveatains “qo. ByeyUr |

* Wes |W okse |i ae less: le ae Se ltnsts! {|| «| -#e * * lee | # * * * * * * * * * "eA “QUO. ‘Seploy[Ng, BUALLAsIqo |

* * oe on oe ee ae ity we on re Bo oy oe = Fu = pial on oe . . .. aes: ‘quoayg “ered Ata wurpeudg |

oe oe oe oe oe oe oe ee . oe oe on oe ae oe . * oe oe ee oe . . .. Meee ee ee os “wMautog “eyepunyo. —— I

ced ||| toe Rae Moe! esol ee]! cic |) a A OR MR loc Whoo |: eee es eel ik all oe : MG é Does e sess gig @p “eyeurtmae |

we of on ae oe oe os ae oe we oe on ve oe se ee . oe * * os . atten eeee “ql (Z “eeaetqord —— 9z, |

* on on oe on oe oe ate on os we oe on . oe on * ' * + oy * o al éng Se OY ¢ MA u109 —— “We |

* oe . * os oe oa or oe oe oe oa on ne on * * oe ee we * on oe .. |... ne LS AL aoe, vurydxoms [og 0%

& oa oa oo on on a oe a * * ve on . * on oe . ae oe ae on we Cire! ace YUnT, “ayRNjod BLE][OPSLI, "GG |

* ca we oe oa on we oe oe * * ae oe . ae oa * oe a. . * eee or sess aug @7 ‘stanurm0a ‘PG

oa oe oe we ave oe oe rf oe * . a oe oo * on * o. Alo oe * oa si an Hess cag. g yeradned varpeznecy "Sz |

* se on oe o on om ae oe * on es oe or on . on oo od o oe on oe . ee lee en eee QO, CyVstAxy vuryNpuepy EG

* om on oe oe oe wis a ‘ * ve hac we on oe oie * oo ale 8 o. * ar oe Oo cee Dojuopy “esouenbs ia

oa oa ne oa oe on we oe oe * * oe oe we * * * ve oe oe oe we oo . QO ‘ojaut —— “0G |

on * oe oe oe oe on oe . oe on ae ne on on on on oo we oe ae WeGioe ies | 0 eee 40. “ByBpnvd ‘6 |

on on oo oa oe oe on oe oe * +e oo oe oe oe ae on oo oe . oe . 5 we ‘aou “euBImapTIa sy "SL

on on on on ae on oe oe we * . oe oe oo oa on on on on * ssp & cg “eyeqoundoyerys “A |

ve 2.0! 9575) | Sohcn | ere (ia ee. ee | cn eres (PROM ltr | ae | sts fle || re [ice | te [eden eset sss ain a Sqer4S —— ‘OI |

* oe oa oe se * oe .. oe E * oa * ae * * * * oe re * * * se oo te eese ccs ees wea 6 9 44) “eqeoTns —— “CT |

ws ae ee ete ern Ih Tolmer wot || aa |) ns, | es, || dey lee Fa ical ie Sere) =e |) oee|! oe Nee eta |, sca hove ssnayy “eyeynoide —— | "FT |

* * oe oo on on oe oe os * * oo . * * on * on oe oa oe oe * .. 9 4q “eyeutsrent —— Sf fa

* oo oe oe on on oe . oe oe oe . oe * * * : a ae o. . oo evens > -fpjuopy ‘stacey —— GL |

oa alg oe oe ae oe os ne oe * eg . . * oe oe * . . * * . . ‘hoquopy “esoqoys vuase'yT if

os oe erat (fp -aysy |) caves ||| “ere: ae ans ° * ae oe oe ae || ae © ies we oe oe oe BIOey IOS. cc Cee cachoune ou “eyeSuojo vutummesad (Ey ‘OL |

ae . oe Cnt on oe ie oe * * oe ae oa oo * * * * on * * ae o * vie [iv o Mine tec tn acne ‘aou *ByBIaTLO[s —— ‘eet

* on on oe * on or ee * * ae * * on us a sie * * ne we * at ree ee MD ne es MOM ssveLeuwa —— "Saul

on oa oe oa on oe . ae * . oe . oa we . on . . se fee dem ncer ens qofjuoyy ‘sucnid.toos fel

on on on on . on on . . * . on on . ae . oe on o . on : vee os a Ad ‘SLOMLOJISNY BION] 9

oa oe on oe on ae oe. . oa * on . oe oo . on . * ve + setts Byuopy ‘epunyorqns —— a)

* bm aceon) ROO Cry 1) co Wo * * * . ce] oe * sie He Sis . * guy “coampnutuias vurfnoojanbum?) 'y

oe * oe on oa * on oa we we oe . . oe on on . ee oa * oe . on va [ene e ewes VOW VYVULIVOLI} BUTTNIOTLL, *§

: * +e a ony on . o * oa .- on . o. oe : oa o oe on oe ne Pin ee eis *“+ssnaar ‘suaaToAut —— | °%

ae, ac 7. * on ae aa 4 a Cfiet a = 6 cay ee oe Fhe cat) we ait Riss an ie ee fe MS oo Goes ‘My eaaerpog vatdenutog T

2 Sa eM eOnlenG Sasori O | <N |W | I | oy Ci ete este |p) |) ee Ge On| a |W |

push 2l/o|] pe iecieciiee:| o} of il jeilag a/ ww! of of of of w

“swe mo | £| 2 | 3 | 2 é e g |ee| 8| 8 zl oo {Se | Se 1 Pe wel 7/2 |<2| 8) 8 eles 8

g| 2) 4 lez) | = | a |28 | Se Se | 22 8s [Be | se [Se lee aE lek | ee | ed | 22 [28 [82/22

ea) |B FSIS Ee)“ | gS] BE] &] gi ¢ ~) ~ 8s |ae Sel slfa| El S| &

> Pat - 5 5 2 5 i o Co a

E 5 "1 NP aS mea | elke Sal & | Bio) #| -

Be lRE|EE| 3 els =) #\a5 =

as Go|) ° & "E

Bo | ee [82 :

SUMP EEIEIEIEIEIEIEIRIPIEIFIElEIEIEIEIEIEIElElElElEe

4 Peele) ee leledeial/si/s/sieielelalelalalels 4

: Seater ele lepeneleitie|/alal/sileale|/eiele 2/84

Se weeta a)" |e aya el slealelelalel/e/4lealelale| 2

: Ng

TOA ‘G-w98 “HEN “Boy y “uay] VUSAININVUOT OLLOUV AO NOTLAGIYISIG THL ONIMOHS ATIAVL [-ogp d 20nf o

—

Lidoehgsad

Boe shi

hee (meeyg} at mt

Radiolaria of the Arctic Expedition, 1875-76. 427

C. Off Cape Sabine, Smith Sound, 50 fathoms, lat. 78° 44! N.

D. Off coor Island, Smith Sound, 210 fathoms, lat. 78°

44'N.

The former of these, from shallower water, contains but few

species ; the latter gives a tolerably rich list of Foraminifera—

Polystomella arctica particularly fine and abundant, the genera

Lagena, Cassidulina, Truncatulina, Pulvinulina, and Nonio-

nina all well represented. There were in addition a few

Ostracoda *.

E. Off Cape Victoria, Bache Island, 35 fathoms, lat. 79° 14!

The genus 7runcatulina by far the most abundant, asso-

ciated with Noninonia, Polystomella, and other shallow-water

types. Contained also Ostracoda of five species and a few

Coscinodisct.

F. Between Walrus Shoal and Victoria Head, Sept. 8, 1876,

57 fathoms, lat. 79° 26’ N.

A poor lot, containing little beyond Cassidulina, Nonionina,

and the weaker forms of Polystomella, with one or two Radio-

laria. The only specimen of Pulvinulina Micheliniana, a

common surface form in the North Atlantic, found in the

entire collection, was in this material.

G. and H. Franklin-Pierce Bay, lat. 79° 28! N.

The former (G) refers to two soundings, in 13 fathoms and

15 fathoms respectively ; the latter (H) to two in 46 fathoms.

The contents of all four were much alike, sandy mud with small

worn stones; those from the greatest depth contained the

largest variety of organisms. The salient types of Foramini-

fera in all are Letuola, Truncatulina, and Polystomella. The

shallow-water material furnished the only specimens found of

the genus Discorbina. It contained in addition a number of

diatoms, which my friend Mr. F. Kitton, of Norwich, tells

me are as follows :—T*riceratium arcticum ; Biddulphia, sp. ;

Rhabdonema Croziert ; Grammatophora marina; and Actino-

ptychus undulatus. A few valves of Ostracoda were also met

with.

I. Allman Bay, Sept. 14, 1876, 25 fathoms, lat. 79° 30! N.

The Bay between Cape Hawks and Cape d’Urville.

A tube full of sand and stones, but rich in Foraminifera.

The genus Lagena in considerable variety, with Polymorphina,

* The Ostracoda were carefully preserved throughout, and form the

subject of a separate notice by my brother, Dr. G. 8. SHY

29%

428 Mi. H. B. Brady on the Reticularia and

Cassidulina, Pulvinulina, and Nonionina as its prominent

associates.

J, K, and L. Dobbin Bay, Aug. 28 to Sept. 1, 1876, lat.

79° 35! N.

The column J includes three soundings, namely in 45, 46,

and 47 fathoms, whilst K and Lare from 113 and 125 fathoms

respectively. The muddy material obtained in 46 fathoms

contained the largest number of forms; in that from the

greatest depth organisms of all sorts are rare. The leading

types of Foraminifera are Casstdulina, Pulvinulina, and Poly-

stomella.

M and N. Off Hayes Point, Aug. 18 and 19, 1876, lat.

79° 42) N.

Two soundings, the one in 22, the other in 35 fathoms, _

containing a few Diatomacez and Ostracoda and a sprinkling

only of Rhizopoda, the latter chiefly Cassidulina and Trun-

catulina, with Virgulina, Pulvinulina, and Polystomella in

smaller numbers.

O and P. Off Cape Frazer, Aug. 24th, 1876, lat. 79° 45! N.

The column marked O is compiled from a single sounding

at 50 fathoms; that headed P is from three soundings, all at a

depth of 80 fathoms. The latter taken together yield by

far the best representative list of the whole series, comprising

in all thirty-three species of Foraminifera. The most charac-

teristic amongst them are Polystomella arctica, which is of large

size and abundant, and the hitherto undescribed type Hyper-

ammina. Almost all the genera contained in the other lists

are present to a greater or less extent, the most important

exception being Polymorphina. 'The same locality also gave

the richest list of Ostracoda—eleven species, one of which is

new to science.

Q. Discovery Bay, lat. 81° 41’ N.

Comprises two samples—one from 23 fathoms, the other

from 25 fathoms. Rhizopoda rare and minute, chiefly Cas-

siduline, other genera being represented by very poor speci-

mens.

R. Fiord Valley, near Lincoln Bay, lat. 82° 8' N.

Mud taken from between the valves of shells ; yielded little

beyond Cassiduline and the weak varieties of Polystomella.

The Ostracoda were of more importance and embraced one

new species.

S. Mud from ravine north of Repulse Bay, lat. 82° 10’ N.

A little sandy glacial mud from Hall’s Land, with the

Radiolaria of the Arctic Expedition, 1875-76. 429

label “ brought by Mr. Egerton, April 1876.” It contained

but few specimens, and these of only four species. Though

manifestly insufficient to show the extent of the fauna, they

have been allowed a column in the Table as representatives of

a region somewhat separated from the rest. Ostracoda were

present, but in very small numbers.

T. Winter quarters of the ‘ Alert,’ 1875-6, 6 fathoms, lat.

82° 27' N.

Four tubes containing dried mud. Foraminifera chiefly

of the genera Globigerina, Cassidulina, Nonionina, and Poly-

stomella. Some of the tubes gave also a few Diatomacez

(Triceratium arcticum) and occasional valves of Ostracoda.

U. Mud-beds, 150 feet elevation, lat. 82° 27’ N.

This material was found to be almost devoid of organic

remains of any sort; the few specimens of Foraminifera were

of quite the commonest species.

V. Floeberg Beach, July 1876, lat. 82° 29' N.

A small tube of sand from the shore, and a pill-box with

mud and stones from a depth of 10 fathoms, only furnished

together what appears to be an incomplete list ; and the speci-

mens were all very small. There were a few Ostracoda also

present.

W. Cane Ravine, June 1876, lat. 82° 33! N.

A lot of finely divided silt, taken out of a specimen of

Astarte borealis, from mud-beds 100 feet above the sea-level, in

Grinnell Land; containing small examples of a few of the

common arctic types of Foraminifera and Ostracoda.

X. Sounding, May 11, 1876, 72 fathoms, lat. 83° 19" N.

The most interesting sounding in the entire collection, not

merely as being the most northerly, but also, considering the

minute quantity that could be obtained for examination (only

a few grains altogether), as presenting the most varied range

of Microzoa. It consisted of fine soft mud containing Diato-

macez (Coscinodiscus radiatus), Radiolaria in greater variety

than any other sounding, and Foraminifera of no less than

eleven genera, the most abundant of the latter being a dwarf

variety of Globigerina.

Tn tracing on the map the area represented by this collec-

tion, and comparing it with that covered by previous researches,

it becomes manifest that the ground is altogether new. Our

present knowledge of arctic Rhizopoda is chiefly derived from

the labours of Profs. W. K. Parker and T. Rupert Jones, and of

the Rev. A. M. Norman. The memoir of Messrs. Parker and

430 Mr. H. B. Brady on the Reticularia and

Jones, in the ‘ Philosophical Transactions ’ for 1865, forms the

text-book of the subject. It contains the results of the ex-

amination of the soundings taken by Sir EH. Parry in Baffin’s

Bay, between latitudes 74° 45' and 76° 30! N.; of those of

Dr. Sutherland off the Hunde Islands, on the west coast of

Greenland, in lat. 68° 50! N.; and of dredgings made by Mr.

M‘Andrew off the coast of Norway, between lat. 65° and 71°

N. Mr. Norman’s material consisted of dredgings brought

home by Dr. J. Gwyn Jeffreys from his cruise in the ‘ Valo-

rous,’ the vessel, it will be remembered, which sailed in com-

pany with the ‘ Alert’ and ‘ Discovery,’ as far as Disco

{sland, on their northward voyage. The record of Mr. Nor-

man’s observations on the Rhizopoda, which, so far as they

affect our present purpose, refer to an area lying between

about lat. 59° and lat. 70° N., forms one section of the general

scientific report submitted to the Royal Society. A notice by

Dr. Carpenter of a few of the larger ferms appeared at the

same time.

Messrs. Parker and Jones’s memoir is accompanied by a

series of elaborate distribution-tables, one of which is devoted

to the Arctic fauna. Of the twenty localities it comprises,

seven belong to the group of soundings from Baffin’s Bay,

five to the Hunde Islands, and eight to the Norwegian coast.

In all seventy-five species of Foraminifera are enumerated ;

and of these twenty appear in the Norwegian list only. A

condensed statement of the results embodied in Messrs. Parker

and Jones’s Table will be found in the three columns (a, 3, c)

appended to that which accompanies the present paper. A

ready means of comparison is thereby afforded, and the subject

need not, therefore, be further dwelt upon.

The ‘ Valorous ’. report cannot, unfortunately, be treated in

the same way, as it contains no detailed lists of the Foramini-

fera. I propose, therefore, in order to complete the summary

of what Las been hitherto written on the subject, to cull from

the Rev. A. M. Norman’s paper (Proc. Roy. Soe. vol. xxv.

pp. 207-213) such particulars as he gives relative to the dis-

tribution of species in those localities that come within the

sphere of our present inquiry. Having had the opportunity

of looking over the fine collection of Foraminifera obtained

from the ‘ Valorous’ material, I may be permitted to express

my regret that circumstances have hitherto prevented Mr.

Norman from giving his results to the world. They are of

great interest and cost much labour; and the details would

have been a valuable contribution to the literature of the

Rhizopoda. Four of these dredgings were from points within

the Arctic Circle; and two others, from the Stations num-

Radiolaria of the Arctic Expedition, 1875-76. 431

bered 8 and 9 respectively, though not strictly arctic in lati-

tude, pertain to an adjacent and much richer zoological area,

and are within Davis Straits, which may be regarded as a sort

of natural boundary. The following notes are abstracted from

Mr. Norman’s summary.

HOLsTEInBborG HARBOUR (lat. 66° 40! N.), 7-35 fathoms.

The more remarkable Foraminifera were :—7Trochammina

gordialis, J. & P.; Lituola canariensis, D’Orb.; Textularia bi-

formis, P. & J.; and Bolivina punctata, D’Orb.

GopHAVN Harzour, Disco (lat. 69° 10’ N.), 5-20 fathoms.

Thirty-six species identified, amongst them :—Dentalina

consobrina, D’Orb. (fide P.& J.), Polymorphina burdigalensis,

D’Orb.; Pullenia spheroides, D’Orb. ; Verneuilina polystropha,

Reuss; Cassidulina obtusa, D’Orb.; Pulvinulina Karstent,

Reuss; and Discorbina obtusa, D’Orb.

LizveLty Harsour, Disco (lat. 70° N.*), 5-20 fathoms.

The Foraminifera exhibited a marked parallelism with

those recorded by Mr. G. M. Dawson from Gaspé Bayt, in

the Gulf of St. Lawrence. Twenty-eight species were noted,

including :—Rhabdopleura abyssorum, Parker ; Lituola cassis,

Parker; Nonionina labradorica, Parker; and Bulimina pyrula,

D’Orb.

Station No. 5. Lat. 66° 59' N., long. 55° 27' W., 57

fathoms.

Thirty-five Foraminifera observed, ten belonging to the

genus Lagena. The list contains, amongst others :—Lagena

striatopunctata, P. & J.; Lituola globigeriniformis, P. & J.;

Cyclammina cancellata, H. B. Brady, MS.; and Bulimina

elegantissima, D’Orb.

Sration No. 8. Lat. 62° 6’ N., long. 55° 56’ W., 1350 fa-

thoms.

Contained many of the more common Foraminifera. The

following are noted :—Nodosaria Schlichtiz, Reuss ; Orbitolites

tenuissimus, Carpenter ; Pullenia quinqueloba, Reuss ; and Li-

tuola nautiloidea, Lamk.

Station No. 9. Lat. 59° 10’ N., long. 50° 25’ W., 1750

fathoms.

Remarkable for the abundance and variety of arenaceous

* The latitudes of Holsteiborg, Godhavn, and Lievely Hazbvuurs are

not given in the Report, and the last of the three does not appear in any

map I have access to; but, for the purpose of comparison with the range

of the other localities, the figures stated are near enough.

+ It must be remembered, nevertheless, that Gaspé Bay is in lat. 48°

to 49° N., or fully a degree south of the coast of Cornwall, though more

or less Arctic in climatal conditions.

432 Mr. H. B. Brady on the Reticularia and

types, e.g. Rhabdammina, Pilulina, most of the various forms

described as Lituole by Dr. Carpenter, and Astrorhiza cate-

nata, Norman. In addition to these, Cristellaria obvelata,

Reuss, Orbulina neojurensis, Karrer, and the dwarf variety

of Globigerina bulloides, alluded to on a later page of the

present paper, were also found.

To turn now to the more strictly zoological portion of the

subject. An examination of the accompanying Distribution-

Table, still more the inspection of the mounted specimens,

brings into relief certain characteristics of the Polar foramini-

feral fauna. Some remarks will presently be made on the

individual species where they exhibit any special or note-

worthy features ; but attention may be drawn at the outset to

one or two facts of more general import. There are about

half a dozen species that may be regarded as essential con-

stituents of the microzoic fauna of these high latitudes, having

been found at almost every depth at which the floor of the

sea has been examined. They are as follows—Globigerina

bulloides (a dwarf variety), Cassidulina levigata and C.

crassa, Truncatulina lobatula, Pulvinulina Karsteni, and Poly-

stomella striatopunctata. 'They are usually accompanied by

one or two forms of Nonionina, varying according to depth

and other circumstances, and, if the sea-bottom be composed

of rough sand or gravel, by Polystomella arctica. Other species

occur in every sample of mud or sand wherever obtained ; but

it is not too much to say that those above enumerated consti-

tute ninety-five per cent. of the entire collection made from

these soundings. The constant occurrence of Casstdulina

levigata, of full size and well-grown, even when the other

Foraminifera accompanying it were poor, starved specimens,

and the presence of Pulvinulina Karsteni in almost every

dredging to the practical exclusion of all other species of the

same genus, are points of considerable significance. The

almost complete absence of the Milioline genera (for the oc-

currence of a single, minute, thin-shelled specimen here and

there in a few of the soundings amounts to absence in such a

case) is an unexpected feature. In dredgings at similar

depths but little to the south of those under consideration the

simple porcellanous forms are comparatively common; and

their area of distribution is otherwise world-wide; yet it is

hardly too much to say that no approach to a full-sized mature

specimen of any of the modifications of the Milioline type has

been met with in the North-Polar material. ;

One or two of the species are undescribed hitherto; anda

few others present characters somewhat modified by their

Radiolaria of the Arctic Expedition, 1875-76. 483

boreal habitat. The following notes refer to some of these ;

the numbers prefixed correspond with those employed in the

Table. The new forms and the more interesting varieties

are figured in Plates XX. and XXI.; for the rest, nearly all

the species are well illustrated in Messrs. Parker and Jones’s

memoir before referred to, or in Prof. Williamson’s ‘ Recent

Foraminifera of Great Britain.’

9. Lituola glomerata, nov. (Pl. XX. fig. 1, a-c.)

Characters. 'Test free, arenaceous, thin-walled, non-laby-

rinthic; spiral in arrangement, subglobular in form, often some-

what lengthened in the direction of the axis; usually more

or less unsymmetrical. Segments few, three orfour in each con-

volution, long, narrow. Sutures but little excavated except at

the ends. Aperture at the inner margin of the terminal cham-

ber, uear the exterior of the corresponding segment of the

previous convolution, simple, often obscure. Diameter of the

test seldom more than ;4,5 inch (0°25 milliin.).

This, which is perhaps the most minute of the segmented

Lituolida, is an obscure and difficult form to treat. The sep-

tation is often imperfect and sometimes cannot be traced on

the exterior. The drawings (Pl. XX. fig. 1, a—c) are from

unusually good specimens, and they are sufficiently character-

istic. When the Lituoline genera come to be rearranged in

the light of the material which now exists for their more ex-

tended and accurate study, it is possible that this, in common

with some other of our northern species, may find its place in

Reuss’s genus Haplophragmium ; but its nearest allies are

forms best recognized at present under the generic term

Lituola. In distribution Lituola glomerata is by no means

contined to the arctic seas, but has been met with in the

‘Challenger’ dredgings from many parts of the world.

10. Hyperammina elongata, nov. gen. et sp.

(Pl. XX, fie. 2.0.5.)

Characters. Test arenaceous, in the form of a straight or

nearly straight tapering tube, the wide end closed and rounded,

the open narrow end constituting the general aperture. Ex-

terior sandy and rough, interior smooth. Length (of the

Arctic specimens) about =), inch (2°5 millims.).

This is one of the many arenaceous types brought home in

1869 by the naturalists in charge of the first cruise of the

‘Porcupine ;’ but it has not hitherto, so far as I am aware,

received a name. Its club-like or, still more, its pestle-

like contour and sandy texture, suggest the term Hyperam-

434 Mr. H. B. Brady on the Reticularia and

mina*, The polar specimens are very small when compared

with those from the North Atlantic, or with those from many

of the ‘Challenger’ stations—examples considerably more than

half an inch (15 or 16 millims.) being not unfrequent in other

localities.

14, Lagena apiculata, Reuss.

The somewhat compressed as well as the globose forms are

included under this name.

17. Lagena striatopunctata, Parker & Jones.

(Pl. XX. fig. 3.)

A few specimens similar in character to those figured by

Messrs. Parker and Jones were met with in two of the deeper

soundings.

18. Lagena Feildeniana, nov. (Pl. XX. fig. 4.)

Characters. Test subglobular, pyriform, with surface-orna-

mentation consisting of a few stout longitudinal coste alter-

nating at regular distances with longitudinal rows of large

perforations. Longer diameter about 7; inch (0°37 millim.).

A very pretty little shell, with somewhat striking super-

ficial ornament. It bears considerable resemblance to two

other costato-perforate species, namely Lagena striatopunctata,

P. & J., and L. Howchiniana, Brady. ‘The former of these

has a double row of minute pores bordering each riblet

(Pl. XX. fig. 3); the latter, which is a Carboniferous species,

has a single row of orifices down the top of each ridge; whilst

L. Feildeniana is distinguished by stout entire coste with a

single series of large pores in the furrows between them. As

this particular varietal form does not appear to have been

hitherto observed or described, it may very properly be asso-

ciated by name with the naturalist to whom we owe the

North-Polar collections.

Hab. Off Cape Frazer, 80 fathoms.

19. Lagena caudata, D’Orbigny.

A single entosolenian specimen, not unlike that figured by

Williamson as Entosolenia globosa, var. lineata, Rec. For. Gt.

Br. pli. Ag. 1g.

22. Glandulina levigata, D’Orbigny.

From 80 fathoms off Cape Frazer, very rare; an elongate

variety resembling G. gracilis of Reuss, though not quite so

attenuated and sharp-pointed.

* Umepos (a pestle), aupos (sand),

Radiolaria of the Arctic Expedition, 1875-76. 435

25. Cristellaria rotulata, Lamarck.

Also one or two specimens approaching C. crepidula in

contour.

26. Polymorphina lactea, Walker & Jacob.

Both typical pyriform specimens, and the compressed modi-

fication known as P. lactea, var. amygdalo¢des, Reuss.

29. Polymorphina acuminata, D’Orbigny. (Pl. XX. fig. 5,

a, 6.)

30. Polymorphina rotundata, Bornemann. (Pl. XX. fig. 6,

a, 6.)

Two interesting and somewhat rare forms, sufticiently illus-

trated by the figures. It is necessary, however, to bear in

mind that the successive modifications of the genus Polymor-

phina, though generally pretty easily recognized, are of little

more than varietal significance.

32. Globigerina bulloides, D’Orbigny, var.

(Pl, XX, fie, 10, 0, 8, .¢:)

Occasional specimens of the genus Globigerina occurred in

most of the soundings ; in one only were they present in suffi-

cient abundance to constitute what we are accustomed to speak

of as a Globigerina-ooze, namely in that from the most

northerly point attained by the Expedition. The specimens

differ considerably from the typical form—so much so that they

can hardly be associated with it except as a variety. The

shells are very small, compactly made, and nearly spherical ;

the individual segments are scarcely ventricose, and do not

exhibit the globular contour that we are accustomed to regard

as characteristic of the genus, nor do they open into a central

or umbilical vestibule, but communicate directly with each

other. The general aperture forms a semicircular or crescen-

tic opening at the inferior margin of the terminal chamber.

The Rev. A. M. Norman probably alludes to the same modi-

fication of the type in his description of specimens from a

depth of 1750 fathoms in lat. 59° 10! N., long. 50° 25! W.,

one of the ‘ Valorous’ stations just within Davis Straits*.

34. Uvigerina pygmea, D’Orbigny, var.

(PE! XX fig. 7,/a; 8.)

The Uvigerine, a very few specimens of which were found

in several of the soundings, are uniform in their characters and

* Proc. Roy, Soe. vol. xxv. p. 212.

436 Mr. H. B. Brady on the Reticularia and

contour. They are minute, thin-shelled, and obscurely trian-

gular; but the segments are more inflated than in the Uvige-

rina angulosa of Williamson, and the surface ornamentation

is very partially distributed. They differ almost as much from

the typical U. pygmea* ; but the points of divergence are

such as may and probably have been brought about by the

different life-conditions of a polar climate. Such specimens

may be accepted as representing a starved or impoverished

variety of the typical form rather than a distinct species.

38. Bulimina elegantissima, D’Orbigny. (Pl. XXI. fig. 12.)

Very rare, and not of the precise contour by which the

species is usually recognized: the segments are similarly

arranged ; but they are relatively shorter, and there are fewer

in each convolution, as indicated in the figure.

41. Textularia biformis, Parker & Jones. (Pl. XX. fig. 8.)

A very minute, thin-shelled arenaceous species. Messrs.

Parker and Jones’s figures are on somewhat too small a

scale to show the conformation of the test quite distinctly.

The largest of the Polar specimens is but little over 7, inch

(0°37 millim.) in length.

42. Verneuilina polystropha, Reuss. (Pl. XX. fig. 9, a-c.)

Small specimens of this arenaceous triserial T'extularian are

common in one or two of the localities. They are often of

the slender, more elegant form delineated in fig. 9, a.

45. Pulvinulina Karsteni, Reuss. (Pl. XXI. fig. 11, a-c.)

Over extensive areas, in almost every portion of the globe,

the floor of the ocean is largely composed of the shells of

Foraminifera belonging to two genera, G'lobigerina and Pul-

vinulina; but for the most part these are merely the dead

skeletons of pelagic species which, when living, inhabit a

layer of water that, comparatively speaking, may be regarded

as superficial; but it is far otherwise in these high latitudes.

A single chance specimen of Pulvinulina Micheliniana is

the only representative of the pelagic section of the genus

found in the entire collection of soundings; whilst Pulvinulina

Karstent, one of the many species that, so far as we know,

live on the sea-bottom, is present everywhere, and the size

and condition of the specimens indicate that it is at home in

these northern regions.

* Compare Williamson’s figures, Rec. For. Gt. Br. pl. 5. figs. 188-140,

with fig. 7, a, 6, of the present paper.

Radtolaria of the Arctic Expedition, 1875-76. 437

53. Polystomella arctica, Parker & Jones.

(Pl. XXI. fig. 13, a-d.)

An essentially boreal species, its distribution probably not

extending further south than Shetland. It is a large, coarse,

thick-shelled modification of the type, most nearly related to

P. striatopunctata. There are, however, certain structural

peculiarities observable in mature specimens, the most impor-

tant of which is the duplication of the sutural apertures. In-

stead of the single line of orifices immediately over each

septum, there are frequently two parallel rows, which, if

the sutures are marked externally by raised bands of ex-

ogenous deposit, appear one on each side of the limbation.

From the exterior it appears as though the two rows of

pores opened respectively into the two adjacent chambers ;

but with a little care sections may be made (fig. 13, d)

showing clearly that this is not the case, but that the

double tubulation is the result of the lengthening and bi-

furcation of what was originally a simple orifice. The

horizontal section of the entire shell (fig. 13, c) shows its

general structure. The laminated thickening appears to

be confined to the last convolution, and to be caused by

the chamber-wall of some of the segments being extended

over that of the previously formed chainbers, as in the

Nummulite. The investment of the later chambers is there-

fore thinner than that of those preceding them, the last formed

being the thinnest.

The typical Polystomella crispa, so common in the shallow

water of temperate latitudes, does not appear at all in the

material from these polar localities. It seems to be replaced

by P. arctica, with P. striatopunctata in still larger numbers ;

and these pass by insensible gradations into the various forms

of Nonionina.

RADIOLARIA.

Here and there in the finer portions of some of the sound-

ings the siliceous tests of Radiolaria were observed ; but at one

station only, and that the most northerly of all, were they

met with in any abundance. In most cases there was no great

difficulty in assigning the various forms which were obtained to

their generic types; but it was found impossible to determine

the species satisfactorily from published authorities. Under

these circumstances, the natural course to pursue was to

forward the mountings to Prof. Haeckel, of Jena, for his

opinion on the more doubtful specimens. The learned Pro-

438 Mr. H. B. Brady on the Reticularia and

fessor has been kind enough to examine the mountings; and his

remarks upon them contain much of interest. He states that

the species are, as far as they go, exactly identical with those

he finds in the ‘ Challenger’ soundings from the Stations

numbered 268 to 274 in Sir Wyville Thomson’s printed

list—that is to say, with the particular species which are

found at the sea-bottom in the middle of the Pacific, from

about 8° N. of the equator to 8° 8. of the same, at depths of

2400 to 2900 fathoms. Prof. Haeckel confirms the view

which I had already arrived at, that, until we have the wider

basis for accurate nomenclature which the publication of

the ‘ Challenger’ Radiolaria will afford, it is better to give

nothing more than an enumeration of the genera observed.

There has been no previous record of Arctic Radiolaria,

except in the tabular statements which accompany the Rev.

A.M. Norman’s paper (op. cit. xxv. pp. 204, 205). In these

Tables eight species of Polycystina are set down as occurring

on the west coast of Greenland and in Davis Straits; but I

gather from the author that the entry is only intended to

convey the fact of this number of distinct forms being ob-

served, and that no determination of genera or species was

attempted.

The following notes represent the distribution of the group

so far as revealed by the polar soundings :—

AA. Off Cape Dudley Digges, July 26, 1875, 260 fathoms,

lat roe

This sounding is from a point in Baftin’s Bay somewhat

south of the rest. The material contained no Foraminifera

worth recording ; and therefore the locality was not included

in the Table. The Radiolaria were few in number, and be-

longed to the genera Spongodiscus and Spongotrochus.

B. Off Cape Isabella, 220 fathoms, lat. 78° 20' N.

Contained more than one species of Spongotrochus.

F. Between Walrus Shoal and Victoria Head, Sept. 8, 1876,

57 fathoms, lat. 79° 26’ N.

Five genera of Radiolaria represented, viz. Haliomma,

Tetrapyle, Heliodiscus, Spongaster, and Euchitonia.

J and K. Dobbin Bay, 47 fathoms and 113 fathoms, lat.

79° 35’ N.

The only genera noticed were 7rematodiscus and Spongo-

trochus.

X. Sounding, May 11, 1876, 72 fathoms, lat. 83° 19! N.

The most northerly point attained. The little tube full of

Radiolaria of the Arctic Hxpedition, 1875-76. 439

mud which was secured yielded species of the following

genera—Dictyopodium, Haliomma, Tetrapyle, Heliodiscus,

Actinomma, Spongotrochus, Spongaster, and Huchitonia.

Thus in all there are ten genera of Radiolaria, eight of

which exist in the highest latitudes that have yet been

reached.

We are now in a position to inquire what actual service to

biological science, or rather to that small section of it which

has been considered in the foregoing pages, has been rendered

by the North-Polar Expedition of 1875-76.

Nothing need be added to what has already been said

about the Radiolaria. With respect to the Foraminifera it

has been seen that previous researches had rendered account

of the Arctic fauna as far north as lat. 76° 30'—that is, to

within 13° 30' of the North Pole. To this record we are

now able to add three further instalments, namely, the group

of soundings in Smith Sound and the north of Baffin’s

Bay, a single one in Hall Basin, and, lastly, a series to the

north of Robeson Channel. These extend our knowledge of

the sea-bottom to lat. 83°19! N., a distance of 6° 49'—in

other words, over more than half the interval between the

most northerly: point of previous researches and the actual

North Pole. From a zoological point of view the result is not

less gratifying. Sir KE. Parry’s soundings in Baffin’s Bay,

which, taken together, furnish the northernmost section of

Messrs. Parker and Jones’s Table, yielded seventeen species

of Foraminifera. All but three of these have been found in

the material brought by Captain Feilden ; but they form only

a small part of the catalogue of fifty-three species which appear

inour Table. Setting aside the Norwegian lists given by the

same authors, as representing a fauna more or less influenced

by the warm current of the Gulf-stream, the Hunde-Island

and Baffin’s-Bay columns give an aggregate of fifty-five

species, or only two in excess of the total now recorded.

The facts which have been elicited therefore appear to indi-

cate that there is no very striking diminution in the number

and variety of the Rhizopoda as we approach the North Pole.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PLATE XX.

Fig. 1. Lituola glomerata, n. sp., magnified 100 diam. :; a and 6, periphero-

lateral aspect, front and back; ¢, end view.

Fig. 2, a, b. Hyperammina elongata, n. gen. et sp., magn. 40 diam.

Fig. 3. Lagena striatopunctata, Parker & Jones, magn. 75 diam.

440 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

Fig. 4. Lagena Feildeniana, n. sp., magn. 75 diam. ’

Fig. 5. Polymorphina acuminata, D'Orbigny, magn. 75 diam.: a, peri-

phero-lateral aspect ; b, end view.

Fig. 6. Polymorphina rotundata, Bornemann, magn. 65 diam.: a, peri-

phero-lateral aspect; 6, end view.

Fig. 7. Uvigerina pygmea, D’Orbigny, var., magn. 90 diam.

Fig. 8. Textularia biformis, Parker & Jones, magn. 90 diam.

Fig. 9. Verneuilina polystropha, Reuss, magn. 90 diam.

PuatE XXI.

Fig. 10. Globigerina bulloides, D’Orbigny, arctic variety, magn. 100

diam.: @, superior or spiral face; 6, inferior aspect; c, peri-

pheral aspect.

Fig. 11. Pulvinulina Karsten, Reuss, magn. 50 diam.: a, superior; },

inferior ; c, peripheral aspect.

Fig. 12. Bulimina elegantissima, D Orbigny, var., magn. 90 diam.

Fig. 13. Polystomella arctica, Parker & Jones: a, lateral, b, peripheral

aspect, magnified 30 diam.; c, horizontal section, showing the

laminated thickening of the shell-wall and its minute tubulation,

magn, 40 diam. ; d, horizontal section of part of the outer con-

volution, more highly magnified, showing the bifurcation of the

sutural orifices, magn. 100 diam.

L.—Descriptions of new Species of Heterocera from Japan.—

Part Il]. Geometrites. By Artaur G. Butter, F.L.S.,

BAS. eee.

[Continued from p. 406. ]

Zerenide.

ABRAXAS, Leach.

196. Abraxas conspurcata, n. sp.

’ Wings white, black at the base; black discocellular blotches,

two parallel discal series of subconfluent black blotches, be-

tween which runs an orange line; a confluent series of mar-

ginal black blotches: primaries with the base orange-streaked;

a central costal black patch confluent with the discocellular

blotch ; two subbasal black blotches. Body orange, spotted

with black ; the head and thorax black, but the back of the

collar and tegule orange. Expanse 1 inch 7 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

This species is much like some extreme heavily spotted

varieties of A. grossulariata ; but it may be readily distin-

guished from them all by the two discal series of large spots

or blotches being nearer to the outer margin and complete in

the secondaries as well as in the primaries, also in the secon-

daries being broadly black at the base.

of Heterocera from Japan. 441

197. Abraxas miranda, n. sp.

Allied to A. leopardinata from India, but larger; the pri-

maries with broader and darker basal and internal patches ;

the costa blotched with grey throughout, the patch over the

end of the cell much larger and confluent with the costal

patch ; the transverse grey belt below it placed nearer to the

middle of the wing and touching the dark internal patch ; two

confused parallel discal series of grey blotches ; a number of

small grey spots forming two imperfect parallel series on

externo-discal area: the secondaries with a complete grey

belt across the cell; two somewhat confused discal series of

grey blotches terminating in the usual dark internal patch ;

external area spotted with grey; marginal blotches partially

confluent. Body similar. Expanse, § 2 inches, ? 2 inches

4 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

198. Abraxas placida, n. sp.

White, with ochraceous body ; wings with ochreous outer

border and black-spotted orange fringe; an externo-discal

series of black spots, imperfect in secondaries; base ochraceous,

spotted with black: primaries with three subbasal blackish

spots ; an irregular central band formed of blackish blotches ;

two black costal spots near apex: secondaries with a central

irregular band formed of blackish lines: shoulders and palpi

blackish. Wings below nearly as above. Expanse 1 inch

5 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely).

EKucuHera, Hiibner.

199. Huchera Agnes, n. sp.

Wings white, with broad smoky-grey outer border, crossed

by a more or less confluent series of white or whitish lunules

parallel to the outer margin: primaries sometimes with the

lunules very indistinct ; base and a subcostal streak ochreous ;

basal area covered by about ten grey spots in three series; a

central broad belt, externally angulated, composed of grey

blotches: secondaries with a grey belt almost surrounding the

discoidal cell: body ochreous. Wings below white, the

markings almost as above, but blackish and narrower; white

lunules confluent and well-defined on all the wings, blackish

discocellular spots: primaries only ochreous on the costal

border, the basal area only marked with one large blackish

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 30

442 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

blotch: body below white; abdomen belted with grey.

Expanse 2 inches 6-8 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas) ; Hakodaté ( Whitely).

Deroca, Walker.

200. Deroca phasma, n. sp.

3. Hyaline, snow-white: primaries with three grey spots

across the basal half of the costa, a fourth above the end of the

cell, and a larger spot at the end of the cell; a large apical

patch crossed by a trifid white patch, and a similar smaller

patch at the external angle grey: antenne with grey pectina-

tions; abdomen grey, crossed by white segmental lines.

Wings below nearly as above, but the grey markings darker

and the costal spots on the basal half confluent ; body below

cream-coloured. Expanse 1 inch 4 lines.

9. Larger, iridescent, and with much paler markings.

Expanse 1 inch 6 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

LomasPILis, Hiibner.

201. Lomaspilis opis, n. sp.

Wings creamy white: primaries with the basal fourth,

three large blotches across the centre (the two uppermost con-

fluent), the apex, outer margin, and external angle pale pur-

plish brown : secondaries with three blotches across the cen-

tre, the apex, a subapical marginal spot, outer margin, and

anal angle pale purplish brown. Body brown, legs testa-

ceous. Expanse 1 inch 1 line. .

Yokohama (Jonas).

Nearly allied to the European L. marginata, but differing

in the brown blotches across the centre of the wings.

Ligiide.

PACHYLIGIA, n. gen.

Allied to Ligia, with similar antenne and neuration ; the

body much more robust, broader ; the primaries much wider,

with more strongly defined external angle; fringe shorter.

Type P. dolosa.

202. Pachyligia dolosa, n. sp.

Primaries fuliginous brown, varied with bronzy brown ;

base longitudinally streaked with black; two irregularly

sinuated central black lines, and between them an irregular

of Heterocera from Japan. 443

blackish stripe; upper discocellular black; outer border bronzy,

with undulated inner edge; a submarginal series of dark

brown spots; margin undulated ; fringe pale at base: secon-

daries sordid white, with pinky brown outer border and darker

brown fringe; upper discocellular black: head and thorax

brown ; abdomen testaceous ; antenne testaceous. Primaries

below greyish, with testaceous costa; outer border slightly

paler; a black discocellular dot: secondaries whity brown,

with testaceous costa; fringe and an anal streak dusky; a

large black discocellular spot. EExpanse 1 inch 11 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

203. Pachyligia modesta, n. sp.

3. Primaries silvery whitish, crossed by two slender irre-

gularly dentate and crinkled blackish lines; a third paler

line limiting the outer border: secondaries slightly browner

in tint than the primaries, crossed in the middle by an irre-

gularly sinuated grey line; margin slenderly blackish ; fringe

silvery whitish: head and thorax grey; antenne with brown

pectinations ; abdomen testaceous. Under surface pale whity

brown: wings with the costal borders testaceous ; each wing

with a dentate-sinuate grey discal line and a blackish mar-

ginal line. Expanse 1 inch 9 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

The single female example obtained is darker than the

male, the primaries being varied with bronzy brownish, and

the area enclosed by the blackish lines distinctly grey ; this

example, however, is small and has the primaries so much

narrower than other examples of this genus that I suspect it

to be aborted.

Hyberniidz.

Hysernia, Latreille.

204. Hybernia dira, un. sp.

General character of H. leucophearia: primaries fuliginous

brown, streaked here and there with tawny ; a central irre-

gular black-edged and speckled pale greyish belt, concave

internally, unequally bisinuated externally ; base greyish ;

outer border pale, bordered internally by an irregularly sinuated

white line; a series of black marginal spots; fringe white,

grey-speckled at base : secondaries pale greyish, speckled with

grey, streaked with blackish on the abdominal area at anal

angle; a black marginal line: body grey, black-spotted.

Under surface greyish: wings with bronze-tinted borders and

30*

44d Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

blackish discocellular dots: secondaries speckled with grey.

Expanse 1 inch 6 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Most nearly allied to H. obliquaria of Motschoulsky.

Larentiidz.

Larentis, Duponchel.

205. Larentia Hemana, n. sp.

Closely allied to Z. salicata, but the central band of pri-

maries of nearly twice the width, the wings altogether paler,

and the secondaries similar in marking to Z. cesiata. Ex-

panse 1 inch 2 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Unless carefully compared with L. salicata of Europe, this

species might easily be confounded with it.

EupitHeci, Curtis.

206. Eupithecia sophia, n. sp.

Allied to EZ. denticulata of Europe ; sordid white with pale

greyish outer borders and fringes to the wings, and black dis-

cocellular spots: primaries with the basal half of costa and

the basal area blackish, crossed by irregular white lines ;

remainder of the wing crossed alternately by grey belts and

white lines, the widest of which form an indistinct central

oblique band; all the lines zigzag: secondaries crossed by

one or two indistinct greyish lines. Wings below whiter,

shining, the markings of the primaries only visible through

the wings, excepting upon the costal border. Hxpanse 9

lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

207. Hupithecia invisa, n. sp.

Pale silky greyish ; external area of wings crossed by five

slightly irregular parallel grey lines, most distinct on the

primaries, the two inner lines dotted with black upon the

nervures ; discocellular spots black: primaries with the costa

dusky, crossed by dark spots; a very ill-defined oblique belt

across the centre of the wing, but scarcely darker than the

ground-colour. Under surface whitish ; the discal lines indi-

cated by a series of dusky spots, two at costa of primaries

blackish ; discocellular spots black. Expanse 1 inch.

Hakodaté ( Whitely).

This species is allied to the preceding ; owing to its greyer

tint it is much less like HZ. denticulata.

of Heterocera from Japan. 445

208. Eupithecia exctsa, n. sp.

Nearly allied to EL. succenturiata of Europe, but differing

in its smaller size, greyer primaries, and in the front margin

of the central belt of primaries being deeply and angularly

notched beyond the discoidal cell. Hxpanse 11 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

209. Hupithecia rufescens, n. sp.

Apparently allied to Z. satyrata of Europe, but much larger

and with considerably longer palpi; an oblique subbasal belt

and the external area of the primaries laky brown ; a black

marginal line enclosed in and interrupted upon the veins by

a white line. Expanse 11 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

210. Hupithecia proterva, n. sp.

Allied to EZ. innotata, larger ; the primaries still more pro-

duced, pale smoky grey: primaries with the base, a subbasal

band, an oblique whitish-edged central belt (angular, excised

above the median vein), and the external area blackish; a

crinkled whitish submarginal line; discocellulars black: secon-

daries covered with parallel dusky lines, which become black

upon the veins. Wings below grey; the discocellulars, two

discal series of dots, and a marginal series black. Expanse

1 inch,

Yokohama (Jonas).

211. Hupithecia caliginea, n. sp.

Near to EL. pygmeata, but the ground-colour of the wings

black instead of sooty grey; the crinkled lines across the

primaries formed of white scales. Expanse 10 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

This is the Japanese representative of E. pygmeata.

CoLiix, Guénée.

212. Collix Vashti, un. sp.

Dark fuliginous brown; the wings crossed by from eighteen

to twenty parallel undulated blackish or black lines, more or

less dotted with white upon the nervares ; submarginal line

indistinctly white-edged on the primaries; marginal line

well-defined and black, the sinuations filled by white dots

on the fringe: secondaries with all the lines less distinct than

446 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

on the primaries. Under surface sericeous, the blackish lines

ill-defined. Expanse 1 inch 2-8 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely).

Logpopuora, Curtis.

213. Lobophora julia, n. sp.

Primaries above pale purplish brown, crossed by numerous

irregularly crinkled or zigzag blackish lines ; two pale green

belts across the basal area, and a zigzag discal belt of the

same colour, edged internally with white; a slender zigzag

submarginal white line; a large black discocellular spot:

secondaries pale shining grey, the disk crossed by several

parallel slightly darker lines. Abdomen banded with testa-

ceous. Wings below pale silvery grey, with black discocel-

lular dots ; a blackish macular discal line, and a zigzag pale

grey submarginal line. Expanse 1 inch.

Yokohama (Jonas).

This species, excepting in its long palpi, somewhat resem-

bles Hupithecia togata.

214. Lobophora volitans, n. sp.

@. Wings white: primaries shining, more or less

densely sprinkled with grey scales, and crossed by a basal

and two central black-edged sap-green bands; a discal sinuated

black-edged white stripe, more or less obscured by grey scales;

outer border greenish, with a marginal series of black #-shaped

markings terminating the veins ; the veins throughout black-

banded: secondaries with a discal line and a sinuated submar-

ginal line pale grey; a dark grey marginal line. Body grey,

varied with brown, and spotted here and there with black ;

legs black, banded with white. Under surface sordid seri-

ceous whitish: wings crossed by two greyish discal lines ;

blackish linear discocellular and marginal dots. Expanse

1 inch 2 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Var. elegans.

¢. Primaries with the basal and central bands reddish

brown instead of green ; the outermost or discal band being

more distinctly lunulated and white internally. Expanse

1 inch 2 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

215. Lobophora terranea, n. sp.

Similar in form to the preceding, but the wings smaller

of Heterocera from Japan. 447

and rather narrower, grey: the primaries crossed by three

basal, two more or less confluent central belts, and one discal

sinuated belt; basal and apical areas suffused with red-brown;

centrai belts red-brown with blackish outlines; other belts

outlined in blackish ; veins banded with blackish ; a series of

marginal dots: secondaries with whitish costal area; a sub-

marginal pale grey line. Under surface sericeous grey. Ex-

panse 1 inch 2 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Allied to L. polycommata.

LYGRANOA, n. gen.

Allied to Lobophora, but the primaries broader and more

acuminate, the discoidal cell considerably shorter, the second

and third median branches emitted much closer together, the

upper radial emitted from the end of the cell instead of from

the postdiscoidal cellule; antenne strongly pectinate in the

male. Type L. fusca.

216. Lygranoa fusca, n. sp.

Pale brown, wings with slender blackish marginal line,

followed by a yellowish line at the base of the fringe: prima-

ries with dusky base ; an abbreviated black costal dash across

the end of the cell, and a second halfway between the cell and

apex ; two irregular subparallel brown lines running from the

costal dashes across the wing to inner margin ; a subapical

black costal spot ; fringe whitish, intersected by a grey stripe.

Wings below sericeous whity brown ; discocellular dets and a

discal series grey: primaries with bronzy borders; fringe as

above, but more decidedly grey-spotted at the ends of the

veins. Hxpanse 11 lines to 1 inch 2 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas); Hakodaté (Whitely).

MELANTHIA, Duponchel.

217. Melanthia casta, n. sp.

Nearly allied to M. albicitlata, but larger ; the markings

more sharply defined and blackish; the macular subapical

portion of the interrupted discal stripe bifid, not trifid,

and therefore not united to the large costal patch; dis-

cocellular spots black and well defined. Wings below with

darker markings; the macular discal stripe well defined in

the secondaries as well as the primaries. Expanse 1 inch

6 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely).

448 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

MELANIPPE, Duponchel.

218. Melanippe inquinata, n. sp.

Closely allied to WZ. procellata of Europe, but larger; the

wings always more or less suffused with grey, sometimes only

enough to make them look sordid, sometimes so dark as almost

to conceal the ordinary markings: primaries with the basal

dark patch broader, and the dark outer border of twice the

width. Expanse 1 inch 7 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas) ; Hakodaté ( Whitely).

219. Melanippe bella, n. sp.

Allied to the preceding, but with unusually small secon-

daries: wings white, suffused, excepting at the borders, with

stramineous; the apical and external or anal borders blotched

with red-brown and bounded internally by a discal series of

blackish rounded spots, interrupted on each wing upon the

second median interspace; black discocellular spots: prima-

ries with the costal border spotted with red-brown and grey,

most broadly above the end of the cell; a tawny spot near

the base of inner margin; two or three very indistinct slender

brownish lines across the wing, the outermost one zigzag:

secondaries with a grey basal stripe, a central grey elbowed

belt, and an arched grey stripe just beyond the middle: body

white, head sordid, antenne black. Wings below with all the

markings black or grey; a central belt followed by a grey

streak on all the wings; basal area of primaries greyish:

body grey, whitish in front ; legs varied above with black and

white. Expanse 1 inch 4-6 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas); Hakodaté (Whitely).

220. Melanippe supergressa, n. sp.

Closely allied to M. rivata of Europe, the markings blacker,

the discal white belt beyond the central band broader; the

base of secondaries white, irrorated with grey, but not densely;

three central parallel dark grey lines not reaching the costa:

wings below with the markings better defined. Expanse

1 inch 1 line.

Hakodaté (Whitely) ; Yokohama (Jonas).

The whiter base to the secondaries and blacker bands are

the best characters for distinguishing this species from its

European congener.

221. Melanippe hecate, n. sp.

Black, mottled indistinctly with grey: wings with the

fringes spotted ‘with white ; a broad irregular white band just

of Heterocera from Japan. 449

beyond the middle, strongly angulated on the primaries ; these

wings also with a double submarginal series of pale spots ;

the inner series with one upon the costa, and a second just

beyond the angle of the irregular band, white: back of head

white, antenne dotted with white, abdomen with white mar-

gins to the segments. Wings below greyer than above, the

basal area crossed by parallel transverse whitish streaks ; body

white. Expanse 1 inch 4 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Allied to M. furcifascia, but the white band broader, more

strongly angulated on the primaries, and continued through

the secondaries.

ANTICLEA, Stephens.

222. Anticlea consanguinea, n. sp.

Nearly allied to A. berberata of Europe, but of a more

uniformly grey colour: primaries with the bands broader, the

subbasal band more regular, the dark band just before the

middle of the wing distinctly angulated above the median vein ;

the discal band less strongly dentated ; outer border broadly

dusky, completely obliterating the sinuated submarginal lines:

secondaries greyish brown, crossed beyond the middle by an

angulated and sinuated dusky line. Wings below similar in

colouring to those of A. berberata, but with a strongly defined

continuous discal line. Expanse 1 inch 2 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely).

CorEMIA, Guénée.

223. Coremia livida, n. sp.

Allied to C. ferrugata, but uniformly greyish brown; the

basal bands more decidedly undulated, and only indicated in

outline by dark lines; the broad dark belt further from the

base, its margins more decidedly undulated, its inner margin

more irregular, its outer margin less decidedly angulated ;

outer border smoky grey, bounded by a continuous series of

white-edged dark lunules, those spots which are dark in UC. fer-

rugata being only slightly darker than the others ; the zigzag

discal line of the European species replaced by a sinuated

line forming an internal boundary to the submarginal lunules ;

lines across the secondaries less strongly defined: wings

below more uniform in tint and sericeous grey, with the sinu-

ated parallel lines arched rather than angulated. Expanse

1 inch 1 line.

Yokohama (Jonas).

450 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species

224. Coremia frigida, n. sp.

White, the primaries spotted at the base with black and

smoky brown; two central angulated black lines, indicating

the usual band, the outer one diffused internally above the

middle ; a black spot at the end of the cell; outer border

smoky brown, margined and traversed internally by two black

lines parallel to the outer of the two central lines; veins upon

the border black, each with a central white dot, the whole

together forming a submarginal series ; fringe white-spotted :

secondaries silver-grey, with the external area regularly white ;

a marginal series of dark grey spots which run through the

fringe; a blackish discocellular spot: body whitish, greyish

in front, dotted with black ; antenne black annulated with

white. Primaries below with the basal two thirds silver-grey,

crossed near the base by two grey stripes visible only from

the transparence of the wing, the inner one marked with two

blackish spots; an oblique black fasciole across the end of the

cell, partly limiting the grey area; an angulated white discal

belt, followed by a black border ; a white subapical costal dot,

and a series on the fringe: secondaries as above: body below

white. Expanse 1 inch.

Yokohama (Jonas).

A beautiful little species, in pattern most nearly resembling

“ Ooremia” heliacaria; the latter, however, has strongly

pectinate antenne in the male.

CrpariA, Treitschke.

225. Cidaria melancholica, n. sp.

Allied to CO. stlaceata, but considerably larger, the white

line nearest to the base of primaries more regular, not suc-

ceeded by a yellow line; the line which follows it (indicating

the inner edge of the central band) acutely angulated upon the

median vein ; the lines and veins on the external area, which

are yellow in C. sclaceata, pale testaceous or sordid whitish ; a

small blue-pupilled ocellus beyond the discoidal cell; secon-

daries smoky grey throughout, with the usual sinuated white-

edged discal lines. Expanse 1 inch 10 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Typical C. stlaceata seems to be common in Japan.

226. Cidaria obscura, n. sp.

Most like very dark varieties of C. russata, but altogether

darker and with a different pattern on the underside. Greyish

brown, the primaries with a pink tinge, markings extremely

of Heterocera from Japan. 451

hke those of C. russata, dark brown, limited by pale-bordered

black lines ; a slightly sinuated black outer margin and grey-

tipped fringe: secondaries with dusky external border, on

which there is an indication of a paler submarginal sinuated

line ; a black scalloped marginal line; fringe grey, with pale

basal line. Wings below grey, with pale testaceous costal

borders ; dusky discocellular dots; three parallel darker grey

postmedian lines, followed by a whity-brown broadly sinu-

ated discal belt; a submarginal dusky belt followed by an

ill-defined undulated pale line; outer border grey; fringe

whity brown: body whity brown. Expanse 1 inch 5 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

C. russata is common in Japan.

227. Cidaria erosa, n. sp.

Closely allied to C. reticulata, but nearly twice as large and

with all the lines of primaries brassy yellow instead of white ;

secondaries and body tinted with brassy yellow ; under surface

pale brassy yellow, with indistinct greyish markings similar to

those of C. reticulata. Expanse 1 inch 9 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely).

228. Cidaria tetrica, n. sp.

Nearest to C. suffwmata, but considerably larger ; the pri-

maries mottled all over with olivaceous, with diffused bronzy

borders to the veins ; the markings may be thus described :—

Wings dark brown, crossed by three silvery bands, all of

which are forked, the first two from the median vein, the third

from the upper radial or inferior subcostal branch ; central

band twice as wide as the others ; between each two bands and

between the external band and outer margin a slender silvery

more or less sinuated line; a marginal series of silvery spots

with black centres: secondaries white, speckled with grey ;

two parallel discal grey lines, on the outer one several blackish

spots ; a marginal series of blackish spots ; fringe yellowish :

body brown, banded with pale yellow and white. Under sur-

face shining white: primaries mottled with grey; costa

speckled with black: secondaries speckled with brown and

grey ; a brown discocellular spot and a brown angulated discal

line ; a grey interrupted submarginal line. Expanse 1 inch

8 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

229. Cidaria cineraria, n. sp.

Very closely allied to C. picata, but the markings blacker ;

452 On new Species of Heterocera from Japan.

the central band of primaries not notched at the second median

branch ; all the yellow or yellowish olivaceous markings re-

placed by ashy grey: the white belt of secondaries wider, the

body darker. Expanse 1 inch 4 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely).

230. Cidaria jameza, n. sp.

Allied to C. tnspurcata: primaries sepia-brown, crossed

near the base by two irregular white lines, undulated and

angulated above the median vein; two black-edged very

irregular dentate-sinuate white discal lines, only separated by a

brown centre line ; a dentate-sinuate white submarginal line ;

centre of external area sprinkled with white scales; a black-

spotted white marginal line; fringe spotted with whitish: secon-

daries grey ; costal area, an angulated chain-like postmedian belt,

a dentate-sinuate submarginal line and the margin white; a

marginal series of black spots; fringe as in primaries:

thorax brown, abdomen grey. Wings below with the basal area

uniformly grey, limited externally by the discal line, which

is represented by subconfluent black spots ; discocellulars black.

Expanse 1 inch 3 lines.

Hakodaté (Whitely).

Euboliide.

Eusouta, Duponchel.

231. Hubolia niphonica, n. sp.

Primaries with the basal two thirds smoky brown, blackish

externally, and limited by an irregular bracket-shaped whitish

line; external third paler white towards the border; two

irregular arched whitish-edged black lines near the base; a

black spot at the end of the cell ; three or four subapical white

dots; two black subapical spots: secondaries pale smoky

brown, with a central whitish-edged dusky bracket-shaped line;

outer margin white, dotted with black: thorax blackish, ab-

domen brown: under surface paler, the basal lines obsolete,

the veins on the disk with reddish borders ; black discocellular

spots well-defined. Expanse 1 inch 6 lines.

Yokohama (Jonas).

Allied to LE. meniaria.

On the Structure of Paleozote Orinotds. 453

LI.—Notes on the Internal and External Structure of

Paleozoic Crinoids. By CHARLES WACHSMUTH*,

[Continued from p. 392. }

5. The Construction of the Summit, and its Value in

Classtfication.

The construction of the ventral disk or actinal side of the

calyx has heretofore received less attention than almost any

other part of the Crinoids; and thereby an important aid to

classification has been overlooked. I think it affords a clear

and most important distinction between recent and ancient

Crinoids, and shows that they fall naturally into two great

divisions or groups. ‘This view, although it does not agree

with the opinion of other authors, who, in their classifications,

have placed a number of Paleozoic genera in the same

group with the recent Crinoids, is, as I hope to show, well

founded.

Dr. F. Roemer, in the ‘ Lethea Geognostica,’ 1855, p. 227,

divides “‘ the true Crinoids, which are supported by an arti-

culated or jointed column,” into two divisions :—

a. Crinoids in which the ventral side consists of a soft skin.

b. Those in which the ventral side is covered by solid im-

movable plates.

Roemer includes with the former group Pentacrinide, Apio-

erinide, Eugeniacrinide, Encrinide, Cigbshnberintdes and

Cyathocrinide. This division seems to have been based on

mere conjecture, since a membranous ventral surface has been

observed only in the Pentacrinide and the recent Crinoids

generally, though it is probable that Hugenitacrinus and seve-

ral allied genera had that summit structure. In the Apio-

crinide and Encrinidz, however, the general construction of

the dorsal or abactinal parts, the massive plates, both of

calyx and arms, indicate rather a closer relationship with the

ancient Crinoids, and suggest the existence of a solid dome.

The latter becomes more probable since a solid vault has

been discovered in Belemnocrinus. This genus is in its

generic formula and general form almost identical with the

recent Rhizocrinus, which, on the contrary, is covered by a

soft peristome. Both are closely related to Apiocrinus; Be-

lemnocrinus particularly has the same heavy body-plates and

the small visceral cavity ; and it appears to me that Apdocri-

nus is more nearly allied to the Paleozoic type than to the

recent Rhizocrinus.

The Cupressocrinide and Cyathocrinide are the only groups

from Paleozoic formations which Roemer places in his divi-

* From ‘Silliman’s American Journal,’ Sept. 1877.

454 Mr. C. Wachsmuth on the Internal and

sion a. Dr. Schultze, who adopted Roemer’s classification,

included in the Cupressocrinide the genera ‘‘ Synbathocrinus,

Phill., and Phimocrinus, L. Schl.,” in which he is undoubt-

edly correct, for stronger reasons even than he himself per-

ceived. These two genera agree with Cupressocrinus not only

in the simplicity of their arms, but also in the so-called “ con-

solidating apparatus,” which he describes and figures in the

latter. he apparatus is placed horizontally in Cupresso-

crinus, upright and turbinate in the two other genera. When

the consolidating plates in Synbathocrinus are preserved, the

ventral side appears to have two separate apertures, a lateral

proboscis and a central mouth. And so the genus was origi-

nally described. This, however, is a misconception. By

removing carefully all the arm-joints from a specimen of

Synbathocrinus, 1 discovered the central aperture perfectly

covered with a number of small plates ; and to this summit, as

it might be called, were attached narrow lateral extensions,

composed of alternating pieces, which, passing downward,

covered the little grooves that lead to the arm-furrows. The

consolidating apparatus here forms, in fact, a part of the solid

vault. It is reasonable to conclude that in the allied genera

Cupressocrinus and Phimocrinus, so closely related to Syn-

bathocrinus otherwise, the central opening was closed, and

that the consolidating plates were further overlaid with plates

forming the floor of a passage in connexion with the arm-fur-

rows and visceral cavity. The small plates which extend out

to the arms are in the specimen but partly preserved, and the

connexion with the arm-furrow is interrupted; but there can

be no doubt that the channel underneath contained the food-

groove and ambulacral canal which I have described in

Cyathocrinus. The covering of the central opening of Syn-

bathocrinus resembles in a remarkable degree that of the

central aperture of the Blastoids; and it seems to me highly

probable that the consolidating plates are homologous with

the partly hidden deltoid pieces of the latter.

Among the Cyathocrinides Roemer included genera of

widely different types. Besides the typical one, he enume-

rates nine genera, only two of which, SHeterocrinus and

Graphiocrinus, have the characteristics of the Cyathocrinide ;

and both of them evidently possess a solid dome, as is proved

by their heavy proboscis. All the remaining genera belong

to other groups. Macrostylocrinus resembles Ctenocrinus,

Bronn, and Cytocrinus, Roemer, so closely, that they may yet

prove to be identical. Roemer, however, places Ctenocrinus

with Glyptocrinus among the Crinoids with a solid dome, and

Macrostylocrinus among the Cyathocrinide. Macrostyloeri-

External Structure of Paleozoic Crinoids. 455

nus is allied to Melocrinus, and has undoubtedly a similar

summit-structure. The same may be said of Schizocrinus

and Dimerocrinus, which are not at all related to Cyatho-

crinus.

The genus Cyathocrinus was originally described by Prof.

Phillips and Mr. Austin as having a separate mouth and vent,

which was considered by these authors and others to be its

chief distinction from Poteriocrinus. Accordingly, all species

with a proboscis or solid dome, though otherwise agreeing

with Cyathocrinus, were referred to Poteriocrinus or some

allied genus. Meek and Worthen, however, proved (in the

Geological Report of Ilinois, vol. v. p. 325) that in perfect

specimens the central opening is closed. The covering of

Cyathocrinus is exceedingly interesting, and throws light

upon the summit-structure of many genera. I shall herein

refer frequently to Meek and Worthen’s excellent figures,

vol. v. pl. ix. figs. 13, 14.

Looking only at fig. 14, one would at first naturally suppose

there must have been, during the life of the animal, two dis-

tinct openings in the vault. But on examining it more criti-

cally, and comparing it with fig. 13, it will be found that

fig. 14 represents simply the consolidating apparatus as

figured by Roemer and Schultze in Cupressocrinus, placed

here exactly as in that genus, and consisting of five large

pieces, alternating with the upper edges of the first radial

plates. The plate of the anal side is larger than the others,

and forms the base of the inner side of the proboscis. The

five pieces, which connect with each other laterally, extend

inward for some distance, but not so far as to meet in the

centre, where there is a semicircular or heart-shaped opening.

Along the sutures between the five plates a comparatively

large furrow from each arm-base extends inward, and leads

to the central opening. Examining now fig. 13 we find the

general aspect of the ventral disk entirely changed. The

lateral opening has been transformed into the base of a pro-

boscis ; and the consolidating plates are partly covered, leaving

but a small uncovered space, in the form of a delta, in the

interradial areas. The central opening is vaulted over by a

number of various-sized pieces, the largest one occupying the

side towards the proboscis. The shallow groove between the

sutures of the consolidating plates is arched by a double series

of alternating plates, forming underneath a passage for the

ambulacral canal and food-groove. ‘The vault, thus closely

resembling that of Synbathocrinus, was in all probability ar-

ranged on a similar principle in Cupressocrinus. The same

‘plan, with slight modifications, prevailed in Potertocrinus,

456 Mr. C. Wachsmuth on the Internal and

Scaphiocrinus, and all genera with an inflated or balloon-

shaped ventral sac. Among the latter the centre of radiation

is frequently found to be pushed toward the anterior side, so

that, owing to the great size of the sac at its junction with the

dorsal cup, it does not occupy the centre of figure.

Among all groups of Crinoids, the Cyathocrinide undergo

the least amount of change in the course of time. They are

represented in the Lower Silurian by several genera; and Cya-

thocrinus is the only genus recognized in the Permian. In all

intermediate formations we find Crinoids with five basals, five

subradials, and five radials; and it is worthy of note that the

Cyathocrinide, in the structure of their vault, bear closer re-

semblance to the recent Crinoids than almost any other group,

and seem to hold an intermediate position between modern

and Paleozoic types. Ifthe alternating plates covering the

furrows could be turned back at the vault by the animal as

the Saumplatten of the arms, then the food-groove of these

Crinoids was open throughout, as in recent forms. This might

possibly have been the case in Cyathocrinus towensis ; but I

even doubt it here, as the corresponding plates in other closely

related species, though arranged upon the same fundamental

plan, present rather an aspect of true vault pieces. The Cu-

pressocrinida and Cyathocrinide thus fall naturally into a

group by themselves, having the vault supported by con-

solidating plates, and covered by an immovable arch of small

plates.

The next group, including TYaxocrinus, Forbesiocrinus,

Onychocrinus, Ichthyocrinus, Lecanocrinus, and probably other

genera, is one in which, of all Paleozoic Crinoids, the vault is

least known. The Taxocrinide (for such I will call them)

have hitherto been described as being covered with some soft

material instead of solid plates, even by Dr. Schultze, though

he describes and figures a Yaxocrinus with a long, heavy,

plated proboscis, which could not have been supported upon a

soft skin*. In this group the plates of the radial series are

indented on their upper margins more or less deeply for-the

reception of a protuberance from the lower side of the succeed-

ing plate. The indentation of the upper margin does not

extend throughout the thickness of the plate ; and in Forbesio-

erinus it is filled by a superficial patelloid plate, which is

* I believe Dr. Schultze is mistaken in referring his 7. briareus to

Taxocrinus, as it lacks all the characteristic features of the genus. Its

rather large subradials, the large first radials as compared with the suc-

ceeding radials, the single anal plate upon which the heavy proboscis

rests, indicate that it belongs to Cyathocrinus or some allied genus. His

T. gracilis may prove to be Graphiocrinus or Scaphiocrinus(?).

External Structure of Paleozoic Crinotds. 457

separately articulated and sometimes ankylosed with the outer

margin of the plate above. This peculiarity not only exists

in the arm-plates, but is conspicuous in the radials, thus pro-

ducing apparently an articulate structure of the whole skeleton

and indicating some degree of flexibility in the body as well

as the arms. The interradial portions appear sometimes

depressed, and in other cases swollen or bulged out, showing

that they probably yielded to a moderate expansion or con-

traction of the body-walls, due to the mobility of the radial

parts, which likewise involves a flexibility of the summit. I

have not been so fortunate to find the summit of any of these

genera perfectly preserved; but I feel convinced from what I

have observed that it did not consist of a soft skin. In Ony-

chocrinus, the genus which possessed evidently the greatest

expansive power, the radial plates are frequently found spread

out horizontally, and J have found towards the inner or ven-.

tral side of the radials rather large imbricating plates, to

which smaller ones are attached which connect with the plates

of the interradial series, and which decrease in thickness in-

wardly. In several specimens I found the inner part or

centre of the disk covered by a number of thin, very small

plates, whose arrangement could not be made out; but it is

highly probable, from their size and shape, that they formed a

kind of scaly integument which was pliant and flexible, thus

facilitating a contraction or expansion of the dorsal portions.

The close relationship existing between Onychocrinus,

Forbestocrinus, and Taxocrinus renders it almost certain that

their summit was similarly constructed. In Ichthyocrinus the

peculiarities in the radial portions are less strongly marked,

and the genus has no interradial plate ; but as it agrees other-

wise so nearly with Tazxocrinus that it is sometimes difficult

to separate them, we may feel sure that this Silurian genus

forms no exception to the general rule, but that its mouth

was covered as in other Paleozoic Crinoids.

That the summit in several genera has not been discovered

is no proof that it consisted of soft material. During the

eighteen years that I collected at Burlington I obtained

several hundred of the most perfect specimens of Cyathocri-

nus, some of them as perfect in most of their parts as if dredged

from the ocean ; but only two specimens have been discovered

in which the summit was preserved, and only a single Scaphio-

ertnus. That this could happen at a locality where even the

finest tissues of the most delicate internal organs are preserved,

is somewhat astonishing; but yet it can be accounted for by

the fact that the pieces which cover the central opening, as

also the small alternating plates forming the ambulacral canal,

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5, Vol. i. 31

458 Mr. C. Wachsmuth on the Internal and

are very thin, and that they rest but partly upon the consoli-

dating plates, being thereby rendered insecure and liable to

removal by any accident, even with very small force. More-

over the arms of the Cyathocrinide are generally attached,

and the ventral disk thus hidden from view. In specimens

in which the arms are destroyed their destruction almost

invariably involved that of the entire ventral side; and so

delicate are these parts, that even when the arms are well

preserved and so situated as to expose the dome, the plates are

nearly always gone, or are found in a confused mass inside

the calyx.

I come now to another group, in which, on the basis of the

summit-structure, such apparently diverse forms are included

that I am under the necessity, very unwillingly, of making a

name for it. It includes the families Actinocrinide, Platy-

.erinidee, Rhodocrinide, Melocrinide, and the genera Schizo-

ertnus, Dimerocrinus, and Macrostylocrinus, which Roemer

has ranged among the Cyathocrinide ; and I call it provi-

sionally the Spheroide, from the form of the calyx, which is

generally somewhat spherical. This large group, embracing

over one hundred genera, and ranging from the base of the

Silurian to the top of the Subcarboniferous, is capable of

accurate definition, is easily distinguished, and, fortunately, the

summit is very commonly found well preserved in most of

the genera.

The summit is composed of heavy, frequently nodose plates,

closely cemented together so as to form a free arch (not sup-

ported by consolidating plates), which rests like a hemisphere

upon the dorsal cup. The plates of the summit, which at first

sight exhibit great apparent diversity, are arranged through-

out upon one and the same fundamental plan. Beginning

with genera that have but few vault-pieces, we find in them

the median portion occupied by one large centre plate, sur-

rounded by six others—four large ones of equal size, and two

smaller ones. The four large plates join laterally, and are

often placed directly to the centre piece. In very large species

and sometimes in very old specimens the plates are separated

by small polygonal pieces, but easily recognized by their size.

‘T'wo of the four plates lie above the interradial series adjoining

the anterior ray ; the two others, one at each side, are placed

between the two lateral rays. The two smaller plates are

separated from each other by anal plates or by the proboscis.

These seven pieces, which I will call the “ apical plates,” are

easily recognized by their greater prominence and size in

species with comparatively few summit-plates and a lateral

anal aperture; but their identification is more difficult in

EKaternal Structure of the Paleozoic Crinotds. 459

species in which a subcentral proboscis is placed between the

two small plates, and the whole vault looks like an immense

proboscis. In these forms the four large plates, together

with the two smaller ones, are pushed towards the anterior

side of the specimen, while the centre plate rests with one side

against the proboscis.

There are other summit-plates following a radial direction,

which are either attached to the apical pieces or separated from

them by a belt of small polygonal plates. Their number,

which varies greatly in different species, depends upon the

number of primary arms that spring out directly from the

body, no matter how often the arms branch afterward. In

species with only two arms to the ray, each ray has two rows

of corresponding plates in the dome: one large bifurcating

plate forms the upper row, three plates the second row; two

of the latter are brachial plates, the third one is an inter-

brachial plate separating the two arms. In rays with three

arms, there are eight plates in three series. The upper series

consists of one large bifureating plate, which evidently corre-

sponds with the third radial of the dorsal side. The second

series, corresponding to the secondary radials, is composed of

two plates, the plate towards the division with two arms being

as large as the plate of the upper series, and the one towards

the single arm much smaller. The third series is formed by

three brachial and two interbrachial plates. In species with

four arms to the ray, both radial pieces of the second series

are large, and from each of them there originate two brachial

pieces. As a general rule the summit-plates increase in pro-

portion to the number of primary arms of a species in the

same manner and on the same principle as the plates of the

dorsal side. very radial from the third radial upward has a

corresponding plate on the ventral side, and additional in-

terbrachial plates between corresponding brachial plates above

the arms. ‘Therefore in adult specimens, with some little

practice, the number of arms can be ascertained nearly as well

from the dome as from the dorsal side. The number of vault-

pieces is enormous in some genera, especially if the radials

branch off alternately, as, for instance, in Stérotocrinus, where

some species have 120 to 180 arms. In looking at a full-

grown specimen, with its many hundred apparently irregu-

larly arranged vault-pieces, one would scarcely expect to be

able to discover that this construction, in nearly all the Palzo-

zoic Crinoids, is based upon a definite plan, and that plan the

same as prevails below the arms. That this is the case may

be successfully demonstrated in the young Strotocrinus, which

has comparatively fewer summit-plates.

460. Mr. C. Wachsmuth ox the Internal and

The young specimen, in genera with numerous arms, has

fewer arm-openings than the adult, though both have the

same number of arms. This is best observed in the young

Strotocrinus. Here the basals, primary radials, first anal,

and first interradial pieces are comparatively large, while the

higher series of interradials are yet absent or but slightly de-

veloped. The radials of the higher orders, which in adult

specimens form a part of the body, are in young specimens

free arm plates, unsupported by any interradial or interaxil-

lary pieces. The arms, therefore, which spring directly from

the body in adult specimens, in the young branch alternately

right and left after emerging from the body, the spaces between

the bases of the branches being subsequently filled by the

upward growth of the body, so that the branching, instead of

occurring in the free arms, seems to be completed in the body-

walls. So, for stance, the young Strotocrinus umbrosus has

at first but four arm-openings to the ray ; at a later period it

is found to have eight, and in the adult state twelve, being a

separate opening for each arm*.

The rule that the number of summit-plates increases in

proportion to the number of primary arms holds good with

reference to the young specimen. The young Strotocrinus

has fewer plates than the adult individual (the difference being

in proportion to the state of growth); and these are arranged

in the same order, and are as easily recognized, as those of the

simplest species of this group. The apical and principal

radial pieces are larger than the intervening interradial plates,

which, exceptionally in this genus, attain by age the same size

as the apical and radial pieces. The interradial plates of the

vault occupy the intermediate spaces between the radial areas.

As their number depends greatly upon the age of the indivi-

dual, they vary often in the same species. In species with

but few arms, we find comparatively few interradials, and

those are generally smaller than the other plates. The latter

is especially. true in young specimens, as also in small species.

Sometimes (as, for instance, in some Megistocriné and all Rho-

docrinide) the greater part of the summit is covered by large

numbers of small polygonal plates which form regular belts

* A young Strotocrinus, unless the arms are attached, cannot be distin-

guished generically from an adult Actinocrinus proboscidialis; and as both

have the same peculiar ornamentation with the same number of arm-open-

ings, they differ but slightly in specific characters. Act¢nocrinus probosci-

dials is the typical species of a small group of beautifully ornamented

Crinoids, and it is evidently the forefather of all Strotocrinz, which idea

seems to be further confirmed by the geological succession. The former

group occurs only in the Lower, and Strotecrinus only in the Upper Bur-

lington Limestone.

External Structure of the Paleozote Crinoids. 461

around the, apical and radial plates. The species of these

genera, though comparatively of large size, have generally

but two primary arms, and consequently for each ray but

one radial dome-plate, which is here placed at some dis-

tance from the arm-bases. In the adult Megistocrinus the

radial as well as apical plates are extremely large, and stand

forth conspicuously, and each one separately, among the sur-

rounding minute polygonal pieces. In the young Megisto-

crinus, however, and in the Rhodocrinide generally, the apical

pieces and the radial plate are placed side by side, being sur-

rounded by the polygonal plates. The form and size of the

principal summit-plates, the distribution and number of the

interradial pieces, afford most excellent characters for distin-

guishing many genera. In Agaricocrnus all apical and radial

pieces are large and tuberculous, the few interradials are small.

In Dorycrinus the centre plate and first radials are spiniferous

or nodose. In Amphoracrinus the four large apical pieces

are spiniferous or tuberculous, the radials nodose. In Platy-

crinus and Hexacrinus the apical plates are very prominent,

often tuberculous, the radial portions are somewhat constructed

like the rows of small alternating plates of the Cyathocrinide.

In Batocrinus all summit-plates are nodose and almost of

equal size.

The apical plates can be distinguished in other groups as

well as in this. They surmount the vault of Synbathocrinus

and Cyathecrinus, cover the central opening of the Blastoids,

and can be traced in many of the Cystideans. This, with the

further fact that they are so largely developed in young

specimens, that they cover and protect some of the most im-

portant organs of the inner cavity, shows their great import-

ance, and leads us to infer that they were the first solid parts

developed on the ventral side in young Crinoids. The centre

piece corresponds evidently with the basals of the dorsal side,

the surrounding plates to the subradials (the two smaller plates

separated by the anus forming together one large one), which,

on the other hand, were undoubtedly the first-developed parts

of the dorsal side, and the parts which are the most highly

developed in the Cystideans.

The above groups, representing the three principal plans

upon which the vault is constructed, embrace, according to my

views, not only all those Paleozoic genera which were sup-

posed to be covered by a membranous surface, but nearly all

Paleozoic Crinoids that are known. There are some few

genera, as, for instance, Hucalyptocrinus, with a very peculiar

superstructure at the ventral side, whose affinities I have not

been able to determine. There is the genus Calceocrinus,

462 Mr. C. Wachsmuth on the Paleozoic Crinotds.

which differs so widely from all other known. Crinoids by its

distinet bilateral symmetry and unique structure that it forms

evidently a very distinct group by itself. There may be still

others, differing in their summit-structure from the general

plan; but I have yet to discover a single Paleeozoic genus in

which a special oral aperture has been identified, or in which

the existence of a solid vault has been disproved or cannot be

traced by analogy. ‘Thus it may be possible that the solid

vault was essential under the conditions which prevailed in the

earlier geological ages.

Closely related as the recent Crinoids are to their Paleozoic

ancestors in some points, the solid vault of the latter cannot in

the remotest degree be homologized with the soft peristome of

the former. The solid dome forms, as I think I have proved,

a continuation of the radial and interradial series of the dorsal

side, and serves merely as a covering and protection for the

organs underneath. It is in every sense of the word aboral, and

forms a part of the abactinal system, which, being already re-

duced in the Pentacrinide and Comatulide to a narrow

tentacle-furrow, recedes in the Paleeozoic Crinoids one step fur-

ther, and disappears within the solid walls of the body. The

actinal system here consists externally only of the arm-furrows,

whence it continues underneath the vault. These Crinoids,

therefore, are evidently of lower development and belong to

an inferior type.

The ventral peristome of the recent Crinoids serves as a

madreporic apparatus, introducing the necessary water for

respiration. It is capable of expansion, and does expand

when water or food is introduced into the inner cavity, and

contracts when refuse matter is expelled. These are functions

which the solid vault could not have performed; and there

must have been, consequently, important modifications in the

internal economy of these animals. Comparing the large size

of the calyx of the earlier Crinoids with the small cup and

large long arms of the recent types, we find in the former an

approach to the Cystideans, as also a striking resemblance to

the nascent Pentacrinus betore its arms are fully developed.

In the older forms, the radial plan is almost overshadowed by

the bilateral arrangement of the vault, which reminds of

the bilateral symmetry in the earlier stages of other Echino-

derms. All these facts tend to prove that the Paleozoic Cri-

notds, embracing therein all true Crinotds in which the actinal

side is closed, represent the young stage of growth of the living

types. They bear evidently the same relation to the Penta-

crinide and Comatulide as the Perischoechinide bear to the

Echini, as the Cystidew and Blastoideee bear to the Paleozoic

Mr. E. A. Smith on a new Form of Ophiuride. 463

Crinotds. They unquestionably form a distinct group of

Crinoids ; and I therefore propose for it, from the fact that its

representatives lived almost exclusively in Paleozoic times,

the name ‘ Paleocrinoidea,” as a suborder of the Crinoids.

Whether Encrinus, Apiocrinus, and allied genera of the

Jurassic time are to be brought within this suborder, depends

upon the construction of their vault, which cannot at present

be determined. Should they prove to have a solid dome, they

would be included here; and this might detract slightly from

the technical exactness of the name Palwocrinoidea. Still, as

its characteristic types were so prevalent, and constituted so

important a part of the life of Paleozoic ages, and the Meso-

zoic forms are comparatively so insignificant in variety and

abundance, the term would nevertheless be significant and

appropriate.

I shall not attempt to separate the Paleocrinoidea into

families, as [ think our present knowledge is hardly sufficient

for such a work; but I feel convinced that it must be based

mainly upon the diversities in the structure of the vault, not

upon the construction of the dorsal cup, nor upon the struc-

ture of the arms or column, upon which former authors have

founded such divisions.

The discoveries which have been made within the last few

years, both in recent and extinct Crinoids, are really wonder-

ful, and lead us to expect large additions to our knowledge in

the future. Lobserve, in the February number of the ‘American

Jourhal,’ that Prof. Thomson has discovered at great depth two

new genera of Apiocrinide, one of them resembling in super-

ficial structure the genus Poteriocrinus. This may throw new

light upon the physiology of the extinct types and solve some

of the questions herein suggested. Other discoveries will

follow. ‘The labours of the zoologist will supplement the

researches of the paleontologist; and through their pro-

perly united efforts we may hope in time to comprehend

the structure of the Paleeocrinoidea almost as perfectly as if

they were yet living in our oceans.

LIl.—Deseription of a remarkable new Form of Ophiuride

from Ceylon. By Epaar A. Situ, F.Z.8.

THE specimen about to be described was presented to the

British Museum in 1875 by Mr. E. W. H. Holdsworth, by

whom it was collected at Ceylon.

Apparently it is closely related to the genus Ophiothela of

464 Mr. E. A. Smith on a new Form of Ophiuride.

Verrill, although, in relation to the hitherto described species

of that genus, it isa giant. It differs only in the fewness of

hooks or prongs with which the arm-spines of all the species

are provided ; and the upper surface of the disk and arms

displays a much finer granulation.

This species also shows some affinity with Ophiogymna_ of

Ljungman, judging from the brief and insufficient description

of that author. The armature of the mouth is similar, the

oral and adoral shields have the same position, and neither

exhibit a tentacle-scale; but the radial shields in Ophiogymna

are almost entirely covered with the soft skin enveloping the

disk, whereas in the present species they are altogether naked

as in Ophiothela. The arms are said to be very long by

Ljungman ; but his description does not inform us regarding

the plates, whether they are naked or covered with skin,

smooth or granulated. Ophiocnemis of Miller and Troschel

agrees with this species in the parts of the mouth, but differs

in the arms, arm-spines, and covering of the disk.

Ophiothela Holdsworthii, sp. nov.

Disk circular, moderately thick, clothed with a soft skin

beneath and above, except on the large radial shields; the

latter are very remarkable on account of a raised keel or

ridge, which extends from the inner or narrow end of the

shield almost to the outer extremity, where it is most elevated,

and terminates in a prominent angle; the shields are large,

elongate, subtriangular, adjacent along the inner margins,

except at the end, where they are slightly separated, leaving

a notch between for the origin or insertion of the arm; they

do not reach quite to the centre of the disk; and the inter-

radial naked space between the different pairs is about equal

in extent to one of the shields. Oral shields indistinct, small,

somewhat triangular, with an angle towards the mouth

between the small irregularly oval adoral scuta; teeth about

three in number, irregular, small, acute at the end; tooth-

apille in two series, irregular, not numerous. Arms 5, three

and a half times as long as the diameter of the disk, slender :

lower arm-plates, with the exception of a few near the oral

end, clothed with a thin skin, and consequently rather indi-

stinct; they appear to be very small, about as long as broad,

outer and imner edges arched, the lateral margins very

slightly convex; the first plates are situated between the

adoral shields, are of the same size, and with them form a

continuous ring around the mouth: upper arm-plates naked,

minutely granulated, two or three times as broad as long,

frequently fractured into two or more pieces, and hence more

Mr. W. N. Lockington on American Alphei. 465

or less irregular in form; the outer edge is either straightish,

slightly convex, or undulating: s¢de arm-plates in the form of

narrow ridges : arm-spines very short, covered with skin at

the base, naked and minutely prickly at the tips; four in

number, except near the disk, where a few plates are armed

with five; the three upper ones are subequal, and only a little

more than a millimetre in length, the lowermost one very

minute, and situated in a line with the tentacle-pores; and a

few of them towards the end of the rays are armed with a

minute hook or double hook at the extremity. No tentacle-

scale. Genital rime furnished with a distinct irregular elon-

gate-oval plate at the outer extremity, extending a little

beyond the actual opening into the disk. The general colour

of the disk above is purplish brown, somewhat paler on the

keels of the radial shields, considerably paler beneath ; arms

light brown above and whitish below; the oral and aboral

shields are of the same tint as the lower surface of the disk ;

the skin covering the arm-spines is purplish brown, giving

the arms a bordered aspect.

Diameter of disk 25 millims., length of arm about 80, length

of radial shields 10.

LIUI.—Remarks on some new Alphei, with a Synopsis of the

North-American Species. By W. N. LOCKINGTON.

THe North-American species of the old genus Alpheus are

now known to be very numerous, as many as sixteen having

been found upon the Pacific coast, from Panama northwards,

making a total of eighteen species from both coasts.

Some kind of subdivision, in so numerous a group, 1s neces-

sary for the sake of convenience ; and the presence or absence

of arostrum and of ocular spines probably furnish characters

as reliable as any.

Dana, in 1852, availed himself of the absence of a rostrum,

and the inversion of the hands, to separate the genus Beteus,

which has been generally acknowledged until Kingsley, in

his synopsis of North-American species of the genus Alpheus

(Bull. U.S. Geol. & Geogr. Surv. vol. iv. no. 1, p. 189), pro-

posed, on what appear to me to be insufficient grounds, to

reunite them.

In a large series of A. minus, Say, that author found many

which wanted the rostrum; while in some other Alphez the

dactylus works obliquely or horizontally, showing an approach

to the characters of Beteus.

466 Mr, W. N. Lockington on American Alphei.

But is it not the case with almost every genus except such

as stand alone, forming of themselves a family or subfamily,

that some of the less typical species intergrade with an adjoin-

ing genus, or even with three or four adjoining genera? What

is a genus? Is it not, like a species or family, a portion of

the scale of Nature marked off arbitrarily for convenience in

classification ?

If there are rigid genera, not intergrading with others, it is

because the connecting links have not yet been discovered—or

because the causes which produced the generic characters were

sudden and profound, destroying all races which did not change

with sufficient swiftness.

The multiplicity of genera with one species has been caused

in great part by the too great subdivision which has been in-

dulged in by naturalists. Characters merely specific have been

made generic, while every slight variation of form or colour

has added a species. More advanced modern naturalists,

reviewing these co-called species with ample material, have

proved that they are merely geographical varieties of the same

species; and the result has been that we have numerous single

species with a full binomial to themselves, yet with little to

warrant such distinction. This is especially the case among

the birds of North America; and will occur in other classes

as soon as our knowledge is sufficiently advanced to detect

the intergradation of allied forms from different localities.

Were the test of geographical variation apphed to our

North-American Alphei, I have little doubt that many would

sink into varieties. Yet the forms actually distinct are really

numerous, and the genus so large that it needs subdivision.

Many of the species included in it, were they classified on the

same principles with birds, would become genera.

Previous to my notice of A. bellimanus, A. equidactylus, and

B. longidactylus (in the Proc. Cal. Acad. vol. vii. part 1,

pp. 34, 35) no species had been described from this coast ;

immediately afterwards I added two other species ; Kingsley

(Bull. U.S. Geol. and Geogr. Surv. vol. iv. no. 1, p. 189)

adds six new species, all occurring at Panama, and notes the

occurrence of the Atlantic A. heterochelis at Panama and

Realejo, on the Pacific coast ; and in this paper I describe four

additional species, noting also the occurrence of A. heterochelis

on both shores of Lower California.

IT am not aware that commensalism has previously been

observed in this genus (Van Beneden, in his ‘ Animal Para-

sites and Messmates,’ does not mention it), although Pon-

tonia, an allied genus, is commensal; yet one at least of the

Pacific species, B. equimanus, is a commensal under the mantle

Mr. W. N. Lockington on American Alphei. 467

of the common “ abalone”’ . (Haliotis rufescens, Swains.). As

this mollusk extends far towards the north, we may expect to

hear of B. equimanus from more northern localities. At pre-

sent it is known only from Catalina Island and Santa Bar-

bara, California.

As I have not in my possession any foreign species of the

genus, and have not seen several of the species lately described

by Kingsley, I shall in this place separate Beteus only, and

treat of the rest of the group as one genus, divided into sec-

tions by the characters of the front and hands, for convenience

in future identification.

The letter P indicates that the species belongs to, or has

been found upon, the Pacific coast, while A indicates the

Atlantic species.

The species I have had an opportunity to examine are

marked thus, !.

Synopsis of the North-American Alphei.

A. Rostrum present.

a. Ocular spines present

A sulcus between eye-shields and rostrum :

larger hand complexly sulcated, with a

superior and an external spine; dactylus

swollen at the tip, working horizontally :

smaller hand with asuperior spine. Me-

ral joints of posterior pairs with a spine

below ; propodi spinulose ........... . A, clamator! P.

No sulcus between eye-shields and rostrum:

larger hand as in clamator; dactylus la-

minate, closing horizontally : smaller hand

with superior and exterior spines. No

spines on meral joints of posterior pairs ;

propedispmulose. tte citkys ws cee Riese 0:8 A, bellimanus! P.

No spine on basal joint of antenne : larger

hand with superior and external spines,

sulcate; dactylus vertical (?): smaller

hand with superior spine. Posterior

pairs without meral spines; propodi spi-

MEPIRCERES os eens teh ae cet aaa ayes wees ee ages ake A, barbara*, P.

Antennal scale regularly elliptical; larger

hand a third longer than carapax, with a

spine above and a smaller one near it.

Propodi of posterior pairs spinulose .... A. minor! A.

Basal spine of antennulee reaching to end of

second joint of antennular peduncle ;

smaller hand (?) without spines. Penult.

joint of abdomen with lateral spines.... A. equedactylus! P.

Orbital spines arising from superior surface

of carapax, margin continuous beneath

them; larger hand spineless; smaller

* = A, clamator, Kingsley.

468 Mr. W. N. Lockington on American Alphei.

ditto, slender. Propodal joints of poste-

rior pairs spinulose ..........eseeeees A, panamensis, P.

Larger hand elongate, spineless, slightly sul-

cate; smaller slender, spineless. No

spines or spinules on posterior pairs. Two

airs of spinules on telson .........+.- A. tenwimanus! P.

es spine of antennule reaching to middle

of second joint of peduncle ; basal joint of

antenne with a small upper and large

lower spine; larger hand without spines

or sulci; smaller ditto. Posterior pairs :

without meral spines; propodi spinulose. A. leviuseulus! P.

b. No ocular spines.

Eye-shields produced forwards, scarcely spini-

form; larger hand spineless, sulcate,

thumb distorted, smaller (?).......... A, sulcatus, P.

Rostrum separated from ocular shields by a

deep depression: larger hand once and

a half as long as carapax, spineless,

constricted ; dactylus slightly oblique,

with large basal tooth: smaller hand

spineless ; fingers about equal to palm.

Posterior pairs with spinulose propodi.. A. heterochelis! A, P.

Rostrum separated from eye-shields by a sul-

cus: larger hand with a supericr spine,

sulcate ; dactylus as in heterochelis, but

obtuse: smaller hand as in heterochelis.. A. affinis, P.

Carina of rostrum running back to nearly

middle of carapax; larger hand once and

a half as long as carapax, spineless ;

smaller hand as long as larger, spineless,

fingers longer than palm..........-... A, floridanus, A.

Carina of rostrum continued backwards, but

no depression between eye-shields and

rostrum: larger hand spineless, sulcate;

dactylus vertical: smaller hand spine-

less. Meral joints of posterior pairs spine-

less; propodi spinulose. Telson with

two pairs of spinules above and a third

GHG LA, Sea rete cre' ss = ia a eae A, spinicaudus! P.

Hands small, nearly equal; larger spineless,

constricted on margins; smaller slender,

fingers equal topalm. No meral spines

ON POsterlOY PAIS... vsscceesrceesssss A, parvimanus, P.

Hands very unequal; larger spineless, cylin-

drical, tapering; smaller smooth, slender,

cylindrical, dactylus as long as palm.

o meral spines on posterior pairs; pro-

POG! SPIDUIORS aise sate oi 0 an aa enieee Wie A, fasciatus! P.

Rostrum very short, obtuse; no spine on

basal joint of antenne. Larger hand

cylindrical, grooved externally: dactylus

horizontal: smaller hand cylindrical ;

fingers equal to palm a5 ssis .. «aoe A. cylindricus, P.

B. Rostrum wanting; dactylus on lower side of

hand. =Beteus, Dana.

Front emarginate between eyes; hands nearly

Mr. W. N. Lockington on American Alphei. 469

equal, compressed-oyate, spineless. Dac-

tyli of posterior pairs spinulose........ B. equimanus! P.

Front rounded; hands similar, fingers gaping

pg Clb gee eae era Ah irre B. longidactylus! P.

Alpheus clamator, Lockington.

Alpheus clamator, Lockington, Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci. vii. 1876, p. 48.

Alpheus transverso-dactylus, Kingsley, loc. cit. p. 197.

Carapax smooth, body not greatly compressed. Front tri-

spinose ; the rostrum longer and more slender than the ocular

spines, which are separated from it by a deep sulcus, and

widen out quickly into the eye-shield.

Basal spine of antennule shorter than the first joint of the

peduncle; outer branch of flagella stout, margined with sete,

about equal in length to peduncle, inner branch about halt

the length of the body.

Antenne with a spine on basal joint. Antennal scale

narrow ; its spine nearly, and its laminar portion quite, reaching

the end of the antennary peduncle, which is slightly longer

than that of antennule. Flagella more than three quarters

the length of body.

External maxillipeds extending slightly beyond peduncle

of antenne. Meros of both hands of first pair smooth, com-

pressed, with a slender spine at distal extremity above. Car-

pus of smaller hand slightly longer than that of larger.

Hands unequal, dissimilar. Fingers of smaller pair straight,

parallel, slender, closely fitting, working vertically, about

equal in length to palm; manus with a spine above articula-

tion of dactylus, whole inner surface beset with long hairs.

Larger hand smooth proximally, setose and complexly sul-

cate distally. A large spine on the outer side continued

backward as a carina, above the carina a deep sulcus ; a second

spine at articulation of dactylus. A deep and wide sulcus

commencing above the articulation of the dactylus, flanked

internally by a sharp ridge, externally by a smooth, broad

ridge separating it from the exterior sulcus. This superior

sulcus is continued obliquely backwards along the upper

surface of the hand; and from about the centre of its length

a transverse constriction is continued down the inner side of

the hand. Below the exterior spine a constriction divides the

pollex from the palm. Dactylus short, curved so as to close

horizontally, swollen at the extremity, extending beyond the

ollex. Ischium and meros of second pair equal; carpus five-

jointed, first four joints together equal to meros, third and

fourth joints each half the length of the second, which is

equal to the first ; fifth joint intermediate in length between

470 Mr. W. N. Lockington on American Alphei. |

second and third; hand as long as fourth and fifth carpal

joints.

Meral joint of posterior pairs with a spine at distal extre-

mity beneath ; propodal joints of all three posterior pairs

spinulose beneath.

Telson broad, rounded at extremity.

Length 1:05 inch.

Colour, in alcohol, a light flesh tint, much deeper on the

large hand. A darker spot on the upper surface of the cara-

pax, also on the anterior edge of the first two abdominal

segments.

This species lives in pools on rocky reefs at low-tide level,

and is capable of producing, by clapping together the fingers

of the larger hand, a snapping noise like that which can be

made with the finger-nail.

Loc. Santa-Barbara Island (S. A. L. Brannan) ; San-Bar-

tolomé Bay, W. coast Lower California (W. J. Fisher).

The above description is considerably amplified from the

short and incomplete one published in the Proc. Cal. Acad. Sei.

Kingsley’s description of his A. transverso-dactylus tallies

exactly with my descriptions and with the specimen of A.

clamator (a female) in my collection. His A. clamator differs

from this in the want of a spine on the basal jomt of the an-

tenn, in the proportions of the carpal joints of the second

pair, in the want of a spine on the meral joints of the posterior

pairs of limbs, and in the details of the hands.

A. bellimanus is near this species ; but the rostrum is longer,

there is no sulcus between eye-shields and rostrum ; the dac-

tylus of larger hand is not swollen at the tip, and works hori-

zontally; the palmar portion of the smaller hand is not

unlike that of the larger, and has two spines in the same

positions as those on the larger; the dactylus is thin and

laminate ; and the meral joints of the posterior pairs have no

spine below.

Alpheus bellimanus, Lock.

Alpheus bellimanus, Lock. Ice. cit. p. 34.

Carapax slightly compressed; front three-spined, rostrum

longest; no sulcus between eye-shields and rostrum ; basal

spine of antennulee short, not reaching second joint of pedun-

cle, second joint twice as long as third; inferior branch of

flagella twice as long as the superior.

A small spine on basal joint of antennee; spine of basal

scale about as long as peduncle; flagella twice the length

of the carapax, xternal maxillipeds longer than peduncles,

« Mr. W.N. Lockington on American Alphei. 471

Feet of first pair unequal. Larger hand constricted above

the hind articulation of dactylus; a longitudinal groove con-

tinued backwards from this constriction on outer side of hand

for about half its length, and a second shorter sulcus running

backwards close inside the upper margin of hand; a second

transverse constriction posterior to the upper one, on the lower

margin; from this a longitudinal sinuous sulcus is continued

forward to the extremity of the pollex. A sharp spine

on the distal end of the ridge separating the anterior portion

of the upper outer longitudinal sulcus from the posterior por-

tion of the lower one. A spine at articulation of dactylus.

Dactylus broad, thin, and articulated, so as to close hori-

zontally above the point of the pollex, which is very short

and irregular in outline; a few long hairs on dactylus and

thumb. Smaller hand compressed, constricted above and

below ; a spine on outer surface at base of dactylus, and a

second on upper margin at articulation of dactylus ; dactylus

laminate, working vertically with a straight lower margin ;

pollex slender; distal portion of hand and inner surface of

dactylus hairy.

Carpus of second pair five-jointed; first joint nearly equal

to the next three; second and fifth subequal, each nearly as

long as the third and fourth together.

Meral joints of remaining pairs without a spine beneath ;

propodi spinulose beneath.

Telson tapering, convex at extremity.

Length of larger specimen, from tip of rostrum to end of

abdomen, 1°20 inch; length of larger hand half an inch,

of smaller 0°38 inch.

Loc. Two specimens from San Diego, found among kelp.

The dried specimens, when comparatively fresh, have the

hands beautifully coloured with spots and markings of black

and white on an orange ground; and the carapax presents

traces of similar coloration,

Alpheus barbara, Lock.

Alpheus clamator, Kingsley, Bull. U.S. Geol. & Geogr. Surv. vol. iv.

no. 1, p. 197.

This species, supposed by Kingsley to be identical with my

A. clamator, is proved by the absence of a spine on the basal

joint of the antenne, the different porportions of the carpal

joints of the second pair, and the want of meral spines on the

posterior pairs (characters belonging to parts not described

in my notice of A. clamator) to be quite distinct from the

latter ; and I have therefore assigned it the name of A. barbara,

472 Mr. W.N. Lockington on American Alphei. .

from the locality (Santa Barbara, California) where Kingsley’s

sper were collected. The details of the hands also

iffer.

From A. bellimanus this species may be distinguished by

the presence of a slender spine on the distal extremity of the

meral joints of the first pair, by the want of the antennal

basal spine, the less complex sulcation of the larger hand,

the absence of an external spine on the smaller hand, and

the equal length of the first two carpal joints of the second

air.

' As Kingsley had only an imperfect specimen, and does not

describe the rostrum and front, I cannot be sure that this

species belongs to this section.

Alpheus minor, Say.

Alpheus minus, Say, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. 1818, i. p. 245; Edwards,

Hist. Nat. des Crust. ii. p. 356; De Kay, New York Fauna, Crust.

p- 26; Gibbes, Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci. 1851, p. 196; Kingsley,

Bull. U.S. Geol. & Geogr. Surv. vol. iv. no. 1, p. 190.

Alpheus formosus ?, Gibbes, loc. cit.

Kingsley believes A. formosus identical with A. minor:

the range.of variation, both in size and in rostral characters,

appears to be great; and as it occurs along a great length of

coast, it is not unlikely that distinct geographical varieties

may be made out.

Alpheus cequidactylus, Lock.

Alpheus equidactylus, Lock. Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci. vol. vii. pt. 1, p. 35.

Front trirostrate, without sulcus between rostrum and ocular

spines; the latter short, not greatly in advance of the eyes,

the former extending slightly beyond first joint of antennular

peduncle.

Basal spine of antennule stout, extending to end of second

joint of antennular peduncle ; joints of the latter subequal ;

flagella ?

Basal joint of antennee with a small spine below; spine of

antennal scale overpassing antennular spine by about one

fourth of its length, but not extending to tip of antennular

peduncle. Antennal peduncle intermediate in length between

the antennular spine and that of antennal scale; flagella ?

External maxillipeds about equal to peduncle of antenne.

Smaller (?) hand elongate-ovate, smooth, without spines, but

with a transverse sulcus behind articulation of dactylus; a

deep narrow longitudinal sulcus continuing backwards from

the transverse sulcus for two thirds the length of the palmar

portion: pollex with two teeth near base; tip recurved,

Mr. W. N. Lockington on American Alphei. 473

pointed. Dactylus articulated vertically, smooth, compressed,

with a tooth near base fitting between those of the pollex; tip

recurved, pointed, crossing that of pollex.

Carpal joints of posterior pairs produced into a blunt spine

above distally; no spine on meral joints; propodi without

spinules.

Penultimate joint of abdomen with a spine, apparently

movable, at lower angle, and a triangular projection on each

side of base of telson, which is smooth, somewhat tapering,

convex at extremity.

Length of body 19 millims.,, of hand 7°5 millims.

This description is taken from a single dried, broken, and

defective specimen from Monterey, California (H. Hemphill).

The flagella of both pairs of antenne are broken; one hand,

probably the larger (?), is wanting, the other hand detached ;

and the second pair is wanting.

In my previous description (doc. cit.) I mention the larger

hand ; but it is probable that the member thus called is the

same as that I now think, from its small size, to be the

smaller hand.

Alpheus panamensis, Kingsley.

Alpheus panamensis, Kingsley, loc. cit. p. 192.

Loc. Acajutla, Central America, and Panama (/. H. Brad-

ley).

Alpheus tenuimanus, nov. sp.

Carapax smooth, compressed, and arched in profile, much

highest in centre. Front trispinose; rostrum much longer

than ocular spines, reaching to middle of second joint of

peduncle of antennule ; ocular spines slender, projecting from

the centre of the convex front of the eye-shields.

Basal spine of antennule reaching beyond the first joint of

the antennular peduncle ; upper branch of flagellum about as

long as carapax; lower

A spine on basal joint of antenne below ; antennal scale

equal to peduncle of antenne; flagellum not shorter than

abdomen.

External maxillipeds reaching beyond the antennal scale,

with long hairs at tip. .

Hands equal in length, not greatly differing in size, dis-

similar.

Meros of first pair compressed, somewhat triangular, rounded

above, with a small spine above at distal end. Larger hand

elongated, entirely smooth, rounded above and below; proxi-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 32

474 Mr. W. N. Lockington on American Alphei.

mal extremity slightly broader than distal; a shallow sulcus,

with a shorter one above, extending obliquely upwards from

the carpal articulation on the inner side of the hand; dactylus

short, smooth, compressed, semicircular in outline when viewed

from the side, slightly overpassing the pollex, working verti-

cally, and closing in groove in pollex, bright red at tip (in

alcohol). Smaller hand with meros similar to larger; manus

exceedingly elongated, smooth, cylindrical; dactylus almost

as long as palmar portion of hand, slightly curved, working

vertically, slightly overpassing the long and slender pollex.

Both dactyli are somewhat setose on their opposed outer

margins.

Ischium and meros of second pair about equal; carpus

with five joints, the first joint about equal to the next three

united, second slightly longer than the third and fourth,

which are equal ; fifth, palmar portion of hand, and dactylus

about equal, and each about equal to the second joint.

Posterior pairs without spines or spinules on any of the

joints.

Telson elongate, slightly tapering, with four spinules, in

two pairs, on its upper surface, and a spine on each side of its

convex truncate extremity, which is margined by long sete.

Length 34 millims.; length of larger hand 10, of carapax 13

to tip of rostrum.

A single specimen, with the antenne and antennule

damaged, from Port Escondido, Gulf of California (W. J.

Fisher),is my only example of this species, which may easily

be distinguished from its congeners by its long rostrum, smooth

hands of equal length, and especially by the two pairs of

spinules upon the telson.

Alpheus leviusculus, nov. sp.

Carapax stout, not compressed. Front trispinose, the ocu-

lar spines triangular, almost equal in length to the triangular

rostrum, which is not divided from the eye-shields by a

sulcus. Basal spine of antennule stout, reaching to the

middle of the second joint of the peduncle ; inferior branch of

flagella two thirds longer than superior, which only slightly

exceeds the peduncle in length.

Basal joint of antenne with two spines, the upper one

small, the lower almost half the length of the spine of the

antennal scale, which does not reach to the end of the pe-

duncle; flagellum short, reaching, when extended, slightly

beyond the larger hand.

First pair very unequal in size. Meros of smaller hand

compressed, with a spine at the upper distal end ; hand about

Mr. W. N. Lockington on American Alphei. 475

equal in length to meros, smooth, ovate ; dactylus in the same

plane with the hand; pollex slightly hooked at tip.

Meros of larger hand less compressed than that of smaller ;

a small spine at upper distal end; manus broad, stout, en-

tirely smooth, ovate, terminating abruptly in a sinuate distal

margin, from the lowest point of which projects the short,

broad, spoon-shaped pollex. Dactylus short, stout, curved,

overpassing the pollex, with a large basal tooth fitting into a

groove in the latter. Dactylus and pollex of both hands

blue, becoming black at the tips. Meros of second pair

longer than the ischium; carpus five-jointed, first joint nearly

as long as the other four; second, third, and fourth joints

equal, and two of them equal to the fourth ; hand about equal

to third and fourth joints.

Meral joints of posterior pairs without spines; propodi

spinulose beneath ; dactyli bifid at tip, the upper spine longer

than the lower. ;

Telson with sinuate margins, arcuate posteriorly.

Length of largest specimen 30 millims., carapax 10, larger

hand to tip of dactylus 11. ?.

Several specimens from Port Escondido, Mulege Bay, and

other points on the Californian shore of the Gulf of California.

Alpheus sulcatus, Kingsley.

Alpheus sulcatus, Kingsley, loc. cit. p. 193.

Bay of Panama. Zorritas, Peru (f. H. Bradley).

Alpheus heterochelis, Say.

Alpheus heterochelis, Say, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. 1818, p. 243 ; Edwards,

Hist. Nat. des Crust. tome ii. p. 856; De Kay, New-York Fauna,

Crust. p. 26; Gibbes, Proc. Am. Assoc. Ady. Sci. p. 196; Kingsley,

loc. cit. p. 194; Smith, Trans. Conn. Acad. ii. pp. 23, 39.

Alpheus armillatus, Edwards, op. cit. i. p. 354.

Alpheus lutarius, Saussure, Crust. Nouy. des Antilles et du Mexique,

p- 40, pl. iii. f. 24, 25; Martens, Wiegmann’s Archiv fur Naturge-

schichte, 1872, p. 189.

Halopsyche lutaria, Saussure, Rev. Zool. 1857, p. 100 (teste Saussure).

Halopsyche bispinosus ?, Streets, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. 1871, p. 242.

This appears to be one of those forms, occasionally met

with in every zoological class, that have changed so slightly

in accommodating themselves to their environment as to be

at once recognizable as the same species. ‘

Specimens collected in various localities in Lower California

present no appreciable difference from the typical heterochelis,

of which I have a specimen from Folrida. This specimen

lacks the smaller hand.

39%

476 Mr. W.N. Lockington on American Alphei.

Kingsley (doc. cit.) says of the smaller hand:—“ cylindrical,

constrictions but faintly indicated ; fingers three fourths as

long as palm.”

In my specimens the dactylus is about equal in length to

the palmar portion of hand behind it, and there is a projection,

almost amounting to a blunt spine, on the inner side at origin

of dactylus. There is no spine at the distal end of the meral

joints of the posterior pairs, which have the propodi spinulose

beneath.

The interior of the hands becomes more hirsute with age,

many of the smaller specimens having only a few hairs on the

fingers, while in some of the larger the distal portion of the

hand is densely hairy.

The larger individuals, on examination after only a few

weeks’ exposure to alcohol, showed traces of a varied colora-

tion; the tips of the fingers were black.

Length of a large specimen 37 millims. A specimen 30

millims. long has the larger hand 15 millims.

Kingsley gives the following localities :—

Fort Macon, N. C. (Dr. H. C. Yarrow); Smyrna and

Key West, Fla. (A. S. Packard, Jun.) ; Lake Harney, Fla.;

Bahama Islands (G. B. Goode); Bermuda Islands (G. B.

Goode) ; Aspinwall (J. A. M‘Niel) ; Abrolhos, Brazil (C.F.

Hartt); Panama (Ff. H. Bradley); Realejo, W.C. Nicaragua

(J. A. M‘Niel).

I have specimens from La Paz; San-José Island, Amorti-

guado Bay; Mulege Bay and Port Escondido: all on the

gulf coast of Lower California. Also from Magdalena Bay,

west coast of Lower California.

Alpheus affinis, Kingsley.

Alpheus affinis, Kingsley, loc. cit. p. 195.

This appears to be very near indeed to A. heterochelis.

Loc. Panama (Ff. H. Bradley).

Alpheus floridanus, Kingsley.

Alpheus floridanus, Kingsley, loc. cit. p. 198.

Loc. Fort Jefferson, Florida (Lieut. Jacques, U.S.N.).

Alpheus spinicaudus, nov. sp.

Rostrum very short, continued backwards between the eye-

shields as a low carina; no ocular spines.

Spine at base of antennule nearly as long as basal joint of

peduncle; second joint of peduncle one half longer than third,

Mr. W. N. Lockington on American Alphei. 477

which is about equal to first; outer branch of flagellum, in-

cluding its slender terminal portion, nearly equal to inner,

which is about equal to carapax.

Spine of antennal scale longer than laminar portion or than

peduncle of antennule, and equal to antennal peduncle; fla-

gellum twice the length of the carapax.

External maxillipeds longer than peduncle of antenne ;

terminal joint margined with sete, those at tip very long.

Meros of first pair spineless, that of smaller hand concave

on outer surface.

Hands of first pair unequal, dissimilar. Larger hand com-

pressed, smooth, constricted above and below; at about the

distal third of its length a sulcus, broad at commencement,

but rapidly narrowing, running backwards longitudinally at

right angles to the upper constriction on both outer and

inner faces. Dactylus short, working obliquely, with a stout

basal tooth, closing in a deep groove in the pollex ; the blunt

tip of the dactylus crossing the sharp extremity of the thumb.

Smaller hand rounded, smooth ; dactylus half the length of

palm, working vertically, and equal to the pollex; tips of

dactylus and pollex sharp, curved inwards, and crossing each

other. Inside of both hands setose towards distal end, espe-

cially the smaller.

Ischium and meros of second pair equal; carpus five-

jointed, second joint two thirds longer than the first, and

longer than third and fourth together, third and fourth equal,

fifth and first about equal.

Meral joints of posterior pairs without spines; propodal

joints spinulose beneath.

Telson elongate; sides tapering; end slightly convex ;

two pairs of spinules on the upper surface, and a third pair

projecting from the extremity, which is fringed with long

setee between the posterior spinules.

Prevailing colour of specimens, after six months’ exposure

to alcohol, red ; antenne blue.

Length of the largest female 22 millims. ; length of larger

hand 8 millims.

Several specimens from Port Escondido, Gulf of Cal. (W.

J. Fisher), collected in July to August 1876; the females

loaded with ova.

Alpheus parvimanus, Kingsley.

Alpheus parvimanus, Kingsley, loc. cit, p. 195.

Loc. Panama (Ff. H. Bradley).

478 Mr. W. N. Lockington on American Alphei.

Alpheus fasciatus, nov. sp.

Small; carapax smooth; no ocular spines; eye-shields

scarcely produced forwards; rostrum about equal to diameter

of eye; surface between rostrum and eyes slightly depressed,

but with no distinct sulcus.

Basal spine of antennule longer than basal joint of pedun-

cle ; joints of peduncle nearly equal in length; inner branch

of flagellum twice as long as outer, and rather longer than

carapax.

A small spine on basal joint of antenne below ; spine of

basal scale about equal to peduncle; flagella wanting or

broken in all the specimens under examination.

External maxillipeds reaching to end of basal joint of

antenne.

Meros of first pair without spine; larger hand smooth,

nearly cylindrical, tapering towards the dactylus, which is

smooth, semicircular in profile, a fourth the length of the palm,

and works vertically. Smaller hand very small, smooth,

cylindrical, slender ; dactylus equal to palm; pollex as long

as dactylus ; long hairs on inner side of fingers.

Carpus of second pair five-jointed ; second joint two thirds

the length of first, but equal to third and fourth together ; fifth

a little shorter than second. Posterior pairs with cylindrical

joints ; propodal joints spinulose beneath.

Telson elongate, tapering, rounded at end.

Colour after a short time in alcohol :—carapax and abdomen

alternately banded with bright red and white; larger hand

red, with marblings of white in some cases.

Length of a large female 18 millims.

Several specimens from Port Escondido, Gulf of Cal.

(fisher).

Alpheus cylindricus, Kingsley.

Alpheus cylindricus, Kingsley, loc. cit. p. 196.

From its short obtuse rostrum this form approaches Betceus.

Loc. Pearl Island, Bay of Panama (£7. H. Bradley).

Beteus equalis.

Beteus equimanus, Lockington, Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci. vol. vii. p. 43.

Alpheus equalis, Kingsley, N.-Amer. Species Alpheus, Bulletin U.S,

Geol. and Geogr. Survey, vol. iv. no. i.

Carapax smooth, compressed ; front curvately emarginate

between the eyes.

Outer maxillipeds as long as base of inner antenne ; sete

of terminal joint long and closely set.

Mr. W..N. Lockington on American Alphei. 479

Basal scale of antennule a slender spine, reaching beyond

the middle of the second joint of the peduncle. Second joint

of the peduncle nearly twice as long as the last joint ; pedun-

cle slightly shorter than that of antenne. Outer branch of

flagellum about two thirds the length of the inner.

Antennal scale with long slender spine, the laminate por-

tion reaching about to end of peduncle. Antenne without

sin on basal joint; flagellum more than half the length of

ody.

“‘Meros of first pair trigonal, with small spine at upper

distal angle.”

Hands nearly equal, entirely smooth, compressed, ovate ;

dactylus with a sharp recurved point and a straight edge,

margined with sete; this is opposed to a similar straight

edge, margined with sete, on the pollex, which also ends in a

sharp incurved point. The dactylus of both hands has a

basal tooth. The fingers gape slightly at the proximal end.

Feet of second pair slenderer than third and fourth, but not

greatly longer; ‘ischium slightly shorter than meros; carpus

five-jointed: first joint as long as the three succeeding ones ;

second, third, and fourth equal; fifth slightly longer. Chela

about as long as the two preceding joints.

“ Dactyli of posterior pairs spinulose at tip.

“'Telson slender, tapering ; extremity regularly rounded.”

Length of larger specimen 1:05 inch.

Two specimens examined, both females with ova; Catalina

Island, Cal. (S. A. L. Brannan).

This species lives under the mantle of Haliotis rufescens,

Swains.

Colour, when fresh, dark purple; in alcohol, a light flesh

tint.

I have here supplemented the short description given in the

Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., with others taken from Kingsley’s

description of A. Harfordi, and verified by reexamination

under the microscope, the previous examination having been

made with hand-lens only. I cannot find the “ notch fur-

nished with two or three small teeth near the articulation of

the dactylus,” mentioned by Kinglsey as existing upon the

pollex of the larger hand; perhaps his specimens were males.

Kingsley gives the following dimensions :—

Length. Carapax. Larger hand. Larger dactylus.

millim. millim. millim. millim.

24:0 8:0 8:0 4°7

19-0 6:0 6:0 3°6

My reexamination of the specimens has convinced me that

480 Mr. A. G. Butler on two new Butterflies.

Kingsley’s Alpheus Harford is identical with my B. equi-

MANUS.

Beteus longidactylus.

Beteus longidactylus, Lockington, Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci. vol. vii. p. 35.

Alpheus longidactylus, Kingsley, loc. cit. p. 198.

Carapax smooth, much compressed, “front rounded ; an-

tennular spines slender, acute. First and second antennular

joints subequal, third shorter; inner flagellum three fourths

the length of carapax; outer ?

‘¢ Antennal scales shorter than peduncles of either pair of

antenne.

“External maxillipeds extending nearly to extremity of

antennal peduncle.”

Hands of first pair similar, long and compressed ; pollex

forming half the length of the manus; dactylus more than half

that length ; the fingers when closed gape widely, both are

pointed at the end, and the points cross each other like the

mandibles of a Loxia. At the base of the dactylus are several

teeth opposed to two large ones on the manus, which also

bears a large tooth in the centre of the pollex.

‘“‘Carpus of second pair five-jointed ; first joint as long as

the three following ; second, third, and fourth equal; fifth

slightly longer.

“ Extremity of telson rounded.”

Colour of carapax of dried specimen green, with nuances of

russet and olive. Fingers of the larger hand light red, the

tips green. Length of carapax 1:12 inch, of larger hand 0°56,

of smaller 0°36.

As in the description of the previous species, the portions

within quotation marks are from Kingsley. The single speci-

men in the museum of the Academy came from a sandy mud

flat, San Diego, California, between tide-marks.

San Francisco, April 4, 1878.

LIV.—Descriptions of two Butterflies collected by Dr. Turner

at Port Moresby, New Guinea. By Artour G. BuTLER,

F.L.S. &e.

Danais Turnert, n. sp.

3 ¢. Dark olive-brown, with semihyaline pale green mark-

ings, almost as in D. purpurata, but differing as follows :—

primaries with three small spots, instead of two large ones

and a dot, across the end of the cell; the four spots just

On the Nauplius Stage of Prawns. 481

beyond the cell of double the size; the spots of the forked

discal series of nearly equal size throughout and continued to

the interno-median interspace near anal angle; a series of six

minute white dots near the outer margin: secondaries with no

spot between the first and second median branches, and the

spot between the radial and the third median branch truncated

at the end; abdominal area with the ground-colour pale

brown. Expanse of wings 3 inches 2 lines.

More falcate than D. purpurata; in some respects nearer

to D. sobrina and D. meganira.

Neptis cyanifera, n. sp.

Wings above black, bluish towards the base: primaries

with a semicircular blue patch about the middle of the inner

margin, and a round white spot above it, surrounded by blue

scales, upon the first median interspace; a white subcostal dot

just beyond the cell; two subapical white discal spots placed

obliquely, and a submarginal series of six white or whitish

small spots: secondaries crossed before the middle by an irre-

gular quinquefid white stripe enclosed in a rather broad blue

belt ; three or four bluish dots parallel to the outer margin.

Wings below chocolate-brown : primaries below with all the

spots white, all excepting those of the submarginal series

(which contains eight small spots) pearly ; an additional spot

near the end of the cell: secondaries with the base broadly

sordid white, crossed by a blackish bar; a pearly white belt

before the middle of the wing ; a submarginal series of pinky

white spots and a marginal series of longitudinal pinky white

dashes. LExpanse of wings 2 inches 2 lines.

Allied to N. Brebissoniz, N. mortifacies, and N. lactaria.

LV.—On the Nauplius Stage of Prawns.

By Dr. Fritz MUuier *.

AFTER the appearance of the essay on the metamorphosis of

the Prawns T, Spence Bate expressed to me his doubts on the

connexion of the young forms described by me. Properly

one should never refer larve to definite grown-up animals

unless obtained from the ova and the latter from the

parent. My Nauplii had been caught while swimming freely

in the sea, and possibly might not be the larve of Peneus

at all.

* Translated from ‘ Zeitschrift f. wiss. Zool.’ Bd. xxx. p. 163.

+ Archiv ftir Naturgeschichte, xxix. 1, 1863, p. 8.

482 Dr. Fritz Miiller on the

Alexander Agassiz has since expressed himself similarly ;

and I also find the same doubts repeated by Dr. Paul Meyer *

in a criticism of Claus’s latest work (‘ Investigations for the

Discovery of the Genealogical Foundation of the Crustaceous

System ’).

The development of Nauplius-like larvee into Macrurous

Crustacea is of such importance to the genealogy of the

Crustacea that it does not seem superfluous to point out once

more the reasons which induce me even now to look upon the

course of development described by me as a completely assured

fact. I repeat, for this reason, literally, what I wrote in Oc-

tober 1864 as a reply to Spence Bate’s doubts.

The requirement that one should only ascribe early forms

to definite parents when one has obtained them from the ova

taken from the parent, seems to me to be unreasonable.

If one admitted that, it would naturally be demanded not

only for the earliest forms, but, with equal justice, for all

young (intermediate) forms. It would be necessary to

demand for every stage either that it be reared from the ovum

or preserved alive until it arrives at sexual maturity; and

this condition would compel us to give up the study of the

development of most marine animals. I contend that it

is quite enough that we should be able to unite the terminal

members of the series by a continuous chain of intervening

forms so closely united that there cannot be any reasonable

doubt about the connexion of any two successive forms. But

the proof of the connexion of my Nauplius with the Peneus,

or a genus nearly related to it, I believe to have been esta-

blished in a sufficient manner.

In a journal which has only twelve plates in a year I could

not, as Spence Bate has done for his memoir on the develop-

ment of Carcinus menas, obtain seven plates for one essay.

I had therefore to limit myself to illustrating only a few of the

most interesting forms out of fifty pages of drawings of the

development of the prawns produced from the Nauplius stage.

At the same time it appeared to me unnecessary to remark

that the metamorphosis of one form into the other had not

been imagined, but was the result of close observation of

numerous larvee.

Only in one place there were not at my command interve-

ning forms in abundance.

Between the Nauplius (pl. ii. fig. 2) and ithe Zoéa repre-

sented in fig. 4 I had only one opportunity of observing (in

the same species) two intervening forms, which I mentioned—

* Jenaer Literaturzeitung, 1877, No, 16, p. 247.

Nauplius Stage of Prawns. 483

an older Nauplius whose third pair of legs I drew in fig. 3

(in four specimens), and one younger Zoéu.

But as it is just against this point, and, as far as I know,

against this point exclusively, 2. e. against the relation of the

Nauplius with the Zoéa, that the doubts are directed of those

who cannot believe in the metamorphosis of a auplius into a

long-tailed crustacean, | will once more place together the

peculiarities in which the oldest Nauplius agrees with the

youngest Zoéa.

In the first place, they have the same highly peculiar mode

of movement, by which they are distinguished at once from

all other marine Crustacea.

In the second place, they have the same colour. The two

anterior pairs of limbs and the fork-like caudal extremity

especially show a peculiar brown colour deepening towards

the extremity, which I do not find in any other Crustacea

of our sea.

In the third place, the proportional length and the whole

appearance of the first two pairs of limbs are the same; only

they are more distinctly articulated in the Zoéa, and the second

pair is more profusely ciliated: instead of three hairs on the

end of the inner branch, there are four. Likewise the posterior

extremity of the Zoéa differs only in having the two branches

further asunder, and in having first seven and still later eight

hairs on each branch, instead of six as in the oldest Nauplius.

In the fourth place, trom the structure of the third pair of

limbs (fig. 8) of the oldest Nauwplius it is evident that after

the next change of skin it must have mandibles with an

acute, prominent tooth, and a broad, transversely furrowed

masticatory surface, and that the mandible must bear a dark

brown, non-setigerous appendage. The youngest has such a

mandible, and bears such an appendage; and it may be re-

marked that the Nauplius was observed on the 24th of

January, and the Zoéa on the 3rd of January, when I had

no idea of the significance of this appendage to the mandible.

I am acquainted with no similar appendage in any other

Crustacean, young or old.

In the fitth place, we see in (¢. e. from the structure of) the

oldest Nauplius, that the next stage of development must

possess four more pairs of limbs; the youngest Zoéa does

possess four more pairs of limbs, corresponding in form to the

rudiments present in the Nauplius.

In the sixth place, the formation of the heart, intestines,

and liver is exactly the same in the oldest Nauplius and

youngest Zoéa,

In the seventh place, in the oldest Nauplius, on each side

484 On the Nauplius Stage of Prawns.

near the frontal margin was seen an opaque mass of minutely

eranulose texture, and extending beyond it a small round tu-

bercle. The same is observable in the youngest Zoéa. From

this mass are developed at a later period the paired eyes ;

and on them the tubercle is retained as far as the Mysis stage

(fig. 9,0). I know of no other Crustacean with any such

tubercle.

And with all these points of resemblance, what then are the

differences? That the Zoéa is a little larger—that the cara-

pace, already indicated in the Nauplius, is well developed—

that the feet present as rudiments have come into action—

that a few new sete have been added,—steps in advance,

every one of which might have been predicted.

Ishould have supposed that these reasons would pretty well

suffice to convince the most obstinate doubters. However, if

my Nauplius be not derived from a Peneus, and is not to

become a Penceus, let them tell me what possibly it can be.

The child must surely have a father. Still less than to the

prawns would one assign it to any other Crustacean of the

Malacostracous division, whether a crab or a woodlouse.

Considering that the Phyllopods are wanting in our seas,

there remain but the Copepoda, with the Lernzans, and the

Cirripedes, with the Rhizocephala as the possible termination

of its development.

It is impossible for it to become a Cirripede or a Rhizo-

cephalan; the formation of the heart, liver, and mandibles

suffice to demonstrate this. In addition it wants the frontal

horns of the Cirripede-larvee, as well as the spines (Zacken)

and teeth, with which the third pair of limbs of the Nauplius

of the Cirripedes is armed. When near passing into a second

developmental stage, as the Nauplius represented in fig. 2 (J. c.)

is, we should see in a Cirripede or Rhizocephalan six new

pairs of feet under the skin, but not four of them sprouting

torth freely on the ventral surface &c. It resembles certain

Nauplius-forms of the Copepoda much more than those of the

Cirripedes. In these also there occur stages of development

in which, besides the three original pairs of limbs, rudiments

of four new pairs are to be seen. But Ido not know from my

own experience, nor can I find among the numerous figures

which adorn Claus’s admirable work on the Copepoda, any

form of mandible which could be compared to that of

our Nauplius. Moreover, in all the marine Copepoda except

the Coryceide, the third pair of limbs remain a well-bristled

mandibular appendage. But, apart from this, the Corycexide

have no heart such as our Nauplius possesses. 'To this we

must add that the Nauplius reaches the length of half a

Dr. A. Giinther on Japanese Sea- Fishes. 485

millimetre ; it should therefore be considered rather a matured

Copepod than the earliest form of such a one. If it belongs

to a Copepod it must spring from an unknown gigantic

species of a still unknown family; and it is rather strange

that this gigantic species has not once fallen into my net

during the course of many years.

Itajahy, St. Catherina, Brazil.

June, 1877.

LVI.—Notes on a Collection of Japanese Sea-Fishes.

By Dr. A. Gintuer, F.R.S.

A COLLECTION of fishes, formed by H. Batson Joyner, Esq.,

at Tokei, Japan, and presented by him to the British Museum,

contained an unusually great proportion of interesting species,

several of which are identical with those collected during the

expedition of H.M.S. ‘Challenger’ and noticed in Ann. &

Mag. Nat. Hist. 1877, xx. p. 433, whilst a few others appear to

be undescribed and will be noticed hereafter.

This collection offers additional confirmation of a fact to

which I have repeatedly drawn attention in the ‘Catalogue of

Fishes’ and on subsequent occasions, viz. that there exists

the greatest similarity between the marine fauna of temperate

Japan and that of the Mediterranean and adjacent parts of

the Atlantic, Mr. Joyner’s collection containing not less than

eight species identical in both seas, viz. Rhina squatina,

Pieroplatea hirundo, Beryx splendens, Beryx decadactylus,

Hoplostethus mediterraneum, Trachurus trachurus, Brama

Rait, Exocatus lineatus.

Sebastes Joynert, sp.n.

D2 ACS LL. lat. ca. 60.

The height of the body is equal to the length of the head,

and one third of the total length (without caudal); scales

very thin, scarcely serrate, a little smaller above the lateral

line than below it; on the upperside of the head they ad-

vance to the nostrils and cover the preorbital and maxillary.

Snout short, three fourths of the diameter of the eye, which

is three tenths of the length of the head, and exceeds by

one third the width of the interorbital space, which is flat.

Upper surface of head smooth, scarcely armed, the two occi-

pital ridges very low and terminating in short spines; pree-

orbital with two flat spines ; preoperculum with five spines,

486 Dr. A. Giinther on Japanese Sea-Fishes.

the second from above being the longest, and one third of the

diameter of the eye ; operculum with two spines, the upper of

which is the longest. Teeth in narrow villiform bands, in

the jaws, on the vomerine and palatine bones ; the vomerine

teeth form a triangular patch. The maxillary does not reach

to the vertical from the middle of the eye. he fourth dorsal

spine is the longest, twice and a quarter in the length of the

head. Anal spines stronger than those of the dorsal, the

second anal spine being sborter than the third dorsal. Pro-

bably red (in life), with five brown cross bars on the back

and the dorsal fin, the three anterior ones descending a little

below the lateral line. Fins immaculate. Pharynx un-

coloured.

Two specimens, 9 inches long.

Mugil Joyner, sp. n.

D. 4 | e A.3 lL. lat. 40.° L. transv. 14.

The height of the body is less than the length of the head,

which is two ninths of the total (without caudal) ; eye small:

its diameter is one seventh, the width of the interorbital space

more than one third of the length of the head. Adipose eye-

lid none; przorbital emarginate and denticulated ; snout longer

than the orbit ; extremity of the maxillary visible. ‘There are

eighteen scales between the snout and the origin of the spinous

dorsal ; no elongate scale in the axil. Dorsal fins equal in

height ; the spines are rather slender, the length of the first

being rather more than three fourths of the postorbital part of

the head; it is much nearer to the end of the snout than to

the base of the caudal fin. The first two rays of the soft

dorsal are scaly, the rest of the fin being devoid of scales;

anal scaly anteriorly, as high as the soft dorsal, and com-

mencing in advance of that fin. Caudal notched, one seventh

of the total length. Pectoral two thirds of the length of the

head. Axil without spot.

Two specimens, 12 inches long.

Cynoglossus Joynert, sp. n.

D. 106-107. A. 79. L. lat. 85.

Three lateral lines on the left side ; on the level of the end

of the abdominal cavity the upper and lower lines are sepa-

rated from the middle by thirteen rows of scales ; four series

of scales between the dorsal fin and the upper lateral line, and

four between the anal and lower lateral line. No lateral line

on the right side. All the scales on the left side strongly

Bibliographical Notice. 487

ctenoid ; those of the blind side are nearly smooth on the an-

terior half of the body, and more conspicuously serrate on the

posterior. One nostril situated between the eyes, the other

above the lip. Eyes very small, the upper slightly in advance

of the lower; interorbital space equal to the width of the orbit.

Snout contained twice and two thirds in the length of the

head. Angle of the mouth much nearer to the end of the

snout than to the hind margin of the gill-cover behind the

eye. ‘Tail not much elongate. The height of the body is

two sevenths of the total length (without caudal), the length

of the head two elevenths. Brownish, mottled with darker.

‘Two specimens, 9? inches long.

Harpodon miecrochir, sp. n.

Dal sicy Av dans V2.

This gigantic species of Harpodon differs from H. nehereus

in having a second distinct band of palatine teeth within the

first one, and in having the pectoral fin very short. The tubes

of the lateral line are narrow and elongate; the basal half

of the adipose fin is covered with scales. The interior of the

mouth and gill-cavity is black.

A single specimen, 27 inches long.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE.

Thesaurus Devonico-Carboniferus: the Flora and Fauna of the Devo-

nian and Carboniferous Periods. By J. J. Bressy, M.D., F.B.S.,

&e. 4to. 447 pages. Van Voorst: London, 1878.

Nive years ago we had the pleasure of announcing the completion

of Dr. Bigsby’s ‘ Thesaurus Siluricus’ *, a work of long labour and

sound knowledge and of great value to the geological world. This

respected and veteran geologist has now accumulated a still more

ample systematic treasury of fossil genera and species, namely those

of both the Devonian and the Carboniferous systems of strata in all

parts of the world. He has arranged them, like those of his Silu-

rian ‘Thesaurus,’ in a tabular form, showing the authorities and

references for the names, and the horizons, recurrences, and locali-

ties of the fossils. He takes pleasure in mentioning that the publi-

cation of both of these great works has been aided by grants from

the Royal Society.

The organic remains of the Devontan rocks, arranged in natural

classification, occupy an elaborate table of 106 pages. Their localities

* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iii. (1869) p. 314.

488 Bibliographical Notice. —

in America are enumerated in 2 pages; those in other regions in 5

pages. At page 17 and afterwards the American species are marked

with an accent. The lithological and natural-history characters of

the Devonian horizons, groups, or stages in different parts of the

world are concisely and clearly shown in pages 114-126; and the

books and authors quoted are enumerated at pages 127-135.

The Carsonrrerovs flora and fauna, arranged (1) separately for

North America on one page and for Europe on the opposite, order

by order, in one Table, and (2) in a supplemental Table, similarly,

for other parts of America on one hand, and for previously unmen-

tioned regions on the other, take up pages 137-411. Two sets of

Addenda of species and genera received by the author whilst the

foregoing Tables were at press, and arranged like them, oceupy 23

(414-426 7) pages.

Short summaries of the Carboniferous stratal groups (1st, in

America; 2nd, in Europe, Asiatic Russia, Bear Island and Spitz-

bergen, the Punjaub, and Queensland) are given in 4 pages; and

the authors quoted, in pp. 431-440.

A most valuable Table, giving an Analytical Conspectus of the

Devonico-Carboniferous Flora and Fauna, faces page 441; and this

is supplemented at page 444 with the results of the Devonian Ad-

dendum and of the Carboniferous Addenda; so that at p. 445 we

find the numerical result of this conscientious and most laborious

examination of the whole literature of this extensive subject. Of

the whole of the Devonian and Carboniferous species known up to

the date of publication, in ‘ America” and “ Europe” (that is, Hurope

and the other regions associated with it in the other lists), we see :—

Devonian Species. Carboniferous Species.

Common to || Common to

America and | Total known. || America and Doubtful. Total. known.

Europe, &e. Kurope, &e.

86 4830 239 feos 9171

The number of species common to these two great distinct, though

allied, systems is inadvertently omitted, although the subject is

entered in the Table of Contents at p. 447.

We have, however, been enabled to draw certain conclusions,

which, though imperfect, are not without their use; and they will

be followed up, we believe, by our indefatigable author in a forth-

coming commentary on the percentage of recurrent species and

other matters of interest. The total number of both Devonian and

Carboniferous species is 14,000, divisible into about 1140 genera.

Of these latter there are :—

In America. In Europe, &e.

About 12 per cent. 17 per cent. in the Devonian only.

sy od goings 16 “s in the Devonian and Carboniferous.

5 2 eee 27 ss in the Carboniferous only,

Bibliographical Notice. 489

About 21 per cent. of the genera are common to the two hemi-

spheres.

Many philosophic deductions are drawn by Dr. Bigsby from the

results of his long-continued study. He notes the fewness of

species, whether Devonian or Carboniferous, common to the two

Hemispheres—in accordance, he observes, with the more or less

distinct areas of deposits, possibly, in some degree, homotaxeous

rather than contemporaneous. He finds, as is usually the case,

that the species of the lowest organic rank are the most frequently

found in widely separate countries, as Plante (1 in 15), Amorphozoa

(1 in 8 or 10), Foraminifera (1 in 7); while the higher orders,

Reptilia, Pisces, Insecta, Crinoidea, Mollusca, &c., rarely remove

from their native regions, east or west. Numerous suggestive

statements as to the conditions and extent of stratal groups,

constant or non-constant, the mutual relations of species, their

occurrence, distribution, persistency, migration, recurrence, and

their natural-history standing, are given in the Introduction,

pp. V—-x.

In contemplating this single portion, one trace, as it were, of an

exhaustless treasury of proof upon proof of Omnipotent Design, the

author agrees with Hunter and Owen that “ the creative force has

not deserted the earth during any of the epochs of geological time

that have succeeded to the first manifestation of such force, and

that in respect to no one class of animals has the operation of that

force been limited to one geological epoch. Perhaps the most im-

portant result of paleontological research has been the establish-

ment of the axiom of the continuous operation of the ordained in-

coming of new species of living things” (‘Hunter’s Essays and

Observations,’ arranged by R. Owen, F.R.S.).

The ever-active influence of the great Presiding Mind thus consum-

mates the Creator’s great Design through the Past and the Future,

which is to Him To-day ; and, adds the author, ‘‘ so vast and ever

active is the power of conditions (that is, of the many surrounding

agencies, of long periods of time, and of original impress from with-

out), that I am well satisfied to expect from them the organic

changes we observe, and without seeking further,”

A well-founded hope is expressed in the Introduction that “ this

work will assist in opening out a new field of inquiry into what

may be called ‘Comparative Paleontology’”—that is, comparison of

the life and conditions of geological horizons, far apart in succession,

whether of wide extent or divided among limited areas.

These labours of Dr. Bigsby among the Silurian, Devonian, and

Carboniferous Fossils certainly widen most extensively that field

of research already commenced by Bronn (in his ‘ Lethwa Geognos-

tica’) and others, and enable the several students of different groups

of fossils and their strata both to begin and to proceed with their

work far more satisfactorily, and with far less liability to error,

than heretofore. All that has been done in these several paleonto-

logical walks is elaborately catalogued and clearly expressed by our

author ; and the mistakes of naturalists, word-makers, copyists, and

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. i. 33

HOM 5 Miscellaneous.

compilers will be readily met with and corrected under the earnest

eye of the competent student, who will be too thankful for the aid

given him in cultivating his special field to find fault with the few

weeds and stones left on its ready-prepared surface.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On the Origin and Distribution of the Turbellaria of the deep Fauna

of the Lake of Geneva. By M. Dupxessts.

Ir appears from the author’s researches that all the species of

Turbellaria from the bottom of the Lake of Geneva are also found

(with the exception of two very remarkable species, which are at

the same time the types of new genera) either in the stagnant

waters of the shores, or in those of the marshes or small lakes of

other parts of the canton. Nevertheless two reservations must be

made in this respect: the first is, that many species which are met

with in the stagnant waters of the country are not to be found in

the mud of the deep waters; the second is, that the greater number

of species which live also at a great depth have undergone some

easily appreciable modifications.

Speaking first of the Dendroccelous Turbellaria or Planarians, the

author describes the modifications which are observed in Dendro-

celum lacteum and fuscwm on comparing the individuals of the

shores with those which inhabit the depths of the lake. The speci-

mens coming from great depths are generally smaller and lighter in

colour, and are further distinguished by the rosy colour of the

digestive tube. The visual organ tends to become atrophied; one

of these varieties of D. lactewm is remarkable for the division of

each oculiform point into two smaller parts, and has been described

by M. Griiff under the name of Planaria quadrioculata.

Other species, such as Planaria gonocephala, so common in the

rivulets of the Jorat, never descend so far as the lake; and it is the

same with the numerous representatives of the genus Polycelis.

Usually the Planarie of the deep fauna appear to have emigrated

from the waters of the shores; but this group is represented at the

bottom of the lake by a smaller number of species.

Some very similar facts strike us in the distribution of the Rhab-

docela. Typhloplana viridis and T’. subfusca, which occur every-

where in the stagnant waters of the country, are also met with in

the depths of the Lake of Geneva, while 7’. pellucida and 7. pallida,

so common in the pools, have not yet been seen in the mud of the

lake.

Regarding the Vorticine, Mesostomum Ehrenbergit, lingua, and

pusillum are found both in the shallows and depths of the lake, while

M. personatum appears, on the contrary, to be absent in the latter.

A curious type, Microstomum lineare, which is met with every-

where on the shores, descends also to the deep waters of the lake ;

but it there invariably becomes larger, and its intestine of a pale

rose-colour similar to that of the Planarie.

Miscellaneous. 491

Lastly the Rhynchoceeles or Nemertians are represented in the

deep fauna by Prostomum lineare and Prorhynchus stagnalis, which

are also found, the former in the pools of the shore, the latter in

springs and under the stones of rivulets.

These observations are sufficient to show that the deep fauna of

the Lake of Geneva has originated, at least as regards the Turbel-

laria, from the littoral and paludicolous species of the neighbouring

regions. Yet (and this is the most remarkable point in this investi-

gation) two species of the deep fauna completely evade this inter-

pretation, owing to the fact that they are not found in the waters

of the shores, and that, on the contrary, they resemble Mediterra-

nean types. These two species have been provisionally described

under the names of Vortex lemani and Mesostomwm morgiense, and

probably belong to new genera. The latter, in particular, is cer-

tainly not a true Mesostomum, but belongs to a family of Turbel-

laria hitherto exclusively marine. These two forms, without

analogues in the remainder of our fauna, are at the same time those

which reach the greatest depth. They have only been found in a

few other European lakes—as, for instance, in that of Starnberg, in

Bavaria.

The class Turbellaria is not, however, the only one which pre-

sents facts of this kind. M. Vernet has found amongst the crusta-

ceans of the deep fauna a form related to the genus Cythere, which

is, as is well known, exclusively marine. M. Duplessis has himself

remarked amongst the Arachnida of the lake two species which

bear a striking resemblance to marine types. One is the Campo-

gnatha Forelli, which so exactly resembles a small Campognatha of

the Mediterranean shores, that at the first glance one might confound

the two species. The other belongs to a singular genus, which also

occurs in the mud of the Mediterranean. How can facts of this

nature be explained? Perhaps we have here the last remains of

a marine population, some types of which have accommodated them-

selves to fresh water as the sea retreated. This, however, is a mere

conjecture; and we all know how circumspectly we must venture

upon this ground.— Bibl. Univ. Oct. 15, 1877, Arch. des Sciences,

p. 326.

Characters of a new Species of Dryops from Formosa (Coleoptera,

Parnide). By Cuarres O. WATERHOUSE.

The British Museum has recently received a small collection of

objects of natural history from the island of Formosa. They were

presented by Mr. Matthew Dickson; and among the Coleoptera I

find a specimen of the genus Dryops which belongs undoubtedly to

an undescribed species. I propose to name it

Dryops Dickson.

D. elongatus, griseo-flavescens, sericeus; thorace parum conyexo,

disco medio leviter impresso, angulis posticis divergentibus, acu-

tissimis ; elytris striatis.

Long. 4 lin.

492 Miscellaneous.

Very closely allied to D. substriatus ; but, besides being nearly

double the size, it differs in having the thorax less convex, with a

slight impression on the disk, the sides are less arcuate and more

distinctly margined, and the posterior angles are much more diver-

ging. The elytra are more distinctly broader than the thorax,

more evidently striated ; and, lastly, the pubescence on the head and

. thorax is more erect and darker in colour.

Hab, Formosa,

British Museum,

May 15, 1878.

On the Organ called “ Dorsal Chord” in Amphioxus lanceolatus.

By MM. J. Renavr and G. Ducuame.

In the Vertebrata the tissues of the skeleton may be divided into

three principal categories:—1, the primary axis, formed by the

dorsal chord; 2, the cartilaginous tissue; 3, the osseous tissue.

These different tissues succeed one another in the higher animals,

and the definitive skeleton is formed by bone, or at least by true or

calcified cartilage. At this period there only remain rare vestiges

of the primary axis or dorsal chord; so that, except Amphiovus, we

know of no Vertebrate of which the definitive skeleton is repre-

sented solely by a persistent notochord.

This organ, moreover, possesses in the series typical characters

which it is necessary to refer to briefly; it is formed of globular

cells, soldered to one another after the fashion of epithelia, as trans-

parent as glass, and possessing a very distinct nucleus (usually

thrown back to the periphery).

The dorsal chord of fishes does not differ fundamentally from that

of the embryos of the highest Mammalia. That of Amphioxus, on

the contrary, presents no arrangement resembling the structure

just described. It is contained in a cylindrical sheath which en-

velops it on all sides ; and, in sections made perpendicularly to the

general axis of the body, after hardening in dextrine and alcohol, it

proves to be constituted as follows :—

In the interior of the sheath, stretched horizontally from the left

to the right side, are seen some fibres of uniform diameter, cylin-

drical, solid, and adhering by their extremities to the general en-

velope. In proportion as they approach the dorsal surface these

fibres curve gently upwards, so as to circumscribe in the median

line, between the sheath and the chord, an empty spindle-shaped

space. On the ventral side the same arrangement is repeated in the

opposite direction ; so that only the fibres of the middle plane are

horizontal and rectilinear.

In a longitudinal section passing through the axis of the chord

and the two sides of the body the sheath is shown divided in the

direction of its length ; and the area thus intercepted is occupied by

the fibres of the chord, which consequently offer a scalariform ar-

rangement relatively to the two margins of the sheath.

In such a preparation, suitably coloured by means of picrocarmi-

nate of ammonia or of eosine dissolved in water, we observe the fol-

lowing details :—

Miscellaneous. ' 4938

The sheath of the notochord becomes uniformly coloured red by

the carmine, without showing any nucleus either in its interior or

at its outer surface; the eosine leaves it absolutely colourless. All

the inner surface bristles with a multitude of little conical projec-

tions, which are continuous at their base with the hyaline substance

of which the envelope is formed. These little cones remain colour-

less with carmine, and acquire a bright rose-colour with eosine ;

they do not present the appearance of nuclei, and are entirely homo-

geneous. At the extremity of each of them is inserted, at the same

time capping it, one of the fibres of the notochord. Lach fibre

answers by each of its extremities to one of the projections just de-

scribed; it is regularly cylindrical, contains no nucleus, and becomes

coloured, like elastic tissue, yellow by the action of the picrocar-

minate, and bright rose by eosine.

The action of potash does not cause the breaking-up of these

fibres into nucleated masses ; carmine, hrematoxyline, and the other

reagents for nuclei do not reveal any in the thickness of the sheath.

We are therefore justified in regarding them as non-cellular bodies,

haying no relation either with the characteristic tissue of the noto-

chord or with cartilage. On the other hand they present a struc-

ture and histochemical reactions exactly analogous to those offered

by the fibres which compose the axial organ of the Calamary known

as the pen.

From what precedes, it appears that the Amphiowus, which is

destitute of red blood containing hemoglebine enclosed in special

elements, also does not possess a dorsal chord comparable by its

structure to that of all vertebrate animals. It therefore seems per-

missible to raise doubts as to the morphological value of its noto-

chordal axis.— Comptes Rendus, April 8, 1878, p. 898.

On the Zoological Affinities of the Genus Mesites.

By M. A. Mityz-Epwarps.

In 1838, I. Geoffroy Saint-Hilaire described a very remarkable

bird from Madagascar under the name of Mesites variegatus. From

its external characters he had great difficulty in referring it to any

definite place in the system; and he remarked that it resembled the

Heliornithes in its head, the Penelopes and Curassows in its body,

and especially its wings, and the Pigeons in its feet. Some years

later M. Desmurs described a somewhat different bird under the

name of Mesites unicolor as a new species. G. R. Gray, in his

‘Genera of Birds,’ arranged Mesites in the family Megapodiide,

close to Letpoa; and in this he was followed by Bonaparte, Reichen-

bach, and Hartlaub; but in the British-Museum Catalogue of Birds,

Gray shifted the genus to the Passeres, as forming a section of the

family Eupetide. Sundevall accepted this view; and Hartlaub, in

his last work on the birds of Madagascar, placed Mesttes after the

Motacillide, among the Dentirostres.

All this time the only known specimens were the two originally

described respectively by Geoffroy Saint-Hilaire and Desmurs ;

but M. A. Grandidier has recently received from Tamatavya two

Ann & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. 1. 34

494 Miscellaneous.

Mesite, preserved in spirits, which he has sent to M. Milne-

Edwards for examination. The results of this investigation are

given by the author as follows :—

“The Mesite,” he says, “ are neither Gallinacee nor Pigeons, as

I. Geoffroy and Prince Charles Bonaparte thought; nor are they

Passeres, as Gray, Sundevall, and Hartlaub supposed. They must

occupy a place among the Gralle, in which they form a family allied

to the Rails and Herons. I cannot now dwell upon the tonforma-

tion of the different parts of the skeleton and muscular system ;

these details will be set forth in a special memoir ; and I shall con-

fine myself here to noting that the sterno-clavicular apparatus is

remarkable, and indicates only a very feeble power of flight; its

characters are quite peculiar, although reminding one a little of

those of certain Rails. The keel is not very prominent, and its an-

terior angle is carried back nearly to the middle of the sternum ;

the lateral plates are much reduced and cut into on each side by a

deep emargination of the posterior margin. The episternal apo-

physis, which is very strong, very long, and carinate below, bifur-

cates at its apex to furnish points of attachment for the igaments

of the shoulder. There ts no trace of a furcular bone; there is not

even an osseous style like that which exists in certain nocturnal

Rapacious birds, in some Parrots, and several Pigeons. The wings,

which are very short, cannot enable the Jesite to sustain them-

selves long in the air.

“‘The pelvis is as remarkably broad as the sternum is narrow ;

we remark in it some of the characters proper to the Hurypyge and

Rallide. The feet are strong, and the toes, like those of the Blon-

gios (Ardea minuta) and some other Herons, are constructed so as

to be able to grasp reeds and vertical stems.

“The muscles greatly resemble those of the Rallide. As in the

latter, we find a femoro-caudal and its accessory, a semitendinosus

and its accessory, and an iliac accessory of the perforate flexor of

the toes, which, starting from the ilio-pectineal apophysis, passes

along the inside of the thigh and over the rotula, and is inserted

upon the superficial flexor of the toes; this latter bundle is deficient

in the Ardeidz and in the Passeres. There are two carotids, as in

the Rails and Herons, whilst the Passeres only possess a left carotid.

** The Mesite are also remarkable for the existence of five pairs

of down-patches hidden beneath the feathers, and occupying on the

dorsal surface of the body the scapular and iliac regions, and on

the ventral surface the pectoral, costal, and abdominal regions.

The Herons present patches of the same nature, but differently dis-

posed. The attention of naturalists had already been called to these

peculiarities by Mr. E. Bartlett.

“ Lastly, I may add that the differences of form and coloration

which appeared to M. Desmurs sufficient to distinguish Mesites

unicolor from M. variegatus appear to me to be due to sex: in fact

the female Mesites that we possess is exactly like MW. unicolor, and

the male has all the characters of that described by-I. Geoffroy

under the name of variegatus.”—Comptes Rendus, April 22, 1878,

p. 1029.

495

INDEX to VOL. I.

ABRAXAS, new species of, 440.

Acanthopus, description of the new

genus, 352.

Acidalia, new species of, 401.

Acronycta, new species of, 78,

232.

Tig new British species of,

Agassiz, A., on the habits of young

Limulus, 183; on the young stages

of some osseous Fishes, 419,

Agrotis, new species of, 162, 233,

Allix, M., on a new Gorilla, 422.

Alphei, on the North-American

species of, 465.

Alysia, new species of, 82.

Amphioxus lanceolatus, on the struc-

ture of, 262, 492.

Amphipyra, new species of, 287.

Amyna, new species of, 162.

Anisodes, new species of, 400.

-Annelidan masons, on the architec-

tural achievements of, 284.

Anthophila, new species of, 199.

Anthracoceros, new species of, 85.

Anticlea, new species of, 449.

Apamea, new species of, 84.

Aplectoides, characters of the new

genus, 195.

Arctia, new species of, 230.

Artamus monachus, note on, 348.

Arteurotia, new species of, 347.

Asteracanthion rubens, on some mon-

strosities of, 259.

Asthena, new species of, 400.

Astictopterus, new species of, 341,

Atypus piceus, note on, 106.

Auriferous sand from the Seychelle

Islands, note on, 102.

Azazia, new species of, 293,

Bactridium, new species of, 26,

Baltia, characters of the new genus,

228.

Baly, J. S., on new genera and

species of Phytophagous beetles,

38, 312.

Bate, C. Spence, on two new crus-

tacea from the coast of Aberdeen,

409,

Berkeley, Rey. M. J., on British

Fungi, 17

Bipalium, new species. of, 237.

Birds, new, 85, 98, 174, 349, 374.

Bithia, new species of, 405.

Boarmia, new species of, 395.

Bone-caves of Creswell Crags, on

the, 256.

Books, new :—Miller’s American

Paleozoic Fossils, 99; White’s

Natural History of Selborne, 176;

Bigsby’s Thesaurus Devonico-Car-

boniferus, 487.

Bouvier, M., on a new gorilla, 422.

Brachyxanthia, new species of, 169.

Brady, H. B., on the Reticularian

and Radiolarian Rhizopoda of the

North-Polar Expedition, 1875-76,

425,

Broome, C. E., on British Fungi,

V7;

Briiggemann, Dr. F., on the young

of Pityriasis gymnocephala, 37 ;

on Artamus monachus, 348.

Butler, A. G., on new species of

Heterocera from Japan, 77, 161,

192, 287, 392, 440; on two new

Butterflies from New Guinea, 480,

Butterflies, on sexual dimorphism in,

184.

Bylazora, new species of, 598,

Cabera, new species of, 405.

Callopistria, new species of, 200,

496

Calocampa, new species of, 196.

Calpe, new species of, 202.

Cambridge, Rev. O. P., on British

Spiders, with descriptions of new

species, 105. ~

Cantharis vesicatoria, on the meta-

morphosis of, 105.

Capnodes, new species of, 294.

Caprella, new species of, 31.

Cardiastethus, new species of,

372.

Carter, H. J., on the occurrence of

auriferous sand in the neighbour-

hood of the Seychelle Islands,

102; on fossil sponges from the

Carboniferous system of the south-

west of Scotland, 128; on the

position of the sponge-spicule in

the Spongida, and on the identity

of Squamulina scopula with the

Sponges, 170; on new species of

Hydractiniide, and on the iden-

tity of Millepora aleicornis with

Stromatopora, 298; on Purisi-

phonia Clarkei, 876; on calca-

reous Hexactinellid structure in

the Devonian Limestone, 412.

Cephalodonta, new species of, 44.

Cephaloleia, new species of, 41.

Ceratodus, new species of, 184.

Ceratrichia, new species of, 543.

Chimera, new species of, 183.

Chrysomela, new species of, 38.

Chrysorithrum, new species of, 292.

Cidaria, new species of, 450.

Cladoderris, new species of, 24.

Cliona, on two new and remarkable

species of, 54,

Coleoptera, new, 38, 312, 491.

Colas, new species of, 229.

Collix, new species of, 445.

Conchylis, new species of, 237.

Corals, on the minute structure of

some, 44.

Coremia, new species of, 449.

Corycia, new species of, 404.

Cosmia, new species of, 192.

Cotylosoma dipneusticum, note on,

101.

Crepidophyllum, on the minute strue-

ture of the genus, 51.

Crinoids, on the structure of paleo-

zoic, 379, 455.

Crustaceans, notes on sessile-eyed,

31; on a new genus of Ostracode,

from the Lake of Geneva, 352; on

two new British, 409.

INDEX.

Cucullia, new species of, 198.

Cymatophora, new species of, 78.

Cynoglossus, new species of, 486.

Cyphella, new species of, 25.

Dacrymyces, new species of, 25.

Dactylium, new species of, 28.

Danais, new species of, 480.

Dandaca, new species of, 82.

Dasycampa, new species of, 168.

Dawkins, Prof. W. B., on the mam-

mal fauna of the caves of Creswell

Crags, 257.

Depressaria, new species of, 237,

Deroca, new species of, 442.

Descoreba, new species of, 394.

Deva, new species of, 203.

Diastylis, new species of, 409.

Diatrype, new species of, 29.

Dinameeba, on the feeding of, 260.

Dinichthys, observations on, 350.

Dinornis, on the number of cervical

vertebree in, 407.

Dryops, on a new species of, 491.

Duchamp, G., on the dorsal chord in

Amphioxus, 492.

Duplessis, M., on the origin and dis-

tribution of the Turbellaria of the

Lake of Geneva, 490.

Dysidea, new species of, 139.

Echinodermata, on a mew class of

animals parasitic on, 181.

Elliot, D. G., on an apparently new

species of Hornbill, 85; on a new

species of Porphyrio, 98; on a

new species of Pigeon, 349.

Endropia, new species of, 393.

Entz, Dr. G., on the Rhizopoda of

the Salt Lake of Szamosfalva,

423.

Erastria, new species of, 199.

Erigone, new species of, 116,

Erosia, new species of, 402.

Erythrura, new species of, 575.

Etheridge, R., jun., on the genus

Paleeacis and the species occurring

in British Carboniferous rocks,

206.

Eubolia, new species of, 452.

Kuchera, new species of, 441.

Euclidia, new species of, 293.

Eudorea, new species of, 236.

Eupithecia, new species of, 444.

Euproctis, new species of, 251,

Eupsilia, new species of, 168.

Eurois, new species of, 194.

Evolution, entomological notes bear-

ing on, 155. |

INDEX.

Fishes new, 183, 485; on the young

stages of some osseous, 419,

Foraminifera of the North-Polar

Expedition, on the, 425.

Fossilization, on the replacement of

siliceous by calcareous material

during, 154, 417.

Fungi, notices of British, 17.

Geological Society, proceedings of

the, 256.

Giard, A., on the Orthonectida, 181 ;

on some monstrosities of Astera-

canthion rubens, 259.

Gill, Dr. T., on a new species of

Chimeera, 183.

Glceosporium, new species of, 26.

Gnophos, new species of, 235.

Gonitis, new species of, 203.

Gonophora, new species of, 42, 77.

Gorilla, on a new, 422.

Gortyna, new species of, 83.

Graphiphora, new species of, 164.

Giinther, Dr. A., on a collection of

Japanese sea-fishes, 485.

Hadena, new species of, 195, 234.

Haliphysema, observations on the

genus, with description of several

apparently allied forms, 265, 424.

Halticinze, new genus and species of,

312.

Harpodon, new species of, 487.

Heliophyllum, on the minute struc-

ture of the genus, 44.

Heliothis, new species of, 199, 234.

Hemiptera, new species of hetero-

pterous, 365.

Hermonassa, new species of, 164.

Herring, on races of, observed in the

sound, 295.

Hesperidz, new, 340.

Hewitson, W. C., on new species of

Hesperidz, 340.

Hierodula, new species of, 146.

Hincks, Rey. T., on the genus Rete-

pora, with descriptions of new

species, 353.

Hipparchia, new species of, 227.

Homceosoma, new species of, 236,

Hoporina, new species of, 168.

Hutton, Prof. F. W., on the struc-

ture of Peripatus novee-zealandie,

204; on the number of cervical

vertebree in Dinornis, 407.

Hyalonema Smithii, observations on,

129,

Hybernia, new species of, 443,

Hydnum, new species of, 24.

497

Hydractiniidee, on new species of

recent and fossil, 298.

Hydrecia, new species of, 232.

Hydroida, studies on the, 239, 322.

Hydrozoa, on the circumpolar dis-

tribution of certain, 189.

Hygrophorus, new British species of,

Hyperammina, description of the new

genus, 455.

Hyphasis, new species of, 312.

Hypochroma, new species of, 398,

Hypopyra, new species of, 292.

Jodis, new species of, 399.

Kent, W. S., on Haeckel’s group of

the Physemaria, and on the affinity

of the sponges, 1.

Lactarius, new species of, 22.

Lagena, new species of, 434.

Larentia, new species of, 444.

Legend, E. L., new species of birds,

374,

Legge, Capt. W. V., on a new Scops

Owl from Ceylon, 174.

Leidy, Prof., on the feeding of Dina-

meeba, 260.

Lepidoptera, new, 77, 161, 192, 227,

87, 340, 392, 440.

Leptoscyphus, new species of, 329.

Lestrigonus, new species of, 411.

Lethia, new species of, 108.

Leucania, new species of, 80.

Lichtenstein, M., on the metamor-

phosis of the Cantharis, 103.

Limulus, on the habits of young,

185.

Linthia, new species of, 67.

Linyphia, new species of, 117.

Lithophane, new species of, 198.

Lituola, new species of, 433.

Lobophora, new species of, 446.

Lockington, W. N., on some new

Alphei, with a synopsis of the

North-American species, 465.

Lomaspilis, new species of, 442,

Lozogramma, new species of, 406,

Lygranoa, characters of the new

genus, 447.

Macaria, new species of, 405.

Mamestra, new species of, 233,

Mantide, new, 143.

Marsh, O. C., on a new species of

Ceratodus from the Jurassic, 184.

Marsipella, characters of the new

genus, 281,

Marsupial, on a new, from Australia,

103.

498

Melanippe, new species of, 448.

Melanthia, new species of, 447.

Meldola, R., on evolution, 155.

Mello, Rev. J. M., on the bone-caves

of Creswell Crags, 256.

Mereschkowsky, C., on Wagnerella,

70; on the Hydroida, 239, 3822,

421,

Merulius, new species of, 23.

Mesites, on the zoological affinities of

the genus, 493.

Mesogona, new species of, 169.

Metrarga, characters of the new

genus, 370.

Miana, new species of, 84.

Micardia, characters of the new genus,

81.

Micrzeschus, new species of, 402.

Microvelia, new species of, 374.

Miers, E. J., on the Plagusiinze, 147.

Millepora alcicornis, on the identity

in structure of, with Stromatopora,

302.

Milne-Edwards, A., on the zoological

affinities of the genus Mesites, 493.

Moore, F., on new species of Lepi-

doptera, 227.

Mormo, new species of, 289.

Moseley, H. N., on a new species of

Land-Planarian, 237.

Miiller, Dr. F., on the Nauplius stage

of prawns, 481.

Mugil, new species of, 486.

Myelois, new species of, 236.

Mythimna, new species of, 79.

Nabis, new species of, 373.

Neenia, new species of, 290.

Neptis, new species of, 481.

Newberry, Mr., on Dinichthys, 350.

Nicholson, Prof. H. A., on the minute

structure of Heliophyllum and

Crepidophyllum, 44; on the genus

Palzacis, and the species occurring

in British Carboniferous rocks,

206.

Niphonissa, new species of, 394.

Niphreea, characters of the new

genus, 40.

Norman, Rey. A. M., on Selaginop-

sis, and on the circumpolar dis-

tribution of certain Hydrozoa, 189 ;

on the genus Haliphysema, with

description of several forms appa-

rently allied to it, 265, 424; on

the architectural achievements of

little masons, Annelidan(?) and

Rhizopodan, 284.

INDEX.

Nyctipao, new species of, 291;

Nysius, new species of, 367.

Obelia flabellata, on the reproduction

of, 251. -

Ochria, new species of, 83.

Ochropleura, new species of, 166.

(Edionychis, new species of, 316.

Oorhiza, description of the new genus,

325.

Ophiothela, new species of, 463.

Ophiuride, on a remarkable new

form of, 468.

Ophiusa, new species of, 293.

Orthogonia, new species of, 288.

Orthonectida, on the, 181.

Orthosia, new species of, 167.

Owen, Prof., on the Solitaire, 87;

on a new Marsupiai from Austra-

lia, 103.

Oxicesta, new species of, 251.

Oyster, on the geographical distribu-

tion of the common, 185.

Pachyligia, new species of, 442.

Paleacis, on the genus, and the

species occurring in British Car-

boniferous rocks, 206.

Pericladium, note on, 421.

Perinzenia, new species of, 289.

Peripatus novee-zealandiz, on the

structure of, 204.

Phasmide, on a species of, appa-

rently possessing structural ar-

rangements both for aerial and

aquatic respiration, 101.

Philodromus, new species of, 122.

Phlogophora, new species of, 193.

Phyllocharis, new species of, 39.

Physemaria, observations on the

group, 1, 70.

Phytophagous beetles, on new genera

and species of, 38, 512. ;

Pityriasis gymnocephala, on the

young of, 37.

Plagusiine, revision of the, 147.

Plataplecta, new species of, 195.

Plesioneura, new species of, 340.

Pleuronectes, on the young stages

of, 419.

Plusia, new species of, 201.

Polycystina of the North-Polar Ex-

pedition, on the, 425.

Polyommatus, new

229.

Polyserias, description of the new

genus, 303, 421.

Porothelium, new species of, 23.

Porphyrio, new species of, 98.

species of,

INDEX.

Prawns, on the Nauplius stage of,

481.

Pterygospidea, new species of, 344.

Ptilophora, new species of, 231.

Ptilopus, new species of, 349.

Pulvillus, new species of, 137.

Purisiphonia Clarkei, observations on,

376.

Pyrausta, new species of, 235.

Radinacra, new species of, 161.

Raphia, new species of, 193.

Raphidhistia, new species of, 140.

Rhizopoda of the Salt Lake of Sza-

mosfalva, on the, 423; on the Re-

ticularian and Radiolarian, of the

North-Polar Expedition, 1875-76,

425,

Rhizopodan masons, on the archi-

tectural achievements of, 284.

Reclada, characters of the new genus,

370.

Remigia, new species of, 295.

Renaut, J., on the dorsal chord in

Amphioxus, 492.

Retepora, observations on the genus,

with descriptions of new species,

353.

Salda, new species of, 373.

Scedopla, new species of, 201.

Schneider, Prof., on the structure of

Amphioxus lanceolatus, 262.

Scops, new species of, 174.

Scudder, S. H.,on sexual dimorphism

in butterflies, 184,

Sebastes, new species of, 485.

Selaginopsis, notes on, 189, 421.

Selenis, new species of, 294.

Selidosema, new species of, 406.

Semiophora, new species of, 166.

Sertularella, new species of, 330.

Sertularia, new species of, 331.

Shrews, on the migrations and meta-

morphoses of the tapeworms of

the, 258.

Silex, on the replacement of, by

calcite, 134, 412, 417.

Smith, E. A., on a new species of

Spatangide, 67; on a remarkable

new form of Ophiuride, 463.

Solitaire, on the, 87.

Sollas, W.J., on two new and remark-

able species of Cliona, 54.

Spelotis, new species of, 164, 233.

Spheria, new species of, 50.

Spiders, notes on British, with de-

sciptions of new, 105.

Sponges, on the affinity of the, 1;

499

new, 79, 279; on new, from the

Carboniferous of the S.W. of

Scotland, 128; on the position of

the sponge-spicule in the, 170; on

calcareous, in the Devonian Lime-

stone, 412.

Squamulina scopula, on the nature

of, 1, 170, 267.

Stebbing, Rev. T. R. R., on sessile-

eyed Crustaceans, 31.

Sternotomis cornutor, on the locality

and synonyms of, 424.

Stilbum, new species of, 27.

Stimpsonia chelifera, observations

on, 34,

Syrichthus, new species of, 346.

bee new species of, 166,

Tapeworms of the shrews, on the

migrations and metamorphoses of

the, 258.

Technitella, characters of the new

genus, 279.

Tephrosia, new species of, 397.

Thalassodes, new species of, 399.

Thalera, new species of, 399.

Thera, new species of, 236.

Thiopsyche, characters of the new

genus, 393.

Thysanochilus, new species of, 404.

Toxocampa, new species of, 290,

Trichobasis, new species of, 26.

Triphenopsis, characters of the new

genus, 163.

Turbellaria, on a new class of ani-

mals parasitic on, 181; of the deep

fauna of the Lake of Geneva, on

the origin and distribution of, 490.

Turdus, new species of, 374.

Urapteryx, new species of, 392.

Vanessa, new species of, 227.

Vernet, H., on a new genus of Ostra-

code Crustacean, 352.

Villot, A., on the migrations and

metamorphoses of the tapeworms

of the shrews, 258.

Wachsmuth, C., on the structure of

aleeozoic Crinoids, 379, 453.

agnerella, description of the new

genus, 70,

Waterhouse, C. O., on the locality

and synonyms of Sternotomis cor-

nutor, 424; on a new species of

Dryops, 491.

White, Dr. F. B., on new species of

heteropterous Hemiptera, 365.

Winther, G., on the geographical